2009 July

Patricia was tortured by her daughter’s addiction

Every week four or five teenagers go missing in the east London borough of Hackney because of drugs-related problems.  The London Inside Out team meets one mother whose desperate measures to keep her daughter off crack cocaine put her at odds with the law.

Look about an average 16-year-old’s room and you might expect to find posters, discarded clothes and CDs.  But in Natalie’s room there are also four small holes – a reminder of the steel plate her mother Patricia used to chain her to the wall to keep her off crack cocaine.

Patricia was driven to the desperate measures after her daughter started dabbling in the highly addictive drug when she was 14.  Natalie started staying out all night and became aggressive. Eventually she ran away for five weeks.

‘Horrendous’

Patricia was tortured by the thought of what was happening to her daughter and when Natalie came home she was determined to stop her running away again.

“The images were just horrendous,” Patricia told London’s Inside Out team.  “When she turned up I was elated, but horrified.  “I was elated to see she was alive and that my child was back home, but horrified because she did not look like my child anymore.

“Her face was drawn in, she had no flesh in her cheeks, they were actually hollow and sucked in.”

‘Angry’

Desperate to keep her daughter off drugs, Patricia locked Natalie in her room and chained her feet to the wall.   Crack is easy to buy in many areas.   She was later arrested for false imprisonment.

“It was the final straw to me to try to save my daughter from going back to the drugs or having that feeling that my daughter could end up murdered,” said Patricia.   Natalie says she is now glad that her mother was prepared to go to such extremes.   She told Inside Out: “I felt angry, but I knew it was for the best.   ” Even then I knew that she was doing it to help me and it has helped me in the long run.”

Squats

Natalie is currently living with her sister in south London, to keep her away from Hackney’s drugs scene.  But Patricia can not rest until her daughter is able to make a permanent move away from the borough.

She has even been re-tracing Natalie’s footsteps, visiting Hackney’s squats and crack houses, to keep track of her daughter’s movements.  “As long as we remain in the borough of Hackney, there’s more than a 99% chance that my daughter will go back to the drugs,” said Patricia.

“I just think we need to come clean away from the area where it all started, in Hackney – it would be good to get right out of the borough.”

 

Source: BBC Inside Out Sunday, 27 October, 2002
 

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

Commentary By Judy Shepps Battle, 14th Oct. 2004

Rob Devine. This name is probably unfamiliar to you, unless you happened to read a South Jersey newspaper last Sept. 8; or if, perhaps, you are a parent or student at Triton Regional High School in Runnemede, N.J.

If so, then you know that 17-year-old Rob died of cardiac arrest while trying to get high by inhaling fumes from a commercial air-freshener canister. This fatal response, known technically as “sudden sniffing-death syndrome,” is the very real risk one takes when “huffing” or abusing inhalants.

Does the name Andrew R. Sandy ring a bell? This Maryland middle-school student’s fume-of-choice was Freon, gathered from the heating and cooling system of his family home. He died at age 13; he’d reportedly been huffing Freon since age seven.

How about honor-roll and three-sport athlete Jessica Manley, age 14, from Decatur, Ind.? She reportedly wanted to be a writer or veterinarian when she grew up, but one incident of deliberately huffing bathroom air freshener ended those dreams. Jessica was among a growing number of girls using inhalants; since 1991, in fact, federal studies have shown that more girls than boys are huffing to get high.

Overall, the number of young people experimenting with inhalants continues to grow yearly. More than 2.6 million youths, aged 12 to 17, report having used inhalants at least once in their lifetime. That is just about one of every 10 kids in this age group.

The hard facts are that the abuse of inhalants by 8th-graders has risen 18 percent in the past two years, while increasing 44 percent among 6th-graders in the same time period. Sadly, the latest reports indicate that the number of children seeing such abuse as “risky behavior” is decreasing.

Simply put, more kids are likely to huff. And more young people are likely to die.

Huffing is a form of inhalant abuse in which fumes or vapors are inhaled through the mouth to get a quick high. Researchers have found significant huffing as early as fourth grade and deaths from this practice in kids as young as 10. For 12- and 13-year-old children, inhalants head the list of most commonly abused substances.

“Huffable” substances — typewriter correction fluid, paint solvent, air freshener, cooking sprays and deodorants — are legal, cheap, easily available, and difficult to detect when used. Some kids paint their fingernails with correction fluid instead of nail polish and then sniff. Others pour solvents on their shirtsleeves and discreetly huff.

Sound like a harmless activity? Not so. Sniffing highly concentrated amounts of solvents or aerosols can produce heart failure and death within moments. There is no way a user can gauge how much substance enters the body.

Any incident of huffing is a fatality waiting to happen.

The best parallel for this type of substance abuse is anesthesia. Huffing slows down body functions and provides a slight stimulation at low amounts, a loss of inhibition at higher amounts, and loss of consciousness as dosage continues to increase.

Initially, the user may experience nausea, fatigue, bad breath, coughing, nosebleeds, a loss of appetite, and shaky coordination. Heart and breathing rates may decrease and judgment may become impaired. Coma, brain damage, and cardiac arrhythmia also are potential dangers.

The credibility barrier regarding the danger of huffing must be hurdled. Parents are reluctant to see their otherwise goal-oriented and achieving children as potential chemical abusers, yet huffing is attractive to a wide variety of youth, regardless of their grade-point average.

Similarly, many kids believe in their own immortality, and do not associate inhaling the contents of a spray can with instant death.

Both these beliefs need to be challenged.

It is not enough to include inhalant abuse as a chapter in a drug-prevention or health-education class. We need to use the media — music, TV, movies, billboards — to present to the entire community the painful and potentially permanent affects of huffing common household substances.

Retailers must also be educated regarding underage purchase of these products. Sales of multiple cans of air fresheners and other huffable products need to be regarded with the same level of concern as many retailers now show for minors purchasing cigarettes.

As with the more commonly abused chemical substances, such as alcohol, marijuana, and cigarettes, we need to talk with our kids — early and often — about the dangers of huffing.

It is time to devise and implement effective anti-inhalant abuse strategies on a community level so that Rob Devine, Andrew R. Sandy and Jessica Manley may remain among the last tragic deaths from huffing.

Judy Shepps Battle is a New Jersey resident, addictions specialist, consultant, and freelance writer. She can be reached by e-mail at writeaction@aol.com. Additional information on this topic is available from the National Inhalant Prevention Coalition website, www.inhalants.org.

‘Huffing’ is an American term for what is known in the UK as VSA – Volatile Solvent Abuse. Young People who ‘sniff’ to get high use a variety of substances such as glue, Tippex, most kind of products that come in aerosol cans such as hair spray or oven cleaner. The epidemic of sniffing did not ‘go away’ in the early 90s – it just stopped being front page news. Parents need to remain vigilant and to ensure that their children understand the very real risks of potential fatalities from sniffing. NDPA

 

Source: PRWeb Jan 31st 2006

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

The first step in a drive to make free drug testing kits available to all UK schools and parents is now under way.

A UK supplier of home testing kits, Preventx, are giving thousands of their products to schools across the country to help tackle the growing numbers of drug abuse among children.

Schools are allowed to test pupils with parents’ consent if they have been suspected of taking and selling drugs, and in 2004, Prime Minister Tony Blair gave his backing to heads who decide to introduce testing measures.

Preventx director, Michelle Hart said: “This is the first of what we hope to be many schemes that we are involved with that will help tackle school drug issues.

“We supply a high percentage of our testing kits to public schools, but due to budget constraints, state schools sometimes cannot afford them. The government has to realise that something should be done to an already escalating problem.

“We intend on supplying not only to schools but to parents also, so they can ease their own minds in the privacy of their own home. If children know they could be tested, it gives them an excuse to say ‘no’ to drugs.”

In January 2005, a random drug testing programme was introduced at the Abbey School in Faversham, Kent. Head teacher, Peter Walker said since introducing the testing programme, GCSE pass rates had increased and the school felt a lot safer environment.

Public Health Minister, Melanie Johnson said: “It’s vital that we make it easier for young teenagers to get tested for drugs. By offering this service in convenient locations such as in schools or in homes, it will make it easier to detect and prevent.”

An 11-year-old schoolgirl from Glasgow was rushed into hospital on Wednesday after collapsing in school from smoking heroin. Teachers believed she had accidentally taken the drug but left them astonished when she admitted to have been smoking it regularly for the last two months.

Source: PRWeb Jan 31st 2006

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

A Colorado women diagnosed with lung cancer has produced a documentary about her battle with the disease and the impact on her family, in hopes of dissuading young people from smoking Susan DeWitt, 39, a former smoker, was diagnosed with Stage 4 lung cancer in January 2004. A few months later, she ran across some teenagers smoking in a mall parking lot and asked them if there was anything she could say to them to get them to quit. When she suggested a film about what it would be like to watch a parent die of cancer, the teens stopped joking and agreed that it might be persuasive.

Encouraged, DeWitt asked her teenage children to begin filming her own struggles with cancer. That battle so far has included a failed surgery to remove a tumor, and the detection of small tumors that had spread to her brain. The video documents the private concerns of DeWitt’s children as well as landmarks like the day they helped shave their mother’s head.

“My mom watched me graduate from high school. It’s the greatest feeling watching them sit in the stands, cheering me on when they called my name to get my diploma,” said DeWitt’s son, Cody, 19. “And I want her there when I graduate college and I go out in the real world. But more importantly, most of all, I want my younger sisters to have a mom waiting for them after they get their diploma, helping them through all the hard times that they’re going to have.”

Cody says in the documentary, “Through My Children’s Eyes,” that he had previously smoked with high-school friends but had not done so since his mother’s diagnosis. The DeWitt’s goal is to have the video played at every high school and junior high in Colorado.

About 80 percent of people diagnosed with Stage 4 lung cancer are dead within five years. DeWitt’s cancer is currently considered stable.

“They always say that the hardest thing for a parent to do is bury your child,” Cody said. “But the hardest thing for a kid to do is watch your parents die. Slowly. It’s unbelievable and it’s just horrible.”

To contact the Susan L. DeWitt Foundation for Extended Breath, e-mail susandewitt@aol.com.

Source: ABC News reported Jan. 10.06

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

WASHINGTON, Nov. 28 /PRNewswire/ — Each day, more than 9,000 new driver’s licenses are issued to 16 and 17 year olds nationwide, the very same age group that is at greatest risk for marijuana use, and a 2005 survey reveals that these teens say that cars are the second most popular place for smoking marijuana. The Office of National Drug Control Policy (ONDCP) is partnering with driving schools and other leading health, safety and youth-serving organizations to warn parents of the prevalence and dangers of drugged driving and to provide information to help teens “Steer Clear of Pot.”

More than 2.9 million driving-age teens reported lifetime use of marijuana, and last year more than 750,000 16 and 17 year olds reported driving under the influence of illicit drugs. According to the 2004-2005 PRIDE Surveys, when asked where they use, approximately one in seven (14%) high school seniors cited “in a car,” making cars the second most popular location after at “a friend’s house” (20.4%).

“Parents need to realize that drugged driving is nearly as common today among teens as alcohol-impaired driving,” said John P. Walters, Director, National Drug Control Policy. “Marijuana impairs many of the skills required for safe driving, such as concentration, coordination, perception and reaction time, and these effects can last up to 24 hours after smoking the drug.   It is critical that parents know the dangers associated with drugged driving and are vigilant in monitoring their teen drivers, especially young, less experienced drivers.”

Monitoring the Future data shows that approximately one in six (15%) teens reported driving under the influence of marijuana, a number nearly equivalent to those who reported driving under the influence of alcohol (16%). A recent study from a large shock trauma unit found that 19 percent of automobile crash victims under age 18 tested positive for marijuana.

“Getting a driver’s license is a milestone in a teen’s life that goes beyond the road to symbolize independence and freedom,” said Thomas “Buddy” Gleaton, Ed.D., President, PRIDE Surveys. “In the more than 20 years that PRIDE Surveys has been tracking teen drug use, teens consistently report engaging in risky behaviors in cars. Parents need to keep a watchful eye to be effective in reversing these trends.”

ONDCP’s National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign is providing parents and teens with information about the risks of drugged driving through a renewed “Steer Clear of Pot” initiative. The Media Campaign will underscore the harmful effects of teen marijuana use and drugged driving through the promotion of free materials, including a “New Drivers Kit” for teens and parents, available with other new content on the Media Campaign’s Web site for parents, http://www.TheAntiDrug.com .

In addition, “Steer Clear of Pot” partners will distribute drugged driving and marijuana prevention materials to driver’s education teachers, teens, and parents nationwide:

— The American College of Emergency Physicians will inform its nationwide membership base of 15,000 in 49 chapters of “Steer Clear of Pot” resources through its newsletter and Web site;

— The Driving School Association of the Americas will include information about the initiative in its magazine, The Dual News, which is distributed to 8,000 professional driving schools and 50,000 driving school educators, and will promote available resources on the organization’s Web site;

— The Emergency Nurses Association will inform its 28,000 members about available resources through its monthly newsletter; and

— GEICO, the fifth-largest private passenger auto insurer in the United States, has incorporated the Media Campaign’s messages into its existing “Can I Borrow the Car?” teen driving and safety materials and is providing co-branded versions of those materials through the Campaign’s “New Drivers Kit.” The company continues to distribute co-branded “Steer Clear of Pot” materials and promote the Media Campaign’s resources to its 5.5 million policyholders and 22,000 GEICO associates.


“Driver’s education and behind-the-wheel training are at the foundation for developing safe driving skills,” said Bradley Huspek, President, Driving School Association of the Americas. “Parents and driving instructors play a critical role in educating teens about being responsible drivers and steering clear from drugs.”

Experts say parental supervision and setting clear rules are associated with less risky teen behavior. A recent SADD/Liberty Mutual Group report found that nearly 60 percent of teens who drive say their parents have the most influence on their driving, followed by 27 percent who say their friends are most influential. Parents can take action and help their teen “steer clear of pot” with simple steps such as:

— checking the car for signs of drug paraphernalia;

— setting limits on driving in risky conditions;

— knowing where their teen is going and what route they intend to drive; and

— reinforcing safe driving practices by driving together.


Since its inception in 1998, the National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign has conducted outreach to millions of parents, teens and communities to reduce and prevent teen drug use. Counting on an unprecedented blend of public and private partnerships, non-profit community service organizations, volunteerism, and youth-to-youth communications, the Campaign is designed to reach Americans of diverse backgrounds with effective anti-drug messages.

For more information on the ONDCP National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign, visit http://www.MediaCampaign.org .

SOURCE The Office of National Drug Control Policy Web Site: http://www.TheAntiDrug.com http://www.MediaCampaign.org

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

Geraldine Silverman,Chairman
Millburn Municipal Alliance for Drug Awareness
NJ Federation for Drug Free Communities
Life Member of the New Jersey PTA’s
23 Audubon Court
Short Hills, NJ 07078-1812 1-973-376-8927

July 18,2005


Ms. Anna Weselak, President, National PTA
541 North Fairbanks Court, Suite 1300
Chicago, Illinois 60611-3396

Dear President Weselak:

I am writing to you as Chairman of the Millburn Municipal Alliance, an officer of the New Jersey Federation for Drug Free Communities, a Life Member of the New Jersey State PTA, and a local, state and nationally recognized figure in the field of prevention.

In the May, 1981 issue of PTA Today, Virginia Sparling, then President of the National PTA wrote, “As we review the activities of PTA members in their fight to protect their children from destruction by drugs, marijuana in particular, we see the PTA’s Human Network – a network of people who care about children and have a common commitment to promote the well-being of children in the home, school and community – functioning at its highest potential.”

The New Jersey PTA’s have upheld all these goals and has been recognized as a leader in legislation on “21” laws, drug paraphernalia laws and seat belts laws. We also pride ourselves for seeing our New Jersey PTA President, Manya Ungar, rise to become the National PTA President in the mid 1980’s, furthering all our goals for all the nation’s children.

The National, State and Local PTA’s have always been dedicated to inform parents, teachers and students as to the dangers of drug use and to oppose the sale of illegal drugs and drug paraphernalia. By uniting with one voice, one consistent “no use” message regarding children, we were successful in dramatically reducing illicit drug use by our children from 1981 to 1992 as documented by the studies and reports from the National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA), PRIDE and the annual Michigan Survey done on youth and drugs.1

What changed? We began to see a swing upwards by adolescents using illicit drugs, from 1992 to 2000. There were several reasons among which was the Clinton’s Administration downgrading the Drug Czar’s staff to a mere skeleton, the glamorization of illicit drug use by Hollywood and MTV, an explosion of teen age pregnancies, more single parent homes, more working parents and above all a well financed pro-drug legalization organization came into being, today known as the Drug Policy Alliance which promotes the philosophy that drug use by youth is inevitable and can best be remedied with “harm reduction” programs and attitudes.

As a drug prevention specialist with 27 years of experience, I can state for a fact that drug use is not inevitable. To even suggest that our children can take drugs responsibly without becoming addicted, flies in the face of the reality that no one knows who will or who will not become addicted.

I am very concerned to learn that the National PTA, for the past two years has had Marsha Rosenbaum, a ranking leader in the Drug Policy Alliance, an active proponent of drug legalization and the “harm reduction” philosophy, conduct workshops on “Teens and Drugs.” By having her as a speaker, National PTA has acknowledged her philosophy of “responsible use,” and has set many of us back in our efforts to promote a “no use message.”

I firmly believe that the majority of State PTA’s still believes that our youth have the right to grow up free from drugs and that we must all accept responsibility for making that goal a reality. With every parent, every teacher and every student who is reached, the PTA’s will have moved one step closer to achieving the goal of eradicating drug use among our children. Hopefully, in the future, the National PTA will reconsider having people like Marsha Rosenbaum from the DPA or other pro-legalization organizations, conduct workshops at your annual convention. We need National PTA to once again rejoin the state and local PTA’s in “one voice, one message, no use.”

Sincerely,

Geraldine Silverman, Chairman Millburn Municipal Alliance, NJ Fed. for Drug Free Communities and Life Member NJ State PTA

1. The use of all drugs by all ages was reduced in the USA by over 60% between 1979 and 1990 – due mainly to the work of over 8,000 parent groups which spoke out loudly and clearly against ‘responsible use’ drug education programmes.

The NDPA would respectfully suggest to all parents who read this section of our website to visit their local schools and ask to see which drug education materials are being used in the classrooms and to request that so-called harm reduction policies (another term for ‘responsible use’) are abandoned and replaced with genuine drug prevention messages. It is not inevitable or normal for young people to do drugs and the majority of our youth remain drug-free, it is therefore imperative that schools ‘drug education and prevention’ materials s do not give covert acceptance of drug use messages in the classrooms. Please contact the NDPA for further information on drug education.

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

The Scottish Drug Misuse Database statistics said the majority of drug users questioned in the region had started injecting under the age of 20.

The figures – for individuals who had injected in the past month – cover the year up to March 2005.

South of Scotland SNP MSP Alasdair Morgan called it “very alarming”.

National concern was raised about the issue when an 11-year-old girl in Glasgow was taken to hospital when she collapsed in school after smoking heroin.

Agencies in Dumfries and Galloway said it was a problem which needed to be faced on a day-to-day basis.

“This has got to be tackled constantly, not just when there are headlines about it,” said Raymond Carvill of Stranraer Against Drugs.

He also raised concerns about the collapse of a drugs information scheme piloted in local primary schools which he said was a great success.

Lead officer for substance misuse for Dumfries and Galloway Council and NHS, Jim Parker, said they were still looking at rolling that project out across the region.

“There are a number of areas we want to develop at the moment,” he confirmed.

“It is utilising the funding we have got against the priorities we have got.”

Mr Morgan has called for serious and sustained investment to tackle the issue.

“These numbers represent an extremely small proportion of those under 19,” he said.

“It is very worrying, however, that any proportion of our young people have so few prospects in their lives that they have turned to the hardest of drugs.”

Source: BBC News Feb.07 2006

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

First I’m going to tell you a little about me and my family. My name is Jeff. I am a Police Officer for a city in the USA which is known nationwide for its crime rate. We have a lot of gangs and drugs. At one point we were # 2 in the nation in homicides per capita. I also have a police dog named Thor. He was certified in drugs and general duty. He retired at 3 years old because he was shot in the line of duty. He lives with us now and I still train with him because he likes it. I always liked the fact that there was no way to bring drugs into my house. Thor wouldn’t allow it. He would tell on you. The reason I say this is so you understand that I know about drugs. I have taught in schools about drugs. My wife asks all our kids at least once a week if they used any drugs. Makes them promise they wont.

I like building computers occasionally and started building a new one in February 2005. I also was working on some of my older computers. They were full of dust so on one of my trips to the computer store I bought a 3 pack of DUST OFF. Dust Off is a can of compressed air to blow dust off a computer. A few weeks later when I went to use one of them they were all used. I talked to my kids and my two sons both said they had used them on their computer and messing around with them. I yelled at them for wasting the 10 dollars I paid for them. On February 28 I went back to the computer store. They didn’t have the 3 pack which I had bought on sale so I bought a single jumbo can of Dust Off. I went home and set it down beside my computer.

On March 1st, I left for work at 10 PM. Just before midnight my wife went down and kissed Kyle goodnight. At 5.30 am the next morning Kathy went downstairs to wake Kyle up for school, before she left for work. He was propped up in bed with his legs crossed and his head leaning over. She called to him a few times to get up. He didn’t move. He would sometimes tease her like this and pretend he fell back asleep. He was never easy to get up. She went in and shook his arm. He fell over. He was pale white and had the straw from the Dust Off can coming out of his mouth. He had the new can of Dust Off in his hands. Kyle was dead.

I am a police officer and I had never heard of this. My wife is a nurse and she had never heard of this. We later found out from the coroner, after the autopsy, that only the propellant from the can of Dust off was in his system. No other drugs. Kyle had died between midnight and 1 AM

I found out that using Dust Off is being done mostly by kids ages 9 through 15. They even have a name for it. It’s called dusting. A take off from the Dust Off name. It gives them a slight high for about 10 seconds. It makes them dizzy. A boy who lives down the street from us showed Kyle how to do this about a month before. Kyle showed his best friend. Told him it was cool and it couldn’t hurt you. It’s just compressed air. It can’t hurt you. His best friend said no.

Kyle was wrong. It’s not just compressed air. It also contains a propellant called R2. It’s a refrigerant like what is used in your refrigerator. It is a heavy gas. Heavier than air. When you inhale it, it fills your lungs and keeps the good air, with oxygen, out. That’s why you feel dizzy, buzzed. It decreases the oxygen to your brain, to your heart. Kyle was right. It can’t hurt you. IT KILLS YOU. The horrible part about this is there is no warning. There is no level that kills you. It’s not cumulative or an overdose; it can just go randomly, terribly wrong. Roll the dice and if your number comes up you die. IT’S NOT AN OVERDOSE. It’s Russian Roulette. You don’t die later. Or not feel good and say I’ve had too much. You usually die as your breathing it in. If not you die within 2 seconds of finishing “the hit.” That’s why the straw was still in Kyle’s mouth when he died. Why his eyes were still open.

The experts want to call this huffing. The kids don’t believe its huffing. As adults we tend to lump many things together. But it doesn’t fit here. And that’s why its more accepted. There is no chemical reaction. no strong odour. It doesn’t follow the huffing signals. Kyle complained a few days before he died of his tongue hurting. It probably did. The propellant causes frostbite. If I had only known.

Its easy to say hey, its my life and I’ll do what I want. But it isn’t. Others are always affected. This has forever changed our family’s life. I have a hole in my heart and soul that can never be fixed. The pain is so immense I can’t describe it. There’s nowhere to run from it. I cry all the time and I don’t ever cry. I do what I’m supposed to do but I don’t really care. My kids are messed up. One won’t talk about it. The other will only sleep in our room at night. And my wife, I can’t even describe how bad she is taking this. I thought we were safe because of Thor. I thought we were safe because we knew about drugs and talked to our kids about them.

After Kyle died another story came out. A Probation Officer went to the school system next to ours to speak with a student. While there he found a student using Dust Off in the bathroom. This student told him about another student who also had some in his locker. This is a rather affluent school system. They will tell you they don’t have a drug problem there. They don’t even have a DARE or Plus program there. So rather than tell everyone about this “new” way of getting high they found, they hid it. The probation officer told the media after Kyle’s death and they, the school, then admitted to it. I know that if they would have told the media and I had heard, it wouldn’t have been in my house.

We need to get this out of our homes and school computer labs. Using Dust Off isn’t new and some “professionals” do know about. It just isn’t talked about much, except by the kids. They all seem to know about it.

April 2nd was 1 month since Kyle died. April 5th would have been his 15th birthday. And every weekday I catch myself sitting on the living room couch at 2:30 in the afternoon and waiting to see him get off the bus. I know Kyle is in heaven but I can’t help but wonder if I died and went to Hell.

—————-
This Officer is asking for everyone who receives this email to forward it to everyone in their address book, even Law Enforcement Officers.

In the 1980s there was a lot of media coverage about VSA – volatile substance abuse (‘glue sniffing’). Then increased cannabis use and crack hit the headlines – making people believe ‘sniffing’ – or ‘huffing’ as they call it in the USA – had gone away. Sadly, this dangerous practice is still very much around. NDPA print this article in our Parents page because we want you all to know how aware parents need to be. If it is possible to use non-aerosol products in your home (hair sprays, cleaners, polishes etc.) it may be wiser to use the alternatives.

Source: Drugwatch International email

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

50 primary pupils ‘are heroin addicts’

JONATHAN LESSWARE AND LAURA ROBERTS

Key points

 


Key quote
“You can get drugs everywhere, but questions should be asked. Why put a methadone clinic next to a shopping centre? It is only going to attract drug users to the area.” – POLLOK TAXI DRIVER

Story in full UP TO 50 children of primary school age in Glasgow are regularly using heroin, it was claimed last night.

The shocking figure was revealed as it emerged that an 11-year-old girl had collapsed at a primary school in the city last week after smoking heroin. Yesterday, community leaders, health workers and politicians said the young girl’s case highlighted the need to tackle the drugs problem at an even younger age.

The girl, who has not been identified, was admitted to Glasgow’s Royal Hospital for Sick Children at Yorkhill on Wednesday, where she was reported to have shown severe withdrawal symptoms.

She remained in hospital last night and has been enrolled on an addiction treatment programme, one of the youngest ever to do so in the UK.

The girl admitted to social workers that she bought £10 bags of the class-A drug outside a shopping centre in Pollok, in the south of the city. She told doctors she had been smoking heroin for more than two months. Strathclyde Police and Glasgow City Council have launched separate investigations.

Last night, Stewart Stevenson, the Scottish National Party’s deputy justice spokesman, claimed that charities battling Scotland’s rampant drug problem had told him they were dealing with dozens of children of a similar age taking heroin. He said the youngsters were more likely to smoke the drug, a practice known as “chasing the dragon”, than inject it.

Of the 11-year-old girl, he said: “Unfortunately, she’s far from alone in that there are several dozen identified heroin addicts at primary school age in the Glasgow area. I understand there are probably as many as 50 primary school addicts in Glasgow. The Executive have spent practically nothing on training teachers in primary and early secondary to deal with this … I talk to a lot of people working with drug users and this is what I have been told.”

Gaille McCann, a Glasgow councillor who helped to set up Mothers Against Drugs after Allan Harper, 13, died from a heroin overdose in 1998, agreed that the latest case was not an isolated incident.

She said: “This is the harsh reality of the drug problem today, and it must not just become a seven-day story but instead act as a wake-up call to us all, particularly the policymakers in their ivory towers.”

However, Alistair Ramsay, the director of Scotland Against Drugs (SAD), warned against using anecdotal evidence to gauge the scale of the pre-teenage heroin problem.

He said SAD had trained thousands of teachers and school heads on how to deal with the effects of child or parental drug users.

Mr Ramsay said: “Thankfully, incidents like this are very rare, but when they occur they are truly shocking. Parents should not overreact, but if they know their child well they will spot changes in behaviour very quickly, and this will help with an early identification of a problem.”

Last year, experts at the University of Glasgow found that children as young as ten have experimented with heroin and cocaine. The researchers found that children aged between ten and 12 north of the Border were twice as likely to take drugs as their English counterparts.

Last night, the deputy justice minister, Hugh Henry, said: “Everyone is shocked when they hear about such a young person’s life being put at risk.

“This story gives further reinforcement, if any were needed, that we must keep up our broad approach to tackling drug abuse in society.”

Yesterday, residents in Pollok said they were shocked but not surprised at the case. Marguerita O’Neill, a community health worker, said: “I know there are drugs in every scheme, but this is horrifying. She was only 11 – it terrifies the life out of me.”

Neil Williams, a taxi driver, said: “You can get drugs everywhere, but questions should be asked. Why put a methadone clinic next to a shopping centre? It is only going to attract drug users to the area.”

The Labour MP for Glasgow South West, Ian Davidson, said the girl’s plight showed the importance of “sweeping up” low-level drug-dealing in the community, as well as the high-profile drug cartels.

He said: “Clearly, it’s a great worry to find that any primary school child is using hard drugs.

“We need to identify whether this is a particular issue to this family or, more worryingly, if this is the tip of the iceberg in terms of this sort of drug use among classmates.”

In a statement, Glasgow City Council said: “An 11-year-old child was admitted to hospital on an emergency basis last Wednesday with what appeared to heroin intoxication.

“We are monitoring the situation, and the ongoing case discussion will continue on Monday.”

Source: The Scotsman; 30 Jan 2006

Back To Parents | Home

Filed under: Parents :

 

COLUMBUS – Since scientific literature shows the use of marijuana to be a major risk factor in the development of addiction and drug use among school children, law enforcement officials are concerned over a new marketing ploy.

“They package this stuff just like it is something a kid can buy off the shelf,” said Columbus Police chief Clare May. “When I look at it, I see candy bar, something I would want to buy if I were a child.”

May was referring to a bag of evidence containing four “candy bars” recently confiscated from a driver during routine checkpoint stop by U.S. Customs and Border Protection on Highway 11, between the village of Columbus and the port of entry. The driver, Jose Antonio Avila, of North Hollywood, California, told the officials he needed the “candy” for medicinal purposes. Avila was cited for possession of less than one ounce of marijuana.

“This stuff is marijuana mixed with chocolate and packaged in the same colors and logo as Kit-Kat or Reese’s peanut butter cups are only it reads ‘Kief-Kat’ and ‘Reefers,'” May said. “There is a warning on a couple of the candy bars that it is for medicinal use only but the warnings are so small and vague that a child wouldn’t read them. “I can see there this is a problem where an illegal business takes advantage of a legal business under the ruse that this is medical marijuana. “I do not agree with the way this stuff is packaged and sold because it is attractive to children,” he said. Under New Mexico law, marijuana is an illegal drug. And even if it was for medicinal purposes, as Avila claimed, he had no prescription on him at the time he was stopped by the authorities. Because the citation is for possession of less than one ounce of marijuana, Columbus Municipal Court will process the case.

Source: By Sylvia Brenner Deming Headlight. 16 May 2005

Back To Parents | Home

 

Filed under: Parents :

Extract from the Annual Report of the International Narcotics Control Board Focuses on Relationship between Drug Abuse, Crime and Violence at Community Level

 VIENNA, 27 February (UN Information Service) — The impact of drug abuse on crime and violence at the community level is the main focus of the 2003 Annual Report of the Vienna-based International Narcotics Control Board (INCB), released on 3 March 2004.

The macro level political and security implications of transnational organized crime syndicates dealing in drugs has been recognized by the international community for some time. In this year’s Report, the Vienna-based INCB — an independent quasi-judicial body of thirteen experts monitoring compliance with the international drug control treaties — also urges Governments to give special attention to micro-trafficking — i.e. community level drug abuse and related crime.

“At this level, drug abuse is often linked with antisocial behaviour such as delinquency, crime, and violence and has negative consequences for individuals, families, neighbourhoods and communities that need to be addressed by the international community and individual governments,” INCB President Philip O. Emafo points out.

While the Board clarifies that most crime related to drug abuse is non-violent and petty, it stresses that the impact of illicit drugs, crime and violence is highly damaging to local communities at the micro-social level.

“The very fabric of society is challenged by the continued presence in communities of drug-related crime. Communities that suffer disproportionate levels of violent drug-related crime also suffer from higher levels of other criminality and the disruption to civil society associated with it,” says the Board.

The relationship between violence and illicit drug abuse is highly complex and has to be examined keeping a range of factors in mind. The Report maintains that a demonstrable link to violence and crime exists in that some drug addicts resort to violence either to fund their habits or indeed as a result of the psycho-pharmacological impact of some illicit drugs. However, based on controlled laboratory-based experiments, INCB stresses that it is very difficult and misleading to suggest a direct causal link between violence and illicit drug ingestion. This link has to be examined with reference to culturally and socially situated factors, that, in turn, influence an individual’s behaviour.

The INCB calls on Governments to implement comprehensive, community-based drug demand reduction policies, paying special attention to drug abuse prevention in combination with a range of social, economic and law enforcement measures. These should include: creating a local environment that is not conducive to drug dealing and micro-trafficking; supporting local efforts at employment and licit income generation; educational programmes targeting socially marginalized groups; and integrated as well as targeted intervention work with risk groups. The Board also notes that programmes need to be sustainable in the long term in order to generate the desired impact.

Harm Reduction

Harm reduction policies have previously been addressed by the Board. In the current Annual Report the Board once again “calls on Governments which intend to include “harm reduction” measures into their demand reduction strategy, to carefully analyse the overall impact of such measures. These may sometimes be positive for an individual or for a local community while having far-reaching negative consequences at the national and international levels.”

In reaction to specific harm reduction measures such as the establishment and/or operation of drug injection rooms the Board points out that “the operation of such facilities remains a source of grave concern” and “reiterates that they violate the provisions of the international drug control conventions.”

Regional Highlights

Despite the armed intervention and the political change in Afghanistan and the fight against terror, illicit cultivation of and trafficking in opiates has grown which may result in more political instability. Opium cultivation in Afghanistan continued on an even larger scale in 2003.

As a result of two years of bumper crops of opium poppy in Afghanistan, it is expected that heroin trafficking along the Balkan route and through Eastern Europe will continue to increase — this may also lead to the reversal of the declining trends in the abuse of heroin in Western Europe.

More widespread cultivation and abuse of cannabis in Europe combined with a relaxation of controls might counteract required efforts to eradicate illicit cultivation and combat trafficking in Europe and elsewhere in the world.

For further information please contact: INCB Tel: 00-43-1-26060-4163 Web address: www.incb.org

 

Source: ????????? 

 

Back To Drug Poltics | Home

Filed under: Europe :
Ibiza’s famed dance-till-dawn club nights will be lacking many of the drugs that fuel them this summer: the Spanish police say they have made their biggest seizure of the stuff that makes ecstasy. The raw material for at least 200,000 ecstasy tablets was found on its way from Holland as the island filled up for the summer with clubbers from Britain and the rest of Europe. Nine kilos of almost pure MDMA, the basic chemical ingredient of ecstasy tablets, was found being prepared for shipment in a house on the outskirts of Madrid. Nine people from Spain, Italy, the Netherlands, Puerto Rico and the US were arrested during Operation Garage, the police said. “We have saved the lives of many young people,” Antonio Camacho, the secretary of state for security, said.

The operation was preceded by the arrest in the past two weeks of a dozen drug dealers who were selling ecstasy in the San Antonio district of Ibiza, the haunt of many young British visitors, where the police had recently installed closed circuit television cameras. Ibiza clubs such as Privilege, which is described as “the world’s biggest club”, Amnesia, Es Paradis, Eden, Pacha and Space attract thousands of young British clubbers during the summer, often with special nights hosted by British DJs or clubs. Drugs are formally banned by most clubs but ecstasy is considered to be the Ibiza clubber’s favourite drug.

The island’s drug scene has been linked to the March 11 train bombings in Madrid, which killed 191 people. The mainly Moroccan Islamist bombers who blew up four morning commuter trains financed their operations and the purchase of dynamite with drug money. One of them was Jamal Ahmidan, a known drug trafficker who blew himself up, together with a police officer and six other radical Islamists, when they were surrounded by the police a few weeks after the attacks. Ahmidan had travelled to Ibiza the week before the attacks, apparently to close a trafficking deal. One of his contacts in Ibiza was recently arrested by the judge investigating the Madrid bombings.

The British magazine Mixmag, which is devoted to clubs and dance, reported in a recent edition that Ibiza was coming under pressure from underworld gangs. “If you take drugs in Ibiza this summer, you deserve to know what your money is paying for,” the article said. “More club tourists means more gangsters to supply their drugs, more drug-related crime and more clubbers going to jail than ever.”

Several years ago the British vice-consul on the island, Michael Birkett, resigned, claiming he was increasingly being forced to deal with British “degenerates”. An estimated half a million British people visit Ibiza every year. Some of the local drug trade is reported to be in the hands of British groups.

Source Giles Tremlett The Guardian Friday July 30, 2004 

Back To Drug Poltics | Home
Filed under: Europe :

By TOBY STERLING Associated Press Writer

AMSTERDAM, Netherlands (AP) — A broad coalition of political parties unveiled a pilot program Friday to regulate marijuana farming on the model of tobacco, which opponents say would be tantamount to legalizing growing the drug.

Under the test program, to be conducted in the southern city of Maastricht, existing health and safety standards will apply to growers, but they would no longer be the target of police raids or prosecution.

Coffee shops permitted to sell marijuana would be required to provide consumers with information about the health hazards of smoking – similar to tobacco companies – and the chemical content of the marijuana. The shops would also have to say where they bought the marijuana they sell, which proponents say will deter growers from operating dangerous underground greenhouses.

Under current Dutch policy, marijuana and hashish are illegal but police don’t prosecute for possession of less than one ounce. Authorities also look the other way regarding the open sale of cannabis in designated coffee shops.

But commercial growing is outlawed, giving rise to a contradictory system in which shop owners have no legal way to purchase their best-selling product.

Dutch mayors along the country’s borders have lobbied hardest for the change, which they say would make it more difficult for German and Belgian drug tourists to smuggle large quantities of marijuana out of the country.

“It will be possible to trace where cannabis is grown, and where it’s sold,” said conservative lawmaker Frans Weekers.

Opponents, however, have argued that regulation could open the door to outright legalization of marijuana in a country that already has some of Europe’s most lenient drug laws. Prime Minister Jan-Peter Balkenende and his ruling Christian Democrat Party said regulating marijuana cultivation would set the Netherlands another step apart from the rest of the continent.

“This experiment would be at odds with Dutch law, and there’s a legal problem” internationally, as well, Balkenende said.

The Justice Ministry has ordered an investigation into whether the plan would violate international law. The findings are expected within several days.

Weekers said, however, that the current policy is “leading to increasing problems.”

“There comes a moment when you say, ‘Now we have to take the next step,'” he said. “If this pilot program works, and we can show to everyone that it’s an improvement, then you have a good argument to take to foreign governments.”

The coalition of parties gave Balkenende until Dec. 14 to implement the testing program, after which lawmakers said they will introduce a bill in parliament to do it. They said about two-thirds of parliament members support the plan.

Source: TheTownTalk.online. Dec. 2005
Back To Drug Poltics | Home
Filed under: Europe :

Aboard the Mississippi Boat, moored off the banks of the Maas river, the management has suddenly come over publicity-shy. “No interviews in here,” says a burly, long-haired man propping up the bar, “we don’t have anything to do with journalists.”

One of Holland’s most popular, cannabis-selling coffee shops, the Mississippi Boat serves several hundred thousand people each year making its stream of customers the envy of many a Dutch retailer.

But Holland’s famously liberal drug policy is about to confront its biggest challenge in decades. The council in Maastricht plans to make it technically illegal to serve foreigners in the city’s 16 coffee shops, a move that could drive many of them out of business. If the policy is upheld in the courts, it could, eventually, be extended nationwide. The idea is just one of three controversial – and contradictory – schemes designed to curb the social problems produced by Holland’s unique drug laws. Their fate is likely to determine the future of Dutch policy towards cannabis.

The fact that these experiments are taking place in this, historic, city is no coincidence. Within easy driving distance of Belgium, Germany and France, Maastricht has proved a magnet for smokers eager to take advantage of liberal laws. In their wake a trade in illicit cannabis and harder drugs has grown up, accompanied by a rise in crime.

Spurred on by complaints from police and residents, the Mayor of Maastricht, Geerd Leers, has decided that enough is enough. If Mr Leers gets his way, a new by-law will soon require all those who visit coffee shops to show identity cards proving that they are residents. Initially, the law will be enforced only in one coffee shop which will, if necessary, take the case all the way to the European Court of Justice. But, if it loses, foreigners could be banned for all 750 coffee shops in the Netherlands.

In Maastricht’s sprawling modern, municipal, headquarters they have been debating for years how to deal with the special effects of the country’s drugs policy on a border city. Though they still support the principle of legalising limited use of cannabis, they believe bold steps are needed to tackle its unwelcome consequences here.

Ramona Horbach, one of the Mayor’s two drug advisers, argues: “People who visit Maastricht are responsible for a lot of problems, from parking problems to urinating in the streets. There is intimidation, there are efforts to persuade people to buy [hard] drugs. They are trying to sell cocaine, ecstasy or heroin.” Most of the coffee shops are to be found in the relatively small, historic, centre of the city, concentrating the problems in one, compact and highly visible zone.

But a small number are in other neighbourhoods, provoking local opposition.

Ms Horbach’s colleague, Jasperina de Jonge, adds: “Many tourists come to try to buy soft drugs here in the Netherlands that you cannot buy in Germany, France or Belgium.

“Too many people are visiting. Sometimes there is rowdy behaviour. Some of the coffee shops are in residential areas and people no longer like living there.” Parents of young children feel particularly threatened by the combination of rising traffic and a reduced sense of security.

Naturally it was not meant to be like this; the whole point of coffee shops was to bring the use of soft drugs out of the sphere of influence of the criminal gangs.

Though several nations have relaxed their laws on soft drugs, the Netherlands leads the way in regulating their sale. Coffee shops are licensed and no alcohol can be sold or consumed in them. According to the government’s own guide, the policy is a success. “Use of cannabis in the Netherlands is comparable to that in other European countries, whereas in the United States it is substantially higher,” it says.
But this has been achieved through a contradictory law. Technically all drugs are illegal in the Netherlands though coffee shops are permitted to sell a maximum of five grammes of cannabis without facing prosecution.

While it is an offence to produce, possess, sell, import or export hard drugs or cannabis, it is not illegal to use drugs.

That means it is legal for a customer to buy five grammes of cannabis in a coffee shop, but it is illegal for the shop to acquire the stock to sell.

While the law has decriminalised those who use cannabis in small quantities it has not done the same for those who grow it or buy it into their coffee shops.

Maastricht is in the front line because of the massive demand from German, Belgian and French day-trippers. According to the police, the south Limburg region of the Netherlands has an estimated 1.2 million drugs tourists every year.

Peter Tans, head of communications for the Maastricht police, says that, of the estimated 21,000 people charged with crimes this year in south Limburg, 4,500 will be foreigners.

To supply the demand at coffee shops – inflated by foreigners – Maastricht now supports a massive, subterranean cannabis-producing industry.

In the city this year 78kg of cannabis has been seized and 43,000 adult cannabis plants destroyed. Much of this had been farmed out to low-income households under the supervision of gangs. Police raid homes around the city when alerted by the power companies of electricity surges of the type required to run the lamps for cannabis plants (usually power supplies are diverted illegally). According to police calculations, a producer can make €97,640 (£67,000) profit a year by cultivating 18sqm of cannabis plants.

More alarmingly, the police fear that this subculture is making Maastricht fertile territory for gangs dealing in hard drugs. Between January and October 2005, police in the city made 193 arrests in 23 raids, seizing 10kg of heroin, 1.5kg of cocaine, 12,000 ecstasy tablets, €171,000 in cash and 11 firearms.

Mr Tans says: “It can’t go on like it has been for several years now. We hope that [the city’s] experiment will be successful because the problems here give us a huge workload. It means 100,000 man-hours every year if 100 policemen are needed just to deal with the drugs problem.” Prompted by mounting complaints, the city authorities, which have extensive powers under Dutch law, have taken several initiatives. The first was to clamp down gradually on the number of coffee shops.

Each one must be licensed and Maastricht has refused new approvals so that, when owners leave or die, their businesses close. In the early to mid-1990s Maastricht boasted 30 coffee shops; it now has just over half that number.

But with that failing to solve the problem, the city is adopting two, radically different, policies in addition to the effort to stop foreigners being served in coffee shops. The Mayor is leading a push to shift some of the coffee shops out of the city centre. Mr Leers wants to create three drive-in centres on main roads away from the heart of Maastricht and from residential areas to service the demand from drug tourists.

Nicknamed “weed boulevard” or “McDope”, this project directly contradicts the policy of barring foreigners from coffee shops because it is designed to serve that non-Dutch demand but keep it away from the city centre.

Nevertheless, the authorities know their residents-only policy on cannabis will not be enforced for at least two years because of the time the legal test case will take.

Moreover they want to start straight away on the drive-in plans in case the bar on non-residents proves to be against European law preventing discrimination against EU citizens.

Finally, and most controversially, the city would like to see a liberal measure adopted to regulate the so-called “back door” coffee shop trade.

Maastricht has offered to host an experiment in cultivating cannabis under strict supervision to supply local coffee shops and put criminal gangs out of business. Though the logic of their policies suggests that the Netherlands should allow legal production of cannabis, ministers have always shrunk from such a step, knowing it would provoke an international storm. Ms De Jonge says: “The problem of the back door has to be solved.

Local government recognises that fact but national government has to see that that is the next step.”

For the coffee shop-owners the city’s policies present an unprecedented challenge. Marc Josemans, who runs the Easy Going coffee shop, accepts that there are difficulties in the city, but says that “the only people who bring problems are the criminals who are being attracted by the stream of cannabis clients on our streets.” Mr Josemans, who is president of the society of official coffee shops in Maastricht, is a fierce opponent of the city’s efforts to bar foreigners and has agreed to be prosecuted so he can contest the case.

He wants to work with the city council to agree a plan for moving some of the coffee shops out of the city. However he points out that persuading owners to relocate is impossible if their shops might later be banned from serving non-residents.

“As long as this pilot [project to ban foreigners] remains in the air it is very hard to persuade people to spread out of the city,” he says, “we hope the city will postpone it by two or three years.” One area of consensus is over the city’s desire to cultivate cannabis legally. Because of the tough police line, “the good growers stop growing”, says Mr Josemans, “they say it is too dangerous for them. Organised crime has big nurseries where they grow lower quality for higher prices. The idealism of our growers has gone. The guys we used to work with for 25 years are drawing back more and more.”

But while local government and the coffee shops agree that this is at the root of their problems, power to permit such an experiment rests in The Hague. Maastricht’s plan to legalise the “backdoor” looks likely to be blocked by national government. And that will leave the city trying to manage the consequences of a flawed drug law with two, contradictory, policies. It will start creating coffee shops for foreigners outside the city centre, while putting in place a law that could ban them from buying.

Just a few yards from the Mississippi Boat at Smoky’s floating coffee shop, half a dozen people are sitting, smoking, sipping soft drinks and listening to loud rock music. Cannabis is on sale for between €4.50 and €15 a gram and there is little support for any crackdown on the trade.

Most of the allegations against the coffee shops are false, says one client, adding: “You’ve heard about bar fights but no one’s ever heard of a coffee shop fight”.

Smoky’s sells less than 8 per cent to clients from Maastricht and places like this know the new law could drive them out of business. The man behind the bar has one word for the city’s plans: “stupid”.

Source: http://news.independent.co.uk/europe/article335069.ece

Back To International News | Home
Filed under: Europe :

Drug abuse is increasing across the EU, with cocaine and ecstasy becoming the drug of choice for new users, an EU report shows.

“Europe remains a major market for stimulant drugs, and indicators suggest that the trend in amphetamine, ecstasy and cocaine use continues to be upwards,” the 2005 annual study from the European Monitoring Centre for Drugs and Drug Addiction (EMCDDA) states.

The report is based on data provided by the 25 EU countries, plus Bulgaria, Romania, Turkey and Norway.

Cocaine is popular with around 9 million Europeans – or 3% of all adults – having used the drug.

Between 3 and 3.5 million are likely to have taken cocaine in the last year, while around 1.5 million are so-called current users, having used it in the last month, the report shows.

Spain, a smugglers’ gateway to the European cocaine market, and Great Britain show the highest numbers of cocaine users with roughly 4% of adult citizens having tried it in the last year

“It is time to realize that cocaine has turned into a simple street drug.

It is no longer a substance for the elite,” said Wolfgang Goetz, director of the EMCDDA while presenting the report in the European Parliament on Thursday (24 November).

Amphetamine-based drug ecstasy ranked second among drugs of choice in several of the participating countries.

Consumption was particularly high in Britain, Spain, France and the Czech Republic.

Joints outclass other drugs

Cannabis is by far the most common drug among the EU’s 460 million citizens, however.

More than 62 million Europeans have smoked cannabis at one point or another in their lives, with consumption growing dramatically since the mid 1990s.

An average of 12% of Europeans used cannabis in 2004, while the rate was 23% among Czechs, 19% among the French and British and 17% among Spaniards, the report said.

Drug-intolerant countries Sweden and Greece showed the lowest numbers in Europe on cannabis use.

Source: – By Teresa Küchler EUOBSERVER / BRUSSELS 25.11.2005

[ Back to International News| Home ]

Filed under: Europe :

A group of politicians and drugs experts is making a new attempt at decriminalising cannabis in Switzerland.

Eighteen months after parliament threw out a similar plan the committee has collected enough signatures to force a nationwide vote on the issue.

“Our aim is to decriminalise cannabis consumption under strict rules, and encourage parliament to draft its own compromise solution,” parliamentarian Ursula Wyss told swissinfo.

She says it makes no sense to treat the estimated 500,000 regular or occasional pot smokers – from all walks of life – like criminals.

The proposal foresees setting age limits for cannabis consumers or a licensing system for shops selling psychoactive hemp.

The people’s initiative with more than 105,000 signatures was handed in to the federal authorities in Bern on Friday.

Wyss said it was not calling for the outright legalisation of the cannabis trade, which is prohibited under an international agreement.

Effective checks and controls of the trade were an essential element to be able to crack down on illegal dealers, Wyss added.

Young consumers

Wyss said it wasn’t possible to say whether a possible liberalisation would have an impact on the number of cannabis consumers.

But she is concerned about recent statistics which show that Switzerland has one of the highest rates of young pot consumers in Europe and that the drug increased in popularity in the 1990s.

“I think very restrictive rules have to be set to protect children and youth. It must be clear that the measures are enforced, for cannabis and alcohol alike.”

Wyss, a member of the centre-left Social Democratic Party, is confident that a broad alliance with the centre-right Radicals and Christian Democrats could clear the air for a viable political compromise.

In June 2004 the House of Representatives refused to follow the Senate in discussing proposed amendments to the law on narcotics.

The Swiss Institute for the Prevention of Alcohol and Drug Abuse has declined to comment on the details on the latest initiative, but it has come out in favour of decriminalising cannabis in principle.

“It also makes it easier to treat addicted pot smokers and the patients in turn don’t face major obstacles when they’re looking for help,” said spokeswoman Janine Messerli.

Hardline

Unimpressed by the overtures from other quarters, the rightwing Swiss People’s Party is standing by its hardline stance on drugs.

“We’re against liberalising cannabis. There is ample scientific proof gathered over the past 40 years to show that pot smoking is not conducive to your health,” said party spokesman Roman Jäggi.

He believes the attitude in society towards drugs has changed in the recent past and people are keen to see more discipline in place.

“Switzerland has been too liberal in its drugs policy. We welcome increased police efforts to close illegal hemp shops. But clearly more needs to be done to stop children as young as 12 smoking cannabis.”

Pioneer

It is likely to take more than two years before the initiative will come to a nationwide ballot.

If it were to win voters’ acceptance Switzerland would become the first country in the world to decriminalise the purchase, possession and consumption of cannabis.

Proponents hope that Switzerland, which is not a member of the European Union, would act as a model for other countries.

Switzerland became notorious for its liberal narcotics policy, notably the public drug scenes in the country’s major cities in the 1980s and 1990s.

In response the government implemented its four-pillar strategy of repression, prevention, therapy and harm reduction. swissinfo, Urs Geiser

Source: NZZ Online 14 Jan 2006


[ Back to International News| Home
]

Filed under: Europe :

Lausanne, June 12, 2006. The French-Swiss Anti-drug Association (Association romande contre Ia drogue, ARCD) vigorously protests at the scandalous interpretation of a study conducted by two Zurich researchers in connection with the evolution of heroin consumption. Contrary to what is misleadingly stated, the reduction in the number of heroin addicts is not due to the “liberal drug policy” applied in Switzerland; actually, the situation has not improved, but it is the narcotic products used that have changed. Less heroin but much more cocaine, such is the disturbing reality of the evolution of drug consumption, not forgetting the ravages of strongly dosed cannabis.

In 1991, the Platzspitz. the first large ‘open drug scene” in Zurich was about to be closed. Although the number of heroin addicts has actually dropped since then, as pointed out by Carlos Nordt and Rudolf Stohler in a study concerning the methadone and heroin substitution treatments administered in Zurich (The Lance, 2 June 2006), it has certainly not been thanks to a “liberal drug policy”. It is simply that the drug consumers switched their preference to cocaine and highly-dosed cannabis rather than heroin, considered a “looser” drug, with the damning results that we see today:

The ARCD would like to point out some facts concerning the prescription of heroin, which went from the testing stage (1994-1996) to that of a treatment claiming to be therapeutic (1999) and refunded by the health insurance companies (2002). To date. 2,903 drug addicts have gone through the heroin prescription programmes. Some of them (over 200?) have died. The sticking rate of participants in the programmes is barely 50 to 70% according to the duration of the treatment. It is the most marginalized. and hence those who constitute the prime target audience, who drop out of the programmes for lack of support. Of those who remain, rare are those who go for a therapy aimed at abstinence. The 2005 annual report of the Koda heroin prescription centre, in Bern. indicates that 3 drug addicts out of 195, last year. managed to detox. That means that 98% of the participants continue to consume opiates, often in combination with other illegal products. So this approach has contributed to maintaining their dependence.

The social costs related to the consumption oldrugs in Switzerland are evaluated at more than 4 billion francs a year. Over time, the costs of an abstinence-centred treatment appear much less than those of the substitution programmes. With heroin prescription, the taxpayers and persons insured with health insurance companies arc made to assume expenditure which could be avoided.

The ARCD is calling forthe introduction of a new policy to combat illicit drugs based on prevention worthy of the name, a reinforcement of the medical care services, with abstinence as the therapeutic goal. and an appropriate legal response to all infringements, with a firm and systematic repression of narcotic trafficking.

Contact: Claude Ruey, member of the Swiss Federal Parliament, phone 0041 31 311 64 16, e-mail: ciaudertmeva)arl.ch Jean-Philippe Chenaux, phone 0041 21 796 33 00, e-mail: jpçenaux@centrepatronal.ch

Filed under: Europe :

Canadian health officials are hoping that heroin addicts, freed from their daily pursuit of the next fix by a prescription-heroin plan, will find time to make positive changes in their lives.

The researcher will begin gathering applications for the program from addicts during the next few weeks. The experiment already is the talk of the streets in communities like Vancouver’s Downtown Eastside.

“They should have done this a long time ago,” said Debbie Woelke, a heroin user living in a single-room occupancy hotel in the city’s poorest neighbourhood. “Sometimes you need something just to relax and get your mind together, instead of always being in a state of panic. That’s what’s killing everyone down here. They have to do things they wouldn’t normally do.”

The prescription heroin trial will take place in Vancouver, Toronto, and Montreal. Researchers are looking to recruit 428 hard-core addicts, half of whom will receive daily doses of heroin for a year, and half of whom will get methadone.

“What if you could say to an addict, ‘For the next little while, you’re not going to have to get your drugs from Al Capone. You can get your drugs from Marcus Welby,’ ” said Dr. Martin Schechter, lead researcher on the project. “You don’t have to worry about this afternoon and this evening. And therefore, you don’t have to go and break in to cars or be a prostitute. You could actually come and talk to a counsellor … get some skills training.”

The experiment is unique in North America, although similar trials have been tried with some success in Europe. However, critics range from those concerned about lack of abstinence as a goal to those who say it is unfair to give addicts free heroin for a year and then cut them off. Overdoses also are a major ethical worry.

A spokesperson for U.S. drug czar John Walters called the trial an “inhumane medical experiment.

“What you’re doing is making it easier to be a heroin addict,” said policy analyst David Murray. “These people won’t get that much better in the long run. They will still be heroin addicts.”

But Vancouver Mayor Larry Campbell, a former coroner and narcotics officer, said current treatments don’t work for hard-core addicts. “The critical thing is to accept this as a medical condition,” he said. “The side effects of this medical condition is that it forces you to … do things that you would never do, be it work as a sex-trade worker, be a B and E [break-and-enter] artist or a purse snatcher. So if I can mitigate that by putting you on heroin, imagine the changes you could have.”

Source: Toronto Globe and Mail reported Jan. 31

Back To Drug Poltics | Home
Filed under: Canada :


CITY’S NEW “HARM REDUCTION STRATEGY” THREATENS NEIGHBOURHOODS AND ENABLES DRUG USE – BUT COUNCIL’S POISED TO BACK IT ANYWAY

BY SUE-ANN LEVY, TORONTO SUN

Of all the crackpot schemes to intoxicate City Hall’s leftist contingent, the Toronto Drug Strategy that comes before council this week rates top billing.

I suspect the fix is already in to approve the strategy’s 66 recommendations — which cost $300,000 to create — given Mayor David Miller’s recent habit of discounting opposition to his pet agendas.

(Susan Shepherd, the drug strategy’s project manager, is married to Bruce Scott, one of the mayor’s key aides. Asked whether this might present a potential conflict of interest, Scott said no.)

The drug strategy itself — led by Coun. Kyle Rae and produced by the board of health — was developed supposedly to better co-ordinate drug prevention, treatment and enforcement efforts between agencies, hospitals, addiction treatment facilities, school boards, the police and so on.

“There’s been no comprehensive strategy since crack arrived in Toronto in 1988,” Rae said last week.

To be fair, there are some good proposals in the strategy concerning education, treatment, enforcement and prevention. But they’re few and far between. The rest is heavily skewed towards trendy “harm reduction” schemes, more studies, committees, the need for more city staff and in my view, more reasons to keep the fuzzy-wuzzy enablers in the drug counselling industry thriving.

The strategy advocates distributing more city-funded “safer crack kits” and calls on officials to consider establishing a “safe injection site” modelled on the one opened in Vancouver a year ago. The public health protectors argue that “harm reduction” services — which encourage illegal drug users to continue to inject their poisons in a safe environment using clean equipment — lead to fewer overdoses and less open use of drugs on the streets.

I can’t fathom how the same health board that has banned smoking virtually everywhere in this city can brazenly promote and enable the use of illegal drugs. Do these do-gooders ever think about the harm their strategies could inflict on unsuspecting neighbourhoods?

I recently wrote about how a cache of used needles and “safer crack kit” paraphernalia was found in the Sumach-Shuter park, right across from a community centre and a school. That’s become a regular occurrence, I’m told.

Earlier this month, former Vancouver mayor Larry Campbell, a supporter of safe-injection sites, told Toronto’s executive committee it’s important not to get “hung up” on such facilities — they help police get drug users off the streets.

But a retired nurse from Toronto told me last week she’d just returned from Vancouver and was quite horrified by what she saw in the drug-plagued Downtown Eastside area, where the injection site is located. Asked where the 600-900 people who use the site daily get their drugs (mostly heroin and crack), she said: “The dealers hang around with impunity on the corner of Hastings and Main and the police don’t touch them.”

DANTE’S INFERNO

She described the neighbourhood alleys as a “true Dante’s inferno” with addicts desperately grasping on the ground for a few bits of lost powder. At the referral site for addicts wanting to use the safe-injection facility, she said staff told her they were trying to create an “oasis of calm. But it all made her think of a blindfolded donkey chained to a water wheel and walking in circles.

“It’s no form of treatment whatsoever …I kept thinking it was like making an inexorable death more bearable,” she said.

I wish councillors could see what this woman saw and not simply swallow the health board’s party line.

But on this issue, your city councillors seem drugged into submission.

Source:The Toronto Sun December 4, 2005 Sunday

Back To International News | Home
Filed under: Canada :

The Government is echoing alarmist reports of a cannabis and mental health crisis.

Abstinence or harm-minimisation? A clash of values is emerging, writes Bill Bush.

Police coming down hard to solve a health problem? This is just what the Commonwealth Government is calling for to improve mental health.

Even though the use of cannabis has declined by 37 per cent, the Prime Minister asked heads of Government at Friday’s COAG meeting to toughen their laws on the drug.

The signs are that this is the vanguard of steps to reverse Australia’s harm-minimisation drug policy in favour of one that puts a premium on abstinence and stronger law enforcement.

Other indicators of this shift are:

• Financial support for naltrexone implants that focus on abstinence combined with criticism of methadone maintenance therapy that focuses on stabilisation.

• A $600,000 grant over three years to Drug Free Australia to “advocate abstinence-based approaches to drug issues” while cutting the grant of the peak harm reduction focused Alcohol and Other Drugs Council to just one year.

• The enactment of harsh comprehensive Commonwealth criminal drug law overshadowing that of the states. It includes even minor possession offences under the label of serious drug crimes.

Since the Prime Minister vetoed the heroin trial in 1997, the rhetoric of his Government has been unfriendly to harm minimisation. He has said that he does not believe in it and his Government has played language games with the term.

Only last year the Commonwealth reaffirmed its commitment to “the principle of harm minimisation” in a further extension of the National Drug Strategy. This is defined so broadly that its three poorly integrated components of “supply reduction”, “demand reduction” and “harm reduction” allow governments much room to manoeuvre. Only the last component embodies the essence of harm-minimisation as it was originally conceived: “Strategies to reduce drug-related harm to individuals and communities.”

Nevertheless, the Commonwealth continued to support key aspects of harm-minimisation such as the provision of sterile syringes and methadone maintenance. This now seems to be changing.

For example, the Government is echoing alarmist media reports about a cannabis and mental health crisis.

Health Minister Tony Abbott and parliamentary secretary Chris Pyne have expressed alarm. Employment Minister Kevin Andrews wants to “explore its links with welfare dependence”. The PM has warned that “mental illness and homelessness was the price the nation was paying for ‘lax attitude’ towards cannabis”. “The time,” he says, “has arrived for us – legislators and parents – to get tougher.”

Source: Theage.com.au February 13, 2006

Back To International News | Home
Filed under: Australia :
Studies linking cannabis use to mental illnesses and addictive drugs such as heroin are compelling reasons for the State Government to revise its soft-on-drugs legislation, the AMA(WA) said today.

“The Government’s whole strategy on cannabis use has been based on misinformation,” said association President Dr Paul Skerritt.

“Law makers never understood the psychological damage done to young people who smoke the drug – and they never listened to doctors who warned cannabis was a pathway drug leading to heroin and more addictive drugs.

“Research is now proving these concerns are valid – and the Government should recognise the truth and change its drug laws accordingly.”

Dr Skerritt said Drug Action Week 2005, launched this week by the Alcohol and Other Dugs Council of Australia with Federal Government funding, was a good opportunity for Health Minister Jim McGinty to address a problem which would continue to grow worse under present State legislation.

“The Government is sending the wrong signal to young people who will ignore the health consequences of cannabis as long as the law implies it’s not such a big deal to be caught in possession of the drug,” he said.

“Yet world research shows that 80 per cent of long term psychiatric patients are regular cannabis users and 39 per cent of kids aged 14 and over have tried the drug.”

Dr Skerritt said it came as no surprise that research in Sweden confirmed that chronic periodic use of cannabis could interfered with brain development and that young people who smoked the drug were more likely to turn to heroin and other addictive drugs.

“Ironically, the WA Government is about to toughen up its road laws regarding motorists caught driving under the influence of drugs,” he said.

“But the message may not get through to young people if being in possession of cannabis only results in a slap on the wrist in many cases.”

Source: Australian Medical Association (WA), June 21, 2005 

Back To International News | Home
Filed under: Australia :
Group to study cannabis links to mental illness

Lax state laws on cannabis will come under renewed pressure after the federal Government addressed rising public concern by creating a top-level advisory group to tackle the drug problem.

Parliamentary secretary for health Christopher Pyne said yesterday five experts would be recruited to the new body, which would review current evidence on the links between cannabis and mental health problems, and identify what could be done.

Mr Pyne said the group – which he will chair – would also report on “what steps the commonwealth Government could take to change the direction of cannabis use”.

Many experts have told The Australian over the past two weeks that the evidence has now become overwhelming that cannabis causes not only psychotic illnesses such as schizophrenia, but also depression and anxiety disorders – particularly when smoked by young people whose brains are still developing.

“There’s a causal link between cannabis and mental health disorders, from recent reports, but there’s resistance from the state attorneys-general and others in the community, who insist in believing that cannabis is no more harmful than alcohol,” Mr Pyne said. He said that although state attorneys-general believed the laws should not be changed, “I feel the commonwealth needs expert advice to give us the weapons to change thinking on cannabis in Australia”.

South Australia and Western Australia, and both territories have removed criminal penalties for possession or use of minor amounts of cannabis.

Although still illegal, these offences now attract parking-offence style “fines” that do not bring a criminal record.

Experts understood to have been asked to join the group include Adelaide public health physician Robert Ali; director of the National Drug and Alcohol Research Council Richard Mattick; former NDARC director Wayne Hall; Professor of adolescent health at the University of Melbourne,  George Patton; and chief executive of the Ted Noffs Foundation Wesley Noffs.

Mr Pyne said the group would meet in Canberra before the end of this year.

While there are no national statistics for new cases of psychotic illnesses such as schizophrenia, figures last month from South Australia show a disturbing link between drug use and mental health problems – and a further association with criminality.

Forensic psychologist Craig Raeside reviewed more than 2000 people facing criminal charges and found more than 75 per cent used marijuana, and 58 per cent amphetamines.

 

Source:The Australian  Adam Cresswell Nov.9th 2005


[ Back to International News| Home
]

 


Filed under: Australia :

The Editor,
The Canberra Times.

Dear Sir,

Wodak’s letter (Canberra Times 24/03/06) confirms that methadone is more than a drug – its followers have raised it to virtually to the status of a religious cultic symbol. Wodak’s recitation is technically true but not the whole truth; his comments appear far-sighted, but are in reality myopic.

The Australian physician attending a conference of the world leading addiction scientists undergoes a professional culture shock far more severe than a mere “learning curve”. When the directors of the NIH openly state that they are worried about the dramatic shortcomings of methadone treatment to suppress the immune system and stimulate HIV infection, to inhibit cell growth and renewal; and straight out increases cell death rates; then not only must one’s thinking undergo a dramatic and radical paradigmatic shift, but the whole Australian style methadone eulogy starts to look as threadbare as the emperor’s new clothes! They are obviously worried sick about imminent class actions.

In his ode Wodak neglects to mention that methadone does everything BUT take people off drugs; rather it indefinitely extends and greatly intensifies addiction. What about the 590 Australian people 1997-2001 to whose deaths methadone contributed? What about the explosion in the use of many drugs which methadone fosters, or the rampant Hepatitis C infestation? What about the thousands of heroin dealers on methadone? What about the 90% male osteoporosis rates or appalling dental destruction? If Wodak is correct that methadone and buprenorphine, the modern “M&B”, have hitherto served us well then let them take their rightful place in history. But to suggest that because this is all medicine has been able to achieve up till now, the great quest to save our children and our streets from the ravages of drugs must be abandoned, is to miss the exciting scientific and technical advances with which leading journals are replete. We dare not surrender our freedoms either to agenda driven academics or the hippies of yesteryear.

(Dr.) Stuart Reece
39 Gladstone Rd.,
Highgate Hill,
QLD, 4101.
Ph.: 07 3844-4000.

.

Back To International News
| Home
Filed under: Australia :

In Brief

Motor vehicle crashes were the leading cause of death among young persons aged 16 to 20 in 2002.(Ref.1).   In that year, 6,327 persons aged 16 to 20 were involved in fatal crashes, representing a 10% increase since 1999. In addition, 29% of drivers aged 15 to 20 who were killed in motor vehicle crashes in 2002 had been drinking alcohol.(Ref.2) The National Survey on Drug Use and Health (NSDUH) asks persons aged 12 or older if they had driven a vehicle while under the influence of alcohol or illicit drugs in the past year (Ref.3) and if they had been arrested for driving under the influence (DUI).(Ref.4) The survey also asks about the use of alcohol and any illicit drugs in the past year and past month. Alcohol measures used in this report include any past month use, binge use, and heavy use. Binge alcohol use is defined as drinking five or more drinks on the same occasion (i.e., at the same time or within a couple of hours of each other) on at least 1 day in the past 30 days. Heavy alcohol use is defined as drinking five or more drinks on the same occasion on each of 5 or more days in the past 30 days; all heavy alcohol users also are binge alcohol users. NSDUH defines “illicit drugs” to include marijuana/hashish, cocaine (including crack), inhalants, hallucinogens, heroin, or prescription-type drugs used non-medically.

This report presents the prevalence of DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs, as well as the prevalence of being arrested for DUI among persons aged 16 to 20.5 To improve the reliability of estimates for population subgroups, all estimates presented in this report are annual averages based on combined data from the 2002 and 2003 NSDUH. However, the prevalence of DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs among persons aged 16 to 20 was lower in 2003 (20%) than in 2002 (22%).
Prevalence of Substance Use and DUI
In 2002 and 2003, an annual average of 44% of persons aged 16 to 20 had used alcohol in the past month, 30 % were binge alcohol users, and 10% were heavy alcohol users. Approximately 38% of this age group had used an illicit drug in the past year.

In 2002 and 2003, more than 4 million persons (21%) aged 16 to 20 reported DUI involving either alcohol or illicit drugs in the past year. In this age group, 17% reported past year DUI involving alcohol, 14 % reported DUI involving illicit drugs, and 8% reported DUI involving a combination of alcohol and illicit drugs used together.

Demographic Differences in DUI

Among persons aged 16 to 20, older persons had a higher reported prevalence of DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs than those who were younger. For example, persons aged 20 were nearly 3 times more likely to have driven under the influence than persons aged 16 (28 vs. 10%). Among all persons aged 16 to 20, males (24%) were more likely to report DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs than females (18%). Among racial/ethnic groups, whites (26%) and American Indians/Alaska Natives (28%) were more likely to report DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs than members of other racial/ethnic groups.

 In 2002 and 2003, approximately 25% of persons aged 16 to 20 who lived in the Midwest reported DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs in the past year compared with approximately 20% in the South and 19 % of persons in this age group in the Northeast and West.(Ref.6). The prevalence of DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs was  highest among persons who  lived  outside  of metropolitan  statistical areas  (MSAs)  

(25%), followed by persons who lived in small MSAs (23%) and persons who lived in large MSAs
(19%).(Ref.7).

 Prevalence of Being Arrested for DUI among Those Reporting DUI
Among the estimated 4.2 million persons aged 16 to 20 in 2002 and 2003 who reported DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs in the past year, approximately 4% (169,000 persons) indicated they had been arrested and booked for DUI involving alcohol or drugs in the past year.(Ref.8).  The percentage of this group who reported being arrested for DUI was higher among males than among females (6 vs. 2%).
End Notes
1. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Injury Prevention and Control. (2004, November 30). WISQARS leading causes of death reports, 1999 – 2002. Retrieved December 2, 2004, from http://webapp.cdc.gov/sasweb/ncipc/leadcaus10.html

2. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. (2003, August). Traffic safety facts 2002: Young drivers.  from http://www-nrd.nhtsa.dot.gov/pdf/nrd-30/NCSA/TSF2002/2002ydrfacts.pdf   Dec.2 2004

3. Respondents were asked, in three different questions, if during the past 12 months they had driven a vehicle while under the influence of (a) alcohol only, (b) illicit drugs only, or (c) a combination of alcohol and illicit drugs used together. Responses to these questions then were recoded to determine the prevalence of DUI involving (a) alcohol, (b) illicit drugs, (c) either alcohol or illicit drugs, or (d) both alcohol and illicit drugs.

4. Respondents were asked if during the past 12 months they had been arrested and booked for DUI involving alcohol or illicit drugs.

5. Persons aged 15 or younger were not included in these analyses because a substantial portion of persons aged 15 or younger are prohibited from driving by State laws.

6. The Midwest has 12 States: IL, IN, IA, KS, MI, MN, MO, NE, ND, OH, SD, and WI. The South has 17 States: AL, AR, DC, DE, FL, GA, KY, LA, MD, MS, NC, OK, SC, TN, TX, VA, and WV. The Northeast has 9 States: CT, MA, ME, NH, NJ, NY, PA, RI, and VT. And the West has 13 States: AK, AZ, CA, CO, HI, ID, MT, NM, NV, OR, UT, WA, and WY.

7. Large metropolitan areas have a population of 1 million or more. Small metropolitan areas have a population of fewer than 1 million. Non-metropolitan areas are outside metropolitan statistical areas (MSAs), as defined by the Office of Management and Budget. See the U.S. Bureau of the Census. (2003, June 12). About metropolitan and micropolitan statistical areas. Retrieved December 1, 2004, from http://www.census.gov/population/www/estimates/aboutmetro.html

8. This excludes an estimated 38,000 persons who reported they had been arrested and booked for DUI in the past year but indicated elsewhere that they had not driven under the influence of alcohol or drugs in the past year.

The National Survey on Drug Use and Health (NSDUH) is an annual survey sponsored by the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA). Prior to 2002, this survey was called the National Household Survey on Drug Abuse (NHSDA). The 2002 data are based on information obtained from 68,126 persons aged 12 or older, including 16,723 persons aged 16 to 20. The 2003 data are based on information obtained from 67,784 persons aged 12 or older, including 16,167 persons aged 16 to 20. The survey collects data by administering questionnaires to a representative sample of the population through face-to-face interviews at their place of residence.
The NSDUH Report is prepared by the Office of Applied Studies (OAS), SAMHSA, and by RTI International in Research Triangle Park, North Carolina. (RTI International is a trade name of Research Triangle Institute.)
Information and data for this issue are based on the following publications:
Office of Applied Studies. (2003). Results from the 2002 National Survey on Drug Use and Health: National findings (DHHS Publication No. SMA 03–3836, NSDUH Series H–22). Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration.

Office of Applied Studies. (2004). Results from the 2003 National Survey on Drug Use and Health: National findings (DHHS Publication No. SMA 04–3964, NSDUH Series H–25). Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration.

 

Source: The NSDUH Report (SAMHSA). http://www.oas.samhsa.gov Dec. 31,2004,
Filed under: Transport (Papers) :
Drugged Driving as Common as Alcohol-Impaired Driving Among Teens

Each day, more than 9,000 new driver’s licenses are issued to 16- and 17-year-olds nationwide, the very same age group that is at greatest risk for marijuana use, and a 2005 survey reveals that these teens say that cars are the second most popular place for smoking marijuana. The Office of National Drug Control Policy (ONDCP) is partnering with driving schools and other leading health, safety and youth-serving organizations to warn parents of the prevalence and dangers of drugged driving and to provide information to help teens “Steer Clear of Pot.”

More than 2.9 million driving-age teens reported lifetime use of marijuana, and last year more than 750,000 16- and 17-year-olds reported driving under the influence of illicit drugs. According to the 2004-2005 PRIDE Surveys, when asked where they use, approximately one in seven (14%) high school seniors cited “in a car,” making cars the second most popular location after at “a friend’s house” (20.4%).

“Parents need to realize that drugged driving is nearly as common today among teens as alcohol-impaired driving,” said John P. Walters, Director, National Drug Control Policy. “Marijuana impairs many of the skills required for safe driving, such as concentration, coordination, perception and reaction time, and these effects can last up to 24 hours after smoking the drug — It is critical that parents know the dangers associated with drugged driving and are vigilant in monitoring their teen drivers, especially young, less experienced drivers.”

Monitoring the Future data shows that approximately one in six (15%) teens reported driving under the influence of marijuana, a number nearly equivalent to those who reported driving under the influence of alcohol (16%). A recent study from a large shock trauma unit found that 19 percent of automobile crash victims under age 18 tested positive for marijuana.

“Getting a driver’s license is a milestone in a teen’s life that goes beyond the road to symbolize independence and freedom,” said Thomas “Buddy” Gleaton, Ed.D., President, PRIDE Surveys. “In the more than 20 years that PRIDE Surveys has been tracking teen drug use, teens consistently report engaging in risky behaviors in cars. Parents need to keep a watchful eye to be effective in reversing these trends.”

ONDCP’s National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign is providing parents and teens with information about the risks of drugged driving through a renewed “Steer Clear of Pot” initiative. The Media Campaign will underscore the harmful effects of teen marijuana use and drugged driving through the promotion of free materials, including a “New Drivers Kit” for teens and parents, available with other new content on the Media Campaign’s Web site for parents, http://www.TheAntiDrug.com .

In addition, “Steer Clear of Pot” partners will distribute drugged driving and marijuana prevention materials to driver’s education teachers, teens, and parents nationwide:

— The American College of Emergency Physicians will inform its nationwide membership base of 15,000 in 49 chapters of “Steer Clear of Pot” resources through its newsletter and Web site;

— The Driving School Association of the Americas will include information about the initiative in its magazine, The Dual News, which is distributed to 8,000 professional driving schools and 50,000 driving school educators, and will promote available resources on the organization’s Web site;

— The Emergency Nurses Association will inform its 28,000 members about available resources through its monthly newsletter; and

— GEICO, the fifth-largest private passenger auto insurer in the United States, has incorporated the Media Campaign’s messages into its existing “Can I Borrow the Car?” teen driving and safety materials and is providing co-branded versions of those materials through the Campaign’s “New Drivers Kit.” The company continues to distribute co-branded “Steer Clear of Pot” materials and promote the Media Campaign’s resources to its 5.5 million policyholders and 22,000 GEICO associates.

“Driver’s education and behind-the-wheel training are at the foundation for developing safe driving skills,” said Bradley Huspek, President, Driving School Association of the Americas. “Parents and driving instructors play a critical role in educating teens about being responsible drivers and steering clear from drugs.”

Experts say parental supervision and setting clear rules are associated with less risky teen behavior. A recent SADD/Liberty Mutual Group report found that nearly 60 percent of teens who drive say their parents have the most influence on their driving, followed by 27 percent who say their friends are most influential. Parents can take action and help their teen “steer clear of pot” with simple steps such as:

— checking the car for signs of drug paraphernalia;

— setting limits on driving in risky conditions;

— knowing where their teen is going and what route they intend to drive; and

— reinforcing safe driving practices by driving together.

Since its inception in 1998, the National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign has conducted outreach to millions of parents, teens and communities to reduce and prevent teen drug use. Counting on an unprecedented blend of public and private partnerships, non-profit community service organizations, volunteerism, and youth-to-youth communications, the Campaign is designed to reach Americans of diverse backgrounds with effective anti-drug messages.

For more information on the ONDCP National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign, visit

http://www.MediaCampaign.org

 

Source: WASHINGTON, /PRNewswire Nov. 28 .2005
Filed under: Transport (Papers) :
Background

The Road Safety Monitor, a national telephone survey conducted each year involving Canadian drivers indicates that drug impaired driving is seen as second only to alcohol impaired driving as a serious issue and that illicit drugs are seen as a more serious problem than prescription or over the counter drugs. Overall, 17.7%, or 3.7 million Canadian drivers report driving within two hours of using illicit, prescription or over the counter drugs.

Collisions remain a major cause of death and injury in Canada, and concerns about the role of cannabis in road safety in this country date back many years. Much less is known about the impact of cannabis on road safety than the impact of alcohol, in part because of the much greater difficulty involved in measuring the presence and amount of cannabinoids compared to alcohol. However, there is renewed interest in this issue stimulated in part by proposed legislative changes on the part of the Government of Canada to reduce substantially the penalties for possession of small amounts of cannabis.

Objectives

The purpose of this paper is to provide an overview of available research and evidence on the potential impact of cannabis on road safety in Canada focusing on two areas: 1) research on the prevalence of cannabis use in Canada; and 2) research on the prevalence of driving after cannabis use in Canada.

Prevalence of Cannabis Use in Canada

Little information is available on the prevalence of cannabis use in Canada prior to the 1960s. However, in that decade, cannabis use increased substantially. While a variety of possible sources of information on cannabis in the Canadian population have been used over the years, including such measures as amounts of the drug seized by police and the number of individuals prosecuted by the courts for cannabis offences, the most direct and the most accurate measures of the prevalence of cannabis use are those derived from surveys. Although cannabis is an illegal drug and there are concerns that survey responses may be influenced by its legal status, research demonstrates that respondents to anonymous surveys, where there are no adverse consequences involved, generally provide valid responses.

Smart and Fejer presented one of the very first estimates of the prevalence of cannabis use in a Canadian population, based on a survey of a representative sample of residents of Toronto conducted in 1971. They found that 12.2% of males and 5.5% of females had used cannabis at least once in the preceding year. The prevalence of use differed substantially by age group and gender. Among males, 41.5% of those aged 18-25, 20.8% of those aged 26-30, and 1.8% of those aged 31 and over had used cannabis in the preceding year. Among females, 20.0% of those aged 18-25, 6.3% of those aged 26-30, and 1.8% of those aged 31 and over had used cannabis in the previous year. These data clearly demonstrate that, by the end of the 1960’s, cannabis use had become very common among young people.

Ogborne and Smart reported on cannabis use in the general population of Canada aged 15 and over based on the National Alcohol and Other Drugs Survey conducted in 1994. This survey was the largest representative survey with information on cannabis use ever made in Canada, with a sample size of 12,155. Use of cannabis at that time was relatively uncommon, but not rare. Only 7.3% of respondents reported using cannabis in the preceding year, and 2.0% reported using it as often as once per week. However, nearly a third (29%) reported that they had used cannabis at least once in their lives. Substantial regional differences were observed, with the proportion reporting use at least once in the past year ranging from a low of 4.9% in Ontario to a high of 11.4% in British Columbia.

While these data provide a valuable perspective on the use of cannabis across Canada, unfortunately there is little information on other important issues, such as change in rates of use over time. However, in Ontario a series of surveys has been conducted over the past 20 years that allow a picture of current use and changes in use over time in that part of the country.

The Use of Cannabis in Ontario

Repeated cross-sectional surveys conducted in Ontario by the Centre for Addiction and Mental Health provide the most comprehensive picture of the use of cannabis and other drugs use in Canada. These surveys have been conducted among the student population and adult population since the late 1970s.

A summary of recent data on the use of cannabis and other drugs (any use in the past year) among students in grades 7 and 126, and among adults aged 18-29 (young adults), 40-49 (the middle-aged) and 65 and over (seniors) showed cannabis is the most widely used illicit substance. Nearly half of grade 12 students reporting cannabis use at least once in the past year. It is worth noting that by grade 12 most students will have reached the age when they will be eligible to drive. Use of cannabis drops with increasing age, however, and is used by less than 2% of seniors. Use of other illicit drugs is much less common than the use of cannabis, with highest levels occurring for Hallucinogens and Ecstasy among grade 12 students. Not surprisingly, alcohol is the most commonly used substance.

Trends in Cannabis Use Over Time

information is presented on the proportion of students in Grades 7, 9, 11 and 13 who report using cannabis and alcohol between 1977 and 20016. While cannabis is used by a smaller proportion of students than alcohol; it is still used by a substantial minority of students. There have been important changes in the use of cannabis over time. The general trend appears to have been one of reduced use of cannabis and alcohol from the late 1970’s to the early 1990’s. The proportion reporting use of cannabis declined from a peak of 31.7% in 1979 to 11.7% in 1991. However, since the mid-1990’s self-reported use of both substances has increased, with 28.6% reporting cannabis use in 2001. Data is presented since 1977 on the proportion of the adult population (age 18 and above) who report using cannabis, drinking alcohol, or using cocaine at least once in the preceding 12 months. Cannabis use has continued among a much smaller proportion of the adult population than among students. Alcohol is used by the large majority of the adult population, while the use of cocaine is reported by only a very small percentage. The trends among adults are not as clear as those among the student population. For example, the proportion reporting use of alcohol has been relatively consistent, with perhaps a slight increase to the early 1990s followed by a slight decrease. Among users of cannabis and cocaine, enduring trends over time cannot be ascertained.

Prevalence of Cannabis Use and Driving in Canada: Estimates from Survey Data

Survey data on the prevalence of driving under the influence of cannabis are available. In the first reported data from the general population in Canada, Jonah reported on the prevalence of driving after use of cannabis at least once in the preceding 12 months. The survey included 9943 persons aged 16-69, obtained through random digit dialing. Jonah found that the prevalence of DUIC varied with age. While the prevalence of DUIC was relatively low, it was higher in younger age groups. Jonah also observed that DUIC was significantly associated with a variety of other risk behaviours, such as driving after drinking, use of illicit drugs other than cannabis, and collision involvement.

Conclusions

The data presented here indicate that cannabis use is relatively common in Canada, particularly among young people. The prevalence of use appears to have increased substantially in the 1960s and ‘70s, while since then some fluctuations have occurred. Driving after cannabis use is less common, but among cannabis users it does appear to occur with some frequency. In particular, young cannabis users appear more likely to report DUIC. Among high school students, DUIC appears to occur as frequently, or more frequently, than driving after drinking. These data provide grounds for concern about this behaviour, particularly among younger drivers. Further research on the prevalence of DUIC in Canada, including differences between provinces, is needed.

 

Source: CAMH Population Studies eBulletin, May/June 2003, No. 20. Toronto:
Centre for Addiction and Mental Health.
Filed under: Transport (Papers) :

Frequently Asked Questions About Pot & Driving

Introduction

On November 21, 2005, the Canadian Public Health Association, with funding from Canada’s Drug Strategy, Health Canada, launched a Pot and Driving campaign (http://potanddriving.cpha.ca) to raise awareness among young Canadian drivers and passengers of the risks of cannabis-impaired driving. Campaign materials include:

 


1. Why a pot and driving focus?
What do we mean by ‘pot’?

We use the word ‘pot’ in our materials to refer to any drug derived from the cannabis plant, including marijuana (which is made from the leaves and buds), as well as hashish and hashish oil (made from plant resin). We chose this word because it is short and easy to say; more importantly we chose it because focus group participants were unanimous in saying that along with the word ‘weed’, ‘pot’ is the most common word used to refer to cannabis in both English and French Canada.
Canadians between the ages of 14 to 25 have one of the highest rates of pot use in the world. Many young Canadians who use pot see it as a mild, mainstream drug with no significant negative consequences. While most young drivers and passengers have little tolerance for alcohol-impaired driving, they commonly regard pot and driving as risk free.

Recent research on pot is showing that it can play an important role in road vehicle crashes, especially when combined with driver inexperience and difficult road conditions. Road accidents are often the result of a combination of factors and pot can be one of them.

Pot is the most popular drug used by Canadians 14 to 25 years-of-age, after alcohol and tobacco. Drug-use surveys indicate that the rate of driving under the influence of pot surpasses that of alcohol. Alcohol has been the subject of impaired-driving awareness efforts for several decades and tobacco is not a risk for driving. It is time to put the focus on pot.

2. How does cannabis affect driving ability?

Driving skills are affected in specific ways when a person has consumed a certain amount of pot. This impairment increases with the amount of THC (the compound that gives pot its high) a person has in his/her system. While drivers have been found to do certain things to adapt to their impairment, like slowing down, this attempt to compensate does not eliminate the risks of driving high.

It has long been established that pot affects tracking ability, meaning that drivers who are under the influence of a certain dose of THC have been found to have a harder time following their lane. Pot reduces a driver’s ability to perceive changes in the relative speed of other vehicles and to adjust his/her own speed accordingly.

Pot has been found to increase the reaction time needed to respond to an emergency decision-making task, such as adapting to changes in speed of the vehicle ahead or to the vehicle’s brake lights. A driver needs to notice something in order to respond to it and that has to do with the driver’s attention. Because pot disturbs concentration and short-term memory, a driver has a harder time being attentive to events and situations on the road that can have important consequences for road safety.

3. Who drives under the influence of pot?

What do we mean by ‘driving’?

When we use the phrase ‘driving a vehicle’ we are referring to the use of any kind of motor vehicle, including cars, trucks, motorbikes, ATVs, planes, motorboats and snowmobiles. We generally use the word ‘driving’ to imply the use of both on and off-road vehicles. We do not wish to suggest that off-road driving is less of a concern when it comes to drug use.

Several student surveys in Canada have found a high rate of pot use among students in high school, with the rate increasing with age/grade. Male students have a higher rate of use than female students. The likelihood that a person will drive high depends on how frequently they use pot. Daily pot users have the highest rate of driving high while occasional users have the lowest rate.

Cannabis use by Canadian adolescents is reported to be among the highest in the world. The 2002 Nova Scotia Student Drug Use Survey found that 22% of students surveyed used marijuana in the month before the survey, while 5% used it every day. The 2002 Alberta Youth Experience Survey indicated that cannabis use by Aboriginal youth (52%) was almost twice that of non-aboriginal youth (27%). One in five Ontario high school student respondents in the 2003 Ontario Student Drug Use Survey reported driving one hour after using cannabis during the past six months.

Drugged driving is not isolated to young Canadians or to Canadians who use illegal drugs. Older drivers are more likely to drive impaired by prescribed medications; younger drivers are most likely to drive while affected by illegal drugs, including cocaine and pot. It is young, male, frequent pot users, who are most likely to drive high.

4. Why focus on mainstream teens?

Surveys conducted in Canada and in countries such as Australia have shown that driving under the influence of cannabis is rare in the general population but common among cannabis users, a group concentrated in those 14 to 25 years-of-age. For this campaign, we decided to target mainstream youth since data indicates that the rate of cannabis use is approaching the rate of alcohol consumption among youth in Canada. Pot has become mainstream.

We spoke to several groups of young Canadians 15-25 years-of-age about their experiences with pot and driving. Generally, older participants were convinced that driving high was not a problem and said they were unlikely to change their minds about doing it. Participants who were not yet driving or were anticipating learning how to drive appeared to be more open to the suggestion that mixing pot and driving, like mixing alcohol and driving, could put them and their passengers at risk. So we decided the campaign should focus on mainstream Canadians 14-18 years-of-age.

5. Who is likely to be a passenger of a driver who is high?

Studies have found that a person’s likelihood of being a passenger of a driver who has used pot within an hour or two of driving, or uses it while driving, increases with high school grade. Gender does not seem to be a factor, although our focus group participants did provide some indications that female passengers may be more likely to be a passenger with a boyfriend who is high than a female friend.

6. How long after using pot are driving skills affected?

Cannabis impairs driving skills most severely during what is known as the acute phase, which typically lasts for up to 60 minutes after smoking. This is followed by post-acute (the phase after the acute one) and residual phases. The residual phase is 150 minutes or more after smoking, during which impairment subsides rapidly. The degree of impairment during the residual phase depends on the amount of THC consumed. After smoking a so-called typical dose (about 20 mg) of THC, the residual phase lasts 2-3 hours.  *

7. What about ‘burnout’?

Burnout is roughly equivalent to the ‘hangover’ associated with alcohol. Very little is known about the effect of ‘burnout’ on driving, although some focus group participants flagged it as a significant issue for driving. Some even suggested they felt safer driving high than driving during burnout. Since burnout is characterized by fatigue, studies of the effect of fatigue on driving might be applied to burnout.

What is drugged-driving?

If your ability to drive a motor vehicle is affected because you have taken a drug, a combination of drugs, or drugs and alcohol (which is also a drug although it is usually referred to separately), you are drugged-driving. A number of medications prescribed by doctors as well as some overthe- counter remedies are known to affect a person’s ability to drive safely. Several illegal drugs are also known to affect driving skills.

As is the case with alcohol, risk increases with dose. However, regular users have been found to experience less effect from the same dose. Unlike alcohol, pot’s THC concentrations can vary significantly from batch to batch.

Since cannabis is illegal and unregulated, there is no standardized consumption limit as there is for drinking alcohol and driving. In experimental research, drivers are given what would be considered an ‘average’ dose of THC and then observed as they perform a number of driving tasks on the road under controlled conditions. For the sake of safety, these tests cannot put drivers in situations that would likely lead to accidents.

Since cannabis is illegal and unregulated, there is no standardized consumption limit as there is for drinking alcohol and driving. In experimental research, drivers are given what would be considered an ‘average’ dose of THC and then observed as they perform a number of driving tasks on the road under controlled conditions. For the sake of safety, these tests cannot put drivers in situations that would likely lead to accidents.

9. Can a drug that is used to treat disease also affect driving?
Why the term pot and driving?

Phrases like alcohol-impaired driving, drunk-driving, drinking and driving or driving under the influence of alcohol (DUIA) are well known. Equivalent terms referring to drug use and driving– including drug-impaired driving, drugged driving and driving under the influence of drugs (DUID)–are less well known, although that is changing.We have chosen to use more informal phrases such as driving high, mixing pot and driving or simply pot and driving.

10. How does pot compare with alcohol as a threat to road safety?

In Canada, driving under the influence of alcohol is widely regarded as both dangerous and socially unacceptable. The evidence to date supports the claim that alcohol is still one of the most important contributors to crash risk injury or death. The increasing evidence of the contribution of drugs other than alcohol to road crashes, whether they are consumed with alcohol or by themselves, has led to a number of efforts to increase awareness of the potential road safety hazards of these drugs. The perception that pot is relatively risk-free when compared to alcohol may help explain why recent drug use surveys in Canada have found that the rate of driving under the influence of pot surpasses the rate of driving under the influence of alcohol among young drivers and passengers.

11. Why not adopt a law enforcement message?

Law enforcement has played an important role in changing attitudes about alcohol-impaired driving. However, fear of being caught and prosecuted for driving high seems not to be a significant concern for many young people.

Focus group participants indicated that parents could be a deterrent if for no other reason than they usually control the keys to the car. Focus group participants also indicated that it is tougher to fool parents: “When I’m driving high I’m more afraid of my mom because cops have no way of telling. Whereas if my mum says ‘You’re high’, I’m not going to say ‘I’m not” because I know she’s not going to believe me.”

12. What does Canadian law say about drugs and driving?

It is the effects of pot on driving—not the legal status of pot—that makes its use illegal both before or while taking control of a motor vehicle.

Article S. 253 of the Canadian Criminal Code says that: “Everyone commits an offence who operates a motor vehicle or operates or assists in the operation of an aircraft or railway equipment or has the care or control of a motor vehicle, vessel, aircraft or railway equipment, whether it is in motion or not, (a) while the person’s ability to operate the vehicle, vessel, aircraft or railway equipment is impaired by alcohol or a drug.”

In the Canadian Criminal Code, laws on impaired driving are distinct from laws that say whether it is legal or not to produce, sell or use a particular drug. In other words, the fact that a drug is legal or illegal has nothing to do with the issue of driver impairment. As an example, it is legal to drink alcohol for age-of-majority Canadians but it is illegal to drive while impaired by alcohol.

13. Can law enforcement officers identify and charge drivers who are impaired by cannabis?

What is THC?

THC is the primary psychoactive compound found in cannabis. A psychoactive drug is one that alters brain function, resulting in temporary changes in perception, mood, consciousness, and behaviour.

As noted above, current law makes it a criminal offense to drive while impaired by cannabis and other drugs. The federal government is considering tabling Bill C-16, which would amend the Impaired Driving section of the Canadian Criminal Code in order to allow police officers to require drivers to undergo a Standardized Field Sobriety Test if the officer believes the person is driving under the influence of a drug. If a driver fails the sobriety test, the officer would have reasonable grounds to believe the driver has committed a drug-impaired offence and can require the driver to submit to a Drug Recognition Expert (DRE) evaluation at the police station. Police departments across the country have begun to train officers to conduct DRE assessments.

If a person fails these procedures, police would have reasonable grounds to demand a sample of bodily fluids, whether blood, urine or saliva. Charges can only be laid after the presence of drugs in bodily fluids is confirmed by laboratory analysis. A driver who refuses to complete the sobriety test or provide bodily fluid samples would be criminally charged, as is the case for drivers who refuse sobriety test and breathalyzers when they are suspected of driving while impaired by alcohol.

14. Will changes to the Criminal Code relating to cannabis possession and use (Bill C-17) affect laws and law enforcement relating to cannabis-impaired driving?

Under the legislative changes proposed in Bill C-17, possession and use of cannabis will remain illegal, but anyone found to have small amounts of cannabis for personal use would only be fined. If these proposed changes to the Criminal Code become law, driving high will likely be more, not less, subject to penalty than it is today. For example, possession of 15 grams or less of cannabis will be punishable by a fine of $150 for an adult and $100 for a person under the age of 18. However, where aggravating factors such as driving a car exist (even if the driver is not high), the fine would be $400 for an adult and $250 for a person under the age of 18.

The views expressed herein do not necessarily express the views of Health Canada

Cannabis and Driving: Key Points of Reference and Bibliography

1. “Educational and policy initiatives directed at new drivers have failed to adequately inform new drivers about the potential consequences of driving under the influence of cannabis…This speaks to the role of organizations involved in health promotion and education around impaired driving who have, until recently, focused almost exclusively on the issue of drinking and driving and paid less attention to the drug-driving issue.” (7-8)

“Among the general adolescent population in Atlantic Canada, driving under the influence of cannabis has become a prevalent activity surpassing driving under the influence of alcohol, and it has played an important role in motor vehicle collision risk, independent of drinking and driving, driver experience, and other risk factors.” (8)

Asbridge et al. (2005)Motor vehicle collision risk and driving under the influence of cannabis: Evidence from adolescents in Atlantic Canada

2. “The present study presents good evidence that drivers killed in motor vehicle crashes and taking psychoactive drugs, particularly cannabis and strong stimulants, or two or more drugs in combination were more likely to be responsible for the crash than those taking neither drugs nor alcohol. Moreover, the combination of psychoactive drugs with alcohol further increased the likelihood that drivers caused the crash in which they died. We conclude that THC, amphetamines and combinations of psychoactive drugs significantly increase drivers’ risk of a serious road crash.” (247)

Drummer et al. (2004) The involvement of drugs in drivers of motor vehicles killed in Australian road traffic crashes

3. “There is considerable evidence that cannabis does impair ability to perform the multiple functions required to drive a car safely. Although the deleterious effects of cannabis are manifestly not as severe as those of alcohol, they are more complex due to its sedative and stimulant properties; nevertheless several countries have proscribed the use of cannabis by drivers and have introduced legislation to that effect. The impetus behind these measures seems to be several fold — the increasing use of cannabis, especially by younger and therefore more inexperienced drivers; the increasing volume of traffic, dependence on personal vehicles for transport and concomitant increase in accidents; studies highlighting the effects of cannabis on brain function and increased public awareness of the hazards associated with driving and substance abuse; and not least the costs to society and individuals of road traffic casualties.” (330) Hadorn. (2004) A review of cannabis and driving skills

4. “One of the clear messages to emerge from the research reviewed is that there is a need to examine the effects of cannabis in situations where the driver is required to perform several tasks simultaneously or when confronted with a situation that requires a rapid adaptive response. Furthermore, there has been little research examining the effects of cannabis, alone and in combination with alcohol and other drugs, across a range of levels of driving experience.” (xii)

“As previous researchers have suggested, it is critical to examine the effects of cannabis when the driver in placed in situations involving increased mental load. This represents a shift in the experimental research away from looking simply at the effects of cannabis on traditional measures of driving performance such as lateral placement and speed, and a move towards supplementing traditional measures with investigation of the effects of cannabis when a driver is placed in an unexpected high accident risk situation that requires an immediate decision and response.” (31)

Lenné et al. (2004) Cannabis and Road Safety: A Review of Recent Epidemiological, Driver Impairment, and Drug Screening Literature

5. “Surveys that established recent use of cannabis by directly measuring THC in blood showed that THC positives, particularly at higher doses, are about three to seven times more likely to be responsible for their crash as compared to drivers that had not used drugs or alcohol. Together these epidemiological data suggests that recent use of cannabis may increase crash risk, whereas past use of cannabis does not.” (109)

Ramaekers et al. (2004) Dose related risk of motor vehicle crashes after cannabis use

6. “In terms of road safety the results show a clear worsening of driver capability following the ingestion of cannabis or the ingestion of cannabis and alcohol together at the doses used, in comparison with placebo (i.e. having taken neither). Within the sample of drivers, the effects of alcohol (at a dose of just more than half of the UK legal limit) and cannabis taken together were slightly greater than with cannabis alone. Given that other research has extensively shown the rapid increase in the risk of accident, particularly fatal accident, with increasing blood alcohol level, the present results show how important it is to avoid any combination of alcohol and cannabis, as well as avoiding alcohol and cannabis taken on their own, before driving or riding.” (2)

“Drivers under the influence of cannabis seem to attempt to compensate to some extent for the impairment (that they recognise) by driving more slowly, but there are some aspects of the driving task where cannabis-impaired drivers cannot compensate and where their performance deteriorates (e.g. staying in lane on a bend).” (2) Sexton et al. (2002) The influence of cannabis and alcohol on driving

7. “To the extent that drivers compensate for the effect of cannabis, they appear to be able to manage routine and low demand tasks, but the remaining cognitive resources may not sufficient to cope with peak and unexpected demands.” Smiley. (1999) Marijuana: On-road and driving simulator studies

Canadian Drug Use Surveys

ADLAF, E. M. and A. Paglia. (2003) Drug Use Among Ontario Students 1977-2003: Ontario Student Drug Use Survey (OSDUS) Highlights. Toronto: Centre for Addiction and Mental Health.

Alberta Youth Experience Survey 2002 Summary Report. (2003) Alberta Alcohol and Drug Abuse Commission.

Alcohol et drogues: portrait de la situation en 2002 et principales compariasons avec 2000. (2002) Enquête québécoise sur le tabagisme chez les élèves du secondaire. Institue de la statistique. Gouvernement du Québec.

Centre for Addiction and Mental Health (2003). Cannabis Use and Driving Among Ontario Adults. CAMH Population Studies eBulletin, May/June, No. 20.

Centre for Addiction and Mental Health (2003). Cannabis Use and Driving Among Ontario Adults. CAMH Population Studies eBulletin, May/June, No. 20.

2002 North West Territories Alcohol and Drug Survey. (2003) Northwest Territories Bureau of Statistics.

PATTON, D., D. Brown, B. Brozeit and J. Dhaliwal. (2001) Substance Use among Manitoba High School Students. Addictions Foundation of Manitoba.

POULIN, Christiane. (2002) Nova Scotia Student Drug Use Survey: Highlights Report. Halifax: Nova Scotia Department of Health Addiction Services and Dalhousie University Community Health and Epidemiology. 1-16.

TJEPKEMA, Michael. (2004) Use of Cannabis and Other Illicit Drugs. Health Reports, Vol. 15, No. 4, 43.

World Health Organization. (1997) Cannabis: A Health Perspective and Research Agenda. WHO Division of Mental Health and Prevention of Substance Abuse, Geneva: World Health Organization.

Cannabis and Driving Studies

ADAMS, I. B. and B. R. Martin. (1996) Cannabis: pharmacology and toxicology in animals and humans. Addiction, 91(11), 1585-1614.

ASBRIDGE, Mark, Christiane Poulin and Andrea Donato. (2005) Motor vehicle collision risk and driving under the influence of cannabis: Evidence from adolescents in Atlantic Canada. Accident Analysis and Prevention. (In press)

ASHTON, C. H. (1999) Adverse effects of cannabis and cannabinoids. British Journal of Anaestheasia, 83(4), 637-649.

BIERNESS, Douglas J., Herb M. Simpson and Katharine Desmond. (2003) Drugs and Driving 2002. The Road Safety Monitor. Traffic Injury Research Foundation.

BLOWS, S., R. Q. Ivers, J. Connor, S. Ameratunga, M. Woodward and R. Norton. (2005) Marijuana use and car crash injury. Addiction, 100: 605-611.

CHAIT, L. D. and J. L. Perry. (1994) Acute and residual effects of alcohol and marijuana, alone and in combination, on mood and performance. Psychopharmacology (Berl), 115(3), 340-349;

CHESHER, G. B. (2003) Cannabis and road safety: An outline of the research studies to examine the effects of cannabis on driving skills and actual driving performance. www.druglibrary.org/schaffer/MISC/driving/driving2.htm.

CHESHER et al. (2002) Cannabis and alcohol in motor vehicle accidents. In Grotenhermen and Russo (Eds). Cannabis and Cannabinoids: Pharmacology, Toxicology, and Therapeutic Potential. New York: Haworth Press, 313-323.

CIMBURA, G., D. M. Lucas, R. C. Bennett, R. A. Warren and H. M. Simpson. (1982) Incidence and toxicological aspects of drugs detected in 484 fatally injured drivers and pedestrians in Ontario. Journal of Forensic Sciences, 27, 855-867.

DOUGHERTY, D. M., D. R. Cherek and J. D. Roache. (1994) The effects of smoked marijuana on progressive-interval schedule performance in humans. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 62 (1), 73-87.

DRUMMER, Olaf H., Jim Gerostamoulos, Helen Batziris, Mark Chu, John Caplehorn, Michael D. Robertson, Philip Swann. (2004) The involvement of drugs in drivers of motor vehicles killed in Australian road traffic crashes. Accident Analysis and Prevention 36: 239–248.

DUSSAULT, C.,M. Brault, M. Brault, J. Bouchard and A. M. Lemire. (2002) The contribution of alcohol and other drugs among fatally injured drivers in Quebec: Some preliminary findings. In Mayhew, D. R., & Dussault, C. (Eds.), Proceedings of the 16th International conference on alcohol, drugs, and traffic safety, 423-430.

European Monitoring Centre for Drugs and Drug Addiction. (1999) Literature Review on the Relation between Drug Use, Impaired Driving and Traffic Accidents. Lisbon: EMCDDA.

GROTENHERMEN, Franjo, Gero Leson, Günter Berghaus, Olaf H. Drummer, Hans-Peter Krüger, Marie Longo, Herbert Moskowitz, Bud Perrine, Jan Ramaekers, Alison Smiley and Rob Tunbridge. (2005) Developing Science-Based Per Se Limits for Driving under the Influence of Cannabis (DUIC). Paper presented at the 17th International Conference on Alcohol, Drugs and Traffic Safety. August 2004.

HADORN, David. (2004) A review of cannabis and driving skills. In The Medicinal Uses of Cannabis and Cannabinoids. Geoffrey Guy, Brian Whittle and Philip Robson Eds., London: Pharmaceutical Press Publications, 329-368.

HARDER, S. and S. Reitbrock. (1997) Concentration-effect relationship of delta-9 tetrahydrocannabinol and prediction of psychotropic effects after smoking marijuana. International Journal of Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics, 35(4): 155-159.

JONES, Craig, Karen Freeman and Don Weatherburn. (2003) “Driving Under the Influence of Cannabis in New South Whales rural area.” Crime and Justice Bulletin: Contemporary Issues in Crime and Justice. Number 75 (May 2003), 1-5.

LENNÉ, Michael, Tom Triggs, Michael Regan. (2004) Cannabis and Road Safety: A Review of Recent Epidemiological, Driver Impairment, and Drug Screening Literature. Monash University Accident Research Center.

MANN, Robert, Bruna Brands, Scott Macdonald and Gina Stoduto. (2003) Impacts of cannabis on driving: An analysis of current evidence with an emphasis on Canadian data. Prepared for Road Safety and Motor Vehicle Regulation, Transport Canada.

NEALE, Joanne, Neil McKeganey, Gordon Hay and John Oliver. (2000) Recreational Drug Use and Driving: A Qualitative Study. University of Glasgow, Scottish Executive Central Research Unit.

OHLSSON, A., J. E. Lindgren, A. Wahlen, S. Agurell, L. E. Hollister and H. K. Gillespie. (1980) Plasma delta-9 tetrahydrocannabinol concentrations and clinical effects after oral and intravenous administration and smoking. Clinical Pharmacology Therapy, 28(3), 409-416.

ROBBE, Hindrick. (1998) Marijuana’s impairing effects on driving are moderate when taken alone but severe when combined with alcohol. Psychopharmacol. Clin. Exp., 13: 70-78.

ROBBE, Hindrick and James F. O’Hanlon. (1993) “Marijuana, Alcohol and Actual Driving Performance.” Institute for Human Psychopharmacology University of Limburg, Netherlands.

RAMAEKERS, J.G., G. Berghaus, M. van Laar and O.H. Drummer. (2004) Dose related risk of motor vehicle crashes after cannabis use. Drug and Alcohol Dependence 73: 109–119. Experimental Psychopharmacology Unit, Department of Neurocognition, Faculty of Psychology, Maastricht University.

—–.—-. (2001) A review of epidemiological and experimental studies on marijuana and driver impairment. Experimental Psychopharmacology Unit. Brain and Behavior Institute. Université de Maastricht.

SEXTON, B.F., P. G. Jackson, R.J.Tunbridge and A.Board, K.Wright, M.Stark, K.Englehart. (2002) The influence of cannabis and alcohol on driving. Prepared for Road Safety Division, Department of the Environment, Transport and the Regions, UK, by Transport Research Laboratory, TRL Report 543.

SEXTON et al. (2000). The influence of cannabis on driving. Prepared for Road Safety Division, Department of the Environment, Transport and the Regions, UK, by Transport Research Laboratory, TRL Report 477.

SMILEY, Alison. (1999) Marijuana: On-road and driving simulator studies. In H. Kalant, W. Corrigall, W. hall and R.G. Smart (Eds). The Health Effects of Cannabis. Centre for Addiction and Mental Health, Toronto, 173-191.

WALSH, G.W. and R.E. Mann. (1999) On the high road: Driving under the influence of cannabis in Ontario. Canadian Journal of Public Health, vol. 90 no. 4, 260-263.

WEEKES, John. (2005) Drugs and Driving FAQs. Canadian Centre on Substance Abuse.

WHEELOCK. Barbara Buston. (2002) Physiological and Psychological Effects of Cannabis: Review of the Research Findings. Prepared for the Senate Committee on Illegal Drugs. Office of Senator Eileen Rossiter.

Cannabis and Piloting Studies

D.S. Janowsky et al. (1976) Marijuana effects on simulated flying ability. American Journal of Psychiatry 133: 384-388 and —-,—- (1976) Simulated flying performance after marijuana intoxication. Aviation, Space, and Environmental Medicine, 47: 124-128.

LEIRER, V.O. et al. (1991) Marijuana carry-over effects on aircraft pilot performance. Aviation, Space, and Environmental Medicine 62: 221-227.

NEWMAN. David G. (2004) Cannabis and its Effects on Pilot Performance and Flight Safety. Australian Transport Safety Bureau, 1-18.

*NDPA would draw your attention to the study which showed pilots could not safely land a plane 24 hours after smoking marijuana.  Marijuana Carry-Over Effects on Psychomotor Performance: A Chronicle of Research by Leirer, Yesavage & Morrow.  Stanford University School of Medicine

 

 

 

Source: www.potanddriving.cpha.

Filed under: Transport (Papers) :
ABSTRACT
Increasing numbers of social scientists, policy makers and other social commentators suggest that drug use has become a relatively common form of behaviour among young people who accept it as a ‘normal’ part of their lives. Although there is quite strong empirical evidence that the proportion of young people using drugs at some point in their lives is growing, there is little evidence to support the contention that it is so widely accepted as to be normal. Drawing on quantitative and qualitative data, we develop a critique of what we term the ‘normalisation thesis’. In doing so we argue that this thesis exaggerates the extent of drug use by young people, simplifies the choices that young people make, and pays inadequate attention to the meaning that drug use has for them. Crucially, we argue that in their reliance on large-scale survey data the main proponents of the normalisation thesis pay insufficient attention to the normative context within which drug use occurs.
Key words: drugs, neutralisation techniques, normalisation, subculture, youth.

The data presented by Parker et al. (1995) and Graham and Bowling (1995) indicate that, for young people, having used a drug is a far from unusual experience. By the time that the majority of Parker et al (1995) respondents were 15, 42% of them indicated that they had, at some point in their lives, used at least one illicit drug. This increased to 51% by the time they were 16. Turning to the national position, over a third (36%) of the ISRD respondents (all of whom were aged 14—21) reported ever having used a drug (Graham and Bowling 1995).

Given that proponents of the normalisation thesis have tended to concentrate on measures of lifetime use (whether a respondent has used an illicit drug at some time in their life) it is worth noting that the extent to which such measures illuminate young people’s drug using habits is limited. Arguments based on such measurements should be interpreted extremely cautiously. The inflexibility of lifetime measures means that they cannot capture the processual character of people’s drug-use (Becker 1963). As a consequence, not only are they unable to distinguish one-off use from regular polydrug use but they also fail to distinguish between current and ex-users. Given these problems it is reasonable to suggest that measures based on shorter time-frames — such as the previous year or month — are likely to provide somewhat more reliable estimates of the extent of current or regular use. Parker et al. (1995) included questions about drug use during the year and the month prior to each of their surveys, and the ISRD asked respondents about their drug use during the previous year (1992).

Inevitably, data concerning drug-related behaviour during the last year/month give a more conservative picture than those based on lifetime measures. As Figure 1 shows, in Parker et al’s second and third surveys, when the majority of the respondents were aged 15 and 16 respectively, drug use during the previous year was limited to approximately two fifths of the sample. During the month preceding the respective surveys, it was limited to about a quarter of them. Following their third survey, Parker et al. (1995:19) estimated that 20 per cent of respondents (approximately three quarters of past month users) were ‘regular users’.
We have already mentioned the fact that Parker and colleagues recognise that their research is unlikely to be typical of the national picture. The situation relating to the nation as a whole is outlined in Figure 2. According to the ISRD slightly less than a third of males and less than a quarter of females aged 14—21 used drugs in 1992 and could, therefore, be thought of as ‘current’ users (Graham and Bowling 1995). While respondents aged 18—21 were, by some way, the most likely to have used a drug in 1992, less than half of the males and less than a quarter of the females in this age category had done so.

As indicated earlier, it is the work of Howard Parker and colleagues (Parker et al. 1995; Measham et al. 1994) that has been most influential in this area. Beginning in 1991 their major study to date involved three surveys conducted annually which recorded the drug-related experiences of a group of 776 young people who were first contacted during the penultimate year of their compulsory education when most were 14 years old. These surveys were administered in the metropolitan North-West of England, an area which includes Manchester, the ‘rave capital of Great Britain’ (Coffield and Gofton 1994:5), and the researchers have acknowledged the dangers of extrapolating from their data to the national situation. Referring to the area’s higher than average levels of smoking, drinking and heroin use, they note that ‘we must therefore anticipate that young people from this region are likely to report higher levels of illicit drug use during the l990s than their peers elsewhere’ (Parker et al. 1995:21). Although the location of their research is therefore in this sense ‘unusual’, this is not the basis of our criticism of the conclusions they draw.

In order to reflect upon the national situation we have drawn, in some detail, upon the domestic element of the International Self—Report Delinquency Study (ISRD) which, focusing on the 14-21
age range, is the most recent survey of a representative sample of the nation’s youth to consider drug use (Howling et al. 1994;Graham and Bowling 1995). We will also consider, albeit more briefly, the evidence from the 1994 British Crime Survey, although it should be noted that this focuses on people aged 16 and above and is not a specialist youth survey (Ramsey and Percy 1996). Although Parker et al. (1995) survey, the ISRD and British Crime Survey vary in the details of their administration, they are similar in that the drugs components of these surveys are all based on a self-completion approach in which respondents are provided with a list of drugs or illicit substances and asked about their knowledge and use of them.

Although more illuminating than measures of lifetime use, those which focus on behaviour during the last year or month are of limited use if they fail to distinguish between different types of drug. Measures which aggregate a variety of different drugs simplify the decisions that young people make and fail to acknowledge the discerning approach many young people take towards drug use. That young people distinguish between different drugs is clearly reflected in their patterns of use. Both Parker et al. (1995) and the ISRD found that levels of use varied greatly by type of drug. Thus, reflecting its position as ‘undoubtedly the most widely used drug in the UK’ (ISDD 1994:28), cannabis had been used by 45 per cent of respondents to Parker et al’s (1995) third survey, when the majority of them were aged 16, and 33 per cent of ISRD respondents. At the other end of the popularity spectrum are heroin and cocaine. Lifetime use of cocaine was limited to 4 and 3 per cent of Parker et al’s (1995) respondents when they were aged 15 and 16 respectively, and 2 per cent of ISRD respondents. Heroin use was even more unusual: 3 and 1 per cent respectively of Parker et al’s respondents disclosed lifetime heroin use as did 1 per cent of ISRD respondents.The rise of the dance/rave scene (Redhead 1993) and its associated drug use has a special position within the normalisation thesis (Coffield and Gofton 1994; Measham et al. 1993). The late 1980s and early 1990s did witness an apparently significant increase in the use of ‘dance drugs’, which became a relatively important part of the youth drug scene (Measham 1993; Clements 1993). In the case of ecstasy and LSD, however, this increase started from a very low baseline (Clements 1993) and the popularity of these drugs can easily be overstated.
Even though LSD was the most popular dance drug among Parker et al’s (1995) respondents when they were aged 15 and 16 (and the second most widely used drug by them) it had only ever been used by approximately a quarter of them. In view of ecstasy’s high media profile it is worth noting that only one in twenty respondents to Parker a al’s (1995) third survey, when the majority of them were aged 16, had used this drug. Nationally, use of dance-drugs appears to be limited to a small sub-section of the youthful population.

Source: http://journals.sagepub.com/doi/abs/10.1177/0038038597031003008
pub. ‘Sociology’ Vol.31 No. 3. Aug 97

Filed under: Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth,Social Affairs (Papers),Youth :

By Maxie Richards, Glasgow, Scotland
Director, Maxie Richards Foundation
www.maxirichards.org

Two-and-a-half-year-old, weakened by starvation, cold, deprivation, and physical abuse, paid the scapegoat price for
this careless society and gave up the fight to live. Scott was a victim of malignant neglect, not just by his drug-crazed parents, but
by the society into which he was born, where neglect, in various forms, has become commonplace. A parent’s’ right to choose, at any
cost, a pleasure-seeking lifestyle, rules, while laws change to allow drug-taking on an unprecedented scale. The silent sufferers are the children.

The long-term effect becomes all too clear, as children, unable to cope with the chaos in their lives, become aggressive and disruptive, serving an
apprenticeship for addiction. This Government’s answer is so-called “harm reduction.” This evil drug policy has been in place for 30 years or so. Its cornerstone is free choice for individuals to take drugs, and it promotes “safe use” – whatever that means. It focuses on the individual, never the family, the dependants, or the community. This policy promotes the lie that drugs are here to stay, and there is nothing we can do about it except “reduce harm.” Addicts are enabled to take drugs and are given, at the taxpayers’ expense, all necessary means.

“Harm reduction” adherents are fanatical about protecting this system,even though it has been responsible for the drug crisis in society. We have
built a gigantic business on the backs of drug addicts (called ‘clients’), and people grow fat on the proceeds. The tax-paying public remains in denial. Perhaps people believe this couldn’t be happening. It is. Parents of addicted children, exploited by the system, live the nightmare daily. The society we are creating through malignant neglect is not one we will want to live in. Scott Saunders is not the first to endure a living hell and prolonged death. Unless we act, the rot won’t stop.

Forty years ago, the Scandinavian countries looked at “harm reduction.” Their findings led them to scrap any notion of adopting such a policy.
Every government agency had to adopt a drug-free stance and promote drug prevention. It was made abundantly clear that drug addiction was not an acceptable way of living. Sweden set up European Cities Against Drugs, developing strategies for a safe, drug-free society, and proving that it can be done.

In Rutherglen, an outwardly respectable neighbourhood of Glasgow, Scott Saunders was subjected to appalling abuse and neglect. One hundred fifty wounds were found on his body; he had been systematically deprived of food, and his eventual death from starvation came after he had been left alone in the house for three days.

We must be brave enough to face up to our failures and to the treason yes, treason – which is undermining our way of life, canceling our workforce,and damaging, often terminally, our young people, while imperceptibly luring us into accepting the unacceptable. Don’t believe the lies, the platitudes,the excuses, the cover-up of so-called “harm reduction” drug policies. We are all responsible for the death of Scott through negligence.

Back to Papers

Filed under: Social Affairs (Papers) :

Adaption by James Bradbury of an article from Forreal.org
You may have seen this mysterious number in the form of logos, on TV shows and in films, perhaps without knowing what it means or even noticing it. Few people currently know what this number represents.

Simply put, 420 is a symbol of cannabis and its culture. It’s a “nudge-nudge wink” for pot users akin to the popular euphemism “I like to party”. It means they can speak openly about cannabis use by way of a code so that non-users will remain ignorant of their meaning. Somehow it leaked out into the mainstream and onto commercial clothing and other merchandise. Despite its prevalence, many parents and some teens are still unaware of what 420 means.

Nobody is certain why the number 420 became associated with cannabis culture, but numerous theories exist. Some people believe that it was originally a police code signalling cannabis use, while others think it came from the number of chemicals found in cannabis. As it happens there are over 400 chemicals found in cannabis, many of them carcinogenic, but the exact number and proportions vary widely between plants. Yet another idea is that 4:20 was the time a group of guys met after school to smoke cannabis. In any case, the number has been significant for cannabis users and promoters since the 1970’s.

When you see the symbol 420, be aware of what it represents. The person or organisation behind it is probably advocating cannabis use, its legalisation and possibly that of other drugs. Remember that the use of cannabis frequently leads users into using other drugs due to a variety of physical, psychological and social factors.

Those who make use of the 420 symbol may imply that cannabis use is commonplace, or even normal. This is certainly not true, as over 80% of young people do not use drugs more than once or twice, while 50% never try them at all. For more information about the physical, psychological and social dangers of cannabis, see our Cannabis Information page.

Thanks to Forreal.org for the use of material for this article.

Filed under: Social Affairs :

By Roger Morgan. Californians for Drug-Free Schools

Marsha Rosenbaum is a self professed drug abuse expert, whose research was funded for 18 years by the National Institute on Drug Abuse. If the contents of her booklet called ‘SAFETY FIRST, a Reality- Based approach to TEENS, DRUGS, and Drug Education’ is reflective of her research, we should demand our tax dollars back. If ever she was a professional, she has now reduced herself to a snake oil salesman.

The worst thing about it is that 30,000 copies of ‘SAFETY FIRST’ were printed and distributed by her employer, The Drug Policy Alliance (DPA), and copies were given to every school in the nation. That should kill more than a few kids, and keep the supply lines open for drugs …. the mission of her employer. Her affiliation with the DPA alone is enough to expose her true intent.

As a parent who lost two step children to drug addiction twenty five years ago, and a very active drug prevention activist for the last 7 or 8 years, I have searched for solutions with no pre-conceived ideas of what it took to keep kids off drugs. Just about everything I have learned flies in the face of her advice. If she has any expertise with drugs, she certainly exhibits none as a drug prevention expert.

One of our cherished rights is freedom of speech. As reflected in ‘SAFETY FIRST’, the ability to propagate false information for specials interests, whatever they may be, also suggests it is one of the flaws. Ms. Rosenbaum’s special wisdom seems to be gained mostly from kids versus the scientific community: For example, she states:

‘They know there are differences between experimentation, abuse and addiction: and that the use of one drug does not inevitably lead to the use of another.

Yet, conventional drug education programs focus predominantly on abstinence-only messages and are shaped by problematic myths:

Myth #1: Experimentation with drugs is not a common part of teenage culture.

Myth #2: Drug use is the same as drug abuse;

Myth #3: Marijuana is the gateway to drugs such as heroin and cocaine; and

Myth #4: Exaggerating risks will deter young people from experimentation.”

First of all, there is profound evidence that one drug often leads to the use of another. It normally starts with cigarettes, then alcohol and then pot. Experimentation with drugs is a common part of teenage culture only because we allow it. We can stop most of it by doing what we have done to stop it with adults: random drug testing.

There should be no level of drug use that is acceptable for teens, because they are physiologically more susceptible to harm and addiction than adults, and their brains aren’t fully developed until their late teens or early twenties. No responsible adult would say just teach them how to do it responsibility.

With regard to telling kids the truth, there is no reason to exaggerate the risks of drugs. The truth alone should be sufficient for anyone with average intellect who is seeking the truth. However, these are children we are talking about. The reason they can’t vote is that they haven’t gained the cognitive skills to make mature decisions, including making the healthy decisions about their activities as teenagers. Most of us weren’t any smarter at that age, so it’s not a slight. Just a reality.

Ms. Rosenbaum states “. . . Our current efforts lack harm reduction education for those students who won’t “just say no”. In order to prevent drug abuse and drug problems among teenagers who do experiment, we need a fallback strategy that puts safety first.”

How about a program that just keeps them off drugs, Ms Rosenbaum, like random drug testing? For those who will become addicted because of permissive practices, we do need treatment. But treatment doesn’t work most of the time. As you stated, 80% to 90% of kids don’t have a problem. But 10% to 20% do, and many more don’t just come out whole. They aren’t totally unscathed. They are damaged, many of whom will never achieve their full potential, even if they aren’t complete addicts.

Harm reduction is the myth; the mantra of the DPA and other druggies and organizations that want to legalize and proliferate the use of drugs. Any self respecting drug abuse expert would know that some kids have a genetic pre-disposition to addiction of alcohol and drugs. Experimentation for them generally leads to addiction, and addiction to death or destruction. Harm elimination by getting kids to adulthood prior to first significant use, by whatever means possible, is the best harm reduction policy. Science says if we can get kids to adulthood intact they should never have a problem. Neither will society.

Ms. Rosenbaum myopically proposes that we teach children responsible use of drugs; and that we call on parents to have coherent conversations with their children, like her “Dear Johnny” letter, which will convince them to be responsible when they are using drugs or alcohol – evidence enough that she lives on a different planet.

Kids experimenting with drugs and alcohol don’t tend to be responsible. What do you tell them? Just smoke a little bit of pot and don’t get high? Don’t drink and use pot at the same time? Don’t drink or do drugs and drive? If someone offers you heroin, meth or cocaine, a drug that will give you a new high, just say thanks, “I’ll lumber along with pot?”

Her “MOTHER’S ADVICE” to son Johnny is naïve, and myopic in view of today’s family situation. Apparently Ms. Rosenbaum hasn’t noticed that our nation has a 49% divorce rate; single parenting; two parents working; drug using parents; child abuse, et. al. There is a reason why 60% of Americans are at moderate to high risk of using drugs and alcohol. There is a reason why schools are the safety net.

Parents are number one in terms of at-risk behaviour, followed by school environment. Even those parents who try, need help. Rosenbaum suggest parents “ find creative ways to open a dialogue, then listen, listen, listen.”

Ms Rosenbaum, if the kid is already using, you’re whistling Dixie. If he or she is just weighing the options, then parents need to carefully weigh their persuasive skills against peer pressure, the need for a teenager to be accepted, the chance of a genetic propensity to become addicted, and the forceful, deliberate attempt of a $600 billion illicit drug trade focused on getting their child hooked on their insidious products before adulthood, when science says they are safe.

To illustrate that marijuana is not a gateway drug, she states “… For every 100 people who have tried marijuana, only one percent is a current user of cocaine.” The reality is for every 100 people who use cocaine, meth, heroin and other drugs, all 100% probably started with marijuana. Rosenbaum states “there is no credible research evidence demonstrating that using one drugs causes the use of another.” That is simply a lie. There is plenty of research to show the relationship that one drug leads to others. Marijuana is a gateway drug, and it is dangerous in its own right. Over 60% of the young people in rehab programs are there for addiction to pot. Marijuana also has a very debilitating effect on short term memory, adversely affects motivation, retards the maturation process and leads to a multitude of physiological problems, including mental illness. Teaching children there is a safe, responsible level of marijuana use is blasphemous.

If there was any question of her maligned motives, her published responses to seminars presented by the ONDCP promoting random student drug testing in the spring of 2004 laid the matter to rest.

She said research and experience tells us “random drug testing does not deter drug use”. That is simply another lie. In every case where it has been done properly, it has dramatically reduced drug use. Schools in Oregon have shown that drug use by kids were in a school which tested was only 25% of the level in schools that did not test. At Hunterton Central Regional schools in New Jersey, after 2 years drug use was reduced in 20 of 28 categories. At De La Salle High School in New Orleans, which the kids had nicknamed “De La Drugs”, drug use has all but been eliminated by use of hair analyses. Ball State University did a study that showed 73% of High School Principals reported a reduction in drug use among students subject to drug testing, while 2% reported an increase. The big question seems to be is Marsha afraid it will work? And why?

She said testing athletes “can deter them from participating.” Research has shown that not to be true in general, and only for a few. If they are using drugs, they should not be competing in athletics. It is dangerous, for them and others. So, kids – a choice.

The biggest lie of all was that random drug testing is “expensive and inefficient”. She cites school administrators in Dublin, Ohio who curtailed their random drug testing program because they calculated their expenses at $35,000 a year for 1,473 students, at $24 a piece, because they only got 11 positive results, a cost of $3,200 per “positive” test.

We know Ms. Rosenbaum isn’t very knowledgeable on drug prevention, but apparently neither she nor the folks in Dublin are very good at math either. Since random drug testing is a deterrent, the correct way to measure the program would be to divide the cost of $35,000 by the 1,462 kids that didn’t do drugs, which would yield a cost of a little less that $24 per student. That’s cheap insurance! And not that Ms. Rosenbaum wants to confuse herself with facts, but with on-site drug test kits that cost as little as $2.50, all 1,473 kids could be tested today for $3,683. If the school can’t afford that, there are Federal Funds available to help pay for it, and if they only tested 10% of the students they could get the desired deterrent effect.

Under the guise of being a drug abuse expert from 18 years of shabby research, Ms. Rosenbaum has foregone any objectivity and professional integrity that should flow from independent research, and sold her soul to one of the most dangerous organizations in America: The Drug Policy Alliance (DPA), funded in large part by George Soros. The DPA’s mission is to legalize and proliferate the use of drugs. In joining their organization and advocating against the best known drug use deterrent, random drug testing, she has essentially defected to the other side.

Rosenbaum is not credible, and neither her motives or advice can be trusted.

Filed under: Social Affairs :

In Brief


In 2003, suicide was the 11th leading cause of death among persons of all ages in the United States. However, among young people aged 15 to 24, suicide, or intentional self-harm, was the third leading cause of death, with 3,921 deaths, following accidents/unintentional injuries (14,966 deaths) and assaults/homicides (5,148 deaths).

The 2004 National Survey on Drug Use and Health (NSDUH) asked youths aged 12 to 17 about symptoms of depression, including thoughts about death or suicide. Major Depressive Episode (MDE) is defined as a period of at least 2 weeks when a person experienced a depressed mood or loss of interest or pleasure in daily activities and had at least five of the nine symptoms of depression as described in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV).

The suicide-related questions asked youths if (during their worst or most recent episode of depression) they thought it would be better if they were dead, thought about killing themselves, and, if they had thought about killing themselves, whether they made a plan to kill themselves and whether they tried to kill themselves. This report presents estimates of the prevalence of lifetime MDE among youths. The report also presents the numbers and percentages of youths who had both lifetime MDE and suicidal thoughts.

Prevalence of MDE

An estimated 14% of youths aged 12 to 17, approximately 3.5 million youths, had experienced at least one MDE in their lifetime. Almost 20% of females aged 12 to 17 and 8.5% of males had at least one of these depressive episodes. Rates of lifetime MDE were similar among racial/ethnic groups and increased with age.

MDE and Suicidal Thoughts

Among youths aged 12 to 17, about 9%, an estimated 2.3 million youths, had experienced MDE in their lifetime and thought, during their worst or most recent MDE, that it would be better if they were dead. Over 7%, an estimated 1.8 million youths, thought about killing themselves at the time of their worst or most recent MDE.

Females aged 12 to 17 were significantly more likely than their male peers to have had MDE and to report thinking about suicide and believing it would be better if they were dead.

Both 14 or 15 year olds and 16 or 17 year olds were significantly more likely than those aged 12 or 13 to have had MDE accompanied by thoughts that it would be better if they were dead and thoughts about committing suicide.

MDE with suicidal thoughts did not vary by urbanicity.4 Youths in large metropolitan areas, small metropolitan areas, and non-metropolitan areas were equally likely to have MDE with suicidal thoughts.

MDE and Suicide Attempts
An estimated 900,000 youths, or 3.6% of 12 to 17 year olds, made a plan to kill themselves at the time they were having their worst or most recent MDE. An estimated 712,000 youths had tried to kill themselves during such an episode; this represents 2.9% of those aged 12 to 17.

Female youths were more likely than male youths to have had MDE and made a plan to kill themselves (5.6% of females and 1.7% of males) or to have attempted suicide (4.7% of females and 1.1% of males).

 

Source: SAMHSA, 2004 NSDUH
Filed under: Social Affairs (Papers) :

Needle exchange was first introduced in the United Kingdom in 1985 in response to the AIDS epidemic. Most areas within the UK have pharmacy-based needle-exchange services. Mobile, agency-based and automated needle exchange programs also exist.

A new study finds that despite this widespread availability of syringes, there is an increase in HIV infection among injection drug users (IDUs) as well as an increase is the sharing of needles.

These results echo the findings of another study published a year ago in the British Medical Journal which found that HIV and hepatitis C (HCV) rates are increasing among IDUs in the United Kingdom. Nearly half (44%) of injection drug users under the age of 30 are already infected with HCV and 4.2% are infected with HIV– and these rates are increasing, according to the BMJ article.

While the recent study claims that the increase may be a result of an increased focus on crime, it ignores what may be the real cause driving the epidemic which was reported in a university study release last year: Widespread drug abuse. One in 50 young people and adults in London and two other major U.K. cities inject illicit drugs– making drug abuse as common as diabetes. Five million needles are provided to drug addicts in London each year, yet harm reduction advocates claim that this amount is 80% short of the total number “needed.”

All three studies are provided below:

Recent increases seen in HIV transmission among UK IDUs

Edwin J. Bernard, Friday, July 15, 2005

New HIV infections via injecting drug use (IDU) appear to be on the increase in England and Wales, according to a collaborative study from the UK’s Health Protection Agency (HPA) and Imperial College London, published in the July 22nd issue of the journal AIDS. The study, which combines anonymous HIV testing data with community surveys for the first time, suggests that recent increases in HIV IDU transmission are most pronounced in younger, recent IDUs, in London. This increase in new infections coincides with a shift in UK drugs policy away from public health concerns towards a stronger focus on crime.

In the UK, harm reduction initiatives such as the provision of clean needles through needle exchange programmes (NEPs) have been relatively effective in limiting the spread of HIV among injecting drug users (IDUs). By the end of 2002, only 7% of the 56,000 diagnosed HIV infections were associated with IDU. However, there has been some recent evidence of an increase in risky injecting practices suggesting that new HIV infections amongst IDUs may be on the increase.

In order to examine trends in HIV prevalence amongst IDUs, researchers from the HPA and Imperial College, London combined data from two voluntary unlinked-anonymous survey programmes that included adults (aged 15-49) who had injected drugs in the previous four weeks.

The first is an annual survey of IDUs via drug agencies in England and Wales (ranging in number over the years between 29-59; providing advice, support, harm-reduction and/or treatment services) has been ongoing since 1990, and includes a brief self-completed questionnaire and oral fluid samples for HIV testing.

The second was a series of community-based surveys in London (1990-1993); London and seven other English cities (1997-1998); and London and Brighton (2001-2002). This was conducted in the field (e.g. street locations, homes and social venues) and included an interviewer-administered questionnaire and oral fluid samples for HIV testing. This provided the researchers with a cross-sectional data set, including almost 28,000 oral fluid samples on which to test anonymously for HIV.

Evidence of increase in HIV prevalence

HIV prevalence among IDUs in England and Wales declined from a peak of 5.9% (67 positive HIV antibody tests out of a total of 1132 samples) in 1990 to a low of 0.6% (14/2270) in 1996. It then remained stable until 2000, after which there was, say the researchers, “some evidence of an increase” to 1.4% (21/1529) in 2003.

Individuals who had been injecting for the shortest period of time (less than three years; 1.2%) and those who had been injecting for the longest period of time (more than twelve years; 2.9%) had the highest HIV prevalence in 2003. In contrast, those who had been injecting drugs between three and five years, or six and eleven years, had lower HIV prevalence (0.3% and 0.7%, respectively).

HIV prevalence was found to be higher in London (5%) compared with elsewhere in England and Wales (0.4%) and similar in women (1.8%) and men (1.6%).

Five factors were included in multivariate modelling after adjustment: survey year; recruitment location; length of injecting career; recruitment setting; and having had a voluntary confidential HIV test.

The odds of being HIV-positive were higher for the survey years 1990-95 and 2001-2003 compared with 1996 (p=0.001); higher for recruitment in London compared with outside London (Adjusted Odds Ratio 7.33; 95% CI, 5.60-9.59); highest for those injecting for 15 years or more (AOR 2.3; 95% CI, 1.61-3.28); higher for those recruited in the community versus those from the agency survey (AOR 1.76; 95% CI, 1.37-2.24); and higher for those who had ever had a voluntary HIV test outside of the survey (AOR 2.49; 95% CI,1.95-3.18).

Younger IDUs in London at highest risk of new HIV infection

The investigators used an adjusted model (adjusted for number of years injecting, recruitment setting and having had a voluntary HIV test outside of the survey) to fit location and survey year together, and the results suggested that the recent increase in HIV prevalence was mainly occuring in London (p=0.025).

To examine this futher, force of infection in and outside of London, defined as the yearly rate at which HIV-negative IDUs become HIV-positive, was estimated by fitting a model to prevalence data by calendar year and injecting career length. The results suggest that force of infection in London is higher amongst novice IDUs (those injecting for less than one year) and has increased over time.

Between 1992-1997, the force of infection amongst novice IDUs in London was 0.008 (95% CI, 0.002-0.02), whereas between 1998-2003 it was 0.028 (95% CI, 0.016-0.045), or almost 3% per year. For IDUs who had been injecting for more than a year, the force of infection was 0.13 lower across all time periods. Since age and length of injecting habit were found to be highly correlated (p=0.001), this suggests younger IDUs in London are acquiring HIV more rapidly than older IDUs in London or elswhere.

This increase in new HIV infections is similar to the 3.4% rate found in a recent London-based cohort study.

Awareness of HIV infection

Overall, 54% of the total cohort had ever taken an HIV antibody test outside of the surveys.

Of those testing HIV-positive, 81%( 371/461) reported ever having taken an HIV antibody test. Of those who reported the results of their last HIV test, 75% (193/259) were aware of their infection.

In 2002-2003, however, only 69% (25/36) of those who were HIV-positive and who reported the results of their HIV antibody test were aware of their infection.

Is UK policy to blame?

Although the combined surveys found that reported needle- and syringe-sharing in the previous month remained uniformly high both in London (31%) and outside London (29%) in 2002, the higher force of infection in London may reflect higher HIV prevalence amongst IDUs in London compared with those outside London, as well as an increased prevalence of injecting drugs, crack cocaine in particular.

However, the authors point out that in 1998, the UK’s national drug strategy changed its focus from harm-reduction and the reduction of blood-borne viruses to “wider social harms, in particular drug-related crime.” They suggest that this “simultaneous shift in the focus of policy and service provisioning for drug users in England and Wales” may have “unintentionally hindered the development and re-invigoration of harm reduction measures in response to evolving patterns of drug use and risk behaviours.”

In addition, younger IDUs would not have been exposed to either national or targeted HIV prevention campaigns that took place earlier in the HIV epidemic.

It also appears that many of the recently-infected IDUs are foreign nationals. “Data on country of birth from clinicians’ reports of newly diagnosed HIV infections indicate that two-thirds of HIV-infected IDUs diagnosed in the UK in 2003 were born in another country,” the authors write. Thus the recent increase in HIV prevalence in London may reflect recent patterns of emigration to London, particularly from south-western and eastern Europe where the prevalence of HIV is higher among IDUs than in other risk groups.

Reference

Hope VD et al. HIV prevalence among injecting drug users in England and Wales 1990 to 2003: evidence for increased transmission in recent years. AIDS 19:1207-14, 2005.

HEPATITIS C ‘EPIDEMIC AMONG LONDON DRUG USERS’

By Lyndsay Moss, PA Health Correspondent

Cases of hepatitis C among young drug users in London are reaching epidemic levels, researchers warned today. The number of people who inject drugs who now have HIV is also worryingly high, according to a study published in the British Medical Journal. The researchers blamed the Government’s current drug policy for failing to protect this high risk group from bloodborne viruses like hepatitis C.

The team, from Imperial College London, the Health Protection Agency and the London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine, estimated that four in 10 new drug users in London now had hepatitis C, which can cause fatal liver damage.

They also estimated that 3% of injecting drug users was now infected with HIV. The results were based on tests involving 428 drug users who had been injecting for six years or less. Hepatitis C and HIV can be spread by sharing needles and the researchers found high levels of syringe-sharing during their study. One in four reported injecting with needles and syringes used by someone else in the past four weeks.

Researcher Dr Ali Judd, based at Charing Cross Hospital, west London, said: “Hepatitis C is now spreading at epidemic levels across London and HIV incidence is worryingly high, which if unchecked will lead to an increase in the total number of HIV infections.

“There is an urgent need for new and comprehensive programmes to tackle this growing number.”

Dr Matthew Hickman, from Imperial College London, added: “For the past six or seven years Government drug policy has focused on drugs and crime, and has been successful in expanding specialist drug treatment, especially through referral from criminal justice. “However there is a need now to reinvigorate harm reduction policies that prevent transmission of hepatitis C and HIV.”

A Department of Health spokeswoman said the Government was committed to driving down cases of hepatitis C and other blood-borne infections like HIV.

“Almost £500 million will be spent on drug treatment in 2004-05 and we recently announced that all Drug Action Teams will get a 55% increase in their allocations between 2006 and 2008. “The extra funding in the last few years has led to many more drug users engaging in treatment and an increase in the numbers successfully completing treatment.

“This is good news as there is clearly a link between getting people into treatment and substantially reducing the rate of blood-borne diseases.” The spokeswoman added: “A Hepatitis C Action Plan for England was launched by the Department of Health in June 2004 calling for a review of harm reduction services to prevent hepatitis C transmission. “Such services include provision of needle exchange services in the community, safe disposal of used needles and syringes and provision of specialist drug treatment services.”

One in 50 injects drugs, research finds

The government has been urged to step up its efforts to tackle drug use after research showed levels of use in English cities to be higher than previously thought.

A study published today revealed that as many as one in 50 young people and adults in three major English cities were injecting drugs.

This statistic is higher than previous Home Office figures, which estimated that in 2001, 0.3% of the population between 15 and 64 years old were injecting drug users.

Using information from sources including drug treatment centres and syringe exchange schemes between 2000-01, researchers from Imperial College London and Liverpool John Moores University studied levels of drug use in London, Liverpool and Brighton.

They discovered that the proportion of adults and young people between 15 and 44 who were injecting drugs was 2% in Brighton, 1.5% in Liverpool and 1.2% in London.

Based on the rates for each city, the researchers said that these figures equated to between 10 and 18 patients in a typical general practice list of 2,000 patients, with 900 aged 15 to 44.

“Thus, in Brighton, Liverpool and London the prevalence of injecting drug use among young adults is as common as diabetes and greater than many other chronic conditions such as epilepsy or psychosis,” the researchers said.

The study also found injecting drug-users (IDUs) were more likely to die of their habit in Brighton. Overall, around 1% of IDUs die from an overdose each year, but in Brighton this rate was twice as high.

The government wants to increase the number of problem drug users in treatment programmes in coming years, but researchers said the figures on which the target was based were flawed and more effort was needed to reach the targets.

“The government aims to double the number of problem drug users in treatment,” the authors said. “In the three sites [looked at in the study], there is ample opportunity for this [drug treatment], given that less than one in four IDUs are in receipt of treatment at any one time. Unfortunately, the data on the numbers in treatment were of poor quality and requires urgent improvement.”

The research also revealed a shortage of sterile needles in each of the cities studied. Around 5 million syringes were distributed each year in London, 400,000 in Brighton and 560,000 in Liverpool.

This works out at 190 syringes per person in Brighton and Liverpool – one used every two days – and slightly less in London at about one used every 2.5 days.

“Given that users inject on average twice a day, this would suggest that current levels of activity provide sterile equipment for approximately 27% of all injections by users in Brighton and Liverpool and 20% in London,” the researchers said, adding that this low take-up increased the risk of diseases being spread.

 

Sources:http://www.aidsmap.com/en/news/EEC07012-CFBC-42DE-A7C6-4E6A83B319B5.asp http://society.guardian.co.uk/drugsandalcohol/story/0,8150,1281633,00.html
Press Association Thursday August 12, 2005


These studies show that the harm reduction strategies of providing needles do not result in decreased HIV infection….. More emphasis on drug prevention is indicated.  The research shows that two thirds of those testing positive are not British born nationals…..the social costs of the spreading of HIV and HEP C plus the costs to the over-burdened NHS surely indicate the need for health testing of all people taking up residence in this country?

Filed under: Social Affairs (Papers) :

This paper was developed as part of a wider training programme in drug prevention for St. John Ambulance. Although it was published in 1999 the points made are still very relevant today.

By Peter Stoker, Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance

‘All that is necessary for the triumph of evil is that good men do nothing’.
Edmund Burke 1729-97

‘We have seen
Good men made evil, struggling with evil
Straight minds grow crooked, fighting crooked minds
Our peacefulness betrayed us; We betrayed our peace
Look at it well.
This was the good town once’.
From The Good Town by Edwin Muir 1887-1959

Historical background

Although the primary purpose of prevention programmes is to address avoid contact with drugs, it is necessary that we also look at attempts to relax the laws that relate to drugs. Why essential? Because the status of the law is fundamental to the structure of prevention. There is no point on concentrating on building a “a beautiful tower of prevention” whilst ignoring somebody else undercutting the foundations. We often don’t give as much time as we should to considering fundamental questions, but they can teach us a lot, and two current questions we should perhaps ask ourselves are:

What is so good about prevention?
What is so bad about legalisation?


I’ll offer you my answer. Prevention delivers on the promise of enriched lives in wholly healthy people positively inter linked with one another across whole communities and society as a whole. Legalisation gives encouragement to negative, self-centred and health compromising behaviours in the individual and across society. The law defines how we feel about behaviour in general and as such the law is one corner stone of prevention; remove it and you risk total collapse of your prevention structure.

Whilst the drug culture covers many countries of the world it can usefully be studied by paying particular attention to our own country and to America. These two countries have been said to have long had a “Special Relationship”, but in these days of a drug promoting culture this phrase has taken on a more sinister meaning.

Britain and America have long been associated on the drug scene. You could say an early ‘War on Drugs’ came when the Americans threw all our tea into Boston Harbour! But more serious developments started in the 1960’s and 70’s as marijuana in the USA merged with hippie culture, anti-Vietnam protests, and big-time rock/pop music. In Britain we had our anti-nuclear protest groups, we had (they tell me) the Swinging Sixties, and we had the Beatles. Legend has it that it was Bob Dylan who turned the Beatles on to dope, thence to travel through the gateway into Strawberry Fields watched over by Lucy in the Sky with Diamonds (or LSD for short).

By the late 60’s an ambitious young American lawyer, Keith Stroup had conceived the idea of NORML, the National Organisation for the Reform of Marijuana Laws, ‘Playboy’ Hugh Hefner bankrolled it for 10 years, and the battle for legal pot was under way. Britain wasn’t really turning on yet; pot use was viewed stereotypically as the preserve of musicians (see Harry Shapiro’s book ‘Waiting for the man’ pub. Mandarin 1990), immigrant West Indians, and degenerate intellectuals. But we would catch up fast.

NORML and its bizarre fellow travellers like the Yippies (a bizarre group of loony activists) tended to go up to the front door and flamboyantly say what they wanted out loud. This had the effect of generating lots of opposition which usually beat them. The lesson they learnt was twofold: (a) if you’re going to the front door wear suits and don’t shout and (b) better still, go round the back, sneak in and take what you want. The Drug Policy Foundation was the eventual manifestation of the first lesson, together with the unrestrained manufacture of ‘reasons’ why the general public should feel good about pot. Use the hemp (it is the same plant) to make clothes; plant the bushes to “save” the atmosphere, and – above all – use it as a “medicine”; all these and more devices have been deployed. The ‘medical use’ gambit came in while Stroup was still building NORML; in the 70s NORML are on public record as bragging ‘We will use the medical marijuana argument as a red herring to give pot a good name’. And still it goes on. Meanwhile, under item (b) a steady infiltration of key offices was sustained, and is still very much a factor today.

As we worked our way through the 80’s there was still no sign of America buckling under drug culture pressure. Levels of use had peaked and were in decline as PRIDE and other parent-youth prevention groups got into their stride.

Britain was by now moving too. In 1981 the government-funded Standing Conference on Drug Abuse (SCODA) passed a resolution understood to be still in force today calling for decriminalisation of cannabis. One member of SCODA around that time was LCC, the Legalise Cannabis Campaign, thus demonstrating another lesson legalisers learnt i.e. if you can’t beat ’em, join ’em, then persuade ’em from within.

Thus far the link between legalisers across the Atlantic divide were tenuous and occasional. One reason for this might well have been a xenophobia amongst British workers in the field; a distaste for foreigners which was out of all proportion to the rest of Britain’s population (who these days seem to be in love with things American). Whatever the reason, not much happened for some time but then in the mid 80’s changes started. A bridge was constructed with one end in Washington DC and the other end in Liverpool, England. Why Liverpool? Because it was a fountainhead of British drugfolk wisdom, and was saying things the American legalisers wanted to hear. Liverpool has long had a severe drug problem. It has also had a vigorous dislike of London and its lawmakers, dislike based in the class struggle and regional inequalities in funding. Drug workers nation-wide tended to affinity with Liverpool and the views expressed in its magazine, the Mersey Drugs Journal; it seemed to talk more like the clients they dealt with, they identified with and (in my opinion) too often over-identified with. Their near-neighbour Manchester formed an enthusiastic axis with them which to this day constitutes a powerful influence on UK drug wisdom.

Sometime around 1986 British drug workers from Liverpool-Manchester axis were invited to speak at a NORML conference in Maryland. They were feted and hosted by pro-drug, academic, ‘celebrities’ such as Norman Zinberg. They visited NIDA and other agencies, meeting officials who (allegedly) “confessed privately” that the War on Drugs was failing. The Brits returned to report that (a) they had nothing to learn from the Americans and (b) the 12-step method – the basis of the worldwide AA movement – was (quote) “cr*p”. (When asked what the 12 steps were, they said they didn’t know (but they did know they were “cr*p”). The Mersey Drug Journal’s front page at the time summed up their view: ‘Drug War – The Americans Go Over the Top’. This dismissal of the American Official Approach (including, of course, prevention) was manna from heaven to the xenophobic Brits who disproportionately populate the Health Professional Scene and paved the way for recommending the Unofficial Approach i.e. legalise the stuff.

One important aspect, however, distinguished the British legalisation strategy, and was given a fortuitous boost by a tragic new development in the health scene. AIDS was now a reality in Britain as well as America, and amongst many in Britain the view expressed was that AIDS represented “a greater risk to society than drugs”. The incidence of AIDS gave the British Harm Reduction movement a great shove forward, and coincided with the emergence of America’s Drug Policy Foundation as a major player in drug legalisation.

Current Situation

The main section of this paper will now address the following headings:

(a) What does ‘the professional subculture’ mean?

(b) What drives this sub culture?

(c) Who is involved?

(d) How do groups like this obtain and retain power?

(e) What are some of the typical tactics?

(f) What are we on the prevention side doing wrong and what might we do better?

What does professional subculture mean?

This title refers to people who work in various professional settings but who have, for a variety of reasons, elected to act in ‘subcultural’ ways; they will seek to disrupt the status quo and replace it with something which they find more amenable. In the case of drugs this is generally turned out to be a more libertarian or acquiescent approach to the use of drugs and to the legislation around them. Some , but not all of the groups which these professionals belong to include Politicians, Judges, Policemen, Educators, Health workers, Social workers, Probation officers, Prison workers, Economists and of course, never to be over looked, the Media. These activists are always a minority of each of these professional groups, but they do make a lot of noise, and there is a lot of truth in the proverb that ‘the squeaky wheel gets the most grease’; certainly the dissident or activist professional get the most coverage in the media. This is only partly due to the fact that the media themselves are part of the problem, in that a number of them are – more or less – of a libertarian inclination; the rest of the explanation can be attributed to the fact that dissent and activism sells more copy than does the actions of those who seek to preserve the status quo, or even to enhance it- such as we prevention workers.

What drives such people, or groups?

It is a fundamental mistake to imagine that everybody on the pro-drugs side of the fence is there for the same reason. The reasons are many and very varied. Perhaps four main categories can be defined as Power, Money, Attraction and Ideology. Fringe activities like pushing for legalisation or decriminalisation of drugs most often comes from the people who are on the fringe of power but would like to be in the centre. This quest for power can sometimes produce strange alliances, for example in Norway the pro drug alliance combines the right wing Fascist group with the extreme left wing Anarchist group. Some see the use of drugs as a way to create revolution. Stalin was one of these, and a quote from his writings is:

‘By making readily available drugs of various kinds; by giving a teenageralcohol; by praising his wildness; by strangling him with sex literature and advertising to him or her . . . the psycho-political/preparation can create the necessary attitude of chaos, idleness and worthlessness into which can then be cast a solution that will give the teenager complete freedom every where. If we can effectively kill the national pride and patriotism of just one generation ,we will have won that country. Therefore there must be continued propaganda to undermine the loyalties of citizens in general and teenagers in particular.’


At the other end of the spectrum of activism, but still on the pro drugs side of the fence, are the fatalists and the compromisers. These are people who would rather that drugs weren’t used but who believe that it is inevitable that they will be used by the majority, that drug use will be the norm, and that the best one can do is to sue for a peaceful surrender with the drugs trade. The problem with climbing over to that side of the fence is that you are likely to be warmly embraced and dragged off to more extreme positions; this can be seen to have happened recently with Bolton MP Brian Iddon, in whose consistency five year old Dillan Hull was shot in what is reliably perceived as a drug-related incident. Iddon was elected in May 1997 and started off with fairly moderate statements about wanting to review drug laws; on BBC’s ‘You Decide’ programme he was heard at the end of the debate to say that he was now “confused”. His confusion has scarcely been lessened by some of the people with whom he has associated, and in November 97 he shared a bizarre press conference at the House of Commons seated along side Irvine Welsh, the author of ‘Trainspotting’ and Howard Marks, the former major smuggler of cannabis who served 7 years in an American prison, and who is now attempting to get into politics somewhere (he has tried Lincoln, where he lost his deposit, and is currently trying to become the mayor of his town of residence in Malta). Marks claims he is pursuing this political work to ‘give back something to all those pot users who have given him lots of money in the past’ (this is a paraphrase but is close to what Marks said). In truth, this ‘selfless’ campaign has already netted Marks large sums of money – he has sold around a quarter million copies of his autobiography ‘Mr Nice’ and he appeared to capacity houses in a various theatres, reading from this book and musing on his life. In reality Marks is still working the punters; the only difference now is that instead of selling them a poisonous substance he is selling them a poisonous philosophy. And with no danger of arrest.

The above has given at least some examples of what is meant by the quest for power and the quest for money. Another example of the quest for money concerns organised crime. Some people theorise that organised crime would be against law relaxation, because this would take the business out of their hands and put it into the hands of responsible people (like tobacco companies!). The evidence suggests otherwise. It is acknowledged, even by pro-drug campaigners like ex-Scotland Yard Drugs Squad supremo Eddie Ellison that nowadays the coffee shops in Amsterdam, which were to have grown their own in a ‘nice cottage industry’ approach, are actually receiving their supplies from the Mafia. The Dutch Minister of Justice has described Amsterdam reluctantly as ‘the crime capital of Europe’ and there are reports that the Mafia is considering moving its centre of operations from Italy to Holland because of the more conducive atmosphere there. It is also worth noting that the lawyers (and almost all of them were lawyers) who founded the Drug Policy Foundation – the most powerful pro-drug lobby in the world – can be found on public record as having often appeared as defence attorneys for the Drug Cartels . . . far from being automatically against law relaxation, organised crime has for years been moving its operations into legitimate businesses (to save costs of money-laundering, and to avoid the inconvenience of criminal prosecution). Were drugs to be legitimised then this revised legal status would scarcely represent an obstacle for them. Moreover, most of the proponents of law relaxation, quell public disquiet, suggest they would still expect to keep the laws in place for under 18 year-olds. In this hypothetical situation there would still be an enormous black market for organised crime to tap into, and if anything the pressure on the under 18’s would tend to increase, since supplies to over 18 year olds would be – presumably – coming from other sources other than organised crime.

As to the third main incentive i.e. the intellectual Attraction of being involved, this can be seen as one driving force amongst some of those arguing for law relaxation. It is not always easy to quit the centre stage and be put out to grass; some people like to leave their long-term employment by making one last mark. Policemen who have done this include the afore mentioned Eddie Ellison from Scotland Yard and Ron Clarke from Greater Manchester police. Those formerly on the bench, including Judge Pickles seem to find the attraction of radical statements sometimes to hard to resist. This should not be confused with the quotes made in 1997 by the Master of the Rolls who was misrepresented in the Sunday Independent as ‘calling for a review of the laws’. From a person who was present at the press conference that the Master of the Rolls was giving the subject was not even on his agenda. It came up towards the end of the conference, in the form of a question from the floor along the lines of ‘do you think the legalisation should be debated?’ The Master of the Rolls shifted in his seat uncomfortably and said something along the lines of ‘I am not minded to support such legalisation but I am minded to support the due exploration of the proposition’.

Ideology, the fourth reason, is a potent force – and in contrast to the other three reasons is less capable of change, in that you buy into it more emotionally than you would with power, money, or intellectual attraction. The Education profession is, by its very nature, more prone to this tendency, (see pages 7, 8 for more). The manifesto entitled ‘Down with prevention, up with free choice and harm reduction’ has spanned more than 15 years now (during which time use has soared), and despite the National Strategy espousing prevention there is so far little sign of change in organisations like SCODA, ISDD, and the like. The word ‘prevention’ may appear now in documents or utterances, but this is the perfunctory genuflection of the non-believer. Until we get this one right we are always going to collect a bloody nose in the educational arena.

Who is involved?

The line up of professions in an earlier section (What does ‘the professional subculture’ mean?) gives some indication. Politicians may follow this course perhaps because they genuinely (and we would say mistakenly) believe law relaxation will improve the situation. Some educators and, within that profession some youth workers, would support the ‘choice’ for young people to use drugs as part of what they would see as a ‘freedom of expression’. Health workers tend to be ‘Sickness Workers’ in that they are almost interminably involved with the demands of treating people who have been in some way become unhealthy; it is therefore an inclination on their part to support expedients that reduce harm, and some of them would extend this non-logic to the relaxation of laws. They have been suckered by the proposition that it is ‘the laws which are turning otherwise law abiding people into criminals’. The truth is that it is the users who are turning themselves in to criminals and doing so knowingly – no one can claim to be unaware of the illegality which surrounds illegal drugs. This tendency to go along with the needs of the perpetrator and do little or nothing for the needs of the victims of the perpetrator (i.e. people around the user and – ultimately – the whole of society) is not only typical of the health service; it can also be seen reflected in social services, probation service, prison service, youth services, and others of the so called ‘caring professions’. Somewhere along the way they have lost the track and they are now seeking to relax the constraints on such drug users, in the mistaken belief that this will facilitate the workers having a greater sense of identity, a better relationship with their youthful charges. A form of selling-out which deserves no respect – and gets none from the users themselves.

Another group with a minority supporting legalisation are Economists. A commentator once said that ‘if you want to know the answer to 2 + 2, a mathematician will tell you 4, a politician will say “somewhere between 3 and 5”, but an economist will ask “what would you like it to be?”. The partial and simplistic models which some economists use to support legalisation arguments are very questionable, and do nothing to enhance the reputation of their profession. Last, but certainly not least, we have the media. There are some media commentators who are now starting to speak out against a pro drug stance; people like Melanie Philips of the Observer, Peter Hitchens on the Express, Mary Kenny on the Sunday Express and Lucy Johnson, formally with the Big Issue, now with the Observer. But the pieces that they get published are small in terms of ‘column inches’ compared to those that their more libertarian colleagues manage to get into their pages. In America where there is such a thing as a Freedom of Information Act a large sample of newspaper proprietors found a majority of them were paid up members of the ACLU; American Civil Liberties Union, or other similar libertarian groups. It would be interesting to see a similar survey conducted here in Britain! The Sunday Independent push for decriminalisation of cannabis (covered at the end of this paper) was an example of just how far this libertarian juggernaut can be trundled if you have enough resources at the back of it. Mention of resources brings to mind another vital libertarian resource and that is people in Finance. The most notable of these is George Soros; he is the man who made hundreds of millions in the infamous Black Wednesday crash of the British stock market a few years ago. He is also the top man in a trust which has assets in excess of seven billion dollars. Soros has expressed an interest in stirring up a whole variety of different causes but one of them most noted is his funding of the pro-drug effort. He has given, it is estimated, (and there may be much more that is not known) in excess of 90 million dollars to pro-drug campaigners such as the Drug Policy Foundation in Washington DC. He has also funded the Lindesmith Institute and he was also the major funder in a successful push to get cannabis ‘legalised’ for medical purposes in the States of Arizona and California in 1996. But he had a predecessor in funding the Drugs Policy Foundation and other similar groups and that is a man called Richard F. Dennis. Dennis and Soros have something else in common besides their penchant for funding pro-drug groups, and that is that both of them are Futures Speculators. What this means is that if a particular commodity which they have bought into suddenly becomes more attractive on the market place they stand to make vast amounts of money. This may or may not be what is driving Messrs Dennis and Soros, but it should not be overlooked in any analysis of these gentlemen. It is also worth noting that Soros has bought into two banks, one in Columbia and one in the Netherlands, and he has also large tracts of cultivatable land in Colombia and Venezuela, purpose unknown . . .

How do these individuals and groups obtain and retain power?

The short answer is ‘gradually’. (Look back at descriptions of how NORML and the YIPPIES use to behave and now how they do behave – quoted in the introduction to this paper.) It was the Fabian Society, a think tank started many years ago for socialist intellectuals, which came up with the phrase ‘the inevitability of gradualness’. By this they meant that any movement whose approach is gradual but sustained has a much greater chance of success than any ‘crash, bang, wallop’ approach. One also needs to tap into any other movements that are happening in your arena and, as it were, swim or row along with them. One classic piece of research in this context comes from a noted sociologist called Kelly; he produced something called Kelly’s Repertory Grid. What the Grid does is to demonstrate that if a person buys into i.e. swallows a particular idea then they are also much more likely to also buy into ideas which seem to be in the same philosophical family. Therefore, for example, if I am helping young people to turn their lives around, I maybe against punitive justice sentences, I may also be against racism, bullying, violence and other things that get in the way of advancement of these young people, I will probably have some clients where AIDS and HIV has become issue and therefore I will be for the AIDS resources movement and out of all these factors I will probably be for the relaxation of drug laws. (It could be quite a useful SJA study group subject to try and write down other similar groupings that satisfy Kelly’s Repertory Grid criteria and perhaps one way forward in that would actually be to get the relevant research paper by Kelly out of your local library).

What the pro drug movement will do and indeed have been doing very successfully for certainly fifteen years (to this writer’s knowledge) and perhaps longer, is to infiltrate and penetrate the relevant organisations in the drug arena. These include central government, both at representative and civil servant level; local government both elected and appointed officers; and also other professions and voluntary sector workers in Education, Health, Social, Justice, Police, Youth Service, and other related fields. Most importantly, it will also get close to the media: National, regional, local of all forms TV and radio, printed page, magazines, are important targets. Information is power . . .

Whilst this infiltration maybe subject to setback when elections happen, generally it is the case that only the elected representatives disappear. Thus points of view, attitudes and philosophy can be perpetuated in Whitehall despite changes in Westminster. Leading journalist Melanie Philips has referred to this in her landmark book ‘All must have prizes’. Although this book focuses in particular on the struggles around basic education (reading & writing) it is uncannily close to the struggles around drug education/policy. Quoting from Melanie’s book:

One of the puzzles about education in Britain is that the seductive ideologies that so tenaciously grip it reached their high point during the eighties. Yet that was the very decade when Britain was governed by Mrs. Thatcher, as she then was, the most ideological Prime Minister in modern memory, and a leader, who was ostentatiously committed to root out precisely such attitudes, in education and elsewhere . . . It didn’t happen like that. The education establishment fought back with every weapon at its command. The Thatcher government found itself embroiled in a tenaciously sustained and debilitating guerrilla war in which it was outgunned and out-manoeuvered at every turn. Civil servants elsewhere may have been cowed or convinced by the Thatcherite ethos, but the Education Department was a ministry apart. Whitehall civil servants forged an astonishing alliance with educationalists to frustrate or dilute ministers aims and to substitute their own agenda wherever possible. Political will squared up to an entrenched culture and lost. The result was that, despite bringing about some improvements, the national curriculum actually made matters worse in some important ways, by institutionalising some of the worst attitudes, then giving them the force of law.


And later, when she talks about tackling academia in the context of English teaching;

But opposition to the English proposal was not confined to the formulation of Dons safely coralled within their ivory towers. It constituted instead a well developed network which had become so well integrated with the political institutions that reform had become impossible. The English teachers boasted they would subvert the reform from within, and they were correct.

In her column in the Observer on 21st September 1997 the title of the piece was ‘The Tories education policies were savaged by civil servants and academics. The same people can now scupper Blunkett’.

This article describes how the forces at play that Melanie had noticed in the Thatcher government are still in play and quite often seen to be involving the same civil servants and supporters. She says;

‘What price now David Blunkett’s determination to root out rotten practice in the class room? That central control will be used to mask the fact that there is no control. There won’t be, unless Tony Blair realises that many of the people upon whom he relies to produce education reform are the problem, not the solution, and replaces them, quickly’.


This all has a strong resonance for professionals working to counter the drug problem, and the main lever in the drugs context is so-called Harm Reduction. The practice of engaging with known users to reduce the harm they do to themselves, pending their cessation of use, is as old as drug services themselves. What is new is the extension of harm reduction ‘advice’ to all and sundry whether they are users or not, under the limp assertion that they might all need it in due course. Coupling this with a perfunctory prevention agenda – or in most cases no prevention at all – has the not-unexpected result of increasing use. This is then advanced as proof of the failure of ‘prevention’ and the need for even more ‘harm reduction’. A more honest description for this process would be ‘A Trojan Horse with legalisers hidden inside it’.

What tactics are employed by the pro drug lobby?

From Sumo to Judo – a good metaphor for what has happened to the tactics of the pro drugs lobbies. In the past they tried to make themselves big and push their opponents out of the ring, as a Sumo wrestler might. What they have now learnt is there is more to be gained by less effort if one works to use the energy of the opponent to trip them or otherwise flip them out of your path, as a judo fighter might. Thus, in Britain we currently have many people who are known to be sympathisers of pro-drug attitude insisting vociferously that ‘what we need is lots more drug education’. What they actually mean is ‘we need lots more of our kind of education about drugs and we are the people to deliver it’. Because the appropriate government and voluntary sector departments have been infiltrated there is an in-built system of control; this is of course supplemented by the degree of infiltration that is in the media. Taken together this is a potent combination of position and influence. If such sectional interests are allowed to advise and thus influence who will get money in the future then this also means that money, which is the ‘third leg’ to power, is in the hands of the same people. In December 1997 some of our European colleagues put together a bid for funding to do valuable prevention work across Europe; some of this work is proposed for Britain and for the Republic of Ireland. When the list of people reviewing the bid on behalf of European community (the funders) came to our notice it was immediately apparent that the names on it could have not been worse. People unsympathetic to prevention were in command of the key positions, able to decide who would be allowed to pass and who would be turned back.

When the National Children’s Bureau launched a new Drugs Education Forum the launch in 1996, which lasted two days, was opened by Lord Henley, one of the Education Ministers of that time. Lord Henley opened the conference by saying that he was delighted to see so many people committed to the government’s aims of discouraging drug use and of returning current users to a drug free status as soon as possible. After a few other supportive remarks he left, to return to the House. Scarcely had the doors finished swinging behind him than the next speaker stood up and said ‘Well, what ever you may think about the government strategy . . .’ a snigger rippled its way around the room and off we went on a dissection of the government’s approach and how it should be replaced with a harm reduction based approach. It was evident at this conference that all of the ‘old crowd’ who are known to be supporters of a harm reductionist approach were present, and it was also – sadly – noticeable that some of the more recent people entering the scene were being absorbed into this jolly little coterie. Department for Education health education coordinator John Ford startled some, including this writer, at the conference by delivering an apology for the Leah Betts video ‘Sorted’. He ‘explained’ that it had been put together in a hurry and that the Education Department hadn’t really had much input to it etc. etc. the broad impression was gained that it was not something with which they wished to be associated. (The video has been reviewed by this writer and is found to be generally not sensationalised; it certainly is emotional and emotive but then it is a true reflection of the feelings of the Betts family at that time). The Drug Education Forum has gone on to collect other supporters of the Harm Reduction orthodoxy; a token presence of Prevention workers is heavily outnumbered. In autumn of this year DEF’s steering Committee introduced a small but very significant change to the Mission Statement. Formerly it has expressed the aim of skilling young people “to make informed choices to resist drug misuse”. After the change the aim now is only “to make informed choices”. Resisting drug misuse is apparently not what is wanted!

The effect of all this intellectual conflict can be seen in the local government scene, not just the ‘Three W’s’ (Westminster, Whitehall and Wapping). Drug Advisory Teams (DATs) each control a number of Drug Reference Groups (DRGs) in areas roughly corresponding to Health Authority areas. There are variations in attitude about and commitment to the national strategy at all levels; the range of variance could be said to span from strong support to lip service, with outright antagonism to some aspects of the strategy. Another generalisation with some credence is that the further you get from central government the less the support for the government strategy.

Senior government officials and MPs seem strangely reluctant to contemplate that this may be happening – the word ‘conspiracy’ is an anathema (and probably pays the opposition too much credit anyway), but there has been some acceptance of the idea that a ‘confluence of thinking on several matters by otherwise disparate entities’ is having an effect. This is Kelly’s Repertory Grid in action. (See above ‘How do these individuals and group obtain and retain power?’).

What are we doing wrong?

A short answer is difficult, but will be attempted; shortcomings exist in the following areas: – not looking at the overall picture. Inadequate awareness of what is going on elsewhere in UK, in Europe, and across the world.

– dismissing the opposition as insignificant.

– inadequate evaluation of prevention (though the funders must take blame here).

– inadequate co-operation; needless competition.

– sanguine outlook; what someone once described as another AIDS – the Apathy, Ignorance and Denial Syndrome.

– the assumption that ‘someone else’ will deal with this distasteful matter.


The emergence of the NDPA some five years ago was a breakthrough in addressing these shortcomings, but its tiny funding base (until October 1996, when National Lotteries awarded NDPA its first substantial funding) severely limited its effectiveness.

None of the above shortcomings is beyond correction; that they still exist suggest that Britain’s famed ‘Dunkirk Spirit’ may yet be required, to pull us through. Unfortunately Dunkirk (in the drug scene) may have to happen before people wake up!

The particular case of the Sunday Independent

In the Autumn of 97 the Sunday Independent launched a campaign for the decriminalisation of cannabis. It did this in response to a flat rejection of this proposition both by the government in the person of Jack Straw and by the new Anti-Drugs Co-ordinator (Drugs Tsar) Keith Hellawell. It is also known that Jack Straw’s junior minister with the drugs portfolio, George Howarth has repeatedly rejected this proposition under an unequivocal three-part statement:

(a) No legalisation of cannabis

(b) No decriminalisation of cannabis, and

(c) No debate.


The last statement i.e. ‘no debate’ does not mean people’s democratic rights should be denied; in fact there has been a very voluminous exploration of law relaxation over the past 10-15 years world wide, and in Britain there has been a very heavy focus on the proposition especially over the past 5 and more years. George Howarth’s statement of ‘No debate’ simply means ‘No more government debate; we’ve heard it all before and we have reached a rational conclusion, and we don’t propose to waste any more Government time and money on a dead duck’. To say this is anything other than eminently sensible is a travesty, but then nobody could ever accuse the Sunday Independent or other pot campaigners of being sensible. Editor (at that time) Rosie Boycott announced in her opening feature on this subject that she was ‘a recovered alcoholic’ and a lapsed user of cannabis; in the normal parlance of the field Ms. Boycott would never be described as a recovered but only ‘recovering’ and her claim of ‘recovery’ would be viewed sceptically since she is still using another psychoactive drug. Whether Ms. Boycott’s drive in producing this campaign is altruistically based in her own drug experiences and her wishes for others to share them, or whether it has to do with producing a sensational initiative which may boost the flagging sales figures of the Sunday Independent must be left for the reader to judge. Currently the Sunday Independent is at the bottom of the circulation league for Sunday newspapers, and its circulation dropped some 20% between the most recent yearbook figure and the previous year. It sells around three hundred thousand copies.

On the 11th December (‘97) Sunday Independent held a one-day event in Westminster-‘a stoned throw from Parliament’. Originally put forward (to this writer and others) as a ‘balanced debate, with an equal number of speakers on both sides’ it ended up with 6 for decriminalisation, 3 against, and one who presented a commercial for more science in reviews (he was a scientist).

In the ‘pro’ side were Gianfranco dell Alba from Lista Panella, an Italian Radical Party. To roars from the crowd he described how in Italy they had pressed for a referendum on drugs, got one, lost it, and so resorted to planned civil disobedience. From Lindesmith Institute (which George Soros funds) Ms Lynn Zimmer was presented as an ‘impartial’ speaker – incredible, in that she has been recently listed as a Board Member of NORML (the National Organisation for Reform of Marijuana Laws) and more incredible in that Lindesmith’s literary output is consistently and heavily biased towards decriminalisation and legalisation of cannabis. When Zimmer took the stand all pretence of impartiality fell away.

Despite heavy promotion the hall was around one-fifth empty. Few anti-decriminalisation people bothered to attend, and no papers other than the Sunday Independent and Independent covered this sham affair. Years ago there might have been an argument for refusing to debate with legalisers, but that bridge has long since been crossed. The best than can be done is to debate factually and with dignity, and also make sure that the decision makers are aware of what is really going on.

Epilogue

Recommended reading on this subject of ‘professional sub culture’ is a paper by Professor Norman Dennis (1997) entitled Social Irresponsibility: How the Social Affairs Intelligentsia have Undermined Morality. Available from Christian Insitute, Eslington House, Eslington Terrace, Newcastle upon Tyne, NE2 4RF (Tel: 0191 281 5664). Professor Dennis is not himself a practising Christian; he was invited to present this paper at a CI conference.

With so much of the information/communication system influenced by or in the hands of libertarians and their fellow travellers, all this might seem a hopeless cause. Far from it. This path has been trodden before, and success for a prevention approach has been achieved (see this writer’s comparison paper for The Royal Holloway training, on the subject of ‘Prevention”). The opposing forces may seem awesome, like Goliath – with you as David. But remember, Goliath lost, and the reason he lost is very simple.

He got stoned.

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

INDEPENDENT TWO REPORTS Exclusive report reveals the crisis among teenagers caused by their growing addiction to drink and drugs.

Teen Britain: The shocking truth Exclusive report reveals the crisis among teenagers caused by their growing addiction to drink and drugs. Experts warn of ‘health time bomb’ as ministers consider forcing GPs to report under-age sex to police and social workers By Jonathan Thompson and Marie Woolf.

Teenagers are facing what medical experts warn is “a mental health time bomb” caused by the abuse of drugs and alcohol.

New figures show that the use of drink and drugs has become common among children as young as 13, with one expert saying alcohol, cocaine and marijuana are “as ubiquitous as traffic on the streets”.

Doctors and counsellors say that record numbers of stressed-out adolescents are becoming addicts as they struggle to cope with the trauma of family break-up, exam pressures and the ever-growing obsession with body image.

The use of drink and drugs is also fuelling a growing problem of sex among young teenagers. Ministers are now considering forcing doctors to breach confidentiality with young patients if they believe they are having under -age sex.

72% Alcohol

The proportion of 14-year-olds who have drunk alcohol. Almost half of all 13-year-olds have also tried it. Mental health experts say people drinking at that age are four times more likely to become alcoholics

36% Drugs

The proportion of 15-year-olds who have tried cocaine or cannabis. Addiction experts say there is clear evidence that young people using drugs are more likely to suffer from psychiatric disorders in later life

32% Sex

The proportion of 15-year-olds who have had sexual intercourse, with more than one in 10 saying they felt pressured into it by peers. Doctors say the trend is fuelling an explosion in sexually transmitted diseases

25% Suicide

The proportion of girls aged 15 who have considered killing themselves or indulged in significant attempts at self-harm. Almost one in 10 blamed bullying and violence for their low self-esteem and depression.

Teenagers are facing what medical experts warn is “a mental health time bomb” caused by the abuse of drugs and alcohol.

New figures show that the use of drink and drugs has become common among children as young as 13, with one expert saying alcohol, cocaine and marijuana are “as ubiquitous as traffic on the streets”.

Doctors and counsellors say that record numbers of stressed-out adolescents are becoming addicts as they struggle to cope with the trauma of family break-up, exam pressures and the ever-growing obsession with body image.

The use of drink and drugs is also fuelling a growing problem of sex among young teenagers. Ministers are now considering forcing doctors to breach confidentiality with young patients if they believe they are having under -age sex.

Source: Independent Published: 27 November 2005


**********************************************
 

Teen UK: A generation sitting on a mental health time bomb Experts reveal the great harm young people are doing themselves now and for the future.

By Jonathan Thompson and Sophie Goodchild Published: 27 November 2005


Dr Dylan Griffiths has spent more than 20 years healing the minds of troubled teenagers. But the psychiatrist is shocked by what he is now facing on a daily basis. He is treating record numbers of disturbed young patients, unable to cope with the pressures of modern life, who are hooked on drink, drugs and underage sex, or who are so desperate they even contemplate suicide.

The age of experimentation among Britain’s teenagers is dropping every year, he and other leading health workers warn, creating a mental health time bomb which will create a generation of dysfunctional adults.

“For today’s teens, marijuana, cocaine and alcohol are as ubiquitous as traffic on the street,” said Dr Griffiths, who is based at Ticehurst House Hospital in East Sussex.

“Adolescents who self-harmed were rare 30 years ago. Today, self-harming is a dramatic, addictive behaviour, a maladaptive way for growing numbers of youngsters to relieve their psychological distress.”

The shocking extent of teen angst among Britain’s youth is revealed tomorrow in one of the most comprehensive reports ever carried out into adolescent mental health. Backed by counsellors, drug experts and mental health charities including Sane, the independent study commissioned by the Priory Group paints a bleak picture of the growing mental-health crisis among 12- to 19-year-olds.

Family break-up, increasing pressure to achieve at school, a lack of tolerance in society and an “anything goes” attitude are all contributing to a rise in the number of young people pushed to the brink of suicide, with others driven to experiment with drugs, drink and underage sex as a way of coping with stress.

More than 900,000 adolescents have been so miserable they have considered suicide, the study says. A million have wanted to self-harm and more than half a million have experienced bullying or violence at home.

The Priory research is based on interviews with 1,000 girls and boys across the country as well as an analysis of figures provided by the Office of National Statistics. More than one in seven 14-year-olds and one in 25 young people of 13 said they had had sex. Around one in every 13 teenage boys and girls said they had gone through with sex because of peer pressure, not because they wanted to.

Ministers are discussing measures to make family doctors warn police and social workers about young patients who are having under-age sex.

Peer pressure was also to blame for many adolescents using alcohol or drugs – one in 20 teenagers of 13 and around one in six 15-year-olds had experimented with illegal substances in the belief that it would make them look “cool” and be better accepted at school.

Another worrying trend is the increase in teenagers who have such low self-esteem that they think they need radical surgery to make them look “normal”. Nearly one in five 15-year-old girls and boys and one in every 20 young people of 13 said they had considered plastic surgery.

Counsellors, drug experts and mental health charities agree that action is needed urgently to prevent a generation of young people growing up with serious mental health problems. Dr Angharad Rudkin, a children’s therapist, said that the internet and mobiles, which have given rise to text bullying, were factors.

“There is a lot more stress now in the education system and a pressure on teenagers to be thin, beautiful, successful and to have sex,” said the clinical psychologist, based in Basingstoke, Hampshire. “There’s less guidance for teenagers, less mentoring and fewer role models for positive behaviour.”

Marjorie Wallace, chief executive of Sane, said that increased availability of drugs was a huge factor in the rise in young people suffering from mental illness.

“Young people who may have symptoms of mental illness rumbling under the surface are being pushed to flashpoint very quickly because of binge drinking and the availability of drugs, particularly chemical hybrids,” she said. “Many of them will go on to develop lasting mental illness.”

Virginia Ironside, the agony aunt and writer, said that the “curse” of a wealthy society was that young people had too much choice, so were confused about their identity.

“Pressures are absolutely nothing compared with what they used to be – pressure used to be going up chimneys. But at least if you are going up a chimney you know where you are.”

Additional reporting by Ese Odetah, Rob Tolan and Laura Herring

DRINK: Emma East, 15

“My home life stresses me out as I often have fights with my family. It means I can’t concentrate in school and it affects my schoolwork. My family don’t get on at all. I got really badly drunk once and was sick in the pub, so I haven’t touched the stuff since last Christmas. I had a really bad experience and don’t want to touch the stuff any more. I’ve been to church for the past five years. My parents don’t go; I go by myself. You learn things there to help you in your everyday life. It’s a support network.”

72% of 14-year-olds have consumed alcohol

DRUGS: Sevim Hodge, 16

“It starts at secondary school, where there is a huge emphasis on status. Drugs offer an easy solution to these pressures. From the age of 13 I was smoking cannabis with my friends. It was only my own willpower that helped me stop, and what I saw happening to my friends. I’m still friends with people who take drugs and at least a third of them now are regular users, but it can easily spiral out of control. I’ve seen cocaine taken openly in the playground.”

53% of 16-year-olds have tried illegal substances such as marijuana or cocaine

BULLYING: Michael Licudi, 17

“I was targeted by homophobic bullies outside my school and ended up on anti-depressants. Being gay, I’ve struggled because US rap culture promotes masculine stereotypes in schools. The media, particularly programmes such as Little Britain and The Catherine Tate Show, also legitimise a certain way of saying and doing things. If you don’t match those stereotypes, then it makes acceptance much more difficult. There has always been a cool group, but media influence gives them an added legitimacy and power.”

28% of 13-year-olds are bullied at school

SELF HARM: Imogen Townley, 15

“It’s a bit weird, but a lot of girls in my year cut themselves. I think it’s supposed to be some kind of statement, because they roll their sleeves up in class to show the marks. It’s like they’re trying to say, ‘Look at me, I’m so stressed out, so messed up and misunderstood, so beautiful but lonely.’ But all they’re trying to do is get attention.”

19% of 15-year-olds have wanted to hurt themselves

SEX: Amari Nunesi, 14

“Of course teenagers are going to have sex. We like doing it, it’s as simple as that. We like it as much as adults do. Society can’t stop it. Nobody can stop it. The only thing that would stop it is if they made more ugly girls. Family-wise it’s more difficult for teenagers now, because a lot of people don’t have two parents, so they don’t know who to go to with their problems. Sometimes you want to speak to your mum about something, but if you’re staying with your dad you can’t.”

32% of 14-year-olds have had sexual intercourse

STRESS: Steph Ashcroft, 13

“There are people from my school who have anger management counselling, and others who have counselling for depression and abnormal behaviour. I guess about 10 people in my year are having therapy. There are some kids who have hit teachers over the head with chairs. Sometimes they just go ape and throw everything about. There are a lot of people at school with a lot of issues, unfortunately. I get tense myself sometimes. I got an after-school detention last week for calling one of the teachers a stroppy cow.”

15% of 14-year-olds have considered taking their own lives

BODY IMAGE: Sebastian Emin, 13

“I am happy with my body but I would definitely change my height. I used to get picked on because I’m only 4ft 6in. Everyone sees something they don’t like about themselves. If you take a photo, you look at your lips or your eyes and you think they look horrible. We always find something wrong with ourselves. I think Peter Andre has got the perfect body. He’s more popular because of his looks – particularly his muscles. Britney Spears has the perfect female figure. She’s so slim.”

15% of 14-year-olds have considered plastic surgery

Dr Dylan Griffiths has spent more than 20 years healing the minds of troubled teenagers. But the psychiatrist is shocked by what he is now facing on a daily basis. He is treating record numbers of disturbed young patients, unable to cope with the pressures of modern life, who are hooked on drink, drugs and underage sex, or who are so desperate they even contemplate suicide.

The age of experimentation among Britain’s teenagers is dropping every year, he and other leading health workers warn, creating a mental health time bomb which will create a generation of dysfunctional adults.

“For today’s teens, marijuana, cocaine and alcohol are as ubiquitous as traffic on the street,” said Dr Griffiths, who is based at Ticehurst House Hospital in East Sussex.

“Adolescents who self-harmed were rare 30 years ago. Today, self-harming is a dramatic, addictive behaviour, a maladaptive way for growing numbers of youngsters to relieve their psychological distress.”

The shocking extent of teen angst among Britain’s youth is revealed tomorrow in one of the most comprehensive reports ever carried out into adolescent mental health. Backed by counsellors, drug experts and mental health charities including Sane, the independent study commissioned by the Priory Group paints a bleak picture of the growing mental-health crisis among 12- to 19-year-olds.

Family break-up, increasing pressure to achieve at school, a lack of tolerance in society and an “anything goes” attitude are all contributing to a rise in the number of young people pushed to the brink of suicide, with others driven to experiment with drugs, drink and underage sex as a way of coping with stress.

More than 900,000 adolescents have been so miserable they have considered suicide, the study says. A million have wanted to self-harm and more than half a million have experienced bullying or violence at home.

The Priory research is based on interviews with 1,000 girls and boys across the country as well as an analysis of figures provided by the Office of National Statistics. More than one in seven 14-year-olds and one in 25 young people of 13 said they had had sex. Around one in every 13 teenage boys and girls said they had gone through with sex because of peer pressure, not because they wanted to.

Ministers are discussing measures to make family doctors warn police and social workers about young patients who are having under-age sex.

Peer pressure was also to blame for many adolescents using alcohol or drugs – one in 20 teenagers of 13 and around one in six 15-year-olds had experimented with illegal substances in the belief that it would make them look “cool” and be better accepted at school.

Another worrying trend is the increase in teenagers who have such low self-esteem that they think they need radical surgery to make them look “normal”. Nearly one in five 15-year-old girls and boys and one in every 20 young people of 13 said they had considered plastic surgery.

Counsellors, drug experts and mental health charities agree that action is needed urgently to prevent a generation of young people growing up with serious mental health problems. Dr Angharad Rudkin, a children’s therapist, said that the internet and mobiles, which have given rise to text bullying, were factors.

“There is a lot more stress now in the education system and a pressure on teenagers to be thin, beautiful, successful and to have sex,” said the clinical psychologist, based in Basingstoke, Hampshire. “There’s less guidance for teenagers, less mentoring and fewer role models for positive behaviour.”

Marjorie Wallace, chief executive of Sane, said that increased availability of drugs was a huge factor in the rise in young people suffering from mental illness.

“Young people who may have symptoms of mental illness rumbling under the surface are being pushed to flashpoint very quickly because of binge drinking and the availability of drugs, particularly chemical hybrids,” she said. “Many of them will go on to develop lasting mental illness.”

Virginia Ironside, the agony aunt and writer, said that the “curse” of a wealthy society was that young people had too much choice, so were confused about their identity.

“Pressures are absolutely nothing compared with what they used to be – pressure used to be going up chimneys. But at least if you are going up a chimney you know where you are.”

Additional reporting by Ese Odetah, Rob Tolan and Laura Herring

Source: Independent Published: 27 November 2005
Filed under: Social Affairs (Papers) :

 

As we set sail for another round of political buffoonery revolving around the drug problem here in Vancouver, there is a lone cry from the crow’s nest. Sadly, there were 14 more drug OD deaths in Vancouver during the first year of operation of the ‘Supervised (formerly ‘Safe’) Injection Site’ (50 in 2003; 64 in 2004 as per the attached documents). I have seen more tragedy down here in the skids (and elsewhere across Canada) than I care to, or possibly can, remember. I do sense that the tide will be changing here soon (I hope) as we are currently drifting in dangerous and uncharted waters.

Tonight I am taking out a Global TV reporter and her camera crew at the request of our good Inspector John McKAY, a worthy seaman who is bolding taking a stand against all of this pro-drug legalization nonsense that is deeply muddying up the waters. I have been policing these barren waters since the mid 80’s and the surface is as choppy as it ever was. It is time to high time say that the “Emperor has no clothes on” and set a new, healthy and prosperous course. The efforts behind the ‘Four Pillars Model’ (prevention, treatment, enforcement, and harm reduction) have been in vain, if you pardon the pun, because there has been too much emphasis on the so-called harm ‘reduction’ components.

Let’s look at it this way. Ask yourself this simple but defining question: Which of the four pillars are anti-drug and which are pro-drug? The answer to this belies why we are veering off course and into shark-infested waters. The drug legalizers are pirates who have hijacked the harm reduction pillar, which they have neatly and quietly whittled down into a harm reduction rudder in order to ‘safely’ steer the ship while the passengers and the crew sleep.

I find it a bit ironic that the warning of ‘ice’ being sighted from the crow’s-nest is being taken seriously, given the death and damage that other drugs have wreaked in our society. One of crystal meth’s nicknames is ‘ice’. Society is waking up to the fact that there needs to be a ‘war on ice’. But what will sink S.S. Society is the 90% of raw destructive power that is below the waterline: the foundation on which this drug is allowed to sit (injection sites, heroin trials, ‘medicinal’ marijuana, legalization attempts, weak drug laws and sentencing, etc.). I can show you a picture of a drug addict that is now largely a waste of human potential. Was this due to ravages of heroin, coke, or meth? What drug was used first: nicotine, alcohol, or pot? Does it really matter? The end result is the same.

The passenger infirmary list is getting longer by the day. If those of us who are deck hands are not to be believed, and if the attached stats are somehow skewed, then let’s just go ashore and ask the store owners and non-drug using citizens about the highly touted success (by Mayors Campbell and ex-Mayor Owen) of the ‘Four Pillars’ (“One pillar and three toothpicks” as one astute politician commented on the overabundance of the HR efforts). No one seems to ask for the opinions of the stalwart deck hands of this ‘success’, none of whom are throwing up their hats in the air in celebration of these joyous announcements. Those in the thriving ‘junkie industry’ are tossing lifesavers made out of blood-soaked meat to the hapless victims who have gone overboard with their drug ‘experimentation’ in shark infested waters. All this is done under the banner of compassion mind you, as we must not take away the freedom of choice. I would argue that to a large degree, the addict is unable to soberly choose what is right for them anymore. Their loss of dignity speaks to that.

Meanwhile the sharks circle below hungrily awaiting for the Captain to declare the water safe for swimming.

What is not a laughing matter is the strong movement afoot to legalize all drugs (‘market regulation’ is the buzz phrase). The sham of “legalization though harm reduction” is at last being exposed here in Vancouver. I hope that the police are not willing to be used as pawns in the legalization game by speaking into their hats. The Vancouver Agreement has been contorted beyond its initial shape and scope. I feel that it is time to speak up or forever live with the shame and further social destruction that drug legalization will bring.

Ed Broadbent (leader of the New Democratic Party from 1975 to 1989 and human rights champion) stated recently that “Human rights are based on the inherent dignity of the human being” (June 16, 2005, ‘CBC One’ radio). Drugs have been robbing that dignity from tens of thousands of people. If some blackguards were killing and torturing people in the high seas as drugs do, then it would be an obvious human rights issue and the purveyors of powdered death and destruction would be forced to walk the plank, be keel-hauled, or thrown into the brig.

Drugs sap the potential of our youth. We owe them a better legacy than drug dependency, for it is very well-established that as the perception of the harms done by drugs decreases, drug use increases, and that is simply unacceptable and completely unconscionable.

The havoc that we have witnessed with drugs in our society to date is but the tip of the iceberg if the drug legalization movement is left unchecked.

Of course these comments are my own and do not necessarily reflect those of the VPD, but watch and see if they in fact are…Al

Al Arsenault, President
Odd Squad Productions Society
Box 1107, 516 Abbott St.,
Vancouver, B.C. CANADA,V6B 6N7
 www.oddsquad.com
cell: 604-788-7051
bus: 604-408-9945

Source: Article sent to NDPA by Drug Prevention Network of the Americas.  June 2006
Filed under: Social Affairs :

By Jill Schlabig Williams, NIDA NOTES Contributing Writer 
A multicultural version of a substance use prevention program tested in middle schools in Phoenix, Arizona, proved at least as effective as culturally targeted versions, according to recent research by Drs. Michael L. Hecht, Michelle Miller-Day, and Flavio Marsiglia and colleagues at Pennsylvania State University and Arizona State University. The NIDA-funded researchers compared a multicultural version of a drug prevention program–which included cultural values from all of the groups participating in the program–to two culture-specific programs. The latter programs are based on the hypothesis that messages matched to the student’s culture are more effective than messages that are not culture-specific.

“This is good news for the future of drug prevention in schools serving culturally diverse students,” says Dr. Hecht. “It is very difficult logistically to deliver culture-specific programs in culturally diverse schools. Multicultural programs are much easier to deliver, and now we find that they’re also as effective as culture-specific programs.”

Research has shown that students respond better to drug prevention programs when they see their culture and images of themselves represented in the prevention message. Moreover, minority youth respond favorably to programs that feature a teacher or characters from their own ethnic group.

“We know that kids need to see something of their own lives and cultures reflected in the programs,” Dr. Hecht explains. “But we wanted to test the effectiveness of multicultural prevention programs and compare their effectiveness to selectively targeted or matched interventions.

The prevention program, dubbed keepin’ it R.E.A.L.“, is a school-based intervention targeting substance use among urban middle schoolers. Its goals are to reduce use of alcohol, cigarettes, and marijuana; promote antidrug norms and attitudes; and develop effective drug resistance decisionmaking and communication skills. Through NIDA funding, “keepin’ it R.E.A.L.” was developed, tested, and evaluated in 35 middle schools in Phoenix. Designed to reflect aspects of the adolescents’ cultures and learning styles in content and format, it includes 10 classroom lessons that promote antidrug norms and teach substance use resistance skills, life skills, risk assessment, and decisionmaking skills. The intervention was reinforced by a public service announcement radio and billboard campaign and by booster activities.

Three versions of the curriculum were created  and delivered: one based on Mexican-American culture, one based on African-American and European-American culture, and a multicultural version using five lessons from each of the other two versions. The large proportion of Mexican or Mexican-American students (approximately 74 percent) in the study population contributed to the choice of Mexican-American culture for one curriculum version.

“In developing this program, we studied the process by which kids resisted drugs and used a narrative approach to teach these skills to other kids. The whole program is from youth through youth for youth,” observes Dr. Hecht. Stories of drug resistance were collected from adolescents in each ethnic group and used to write scripts for videos that were then performed and videotaped by local high school students. These 10 videotapes (5 for the Mexican-American version, 5 for the African-American/European-American version) form the core of the program. They teach resistance skills through enactments of successful drug resistance in recognizable locales, by youths similar to the students in age and ethnicity.

The lessons’ content is built on previous research on what is effective in drug prevention. In addition, researchers infused the curriculum with cultural norms and values that are predominant within certain groups–for example, the value of family to Mexican Americans, respect to African Americans, and individualism to European Americans. Affirming these values can help students use familiar behaviors and attitudes to resist drugs. The curriculum emphasizes family and cultural norms that discourage behaviors like drug use, equipping students with the skills to tap their social support systems to effectively resist drug offers.

“We don’t generalize about the cultures. We give them stories. We show them scenarios that come from their mouths. It’s always a specific situation, with no moralizing,” says Dr. Hecht.

In the fall of 1998, 25 Phoenix middle schools were randomly assigned to one of the three versions of the curriculum, and 10 schools were assigned to the control condition. Schools in the control condition received other drug prevention programs already planned for those schools, including a statewide antitobacco campaign. The research team administered a preintervention survey to all participants and then implemented the curriculum in 7th-grade classes in the 25 treatment schools. Followup surveys were conducted 2 months, 8 months, and 14 months after curriculum implementation. Surveys included questions on demographics; recent alcohol, cigarette, and marijuana use; use of resistance strategies learned in the program; antidrug norms; and intentions to accept substances. The final sample included 6,035 students, of whom 55 percent were Mexican American, 17 percent were non-Hispanic white, 9 percent were African American, and 19 percent were of other Latino or multiethnic Latino origin.

The results showed that the interventions were significantly more effective than the control condition, with statistically significant effects on the use of gateway drugs (alcohol, tobacco, and marijuana) and on norms, attitudes, and use of resistance strategies. Students participating in any of the three test versions reported better behavioral and psychosocial outcomes related to substance use than did the control students. Although use of alcohol, cigarettes, and marijuana increased over time for both sets of students, the rate of increase was significantly less for students who participated in the intervention. Those students also reported adopting more resistance strategies.

When researchers compared the three versions of the curriculum against the control group, they found that the Mexican-American and multicultural versions of the curriculum had far more significant effects over the course of the study. Students who participated in the multicultural curriculum had, on average, the smallest increases in use of alcohol and marijuana from pretest to final posttest, and the second-smallest increase in use of cigarettes. The Mexican-American and multicultural versions of the program had positive effects on several of the psychosocial outcomes studied, including intent to refuse substance offers and antidrug attitudes for themselves and their friends.

To determine if matching program content to a student’s ethnicity enhanced program outcomes, the researchers used the students’ ethnic self-labeling to categorize them as matched to the curriculum they received, mismatched, or mixed (i.e., various ethnicities receiving the multicultural program). Very few significant differences in program effectiveness emerged; therefore, the researchers found little support for the cultural matching hypothesis.

“We created an intervention that worked, and we found that the multicultural version worked as well as–or better than–the culture-specific versions,” says Dr. Hecht. “We found that it is not necessary to ethnically segregate students into narrowly tailored programs to achieve effectiveness. Rather, it is critical to incorporate a representative level of relevant cultural elements.”

The Center for Substance Abuse Prevention has recently added the “keepin’ it R.E.A.L.” curriculum to its National Registry for Effective Prevention Programs, recognizing it as an effective program and making it available to middle schools across the country for implementation. In the future, Dr. Hecht and his colleagues plan to study the effectiveness of offering intervention programs to students as early as 5th grade. They also plan to look at the process of acculturation, examining how Mexican-American youth make the transition to a new culture and language, how that process puts them at risk for increased drug use, and how to combat those risks.

“This is one of the first studies to compare multicultural and culturally specific substance abuse prevention approaches,” says Dr. Aria Davis Crump of NIDA’s Division of Epidemiology, Services and Prevention Research. “This research highlights the importance of continuing efforts to better understand how to effectively provide prevention services in a culturally diverse society.”

Source

Hecht, M.L., et al. Cultural grounding in substance use prevention: An evaluation of the Drug Resistance Strategies intervention. Prevention Science, in press

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

Ben Mitchell argues that drugs should not be legalised.
In the UK, the social and economic costs of drug misuse account for between £10 billion and £18 billion a year. Around 250000 problematic drug users’ contribute to 99% of these costs.1 These addicts spend around £16,500 a year each to feed their habits, with most of this coming from the proceeds of crime2. Hard drug users, who indulge in heroin, crack cocaine and powder cocaine, are responsible for 50% of all crimes3.
On the one side, them are proponents of harm reduction’. In the case of heroin, they want to see persistent users prescribed heroin under the N US.
Opponents compare the Dutch and Swedish approach to drugs over the last 25 years, and point out that drug use in the Netherlands, which has adopted a policy of ‘harm reduction, has seen use of cannabis amongst the young more than double, with use of ecstasy and cocaine by l5 year olds rising significantly4.
By contrast, in Sweden, the goal has been to create a ‘drugs free society,’ with everyone from the police to schools working towards such a strategy. As a result, overall lifetime prevalence of drug abuse, amongst 15-16 year-olds. is 8% in Sweden, compared to 29% in the Netherlands. In 1998, only 496kg of cannabis were seized in Sweden, compared to 118 in the Netherlands, now described as the drugs capital of Western Europe5 . This is because in Sweden drug use is seen as inimical to a civilised, tolerant society, whereas in the Netherlands drugs have been accepted as a ‘way of life’ and have contributed hugely to crime.
The UK’s approach to drugs is deeply flawed. with the government sending out confusing and misleading messages. Cannabis has been downgraded from a class B to class C drug; yet many people widely believe that cannabis has been decriminalised,
The ‘Lambeth Experiment’, which led the way to reclassification, caused an explosion in the number of drug dealers preying upon the area6. The experiment has to all intents and purposes ‘allowed’ people to smoke cannabis publicly. But, the moral and ethical question still remains: is it acceptable to tolerate something which is proven to damage both the health and judgement of individuals, and can also affect relationships with families, friends and the wider society?
There are now several experiments being conducted across Europe in an effort to contain heroin addiction. In Switzerland, since 1994, 1,000 of the country’s 33 heroin addicts have been prescribed pure heroin. The aim is to stabilise the health of addicts and prevent them from using heroin in public, thus taking their habit away from the black market.
Swiss officials claim that the experiment is working because crime is down, However, addicts are now becoming dependent on prescription heroin and hopes of weaning them off the substance have quickly faded.7
The Police Federation disputes that legalisation would cut crime. This assumes that the powerful international drug cartels would simply fade away into the night. More likely scenarios are that they would fight to maintain their lucrative street trading8.
Notes
1. The Government Reply to the Third Report from the Home Affairs Committee Session 2001-02: The Government Drug Policy: Is it working?, p.5
2. Home Affairs Third Report: The Government Drug Policy. Is it working?, Illegal Drugs, Drugs-related property crime. no.36
3.The Government Reply to the Third Report from the Home Affairs Committee session 2001-02: The Government Drug Policy. Is it working?, p.5
4 .Home Affairs Select Committee Report: The Government Drug Policy. Is it Working? Memoranda of Evidence – no.16 (submitted by the Criminal Justice Association)
5. Risk of Legalising Cannabis Underestimated: A Comparison of Dutch and Swedish Drug Policy. Criminal Justice Association, February 2002
6. The Dealers Think They’re Untouchable Now’, The Observer, 24 February 2002 and ‘London’s Drug Crime Hotspots Revealed. Evening Standard. 28 May 2003
7. Better Ways’. The Economist, 26 July 2001
8. Quoted in Home Affairs Select Committee Third Report: The Government ‘s Drugs Policy. Is
Working’., no.60 Source:CIVITAS; Institute for the Study of Civil Society
The Mezzanine, Elizabeth House, 39 York Road, London SEI 7NQ
Phone; +44 (0)20 7401 5470 Fax: +44(0)201401 5471
Email; info@civitas.org.uk
Back to Papers

Filed under: Legal Sector :

By NIDA Director
Nora D. Volkow, M.D.
Each year, substance abuse and addiction contribute to the death of more than 120,000 Americans and cost taxpayers nearly $300 billion in preventable health care, law enforcement, crime, and other costs, according to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. For NIDA, the key word in this assessment is ‘preventable.’ The best approach to reducing the tremendous toll substance abuse exacts from individuals, families, and communities is to prevent the damage before it occurs.

The science of drug abuse prevention is still in its early stages. Yet it has already made great strides. Twenty-five years ago, drug abuse prevention programs. where they existed, were based primarily on ideology and good intentions, Today, we have effective prevention programs anchored solidly in a base of empirical knowledge about fundamental factors that can promote or reduce substance abuse. These research-based programs have demonstrated that we can modify individual family, peer, and community factors that we know to be risk factors for drug abuse and, in this way, steer many young people away from abusing drugs. Two NIDA-sponsored National Prevention Conferences and a research-based guide on preventing drug abuse by children and adolescents synthesize key findings, detail fundamental prevention principles, and describe programs that have successfully applied these principles.

While recognizing these accomplishments. we are also compelled to do better to protect our children and adolescents. Buoyed by our successes and encouraged by our ongoing research, we know that science can do more to make drug abuse prevention more effective. The most urgent need is to make better use of what we already know. Recent research indicates that only one in seven of the Nation’s public and private schools offers prevention programs that incorporate proven elements and deliver them in the most effective way (see “Few Middle Schools Use Proven Prevention Programs’ NIDA NOTES, Vol. 17, No. 6). These findings underscore the need for additional research focused on accelerating the faithful adoption and application of research-based prevention approaches in communities across the Nation.

The difficulties inherent in translating precisely structured research- based programs into the culture and operations of diverse communities require that the scientists who develop programs and the practitioners who deliver them, work together effectively to improve drug abuse prevention. Toward this end. NIDA has been promoting a working alliance between research and practice to identify programmatic, organizational, and local circumstances that foster or forestall the adoption and effective implementation of research-based programs by communities, schools, and service delivery organizations. A primary goal of this partnership is improved delivery of currently available interventions.

Our recently launched National Prevention Research Initiative (NPRI) has fast-forwarded this research practice partnership with four large-scale community trials of programs that have been shown to prevent drug abuse on a smaller scale, In these trials, scientists and practitioners are delivering a research-tested intervention to populations in urban, suburban and rural sites. Each trial examines specific implementation factors, such as how different training methods affect a program’s delivery or how accurately the staff of a community service program delivers an intervention to different groups in various settings. Results of these studies should reveal systemic. structural and other barriers to implementation and strategies to overcome these barriers. Ultimately, this information will enable many more communities to adopt research-based programs and use them effectively to prevent drug use. for more information on NPRI. see NIDA National Prevention Research Initiative Begins Broad Range of Studies,” p. 5.)

Blending the knowledge gained from research with the realities of the community practitioner should do more than accelerate the adoption of current prevention programs. It also should foster the development and testing of the next generation of prevention programs. Data from our field studies will inform the new prevention approaches that flow from NPRI’s expanded basic and transdisciplinary prevention research and make them more feasible Thus, tomorrow’s prevention programs will more closely reflect the practical circumstances of the practitioners, the community settings in which programs are delivered, and the children, youths, and families who will take part in them.

Because our schools play such a central role in preventing drug abuse. NIDA is particularly interested in bridging gaps between the researchers and practitioners who develop and deliver drug abuse prevention program in our Nation’s public and private schools. In April, NIDA took an important step toward this goal by bringing together educators, researchers, and representatives of Federal and State funding agencies to discuss school-based prevention at a 2-day meeting in Bethesda, Maryland. More than 100 meeting participants explored the many challenges to and opportunities for conducting prevention research in schools and in integrating research-based programs into the school curricula and operating environment. Meeting these challenges and seizing these opportunities will be key to improving the feasibility and effectiveness of school prevention programs and increasing their impact on young peoples’ drug abuse.

The final step in getting effective approaches working in the community is communicating the latest scientific findings on preventing drug abuse to those who are in a position to apply them. To accomplish this, we are building on the success of our first research-based guide to preventing drug abuse among children and adolescents. An updated version of the guide synthesizes the significant advances in prevention science during the last 5 years and makes them accessible to parents, teachers, and community leaders.

Our National Prevention Research Initiative, our conferences and meetings. and our dissemination of the latest prevention information demonstrate NIDA’s strong commitment to closing the gaps between prevention research and practice This blending of science-based knowledge with community realities will result in wider adoption of more effective programs and major progress toward the ultimate goal: that far fewer of our Nation’s children and adolescents become snared in the destructive web of drug addiction.

Back to Papers

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

By Peter Stoker, Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance
to the ECAD 10th Anniversary Mayors’ Conference Stockholm
May 15, 2003

‘Creating the Alternatives – Policy and Prevention’

My links with ECAD have been partly with Tomas, but also in my own country with Peter Rigby – so sadly lost to us all last year. In giving this paper I would like to record my personal gratitude to Peter, and all that he did through ECAD in the struggle for sanity, in this sometimes crazy world in which we find ourselves
I have worked in this field for over 15 years; in Counselling, Treatment, Justice, Education and – not least – in Prevention. I have visited or dialogued with drug programmes and agencies in more than 20 countries and NDPA continues to exchange information and good practice with many more, through our membership of organisations like Drug Watch International, the Drug Prevention Network of the Americas, and the Institute for Global Drug Policy. All this has woken me up to the ‘World of Alternatives’, and this morning I hope to bring you some insight into practical, workable Alternatives you could apply in your own city.
Alternatives. Creating the Alternatives. It is said that we live in a sometimes crazy world, and one sign of this occasional craziness is when we give unjustified hearing to people who offer ‘alternatives’ to our present social and legal policies which may suit them very well, but which would be deeply dangerous to our children and to our society. Maybe we should blame ourselves for this; perhaps the Crazy Alternative might not sound so attractive if we became more effective in making people hear the Sane Alternative.
As we are in Scandinavia, let’s consider Hans-Christian Andersen’s story of the Emperor’s New Clothes – in which it took the innocence of a child to open the eyes of adults, an internationally-known metaphor describing blindness to the truth. An affliction taken to new heights when it comes to drug abuse.
Society obviously differs between different countries, but in western society we can see some broadly similar patterns. Let me describe what we see in the UK. Our society is one in which behaviour is conditioned by the conspicuous pursuit of consumption, by the demand for rapid gratification (‘Give me pleasure NOW); by an environment in which people march for of their rights but never for their responsibilities, by the idea that we have ‘ a right to be happy’, by the elevation of the Self above the Society (Me first) – and certainly by the elevation of youth, above all. [Ref 1] When you take all this into account, it is easy to see how drugs can have assumed a new prominence.
We also live in a society where ‘Political Correctness’ shackles our thinking, so that, for example, I can no longer call myself ‘able-bodied’ but must instead call myself ‘a person who is non-disabled’. This is just one more example of how clever use of words can confuse the mind, in the same way that the Tailor confused the Emperor – and the way in which the Emperor’s subjects went along with the deception.
This is the fertile ground in which drug-abuse grows, and one of the cleverest tactics of the pro-drug lobby is to convince you that there is no alternative – we must surrender to the inevitable; accept drug use, legalise it, and keep the harm to a minimum – for the users, that is!
We have allowed ourselves to be seduced by clever words and convoluted arguments – and a major part of this process is that the sane counter-argument to this insane dialogue gets only a tiny proportion of the media’s attention. If we were to apply the ‘Emperor’s Clothes’ logic that is advanced for drug abuse to other social behaviours there would be a national, if not international outcry.
Let’s take a fictitious example. Suppose you were designing a new social policy concerning rape. Would you think it enough to just provide services for the victim after the attack? Surely not. How about some Harm Reduction advice for the rapist? They have rights too, you know. After all, maybe it was just ‘recreational rape’ – and the rapist’s lawyer says he is ‘an otherwise law-abiding person’. Maybe if we relaxed the law this would improve things – and look at all the police time we would save! ……It is at times like this that I envy that child who showed us that the Emperor had no clothes. I envy him because his story ended with the community recognising the truth and common sense of what he said.
I have enough faith in human behaviour to believe that we will achieve this condition of sanity with drugs policy in the end – but I am also sure that it will not be achieved through apathy. Ultimately, we get the society we deserve. That is why the commitment all of you are showing through your support of ECAD – and through your actions which flow from that – is so very important. The question then is, how can we create saner alternatives?
My eminent fellow-speakers this morning will be telling you about their successes in treatment and rehabilitation. I have visited several of them in my travels, including Delancy Street – whose speaking slot I have filled today – and I can testify to what marvellous projects they are. They do an enormously valuable job, and deserve more support. But we don’t beat problems only by treating the casualties – and the sheer numbers of those with problems mean we have to do something else as well. Just consider the numbers. If we take the four major projects presenting here, and add in other large projects such as Betel in Spain, Delancy street in America, and Synanon in Germany, their combined throughput is probably something under 10,000 people a year, and yet it is said that in Britain alone we have more than 250,000 addicts. One thing is sure; treatment centres are unlikely to become redundant in our lifetime or our children’s lifetime.
Another concern is that whilst the projects presenting here today are models of good practice, not everybody matches these standards. A survey of British treatment projects on behalf of the Big Issue magazine found that most drugs other than heroin were rarely addressed by treatment centres, and that for heroin there was often only the ‘new solution’ of prescribing methadone. Big Issue found that far from weaning people off drugs, methadone prescriptions were supporting 33% of addicts for 5 years or more and 16% for 10 years or more, with both percentages rising. Moreover, 80% of methadone ‘clients’ were also using street drugs, with 44% of those on prescribed methadone using heroin on a daily basis. – and up to 50% of them still commit crimes.
If treatment and rehabilitation alone cannot turn the tide, what else is there? Let’s go back for a minute to that imaginary social policy we were looking at; the policy for rape. If we agree that rape is a bad thing; bad not just for the victim, but bad for the rapist and bad for society as a whole, our policy would not confine itself to just reacting to it, and treating the casualties. Our core policy would be to prevent it.
Rapes still happen, but we do not take this as evidence that the prevention of rape should be abandoned, anymore than we seek to dissolve driving schools because we still suffer car crashes. We take a rational view that if we were to be fatalistic about rape, there would be a lot more of it around. So, instead of surrendering, we work harder at improving our rape prevention technology.
I want however to qualify one point in my remarks: there is actually a limited scope for Harm Reduction – provided you deliver it to the right people in the right setting. It was properly defined and limited as to its scope in Britain’s first National Drug Strategy in 1995 [Ref2], a definition also enshrined in the 1998 strategy [Ref 3] which Keith Hellawell – whom you heard speaking so eloquently yesterday – designed and introduced. The ‘limit of scope’ is to use it only with people you know are users, on a one-to-one basis, as part of the treatment process; that is, whilst the user is moving towards cessation. Drug workers like myself have always practised this limited scope – indeed one could argue that there is a moral obligation to do so. But this practice only relates to a fraction of our population – it has nothing to do with the hijacked version of Harm Reduction [Ref 4] which is applied to the whole population, and which asserts that:
• You cannot prevent drug use
• You are inhibiting personal rights if you try
• Everyone may use at some time, so
• Guidance for everyone on how to use is the key, and
• Policy should be confined to reducing harm
This is a very cunning alternative – for if you introduce it, and then find that use increases, its proposers will say this proves that Prevention is useless and therefore Harm Reduction is clearly the right path to follow. A self-fulfilling prophecy. (The story of how this came about is too long to repeat here).
The truth is that in the past we have rarely tried to prevent, in the true sense of the word, that is, working ‘pre the event’. This is the Alternative on which I want to focus for the remainder of this paper, and in the process to give you some useful Alternatives to consider, from the examples I’ve seen around the world.
Let’s start with a piece of Prevention history. A common claim by the pro drug lobby is that “the Just Say No approach doesn’t work”. This has been repeated so many times that it has become a mantra – a classic example of the Orwellian principle; that if you repeat a lie often enough it becomes perceived as the truth. Saying that Just Say No “doesn’t work” is simply another way for the pro-drug lobby to claim that “the War on Drugs is failing”. Another cliche. Another lie.
Very few members of the general public know that in the so-called ‘War on Drugs’ a victory was recorded every year for 12 years, and that over those 12 years drug abuse was reduced by over 60 per cent – an astonishing public health success by any standards. [Ref 5] Even if they do know that, they are unlikely to know that one particular prevention programme was pre-eminent throughout the period. The name of the country? America. And the name of the programme? Just say No.
The Just Say No programme was much more than the chanting of slogans. It was a comprehensive personal, social and health education programme, backed up by trained volunteers and professionals. I have copies of their manuals and I can assure you of that. [Ref 6] But we can now see that a major factor in its success at that time – between 1980 and 1992 – indeed perhaps the main factor, was the culture of the society in which it was operating.
Culture is vital as the deciding factor in behaviour. And the key cultural force that swung into action to generate those successful years was not the Ministry of Education, or the Ministry of Health, or the Police and Courts – it was the community. Ordinary communities like yours, in cities across America. Parents were the main activists, acting just as that little boy did when he saw the Emperor – they exposed the truth, which the professionals had been too blinded by dogma to see. The parents shamed the professionals into producing truly preventive programmes – with the splendid results I have just stated. And those proven techniques are still available to you today – if your city only has the political will to use them.
America may have been one of the first to properly tackle prevention, but it was by no means the only one. Let’s take a quick trip around the world and see some of the other things that have happened in this context: Most countries have good and bad aspects, so in the time available this will have to be a simplified review.
Poland: The Warsaw Institute has seeded many good prevention programmes.
Germany: More than 30 of our Teenex camps, plus parent skills trainings.
Portugal: Projecto Vida and others have executed many good projects, including over 35 Teenex camps..
Belarus: Is keen to co-operate with UK on prevention.
Kazan: Has sent young people to UK Teenex prevention camps. Keen to do more.
Bulgaria: Excellent community structures are now addressing drug prevention and other services. Burgas, on the Black Sea coast, is an ECAD member and is one of the cities in which we have just started work.
Italy: Has changed to more preventive policies. Hosts the World Prevention conference 2003 – in Rome.
Belgium: Exemplary work has been initiated in the Eastern cantons, over many years.
Sweden: Has drug use levels far below the rest of Europe, largely from inducing a culture which discourages drug abuse.
Latin America: Countries like Brazil and Peru have vigorous prevention programmes. The next world conference of the International Task Force on Strategic Drug Policy will be in Argentina, next month.
Spain: Have just invited UK to co-operate on a primary school prevention programme.
Australia: Birthplace of two wonderful prevention programmes – Life Education Centres (now operating in several countries) and the Kangaroo Creek Gang.
New Zealand: an oasis of prevention – make sure you get a copy of ‘The Great Brain Robbery’ – one of the best advisory books for non-expert parents and community officials I have ever seen.
America: so much has been and is being done to prevent drug abuse. Check out the websites at NIDA and CSAP, which you can reach via the links on our site. I would also like to say a word at this point about a great programme, which has so many daggers sticking out of its back it looks like a porcupine. That programme is DARE. It is precisely because it has been so successful, so widely adopted, that it has become a constant target for the pro-drug lobby and the professionally jealous. Like everything else, it has had its faults in the past, but it has addressed many of these and is now launching a strengthened curriculum. Its unique involvement of police officers in a sustained relationship with schools – not just a quick visit – has many benefits in and beyond prevention. Already seven police forces in UK are using it, with more coming.
United Nations: Despite all our worries about the money and heavy pressure applied to it, the UN came up with the right result in its recent 46th meeting of its Commission on Narcotic Drugs – ruling out any weakening of drug laws. I am sure that the 1.3 million signatures collected by many groups – including ourselves – under the leadership of Hassela Nordic Network had a big influence, and I would like to add my congratulations to HNN for this tactical masterpiece.
Plenty of good news, then. But before you assume everything’s solved, I must emphasise that the well-financed and highly-resourced machinery of the pro drug lobby is having a significant and growing effect…

Holland: Their story is well documented, liberalization continues, despite polls showing that 70% of Dutch citizens want the lax drug laws rescinded.
Switzerland: We hear glowing reports of their heroin experiments, but this is hardly surprising when we learn that the head of the experiments is also the head of the Swiss branch of the International Anti-prohibition League, a major player in legalisation.
United Kingdom: We have been subjected to enormous pressure, with international backing for the pro-drug lobby, and we are almost certainly about to have cannabis re-classified to a lower class of legal penalty – ridiculously demoted to rank alongside steroids instead of alongside amphetamines. This is despite a wide range of new research against cannabis – and no new science in favour of it. But the good news is that both the Select Committee [Ref 7] and the Advisory Council to the Government have turned their back on all the dishonest argument, and have said they will not recommend legalisation or decriminalization – (and, for good measure, they have said the same thing about ecstasy). They have also exposed the ‘medical cannabis’ argument by inviting scientific trials, but ruling out any use of ‘cannabis as grown’ (because if its extreme variability and pharmacological unreliability as well as undesireable side-effects) and they also rule out any use of smoking as a delivery method. Their stated intention is to test extracts of cannabis, not smoked but ingested by normal medical means, and not to be of psychoactive effect. So, you don’t smoke it and you don’t get high – not at all what the pot lobby had in mind!
East Europe: As I have said already, there are good outcrops of prevention, but this region is held to ransom by pro-drug influences, most notably George Soros, who has put tens of millions of dollars worldwide into weakening drug laws.
Australia: When South Australia first decriminalized cannabis possession there was a significant increase in use by young people, compared to neighbouring states. Sadly, this experience has not deterred the liberalisers, and worse is to come. Western Australia is now considering following suit.
Canada: Policy is deteriorating in the same way as Australia.
From time to time I encounter drug liberals who assert that there is no proof of prevention. I usually refer them to the research work of Nancy Tobler; [Ref 8] she analysed no less than 240 successful prevention programmes. 240. And still they come, with their cries that there is no evidence. And yet if you press them on the subject, the more honest of them will admit that there is little or no evidence of effectiveness of Harm Reduction. Such evidence as there is can often be damning, as is the case with Baltimore in the USA; this city has one of the biggest needle exchange and condom issue schemes in the USA and yet it has ended up with the highest levels of drug abuse, the highest level of HIV infection and is amongst the highest levels of addiction. Harm Reduction may be having an effect in Baltimore, but it is not the effect that the public were promised. Coming back to Nancy Tobler; she looked at the 240 programmes and found 140 that had enough common factors to allow her to conduct what is called a meta-analysis. From this she was able to indicate the components of the more successful programmes. Another advanced researcher, Bonnie Benard, who is now with NIDA – the National Institute on Drug Abuse – has repeated the same kind of comparative exercise over many years, and from this has produced a set of “Criteria for Effective Prevention” which are a classic, timeless in their value. [Ref 9] A summary of Bonnie’s criteria is included in the written paper supporting this talk.
If I had to choose just one key criterion from what I have seen in all these countries, it would be Culture. Localised programmes will be effective locally, and programmes concentrating on one topic – such as self-esteem or drug awareness – may be effective in those areas, but not much elsewhere. If you are intent on generating a healthier environment in your city then you need to look to generating a health-oriented, prevention-oriented culture right across your community – in the home, in the school, in the workplace, in the youth organization, in the leisure areas, in the shops, in the churches and temples – and certainly in the media.
Culture can be artificially distorted, at least in the short term – which is where the media can be particularly effective, or particularly damaging. But cultural changes generally are slower to happen, and require steady application of energy. If that effort is sustained then change will occur, like the dripping of water that wears away the stone. The drug liberals have learnt this truth – we must learn it too, along with another truth.- that we sometimes forget that today has not always been . We did not always have the drug culture and the society culture we have now. It was changed before, by others. It follows that we can change it again.
What can an ordinary city do to produce a more healthy culture? One of the most comprehensive examples I have seen of this is “Project Revitalisation” in Vallejo, California. [Ref 10] The project is designed to tackle drugs, alcohol and crime in the city’s worst areas. The heart of the project is a strong community partnership: – the Vallejo Fighting Back partnership, Vallejo Code Enforcement, Vallejo Chamber of Commerce, Vallejo Police Department, Vallejo Neighbourhood Housing, California Employment Department, the Private Industry Council, and many neighbourhood associations. It works to integrate neighbourhood revitalisation, alcohol and other drug policy, neighbourhood safety, job-training, and co-ordination of human services into a comprehensive effort. The project’s goals are to sort out and regularize the jumble of disorganized buildings and facilities, regenerating the neighbourhood; to reduce crime, and foster safety and quality of life for the residents of these deteriorating, crime-ridden neighbourhoods.
Project Revitalisation is based on four principles:
• The physical make-up of a community has an important influence on its vulnerability to crime. This is equivalent to the very successful “Broken Windows” project run in New York [Ref 11]
• Neighbourhoods where residents have commitment and interest in improving their area can influence the level of crime
• Everybody, individuals and families, must personally gain from the project. You cannot expect people drowning in problems such as unemployment, addiction, lack of child care and other human service shortages to be interested in improving their neighbourhoods
• problems with alcohol and other drugs contribute to neighbourhood deterioration and must be specifically addressed.
In a five phase process, Project Revitalisation moves from initial assessment to detailed assessment, then to initial ‘pilot’ interventions before full implementation. The final phase is to reinforce the new stability of the neighbourhood by establishing permanent neighbourhood groups.
First reports of results from the project show encouraging improvements; there has been a reduction in police call-outs and an improvement in the perception of safety by residents – this is a very important feature in my own country, where fear of crime is often as crippling as crime itself.
The efforts to reduce illegal drugs are probably well understood already; particular alcohol policies that Vallejo introduced included:
• ‘Conditional use’ (trial) permits for regulation of new alcohol outlets.
• Improved ordinances to regulate existing outlets.
• An ordinance for youth parties, to reduce non-commercial access of alcohol by young people
• A social nuisance ordinance to hold property owners accountable for standards of building maintenance and for the conduct of their residents
• A rental property inspection ordinance
Vallejo is a very comprehensive scheme but I’m sure you will agree that there is no ‘rocket science’ in what they are doing. Their deliberately steady progress, involving all the elements of the community at each stage, is reminiscent of the excellent work done by Dr Ernst Servais [Ref 12] in the Eastern cantons of Belgium. Both projects recognised that unless you carry the community with you at each stage, the effect of your labours is likely to be short-lived.
In summary, then, what Alternative do we have? What tools do we have in our toolbox? We could list these under three simple headings;
• Before drug use
• Early stages of drug use, and
• Problematic stages of drug use
Before:
Culture. Prevention. Education. Parenting. Big Brothers and Sisters. Peer-group prevention. Policing for prevention. Media. Spiritual aspects. Workplaces. Sports (including FIT technology). Arts. Music.
Early stages:
Intervention. Counselling. Befriending. Harm reduction. Policing. Diversion (Alternatives). Containment.
Problematic stages:
Primary care. Treatment. Harm reduction. Justice. Drug courts. Restorative justice. Probation. Prison-based rehab treatment. Halfway houses. After-care. Relapse prevention.
Encompassing many of these initiatives, one brand new and usefully comprehensive addition to NDPA’s library has been the publication ‘Blueprint for a Drug-Free Future’ [Ref 13] by the Hudson Institute, USA.
Money – as always – comes into it. And because treatment is easier for accountants to count, it has traditionally tended to get much more of the available funding than other services. In economic terms, however, prevention gives a better return; even using conservative figures, prevention can be seen to give a payback of $6 for every dollar spent, [Ref 14] compared to only $3 for every dollar spent on treatment.
How might we inter-relate these services? Here is my model for doing that:
With the overall aim of a healthy society, the strategy relevant to the majority of the population has to be prevention. This does not mean that you have to accept anything in the name of prevention, or preventive education. You have every right to ask questions as to what a project is specifically aiming to achieve – and demand evaluations to make sure you get what you were promised.
For those who start to get involved – and they are still a minority – it is probably enough to expose them to prevention processes which they may well not have experienced before. Those who continue to stay involved will need more intervention effort, maybe even some form of treatment, but the outcome should still be that when they cease using this is affirmed by prevention processes. The problematic users are the ones we hear about most, but they are almost certainly only a few percent of your population. This whole structure needs to be buttressed by firm but fair legal and justice systems which firstly deter, then intervene, and – above all – correct aberrant behaviour. A justice system does not have to be confined to punishment, indeed I would argue that such a system is likely to be counter-productive; it should be a sensitive mix of punishment, retribution, restoration and rehabilitation.
CONCLUSIONS:
• There is no one programme around that does it all.
• What works for one person very well will not work at all for another .
• We need to see all of our services – prevention, education, intervention, treatment and so on as part of a continuous whole – and apply them holistically.
• We should not be afraid of having a variety of initiatives, but we should make sure that they are all inter-related.
• Don’t rush it, and don’t tamper with bits of the problem. This is like playing with the ecology – and will probably be equally disastrous.
• Always monitor and evaluate for process and outcome.
• Don’t be afraid to trust your gut feeling. If you have clear goals, then something which feels bad probably is bad.
• Don’t try to be an expert, but know where the ‘experts’ live – and in choosing them, be careful to check their background and agenda .
There is a great deal that you can do in managing a team of experts by asking some simple questions, such as: What are we trying to achieve? How are we trying to achieve it? What is it for? Is everything we are doing pointing in the same direction – if not, why not?
And remember – if one of these ‘experts’ offers you a wonderful new set of clothes, fit for an Emperor – get rid of him!
REFERENCES:
[up] 1. Stoker, P: Moralising, demoralizing .. the fight for Personal and Social Education. 2000. NDPA.
[up] 2. UK Government: Tackling Drugs Together. UK Drug Strategy 1995. HMSO.
[up] 3. UK Government: Tackling Drugs to Build a Better Britain. 1998. HMSO.
[up] 4. Stoker, P: The History of Harm Reduction. 2001 NDPA.
[up] 5. US Biennial National Household Surveys, correlated with Michigan Schools System. (Ongoing).
[up] 6. Just Say No International. Just Say No Club Book/Teen Leader Guide.1989. Walnut Creek, CA USA.
[up] 7. UK Home Affairs Select Committee. The Government’s Drug Policy – Is it working?. 2002. HMSO.
[up] 8. Tobler, N. Meta-analysis of 143 adolescent drug prevention programs. 1986. Journal of Drug Issues.
[up] 9. Benard, B. Characteristics of Effective Prevention Programs. 1987 acquisition. (Contact NIDA, USA).
[up] 10. Sparks, M. Project Revitalisation – Vallejo, California. 1998. Prevention Pipeline (NIDA).
[up] 11. Kelling, G. L., Coles C. M. Fixing Broken Windows. 1997. pub Touchstone, NY USA.
[up] 12. Servais, E. Before it’s too late. 1991. SPZ-ASL, Schnellewindgasse 2, B-4700, Eupen, Belgium.
[up] 13. McGarrell, E. F., Hutchens, J.D. Blueprint for a Drug-Free Future. 2003. Hudson Institute, Indianna.
[up] 14. Masi, D. A. Designing Employee Assistance Programs. 1984. Published by Amacom.
NDPA, P O Box 594, Slough, SL1 1AA, UK. Tel/Fax: +44 (1753) 677917.
Email: ndpa@drugprevent.org.uk
website: www.drugprevent.org.uk
Attachment to Peter Stoker paper to ECAD Conference, May 03,Stockholm
CHARACTERISTICS OF EFFECTIVE PREVENTION
By Bonnie Benard (With annotations by Peter Stoker to relate to the UK scene)
PROGRAMME COMPREHENSIVENESS/INTENSITY
A. Multiplicity: the causes of drug/alcohol abuse are multiple: personality, environmental, behavioural (Kandel, Logan, 1984; Hawkins et al, 1951). Programmes tackling only one area usually fail. You should target multiple systems (youth, families, schools, community, workplace, media, etc). Also use multiple strategies (information, lifestyles, positive alternatives, community policies) (Botvin, 1982).
B. Target whole community. School based programmes benefit less than community based approaches.
C. Target all youth. not just “high rise for prevention. Adolescence is seen to be a high risk time (for all youth in terms of health compromising behaviour. Labelling ‘high risk’ youth can provoke stigmatisation and lead to self fulfilling prophecies. There is however an argument for defining ‘high risk’ communities where an additional resource over and above the general prevention effort could be justified.
D. Build drug prevention into general health promotion. Drug abuse has been found by several (Lofquist, 1993) to be part of a complex pattern of interrelated factors e.g. delinquency, truancy, school failure, precocious sexuality, which share common antecedents.
E. Start early and keep going! Even in infancy there are influences in later behaviour. Developmental difficulties by age 3 are difficult to overcome (Burton White). Here it is of course relevant to mention Trevor Williams, Noreen Wetton and Alysoun Moon of the Southampton University team who have demonstrated so graphically in their “Jugs and Herrings” research paper that primary age children are not blissfully ignorant of drugs and alcohol. Prevention programmes starting from what children actually know are essential. Many secondary schools still seem to regard Years 11 and 12 as the age at which discussion of drugs or indeed sexuality) should be facilitated. Stable doors and horses come to mind!
F. Adequate quantity. ‘One shot prevention efforts do not work (Kumpfer, 1988) There must be a substantial number of interventions, each of a substantial duration Project DARE (Drug Abuse Resistance Education) initiated by Los Angeles Police and now in several other states delivers no less than seventeen onehour lessons to any given year and this is only part of the school programme.
G. Integrate family/classroom/school/community life. This is easier to say than do, but where it has happened results have been enhanced.
H Supportive environment, empowerment. Where young people are encouraged to participate and take responsibility their behavioural outcomes are improved. In Britain now peer education methods proven elsewhere are being piloted.
PROGRAMME STRATEGIES
J. Knowledge/Attitudes/Behaviour. Address these as a set, i.e. each must be directly tackled rather than assuming one will flow from another. The behavioural component is in part addressed by social skills development, but also supported by positive reinforcement activities drug free social/sporting events, commendations (preferably with something for everyone), media coverage, etc. Research suggests that Social Learning Theory (Bandura, 1977) produces some of the most profound improvements.
K. Drug specific curriculum. Affective education programmes that had not specifically covered drugs (including alcohol) were found unsuccessful, even though they addressed knowledge, attitudes and lifeskills.
L. Gateway drugs. So called because people now using heavy end drugs almost always started on these. Gateway drugs can be tobacco, alcohol and cannabis or, these days in Britain, even heroin! Concentration on prevention of these is therefore likely to prevent use of all substances. British research by MORI (Parents against Tobacco, 1990), showed that of youth who smoked tobacco 50% had also tried an illegal drug compared with only 2% of those who did not smoke tobacco. It should be particularly noted that cannabis is far from harmless: physical, mental and social damage is now being increasingly accepted as a reality.
M. Salient material. Whatever is used needs to identify with the audience, including:
• Ethnic/cultural sensitivity
• Appeal to youth interests
• Short term outcomes to be emphasised as important to youth as well as long term
• Appealing graphics and appropriate language, readability
• Appropriate to real age/reading age a key factor:
In a survey of 3,700,000 young American children, 25% of 9 year olds felt ‘some’ to ‘a lot’ of peer pressure to try drugs or alcohol (Weekly Reader, 1987).
N. Alternatives. Activities have to be plausible, be more highly valued than the health-compromising behaviour. Too often these alternatives are poorly thought through.
P. Lifeskills. Development of these will be of wider benefit than drug prevention. Included will be:- Communication, Problem Solving, Decision Making, Critical Thinking, Assertiveness, Peer Pressure Reversal, Peer Selection, Low Risk Choice Making, Self Improvement, Stress Reduction and Consumer Awareness (Botvin, 1985).
Choosing your friends has been found in some research to be more effective than resisting the peer pressure of said friends. Consumer awareness is a ‘companion’ to resisting peer structure, i.e. resisting media pressure.
Q. Training prevention workers. For the school setting the greater emphasis on experiential and interactive work requires teacher training to extend into youth work skills. Community development skills are valuable in taking school initiatives into the community. Imported ‘prestige’ role models are all very well, but good results have been achieved with parents, peers, teachers, or outside agency workers.
R. Community norms. Consistency of policies throughout schools, families and communities can greatly enhance impact.
S. Alcohol norms. Because of its dual status as a beverage and as an culturally accepted drug, alcohol is problematic for prevention. However, heart disease and tobacco prevention programmes have shown that societal norms can be changed.
T. Improve schooling! Listed here as a target because of its important correlation with healthy lifestyle. Within the current British economic and academic climate the most realistic hope may lie with co operative learning, see the TRIBES program for example.
U. Change Society. Don’t just stop with improving schools: add your voices to pressure for improvement in employment. housing, recreation and self development. (See ‘Project Revitalisation’ in Vallejo, California, for example). It is naive to suppose that prevention can take place in a political vacuum. Jessop recognises that failing to acknowledge the need for macro environmental improvement while at the same time placing the responsibility for health solely with the individual is tantamount to ‘blaming the victim’.
THE PLANNING PROCESS
V. Design, implementation, evaluation. Evaluations have generally concentrated on outcomes rather than the quality of design. However, implementation is as much dependent on engaging all sectors of the community (be it a school. a workplace, or a town) as it is on quality of design. Evaluation should therefore measure process as well as outcome.
W. Goal setting. Unrealistic or immeasurable goals help no one. It is important to set not only long4erm outcome goals (for prevention is long term) but also “process goals” such as increased involvement of parents and community, academic success, increased student teacher interaction. and so on.
X. Evaluation and amendment. Prevention workers have been criticized for giving too little attention to this area., the crushing shortage of funds has much to do with it (in America the ratio of funding between interdiction policy and prevention is about 200: 1). This lack of emphasis on evaluation has been the Achilles heel which pro drug campaigners have gleefully attacked. Effective evaluations have been those including longitudinal design, multiple measures of process as well as outcome (Tobler, 1986), and cost benefit analysis (CBA). CBA is perhaps the greatest marketing tool prevention has; where CBA has been applied substantial cost effectiveness has been demonstrated.

Bonnie Benard can be contacted at NIDA, the National Institute on Drug Abuse, 6001 Executive Boulevard, Bethesda,MD 20892-9561, or info@health.org

Back to Papers

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

By Alberto Carosa
A leading Italian journalist and media expert, who presented a seminal paper
at the HNN conference in Visby in May 2001.Rome. The recent Fifth Global Conference on Drug Prevention, which took place in Rome in late September (Monday 22nd – Friday 26th , 2003) confirmed what was already signalled by the author of this article few years ago, viz. that the Catholic Church is in the forefront in the fight against illicit drugs (see Catholic religious move to the forefront in battle against drugs, in the Wanderer of August 20th, 1998).
Sponsored by the Italian government’s extraordinary commissioner for the co-ordination of anti-narcotics policies, Prefect Pietro Soggiu, in conjunction with the Bureau of International Narcotics and Law Enforcement Affairs of the US Department of State, the conference was spearheaded by a Worldwide Network for the Prevention of Drugs under the co-ordination of an International Organising Committee which included a number of other groups, associations and NGOs. Among these a pivotal role was played by Associazione Casa Rosetta (ACR), a Sicily-based religious-run rehabilitation centre, with its president father Vincenzo Sorce, and the US Florida-based Drug Free America Foundation in the persons of its founder and president, long time anti drug war veteran Betty Sembler, wife to the present US Ambassador to Italy, Melvin Sembler. As a keynote speakers of the opening session, the senior diplomat paid his tribute to the organisers “not only as the United States ambassador to Italy, but also as someone who has been personally involved in trying to help solve the illegal drug issue”.
Father Vincenzo Sorce is a Catholic priest who teaches Pastoral Theology in Sicily at the Palermo-based “S. Giovanni Evangelista” Faculty of Theology and Social Education at the Free “Maria SS Assunta” University in Rome. Journalist and founder of ACR, which is active in 40 centres in Italy and Brazil, he was also the conference moderator in his capacity as chairman of the above International Organising Committee. Father Sorce is also specialising in the training of anti-drug personnel in co-operation with several foreign institutions, including the universities of San Diego and San Francisco in California.
As further proof of the leading role played by Catholic religion, the proceedings were opened and concluded by other two Catholic religious leaders respectively, archbishop Javier Lozano Barragan, president of the Pontifical Council for Pastoral Assistance to Health Care Workers, and Msgr. Paolo Romeo, apostolic nuncio to Italy.
To confirm the relentless and uncompromising stance of the Church in the anti-narcotics fight, Archbishop Barragan, soon to be appointed cardinal in the upcoming concistorium, reminded that in his Magisterium John Paul II dwelt upon the drug issue no less than 360 times, stressing that drug use and /or abuse is never licit because it’s unworthy of a God-created human being, who under no circumstances may renounce his/her dignity as a free and responsible person.

Over 500 delegates from 84 nations in all the continents participated in the event and it would not be possible to mention all of them. Suffice to say that some 60 speakers, from government officials to ambassadors, from scientists (Carmelo Furnari, Eric Voth, Ernst Aeschbach, Gregory K. Pike, Mark S. Gold, David A. Gross, Guillermo Fernandez D’Adam) to jurists (Giuseppe Dalla Torre), media experts (Wade West, Carlos Alberto Di Franco) and NGOs leaders (Stephanie Haynes, Peter Stoker, Calvina Fay, Chavalit Yodmany) offered a wide variety of presentations reflecting cultural, ethical, scientific, medical, social, political and spiritual dimensions of the subjects. Although representing many diverse faiths and beliefs, the participants were united in their support of the following common core principles, as entrenched in their final resolution: the pursuit of a ‘Common Good’ which should define and guide the actions of Society; a ‘Culture of Disapproval’ of drug abuse, namely any use of illegal substances and any inappropriate use of legal substances, to be nurtured in all Society; ‘Moral Imperatives’ for responsible and constructive citizenship, which should be honoured by Society at large; all strategy, policy and action should be informed and underpinned by proper, validated science. Furthermore the participants, who endorsed the resolution by acclamation, pledged “to create value in acknowledgement of the gift of life with which we have been blessed” and confirmed “the superiority of love, in relation to the education and building of our society: a superiority which has become a social, political, cultural and spiritual commitment”.
The Conference resolved also to progress initiatives in support of the above core principles, including opposition to legalisation and other forms of drug law relaxation, and therefore any drives seeking to serve, overtly or covertly, such negative expedience. The fullest support, the final resolution also stated, should be given to the Vienna Declaration, which seeks to unequivocally support the UN convention on drugs, notably by the collection of 25 million supporting signatures by the year 2008, when an overall assessment of the UNGASS results is scheduled to take place. This collection is a natural follow up to a campaign launched in late 2002 by the Sweden-based Hassela Nordic Network, which was able to present over 1.3 million signatures during the midterm review in Vienna last April 2003 for the UN Convention on Drugs to retain its successful “restrictive policies against any legalisation of illicit drugs, including cannabis”. Such legalisation is being pursued by a notorious and powerful trans-national anti-prohibitionist lobby, whose ultimate aim is “getting rid of global treaties against drug” (see also The War on Drugs Takes a New Turn, in the Wanderer of November 28th, 2002).
Besides the above resolutions and pledges, whose impact is generally measured on the medium-long term, the most immediate result produced by the Fifth Global Conference on Drug Prevention was an enormous amount of media coverage which after many days is still far from abating.
A turmoil was apparently unleashed by Italy’s deputy premier Gianfranco Fini, another keynote speaker at the opening sessions of the Conference, when he announced that by Christmas his country would reverse its drug policies with new legislation that would target users of soft drugs and end the legal distinction between possession and trafficking. He said the abolition of the so-called ‘minimum daily dose’ had defanged Italy’s drug laws and prevented police from distinguishing between drug-pushing and personal use.
Apparently a raw nerve was touched, since most of the secular media reacted with hysteria, crying foul and distorting Fini’s stance, whom they accused of wanting to jail all addicts. But the Italian Health Minister Girolamo Sirchia, a prominent haematologist and transplant expert, immediately backed Fini’s message, adding that the Superior Health Council’s decision to classify cannabis as hard was a “strong scientific response which I agree with”. “This puts an end to the pointless and sterile polemics which distort the truth about drug issues,” the minister continued. “There aren’t any drugs that don’t harm the user. These substances are worse than smoking, they harm the brain and cause mental illnesses,” said the 70-year-old minister.
Fini further clarified his vow to clamp down on drugs, speaking of a “zero tolerance” approach as “the most appropriate phrase” which “doesn’t mean handcuffs and police busts but fighting the tendency to underestimate the problem…It is a scientific fact, and one with social costs, that people who use and abuse substances like Ecstasy and amphetamines suffer damage to the brain,” Fini concluded. In other words, “there is no freedom of drug addiction”. Fini is convinced also that, besides traffickers, also what he termed “friendly fire” should be effectively combated, viz. those who foster drug use by disseminating criminal lies and fallacious distinctions between “good” and bad drugs. A real “pro-drug lobby”, as the Executive Director of the UN Office on Drugs and Crimes, Antonio Maria Costa, put it more bluntly in his keynote speech at the Conference the inaugural day. Besides the trans-national lobby referred to above, another typical case in point is the “singing lobby”, so much so that Fini also rebuked rock stars and the drug culture he said was associated with the world of rock. “Rock singers should reflect before saying that drugs are in some way a right, that people should be free to take drugs and that the culture of ‘getting high’ should not be criminalised”. Also Interior Undersecretary Alfredo Mantovano, another keynote speaker on the first Conference day, slammed “pop singers and the media” for encouraging youngsters to smoke pot. In a piqued reaction, 29 major artists published a manifesto to deny these accusations, saying that such words “smack of censorship”, “sound a bit intimidating”, subtly seek “to limit freedom of opinion and speech” and that “new restrictive measures are not needed” (cf. Corriere della Sera, October 1st, 2003).
The Italian media also pulled the emotional chord under another respect, by advocating more rehabilitation efforts rather than jail terms and crackdown policies on both consumers and traffickers. But these very media did ignore what was said at a concomitant joint press conference to present the First UN Report on Amphetamine-type Drugs to the Italian government by the Executive Director of the UN Office on Drugs and Crimes, Antonio Maria Costa, and the Director of the US Office of National Drug Control Policy, John Walters, namely that in the last five years marijuana addiction increased only by 10%, as against that caused by synthetic drugs, which rose by 70%. “Hence my fear”, Costa said, “that these chemical drugs may turn out to be the public enemy No 1”.
As a matter of fact, these chemical substances, like ecstasy and amphetamines, have devastating and irreversible effects on the psyche and body, causing real holes in the brain similar to those suffered by Alzhaimer-hit elderly and thus accelerating the aging process. “Who will assist and pay to support part of a generation mentally and physically crippled by the damages caused by ecstasy?”, Costa wondered. This question might be answered by another question: why shouldn’t the victims or their families sue for damages members and accomplices of the “pro-drug lobby” referred to by Costa, as was the case with tobacco-induced damages?
Should the trend towards irreversible damages continue, therefore, any talk of rehabilitation instead of repression and prevention may soon become sheer platitude, like a hunter who keeps on aiming at a bird even well after it has already flown away from its perch.

Back to Papers

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
by Peter Stoker: Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance

Simply because this subject is too important to leave to the experts. Parents, even these days, are seen by young people as a key source of information and moral guidance. As an example, try summating the whole life of your child from birth through to age 21. Tabulate all of the hours that they spend in school, or in religious areas, or in community areas, or with you the parent; it is enlightening to then look at the percentage of time the child spends in the various ‘zones of influence’, throughout their youth. The figures are 10% in school, and less than 1% in churches etc. The rest of the time, they are outside the influence of those organisations.

Moreover, the great majority of drug use by young people does not take place in school, nor does the dealing. What does this mean? It clearly means that most of the drug misuse takes place when we are in charge. In the main we have drug free schools; what we don’t have is drug free young people. It follows then, taking the title of this paper, that if we who have longer with the young can communicate and influence effectively with them that we stand a strong chance of making things better. But are we using this time well? Research has shown that on average, a parent spends 15 minutes a day communicating with their child. Of that 15 minutes, 13 minutes are spent in criticism. It is not suggested that parents are the only people who can mobilise to good effect. It is obviously, at the very least, a tripartite effort between home, school and community. But what has been one of the main factors in the deterioration over the past few years, which has let in negative behaviours such as drug misuse, has been the separation of the influence of the home from the diverse and sometimes negative influences young people receive either in school, including the playground; or in the community, including those other ‘playgrounds’. If we are to succeed in prevention, we must recognise that ‘Partnership’ is not just a fashionable buzzword; it is a fundamental.

Can Parents Succeed?

Yes, they certainly can; they have done in other countries, and to some extent they are already succeeding here, but nowhere near enough yet. Before quoting figures from the obvious place that researches so much i.e. America, there is evidence from countries much closer to home: two are Belgium and Sweden. In the Eastern cantons of Belgium, Ernst Servais runs the Social-Psychological Centre which is based in Eupen, and has been working for some 15 or 16 years now on community drug prevention work. Before he got into drug specific community education and prevention work Ernst spent a long time, several years, just developing community networks and using less emotive subjects as a vehicle for bringing people within the community together. He knew the truth of the adage that ~‘Tasks Unite, Issues Divide”. Over 13 years up to 1991 when Ernst published his synthesis called “Before It’s Too Late”, drug use by young people in the area concerned rose by only 3%. If you compare that with the major increase in drug use by surrounding areas, it is truly a remarkable achievement. In the case of Sweden (in the late 1970s), there was a period of relaxed approach and harm-reduction-based policy, particularly around the use of amphetamines. This led to a very large escalation in their use with attendant social, emotional and medical problems. Sweden learnt from this mistake, instituted an exemplary suite of prevention programmes and coupled this with a constructively firm law structure; the prevalence of amphetamine abuse, and indeed of other drugs of abuse in Sweden, has since been pushed back very significantly.

Turning now to America, their experience shows how parents can be truly effective. Nationally, biennially collected data across large numbers of households paints a graphic historical picture (Figure 1). Drug use which had been at a very low level for very many years took off during the 1960s under the dual factors of hippie lifestyles and libertarian philosophies, expediently coupled with protest against the Establishment in the context of the Vietnam War. What did parents do when use first started to grow? Absolutely nothing. This is probably about where Britain is now. The problem had to get much bigger before they woke up, but when they did it was the parents and not the professionals who first started insisting that a more vigorous and constructive approach be taken. And to salutary effect. The results are easy to see. Over a 12-year period from 1980 the USA reduced drug use in all age groups and for all substances by a staggering 60%. 13 million fewer users. If any other Public Health or other kind of behaviour modification exercise had achieved this result people would be screaming from the rooftops what an amazing success it was. Instead, all we heard from a largely libertarian press was that “the war on drugs is failing”. Since 1992, use is climbing rapidly again; a stark lesson that you cannot take your eye off the ball — or take the funds off the programme. Prevention (and health promotion in general) must be revisited in every generation, and constantly reinforced.

So, parents can certainly succeed. But they will only succeed if they work in partnership. Prevention is the proper business of every section of the community, each dovetailed into the other but each addressing the subject in different ways, according to their own setting. It is not only youth who need prevention opportunities; whoever the centre of focus is, there will be some who can exert more influence and others less — but every input is valuable. People who are closer to the focal point are likely to be more influential than the people on the periphery. But all of them have a valuable influence, and all of them should be engaged.

Can Parents Succeed Now?

The chances of success as things stand at the moment with parents in Britain are a lot less than they should be. This is because, as a generalisation, parents are largely on the margins of influence. This marginalisation has occurred through a combination of factors, but is also, to some extent, self-inflicted. Cultural changes, including the elevation of youth to a position of near-autonomy, greater spending power by youth, and youth-centred methods in schools, youth centres etc. have mingled with a seemingly daunting array of issues — sexual behaviour, sexuality, negative role models, libertarian media and entertainment, increased family breakdown as well as reduced family influence, violence and vandalism, and of course alcohol and other drugs. In the face of all this many parents have been tempted to see marginalisation as the route to survival. In the particular context of drugs parents remain behind the ‘brick wall’ of marginalisation, in some cases because they want to be, because it’s safe there. But they’re also behind it because an awful lot of media commentators, professionals of various sorts, and indeed other parents reinforce the view that this is where they should be because they a) don’t know enough about drugs, b) have only one simple function when drugs are mentioned, which is to panic, and c) even if they do get involved they mess up anyway. I want to see this brick wall demolished; and the sooner the better. We will only succeed in prevention if parental communication is brought back from the margins to the place where it belongs, in the very centre of things. And nobody will invite you; you will have to push your way back in.

Where Should Parents Focus Their Effort?

For all but a few parents, who want to take the wider view, the focus should be firmly on one’s own back yard; work with your own family first, and worry about the rest of the world later. Next, as a parent, you do not have to be an expert, any more than others who speak out are (Noel Gallagher and Brian Harvey are certainly no experts). As parents, you know instinctively the behaviour you want to encourage in your children and the behaviour you want to discourage. Focus on that, and all ways of achieving it, and leave the fancy drug technology to other people. You don’t have to ‘know knowledge’, just know where to find it. If you must have an instant drug lecture in thirty seconds, this is it:

All psychoactive substances can be classified under one of three headings: They send you upwards, they send you downwards, or they send you sideways; or some permutation thereof.
(End of lecture)

Your focus needs to be not so much on drug technology but instead be firmly on parenting, and we could all benefit from lessons in this. Indeed, there is an argument for including parenting skills in the school curriculum. Parenting courses unfortunately often tend to be limited to drug knowledge; you need much more breadth and depth than this. One example of a useful model has as its name and emphasis ‘Parenting Skills for Prevention’. It is video and audio based, an 8-week, Adult Education course, proven over more than 10 years operation and developed from the original by NDPA to suit British culture. The 8 modules cover awareness of the subject of drugs, and of you yourself in relation to that subject, how to be ‘pre-event’ and parent assertively; the adolescent’s development and basic drives; and the differences between a child, an adolescent, and an adult. In the second half of the course we look at family systems for QA and QC — Quality Assurance and Quality Control. (Setting behavioural standards and following up to see that they are complied with). The difference between Punishment (which can sometimes mean getting even, or revenge) and Consequences (which are the pre-advised outcomes of unwanted behaviour — and they must be preadvised and consistently applied). The difference between the Needs and Wants of one’s offspring; how the Needs must remain inviolate even in the face of the most extreme behaviour, whilst the Wants can be a focus of any Consequences in response to negative behaviour. We also look at the vital relevance of feelings — adolescents work from their feelings; if your communication is only from the head, their hearts won’t understand. Take a deep breath, and tell them how you feel. Reinforce positives, play down negatives. Arrange your time to allow more real communication with your family. And if all else fails, be aware of where to get help. We have run this 8-week course, sometimes in the evening, sometimes in the day, even in workplace lunch breaks, with several hundred parents. We have received excellent evaluations, and these have been accepted by the Home Office, who funded the early stages of the project.

How Can Parents Be More Effective?

The first thing that parents should do is to exert a positive influence. It is essential that between all of the various people who communicate with a young person that the three key areas of behavioural influence are addressed. This has been termed for short as KAB — Knowledge, Attitude, and Behaviour. Giving knowledge is relatively easy, but it must be valid information. Challenging attitudes, why they exist and why they might be more beneficially changed is also rather better understood than the third component i.e. behavioural modification. We far too often overlook that if we wish to produce positive behaviour we need to encourage it when it occurs. More often our inclination is to challenge or punish negative behaviour when it arises. The plain fact is that if you can introduce an environment of positivity in your home and encourage your children to interact with other children in a more positive way this will have a beneficial effect, and this can spread over a wide area. Studies at Swansea University show that for every peer educator who goes through training programme they beneficially impact, to some extent, around another 200 people. A convenient encapsulation of a parental approach to behaviour is found in a psychologist’s term, which is to say that you need to practice “loving control”, being neither too authoritarian nor too lax. Again, research shows that this produces overall the best results, including a marked decrease of prevalence of drug misuse.

A current educationist fashion is to speak of facilitating ‘Informed Choices’ by young people. (Regrettably, the people doing the informing rarely encourage consideration of anyone other than the individual; self-actualisation -Maslow style- is the governing force.) Choice per se is of course a part of healthy development, but when it comes to the use of illegal drugs (or age limits for legal drugs), choice has no part to play. We do not ask children to choose whether to steal or assault; we Just Say No.

Disapproval is still a strong impactor, as a 17-year analysis of USA nation-wide drug-related behaviour shows (Figure 3). Throughout the 17 year period (1974 — 1991) there is a perfect inverse correlation between prevalence of use and perception of disapproval by others, as well as perception of harmfulness of use. You can exert positive influence by setting out clear values and boundaries for behaviour in the home, and setting out what the consequences will be of crossing those boundaries. And, most importantly, sticking to those consequences without wavering if any transgression occurs. Parents can also set an example and show integrity in what they’re saying, even though sometimes they may be decoyed by arguments such as ‘you smoke tobacco’ or ‘you drink alcohol; those are your drugs, so why are you criticising mine?’ The short but valid answer to this is ‘two wrongs don’t make a right’. The alternative short answer is for you not to smoke and not abuse alcohol. (Abuse of alcohol may, stereotypically, include using it as a drug instead of as a beverage). The longer answer is that if you do smoke you probably became hooked when the level of knowledge was well below what it is now, and if you had known what is known now, you probably wouldn’t have started. If you are a smoker, both for the example you set and for your own health, it would do you no harm to give it up. As for alcohol, the least you could think about is keeping the levels well below the health limits and never say “I need a drink” — this is a suicidal parental message! If you want to introduce a healthy form of taking substances in your home, here’s a radical idea: try and eat together as a family now and again; a big challenge, I know, but you can do it if you try!

If you are going to get ahead of the game you need to stay very aware of youth culture, and in particular the youth culture that exists in your own home. Here’s another radical idea: Every now and again, check how your young person decorates his or her room. What records do they listen to? What set of people do they hang out with? What kind of language do they use? Are there any marked changes in their attitude towards you and respect for you? What magazines and newspapers do they read? What films and videos do they watch? Do you know which musical groups and which films promote or give apologia for drug use? If not, why not? This kind of upstream marker is a lot more valuable than the kind of “signs and symptoms of drug abuse” that are so often peddled in parental advice articles. Frankly, if you’re looking for signs and symptoms of use you are already too late.

Another thing that you can do as a parent, and you have the right to do it, is to check out your school. Do they have drug policy, and does it start with the aims of the school and how to achieve these through prevention and education, or is the policy no more than a list of damage limitation, reaction and repair once drug use has been discovered (“stable door — instructions for bolting” etc.)? What lessons are they delivering that have to do with social behaviours and personal development? What philosophies are they following? Who is funding this aspect of their education, directly or indirectly? What materials are they using and what agendae inform the materials? What messages, overt and covert, are being given out? And if you don’t like the answers you find, what are you doing about it? (Then repeat the dose for everyone else in the community who communicates with your offspring. politicians, media, health workers, social workers-above all check out people like me, who claim to specialise in the drugs field. Where are we coming from? Is reduction of drug misuse our driving force? (The answer from some within the above disciplines may surprise you!)

Tackling the drug problem in our society is one of the toughest yet potentially most rewarding tasks facing us all today. ‘Tackling Drugs Together’ is today’s maxim but is a good way short of being today’s reality. To reverse the trend (and thereby ‘to Build a Better Britain’) will take nothing less than a major change in the culture of our whole society. Mission Impossible? Hardly. The culture changes which brought us to where we are now have all taken place in the lifetime of many of us who are now parents. What has been done can be undone, and the longest journey begins with a single step. That first step could, and indeed should be taken by you, the parent. Safe journey!

Back to Papers

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

NDPA started in a modest way in early 1993, after a year of exploratory work. Of course nobody was standing idly waiting for NDPA to appear, and the value of the initiative had to satisfy hard-nosed, already overworked agencies and individuals. By May 93 the clear need for NDPA was acknowledged, and the first formal meeting of the Executive got things moving.Attendees included Life Education Centres, Hope UK, prevention specialists Positive Prevention Plus, Ben’s friends (named for Ben Wood who died from ecstasy use), health promotion specialist Anthony Johnson, and other concerned individuals. From these small but substantial beginnings the Alliance has extended to the point where its ‘constituency’ now conservatively numbers more than ten million people.

As well as entities in the four ‘home nations’ and the Irish Republic, major groups like Life Education Centres and DARE UK, and high-profile campaigners like Jan and Paul Betts, we now have links with an even more diverse range of interests groups. Mrs Frances Lawrence, widow of murdered headteacher Phillip Lawrence and Anne Pearston of Dunblane’s ‘Snowdrop’ campaign are but two examples. Why would they be interested in the NDPA? Because they recognise, as do we, that drug misuse is part of a much wider picture of social behaviour in which we must all strive (as our general leaflet title says) for
‘a prospect of something better’.

The Executive has met at least four times a year every year since then, and the many and varied outcomes are touched on in this brief paper. The detail of our activities fills several filing cabinets and not a few floppies and zips. The most expedient way for you to find out more, if you want, is to contact us personally; we will be very pleased to assist you.

ACHIEVEMENTS SO FAR.

NDPA’s formal ‘birth’ coincided with the first drafting of ‘Tackling Drugs Together’. We were asked by then – Minister David Maclean to meet with Sue Street, director of the Central Drugs Coordination Unit (CDCU) in Whitehall. We made a good impression by the calibre of our input, and the eventual publication gave us much grounds for encouragement. From that time on we have sustained a good working relationship with the CDCU under Stephen Rimmer, and now in its new existence as the office of the UK Anti-Drugs Co-Ordinator, Keith Hellawell (and his deputy, Mike Trace).

NDPA is increasingly in demand for conference appearances, including the Scottish National Drugs Conference, the Irish Drug Squad (Garda), ‘Frank Talks’ (Belfast), DARE Graduation, Isle of Man Life Education, Scottish Chief Police Officers, several international presentations, and many more. Trainings have been held in Glasgow, Lake District, Cambridgeshire, Hertfordshire and of course the Metropolitan area, where several have occurred. Several police forces continue to use our consultancy resources.

As well as technical papers for ‘Tackling Drugs Together’ (TDT) and its successor ‘To Build a Better Britain’ , NDPA has produced a great many others, including papers for the three main political parties. These and other papers covered such subjects as drug strategy and philosophy, prevention technology, educational techniques, enforcement approaches, constructive/rehabilitative justice systems, drug information, and more. Two leaflets summarising cannabis research (one for youth, one for parents) have been reprinted twice already, their content having been validated in ongoing meetings with Professor John Henry and Professor Heather Ashton.

Very little of this would have been possible without the National Lottery Charities Board (NLCB) grant. Coming in summer 1997 the grant was worth just under £150,000 over three years, and we volunteered to put in another £50,000. Companies House rigorously screened us before allowing our definition as ‘National’. NLCB also vetted us closely, because NDPA was an unknown quantity, but their analysis proved positive; they put their faith in us and for that we are eternally grateful.

A NEW FOCUS ON PREVENTION

Our opening comments on ‘TDT’ still hold good today and indeed were strongly echoed in our imput to ‘BBB’, which came in two slices – a four page summary called ‘Adjusting the Focus’ and, in January 98, a 28 – page formal proposal.

The main thrust was that Britain’s strategy needed to be strongly focussed on primary prevention, buttressed by sensible but unequivocal legal structures. Our words were ‘Prevention coupled with firm but fair laws’. When BBB came out it called for ‘Firm laws plus prevention’ – not a million miles away, it would seem.

Inculcating cultural changes in favour of healthy lifestyles.
Constructive justice system.
Workplace prevention.
Harm reduction kept in perspective.

AD NAUSEAM

A perennial bugbear of our work is the legalisation lobby. This has taken us to formal/informal debates at Cambridge, Oxford, Colchester, even Westminster. Several reams of paper have gone into technical presentations. Our extensive international links help greatly on this and other subjects. The Media regard us as ‘first port of call’ on this subject, and we have featured on BBC World Service (130 million listeners) BBC TV, Channel 4, Readers Digest (5 million readers), The Guardian, and on. And on. We have faced up to drug smuggler Howard Marks, ‘heroin doctor’ John Marks (no relation). The Government seem to hope that their unequivocal stance against law relaxation (for which, much thanks) will make all the legalisers shut up and go away. Far from it.

YOUTH DEVELOPMENT

The main focus of our work is on youth, and services to skill them, to enable them to resist drug misuse. We were taught a long time ago by a wise old trainer that “we rarely succeed at anything unless we have fun doing it”. This remains a mainstay of our youth work, and probably accounts for the fact that so many of our youth participants stay with us for so long. Another guiding principle is Youth Empowerment, through the medium of Peer Prevention (which is like Peer Education, but much wider in scope). We now have a Youth Training Team which is capable of organising and delivering prevention programmes, and prepared to travel anywhere – expenses permitting.

Besides the Teenex programme, which looks set to spread into Wales before too long, there is the excellent Youth Trust in Devon which is currently planning to expand into after – school services for ‘latchkey’ youth. Meanwhile services to the younger set are impeccably provided by such as Life Education and DARE. For the latter we recently completed a meta-analysis and synthesis of international evaluative research which is now aiding their development programme.

THE FUTURE – THAT ‘BETTER PROSPECT’

‘To Build a Better Britain’ is a 10 year strategy with regular interim reviews; we have met Keith Hellawell and Mike Trace several times, and will sustain this dialogue. We have just started two research studies, in hand at Brunel University, to run over 3 years. Our existing parliamentary contacts need increasing, and likewise the media work is bound to step up – with fierce demands every time someone else says something libertarian or outrageous (or both). The legalisation/decriminalisation/’harm reduction + no prevention’ lobby will remain vocal. There is also the small matter of funding NDPA for the next decade. Above all we need to ensure two things: greater union (a stronger voice) amongst prevention agencies and supporters across the community; and greater efforts to lift quality (and prove this quality by evidence–based evaluation). Should keep us busy for a while……………

Back to Papers

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :


Australia and Sweden have taken different paths in the battle against illicit drugs.
Dr Lucy Sullivan examines the results.

A comparison of drug policies in Sweden and Australia. and of drug usage and associated problems, is highly suggestive of which country has chosen the more effective approach.

Sweden:

After beginning with a legal approach to illicit drugs, Sweden executed a volte face in response to escalating drug use in the population. Policy now aims at a drug-free society.

Coercive care of adult drug abusers was introduced in 1982: Swedish courts can order treatment instead of punishment if the offence carries no more than one year of imprisonment.

Drug use was criminalised in 1988, and a maximum penalty of six months’ imprisonment for illicit drug use was introduced in 1993, Possession of small quantities of cannabis or amphetamines may result in only a fine, but possession of heroin or cocaine receives a strict term of imprisonment. Drug trafficking maybe punished by 20 years imprisonment. Methadone assisted rehabilitation of drug addicts has been implemented.

Schools and municipal social services provide extensive education against drug use. Harm minimization, as a policy approach, and needle exchange have not been adopted, on the grounds that they would convey an ambiguous message against society’s attitude to drug abuse.

Australia:

In Australia generally, the maximum penalty for possession of small amounts of cannabis is two years imprisonment. In South Australia and the Australian Capital Territory, however, possession of small amounts of cannabis has been decriminalised. Trafficking in illegal drugs may be punished with life imprisonment.

Despite the legal position, Australia’s National Drug Strategy since the late 1980s has been one of ‘harm minimisation’, rather than prevention or a drug-free society. Through the late ‘80s and most of the ‘90s, there has been a movement in the allocation of funding, from law enforcement to education.

As an educational policy, harm minimisation is defined as teaching safe use of drugs, abstinence is not seriously addressed. Other features of Australia’s harm minimisation policy are an extensive free needle exchange programme and free methadone maintenance for heroin addicts.

Sweden Australia
Lifetime prevalence of drug use in
16-29 year olds (Sweden) and 14-25 year olds (Australia) 9% 52%
Use in the previous year, as above 2% 33%
Estimated dependent heroin users per million population 500 5-6000
Percentage of dependent users aged under 20 1.5% 8.2%
Methadone patients per million population 50 940
Drug-related deaths per million population 23 48
Percentage of all deaths at age under 25 1.5% 3.7%

Drug offences per million population –
Sweden = arrests; Australia = convictions 3100 1000
Average months in prison per drug offence 20 5
Property crimes per million population 51,000 57,000
Cumulative AIDS cases per million population 150 330

Outcomes:

The accompanying table shows comparative figures on drug abuse and related factors for Sweden and Australia as presented in the United Nations World Drug Report 1997 (adjusted where necessary to a rate basis).

The comparative figures for drug use in Sweden and Australia, taken in conjunction with education policies which promote abstinence versus safe usage, suggest that Australia’s policy of harm minimisation has induced widespread drug usage – 52% lifetime usage (i.e., used at least once) in Australia compared with 9% in Sweden.

Further data indicate that the change from the liberal to prohibitive in Swedish policy has been effective in reducing the initiation of young users, whereas usage by young people in Australia has been rising over the same period.

The highest prevalence of lifetime usage in Sweden occurs in the 30-49 years age group. In Australia, the rates of usage are minimal above age 40, while the greatest increase in use has occurred in the 14-24 years age group. This demonstrates the success of education in harm minimisation in encouraging drug use, particularly in the age group most exposed to drug education – school children.

Only 1.5% of Swedish young people (aged under 20) are drug dependent, compared with 8.2% of Australians in the same age group.

The information conveyed in harm minimisation education is clearly unable to counteract the effect of higher usage rates. Drug-related death rates are twice as high in Australia as in Sweden – 46 versus 23 per million population. Moreover, the share of under 25 year-olds in drug-related deaths in Sweden is very low – only 3.6%. The Australian figure in this category was not available, but the percentage of all deaths at age under 25 (3.7% compared with 1.5% in Sweden) indicates a higher presence of trauma for Australian young people, of which drug taking is likely to form a part. Free needle distribution in Australia does not appear to have resulted in better control of the AIDS epidemic here, with our cumulative AIDS rate more than twice that of Sweden. While the proportion of methadone patients to heroin addicts is similar in the two countries, one may conjecture that the use of methadone for rehabilitation in Sweden, rather than for maintenance as in Australia, contributes to the dramatically lower rate of heroin addiction there (less by a factor of at least 10).

The higher rate of illegal drug use in Australia is the more remarkable in that Australians are roughly as law-abiding as Swedes in relation to property crime, and far less violent. The lower ratio of convictions to usage rates in Australia may well encourage contempt of the law.

The proponents of the harm minimisation strategy in Australia claim that Australia is leading the world in the public health of drug abuse.

These figures suggest, rather, that it is leading us in the opposite direction, and that a policy like Sweden’s, which addresses its goals straightforwardly and unambiguously, rather than deviously, is more successful in practice.

News Weekly, August 28 1999 Page 8
Back to Papers

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

Evidence for prevention
Prevention outweighs permissive policy for social benefit to the individual and to societyEd Jurith is currently temporarily occupying the desk of the USA’s ‘drug czar’ while President Bush decides whose name is ‘permanently’ painted on the door. Close to the end of his Atlantic Fellowship in England, Ed gave a talk in London to drug workers. He proposed and answered the rhetorical question: ‘What is the goal of US drug policy ? – A drug-free America’.

I watched his audience stiffen, then relax as he went on: ‘None of us expect 100% success, but as a goal to work towards, it’s not that bad.’

It is a mistake to assume that all the zealots are anti-drugs, any more than all the sacred cows are on one side of the fence. We all have our share of both.

The governing goal in our national strategy is to work towards the irreducible minimum of drug users. This is a common theme in both the current drugs strategy and its 1995 predecessor (its Appendix C has one of the most helpful definitions of the role of harm reduction).

When asked to identify the main tool to achieve this goal, most people choose ‘education’. But this is only one component – and by some accounts a deliberately ‘aimless’ one.1 You could, from this basis, educate a ‘drug fancier’ but the outcome at best would be an educated drug fancier.

Prevention differs from education by setting goals and boundaries and working within the social context. Prevention fosters a culture in which the desired situation is more likely to occur, more likely to be willingly chosen. The then Chief Executive, Council on Addiction for Northamptonshire, Robin Burgess, underscored this very even-handedly in Druglink, March/April 1996.2

Prevention must engage the whole society. This requires a substantial shift in attitude for several professions, given we are by nature symptom-focused and reactive. Suggesting, for example, that prevention should be limited to those ‘at risk’ is like limiting contraception to the pregnant.

Lofquist, in his classic text says: ‘We must get beyond the notion that prevention is merely stopping something happening, to a more positive approach that creates conditions which promote the well-being of people’.3

In simple terms to prevent we must be working ‘pre-event’. School or workplace drugs policies that only intervene when drug use is observed need extra front-end chapters to cover this.

What is the value of the law in prevention and health promotion? It spells out the boundaries and at least some of the consequences of breaching them. It also undoubtedly acts as a discouragement for some – hence the increase in use seen universally when laws are relaxed.

Intervention by the law, whether by Caution or Court, is credited by many in my experience with having decided them to avoid or turn away from drugs. In the USA the criminal justice system remains the top referral source for rehabilitation.

There is great potential for more constructive systems: for example, the National Drug Prevention Alliance advocates an extended caution applied to minor drugs offences, with a preventive aim (a working title might be ‘PreCaution’).

The principle is to offer a caution – or deferred sentence – with the condition of attendance at drug prevention training sessions, analogous to what happens now with drink driving cases. Failure to attend would constitute a breach and thus appearance in court. Costs could be limited by cooperation with the voluntary sector.

Law and criminal justice are parts of the interlocking structure of social agents that deal with positive and negative life issues to foster a healthy society. The problem with such structures is that removal of any part can lead to collapse. The ‘legal’ element may be easier to dislodge than many, starting with mislabelling it.

‘Prohibition’ conjures up images of a rejected policy and an American policy at that – very handy derogatory terms. The Australian Parliamentary Group for Drug Law Reform certainly believed so, to the extent that they deployed ‘ conscious manipulation of the language and debate ‘ – their words, not mine, ‘ labelling those who oppose drug law reform as ‘prohibitionists’ and those who seek it as ‘reformers’’.4

For equity, instead of prohibition I suggest ‘preventive policies’ – a less calculated term, less likely to promote a particular viewpoint. It also fairly balances the term for the opposite approach ‘permissive policies’. From this start point, let’s climb over the fence and vet some of the sacred cows in the ‘permissive’ herd:

Culling ?

‘US Prohibition equals UK drug policy’ – US tried to suppress what was until then a legal substance (alcohol), used by the majority of, and generally accepted by the public. The inverse of these parameters is true of our drug laws. No comparison.

‘US policy spectacularly unsuccessful’ – the US sustained drug prevention for 12 years from 1980–92, achieving a 60% drop, about 13 million fewer users.5 Things slipped thereafter as government and parents took their eyes off the ball, but prevalence is now declining again. This is despite ‘law-weakeners’ like George Soros investing huge amounts of money in permissive campaigning – he puts his personal input at $90 million (so far).6

‘Hundreds of thousands jailed in US for simple possession’ – sentencing for all offences, including drugs, has declined and is now at half the 1997 level. The average amount of cannabis per incarceration is 4,500 lbs. In 1998 alone 1.7 million pounds of cannabis were seized. Under 0.1% of those jailed are non-violent, first-time cannabis offenders.7

‘US incarceration policy is racist’ – demographic analysis belies this. In Northeast and Northwest regions sentencing black/white is equal, while in the Midwest whites do worse. Average sentences for the South are 1 month longer for blacks but, crucially, in this region all races are more likely to be convicted, and imprisoned for longer. This factor alone explains the differences.7

‘We are at surrender stage in the UK’ – despite the current World Health Organisation (WHO) European School Survey Project on Alcohol and other Drugs (EASAD) report, the white flag can stay in the locker for a long time yet. The UK Anti-Drugs Coordination Unit confirm that more than 80% of young people either never use at all (50%) or else give up after one or two tentative tries, a figure which has been growing for at least the last three years.

‘Just Say No doesn’t work’ – unsupported sloganeering certainly doesn’t work but the US programme of this name was much more. It was a comprehensive personal and social development process and one of the key factors in the prevention gains from 1980-92.

Undoubtedly some re-visit the slogan as a coded message implying prevention as a whole doesn’t work, but there is a growing body of evidence to rebut this slander. The work of experts such as Kumpfer8, Tobler9 and Benard10 relates to large numbers of successful initiatives.

But Joan Smith does have a point (Druglink Jan/Feb 2001 p.14). Latin America is certainly in a mess. Nowhere more so than Colombia under President Pastrana, a man who demonstrates his readiness to ‘milk the cow from both sides’ – sacred or not. Bellicose presidential anti-drug proclamations have been accompanied by awarding the drug-financed guerrilla forces a ‘police and army-free’ slice of Colombia the size of Switzerland.

Mexico is more encouraging. On a visit there recently George Bush said the time was past for Americans to blame Mexicans for a problem substantially derived from the demands of American youth. He said that priority should be given to ensure the effectiveness of prevention programmes, and that jailing first-time drug offenders: ‘may not be the best use of jail space, or the best way to free them from their disease.’

Danny Kushlik defines drug policy parameters (Druglink Jan/Feb 2001, p.20), but ends up with some dubious correlations. A more sound method is to look at the experience of countries that have tried to unravel their drug laws.11

Holland and Switzerland are glorified by some but there are enough negative reports, despite the predominantly libertarian media, to give cause for serious doubt.

Journalist and writer Larry Collins?12 is not impressed by the proposal to go Dutch. WHO and INCB experts have combined13 to condemn the Swiss experience as a questionable model – not to be followed by other countries.

Spain in the early 80s relaxed laws for cannabis, cocaine and heroin until parents shamed the government into a tougher stance. Italy in the late 80s rescinded lax heroin laws after record levels of addiction and death. Japan cut record abuse levels of amphetamines and heroin by applying firm laws with mandatory rehabilitation. In the distant past China found it necessary to apply stricter laws and education/rehabilitation to recover from damage by British-marketed opium.

Closer to home the ‘British experiment’ of heroin on prescription was revoked after it led to ‘leakage’ on to the street and record levels of youth addiction. Those European countries now approaching law relaxation may find themselves living through a previously-observed cycle – the three Rs: relax, repent, repeal.

In 1975 Alaska caved in to a well-orchestrated campaign for decriminalisation. The grounds for decriminalisation of cannabis were that this would not increase casual or chronic use as there was already lots of both about. It would not boost use of other drugs as cannabis as a gateway to other drug use is a myth. Crime would go down due to no possession charges and streets full of peaceful cannabis smokers.

More than a decade’s experience and observation convinced the Alaskan Supreme
Court that exactly the opposite had happened, and in 1990 the decriminalisation was rescinded.

Perhaps the most instructive example comes from Sweden.14 In the mid-50s Sweden found itself facing increased amphetamine use. Its natural instinct was to seek a liberal accommodation. Accordingly, the use of amphetamines was decriminalised while social/medical systems were put in place to accommodate the behaviour and minimise the harm.

Within 15 years the Swedes found amphetamine use had soared to enormous levels and with it social and medical costs. A new plan was introduce with the incremental introduction of firm laws plus mandatory treatment schemes. Today Sweden has prevalence levels a fraction of the rest of Europe.

Recent moves to relax the policy have been emphatically rejected, and Sweden stays with their preventive approach, which they characterise as ‘a vision expressing optimism and a positive view of humanity.’ The contrast between Sweden and, for example, Australia is, as researcher Dr Lucy Sullivan15 says ‘highly suggestive of which country has chosen the more effective approach’ (see table). (Full Drug Policy comparison article)

Sweden Australia
Lifetime prevalence of drug use in 
16-29 year olds (Sweden) and 14-25 year olds (Australia) 
9% 52%
Use in the previous year, as above 2% 33%
Estimated dependent heroin users per million population 500 5-6000
Percentage of dependent users aged under 20 1.5% 8.2%
Methadone patients per million population 50 940
Drug-related deaths per million population 23 48
Percentage of all deaths at age under 25 1.5% 3.7%
Drug offences per million population –
Sweden = arrests; Australia = convictions
3100 1000
Average months in prison per drug offence 20 5
Property crimes per million population 51,000 57,000
Cumulative AIDS cases per million population

 

Culture

The culture in which decisions on life issues are taken is all-important, whatever the country.

In the case of youth and drug use in the UK, recent decades have seen many cultural developments: more drugs at lower real prices, a shift from community orientation to individualism, a search for rapid gratification, less guidance from (and faith in) religion, a pill for every ill, marching for rights but never for responsibilities. This comes with an increase in youth autonomy and spending power simultaneous with a decrease in traditional authority from parents, teachers and other civic/social agencies.

This may help to understand how the UK comes top of the European league for self-indulgence but it misses one important factor – what contribution have we, the relevant professionals in health, education and social fields, made to all this?

The answer is not flattering.16 There has been too much striving for acceptance by youth, too much selling out. We try to identify with youth and too often we over-identify. The result has been sizeable sections of youth who have scant respect for others, or for society’s boundaries. In effect they sign up for the (Rogerian) gospel of Values Clarification – a do-it-yourself morality kit.17 This is not education, it is abdication.

Steering the educationist juggernaut will be one of the biggest challenges to Keith Hellawell, our UK Anti-Drug Coordinator (many fail the driving test). It will require him to put some flesh on the bones of his rhetoric – however sincere.

Keith Hellawell is personally commited to minimising drug use, affirms that he is convinced of the significantly damaging effects of cannabis – physiological, social, emotional and intellectual. He says that he has ‘never been a just say no person, but is a say no for these reasons person’.

He rejects an educational approach that is relaxed about drug use, which replaces behaviour boundaries with harm reduction. But if prevention is ever to become more than a slogan he needs to put the Government’s money where his mouth is.

Prevention outweighs permissive policy every time in terms of social benefit to the individual and to society. And yet, when the sacred cows come home and when the relative strengths of our friends and our adversaries are weighed in the balance, we probably get the society we deserve.

References:

1. O’ Connor et al. (1999) ‘Drug Education in Schools.’ Roehampton Institute.

2. Burgess, R. (1996) ‘What’s Wrong with Prevention?’ Druglink, March/April .

3. Lofquist W. (1983) ‘Discovering the Meaning of Prevention’. AYD Publications.

4. ‘A Push for National Drug Law Reform’. Connexions News Oct/Nov 1994.

5. US Biennial Household Surveys, correlated with Michigan Schools System

6. AP wire, 25 Aug 1997: George Soros quoted in ‘Time’ magazine that he has spent ‘more than $90 million in recent years to weaken drug laws’.

7. Peterson, R. E. (1997) ‘Drug Enforcement Works’. PAE Consultants.

8. Kumpfer, K. (1990) ‘ Challenges to Prevention Programmes in Schools’. OSAP.

9. Tobler, N.S. (1986) ‘Meta-Analysis of 143 Adolescent Drug Prevention Programmes’ Journal of Drug Issues

10. Benard, B. (1987) ‘Characteristics of Effective Prevention Programmes’.ITI and NIDA

11. Peterson, R E. (1991) ‘Legalisation – the Myth Exposed’. Narc Officer.

12. Collins, L. (1999) ‘Holland’s Half-Baked Drug Experiment’. Foreign Affairs.

13. (1999) ‘International Criticism of the Swiss Heroin Trials’ AIDS-Aufklarung Schweiz and Schweizer Aerzte gegen Drogen.

14. Swedish National Institute of Public Health. (1995) ‘Drug Policy – the Swedish Experience’.
15. Sullivan, Dr. L. (1999) ‘Drug Policy: A Tale of Two Countries’ News Weekly

16. Dennis, Prof N. (1997) ‘Social Irresponsibility.’ Christian Institute.

17. Stoker, P. (1999) ‘Early years drug prevention and education – getting back on track’ Early Child Development and Care, Vol 158, .

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

A framework for the future of British drugs strategy

‘Tackling Drugs Together’, a strategy for 1995-98 came from joint action by all relevant government departments and with support from all major political parties. Specialist agencies, including NDPA, contributed to its production. Much positive progress has been made. The Drug Action Team/Drug Reference Group structure has concentrated minds. The ensuing review of prevention, intervention, treatment and rehabilitation services has pointed up areas for improvement. Above all, the commitment to more and better primary prevention (including education) has galvanised action across the field.

Three years is little enough to establish a structure, let alone deliver on it. There must be a corresponding strategy beyond 1998 and into the next millenium. This will always be a ‘long game’. This Paper suggests how an improved strategy could develop.

Drug strategy is always prey to ideology and negative agendae. A firm hand on the tiller is essential. In summary NDPA would wish to see a system which promotes total rather than just physical health; instead of reactively responding to sickness, it validates and encourages non-users, minimises the number who start, facilitates users to stop, and uses the tools – including the justice system – constructively; with firmness melded with sensitivity.

A Total Health

The World Health Organisation (and many others before them) have defined Health as having six components: physical, mental-intellectual, emotional, social, spiritual, and environmental. Far too much of drug related work to date has ignored all but the physical element. Real progress awaits this fundamental widening of vision.

B Education is not equal to Prevention

A common misunderstanding is that Education = Prevention. Section C (below) exposes the fallacy of this; education is an important part, but far from being the whole. This flaw is compounded by overviews of work in Britain, much of which has indeed been limited to education, and has in consequence been of limited efficacy. This has had much to do with the unusually pessimistic attitude towards Prevention of many British drug workers. Ample evidence of success exists in other countries, and cultural transferability has already been demonstrated to the satisfaction of all except those with the telescope to their blind eye.

The vital techniques of persuasion; vocabulary, semantics, images, psychology and ‘thinkspeak’ are well understood by those who seek to replace ‘Tackling Drugs Together’ with more acquiescent strategies. It is palpably true that those who support the strategy are sadly not so well versed. Until this disadvantage is removed the struggle will always be uneven.

C A Community Affair

We live in a symptom-focussed society, with separated response systems for such as health, social services, justice. Painful experience has shown that this ‘segmental’ attitude seriously hampers effective prevention – the correct approach must be to engage the whole of society, albeit in different ways. We must grow beyond the notion that prevention is merely ‘stopping something happening’ into promoting and enriching the wellbeing of people. Some examples of action within the community are:

• Government – Specify, resource, manage, evaluate
• Health – Cover all health elements
• Schools – Health promoting policies
• Colleges – train teachers/youth workers in prevention
• Peers – Utilise potential
• Parents – de-marginalise, train, resource, support
• Religion – spiritual lead, network
• Pharmacists – Pro-active, prevent, reduce harm
• Businesses – Employee Assistance (EAP), testing
• Media – Educate staff, avoid mixed messages
• Vol. Sector – Network and engage
• Sport – Pro-active prevention
• Drug services – Encourage plurality

D Long, wide and deep

Environmental and nurture factors around the child which may precede drug misuse start very early; even in the nursery. Factors increasing propensity for use are many and varied, and can be profound. Prevention systems must therefore be ‘long, wide and deep’.

There is a flavour permeating from some quarters that exploratory use (otherwise euphemistically named ‘experimental’ use) is of relatively little concern. This is not only untrue, it reveals a fundamental misunderstanding of the process. Community-wide primary prevention for all age groups, especially the young, needs very substantial development above the present very limited levels. Beyond this there is also scope for focussed interventions, such as ‘mentoring, with those young people identified as more ‘at risk’ than others.

Parents are a key resource in prevention, a resource largely ignored thus far. Their marginalisation and disenfranchisement must be reversed, and they need support and training to cope with the greater demands on parents in this area.

E Social Foundation

Cutting-edge prevention technology recognises that wide focus is fundamental. Whilst social factors such as deprivation, unemployment or homelessness are not necessarily causal to drug misuse, they certainly correlate. Rhetoric around ‘return to full employment’ helps no one; if life after the microchip means ‘less than full’ employment, the social strategy should own up to this and address it constructively.

Support systems in ‘deprived’ areas should not presume all residents are drug users. If anything these areas need more primary prevention resources, not less.

F Justice potential

NDPA has identified ways of improving the application of the justice system. but surrendering to the drug problem is not one of them. Research has shown that justice systems which are firm but fair and coupled with quality drug prevention produce the best results. There is certainly more scope for diversion to treatment or counselling, (such as the TASC system in America), but by no means everyone is far enough into ‘a drug career’ for this to be relevant; in earlier stages some other intervention – perhaps developed upwards from Reparative Cautioning – should be explored.

Throughout the justice system (and without denying the just application of punishment and retribution, which are matters outside the scope of this Paper) the focus should firmly be on whatever methods are needed to produce voluntary non-offending in future. The deterrent effect of the sentencing structure will only be one part of this. There is good evidence to suggest that Drug Courts can be a helpful introduction; expediting cases and hearing them before knowledgeable judges and court officials is welcomed, even by the defendants.

G No debate needed

For drug apologists still pathetically struggling, thirty years on, to justify their cause, a common ploy is to refer to “the current debate on drugs”. Just keeping the subject on the agenda is a tactical victory. The next step is to continually plead until exhaustion in the listeners yields some compromise. The truth is that outside of this minority and a strangely supportive media there is no debate. Parents and other citizens do not want their children to misuse drugs – legal or otherwise. Some groups, including NDPA, feel obliged to respond, but do so unwillingly. Many MP’s have made it clear they reject calls for a Royal Commission since this would send an erroneous signal to the public that the law might change, when there is no such intention. NDPA strongly supports this stance. Mixed messages are confusing, especially to our young people.

H The public and the media

Engaging with the community at several levels and in several ways is the lifeblood of democracy, if a little anaemic at times.

With the drugs issue, the task is hampered by accidental or calculated misinformation, the use of out of date materials and by the personal agendae of those delivering the information – be they media personnel, drugs professionals, or others in the community. A whole vocabulary of ‘weasel words’ has been developed by a well-financed international pro-drug lobby, to confuse and seduce our policy makers and the public at large.

For ‘realism’ read ‘surrender’; for ‘informed choices’ read ‘laissez-faire’, for ‘normalisation’ read ‘decriminalisation’, for ‘prohibition’ read ‘the current laws almost all of us support’; for ‘harm reduction’ read ‘legalisation’, and so on.

NDPA finds the metaphor ‘War on Drugs’ inexact and unhelpful, but rumours of its death are greatly exaggerated. Some pro-drug campaigners suggest this is a ‘Civil War’, with the public as innocent victims – if this be so, then these campaigners are to the drug barons as collaborators are to an invasion force.

Government could do the whole process a great service, and increase the chances of its strategy succeeding, by tackling this issue assertively. The fact is that over at least the last ten years far too much succour has been given to those who seek to undermine the governments’, strategies; despite people of the calibre of Anna Bradley – ISDD Director, making it clear that “there is no research base for Harm Reduction”. The received wisdom of Harm Reduction has been widely applied whilst Prevention of any merit has either been undercut or excluded altogether. Ironically, in the face of increasing use over this period the protagonists of Harm Reduction audaciously claim that this is evidence that Prevention is failing! Government attempted to put Harm Reduction in proper perspective when producing ‘Tackling Drugs Together’, but old ideology dies hard. A good start would be to correct the definition of ‘Prevention’: to prevent should mean to be pre-event; anything during or after the event is damage limitation (harm reduction) or repair (treatment/rehab.)

(NDPA wishes to make it plain that the above relates to the ‘abuse’ of Harm Reduction as a ‘Trojan Horse’ for legalisation or decriminalisation, in the guise of a broad policy for non-users and users alike. In the quite separate and more traditional application of Harm Reduction (or damage limitation) to mitigate the effects on actual users, NDPA is supportive.)

J More support needed

The structure for ‘Quality Assurance and Quality Control’ in delivering the national strategy needs strengthening. At present there is a system (CDCU/DAT/DRG) for communicating up and down. but the level of ‘specifying’ and ‘compliance control’ is less than desirable.

In essence, the government should be able to verify that its strategy is reflected in local policy and action; and if not, why not. The obvious control mechanism would be funding, which should be prospectively and retrospectively tied to compliance (as well as to effectiveness). Funding of all aspects (prevention, intervention and treatment/rehab.) is well below where it should be. Moreover, within this funding structure prevention is very much the ‘Cinderella’ service. If compliance is given its due importance, it follows that it must be underpinned with appropriate ‘good practice’ training mechanisms.

Training should not be confined to the professions directly concerned with drugs services but should cover others of secondary and tertiary relevance; it must also cover the Voluntary Sector. In the case of any future regulating/accreditation systems for this field, it is essential that this is done by an independent body able to take a detached and balanced view of the whole process. Those working in intervention and treatment may well come under the purview of the Dept. of Health but for those at the Primary Prevention end a body such as America’s CSAP (Center for Substance Abuse Prevention) would be more appropriate.

Whilst sound arguments exist for having lengthier funding for proven schemes, there is also sound argument for seed-funding new initiatives, in order to judge their effectiveness. Evaluation budgets tend to ignore or under-resource newer, smaller initiatives; the reverse should be the case if value for money is to be achieved.

K Drug Information

Research, surveys and observation will continue to be vital to the success of prevention. There is a regrettable degree of xenophobia (towards overseas research and practice) in the drugs field which may have more to do with ‘ownership/control’ fixations, or excluding that which does not fit certain agendas; these factors often seem to hold more sway than the technical merits of the material. NDPA strongly recommend increased interchange with other countries on all aspects of drug-related work, particularly primary prevention, where there is so much that we can learn.

An almost unheralded reduction, in the USA of 60% over twelve years in the use of all drugs at all ages led Neil Dixon, BBC Social Affairs Editor to describe it as “America’s best kept secret”. The misuse of drugs is a global problem and we should be more willing to share international successes as well as failures.

It is fashionable to decry painful facts about drugs and their misuse; these should, it is argued, be excluded on the grounds that all “shock-horror” input is counter productive. A grain of common sense would not come amiss here; certainly hyperbole should be avoided, but rational facts set into context about the personal and social harm which can ensue should not be shirked. Leaving them out gives a falsely rosy picture of drug misuse. Prescribed drugs packaging contains information on all the possible harm – even though it is unlikely to affect more than a few people using the medicine.

L And in conclusion…

Current vogue in youth education speaks of ‘Informed Choices’. ‘Choice’ implies there are two or more valid options for selection. In the case of illegal drug use there is no option. In what other area of illegal behaviour – theft, violence. etc. do we permit choice? Moreover, the educationist vogue is to say this is ‘your choice’ – implying that the many other people consequentially impacted by that choice feature little if at all in the process. This is another area of training our young for life which needs rapid rectification.

Though the prevalence of drug use, especially by young people seems to be worsening, there is no need for fatalism. Others have succeeded, and if we improve our ways of tackling this together -not hoping for that mythical ‘silver bullet’ but instead co-operating in a pluralist approach, there is a bright future ahead. In this era of unemployment the word “redundancy” has become tainted, but there is one redundancy we can all welcome…

…we don’t need drugs!

Back to Papers

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
The overlap in technologies between drug prevention, delinquency prevention, and behavioural modification within the Social Services context (as described at the beginning of this chapter) was an exciting discovery for this author. However, rather like being the second into the bathtub after Archimedes, it was found to be not a new discovery. In 1983 Bill W. Lofquist in the foreword to his classic book, had made the following key statement:
‘We have organised human services around symptoms, building entire systems that work in relative isolation from one another. Juvenile and criminal justice, education, health, public welfare, recreation and many other services function in separate spheres and there is often isolation of components even within these systems….

Prevention is another matter. When I have told people I have been working on a book about prevention, the immediate question has often been prevention of what?’ That is a logical question in a symptom-focused, remedial, reactive world. I have purposefully left any mention of symptoms out of the title of the book. One reason is the awareness that a wide variety of symptoms are the result of some common conditions. Designing separate systems for remedial work may make some sense, but addressing the common conditions which promote those systems calls for a different approach. If we can get beyond the notion that prevention is only “stopping something from happening” to a more positive approach, that creates conditions which promote the well-being of people, we can begin to view human services quite differently. This, in turn, can transform and enrich our approaches to helping people and building communities that are relatively free of the symptoms we have designed the services around.

The wider significance and potential of this finding is enormous. It means that if we can only produce and effect truly comprehensive prevention strategies there is the promise of society empowering itself to achieve improvements across a broad spectrum. Nothing solves everything, of course, and like many good strategies it is likely to fall foul of such factors as professional and/or parochial jealousies, myopic policies, etc. Prevention workers are therefore unlikely to need to plan a fresh career for some time to come.

Taken from “Drug Prevention – Just Say NOW”, by Peter Stoker
David Fulton Publishers, London 1992.

Back to Papers

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

THE CANNABIS DEBATE
Re-printed from the Daily Mail Monday 30th July 2001
by David JonesSenior politicians have suggested the laws on cannabis should be revised after a new survey for the department of Health shows drug use among children is soaring. But should cannabis be legalised? On Saturday in the Mail we asked people from all walks of life for their opinion – and intriguingly it was those in medicine and law enforcement who warned against liberalisation. Today, we publish a special investigation comparing two very different policies on drug use in two European countries to see which is most effective.

The unmarked police patrol van suddenly brakes and two plain clothes officers step briskly on to the pavement, blocking the path of a group of teenagers wandering, apparently innocently, through their leafy suburban housing estate. “Hi, kids, how are things going?” begins Inspector Alex Hermansson. His tone is affable, but the youths, aged between 15 and 18, are apprehensive, for they know full well that this is more than a friendly chat. As Hermansson engages them in conversation, his colleague, Lars-Hakan Lindolm, checks each one for signs of drug abuse. First he looks into their eyes. Are the pupils dilated? Then he examines their jaws: is anyone chewing excessively – a classic symptom of Ecstasy use – or grinding their teeth, as amphetamine takers often do? This time, all the friends appear ‘clean’ and within a few minutes they are allowed to walk on. Yet the merest hint that they had taken any drug would have seen them arrested, their urine or blood tested, and brought before the courts.

Contrast this scene with another, which I had witnessed a few days earlier, in an equally respectable looking residential area only a few hundred miles away. It was a warm summer’s evening and children were playing in the streets, but all around the Lucky Luke ‘coffee shop’ the air was redolent of sticky sweet marijuana fumes. In theory, the people who go there to get legally stoned or buy their takeaway cannabis supplies – characters ranging from jobless hippies to smart business executives – are not supposed to smoke their reefers out of doors.

However, in practice, several of the licensed dope den’s customers casually lit joints, knowing the police would admonish them at worst, but would more likely smile and wave them on their way.

This is a tale of two countries whose attitude towards drugs could not be farther apart.

The first, Sweden, is hell-bent on creating a drug-free society. Its relentless pursuit of this seemingly unattainable ideal is taking the fight against drugs to tough new levels, unprecedented in the Western World. The second, Holland, has – willingly or not – won a reputation as Europe’s drugs capital. Hordes of tourists go there to take advantage of its liberal cannabis laws, which could soon be relaxed still more to allow production and bulk sales, as well as personal use.

In recent weeks, Britain has been lurching ever closer towards the Dutch model, with politicians to the left and right supporting the growing clamour to legalise cannabis. The question is: Which of these two contrasting societies would you prefer to live in?

The statistics might help you to make up your mind. In Sweden, only 2 of every 100 people aged between 15 and 25 are likely to have smoked cannabis in the past year; in Holland it is about seven times more (and a staggering eight times more in Britain).

Surely not coincidentally, the use of hard drugs, such as heroin, cocain, ecstasy and amphetamines, is appreciably lower in Sweden, too. So is the prevalence of drugs-related crime, though this is rising in both countries.

In Sweden, the mass production of drugs remains negligible, while Holland – which churns out up to 80% of the worlds ecstasy and truckloads of powerful ‘Nederweed’ cannabis – has been branded the drug baron of Europe. Despite these alarming facts, I leaned towards legalisation before embarking on this comparative study. The prospect of a few hash cafes seemed unlikely to threaten the fabric of society. And the casual use of cannabis is imbued so deeply in British youth culture that decriminalisation seemed, if not desirable, wearily inevitable. Ten days touring Holland and Sweden has changed my thinking completely.

The trail began with Amsterdam and the Grasshopper, a vast neon-lit dope-fiends’ mecca that shimmers invitingly in the vice-ridden part of the city. As I arrived, I was instantly disabused of the myth trotted out by Dutch drugs policy apologists. If we listen to them, the tolerance of cannabis in a controlled environment has succeeded in separating the hard and soft drugs market.

When you buy hashish in a ‘coffee shop’, the accepted wisdom runs, at least you’re not being hassled to buy something worse, such as heroin. This is nonsense. Even before I had paid my taxi driver I was being harassed by a scruffy Middle Eastern pusher who tried to press sugar-cube sized rocks of crack cocaine into my hand – something that has never happened to me in Leicester Square or Piccadilly. Such dealers target the major cannabis cafes, where stoned youths provide easy pickings.

Away from the squalid red light area, smaller coffee shops such as Dutch Flowers, a quaint canal-side establishment, can mislead the first-time visitor into thinking Holland’s dope houses are no more dangerous than the Rovers Return. As I perused a menu, featuring Spirit of Amsterdam (a Dutch grown favourite) and Morocco Unique (a medal winner in the annual cannabis cup), Marcel, the friendly manager, smoked the profits and extolled the virtues of Holland’s approach.

The cafes were largely peaceful and well run, he said. Bosses such as his own, who runs four coffee shops, upheld strict licensing laws that banned anyone under 18 and restricted the amount a customer could buy to five grams – sufficient for perhaps five strong joints. Listening to Marcel talk, and watching his young customers – some British dope tourists – quietly smoke themselves into a stupor, it all seemed rather harmless. But then, as the weed loosened his tongue, a darker picture began to emerge.

The law states that the cafes can keep only a kilogram of cannabis on their premises at any time. On busy days, this stash can run out several times. But the production and large scale supply of cannabis remains illegal – so where did replenishment come from?

“It’s a real back-door story,” Marcel said, lowering his voice. “Mostly we buy from middle men. Much of it is smuggled in from Morocco or Afghanistan. Let’s just say we have to be very discrete.”

The ‘back-door story’ has been one of Europe’s great untold scandals since Holland relaxed its cannabis laws more than 25 years ago. Ridiculously, the country allows cannabis to be sold in approved outlets (currently, 800 are licensed by local authorities), yet everything else to do with the drug is illegal – from growing it to importing it. Anyone who cultivates or imports cannabis is committing a criminal offence. This double standard has been exercising the Dutch parliament, and MPs recently voted to end the hypocrisy by regulating the entire cannabis market, from plant to pipe.

So far, however, the government refuses to sanction these proposals. Even it is not sufficiently laid back to risk the international outcry that would result. While the debate goes on, the shadowy figures who control the Dutch trade thrive.

The following day, I discovered just how easily they make their fortunes, right under the noses of the authorities, when I crossed the famous wartime ‘Bridge too Far’ and entered Arnhem. There, at the Lucky Loop coffee shop, I met an amiable, attractive couple, both 21, Denis Holdyk and Krysta Slykhuis.

Though they shared the strongest joint on offer – the mind-blowing White Widow – they remained remarkably lucid, their tolerance bolsted by smoking cannabis almost every day since they were 13.

Somewhat recklessly, Holdyk soon disclosed that he was one of around 500 cannabis growers who supply the cafes in and around the city. He began business three years ago, with five plants, but was now renting two apartments as cannabis nurseries, and reckoned to make around £80,000 a year. One day, he said, he would leave Holland and launder the money. “Then I will retire to my yacht and get high all day,” he smiled.

My first reaction, I confess, was one of muted admiration. After all, here was a young man who seemed to believe in what he was doing, and had turned a small (albeit illegal) business into a roaring success.

As the evening wore on, however, I realised that Holdyk and his girl friend were not the earnest, untroubled entrepreneurial couple they presented. Both suffered recurring psychiatric problems, and it was impossible to believe their blind insistence that smoking huge quantities of cannabis (and, in Krysta’s case, taking almost every other drug) was not to blame. They also boasted of helping a jailed associate to smuggle drugs into prison.

“We wrapped a big piece of hash inside some silver paper and he swallowed it,” said Holdyk. “that man became the richest guy in the prison”.

If I still needed proof that the great Dutch drugs experiment has failed, I found it in the Southern frontier town of Venlo. Two decades ago, this 90,000 strong community supported just one licensed coffee shop selling cannabis. Today, there are more than 60, but of that number only five have licenses – the rest are illegal.

And, to the horror of its citizens, Venlo has become a drugs cash-and-carry for droves of German shoppers, who need to drive only three miles across the border. To stroll along the River Maas, even at lunchtime, is like stepping into some oriental opium bazaar. The peddlers, almost exclusively Turkish, urge you inside seedy shops selling cannabis paraphernalia. But many offer harder drugs, too.

Parking my car opposite these dubious shops, I glanced through the window of a grubby, white van. Inside, a middle-aged man was smoking heroin from silver foil. Small wonder that most parents have banned their children from walking beside the river.

Belatedly, the burghers of Venlo are endeavouring to reclaim their once safe town. With the backing of the Dutch government, they have launched Operation Hector, a £25 million project aimed at shutting down the drugs denizens.

Andre Rouvoet, an MP for the small Christian Unison party, is among the small number of Dutch politicians who wish they could turn back the clock. Asked what he thought might happen if Britain were to legalise cannabis, he said:”Let me give you some good advice. Don’t. Just don’t.”

And so to Sweden. A generation ago, this fiercely independent nation of nine million souls might easily have gone the way of Amsterdam, but at the height of the bohemian Sixties, something went wrong. The Swedish government had empowered certain named doctors to prescribe narcotics to anyone claiming to be addicted.

The system was widely abused and one of the junkies supplied an overdose to his fiancée, who died. The story caused a national scandal. At roughly the same time, a Swedish professor, Nils Begerot, published a major study of drug misuse. He concluded that soft drugs invariably let to harder ones and that abuse was akin to an epidemic, which spread inexorably through the population.

Thus was Sweden’s hardline policy born. The first laws were drafted in 1968, but they have been sharpened over the years, so that now all narcotics, from cannabis upwards, are regarded seriously, and even their presence in the bloodstream is punishable with prison.

The police camp on the doorsteps of known drug sellers and users, continually stopping and searching them. No drugs offence, however petty, is overlooked. Even small-time cannabis smokers can expect to be arrested and fined, over and over again. If they don’t kick the habit, they might be sent for compulsory treatment in an addiction centre. Some are jailed.

Constantly badgered like this, even hardened habitual offenders throw in the towel. In Malmo’s central prison I spoke to Faruk Haliti, 25, who started using drugs at 14 and later joined a notorious, violent Gothenburg gang. Tired of being hounded, he has opted to end his latest sentence – two years for possessing a machine gun and cocaine – in a therapy unit.

“I’ve been in prison maybe ten times and I’ve had enough,” he said “I’m going to try to straighten myself out.”

The Swedes are determined to prevent more children from growing up like Haliti. To that end, school pupils are required to fill in questionnaires about their drug habits, and where there is evidence of abuse, action is swiftly taken. I saw the evidence of the programme’s efficacy when I ventured into Rosegarde, Malmo, one of Sweden’s toughest high-rise estates, where 70% of its largely immigrant population are jobless.

If this were Peckham, say, or Moss Side, a smorgasbord of drugs would have been on offer. Yet all the teenagers I spoke to there were horrified when I asked whether they smoked cannabis to ease their boredom. “None of our friends takes anything like that,” said Petric Takiri, 15, a Kosovan. “We value our health”.

Whether the Swedish model could ever succeed in Britain is open to question. It would demand huge resources and require a monumental cultural shift. According to Malmo police chief Thomas Servin, it is already too late. “I would like Britain and all the EU countries to follow our example, but I don’t think it will happen,” he said.

“In your country the attitude is different. They sell cannabis openly, and you have this liberal view.” Perhaps he is right, but I have returned home convinced that we should seriously consider giving Swedish-style zero tolerance a try.

Because, faced with the choice of raising my children in dope-fugged Holland or squeaky clean Sweden, I know which country I would choose.

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

Editorial Comment on British government’s New Media strategy for drugs

NEW BRITISH MEDIA DRUG CAMPAIGN HAS SCHIZOID TENDENCIES

Late May saw the public launch, on satellite and terrestrial channels, of the British Government’s latest strategy concerning drug misuse. The strategy includes an array of TV and radio announcements, a new web page ( www.talktofrank.com ), a new telephone help line (to replace the National Drugs Helpline), an email help line, and a collection of CD Rom or print based materials, which local agencies are encouraged to use to promote the campaign and to generate activities with the public. The budget for this campaign is set at £3 million a year for the next three years.

The strategy has been given the brand name of ‘Frank’ – this was chosen after much internal contemplation and focus group dialogue. The organizers perceive this brand name to convey an image which is non-judgmental, honest, down-to-earth, entertaining and always there for you – maybe something like an older uncle … that kind of relative whom young people would feel more comfortable speaking with than they would with their own parents.

The most usual dictionary definition of the word ‘FRANK’ is “open, honest and direct, especially when dealing with unpalatable matters ” … but another definition – intriguingly – is the “stamping of an official mark on a communication”. Moreover, the original Franks were a people that controlled much of Western Europe for several centuries … the choice of name for this campaign might therefore achieve a certain resonance in Downing Street. (as an ‘aspirational target’, anyway).

It would be quite wrong to be unremittingly carping about Frank; there are aspects which deserve commendation and encouragement. Paul Betts, father of the late Leah Betts, whose death from ecstasy sparked off a major media campaign, expressed himself encouraged by some of the content, and by the principle of ‘talking with’ rather than ‘talking at’ the young (not a new practice, but certainly a good one) At the same time any campaign which sets itself up as being ‘open, honest and direct’ must expect commentary upon it to be likewise. An overview, therefore, would conclude that there is a mix of the good and the bad; a mix of the sophisticated and the naive – and, above all, Frank seems to be suffering from schizophrenia when he contemplates his goals.

This last point is most evident when Frank addresses drugs other than his ‘betes noire’ (heroin and cocaine) – the strategy is said to dovetail with the overall drug strategy, which has, as one of its main aims, “… helping young people resist drug misuse in order to achieve their full potential in society”. The official press release for Frank backs this up by saying that “A key priority of the drugs strategy is to educate young people and prevent them becoming involved in drugs”. These are aims which would find favour with all but the most libertarian zealots. Sadly, the actual detail of what Frank will get up to is all but invisible in respect of prevention, and seems, more often than not, to be written in terms of fatalism about drug use and thereafter acceptance of drug-using behaviour. Much is made – especially in the adverts – of the assertion that “… as many as one in three people have taken drugs …” without clarifying that this figure is for any use at all throughout one’s lifetime, and the majority of these ‘users’ never do more than ‘dabble’ once or twice before giving up. Even for the higher use group which is young people, the number who use more than twice is as low as one in six, with the figures for regular or for problematic use being very much lower than this.

If Frank intends to be “honest and direct” about “preventing them becoming involved in drugs” then why does the campaign say it will “… focus on the most vulnerable young people … (and) … will focus on cocaine and heroin “? The answer seems to rest in some of the remarks from the rostrum, to professionals and to the Press, at their respective launches. Once again the assertion was made that cocaine and heroin do more harm to society than other drugs, an assertion based on a narrow, user-centric definition of ‘harm’ which ignores significant categories of damage such as intellectual, social and emotional impacts, and which scarcely touches on the damage to people other than the user. Yet again there came the mantra: “The Just Say No approach does not work” – leaving aside the factually contentious (and sometimes tendentious) nature of this claim, there was a noticeable absence of reference to the many other varieties of primary prevention, where the reduction in use that comes from such initiatives is well documented. (A more cynical observer might conclude that the underlying agenda is to neuter all primary prevention). So, Just Say No is a no-no … and yet, referring to the fact sheet for the drug ecstasy, the unequivocal statement is made that “When you buy ecstasy you have no way of knowing what is in it, so the safest thing to take is nothing” – in other words, just say no.

The adverts, both TV and radio, will be found humorous by all but the most determinedly morose, and they have a fast-moving style which should appeal to young people – and to many of their parents. There is a debate to be had about underlying messages in the depictions, particularly of adults and of drug users, but this is for the future. Similarly, the language chosen for the fact sheets on specific drugs is simplified and boiled down in order to be more accessible to the lay reader, even though this risks people misconstruing what they perceive – and gives the more pedantic professionals something to get their teeth into. The risk of people picking up the wrong message is a key aspect – reservations have been expressed by several field workers. Picking up the wrong message is almost an Olympic sport amongst young people, and as one seasoned youth worker once observed “There’s nothing wrong with an adolescent, that reasoning with him won’t aggravate”.

Several professionals had things to say on this front. Alistair Lang, the chief executive of DARE (Drug Abuse Resistance Education) said “There is no harm in having information about drugs in the right places, but this sounds a bit like a ‘Which? Guide to mobile phones’. From the government you want to hear a categorical health warning, of the sort you get on cigarette packets, that drugs can harm – or even kill you”. Oliver Letwin, the Shadow Home Secretary, said it was “… highly questionable for taxpayers’ money to be spent on telling young people that Ecstasy gave them a buzz”.

Mail on Sunday senior columnist Peter Hitchens was trenchant in his criticisms of Frank; in his column on 1st June he urged parents to visit the website ( www.talktofrank.com ) and see for themselves the sort of advice being given out. [HNN website readers are encouraged to do the same – Ed.] Hitchens quoted this disturbing item: “If only illegal drugs came in packets with instructions … we’d all know what the drug would do, how much is too much and what other drugs are to be avoided at the same time”. Hitchens hammers the implications of this kind of presentation, which are that the law is bound to be ignored, and – even more dangerously, that there are safe ways to do drugs. Hitchens took up the website’s invitation to ask questions, and asked two simple ones: “Is it wrong to take drugs?” and “Is it ever safe to take drugs?”. The website was unable to offer a reply to Peter Hitchens, who concluded his article by wondering whether the Home Secretary David Blunkett could answer those simple questions, and added another question – ‘ Will the Home Secretary shut this site down?’ … an answer is unlikely.

Home Office ‘drugs minister’ Bob Ainsworth claimed that “this is the first time the government has tried to reach out to parents and carers as well as children … ” which will be viewed with surprise by those drug professionals whose shelves are sagging under the weight of previous government-sponsored material doing just that. Hazel Blears, Public Health minister, came in for some heavy media criticism when she said, “in many cases people do take drugs because it’s a pleasurable thing to do”. The outcry says more about the critics than about the issue; anyone who does not know that one of the primary motivations for drug abuse is pleasure needs to revisit their textbooks. Where the minister misfired was in not making it clear that pleasure from drugs up is artificial, short-lived, and ultimately empty experience, and therefore that the (legitimate) human pursuit of pleasure should be fulfilled via other routes – which a Public Health minister might be expected to not only be aware of, but to advocate. She compounded the felony by paraphrasing the attack on ‘Just Say No’ approaches, which makes one speculate whether her own ‘aspirational target’ is to render her post redundant! (Just say Go?).

Not all the critics of the Frank Campaign came from the prevention side of the field. Danny Kushlik, director of the ‘legalise everything’ Transform Drugs Policy Institute branded Frank a “wasted opportunity” because it offered no advice on ‘Harm Reduction’. He went on to emote “The campaign is crap. It focuses entirely on illegality. It looks like it’s been designed by some official at the Home Office” (hardly a breathtaking deduction). Even Release, the longtime cannabis legalisation campaigners, were unhappy; “Talk to Frank conjures up an image of a white older man”  (Release has, for several years, itself been managed by a white older man …). Of all the liberalist groups, only DrugScope seemed content – less than surprising to those who can see DrugScope’s fingerprints all over this product.

The fact sheets are certainly written in easy-to-read language, including slang, but some of the statements are a cause for serious concern. Amphetamines receive the admonition: “too much, too often can make people depressed and paranoid”. – the implication being that lesser consumption is of no concern. Regular users of cocaine or crack can, it is said, develop “a regular habit” (is there such a thing as a ‘irregular habit’?) – but there is no mention of cocaine or crack addiction. With Ecstasy,  “some of those who died did so from heat stroke” – but what of the others? Although, with Ecstasy, the uncertainty of what you are being sold leads Frank to recommend that you avoid it, a similar concern about uncertainty as to what you’re sold when it comes to heroin is not accompanied by any similar recommendation to just say no.

As might be expected, the fact sheet on cannabis is the biggest disappointment; and it receives fire from both sides. The UKCIA (UK Cannabis Information Agency) is incensed by what it sees as avoidance of its version of the truth; understandably enough, given their faith in the weed. Prevention professionals have also expressed serious reservations, but on the basis of research rather than faith. The extraordinary increase in strength in recent years, with the consequent major increased risks of psychoses, is brushed aside by the statement: “Some types are very mild. Some are very strong.”. There is a blunt and erroneous statement that “It is very unlikely that any one will become physically dependent on cannabis…” and this is reiterated later in the same fact sheet, albeit with psychological dependency acknowledged – yet in a phrasing that suggests this is somehow less of an issue – which any drug worker worth their salt will know is far from the case. Another misleading statement is that “some people use it for medical reasons – MS, glaucoma, (etc) …” – the more correct statement would have been “some people use it in the belief that it has medical benefit”; some people will see this statement as governmental acceptance of a position which – in respect of ‘raw’ (as-grown) cannabis – remains more likely to be scientifically rejected than accepted. Frank goes on to say “medicinal types of cannabis are being researched” – this is unforgivably sloppy writing; it is extracts of cannabis which are being researched, and then only for ingestion by means excluding smoking; there is no suggestion in the research that smoking cannabis joints is on the research or government agenda. Once again this sloppiness gives credence where none is justified, and unjustified succour to lobbies who are quite capable of making up their own fantasies without the help of the government writers.

At the launch for drugs professionals, first up to introduce Frank was Cathy Hamlyn – Head of Sexual Health and Substance Abuse at the Department of Health. Referring to an increased spend by her department, up from £236 million to £296 million per year (which makes for interesting comparison with just £3 million per year for Frank. One wonders where all the rest is going).She gave the overall aim of Frank as “helping young people understand the risks and the sources of help” (no mention of prevention there) and to “give parents more confidence”. The target age range for Frank was stated as “young people from 11-21 years and for parents of 11 to 18 year-olds”; this is probably a rational age bracket for those receiving or reading the Frank materials, even though there is some incidence of drug abuse below this age.

Next to speak was Katie Aston of the Home Office, who gave an interesting slant on one goal, which she verbalized as “… to reduce use of class A drugs and to reduce the frequent use of illicit drugs” – presumably infrequent use of illicit drugs is OK by Frank. She went on to say that one expectation was that there would be “… a shift in attitudes on specific drugs”, and she gave the example of “modifying the perception of heroin use as being linked with failure”. Quite what the advantage would be, and for whom, in this kind of ‘rehabilitation’ in the characterization of heroin use, is unclear. Equally unsettling was the stated intention, of “… starting the process of destigmatisation of drug abuse”. One can see the advantage, within a  therapeutic process (of counseling or treatment) of the client’s attitude not being clouded by such characterisations; but this is a world away from some general kind of normalisation across society, and with it the risk of suggesting an active acceptance of drug misuse. Home Office urgently needs to get its act together on these issues – assuming, charitably, that they have not already done so.

Also on the rostrum was Sarah Maclean, representing the Department for Education and Skills; she told the professionals that Frank will support schools (and young workers) through drug education advisers, and that this will involve the Drug Education Forum – not the best news for those drug educators who pursue a preventive approach; the DEF has long been dominated by a ‘harm reduction and personal choice’ model … it remains to be seen whether it changes its direction under its new chairman, Eric Carlin, who is UK chief executive of Mentor, the prevention body which has such diverse board members as HM the Queen of Sweden, and George Soros, as well as Lord Mancroft, a Tory peer with a penchant for relaxing drug laws.

A question about the absence of reference to gun crimes and turf wars, and there being only fleeting reference to crack cocaine, brought the response that Frank did not want to generate worry across the nation about specific drug problems which were more regionally concentrated. Questions about the absence of black people in the adverts threw the panel into a confusion of hand-wringing, with protestations that this was only the beginning, and that all ideas from the public and professions, for modifying the campaign will be entertained with enthusiasm. This remains to be seen.

Overall, then, there are things about Frank that are worthy of encouragement, but he has some worrying traits, and he seems to be facing in several directions when it comes to what he is trying to achieve; almost schizophrenic. Being all things to all men may seem a good strategy for a politician, but for a communicator with young people, parents and carers, Frank needs to be more than ‘open and non-judgmental’ – valuable though these values are. Young people can smell hypocrisy a mile off, and can tell when someone is pandering to them in an attempt to be ‘cool’ or to buy ‘cred’. Frank could usefully mature a little, pluck up his courage, and move beyond mere distribution of information – as a caring ‘older uncle’ might well do. Frank speaking about society’s goals does not have to be off-putting, nor does it have to stray into authoritarian mandates. If Frank can help the young and their parents understand – not only what drugs do, but also why it makes sense to avoid them – in the interest of other people, not just the user – then this would be a real leap forward … far beyond just saying ‘No’, and into a truly honest dialogue worth having, in the interests of all of us.

                _______________________


Website: www.talktofrank.com        email:
FRANK@homeoffice.gsi.gov.uk  
FRANK Hotline:   0800  77  66  00

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
Where school-based prevention programmes disappoint, family interventions have a better record. According to an authoritative review, the one with the best record of all is the US Families Programme now being tried in Britain. Where does it come from, and what is the evidence? Karol Kumpfer originated the programme.

The Strengthening Families Programmei is one of the few whose substance use prevention credentials have survived rigorous inspection by independent scholars, in this case a British team who singled it out as the most promising “effective intervention over the longer-term for the primary prevention of alcohol misuse”. Their judgement carries considerable weight because it was based on one of the scrupulously scientific Cochrane reviews. An added attraction is that Strengthening Families’ benefits potentially extend to youth crime and anti-social behaviour, educational attainment, and child welfare, consistent with advice that family interventions should not deal with drugs in isolation. Though the programme and most of the research are US-based, at least one British centre is using it to gain these broader benefits ( The British experience) and at another an evaluation is under way ( Accolade from Cochrane review).

Roots: drug using families and primary school children

The study which caught the Cochrane reviewers’ eyes involved a version of the programme designed to be universally applicable to the families of secondary school children and tested on mainly rural, white, intact families. However, its origins were in an attempt to help drug using parents do the best for their primary-school age children.5 Patients at a methadone clinic in Salt Lake City provided the impetus. By improving their parenting, they hoped to help their children avoid replicating their own fates and to achieve happiness and success. In response Karol Kumpfer, a developmental psychologist at the University of Utah, created an intervention to reduce the chances that the 6–10-year-old children of problem drug users would themselves later develop drug problems. She planned to achieve this by “improving parent-child relationships … We try to change the family dynamics, to create a more democratic family where they actually have family meetings, talk together, and plan activities together.”

 Careful construction

Work started in 1983 with a review of research on how drug problems and of existing family programmes which might divert this trajectory. Based largely on the Utah team’s own research, a careful unpicking of how the drug problems of parents affect their children established that disorganised stress in the household often results in a lack of consistent and responsible parenting.7 Parents spend relatively little time with their children, particularly ‘quality time’ enjoying joint activities. Stigma and fear of exposure lead to the social isolation of the family and of the child. To their peers, children from these families can seem ‘strange’, unable to engage in the normal give and take of social interaction or to share their homes and their families with their friends.ii The result is an impoverished social environment which lacks adult supports. Family dysfunction takes its toll on the child in the form of emotional stress, low self-esteem, under-achievement at school, conflict at home, and avoidance of intimate relationships. To meet these needs elements were adapted and blended from existing approaches.8 Despite the achievements of some parent-only approaches, Dr Kumpfer believed that the best response would involve the whole family – parents and children. Ironically given its later transformation into an across-the board (‘universal’) prevention programme, she was also convinced that there was a “qualitative difference” between trying to prevent drug abuse in these high-risk families and preventing recreational and experimental drug use by the children of more typical families. What emerged was the first Strengthening Families Programme. Its basic format has remained unaltered. The weekly sessions last two to three hours. For about an hour parallel groups of children and parents from four to 14 families develop their understandings and skills led by two parent and two child trainers. In a second hour parents and children come together as individual family units to practice the principles they have learned.9 The remaining time is spent in logistics, meals, and enjoyable family activities.5 Its tripartite nature (parents only, children only, then the whole family) departed from previous approaches as did the fact that parents put their learning into effect during the 14 sessions – an opportunity to receive immediate feedback from the trainers.8 During parent-child play sessions parents are coached in how to enjoy their children and to reinforce good behaviour. At first the accent is on building up the positives before tackling the more incendiary issues of limit setting and discipline. The programme is highly structured with detailed manuals, videos and activities, but also highly interactive and designed to be adapted sensitively to the participating families.

 The first test: parents in drug treatment

The approach was first trialled in Salt Lake City on 90 families with parents in outpatient substance abuse treatment. Though its findings were convincing enough to generate further federal funding, the study was never fully reported in a scientific journal 10 and the accounts we have seem inconsistent. Many studies followed but this remains one of the few to have randomised families to the programme, eliminating the risk that the apparent benefits arose simply because families who opted to undergo it differed from those who did not. Thirty families were randomly allocated to continue with the parent’s normal substance abuse treatment (the controls)9 while 20 each additionally received the Strengthening Families parents’ sessions, these plus the children’s sessions, or the full programme including the parent-child family sessions1 At issue was which approach would generate the greatest before–after improvements. The clear answer was the full programme. Compared to controls, families offered the full intervention improved in parenting, children’s social skills and family relationships. Parents became less depressed and cut their drug use. Children became less aggressive, better behaved, said relationships with other children had improved, and felt more able to express themselves. Among older children could be seen a reduction in the use of tobacco, drugs, and alcohol. The differences were usually substantial and statistically significant. Without family sessions there had been gains in parenting and child social skills but these had not gelled into improved family relationships. It was the package ‘wrapped up’ by parents and children coming together which had made the difference.

Adapted for new populations

A series of trials followed in which Strengthening Families was adapted for and tested on high-risk families with pre-teenage children from disparate backgrounds.Except for two as yet unpublished studies, none were randomised and only one has been published in a scientific journal.Results from one of the randomised studies are still being analysed. It involved not just US but also Canadian families, probably culturally closer to Britain. Participants were families with children aged 9–12 one of whose parents had a drink problem. They were randomly assigned to a minimal contact control group or to Strengthening Families. An initial report on 365 families who completed before-and-after interviews found significant extra parenting gains in the Strengthening Families group, particularly when the child was a boy. One of the largest of the non-randomised studies involved a mainly poor, multi-ethnic sample of 421 parents and their 703 youngsters aged 6–13. Strengthening Families was compared with a local variant which omitted the joint parent-child sessions found so important in the original study. Again their importance was shown when the full programme led to significantly better family environment, parenting, and child behaviour/emotion outcomes. A five-year follow-up of just the Strengthening Families sample found that the gains had largely persisted, but without a control group this finding can only be considered suggestive. In Hawaii an attempt was made to disseminate the programme throughout schools, churches, and public service organisations. Though multiply flawed, a local evaluation which compared a longer ‘culturally appropriate’ version against the original came up with the interesting finding that the customised version was less beneficial – a warning that though they improve recruitment, such modifications can also undermine the programme by departing from core content or principles. In this case a shift from behavioural training to ‘family values’ sessions could have been the culprit. Hawaii also demonstrated that the prospect of multiple benefits can stimulate support from disparate agencies, enabling large-scale implementation. It also underlined the importance of skilled trainers, these big families numbers were best kept low) if drop-out is to be minimised.

 Rural black mothers benefit

For America with its large black drug treatment caseload, whether the programme would work with these families was a major issue. An adapted Strengthening Families’ 14-session version has been tested mainly on high-risk families with primary school children, the seven-session version as a universal substance use prevention programme for secondary school children, but both have been used in other roles. For both there is evidence of improved family, parental and child functioning and of a retardation in the uptake of substance use and a reduction in its severity. For drinking in particular, the seven-session programme is considered the most promising approach we have, but research on this version is confined to a few studies in US rural communities, while most research on the 14-session version has consisted of uncontrolled studies. Nevertheless the consistency and bulk of positive findings warrants serious consideration of the approach not just for substance use prevention but as a means of promoting pro-social child development in general. It is feasible to implement in Britain and a formal evaluation is under way. A version was tested on 62 black, single-mother families in rural Alabama in a study which featured a one-year follow-up.Four results echo other work on the programme. First, recruitment beyond women already in treatment at a mental health centre proved difficult. The solution was to employ a recruiter from the same background who enrolled participants from venues such as housing estates, churches, and classes for problem children. ‘Indigenous’ recruiters also proved valuable in later trials. Secondly, over 80% of the recruited families virtually completed the 14 sessions, typical (perhaps after teething problems) of the programme. Thirdly, the most at-risk families made the greatest gains – in this case mothers who used illicit drugs as well as alcohol. Here there was more scope to normalise the children’s and the parents’ functioning, including their drug use. Children of less at-risk families improved only in the areas where they happened to be problematic in the first place. The implication is that the programme works by helping families with relatively severe problems move closer to the normal range. For those already within this range, it makes less difference. Lastly, the degree to which parents spoke up in the group sessions made no difference to how much they and their children profited from them – a finding later replicated.

Black drug using fathers queue up to join

The replication came in research on black fathers with 6–12-year-old children. In preparation the Alabama manual was tailored for the inner city and renamed the ‘Safe Haven Programme’. It was trialed on the residents of a Salvation Army drug treatment centre in Detroit, using drug counsellors as leaders. Again the recruiting agent was crucial, a charismatic ex-addict drug counsellor. Another typical feature was the integration of the programme into the life of ordinary community venues (local churches at night), destigmatising participation and enhancing sustainability. Also typical was the provision of child care, meals, transport, and other basic supports, much from church members or the treatment agency. These promoted recruitment and retention as did the advent of the specially tailored programme.vii At first low, the retention rate rose to 80% where it remained for four years as applicants came to exceed capacity. Within two years, 88 families had entered the programme. Most had below-poverty incomes and half the children had fallen seriously behind at school, but still 58 families came to at least 10 of the 12 sessions.For the analysis they were split into families whose adults (not just the father) consumed higher versus lower amounts of alcohol and illicit drugs. Before-to-after gains were concentrated in the high drug use families where there were substantial improvements in family and parental illicit drug use, parental depression, confidence in parenting ability, time spent with the children, in the childrens’ delinquency, aggression, and withdrawn or compulsive behaviour, and some improvements in family ‘atmosphere’. Parents also reported significant improvements in their child’s relationship with school.

 Feel the weight

Though encouraging, in both studies of black families parents chose to commit to the sessions,viii giving the intervention a head start by selecting out less committed families, and neither had a control group who did not go through the programme. Without this we cannot know whether in these families the improvements would have occurred anyway Practice points from this article This systematic review points to the potential value of the Strengthening Families Program … for the primary prevention of alcohol misuse.

Accolade from Cochrane review Strengthening Families received a boost when a Cochrane review team led by Professor David Foxcroft singled it out as the most promising “effective intervention over the longer-term for the primary prevention of alcohol misuse”. Foxcroft’s team examined over 600 reports of studies of psychosocial or educational interventions intended to prevent alcohol use or misuse by young people. Just 56 were relevant and rigorous enough to be included in the review, and just three reported alcohol use or misuse reductions which persisted over a follow-up period of at least three years. One was the seriously flawed study of Life Skills Training analysed previously in  and another investigated an approach tailored for Native Americans. That left Strengthening Families, specifically the study in Iowa where the seven session version was offered across the board to families with children in the early years of secondary school. This featured a “strong design, and … a consistent pattern of effectiveness across the three drinking behaviour variables”. Unusually, its effectiveness“seemed to increase over time,reflecting the developmentally orientated …model on which the intervention is based”. To the original analysis David Foxcroft added one accounting for children not reinterviewed at the last follow-up. This assumed that their behaviour matched that of children from control group families. The result was an estimate that for every nine children whose families had been offered the Iowa programme, one was prevented from starting to drink, to drink without permission, or getting drunk; the last two were statistically significant. These ratios were around twice as good as those for the other two programmes and more consistent across different drinking measures. It was enough to persuade Professor Foxcroft to call for a project to “translate, develop and pilot the Strengthening Families Programme in the United Kingdom”. One such trial is under way, but using it to help troubled families rather than as a universal intervention. Run by the Trust for the Study of Adolescence, the project’s main aim is to test whether involving young people in a family programme is more effective than parenting programmes focused on parents or carers. Participants will be drawn from families referred by the courts because of the behaviour of their children. One of the five services in the study is using Strengthening Families as an example of a whole-family approach. The project ends in August 2004.

Source: DRUG AND ALCOHOL FINDINGS ISSUE 10 2004

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
By Daniel Bent

Lasers are beams of ordinary light that are made powerful by the fact that the individual waves of ordinary light are in sync, aligned and concentrated in a manner consistent with the laws of physical science. Our efforts at drug prevention policy can be made extraordinarily more powerful if we understand the science of what makes members of a community intolerant towards drug use and concentrate our individual messages consistent with that science to motivate the majority to actively stand up against permissive drug policies. This paper explains how.

What is necessary is educating the vast majority who don’t use drugs about how other people’s drug use negatively affects them. This can create a social climate hostile to drug use. Such a change can bring back an America where drug use is negligible. Achieving that change in public attitude should be a major element of the future strategy against drugs.

Educating Drug Users is a Waste of Resources: Here’s Why –

Attempting to educate current drug users is a waste of drug education resources. For drug users, drug education is up against the basic reward or survival mechanism of the brain. Reason and cognitive thought are simply no match for a chemically stimulated reward center of the brain.

A drug user who has had the pleasure or reward mechanism of their brain intensely stimulated by cocaine or crack, as obvious examples, or those who use depressants and thus avoid anxiety and pain are unlikely to modify their drug using behaviour in response to drug education. An explanation of the brain and its operation demonstrates why.

First, pleasure is the brain telling the body that what it did to achieve the pleasure was what it should do and that it should do it again. Two familiar primary natural stimulators of the pleasure or reward mechanism are food and sex. This principally takes place deep in primitive areas of the brain. It is our basic survival mechanism. Areas of the human cortex were added to assist humans to achieve such pleasure and avoid pain to improve the chance of survival. For example, some of the cells added to the cortex enabled humans to see in colour and thus enabled the more successful gathering of edible fruit. Thus the additional cortex was not a substitute for the existing reward mechanism but served it.

Second, the forebrain which is a large part of the cortex which allows us to learn in the sense of drug education or indeed any “thinking” process was also designed to increase our ability to obtain those things that stimulate the reward mechanism with pleasure or increase our ability to avoid pain. It allowed us to engage in cooperative hunting, planning, and other behavior to improve our survival.

When the reward mechanism is “hot-wired” by drugs, an attempt through education to change drug-using behavior is likely to be rejected. When the reward mechanism already has its pleasure, the operation of the forebrain is superfluous and the natural process of reward from the use of the forebrain is unused. This was demonstrated during an experiment at Concordia University in Montreal where rats were given unlimited access to cocaine. They rejected opportunities for food and sex in favour of the drug.

Cigarette addiction is a clear example of this phenomenon. There is hardly a smoker now that does not cognitively understand that chronic cigarette smoking is harmful to their future health. They understand it but are not likely to act on that understanding in the face of the message that the reward mechanism receives when a smoker lights up a cigarette. The cigarette “hot wires” the reward center of the brain by stimulating it and provides an immediate message of reward, i.e., pleasure. After frequent reinforcement from repeated smoking a competing cognitive message via the forebrain that smoking is harmful is superfluous. In other words, once the reward center of the brain has a direct means of stimulation, the rest of the brain processes are simply not any competition.

Drug use in America has been seemingly intractable because the power of drugs over the reward center of the brains of drug users is so powerful. There is, however, a way to use the power of the brain s marvellous survival mechanism to increase the effectiveness of drug education.

Engaging the Survival Mechanisms of Non-Drug Users:

What can be done for impact is education of a different sort. That is educating non-drug users how other people’s drug use affects them. With this form of education, the survival mechanisms of the brains of non-drug users will be stimulated to protect their interests and survival by asserting their strong opposition to drug use by others in their communities.

Americans by nature tend to respect each other’s freedom to do what they want. We will tolerate the behaviour of others that we personally reject for ourselves. This tolerance has its limit. The limit is when we perceive that the behaviour is directly affecting us–our quality of life or in more fundamental terms, the quality of our survival. What takes place at this point is that our survival mechanism, the reward centers of our brains, react to the threat to our interests from other people’s behaviour and we take action to address and oppose it.

Again the smoking issue provides an extraordinary example. For decades we knew that a cigarette smoker was affecting his or her own health. Only a small handful of American cities and towns enacted smoking bans in public places. Then the Surgeon General of the United States and the National Academy of Sciences issued simultaneous reports finding that non-smokers’ health is affected by incidental second hand smoke. Overnight, cities across the country enacted ordinances limiting smoking to public places. Many enacted ordinances against smoking that would have been impossible even immediately before these highly publicized reports. More important, in a sudden shift of behaviour, non-smokers began to express their intolerance of smoking directly in both social interaction and in the workplace. The difference -non-smokers finally understood that other people’s cigarette smoking affected them. They did what Americans will do when they perceive their personal interests are negatively affected. They took action.

In order to use such self-interest to turn public opinion against drug use, drug education should be focused in large part on educating non-drug users how other people’s drug use affects them. Self-interest works to make people more productive. It’s the basis of our economic system. It can work here too. Indeed the “parent drug prevention movement” has been one of the most effective quarters in bringing positive action to bear on the drug issue because parents are driven to protect their children. They are simply an extension of their own self-interest.

We already do this brand of drug education to some extent, albeit serendipitously. News reports of the Baltimore Conrail crash in which sixteen passengers died when the pot smoking train engineer failed to notice a warning signal taught non-drug users of the harm from other people’s drug use. Reports of drug use among air traffic controllers, school bus drivers and pilots are examples of the same. It has been effective. We simply need to focus our energy into such targeted drug education to effectively pursue the ultimate strategy of turning public opinion into outrage against drug use.

If one group’s survival mechanisms are engaged on an issue and the majority’s is not, the first group will continue to push their issue and do whatever it takes to prevail. It has been called the “iron law of political economy”: “The many with a small interest, is no match for the few with a big one.” This is the circumstance we face on drug use in America. To prevail we must engage, as occurred with the tobacco use issue, survival mechanism vs. survival mechanism. This has the potential for achieving a society that is intolerant of drug use and those who promote it. With that we will be within reach of returning again to a drug-free America.

Enough for the Theory – Here are Examples of How To ….

The following are examples of proposed public service advertisements that are written pursuant to the strategy discussed above:

FLYING HIGH:

Two people sit facing the camera in what appears to be a poorly lit room. The field of view is their faces and upper torsos. They are passing a marihuana joint back and forth and each drag brightens the area around their faces a bit. After a few passes, the person on the right says, “Let’s go to work.” As he puts the joint away, the person on the left almost immediately slips on a cap and the camera starts slowly backing away so that the field of view increases. As the camera backs, the viewer comes to the realization that he/she has been looking through the windshield of a commercial aircraft. The camera continues to slowly back away until the full windshield and full nose are in view. The plane starts rolling out while the camera continues back. The plane is filmed in a jump frame sequence so that the viewer follows its roll out onto the runway and take off. As the plane is approximately 40 feet in the air, just at the point the landing gear starts up–the frame freezes. The following words appear in white on the bottom of the screen: “So you think other people s drug use doesn’t affect you? Not On Your Life!”

TOO BUSY TO CARE:

This begins with a nighttime scene of an average 40-year old male leaving an office building on a rainy wet night in a downtown area. He stops suddenly, obviously an internal pain clutching his chest as he leans against a light pole. The sound of heavy heartbeat rises. The sidewalks are vacant but as he looks up he sees a lighted taxicab approximately half a block away and raises his arm to hail it. He struggles into the back of the taxi. Leaning onto the seat and with difficulty he tells the taxi driver, “I think I’m having a heart attack!” The driver understands immediately and rushes away with his passenger. He makes a u-turn, drives briefly down a one-way street, then on a main street speeds from corner to corner slowing only for red lights going through them in order to quickly reach a hospital. The viewer gets a sense from this part of the episode that the passenger in distress is fortunate to have run into a taxi driver willing to do what’s necessary to get him to an emergency room as fast as possible. The taxi pulls up to the door of an emergency room. The man staggers out as the taxi driver says, “Forget the fare. Good luck, Buddy.” The man staggers through the sliding hospital doors, walks up to the nurse’s station clutching his heart. No one is there. The viewer realizes that several people are being worked on in the adjacent treatment areas and the man staggers from one to the other trying to get someone’s attention. As he goes to each treatment area, there are teams of medical people working desperately to save the life of the patient on the table. At the first treatment area as the team works, one is heard speaking. The only clearly discernable word heard is “overdose.” The man staggers to the next treatment area to a similar scene where it becomes clear from the conversation of the medical team that they are dealing with a crack crises–crack induced psychosis. At each treatment area the work is frantic.

At the last treatment area, a similar scene where one of the members of the team states, “we’re going to have to pump this junkie’s stomach.” Another states, “Hey, wasn’t this guy in here the night before last.” At this point, to get assistance the man tries to hail a nurse rushing into one of the treatment rooms. He is ignored. His back is against the tile wall of the hospital emergency room. He obviously recognizes, by his facial expression as he looks into the camera (close up), that he’s not going to get any help soon. The scene is held for a few seconds so that the viewer comes to the same realization. As the realization sets in, he slides down the wall out of view. At the bottom of the screen appear the words, “So you think other people’s drug use doesn’t affect you? Think again!”

BUSINESS ON THE LINE:

A man and woman are in an office decorated to convey that it is a law office. They are apparently discussing documents in a file. Both are dressed as professionals. The woman is firmly telling the lawyer “You must oppose their motion so the judge will see the evidence at a hearing.” The lawyer, apparently distracted, nods in agreement telling her “Don’t worry, I’ll object.” He then tells her “Hold on a minute before we leave for court.” He quickly goes into an adjacent empty room without her and closes the door. Inside and alone he pulls out a vial and snorts a white powder (cocaine). He rejoins her and they leave.

The next scene is a courtroom. The lawyer is seated next to his client and is rising and addressing the court, “No objection, Your Honour” as the woman, surprised, is looking up at him in complete disbelief. The scene fades. The words, “Some lawyers call drug use a victimless crime!” appear.

SLICK SMOKE:

The camera starts with a close-up of an individual standing up in what appears to be a room. The wall is slightly out of focus and therefore, in the beginning, unrecognizable. The person facing the camera is smoking marihuana. During the few drags he is obviously lost in the pleasure of the joint and not paying attention to his surroundings. A bell, which only is vaguely recognizable as a ship’s bell, rings four times. The bell startles the marihuana smoker back to his task. At this point the camera starts moving back. As the field of view increases you realize that the person has been standing at the wheel on the bridge of a ship. The camera continues to pull back as the viewers recognize that they have been looking through the windshield of the bridge. The camera moves back toward the bow and up and away at a right angle so that the ship’s profile, that of a huge oil tanker, is finally in view. The background is then recognized. The background is modified for each audience. For example, for audiences on the East Coast, the background can be New York harbour, Boston harbour; Miami’s harbour, etc. For West Coast audiences–the Golden Gate Bridge, Long Beach harbour, the Channel Islands and Puget Sound; and, for Hawaii audiences–Waikiki Beach. The following words appear on the screen: “So you think other people’s drug use doesn’t affect you? Think again!”

TRAFFIC HAZARD:

The ad begins with a view of a car travelling along a highway. It is passing oncoming traffic all travelling at a high speed. Between cuts of the traffic shots where the car is passing through intersections there are close ups of the driver. The first cut of the driver shows him rolling a joint in his fingers while the palms of his hands rest on the steering wheel. Alternating scenes of the car going through intersections, school zones, communities, and facing oncoming traffic as the driver finishes rolling his joint and lights it. In the last scene with the driver dreamily smoking his joint a school zone sign flashes on the screen, then image of a child crossing the street, and then back to the driver dreamily puffing his joint when the frame freezes. The following words appear on the screen: “So you think other people’s drug use doesn’t affect you? Think again!”

You get the idea. The strategy of educating non-drug users how other people’s drug use harms their interests them can be applied not just in advertisements, but also by everyone in their own sphere of activity and influence. That is not as difficult as it may seam. We merely focus our efforts on engaging the survival mechanisms of the majority of Americans who are non-drug users. Indeed, there is no more laser like focused way we can get the result we need . . . a return to a drug-free America.

* * * The author, Daniel Bent, is a mediator, arbitrator and attorney. He is a former United States Attorney in the Reagan and Bush administrations. He was the chairman of the U.S. Attorney’s Committee on Drug Prevention and Education. His email address is: DanBent@FairMediation.com.

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
 
Paper by Peter Stoker C. Eng., M.I.C.E. (Retd). Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance (UK).
“We need to get beyond the notion that prevention is merely stopping something happening, to a more positive approach which creates conditions which promote the well-being of people”.

The essence of prevention is not centred on blocking negative behaviours which are unlawful, unhealthy or anti-social; it is centred on promoting positive, healthy, behaviours which are life-affirming and which bring lasting benefits to self and society. Paraphrasing Lofquist, I would add that we also need to ‘get beyond the notion’ that engaging in a few mechanistic processes, or pumping out a few aspirational messages, will solve the problem. To quote American humourist H L Mencken,
 

 

“For every complex problem there is a simple solution – and it doesn’t work”.

The implications of this for prevention are major. It means that if we are to have a significant preventive effect we must not only look at the mechanisms of drug abuse but at the mechanisms of society – in which drug abuse is but one of several problematic behaviours.
I like the story of the drug worker who fought his way across deserts and through blizzards to reach the cave where the greatest guru in the world lived. ” Oh, Great Guru” he said ” Can you tell us how to solve the massive problem which is drug abuse?”. ” Why do people abuse drugs?” asked the guru. ” To escape reality” said the drug worker. “That’s easy, then” said the guru “You just need to improve reality”.

Culture is another word that can be interpreted in many ways. My dictionary tells me that it can relate to the arts; to the producing of what is known as ‘cultured people’. Or it can relate to the growing of things like bacteria – or of a pearl in an oyster – perhaps this latter concept is a nice one for us to hold on to; that out of gritty situations we can help to produce a thing of beauty and value. But leaving those definitions aside, the dictionary definition of culture which we are ordinarily engaged with is

 

   “The Attitudes and Behaviour of Particular Social Groups”.

2. WHERE DOES CULTURE COME INTO PREVENTION?
Culture is both reactive and pro-active. It reflects what is already there – but also influences what is to come. If prevention is “… the sum of our actions to ensure healthy, safe and productive lives for all our children and families” (CSAP 1993)(Ref.2) then culture is the sum of all our expressions and influences – be they healthy or unhealthy.

This leads me to the definition of ‘Health’. Far too often this is narrowly described in terms of physical capacity or mental illness. But we should surely know from classical and modern writings that ‘Health’ is much wider than this, and in its other manifestations it is much more prone to cultural influences. A typical definition of ‘Total Health’ – such as is used by (int. al.) the World Health Organisation – is:

 

 

Physical           How well do I use the body I have?
Mental             How well, or ill is the structure of my brain?
Intellectual       How well do I use the brain I have?
Social              How well do I interact with my community?
Emotional         Am I in touch with my feelings, or do they control me?
Spiritual           Is there purpose, or just a void, within me?
Environmental   Am I a giver or a taker, in this planet I inhabit?

 

There are many factors influencing decisions about behaviour – factors which contribute to the culture in which the decision is taken. You can address these individually or corporately, but if you only address them individually, you are unlikely to significantly affect the culture. Why do you need to be conscious of this? Because of that essential truth – ‘Think globally – act locally’ – if, that is, you want to act sensibly and effectively at the local level. Another very good reason for taking the wider view is that the culture around behaviour can be likened to a kind of ‘social ecology’. In a paper (Ref.3) written jointly with Professor Roy Evans of Brunel University, this concept of social ecology is explored. The essence of it is that width of vision and caution is required, because actions in one element produce reactions in others, sometimes unexpectedly, and sometimes undesirably. The corollorary is also true: that is, you may be able to beneficially generate an effect in an element you have not explicitly impacted, by addressing other elements which in turn influence it.
3. HOW DOES CULTURE INFLUENCE BEHAVIOUR?

To explore this, let’s look at a concept developed by American prevention expert Bill Oliver (Ref.4), to explain the development of addiction, and which I have augmented; to illustrate the culture of behaviour – Bill uses the analogy of a tree… the Tree of Behaviour.

When the Tree of Behaviour is fully developed and regularised, it will display itself in two crowning branches – one healthy; the other unhealthy. Unhealthy regularised behaviour is what we in the drugs field call dependency (or addiction). This is reached progressively by behaviour which started as just trying something, then repeating it occasionally, then regularly, and then habitually repeating it. Despite the increasing evidence of the damage that this behaviour is causing, there is a compulsion to continue.

Some of this will also be true of healthy behaviours, but with these there will be no need of a compulsion to over-ride the negative experiences; positive experiences will play a part in encouraging the behaviour to continue (though the value of ‘positive reinforcement’ is also well proven). This is what we hope for and seek to develop through our prevention efforts.

But the Tree of Behaviour doesn’t grow out of nowhere – it isn’t spontaneously created; it is the outcome of a process that is largely invisible. Invisible because it is below ground; it has roots. Within each of us – in our personal mission control centre and as the root of our behaviour, is an assemblage of intellect, will and emotion. As impulses reach our centre of consciousness, our intellect, will and emotion respond to the impulse and the outcome is that we develop a thought. We give consideration to that thought – including whether or not we want to put it into action – and in the process we develop an attitude towards it. Our attitude towards any action we are contemplating is probably the first visible sign which others can see – like the first green shoots of a tree coming up through the ground. This is why, as parents, we need to be vigilant about the attitudes our children display.

What I want you to concentrate on, though, is that internal, ‘underground’ phase – before the attitude develops. Psychologists have identified a stage before a thought formulates; it is what they call ‘pre-contemplation’ – meaning that you are thinking about thinking about something. In this seminal stage, a great many influences apply… Memories – good and bad. Using those memory banks to project images of what might happen if this behaviour is followed. Values and boundaries for the individual Weighing advantages and disadvantages to oneself and to others. Applying learning received so far. Peer pressure and role models. The drive for personal pleasure. Curiosity and risk taking. Pain and how to avoid it. Feelings of spirituality and faith – or the lack of them. All these and more will influence the nurturing of that first thought, and will decide whether we reject it – or decide to act on it. I would term this ‘the culture in which decisions are made’.

If someone alters the culture within which decisions are made, it is virtually certain that there will be different outcomes. In my paper “Moralising, Demoralising … the Fight over Personal and Social Education” (Ref.5) I describe how the Values Clarification philosophy founded by Carl Rogers and Professor Sidney Simon (and which also drew in part on the thinking of their contemporary, Abraham Maslow) can be seen to have found fertile ground in which to breed – firstly in California – where else?! – but later touching down in various spots around the world. The confluence of Rogerian thought with other liberally-inclined arguments produced a juggernaut that crushed all but a few vestiges of the morally-based opposition. The confluence was further swollen by the expansion of illegal drugs – out from marginal use by the mid-twenties and older age groups – into mass use by the young, and is also accentuated by the new ‘cult of youth’ – the conferring upon them of greater freedoms at the same time as the removal of much of the authority traditionally held by parents and teachers. Greater disposable income level by the young, and the consequent emergence of a youth market, were other key factors.

I would argue, from all this, that it is not too much to say that Culture drives Behaviour – be it at individual or societal level. It follows that if you want to change behaviour, you have to change the culture. No small task!

4. NESTS OF CULTURE

Consider first this simplified hierarchy – or ‘nest’ of cultures:

 

 

  • Culture within ourselves effects our attitude, our values and boundaries, as we think, review the action we are contemplating.
  • Our group culture opens us up to peer pressure, as well as to spirituality and religion.
  • Our community culture opens us up to norms of behaviour as well as economic, social and political constraints.
  • Our society culture does the same, but on a bigger stage.

Each of these cultures is nested within another, and also inter-related with other cultural influences in a complex mix.
Each of us moves between these nests in a way that it is influenced by our environment, acting in tension with our personal culture – and the beliefs that flow from it. Structural factors may be positive or negative – things like employment (or lack of it); bereavement, frustration, love, recognition, fulfilment, friendships, housing, money (or the lack of it), – all these and more will all act to steer us into different cultures.

One of the most dramatic examples of how culture can influence behaviour came in 1974, when a study of Vietnam War veterans found that only 12% of those who were addicted to heroin in Vietnam took up the habit again once they had returned to the USA, despite heroin being easy to find in the US, to the extent that half of them admitted trying it again before abandoning the practice.

Societal factors overlay and add to the culture. Whilst there are positive societal factors – such as the growth of ‘volunteerism’ and the increase in government subsidy for the arts; there is no shortage of societal factors which tend to encourage drug abuse. Here are some examples:

 

 

Conspicuous consumption – displaying my ability to spend

Rapid gratification – pleasure NOW, not this afternoon

Rights but no responsibilities – my wants, free of ‘cost’ (to me, that is)

The ‘Right to be Happy’ – others have no right to stop it

Self before society – others are all there to serve me

Youth on top – defer to them; they are ‘kings of’cool’’

Political Correctness – follow these rules, right or wrong.


Politics is a culture all of its own, operating in its own idiosyncratic way. Avoidance of loss of face, and the search for re-election are two of the cultural criteria. In an information-laden age there is increasing reliance placed on the ‘Civil Servant’ – the hired hand who analyses, recommends and speech-writes for his hurried master, the politician. The civil servants have their own cultural standards, partly rooted in the need to be seen by their politician (amongst others) as ‘expert’ – this means they too have to find other ‘experts’ from which to obtain the expertise, and this lays them open to lobby groups.
Norman Dennis, in his short paper: “The Culture of Intoxication” (Ref.6) expresses horror, but gives us a timely warning, in observing arch-legaliser Arnold Trebach and others actively presenting their libertarian arguments within the European Parliament. We will all have our own view of the European Parliament – and to what extent it relates to reality – but the core concern has to be that Trebach and others like him have far greater resources than we do, and there is therefore the very real risk that the European Parliament will recycle the pro-drug cultures statements, presenting them to the unwary – especially in the new Enlargement Nations – as ‘wisdom from the centre’

Melanie Phillips, in her paper “Hatchet-Faced Idealists” (Ref.7) described how there has been Left Wing support for terror since the French Revolution, running on through the eras of Stalin, Mao and Pol Pot. In the 1940s George Orwell savagely attacked the so-called ‘intellectual left’ for its innate defeatism, its disaffection with the West and its fascination with the brutal governance of the Eastern bloc. From these stark beginnings can be seen the emergence of ‘intellectuals’ giving succour to drug abuse – rationalising it as a ‘legitimate’ expression of disaffection for conservative/’right wing’ ideology and authority.

And of course one massive player in the culture game is The MEDIA. The ‘messengers’. The rulers of this magnificent city which is Rome used to have a tradition of killing any messenger who brought bad news – if we continued this practice these days we wouldn’t have any journalists left! But instead we seem to expect bad news – and disbelieve anything good we hear. Meanwhile the messengers have transformed themselves from reporters of the news into makers of the news – and filtering everything through their own belief system. It used to be said that journalists gave us ‘All the news that’s fit to print’ – nowadays, the more cynical attitude is summed by the strapline on the front of Rolling Stone magazine … ‘All the news that fits’.

TV is the big one, of course. A major survey in America a few years ago found that an encouragingly high percentage of children got their information about life issues from their parents. But the same survey asked the parents where they got their information from … the great majority answered: ‘the TV’. Radio is more pervasive than you might think, especially with the young, who tune in for the music but get a lot more besides. Newspapers, populist and ‘quality’ also indulge in what is known as ‘Advocacy Journalism’ – which means lobbying to you and me. There is of course always a place for ‘Opinion’ pieces in journalism, but what we have now is way beyond that. Generous space is afforded to advocates of drug law relaxation, whilst prevention advocates stand outside with their noses pressed to the window; largely ignored or else used in a tokenist way to give a suggestion of ‘balance’.

What you and I may define as ‘balance’ is often very different to the definition the media uses. In his book ‘Bias’ the former senior journalist with CBS News, Bernard Goldberg (Ref.8), describes how most journalists seriously believe that in their liberal – or even libertarian – views, they represent the middle ground, so it follows that anyone seeking to preserve moral order is of the Extreme Right, and thus to be shunned or ridiculed. The ruthless way in which they dispatch those who challenge their orthodoxy is well described by Melanie Phillips, in her paper “The Trouble with the Liberal Elite is that it just isn’t Liberal” (Ref.9). She laments the fact that today is an era in which truth has become relative. The American philosopher William James (1842 – 1910) went so far as to suggest that

 

 

    ‘Truth may be defined as that which it is ultimately satisfying to believe’.

Melanie goes on to paint a stark picture of modern life, in which drug legalisation is contemplated for no other reason than profit; alternatives to the traditional family structure are destroying marriage; tolerance of alternative lifestyles is overtaken by pressure to endorse and promote them; and so-called liberals castigate anyone who seeks to protect morals as ‘authoritarian’, ‘nanny’, or ‘fascist’. Liberalism, she says, was born out of reaction to the tyranny of monarchies and other hardline authorities, but when democracy replaced these despots, liberalism – instead of stepping back – went on a quest for justification of its continued existence, and in the process became a perversion of its earlier noble purpose. Liberals will now tell you that only they can achieve the nirvana of perfect lifestyle for us all – and that this has to be an existence in which no one is judged. As she wryly concludes:
 

 

  ‘all moral judgements are wrong, except the judgment that judgment itself is wrong’.

It is a matter of record that a significant number of media outlets have decided to actively campaign for liberalization of drug laws. And to persuade other publications, if not actually to join them, at any rate to show some degree of sympathy. Amongst the British national newspapers there is currently only one which takes a consistently outspoken line against drugs (and another which takes a lower-key approach). The outspoken paper is the Mail, traditionally held to be the paper Mr Blair most worried about, because of its strong center ground position and high circulation. It is quite clear that over the past three or more years a steady campaign to assassinate and marginalize the Mail has been sustained in the media and amongst the ‘chattering classes’.
The newspapers’ colleagues in print, the magazines, are amongst the strongest promoters of hedonism. ‘Style’ magazines like Face, FHM, ID, Ministry, have long pursued a love affair with ‘lad/ladette’ behaviour – heavy drinking, ‘caning’ (drugs), promiscuity are all seen as milestones which all must pass to gain entry to the World of Cool. Even the youth magazines – like Bella, 19, and Just17 – all of which are regularly read by those much younger than their ostensible readership age – have an unhealthy pre-occupation with sex. In addition to these ‘generic’ magazines, there are of course the ‘specialist’ magazines like ‘High Times’, ‘Cannabis Culture’’Heads’ to cater for the dedicated doper – and to intrigue the casual reader.

Films rely on something called ‘Product Placement’ to boost their revenue – this is the inclusion of commodities on the screen to make people want to buy them. It works for commercial products – but it also works for things like drugs, which are many times included in the action with no justification in the storyline, and with inappropriate audience ages … ET and Crocodile Dundee are just two examples of this malpractice. Posters. Tee shirts. The fashion industry with its exploitation of ‘heroin chic’. The advertising industry with its cynical deployment of drug culture icons. They all add to the picture … a picture which – you might say – is being developed in the negative!

5. PREVENTION AND ITS ENGAGEMENT WITH CULTURE

It is in the nature of our overloaded, under-resourced profession that we behave like Chinese jugglers, rushing from one stick to another to keep the plates spinning. One plate is marked ‘Education’, another ‘Awareness’, while another concerns ‘Messages’ (or slogans). Others concern Speeches, Posters, Advertisements, Songs, Drama, Poems and so on. In this situation it is all too easy to become obsessed with twiddling the sticks and – fearful of stepping back – we can neither see the whole of the structure, nor the gaps in it. What we therefore tend to do is to keep on spinning plates and hope that what we are doing is somehow improving the situation.

Some experts have already addressed the inter-action of prevention and culture. Responding to the assertion of legalisers, that John Stuart Mill (regarded by many as one of the forefathers of ‘Liberty’ as we understand it – or misunderstand it – today) would have benn sanguine about drug abuse, Professor Norman Dennis in his paper “Drug Legalisation and ‘On Liberty’ – the Misuse of Mill’ (Ref.10) defines a continuum of cultures stretching from ‘Anomie’ (anything goes) to ‘Authoritarianism’. He paraphrases Max Weber in saying that there are four main types of culture; of which two have little to do with rational thought; one is driven by tradition and the other by emotion. The other two, more rationally based are the ‘fully rational but self-interested, calculating’ approach and – lastly – what Weber calls the ‘value-rational’ approach. This last one is driven by principles, rather than self interest. Advocates of drug legalisation have attempted to tendentiously pigeonhole John Stuart Mill in the ‘self-interested’ culture, quoting his statement that

 

 

“Over himself, and over his own mind and body, the individual is sovereign”.

This ploy by the legalisers is a gross misrepresentation, as should be immediately obvious to anyone who reads not just this sentence from Mill, but the sentences which precede and follow it; for example:
 

 

“Whenever, in short, there is definite damage, or definite risk of damage, either to an individual or to the public, the case is taken out of the province of Liberty and placed in that of Morality or Law”.

The problem in these times is that ‘Morality’ and ‘Law’ have become (a) objects of derision and (b) enormously and cynically obfuscated. Offenders have been cast adrift in a sea which has few if any moral landmarks. Chuck Colson, in his paper “The Cultivation of Conscience”(Ref.11) draws out the reality today, that many young felons simply do not know the difference between right and wrong. (As one of my own colleagues, who deals with tough kids put it to me “How can we ask them to be good, when they don’t know what good looks like?”). They are unlikely to find out under the new regime … what our young people are increasingly being encouraged to use as a basis of their behaviour is “Do what you think is right”. This ‘Value Clarification’ approach harms formation of young consciences – and Columbine and Jonesboro are the prices we pray. Colson concludes that Nietzsche’s deconstruction of morality brought not Superman, but people clinging to the wreckage of their values and beliefs, with their only touchstone being ‘It works for me’ .
Norman Dennis echoes this sentiment; in his paper ‘The Uncertain Trumpet’ (Ref.12) he describes how Nietzsche and those who came after him have induced a massive shift from what Nietzsche characterized as an Apollonian culture (reasoned, restrained,seemly and decent) to a Dionysian culture (intoxicated, orgiastic, and orgasmic) – and as an example of this brave new world they have fostered, Norman cites the reports of a British a video shop owner was recently fined £5,000 for selling videos which were not as pornographic as their titles suggested.

Returning to Colson, he further observes that ‘Rationalism’ and ‘Empiricism’ have been blown away, as has the idea of inculcating morality – simply because morality, being based on ‘pre-existing values’ is automatically rejected by the Values Clarification disciples. The result is feral children, ethically and morally abandoned. In what must surely be an ominous precursor of this, Cardinal Newman, as long ago as the 18th century, said:

 

 

“Conscience has rights because it has duties… it is a stern monitor, but in this century it has been superceded by a counterfeit … it is the right of self-will”

You might say this means that conscience erects a ‘Stop’ sign when one’s ‘self-will’ is speeding. Without this control system, self-will proceeds onto the assumption that one has a ‘personal right’ to this behaviour, thence to the notion that there is a ‘constitutional right’ to the behaviour, and thus to a pressure to legalise it. This can be seen in several aspects of our culture today; it is certainly not confined to drugs. It would be nice, says Colson, to think that churches would be the ones to hoist the ‘Stop’ signs; sadly too many of them are selling out, panicked by the spectre of dwindling congregations.
On the day that this paper was consigned to the conference organizers, BBC national radio ran an interview with a churchman, exploring why there has been such a growth of attendance in some churches (but not others). The churchman referred to people being unsettled by “… seismic changes to our culture …” which he saw as a primary drive behind them seeking renewed strength and stability in the church. A challenge which demands a response, surely?

And what about ‘the Pursuit of Happiness’? First you have to identify what you mean by happiness; Colson distinguishes between mere shallow gratification and what Aristotle called ‘eudaimonia’; it may sound like an infectious illness, but it actually means ‘ the (consciously) good life’ – fulfilling, balanced and responsible. Clearly, conscience plays a major role in this, and equally clearly the death of conscience leads to tyranny as a means of regulating what will become chaos. It follows that if we do not want to be ruled by tyrants in future, it is in all our interests to promote conscience now. According to Colson, this means going back to what he sees as the three core institutions – family, church and university, and instilling a health-promoting model in all of them.

6. WHAT ABOUT COUNTER-CULTURES?

Counter cultures can be a significant obstacle to prevention. Before you can negate them, you need to understand them. Here are a few examples:

Brazil – $6 is the price of a life. Brazilian senior journalist Olavo de Carvalho delivered a chilling description of life in his country, in his paper “Drug Traffic and Public Policy in Brazil” (Ref.13). Olavo traces the origins of self-serving behaviour back even further than Carl Rogers, – the ‘fountainhead’ mentioned earlier in this paper – pinpointing Hungarian Giorgy Lukacs, a post-Marxist philosopher as a primary source of this thinking. Lukacs in effect argued that in conditions of social ‘Alienation’ and ‘Reification’ – a term coined to describe man viewing himself as an ‘object’ … a ‘cog in the machine’ rather than a sentient being, the individual is justified in putting himself first). So, by this concept, a man is less guilty for personal acts than for those against the class to which he belongs, and there is no evil in the world except ‘conservative morals’ – an object of contempt. Olavo’s paper goes on to give a stark description of life on the streets and in the ‘corridors of power’ in Brazil. $6 is the price you pay in the Rocinha Hills, to have someone killed. Drug barons exercise ‘droit de seigneur’ – but over any woman in the village, at any time. Petty criminals depend on the barons for the loan of weapons and vehicles – and even for the ‘freedom’ of living in a slum. Compared to the power of the barons, the police are a largely marginalised force. The intellectuals have played their part, teaching the young that drugs had a ‘liberating role’ in the struggle against ‘capitalist aggression’. Many criminals recognized that the pickings were richer if they left the world of crime in favour of careers as ‘revolutionary militants’ – it was out of this trend that the Sao Paulo Forum was born, combining legitimate organizations with criminal ones, including the Brazilian President seated at the same table as FARC, the revolutionary army which dominates large swathes of Colombia, and is now said to control most of the cocaine production and export from that troubled country.

Libertarianism – the abuse of John Stuart Mill. This has already been described in Section 5 of this paper.

Harm Reduction and the Abuse of Liberty. My paper ‘The History of Harm Reduction’  (Ref.14), presented in Sweden in 2001, gives a detailed appraisal of how the traditional process of intervention with known users – as part of the treatment process (the stated goal of which remains as abstinence in the British strategy at least, notwithstanding that country’s lurch towards liberalism in other aspects of drug policy) to mitigate the harm that they do to themselves and others, whilst working to bring them to cessation – was deliberately subverted to produce a mechanism for liberalizing drug abuse. In echoes of Olavo de Carvalho’s remarks, it is known that at least one of the ‘inner cabal’ who engineered this stratagem was a Stalinist.

Stalin himself is attributed with the following passage, which very revealingly argues for the use of drugs as a lubricant in social revolution:

 

 

“By making readily available drugs of various kinds; by giving a teenager alcohol; by praising his wildness; by strangling him with sex literature and advertising to him or her … the psycho-political preparation can create the necessary attitude of chaos, idleness and worthlessness into which can then be cast the solution that will give the teenager complete freedom everywhere. If we can effectively kill the national pride of just one generation, we will have won that country. Therefore, there must be continued propaganda to undermine the loyalty of citizens in general and teenagers in particular”

Nihilism and the culture of despair. There are probably few western societies that do not have ‘sink estates’ – pockets of poverty in which crime is rife, and often perpetrated by neighbour against neighbour. Boys as young as 12 sell their bodies to pay for drugs; pensioners live in fear of reprisals if they should complain of errant behaviour; police define ‘no-go’ areas for their patrols, ceding control of the streets to the criminals. In these conditions it is hardly surprising that drugs are a way of ‘escaping reality’ – and there is no sign of anyone heeding that guru I mentioned at the start of this paper, and seeking to ‘improve reality’. Journalist Nick Davies graphically describes this brutalized environment in his book ‘Dark Heart’ (Ref.15) – and his criticisms of the failures of successive governments to address the problem are justifiably trenchant. Sadly, Davies has gone on to absorb the distorted arguments of the liberalisers, and suggest that legalizing and prescribing all drugs – including heroin – would improve the condition of the poor. It is hard to comprehend how such illogic gains hold … but it is there, in the ‘journalist classes’ of Britain – as much as the journalist classes of Sao Paulo.
Sexual cultures – whilst there are few statistics to reinforce the anecdotal evidence, it is widely held that drug abuse is prevalent amongst gay lifestyles. Some drugs, such as amyl or butyl nitrite, are said to be favoured by the gay community; it is also possible that drug abuse might be a response to feelings of being a ‘persecuted minority’. At the same time the gay activists are strident campaigners who will pick up any issue that may look to be a useful platform. Thus it was that when Police Commander Brian Paddick was relieved of his post in Lambeth, South London, after unilaterally decriminalising cannabis in his area and then having his (gay) partner claim that he had smoked cannabis in their flat, the issue was not only taken up by the pro-cannabis lobby, but even more forcibly by the gay lobby, who accused the police authorities of homophobia, and characterized the disciplining of Paddick as being not about cannabis policing – but about attacking gay culture. The pro-cannabis groups were quite happy to march behind this unexpected vanguard, illustrating how apparently disparate pressure groups ally under a ‘flag of convenience’.

7. WHO IS WINNING NOW?

They have been, but not by as much as they think they are. Despite all the media reports that highlight Britain’s position at the top of the European drug abuse league, and the incessant stream of stories suggesting that every young person is knee-deep in pills, potions and powders, the well-proven fact is that 83% of British youth either never use at all or else give up after one or two tentative tries. Of the 17% who use more than this, many give up in the early stages of their drug use ‘career’. We are a long way from having to run up the White Flag of surrender.

However, a warning note needs to be sounded. Statistics also show that the great majority of young people who do not themselves use drugs, do not care if people in their circle are using, and do not see it as their business to intervene. This substantial absence of ‘positive peer pressure’ is almost certainly holding back progress in reducing drug abuse.

The way to win is perhaps best indicated by Sweden, where an experiment with decriminalization spanning several decades was eventually dumped in favour of a preventive policy coupled with assertive treatment services. The comparison between Sweden today and places like South Australia, where decriminalization is in full swing, are salutary. Researcher Lucy Sullivan (Ref.16) found that in Sweden, lifetime prevalence was one-fifth of that in Australia, use in previous year was one fifteenth, and dependent heroin users were – at worst – no more than one tenth of those in Australia. Other parameters, such as youth dependency, methadone prevalence, drug-related deaths in general and for under-25s were all significantly lower in Sweden.

8. HOW CAN WE STRENGTHEN PREVENTION CULTURE?

How can we ‘cultivate the cultivators’ of healthy lifestyles? The longest journey begins with a single step, so Buddha tells us; therefore, let us resolve to take the first few steps, gaining in confidence as we leave each footprint behind. Here are a few ideas:

Communications:

 

 

  • Study this paper’s recommendations, plan any new actions from it
  • Disseminate your own recommendations to others
  • Build ‘more bridges, fewer towers’ – open yourself to other organizations, and actively co-operate with them, rather than competing with them, or starving them of information

Generic activities:
 

 

  • Plan structurally – with the ‘Social Ecology’ in mind
  • Audit your strengths and build on them (SWOT Analysis – strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats)
  • Work to the model of ‘Total Health’
  • Advance the concept of ‘Other, not just Self’
  • Expose and dispose of ‘Values Clarification’
  • ‘Cultivate the Conscience’

Improve Reality:
 

 

  • Establish primary prevention as main criterion in drug education All education should have prevention in mind
  • Establish improved, rapid access treatment centers Treatment, including mandated attendance, should be available sooner
  • Define and confine ‘harm reduction’ as within treatment, for known users only Pseudo-harm-reduction should be exposed for the sham it is
  • Pro-active Media Strategy Cultivate your media, learn to love them, programme your initiatives
  • Fix ‘Broken Windows’ Restore order and reduce crime by not tolerating even the little things
  •  ‘Prevention Cities’ Follow the San Salvador example
  • ‘Police Get a Pizza the Action’
This title refers to a scheme (Ref.17) in which police co-operated with shopkeepers in a district where fights often broke out amongst crowds of people waiting to be served with pizzas after pubs had closed. The scheme installed ‘ hotlines’ from every pub to the pizza parlours, allowing advance ordering and no-wait distribution of pizzas; result – no crowds, no more fights. An excellent example of ‘problem-oriented policing’.
  • ‘Cool to be clean’ tee shirts, and similar promotions Give your creative people a chance to shine!
  • Music business re-energised with prevention in mind
  • Art and Drama re-energised with prevention in mind
  • Promote products like ‘Life on Sunday’ (the first ever UK national newspaper driven by family values)
  • Support the Prevention Institute Seek out the worldwide family of relevant Institutions

And, of course, we might take strength from the belief that God is on our side – whatever that means for each of you. I once asked a friend of mine, who is a priest, whether I could assume that God was on our side. He replied
 

 

“I’m not really authorised to say – I’m only in Sales, not Management!”

But at the very least we can be sure that our efforts in prevention have a high purpose, are altruistic, and tend to enhance the quality of life in a way that is sorely needed in the social and spiritual desolation which typifies too much of society today.
To create something requires spirit and energy – to destroy something requires only a big mouth. We can look at others and criticise – or we can look within ourselves and create value – create something worthy of the life which it is our blessing to enjoy. That is the challenge of prevention.

 

 

_____________________

 

REFERENCES:

1. Lofquist WA (1983) ‘Discovering the Meaning of Prevention’ pubd AYD Publications, Arizona. ISBN 0-913951-00-5.

2. Various publications from US Center for Substance Abuse Prevention, DSDSC, 5600 Fisher’s Lane, RW 11, Rockville, MD 20852, USA. (Link via NDPA website)

3. Evans R & Stoker P (2002) ‘Facing the Elephant in the Living Room: Promoting the Healthy Development of Youth whose Parents have Drug Problems’ – available on NDPA website ‘Papers’.

4. Oliver W ‘Parent to Parent training system’. Apply to Passage Group Inc.,1240 Johnson Ferry Place, Suite F-10. Marietta, GA 30068, USA.

5. Stoker P (2001) ‘Moralising … demoralizing; the Fight over Personal and Social Education’. Available on NDPA website ‘Papers’.

6. Dennis N (2003) ‘The Culture of Intoxication’. Available on NDPA website ‘Papers’.

7. Phillips M (2003) ‘The Hatchet-faced Idealists’. See www.melaniephillips.com 8. Goldberg B (2002) ‘Bias’ pubd. Regnery, Washington DC. ISBN 0-89525-190-1.

9. Phillips M (2000) ‘The Trouble with the Liberal Elite is that it just isn’t Liberal’ See www.melaniephillips.com

10. Dennis N (2001) ‘Drug Legalisation and ‘On Liberty’ – the Misuse of Mill’. For The Salisbury Review. Available on NDPA website ‘Papers’

11. Colson C (2002) ‘The Cultivation of Conscience’. Available on NDPA website ‘Papers’.

12. Dennis N (2003) ‘The Uncertain Trumpet’.pubd Civitas, London.

13. Carvalho O de (2003) ‘Drug Traffic and Public Policy in Brazil’. Available on NDPA website ‘Papers’.

14. Stoker P (2001) ‘The History of Harm Reduction’. Available on NDPA website.

15. Davies N (1998) ‘Dark Heart – the Shocking Truth about Hidden Britain’ pubd. Vintage, London.

16. Sullivan Dr L (1999) ‘Drug Policy – a Tale of Two Countries’ pubd ‘News Weekly (Australia). Available on NDPA website.

17. Davies N (2003) ‘Using New Tools to Attack the Roots of Crime’. pubd. The Guardian newspaper, London, 12 July 2003. Note: this is a useful summary of and commentary upon the Government’s current crime reduction proposals, but it should be borne in mind that Nick Davies is a campaigner for legalizing all drugs, and his writings should be viewed through this optic.

NDPA informally engaged with relevant staff with in the Departments of Health, Education, Home Affairs, Foreign and Commonwealth, Cabinet Office, and MPs and Lords in all parties. NDPA works with other relevant agencies, and with several Police forces. It has a Youth Division. It also works abroad. As an ‘umbrella’ body for Prevention, NDPA is not predominantly engaged in delivering programmes, however it does manage the delivery of specific prevention programmes for primary school teachers, for adolescents in a ‘Peer Prevention’ process, and for parenting skills training. The main focus of NDPA’s work remains the advancement – both in quality and realization of potential – of Prevention.

Contact: PO Box 594, Slough, SL1 1AA, UK. Tel./Fax: 00+44-1753-677917. e-mail: ndpa@drugprevent.org.uk website: www.drugprevent.org.uk

 

‘DRUG STRATEGIES AND THE CULTIVATORS OF CULTURE’

For some time now a feeling has been slowly growing in me that there must be a way to empower ourselves by combining the many disparate elements of our prevention work into a unified whole. We are each of us toiling away at our respective tasks, but low resourcing and constant attacks by our detractors mean that we have little time to take the broad view, to view the structure of the environment in which we work.

I am not alone in currently exploring this area, and in preparing this paper I gratefully acknowledge the work of many others. I make special mention of Emeritus Professor Norman Dennis of Newcastle University, Professor Juan Alberto Yaria of the University of San Salvador, and amongst many eminent journalists, Melanie Phillips and Peter Hitchens of Britain, Olavo de Carvalho of Brazil, and Larry Collins – of many places!

I have no illusions that this paper represents wisdom, but if it provokes you into looking afresh at your working environment; at the influence of culture, and how you might in turn beneficially influence it, then it will have achieved its objective.

1. DEFINITIONS:

Prevention is a much abused word; I would hope you would all agree with one of my most respected mentors, Bill Lofquist (Ref.1) who said:

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
Presentation by Peter Stoker, National Drug Prevention Alliance

Title: Many Roads Lead From Rome

Prevention is a much abused word; I would hope you would all agree with one of my most respected mentors, Bill Lofquist , who said:
 
“We need to get beyond the notion that prevention is merely stopping something happening, to a more positive approach which creates conditions which promote the well-being of people”.

Culture is another word that can be interpreted in many ways.. But the definition of culture which we are ordinarily engaged with is
 
 “The Attitudes and Behaviour of Particular Social Groups”.

3. HOW DOES CULTURE INFLUENCE BEHAVIOUR?
With acknowledgements to American prevention expert Bill Oliver, here’s a model … the Tree of Behaviour. And here are the stages of its growth. (powerpoint slides shown here)
The Tree of Behaviour doesn’t grow out of nowhere – it isn’t spontaneously created; it is the outcome of a process that is largely invisible. Invisible because it is below ground; it has roots. Within each of us – As external impulses reach our centre of consciousness, our intellect, will and emotion respond to the impulses, and the outcome is that we develop a thought. We review that thought – ‘yes/no/maybe’ – and in the process we develop an attitude towards it. Our attitude towards any action we are contemplating is probably the first visible sign which others can see – like the first green shoots of a tree coming up through the ground. This is why, as parents, we need to be vigilant about the attitudes our children display.
What I want you to concentrate on, though, is that internal, ‘underground’ phase – before the attitude develops. In this seminal stage, a great many influences apply. Memories – good and bad. Using those memory banks to project images of what might happen if this behaviour is followed. Values and boundaries for the individual. Weighing advantages and disadvantages to oneself and to others. Applying learning received so far. Peer pressure and role models. The drive for personal pleasure. Curiosity and risk taking. Pain and how to avoid it. Feelings of spirituality and faith – or the lack of them. All these and more will influence the nurturing of that first thought, and will decide whether we reject it – or decide to act on it. This is ‘the culture in which decisions are made’.
If someone alters the culture within which decisions are made, it is virtually certain that there will be different outcomes. The Values Clarification philosophy founded by Carl Rogers and Professor Sidney Simon (and which also drew in part on the thinking of their contemporary, Abraham Maslow) when combined with other liberally-inclined arguments produced a juggernaut that crushed large sections of the morally-based opposition. Not including us!
4. NESTS OF CULTURE

Consider first this simplified hierarchy – or ‘nest’ of cultures:

Societal factors overlay and add to the culture. There is no shortage of societal factors which tend to encourage drug abuse. Here are some examples:

 

Conspicuous consumption
Search for Rapid gratification
Rights but no responsibilities
The ‘Right to be Happy’
Self before society
Youth are the Supreme Beings
Political Correctness


Politics is a culture all of its own, operating in its own idiosyncratic way. History shows the emergence of ‘intellectuals’ giving succour to drug abuse – rationalising it as a ‘legitimate’ expression of disaffection for conservative/’right wing’ ideology and authority. Liberalism was born out of reaction to the tyranny of monarchies and other hard-line authorities, but when democracy replaced these despots, liberalism – instead of stepping back – went on a quest for justification of its continued existence, and in the process became a perversion of its earlier noble purpose – and a tyrant as ruthless as any it once fought to depose. Liberal forces tend to have lots of money and resources; there is therefore the very real risk that the European Parliament will recycle the pro-drug culture’s statements, presenting them to the unwary – especially in the new Enlargement Nations – as ‘wisdom from the centre’
And of course one massive player in the culture game is The MEDIA. The ‘messengers’. The rulers of the magnificent city which is Rome used to have a tradition of killing any messenger who brought bad news – if we continued this practice these days we wouldn’t have any journalists left! But instead we seem to expect bad news – and disbelieve anything good we hear. Meanwhile the messengers have transformed themselves from reporters of the news into makers of the news – filtering everything through their own belief system.
The newspapers’ colleagues in print, the magazines, are amongst the strongest promoters of hedonism. ‘Style’ magazines like Face, FHM, ID, Ministry, have long pursued a love affair with ‘lad/ladette’ behaviour – heavy drinking, ‘caning’ (drugs), promiscuity are all seen as milestones which all must pass to gain entry to the World of Cool. Even the youth magazines – like Bella, 19, and Just 17 – all of which are regularly read by those much younger than their ostensible readership age – have an unhealthy pre-occupation with sex. In addition to these ‘generic’ magazines, there are of course the ‘specialist’ magazines like ‘High Times’, ‘Cannabis Culture’ ‘Heads’ to cater for the dedicated doper – and to intrigue the casual reader.
Films rely on something called ‘Product Placement’ to boost their revenue – this is the inclusion of commodities on the screen to make people want to buy them. It works for commercial products – but it also works for things like drugs, which are many times included in the action with no justification in the storyline, and with inappropriate audience ages … ET and Crocodile Dundee are just two examples of this malpractice. Posters. Tee shirts. The fashion industry with its exploitation of ‘heroin chic’.
5. PREVENTION AND ITS ENGAGEMENT WITH CULTURE

‘Anomie’ (anything goes) to ‘Authoritarianism’. Advocates of drug legalisation have attempted to tendentiously pigeonhole John Stuart Mill in the ‘self-interested’ culture, quoting his statement that
 

 

 

 

 

 

“Over himself, and over his own mind and body, the individual is sovereign”.

but they ignore his saying that


 “Whenever, there is definite damage, or risk of damage, to an individual or the public, Liberty (must give way to) Morality or Law”.


You might say this means that conscience erects a ‘Stop’ sign when one’s ‘self-will’ is speeding. Without this control system, self-will proceeds onto the assumption that one has a ‘personal right’ to this behaviour, thence to the notion that there is a ‘constitutional right’ to the behaviour, and thus to a pressure to legalise it. If we do not want to be ruled by tyrants in future, it is in all our interests to promote conscience now. According to Coulson, this means going back to what he sees as the three core institutions – family, church and university, and instilling a health-promoting model in all of them.
8. HOW CAN WE STRENGTHEN PREVENTION CULTURE?
Generic activities:
• Understand and work to the model of ‘Total Health’
• Advance the concept of ‘Everyone, not just Number One’
• Expose and dispose of ‘Values Clarification’

• ‘Cultivate the Conscience’

Improve Reality:

• Establish primary prevention as main criterion in drug education All education should have prevention in mind

• Put harm Reduction where it belongs Part of treatment, not a policy in itself

• Establish improved, rapid access treatment centres. Treatment, including mandated attendance, should be available sooner

• Define and confine ‘harm reduction’ as within treatment, for known users only. Pseudo-harm-reduction should be exposed for the sham it is

• Pro-active Media Strategy Cultivate your media, learn to love them, programme your initiatives

• Fix ‘Broken Windows’ Restore order and reduce crime by not tolerating even the little things

• ‘Prevention Cities’ Follow the San Salvador example – you need to contact Prof. Yaria

• Police get a ‘Pizza the Action’ Prevention by police/community initiatives.

• ‘Cool to be clean’ tee shirts, and similar promotions Give your creative people a chance to shine!

• Music Art and Drama re-energised with prevention in mind

• Support the ‘Prevention Institute’ Seek out the worldwide family of relevant Institutions

But at the very least we can be sure that our efforts in prevention have a high purpose, are altruistic, and tend to enhance the quality of life in a way that is sorely needed in the social and spiritual desolation which typifies too much of society today.

What are the indications for Latvia?

As an advocate of prevention you would expect me , I’m sure, to advocate that Latvia commits to prevention. But I hope I can give you put a little more balance than that. You should know that in the first half of my 20 years in this field, I worked in treatment, as a counsellor for people with a problem, as an advocate in the justice and police system and has a specialist adviser in schools. so in these suggestions I’ll try to reflect that width of vision.

This would be a fortunate country indeed if every drugs service that was needed were to be in place – and to be present in sufficient quantity and of adequate quality. In reality, I know of nowhere where these Utopian conditions have been achieved. The best we can do is to optimise placement of resources, and to keep them under continuous observation, so that as conditions change, the services change.

(At this point  a power point presentation was made – including describing in detail  the Jellinek curve.  the argument for much stronger universal prevention. Explanations of  indicated and selective prevention.  true and so-called  ‘Harm Reduction’. )

The Rome conference was commendable in looking as widely as possible at the many factors influencing human behaviour. In today’s brief conference I would recommend you to keep this principle in mind. Don’t imagine that if you apply a push to one point that you will move the whole structure – as a former civil engineer, I can assure you that is very unlikely to happen, and what you’re more likely to do is to over stress that part of the structure you’re pushing and cause the whole thing to fall down on top of you. The lesson of this is that you need to have a good appreciation of the whole picture of each section interacting with another. Another analogy would be to call this whole environment around drug use a social ecology – I would hope we have learnt enough about ecology to understand the risks of tampering with just one part of whilst ignoring the rest. The best advice is – move slowly, move cautiously.

If I had to sum up where most of the conflict arises in drugs services, apart from haggling about which service gets how much money, I would say that it comes from the struggle between the rights of the individual and the rights of society. (John Stuart Mill) This always has been, and probably always will be, a never ending tug of war. the best we can do is to recognise that the individual and society both have rights and it is the duty of government to act as the referee – even if all the players and the onlookers shout for your death! In that thankless task I wish you best of luck.

Thank you.

SECOND PAPER – CANNABIS AND SYNTHETICS – SCHOOL SYSTEMS.

Antonio Maria Costa, the Head of INCB, gave a worrying warning to us all last when he said that synthetics will be the major drug problem in future. Why might this be? And how far away is this future? Should we drop everything we are doing now and concentrate only on synthetics? And what  are synthetics anyway? We can’t even agree on the definition of a ‘drug’ – let alone what a synthetic one is.

And what’s really happening in schools. When we say we want schools to prevent use, what are we also saying? That the rest of us can switch off? I don’t think so! And when we issue statements as to what teachers must do, how much do we measure the possibility of them doing this within their present workload? What about their own attitude and learning about drugs? And how many of them are drug users? How many have swallowed the gospel according to Saint Maslow? And to what extent is any kind of ‘freedom’ almost welcomed in this post-Soviet era – and because of this, is any attempt at prevention automatically decried as repression/repressive? This is where culture comes in – and I tried to open that subject for you this morning.

So what we are facing here is an enormous journey – a journey of learning as well as teaching. But the Buddhists will tell you that the longest journey begins with a single step, therefore let us see if we can take that first step today.

The first thing is to define what are we trying to achieve. If you are just trying to achieve a peaceful life in your school, you can expel any one you suspect of drug use so that they have to go to somebody else’s school. Of course there is the risk and you will have to take people who are expelled from another school, and so the merry-go-round continues. But I suggest to you that you are trying to achieve more than this. Firstly you are trying to achieve healthy young people in a Healthy school which is part of a healthy society. Secondly, you are trying to achieve succes here,  and people in a successful school which contributes to a successful society.

Now I need to define what health means. Why? Because in a society which is heavily influenced by medicine, we tend to think of ‘health’ as just the absence of sickness. and when somebody is defined as ‘well’ , we define this in terms of how fast they can run 100 metres. Say someone has just stolen your wallet with all your money and then runs away – covering 100 metres in 10 seconds, would you look at them and say they are truly healthy? I don’t think these will be the words on your lips.

Health is a great deal more than the absence of sickness, and you can find much more complete definitions of it even in ancient writings. more recently there are definitions which match these earlier ones, such as that by the World Health Organisation, which match these earlier ones. The definitions generally agree that health is a combination of physical, mental, intellectual, social, emotional, spiritual and environmental aspects. In order to be fully healthy, one has to be scoring well on all these aspects and this is why the school curriculum needs to address the whole person, not just the academic person – but it needs to do so within a clearly defined and accepted moral framework, which balances individual liberty against responsibility to others – a theme I touched on in my previous paper.

How can you achieve this full health? I suggest that you need to involve and gain commitment from everybody in the school, and I mean everybody – from the Head and the teachers, to the caterers and the janitor – not just the pupils. The starting point for this is a school drug policy which promotes health – not just imposes discipline. I can tell you that in my own country a great many of these policies developed by schools start with what I would call Chapter Three of the complete book. Chapter Three says what we will do with a pupil when we discover them using drugs. But the policy is silent on Chapters 1 and 2; Chapter 1 says ‘what are the goals of this school’ and Chapter Two says ‘how are we going to achieve those goals’. These are the chapters in which you set out your PREVENTION plan – if you only start at Chapter Three then I’m sorry to tell you that you have a sick policy, not a healthy one.

I can tell you much more about what ought to go into a school policy, but I cannot cover it fully in the time I have today. So let me give you some examples of what you could do

Draft a policy for your school along the lines I have suggested above. Then discuss it with your school’s teachers, with your school’s governing body or committee, with the parents of your pupils and with the pupils themselves. You can do this even in primary-schools, although it will be at a lower level. You could interact with parents by a combination of survey forms and focus groups. You need to involve all of these because you want them all to ‘take ownership’ of the policy – and in doing this they will be more likely to adhere to it.

Structure your curriculum with the goal of a health-promoting school, and then Staff it with that in mind. I have seen a number of schools where a particular teacher is nominated as ‘the drug teacher’ – not because they are perfect for the job, but because nobody else wants it. You might as well hand out drugs at the school entrance if you’re not going to be serious about this subject. Bear in mind that school teachers may be required to share any information pupils give them, share it with the head teacher, or parents, or even the police. If you have discovered a pupil who is dealing drugs to others then it is right that you should tell all these other people, but if what faces you is a pupil who has just started using drugs in response to some form of emotional distress or disturbance, then you need a different response, one that probably involves individual, confidential counselling. If your school does not have pastoral counsellors who have the power to keep information confidential, then you may have to make an arrangement with an external counselling agency where pupils can be referred to cover this need.

What about the actual process of ‘educating for prevention’ – can you educate to prevent? I would say “only sometimes”.  Consensus of research into behaviour is that if you wish to modify it you must address three subjects – known simply as KAB. Knowledge, attitudes and behaviour.

Knowledge is what you can deliver in the classroom, but just transmitting knowledge does not necessarily change behaviour – only sometimes, as I have said. Attitude can also be addressed in the classroom but needs to be addressed more widely throughout the school; you can challenge and mould attitude during class lessons, in debates, through the school newspaper, by the informing and sustaining of discipline, and by good examples. What the research also shows is that even though you may change attitudes this does not automatically change behaviour. You need to specifically address behaviour to a improve your chances of achieving a health promoting school.

Behaviour is the toughest one to tackle, because it is the most volatile. It is a combination of encouragement and discouragement, of positive reinforcement for behaviour which you welcome – not just a process of punishment for behaviour of which you disapprove. When it comes to disciplinary responses, these need to be in accordance with the consequences which everybody has been told about and acknowledged when they first join your school. They need to be consistently applied but this need not mean rigidly applied – the way you have written your drug policy should give you scope for sensible and sensitive discretion on how you deal with each person.

The shortage of time precludes me from going into more detail about random student drug testing, restorative justice schemes and the use of Peer Education projects for prevention.  Please feel free to contact me at the National Drug Prevention Alliance if you wish to further this discussion.  I thank you for the invitation to share our views on Drug Prevention in the schools setting.  My colleague (and wife) Ann will now give you a presentation about a successful drug prevention programme called Teenex which was written in 1988.

 

 
 
I have been asked by Sandra Rubene to give you a re run of the paper which I presented at Rome – and to give you best value in the time we have, what I propose to do is not only that, but also to give you a quick overview of the rest of the happenings in the Rome conference; what the conclusions were, and then to wrap up this first session by suggesting how you might take this information – and apply it in Latvia.
In September 2003 for Fifth Global Conference on Drug Prevention was held in Rome. 500 delegate 8th from 84 nations attended – including your own Aelita Vagale .
The atmosphere of this conference was something special. There was not just the usual concentration on the pharmacology of drugs, their physiological effects and how to educate against the use, valuable though that is. All of those subjects were covered, but in addition there was a vigorous examination off for the effects of culture on drug use, the value of religion in countering drug use, and an old subject under a new title – bio-ethics, meaning the interaction of ethics and human nature. It was this a holistic approach that made this conference so exciting and so memorable.

Another memorable aspect was the enormous commitment shown by the Italian government; no less than 11 senior figures from the government of Italy attended. This included the Vice Prime Minister, Gianfranco Fini, the Co-ordinator of National Anti-drug Policies Pietro Soggiu, and ministers within departments as Health, Social Affairs, Regional Affairs, Prisons, and the Interior. The unified message coming from this extraordinary assembly of officials is one that I would commend to Latvia. I will come back to this in more detail at the end of this paper, but for now, will tell you that their conclusion was that they had tried for long enough to make peace with the drug culture; they had now decided that this had only made things worse, not better, and a new direction was essential.

Of the other delegates at the conference the there were many who were notable. The first Lady of Bolivia spoke on the first day. She was joined by US Congressman Mark Souder. The Swedish Minister for Public Health and Social Services was there, as were an impressive array of academics from many countries. This was Rome, so we were fortunate in hearing from the Papal Nuncio and several of his senior colleagues from the Vatican. But we also had representatives of Islam, Hinduism, Judaism and Buddhism, who all gave papers – and all these faiths showed a remarkable degree of unity in their definitions of what constituted Responsible Behaviour in their communities.

So let’s move now to my paper. I’m going to give you a shortened version of it here, but the full version has been given to Sandra. It was entitled ‘Prevention strategies and the Cultivators of Culture’.

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
Address by Peter Stoker, Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance to the ECAD 10th Anniversary Mayors’ Conference Stockholm May 15, 2003
My links with ECAD have been partly with Tomas, but also in my own country with Peter Rigby – so sadly lost to us all last year. In giving this paper I would like to record my personal gratitude to Peter, and all that he did through ECAD in the struggle for sanity, in this sometimes crazy world in which we find ourselves

I have worked in this field for over 15 years; in Counselling, Treatment, Justice, Education and – not least – in Prevention. I have visited or dialogued with drug programmes and agencies in more than 20 countries and NDPA continues to exchange information and good practice with many more, through our membership of organisations like Drug Watch International, the Drug Prevention Network of the Americas, and the Institute for Global Drug Policy. All this has woken me up to the ‘World of Alternatives’, and this morning I hope to bring you some insight into practical, workable Alternatives you could apply in your own city.

Alternatives. Creating the Alternatives. It is said that we live in a sometimes crazy world, and one sign of this occasional craziness is when we give unjustified hearing to people who offer ‘alternatives’ to our present social and legal policies which may suit them very well, but which would be deeply dangerous to our children and to our society. Maybe we should blame ourselves for this; perhaps the Crazy Alternative might not sound so attractive if we became more effective in making people hear the Sane Alternative.

As we are in Scandinavia, let’s consider Hans-Christian Andersen’s story of the Emperor’s New Clothes – in which it took the innocence of a child to open the eyes of adults, an internationally-known metaphor describing blindness to the truth. An affliction taken to new heights when it comes to drug abuse.

Society obviously differs between different countries, but in western society we can see some broadly similar patterns. Let me describe what we see in the UK. Our society is one in which behaviour is conditioned by the conspicuous pursuit of consumption, by the demand for rapid gratification (‘Give me pleasure NOW); by an environment in which people march for of their rights but never for their responsibilities, by the idea that we have ‘ a right to be happy’, by the elevation of the Self above the Society (Me first) – and certainly by the elevation of youth, above all. [Ref 1] When you take all this into account, it is easy to see how drugs can have assumed a new prominence.

We also live in a society where ‘Political Correctness’ shackles our thinking, so that, for example, I can no longer call myself ‘able-bodied’ but must instead call myself ‘a person who is non-disabled’. This is just one more example of how clever use of words can confuse the mind, in the same way that the Tailor confused the Emperor – and the way in which the Emperor’s subjects went along with the deception.

This is the fertile ground in which drug-abuse grows, and one of the cleverest tactics of the pro-drug lobby is to convince you that there is no alternative – we must surrender to the inevitable; accept drug use, legalise it, and keep the harm to a minimum – for the users, that is!

We have allowed ourselves to be seduced by clever words and convoluted arguments – and a major part of this process is that the sane counter-argument to this insane dialogue gets only a tiny proportion of the media’s attention. If we were to apply the ‘Emperor’s Clothes’ logic that is advanced for drug abuse to other social behaviours there would be a national, if not international outcry.

Let’s take a fictitious example. Suppose you were designing a new social policy concerning rape. Would you think it enough to just provide services for the victim after the attack? Surely not. How about some Harm Reduction advice for the rapist? They have rights too, you know. After all, maybe it was just ‘recreational rape’ – and the rapist’s lawyer says he is ‘an otherwise law-abiding person’. Maybe if we relaxed the law this would improve things – and look at all the police time we would save! ……It is at times like this that I envy that child who showed us that the Emperor had no clothes. I envy him because his story ended with the community recognising the truth and common sense of what he said.

I have enough faith in human behaviour to believe that we will achieve this condition of sanity with drugs policy in the end – but I am also sure that it will not be achieved through apathy. Ultimately, we get the society we deserve. That is why the commitment all of you are showing through your support of ECAD – and through your actions which flow from that – is so very important. The question then is, how can we create saner alternatives?

My eminent fellow-speakers this morning will be telling you about their successes in treatment and rehabilitation. I have visited several of them in my travels, including Delancy Street – whose speaking slot I have filled today – and I can testify to what marvellous projects they are. They do an enormously valuable job, and deserve more support. But we don’t beat problems only by treating the casualties – and the sheer numbers of those with problems mean we have to do something else as well. Just consider the numbers. If we take the four major projects presenting here, and add in other large projects such as Betel in Spain, Delancy street in America, and Synanon in Germany, their combined throughput is probably something under 10,000 people a year, and yet it is said that in Britain alone we have more than 250,000 addicts. One thing is sure; treatment centres are unlikely to become redundant in our lifetime or our children’s lifetime.

Another concern is that whilst the projects presenting here today are models of good practice, not everybody matches these standards. A survey of British treatment projects on behalf of the Big Issue magazine found that most drugs other than heroin were rarely addressed by treatment centres, and that for heroin there was often only the ‘new solution’ of prescribing methadone. Big Issue found that far from weaning people off drugs, methadone prescriptions were supporting 33% of addicts for 5 years or more and 16% for 10 years or more, with both percentages rising. Moreover, 80% of methadone ‘clients’ were also using street drugs, with 44% of those on prescribed methadone using heroin on a daily basis. – and up to 50% of them still commit crimes.

If treatment and rehabilitation alone cannot turn the tide, what else is there? Let’s go back for a minute to that imaginary social policy we were looking at; the policy for rape. If we agree that rape is a bad thing; bad not just for the victim, but bad for the rapist and bad for society as a whole, our policy would not confine itself to just reacting to it, and treating the casualties. Our core policy would be to prevent it.

Rapes still happen, but we do not take this as evidence that the prevention of rape should be abandoned, anymore than we seek to dissolve driving schools because we still suffer car crashes. We take a rational view that if we were to be fatalistic about rape, there would be a lot more of it around. So, instead of surrendering, we work harder at improving our rape prevention technology.

I want however to qualify one point in my remarks: there is actually a limited scope for Harm Reduction – provided you deliver it to the right people in the right setting. It was properly defined and limited as to its scope in Britain’s first National Drug Strategy in 1995 [Ref2], a definition also enshrined in the 1998 strategy [Ref 3] which Keith Hellawell – whom you heard speaking so eloquently yesterday – designed and introduced. The ‘limit of scope’ is to use it only with people you know are users, on a one-to-one basis, as part of the treatment process; that is, whilst the user is moving towards cessation. Drug workers like myself have always practised this limited scope – indeed one could argue that there is a moral obligation to do so. But this practice only relates to a fraction of our population – it has nothing to do with the hijacked version of Harm Reduction [Ref 4] which is applied to the whole population, and which asserts that:

 

 

 

  • You cannot prevent drug use
  • You are inhibiting personal rights if you try
  • Everyone may use at some time, so
  • Guidance for everyone on how to use is the key, and
  • Policy should be confined to reducing harm

This is a very cunning alternative – for if you introduce it, and then find that use increases, its proposers will say this proves that Prevention is useless and therefore Harm Reduction is clearly the right path to follow. A self-fulfilling prophecy. (The story of how this came about is too long to repeat here).
The truth is that in the past we have rarely tried to prevent, in the true sense of the word, that is, working ‘pre the event’. This is the Alternative on which I want to focus for the remainder of this paper, and in the process to give you some useful Alternatives to consider, from the examples I’ve seen around the world.
Let’s start with a piece of Prevention history. A common claim by the pro drug lobby is that “the Just Say No approach doesn’t work”. This has been repeated so many times that it has become a mantra – a classic example of the Orwellian principle; that if you repeat a lie often enough it becomes perceived as the truth. Saying that Just Say No “doesn’t work” is simply another way for the pro-drug lobby to claim that “the War on Drugs is failing”. Another cliche. Another lie.

Very few members of the general public know that in the so-called ‘War on Drugs’ a victory was recorded every year for 12 years, and that over those 12 years drug abuse was reduced by over 60 per cent – an astonishing public health success by any standards. [Ref 5] Even if they do know that, they are unlikely to know that one particular prevention programme was pre-eminent throughout the period. The name of the country? America. And the name of the programme? Just say No.

The Just Say No programme was much more than the chanting of slogans. It was a comprehensive personal, social and health education programme, backed up by trained volunteers and professionals. I have copies of their manuals and I can assure you of that. [Ref 6] But we can now see that a major factor in its success at that time – between 1980 and 1992 – indeed perhaps the main factor, was the culture of the society in which it was operating.

Culture is vital as the deciding factor in behaviour. And the key cultural force that swung into action to generate those successful years was not the Ministry of Education, or the Ministry of Health, or the Police and Courts – it was the community. Ordinary communities like yours, in cities across America. Parents were the main activists, acting just as that little boy did when he saw the Emperor – they exposed the truth, which the professionals had been too blinded by dogma to see. The parents shamed the professionals into producing truly preventive programmes – with the splendid results I have just stated. And those proven techniques are still available to you today – if your city only has the political will to use them.

America may have been one of the first to properly tackle prevention, but it was by no means the only one. Let’s take a quick trip around the world and see some of the other things that have happened in this context: Most countries have good and bad aspects, so in the time available this will have to be a simplified review.

Poland: The Warsaw Institute has seeded many good prevention programmes.

Germany: More than 30 of our Teenex camps, plus parent skills trainings.

Portugal: Projecto Vida and others have executed many good projects, including over 35 Teenex camps..

Belarus:

Is keen to co-operate with UK on prevention.
Kazan: Has sent young people to UK Teenex prevention camps. Keen to do more.
Bulgaria: Excellent community structures are now addressing drug prevention and other services. Burgas, on the Black Sea coast, is an ECAD member and is one of the cities in which we have just started work.

Italy: Has changed to more preventive policies. Hosts the World Prevention conference 2003 – in Rome.

Belgium: Exemplary work has been initiated in the Eastern cantons, over many years.

Sweden: Has drug use levels far below the rest of Europe, largely from inducing a culture which discourages drug abuse.

Latin America: Countries like Brazil and Peru have vigorous prevention programmes. The next world conference of the International Task Force on Strategic Drug Policy will be in Argentina, next month.

Spain: Have just invited UK to co-operate on a primary school prevention programme.

Australia: Birthplace of two wonderful prevention programmes – Life Education Centres (now operating in several countries) and the Kangaroo Creek Gang.

New Zealand: an oasis of prevention – make sure you get a copy of ‘The Great Brain Robbery’ – one of the best advisory books for non-expert parents and community officials I have ever seen.

America: so much has been and is being done to prevent drug abuse. Check out the websites at NIDA and CSAP, which you can reach via the links on our site. I would also like to say a word at this point about a great programme, which has so many daggers sticking out of its back it looks like a porcupine. That programme is DARE. It is precisely because it has been so successful, so widely adopted, that it has become a constant target for the pro-drug lobby and the professionally jealous. Like everything else, it has had its faults in the past, but it has addressed many of these and is now launching a strengthened curriculum. Its unique involvement of police officers in a sustained relationship with schools – not just a quick visit – has many benefits in and beyond prevention. Already seven police forces in UK are using it, with more coming.

United Nations: Despite all our worries about the money and heavy pressure applied to it, the UN came up with the right result in its recent 46th meeting of its Commission on Narcotic Drugs – ruling out any weakening of drug laws. I am sure that the 1.3 million signatures collected by many groups – including ourselves – under the leadership of Hassela Nordic Network had a big influence, and I would like to add my congratulations to HNN for this tactical masterpiece.

Plenty of good news, then. But before you assume everything’s solved, I must emphasise that the well-financed and highly-resourced machinery of the pro drug lobby is having a significant and growing effect…

Holland: Their story is well documented, liberalization continues, despite polls showing that 70% of Dutch citizens want the lax drug laws rescinded.

Switzerland: We hear glowing reports of their heroin experiments, but this is hardly surprising when we learn that the head of the experiments is also the head of the Swiss branch of the International Anti-prohibition League, a major player in legalisation.

United Kingdom: We have been subjected to enormous pressure, with international backing for the pro-drug lobby, and we are almost certainly about to have cannabis re-classified to a lower class of legal penalty – ridiculously demoted to rank alongside steroids instead of alongside amphetamines. This is despite a wide range of new research against cannabis – and no new science in favour of it. But the good news is that both the Select Committee [Ref 7] and the Advisory Council to the Government have turned their back on all the dishonest argument, and have said they will not recommend legalisation or decriminalization – (and, for good measure, they have said the same thing about ecstasy). They have also exposed the ‘medical cannabis’ argument by inviting scientific trials, but ruling out any use of ‘cannabis as grown’ (because if its extreme variability and pharmacological unreliability as well as undesireable side-effects) and they also rule out any use of smoking as a delivery method. Their stated intention is to test extracts of cannabis, not smoked but ingested by normal medical means, and not to be of psychoactive effect. So, you don’t smoke it and you don’t get high – not at all what the pot lobby had in mind!

East Europe: As I have said already, there are good outcrops of prevention, but this region is held to ransom by pro-drug influences, most notably George Soros, who has put tens of millions of dollars worldwide into weakening drug laws.

Australia: When South Australia first decriminalized cannabis possession there was a significant increase in use by young people, compared to neighbouring states. Sadly, this experience has not deterred the liberalisers, and worse is to come. Western Australia is now considering following suit.

Canada: Policy is deteriorating in the same way as Australia.

From time to time I encounter drug liberals who assert that there is no proof of prevention. I usually refer them to the research work of Nancy Tobler; [Ref 8] she analysed no less than 240 successful prevention programmes. 240. And still they come, with their cries that there is no evidence. And yet if you press them on the subject, the more honest of them will admit that there is little or no evidence of effectiveness of Harm Reduction. Such evidence as there is can often be damning, as is the case with Baltimore in the USA; this city has one of the biggest needle exchange and condom issue schemes in the USA and yet it has ended up with the highest levels of drug abuse, the highest level of HIV infection and is amongst the highest levels of addiction. Harm Reduction may be having an effect in Baltimore, but it is not the effect that the public were promised. Coming back to Nancy Tobler; she looked at the 240 programmes and found 140 that had enough common factors to allow her to conduct what is called a meta-analysis. From this she was able to indicate the components of the more successful programmes. Another advanced researcher, Bonnie Benard, who is now with NIDA – the National Institute on Drug Abuse – has repeated the same kind of comparative exercise over many years, and from this has produced a set of “Criteria for Effective Prevention” which are a classic, timeless in their value. [Ref 9] A summary of Bonnie’s criteria is included in the written paper supporting this talk.

If I had to choose just one key criterion from what I have seen in all these countries, it would be Culture. Localised programmes will be effective locally, and programmes concentrating on one topic – such as self-esteem or drug awareness – may be effective in those areas, but not much elsewhere. If you are intent on generating a healthier environment in your city then you need to look to generating a health-oriented, prevention-oriented culture right across your community – in the home, in the school, in the workplace, in the youth organization, in the leisure areas, in the shops, in the churches and temples – and certainly in the media.

Culture can be artificially distorted, at least in the short term – which is where the media can be particularly effective, or particularly damaging. But cultural changes generally are slower to happen, and require steady application of energy. If that effort is sustained then change will occur, like the dripping of water that wears away the stone. The drug liberals have learnt this truth – we must learn it too, along with another truth.- that we sometimes forget that today has not always been . We did not always have the drug culture and the society culture we have now. It was changed before, by others. It follows that we can change it again.

What can an ordinary city do to produce a more healthy culture? One of the most comprehensive examples I have seen of this is “Project Revitalisation” in Vallejo, California. [Ref 10] The project is designed to tackle drugs, alcohol and crime in the city’s worst areas. The heart of the project is a strong community partnership: – the Vallejo Fighting Back partnership, Vallejo Code Enforcement, Vallejo Chamber of Commerce, Vallejo Police Department, Vallejo Neighbourhood Housing, California Employment Department, the Private Industry Council, and many neighbourhood associations. It works to integrate neighbourhood revitalisation, alcohol and other drug policy, neighbourhood safety, job-training, and co-ordination of human services into a comprehensive effort. The project’s goals are to sort out and regularize the jumble of disorganized buildings and facilities, regenerating the neighbourhood; to reduce crime, and foster safety and quality of life for the residents of these deteriorating, crime-ridden neighbourhoods.

Project Revitalisation is based on four principles:

 

 

 

  • The physical make-up of a community has an important influence on its vulnerability to crime. This is equivalent to the very successful “Broken Windows” project run in New York [Ref 11]
  • Neighbourhoods where residents have commitment and interest in improving their area can influence the level of crime
  • Everybody, individuals and families, must personally gain from the project. You cannot expect people drowning in problems such as unemployment, addiction, lack of child care and other human service shortages to be interested in improving their neighbourhoods
  • problems with alcohol and other drugs contribute to neighbourhood deterioration and must be specifically addressed.

In a five phase process, Project Revitalisation moves from initial assessment to detailed assessment, then to initial ‘pilot’ interventions before full implementation. The final phase is to reinforce the new stability of the neighbourhood by establishing permanent neighbourhood groups.
First reports of results from the project show encouraging improvements; there has been a reduction in police call-outs and an improvement in the perception of safety by residents – this is a very important feature in my own country, where fear of crime is often as crippling as crime itself.
The efforts to reduce illegal drugs are probably well understood already; particular alcohol policies that Vallejo introduced included:

 

 

 

  • ‘Conditional use’ (trial) permits for regulation of new alcohol outlets.
  • Improved ordinances to regulate existing outlets.
  • An ordinance for youth parties, to reduce non-commercial access of alcohol by young people
  • A social nuisance ordinance to hold property owners accountable for standards of building maintenance and for the conduct of their residents
  • A rental property inspection ordinance

Vallejo is a very comprehensive scheme but I’m sure you will agree that there is no ‘rocket science’ in what they are doing. Their deliberately steady progress, involving all the elements of the community at each stage, is reminiscent of the excellent work done by Dr Ernst Servais [Ref 12] in the Eastern cantons of Belgium. Both projects recognised that unless you carry the community with you at each stage, the effect of your labours is likely to be short-lived.
In summary, then, what Alternative do we have? What tools do we have in our toolbox? We could list these under three simple headings;
 

 

 

  • Before drug use
  • Early stages of drug use, and
  • Problematic stages of drug use

Before:
Culture. Prevention. Education. Parenting. Big Brothers and Sisters. Peer-group prevention. Policing for prevention. Media. Spiritual aspects. Workplaces. Sports (including FIT technology). Arts. Music.
Early stages:

Intervention. Counselling. Befriending. Harm reduction. Policing. Diversion (Alternatives). Containment.

Problematic stages:

Primary care. Treatment. Harm reduction. Justice. Drug courts. Restorative justice. Probation. Prison-based rehab treatment. Halfway houses. After-care. Relapse prevention.

Encompassing many of these initiatives, one brand new and usefully comprehensive addition to NDPA’s library has been the publication ‘Blueprint for a Drug-Free Future’ [Ref 13] by the Hudson Institute, USA.

Money – as always – comes into it. And because treatment is easier for accountants to count, it has traditionally tended to get much more of the available funding than other services. In economic terms, however, prevention gives a better return; even using conservative figures, prevention can be seen to give a payback of $6 for every dollar spent, [Ref 14] compared to only $3 for every dollar spent on treatment.

How might we inter-relate these services? Here is my model for doing that:

With the overall aim of a healthy society, the strategy relevant to the majority of the population has to be prevention. This does not mean that you have to accept anything in the name of prevention, or preventive education. You have every right to ask questions as to what a project is specifically aiming to achieve – and demand evaluations to make sure you get what you were promised.

For those who start to get involved – and they are still a minority – it is probably enough to expose them to prevention processes which they may well not have experienced before. Those who continue to stay involved will need more intervention effort, maybe even some form of treatment, but the outcome should still be that when they cease using this is affirmed by prevention processes. The problematic users are the ones we hear about most, but they are almost certainly only a few percent of your population. This whole structure needs to be buttressed by firm but fair legal and justice systems which firstly deter, then intervene, and – above all – correct aberrant behaviour. A justice system does not have to be confined to punishment, indeed I would argue that such a system is likely to be counter-productive; it should be a sensitive mix of punishment, retribution, restoration and rehabilitation.

CONCLUSIONS:

• There is no one programme around that does it all.

• What works for one person very well will not work at all for another .

• We need to see all of our services – prevention, education, intervention, treatment and so on as part of a continuous whole – and apply them holistically.

• We should not be afraid of having a variety of initiatives, but we should make sure that they are all inter-related.

• Don’t rush it, and don’t tamper with bits of the problem. This is like playing with the ecology – and will probably be equally disastrous. • Always monit

or and evaluate for process and outcome.

• Don’t be afraid to trust your gut feeling. If you have clear goals, then something which feels bad probably is bad.

• Don’t try to be an expert, but know where the ‘experts’ live – and in choosing them, be careful to check their background and agenda .

There is a great deal that you can do in managing a team of experts by asking some simple questions, such as: What are we trying to achieve? How are we trying to achieve it? What is it for? Is everything we are doing pointing in the same direction – if not, why not?

And remember – if one of these ‘experts’ offers you a wonderful new set of clothes, fit for an Emperor – get rid of him!

REFERENCES:

[up] 1. Stoker, P: Moralising, demoralizing .. the fight for Personal and Social Education. 2000. NDPA.

[up] 2. UK Government: Tackling Drugs Together. UK Drug Strategy 1995. HMSO.

[up] 3. UK Government: Tackling Drugs to Build a Better Britain. 1998. HMSO.

[up] 4. Stoker, P: The History of Harm Reduction. 2001 NDPA.

[up] 5. US Biennial National Household Surveys, correlated with Michigan Schools System. (Ongoing).

[up] 6. Just Say No International. Just Say No Club Book/Teen Leader Guide.1989. Walnut Creek, CA USA.

[up] 7. UK Home Affairs Select Committee. The Government’s Drug Policy – Is it working?. 2002. HMSO.

[up] 8. Tobler, N. Meta-analysis of 143 adolescent drug prevention programs. 1986. Journal of Drug Issues.

[up] 9. Benard, B. Characteristics of Effective Prevention Programs. 1987 acquisition. (Contact NIDA, USA).

[up] 10. Sparks, M. Project Revitalisation – Vallejo, California. 1998. Prevention Pipeline (NIDA).

[up] 11. Kelling, G. L., Coles C. M. Fixing Broken Windows. 1997. pub Touchstone, NY USA.

[up] 12. Servais, E. Before it’s too late. 1991. SPZ-ASL, Schnellewindgasse 2, B-4700, Eupen, Belgium.

[up] 13. McGarrell, E. F., Hutchens, J.D. Blueprint for a Drug-Free Future. 2003. Hudson Institute, Indianna.

[up] 14. Masi, D. A. Designing Employee Assistance Programs. 1984. Published by Amacom.

NDPA, P O Box 594, Slough, SL1 1AA, UK. Tel/Fax: +44 (1753) 677917.

Email: ndpa@drugprevent.org.uk

website: www.drugprevent.org.uk

Attachment to Peter Stoker paper to ECAD Conference, May 03,Stockholm

CHARACTERISTICS OF EFFECTIVE PREVENTION

By Bonnie Benard (With annotations by Peter Stoker to relate to the UK scene)

PROGRAMME COMPREHENSIVENESS/INTENSITY

A. Multiplicity: the causes of drug/alcohol abuse are multiple: personality, environmental, behavioural (Kandel, Logan, 1984; Hawkins et al, 1951). Programmes tackling only one area usually fail. You should target multiple systems (youth, families, schools, community, workplace, media, etc). Also use multiple strategies (information, lifestyles, positive alternatives, community policies) (Botvin, 1982).

B. Target whole community. School based programmes benefit less than community based approaches.

C. Target all youth. not just “high rise for prevention. Adolescence is seen to be a high risk time (for all youth in terms of health compromising behaviour. Labelling ‘high risk’ youth can provoke stigmatisation and lead to self fulfilling prophecies. There is however an argument for defining ‘high risk’ communities where an additional resource over and above the general prevention effort could be justified.

D. Build drug prevention into general health promotion. Drug abuse has been found by several (Lofquist, 1993) to be part of a complex pattern of interrelated factors e.g. delinquency, truancy, school failure, precocious sexuality, which share common antecedents.

E. Start early and keep going! Even in infancy there are influences in later behaviour. Developmental difficulties by age 3 are difficult to overcome (Burton White). Here it is of course relevant to mention Trevor Williams, Noreen Wetton and Alysoun Moon of the Southampton University team who have demonstrated so graphically in their “Jugs and Herrings” research paper that primary age children are not blissfully ignorant of drugs and alcohol. Prevention programmes starting from what children actually know are essential. Many secondary schools still seem to regard Years 11 and 12 as the age at which discussion of drugs or indeed sexuality) should be facilitated. Stable doors and horses come to mind!

F. Adequate quantity. ‘One shot prevention efforts do not work (Kumpfer, 1988) There must be a substantial number of interventions, each of a substantial duration Project DARE (Drug Abuse Resistance Education) initiated by Los Angeles Police and now in several other states delivers no less than seventeen onehour lessons to any given year and this is only part of the school programme.

G. Integrate family/classroom/school/community life. This is easier to say than do, but where it has happened results have been enhanced.

H Supportive environment, empowerment. Where young people are encouraged to participate and take responsibility their behavioural outcomes are improved. In Britain now peer education methods proven elsewhere are being piloted.

PROGRAMME STRATEGIES

J. Knowledge/Attitudes/Behaviour. Address these as a set, i.e. each must be directly tackled rather than assuming one will flow from another. The behavioural component is in part addressed by social skills development, but also supported by positive reinforcement activities drug free social/sporting events, commendations (preferably with something for everyone), media coverage, etc. Research suggests that Social Learning Theory (Bandura, 1977) produces some of the most profound improvements.

K. Drug specific curriculum. Affective education programmes that had not specifically covered drugs (including alcohol) were found unsuccessful, even though they addressed knowledge, attitudes and lifeskills.

L. Gateway drugs. So called because people now using heavy end drugs almost always started on these. Gateway drugs can be tobacco, alcohol and cannabis or, these days in Britain, even heroin! Concentration on prevention of these is therefore likely to prevent use of all substances. British research by MORI (Parents against Tobacco, 1990), showed that of youth who smoked tobacco 50% had also tried an illegal drug compared with only 2% of those who did not smoke tobacco. It should be particularly noted that cannabis is far from harmless: physical, mental and social damage is now being increasingly accepted as a reality.

M. Salient material. Whatever is used needs to identify with the audience, including:

• Ethnic/cultural sensitivity

• Appeal to youth interests

• Short term outcomes to be emphasised as important to youth as well as long term

• Appealing graphics and appropriate language, readability

• Appropriate to real age/reading age a key factor:

In a survey of 3,700,000 young American children, 25% of 9 year olds felt ‘some’ to ‘a lot’ of peer pressure to try drugs or alcohol (Weekly Reader, 1987).

N. Alternatives. Activities have to be plausible, be more highly valued than the health-compromising behaviour. Too often these alternatives are poorly thought through.

P. Lifeskills. Development of these will be of wider benefit than drug prevention. Included will be:- Communication, Problem Solving, Decision Making, Critical Thinking, Assertiveness, Peer Pressure Reversal, Peer Selection, Low Risk Choice Making, Self Improvement, Stress Reduction and Consumer Awareness (Botvin, 1985).

Choosing your friends has been found in some research to be more effective than resisting the peer pressure of said friends. Consumer awareness is a ‘companion’ to resisting peer structure, i.e. resisting media pressure.

Q. Training prevention workers. For the school setting the greater emphasis on experiential and interactive work requires teacher training to extend into youth work skills. Community development skills are valuable in taking school initiatives into the community. Imported ‘prestige’ role models are all very well, but good results have been achieved with parents, peers, teachers, or outside agency workers.

R. Community norms. Consistency of policies throughout schools, families and communities can greatly enhance impact.

S. Alcohol norms. Because of its dual status as a beverage and as an culturally accepted drug, alcohol is problematic for prevention. However, heart disease and tobacco prevention programmes have shown that societal norms can be changed.

T. Improve schooling! Listed here as a target because of its important correlation with healthy lifestyle. Within the current British economic and academic climate the most realistic hope may lie with co operative learning, see the TRIBES program for example.

U. Change Society. Don’t just stop with improving schools: add your voices to pressure for improvement in employment. housing, recreation and self development. (See ‘Project Revitalisation’ in Vallejo, California, for example). It is naive to suppose that prevention can take place in a political vacuum. Jessop recognises that failing to acknowledge the need for macro environmental improvement while at the same time placing the responsibility for health solely with the individual is tantamount to ‘blaming the victim’.

THE PLANNING PROCESS

V. Design, implementation, evaluation. Evaluations have generally concentrated on outcomes rather than the quality of design. However, implementation is as much dependent on engaging all sectors of the community (be it a school. a workplace, or a town) as it is on quality of design. Evaluation should therefore measure process as well as outcome.

W. Goal setting. Unrealistic or immeasurable goals help no one. It is important to set not only long4erm outcome goals (for prevention is long term) but also “process goals” such as increased involvement of parents and community, academic success, increased student teacher interaction. and so on.

X. Evaluation and amendment. Prevention workers have been criticized for giving too little attention to this area., the crushing shortage of funds has much to do with it (in America the ratio of funding between interdiction policy and prevention is about 200: 1). This lack of emphasis on evaluation has been the Achilles heel which pro drug campaigners have gleefully attacked. Effective evaluations have been those including longitudinal design, multiple measures of process as well as outcome (Tobler, 1986), and cost benefit analysis (CBA). CBA is perhaps the greatest marketing tool prevention has; where CBA has been applied substantial cost effectiveness has been demonstrated.

Bonnie Benard can be contacted at NIDA, the National Institute on Drug Abuse, 6001 Executive Boulevard, Bethesda,MD 20892-9561, or info@health.org

 

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
Declaration

In the Eternal City of Rome we, who are more than 500 delegates from 84 nations convening at this Global Conference, reaffirm our commitment to building and protecting the Common Good (‘Res Publica’), by creating and cherishing drug-free communities throughout the world.
In addressing this complex matter, which is of vital importance to every nation, Conference has participated in a wide variety of presentations reflecting (inter alia) cultural, ethical, scientific, medical, social, political and spiritual dimensions of the subject We come from Western and Eastern Europe, North/ Central and Latin America, the Caribbean, Africa, the Middle East Asia, Australia, Canada, Scandinavia – and maybe more.

We represent many diverse faiths and beliefs, but we are united in our support of Core Principles:

Core principles:

The pursuit of the ‘Common Good’ should define and guide the actions of Society.
A ‘Culture of Disapproval’ of drug abuse should be nurtured in all Society.
Society at large should honour ‘Moral Imperatives’ for responsible and constructive citizenship,striking a balance between the rights of the Individual and those of Society.
Proper validated science should under lay and inform all strategy, policy and – action.
Whilst we have pride in our past achievements, our focus is on the future – and our future lies with our children. For them, and for all society, we pledge to strive for an environment in which each and every person in our world has the best chance to fulfil their potential, in the best of all possible health and we pledge to create value in acknowledgement of the gift of life with which we have been blessed. We confirm the superiority of love, in relation to the education and building of our society: a superiority which has become a social, political, cultural and spiritual commitment.
*By ‘drug abuse’ we reaffirm we mean any use of illegal substances and any inappropriate use of legal substances.

ROME DECLARATION – SEPTEMBER 2003 Attachment

SCHEDULE OF INITIATIVES

The Conference resolves to progress initiatives in support of the Core Principles, including but not limited to the following:

Conference commends and supports our host nation, Italy, in its current renewal and strengthening of its policies against drug abuse.

Conference reaffirms the Declarations of all previous Global Conferences

PREVENTION

Prevention requires to be properly and fully recognised for its enormous potential; work to achieve this must be expanded. There must be a development of a positive, pro-active drug policy agenda which becomes the dominant policy initiative.

The whole community suffers from the problems of drug abuse, therefore the whole community must be consciously involved in the solution.

Youth are an important part of the solution, and yet they are too often marginalised, or exploited as ‘tokens’. Their significant potential as agents for positive change must be better recognised and utilised. Improved methods of reaching and empowering youth, in partnership with adults, must be created.

The total solution must be an optimized but flexible mix of all policies and practices, relevant to each nation’s culture. No one aspect of this should be allowed to dominate or otherwise jeopardise the orderly development and delivery of any other aspect.

Conference has recognised the significance of Culture in the drug abuse/drug prevention equation; action must therefore be taken to constructively influence culture in various ways.

The impact of drug abuse upon the individual – not only in the physical sense but ‘anthropologically’ – must be a key consideration; impacts on mental, intellectual, cultural, spiritual and bio-ethical components must all be addressed.

Impacts on the brain deserve special emphasis, and not just at the eventual stage of dependency. The early stages of use – especially by the young – must be more widely recognised for their serious damaging potential.

ORGANISATION

The Global Drug Prevention Network must be developed and widened: assistance should be given with the development of an African Demand Reduction Coalition.

there is a clear need to build and enhance alliances and dialogues with other bodies – such as faith-based groups, universities, and many others. Dialogues in the context of religion, culture and ethics are seen as enriching the whole process of our work.

the number of NGOs and other relevant bodies should be increased.

the technical quality of the work of the GDPN should be strengthened. In this regard, consideration should be given to the establishment, in due course, of some form of prevention institution – to define, monitor, enhance and safeguard scientific, ethical and cultural standards of performance. Additionally, the establishment of some form of international ‘training institution’ – perhaps web-based – should be studied.

LEGISLATION

Conference reaffirms its opposition to legalisation and other forms of drug law relaxation, and – in consequence – its opposition to any initiatives which, overtly or covertly, serve such negative expedience.

The fullest support should be given to the Vienna Declaration, which seeks to unequivocally support the UN Conventions on drugs, notably by the collection of 25 million supporting signatures by the year 2008.

FUNDING

Funding for prevention, and for demand reduction in general, needs to be moved to the top of the priority list, and significantly increased in amount.

International Aid programmes aimed at Producing Countries need to explicitly elevate the priority for Demand Reduction programmes and initiatives.

 Source: http://www.ecad.net

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :

Abstract:

Coalitions are a necessary and valuable tool, when faced with well-resourced legalisation lobbies. The processes for developing coalitions mirror and overlap those for developing policies. This paper addresses both, and suggests guidelines based on the author’s experience. The special potential which effective prevention has, in countering legalisation arguments, is discussed.

Key Words: Coalition, Policy, Practice, Legalisation, Prevention, NGOs

 

 

* * * * * * * * * * * *
My colleague Calvina has given you an expert overview of several of the key policy issues around legalisation which must be addressed by some means. I will try to show how you can do this most effectively, through the use of coalitions.
Policy development may alter in form, depending on the level at which you are working – from international summits all the way down to dialogues on the street corner. But though the form may change the essence will remain the same. My own organisation works at all these levels, so I hope that in hearing our experiences you will be able to extract what you need for your own purposes.

Individuals can sometimes generate a change in policy, but for most of us the more usual means of getting what we want – or stopping what we don’t want – is to work together; the Coalition. What we are all doing here in Palermo is one kind of coalition, and I hope it will grow into many permanent coalitions. This isn’t always easy; the word coalition ‘contains’ the word ‘coal’ – and coal is something that burns fiercely if ignited! What ignites a coalition?  Policy discussion.  A wise man once said

 

 

“Tasks unite. Issues divide.”

You cannot avoid confronting issues (meaning Policies) forever, especially in a subject like legalisation, but you can start with tasks that allow your coalition members to bond with each other, before you get into the inflammatory area which is Policy. You are also likely to find that coalition members arrive with their own agendas, or are competitive with one another. These and other spurs to disagreement can actually be very constructive, provided they are channelled properly – in fact, if you can’t hear any vigorous discussion in your coalition, you had better check for signs of life!
But even before you get to the stage of managing your coalition, the first two basic questions to ask yourself are “What use is a coalition to me?” and “Can I succeed without one?”.

Too many people embark on forming coalitions without a clear picture of their situation, their goals and their methods. Coalitions have many uses besides developing and delivering policies: they define and bond your interest group, and strengthen you, through knowing that you are not alone. And, by the way, having a coalition does not mean you cannot also have individual agents, role models, honest brokers, fixers, kamikaze pilots and so on. Your political process needs to be at least as sophisticated as that of both your target audience and your competitors.

Success without coalition? For the case of drug legalisation there is no doubt in my mind that you must have coalitions – plural. (I’ll tell you later why one coalition is not enough). So why exactly do you need coalitions for the drug legalisation issue? I can suggest some reasons:

– the nature of government and community today – interest groups are the norm.

– the size and complexity of government and community today – too much for one.

– their expectations of “interest groups” like you – amateur efforts will not do.

– the need to optimise skills/resources by sharing

– their existing knowledge/ignorance/bias – you have big barriers to overcome.

– the competition in trying to be heard, and

– your opposition’s strength and tactics

Let’s assume you have decided you do want a coalition for policy development on legalisation issues. Now, how do you build one? There are no architect’s plans to guide you, though the publication “The Future by Design” – published by the Centre for Substance Abuse Prevention (USA) is a valuable reference work which I would recommend you to obtain. (REF 1). On a more general level, there are some tried-and-tested guidelines from other fields of endeavour. It is also true that the processes you have to go through to develop a coalition are largely the same ones you have to go through to develop a policy, so in learning one you will learn the other. At the higher levels of central or local government, there will probably be accepted structures and procedures for coalitions and their policy development, but even here it is possible to waste time and energy by not having a clear definition of goals and methods to achieve them.

In simple terms, what you need is a Business Plan. Don’t be frightened by this term; there are basic but invaluable elements in a Business Plan which will enormously help the effectiveness of your anti-legalisation coalition. Even if you leave much of the rest of business planning to one side, you will greatly benefit from working on two key elements; these are “A to B” and “SWOT”.

A to B:

This comes from William Lofquist’s classic book for drug workers: “Discovering the Meaning of Prevention”. (REF 2) It is a model designed to help you think clearly.

A – exactly what is my situation now?

B – exactly where do I want to go?

Arrow – how will I get there? (methodology)

Ruler – how will I know I’m going in the right direction?

You should answer all these questions as fully as possible; for example:

A: what is the position of Government, significant opposition parties, other people/groups with influence on legalisation? Who is for you/against you/on the fence/apathetic? What are your resources? What have you achieved so far?

B: what are your goals in relation to legalisation (or other law changes)? What is your fall-back position i.e. where are you prepared to concede a little and where will you stand and fight without concession? What other policies do you want to see conserved/introduced/strengthened, so as to buttress the drug laws?

Arrow: what methods will you employ to achieve your goals? Which of these are familiar to you and which are new?

Ruler: what observations/measurements can you take; what mile posts can you establish to reassure yourself and others that you are going in the right direction?

What you should end up with is an ‘A to B’ for your overall strategy, with other ‘A to B’ structures nesting under this for each of your Policies and, under each of them, the same for your Actions.

SWOT:

This is a classic business management tool; the value of it is to highlight those assets which you can capitalise upon, and indicate those areas where you need to repair or strengthen your coalition. SWOT stands for

 

 

Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, Threats.

Again, be as detailed as you can and as honest as you can, in answering each of these headings. It is quite usual to turn a Threat into an Opportunity, with a little positive thinking. It’s what the Buddhists call “turning poison into medicine”.
Policy Issues around Legalisation

Before you can properly measure your ‘A to B’ and ‘SWOT’, you need to define the policy issues which should concern you, in the context of legalisation. Some of these will be obvious and immediate; others less so. You won’t need to address them all at once, but you do need to be aware of them all now. These are just some of the issues which I think you will encounter in relation to legalisation:

– validity of the laws

– crime to pay for drugs

– crime because of drug use

– the justice system for youth and adults

– social disruption

– moral fabric of society

– health (personal and societal) including physical, mental-intellectual, spiritual, emotional, social, and environmental aspects.

– liberty – individuals and groups

– social inequality

– housing and employment

– children: healthy development

– choice – the limits

– religion: drugs as competition

– politics: drugs as soporific or revolution-maker

– the work place and commerce

– the media

– safety and security

– honesty in sports

– parental authority

– rights versus responsibilities

– teacher authority

– who teaches the teachers?

– Harm Reduction – when, where and what?

And the one that everybody forgets: Prevention.

In the extensive dialogues that you will undoubtedly hold in developing policies which address these and maybe other subjects, do not overlook that section of society which is the most involved, and is often characterised as “the problem”. By this I mean Youth. In another of his classic texts, (REF 3) Lofquist has very clearly described different adult attitudes towards youth; what you should be aspiring to achieve is engagement with youth as resources. This does not mean that they have supremacy, for your views are equally valid and your longer experience must also be taken into account. But what it does mean is that through partnership with youth you have a chance to produce a stronger set of policies, ones with which young people will feel “ownership” and thus be much more likely to assist in developing.

Building your Coalition: managing policy

“He who is my enemy’s enemy is my friend” (Arab proverb )

We can learn from this proverb; its use is in commending us to look very widely for allies. This is especially true of the non-governmental sector. Legalisers are very good at this, never more so than when it comes to public relations. In the back room they may be stabbing each other, but when the cameras roll they are unlimited in their praise of, and respect for each other. Is this unethical? Debatable. On the other hand, is public argument with your allies stupid and suicidal? Absolutely. In this, as in other aspects of the legalisation debate, look and learn from your opponents. They have probably been at it longer than you, and they certainly have more money behind them – George Soros estimated over two years ago (REF 4) that he had, by that time, put no less than $90 million into weakening drug laws, and he is not the only backer of the legalisers. So, observe the methods of policy development and practice which these people have spent so much time and money on, and pick their best ideas – they may not actually cost you very much to implement.

With the honourable exception of people like Drug Watch International and Drug Prevention Network of the Americas- the legalisers have also been better at international networking. If we look at some of the major legalisation initiatives, we can see that different “lead strategies” are applied in different countries (although all of the strategies will show up at some point in the priority order). What this means is that if a particular lead strategy succeeds in one country it can be fairly rapidly adopted as the new lead strategy in others. Of course the legalisers are helped in this ‘crusade’ by enjoying a much readier acceptance from the media than we do, and this is also on an international stage. This also means they get a lot more books published. But since those books are out there on the shelves, when you are looking for ideas on strategy, policy or tactics, why not take a tip from General George Patton? After defeating the master strategist General Rommel, Patton was asked by newsmen how he had managed to pull off this surprising victory. ” “Simple” said Patton. “I read all his damned books”.

A coalition which addresses legalisation issues will find it has a bewildering array of potential coalition partners. Choosing how much effort to give each one, and the priority of each target is a difficult judgement call, made more difficult by the fact that the priority rating of any target will change in relation to which issues are “hot” on the day.

Why are some of these apparently extraneous Groups/individuals mentioned? Firstly, because the effects of drug misuse are reaching them (whether they know it or not), and secondly because your coalition needs to be as widely-based as possible. It is a basic truth that people not directly involved in an issue are likely to be supportive of it, if there is some overlap with their own experience (REF 5), provided that they can see your coalition knows which way it is going, is under good leadership, and preferably will not put them into any “uncomfortable” situations.

Uncomfortable? Keeping all your allies allied is a full-time job. They will be quite happy to stand behind you while you do battle on their behalf, but sometimes they will get nervous if you seem to be too outspoken. Others will be worried about compromising their funding if they are seen to be too close to you (you may be viewed as ‘Mad, Bad and Dangerous to know!’) – this is especially true if your country has libertarians liberally insinuated into its government or other fund-giving structures, as we have in Britain. Your allies may therefore want to pressure you into watering down your policy statements. This is a tough decision for you; a dilemma not easily or quickly solved. You will have to take this on an issue-by-issue basis and, over time, help them to achieve an understanding that on some subjects it is necessary to be courageous and take a stand – even if this upsets a few people at the time, they will respect you for it later. In doing so always stay cool, attack the plan but never the planner. Don’t rush into this, sustain your effort and keep repeating it: one of Britain’s oldest think tanks, the Fabian Society, works to a guiding principle which they call “The Inevitability of Gradualism”. Now that’s clever.

I said earlier that you should have coalitions – plural. Why would you need this? Firstly, to make your “Army” look bigger, and frighten the opposition. Secondly, to impress the decision-makers. And thirdly, to have other coalitions still in action if one of yours becomes damaged in some way or becomes unacceptable to the decision-makers. The legalisers are also good at this; when the earlier coalitions they formed became discredited as “hippy potheads in tie-die shirts” with antagonistic names like Legalise Cannabis Campaign, they replaced them with suit-and-tie organisations, giving them soothing, intelligent-sounding names like the Drug Policy Foundation or – even more obscurely – the Lindesmith Foundation, names which conveniently hide their purpose.

The Beau Geste stratagem

There is nothing to stop you having groups which belong to many coalitions; there is also nothing to stop a few individuals forming many groups – or forming groups which sound enormous and impressive to the public, but are far from it. I have heard the Director of NORML Canada, an organisation you might think was huge, admitting that his total membership coast to coast was nine people. In Britain, in a subject area very much related to drug misuse, we have a group of people who have been extremely active in ‘fabricating’ “Children’s Rights” groups. (Funny how we never hear of groups pressing for “Children’s Responsibilities”) Less than 20 of these people have established around 15 groups, all of them enjoying national standing. (REF 6). As I said earlier, look and learn.

Getting it right, getting it heard: Policy Development

So now you have a coalition (or family of coalitions). You clearly understand your present situation, and your goals – your ‘A’ and ‘B’. Now how do you get to B? Here is a suggested sequence of tasks:

– Develop Mission Statement (to match ‘B’)

– Develop Resolutions (to support ‘B’)

– Develop Policies (to achieve ‘B’)

– Develop Action Plan (‘A’ to ‘B’)

– Agree Action Plan within your Coalition – Define Milestones (Ruler)

– Get funding

– Divide tasks between appropriate activists in your Coalition

– Deliver, achieve your goals (arrive at ‘B’)

– Review, evaluate, improve (redefine ‘A’)

Let’s focus on Policy Development for a minute. We burn up a lot of time and energy reacting when we should be “pro-acting”- opposing when we should be proposing. As a means to better policy, why not invest time in your own unofficial Policy Think Tank, and make your first focus the development of policies to get what you want, before moving on to consider how to stop the other side getting what they want? I have given some suggestions in the handouts, but as a starting agenda for discussion, how about the following?:

Strategy: A Healthy Society for All

Some Policy Nuggets:

– Prevention that engages the whole community

– Parents re-empowered to develop a healthy children through a proper mixture of love, guidance and discipline.

– Education that imparts sound values and goals

– Teachers who are trained to achieve this, in partnership with parents

– Police who intercept and divert young offenders early on

– Justice systems that give rehabilitation more than they take revenge

– Health systems that do more than just react to sickness

– Workplaces that get involved in healthy working

– Laws that underpin health goals and are worthy of respect

– Faith bodies that show courage and speak unequivocally

– Media that puts truth above ratings, society’s health above self-indulgence

– Sports systems that bring out the best in behaviour

– Drug services that focus on abstinence, and

– Citizens who know the meaning of the word “Citizenship”.

In a phrase   –          “Don’t solve the drug problem – PREVENT it!”

You also need to define a Communications Policy. In your nation, where does the power lie? In Britain, much of it lies with the Civil Service (the Administration), which – unlike America – is not changed every time a new President is elected. They are enormously powerful and therefore they have to be one primary target. Again, for your nation, who are the people with influence on the decision -makers, and how can you get to them? And how should you vary your message to suit different organisations or people? Media Liaison, of which we do a great deal, is a whole subject in itself, for which I have no time – I’m glad, therefore, that Calvina has addressed this vital aspect. These are not just matters of Procedure; which message you give to whom, and when, are all matters of Internal Policy; matters which are intricately mixed with your External policies.

Your Coalition will soon find that it cannot limit itself to a narrow message (such as “Legalisation? Just Say No”). You will have to demonstrate that your message is built on a good foundation of knowledge, understanding, analysis, popular support etc, also that it has breadth of vision – it takes account of the effects on other policies, on other areas of life as a whole, and it addresses (and, hopefully, pre-empts) any arguments by others. Your coalition’s growth will be stifled if members do not freely share information and contacts; this is not as easy as it sounds – old habits of competition die reluctantly. Encourage all to take courage and be generous. After all, a coalition is like a marriage – you are united in order to achieve a common goal. You are partners, so act like partners!

 

 

* * * * * * * * * * * *

Calvina has eloquently described much of the significant negative rhetoric which is forcibly pushed into the legalisation debate, and which therefore must be a major focus in your policy development. I would like to finish my contribution to this prevention conference with one of the key positives.
A significant number of people, including many ordinary members of the public – not just the legaliser lobbyists – would prefer the young, and others, not to do drugs, but they have somehow come to believe that prevention is largely ineffective, and that “everybody’s doing it”. Even some who have a gut feeling that it is the right thing to do are still induced to see it as an honourable but futile action – a Mission Impossible.

Because the public believe this to be a fact, they reluctantly conclude that legalisation is the next best thing – a way to “Reduce Harm”. One of our greatest challenges is to overcome this “credibility gap”. If the majority of the public can come to truly believe that drug prevention works, then they will turn their back on the legalisation lobbies – no matter how many millions of dollars, or highly paid journalists they have behind them. And one of the best weapons we have – which too often is under-utilised – is the coalition.

The evidence and the argument for prevention already exists. The “Prevention Works” handout for our coalition, and of which we are already circulating 100,000 copies across the UK, is one example of this. Please feel free to use this leaflet as it stands, or to borrow sections from it. (We would be grateful if you would attribute us when doing so).So, we have the evidence and we have the argument; and our job is to get it out there where it can do some good.

Coalitions can share the load, share resources, and encourage one another to greater achievement. Just one example is the World Wide Web – and again this is an example where we can “look and learn” from the legalisers. There are literally hundreds of websites in praise of legalisation, many linking with each other. How many sites do we have? Not enough!

You do not have to pay large sums of money to establish your website. Ours, which you can find on
www.drugprevent.org.uk was designed by a university undergraduate in his spare time, and yet it was judged good enough to beat more than 600 other worldwide entries to reach the finals of the Stockholm Challenge this spring. Why don’t you look around and find a local student web enthusiast – or even a number of them, and run a competition for them, with prizes? But above all, and in all, do something, and do it now.

In closing, here is some final guidance from people wiser than I can ever hope to be. The final quote is from an unknown Chinese poet, but first we hear from Edmund Burke on why we must get together when we face threats like drug legalisation:

“When bad men combine, the good must associate; else they will fall, one by one, an unpitied sacrifice in a contemptible struggle”.

And lastly, bear in mind that the best of coalition are run by ‘Invisible Men’ (and Women!):

Go to the people, live among them, learn from them, love them, start with what they know, build on what they have; but of the best of leaders, when their task is accomplished, their work is done, the people all remark “We have done it ourselves”.
                        ____________________________________________________________

REFERENCES:

1. Center for Substance Abuse Prevention (1991) “The Future by Design”. CSAP, 5600 Fishers Lane, .Rockwall 11, Rockville, MD 20857. DHHS Pubn. No. (ADM)91-1760).

2. Lofquist W.A. (1983) “Discovering the Meaning of Prevention”. AYD Publications, Arizona. ISBN 0-913951-00-5

3. Lofquist W.A. (1991) “The Technology of Prevention Workbook”. AYD (as above). ISBN 0-913951-02-1.

4. Time magazine (1997) “.. Soros spent over $90 million..” AP wire 8/25/97.

5. Kelly G.A. (1955) “The Kelly Repertory Grid” (from ‘ Psychology of Personal Constructs’) Norton, NY).

6. Burrows L.(1998) “The Fight for the Family” Family Education Trust, Oxford. ISBN:0-906229-14-6.

 

 

Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
What price drug education? Recent reviews of the literature have suggested that drug education does not work. Peter Stoker argues that there is a way forward
It will come as no revelation to reader of this journal (Mersey Drugs Journal, 1987) that prevention (meaning primary prevention) has for some time been taking a hammering. Mere mention of it raises hackles in some and dismissive epithets in others. The hackle-raising comes from those who choose to interpret the word literally: How dare one ‘Prevent’ others from using? This is a reprehensible, even immoral, infringement of personal freedom. Empowerment, meaning free choice in the use of drugs, should he the right of every individual of whatever age. As part of this educators should stay silent on the use/non-use issue; teaching should be about drugs, not against them (O’Hare et al., 1988). The dismissive epithets emanate from those who have read a good deal of the literature available and conclude that drug use cannot he prevented.

 

Over the years that NIDA (USA) biennial household survey results have been readily accepted a,; proof of the need for harm reduction, suing for peace as the ‘War on Drugs’ crumbles. However, when the same survey started showing reductions in drug use, it was scorned as no more (or less) than a conspiracy by the American public to make prevention workers feel good. Prevention workers in the area covered by these results have every right to feel good. Whilst the ‘War’ as prosecuted by people in uniforms may well be a depressing sight, it is the ‘civilians’ in prevention work who are showing real progress. Other than this, there is the occasional reported success, for example the Germans have shown that they are good at rnore than just foot hall, but such reports are rare indeed (Nilson-Giebet, 1980,pp.20-24).
So why bother, the argument continues. If it is impractical and immoral to prevent use then switch to plan B – school the user (or potential user) so as to minimise harm, and switch the drug agencies who are ‘stuck in the outmoded abstinence model’ over to a harm reduction role, retraining them to service the user’s needs during his or her drug-using ‘career’ (Parry, 1988).
For drug agencies or drug educators world wide having primary prevention as part of their role all the above cuts at the very roots of their philosophy. But far from reacting, the response of many has been to disdain or ignore the criticism and carry on anyway. Too busy or too shy for long, sophisticated debate they have left the rostrum and the printed page to their critics. Small wonder then that the residual impression is that prevention has no case to offer.

Other factors have had their influence on current attitudes. Perhaps the most graphic example of harm reduction is in response to HIV/AIDS; few in Britain would argue against the issue of clean syringes/needles and condoms, plus advice, as part of the effort to prevent the spread of HIV infection. Merseyside has been particularly effective. Many prevention workers, including the author have thought through and accepted this logic, seeing no dichotomy between harm reduction for existing users coupled with prevention for the non-user. The argument starts (or should start) when the above, extremely justifiable, introduction of harm reduction ‘in extremis’ is opportunistically exploited as a springboard, promoting harm reduction as the educational model across the board, i.e. de-fund primary prevention and even treatment, redeploying the funds into harm reduction (Parry, 1988).

Undoubtedly one spur to this dialogue is an argument about funding priorities in a time of limited resources. Partisan argument will always emerge in this situation, but again prevention workers are leaving the field to their competitors for funds, when a more rational approach would he concerted action pressing for a general increase of funding. Meanwhile the argument against prevention proceeds by endeavouring to classify us all as drug users; your coffee beverage makes you just as much a drug user as someone else’s heroin. By this definition ‘non-drug-users are a deviant minority’. Ergo, use of all drugs should be considered normal. This is but a short step from saying drug use should be the norm.

Norm, normal, normalisation – soft, low-key words lessening the chance of hard reactions from conservative authorities. Credit must be given to liberalist campaigners such as NORML and the Drug Policy Foundation for this sophisticated approach; likewise the ‘softly, softly’ strategy adopted by EMNDR All of them eschew provocative wording and all of them speak up volubly ,and articulately.

The cause of prevention has hardly been helped by cosmetic campaigns mounted by governments who are more concerned to show that they ‘care’ than about any lasting effect on drug use. This has happened in several countries and of course Britain has received its share. Advertising screws you up.

Further, where prevention initiatives have taken place evaluation has been the last item on the budget list, or more often has not even appeared at all. Projects short of people and/or cash make a professional judgement at the planning stage as to whether an initiative is worth while, then go for it, leaving any classic proof of worth to the academics. In the case of prevention this is perhaps more understandable, if not excusable, because it is notoriously difficult to evaluate definitively anything to do with attitudes ‘and behaviour. We can rarely be sure if a behaviour changes, that it is the result of the educational initiative that is being tested, or whether other factors held sway, or whether the person concerned just changed his or her ruined (Edwards, 1984).

LACK OF PROOF

The blunt summation of all this is that there is very little solid evidence to show that prevention works.

The skills for Adolescence programme developed from the American QUEST programme was subjected to evaluation in seven schools in 1988 by workers from Christchurch College, Canterbury (Parsons et al., 1988). It won praise for reducing truancy, improving class discipline and performance, and strengthening pupil-teacher and school-parent relationships. But when it came to appraising drug, use prevalence, before and after, the researchers ducked the question, making superficial remarks such as ‘How can you measure it ?’ and thus another opportunity for proper evaluation was lost.

The PRIDE organisation in America (Parent’s Resource Institute for Drug Education) has plenty to be proud about. Its 1991 conference, the fourteenth, attracted almost 7000 attendees, youth and adult, and nearly 300 workshops were held during the week, involving delegates from over 80 countries. But for an organisation boasting over 60 full-time staff, the resources applied to evaluation are regrettably slight; Al the more surprising when considering that the PRIDE President is a University of Georgia professor (of physiology). Perhaps the single most tangible evaluation tool PRIDE has is a confidential questionnaire (though its original raison d’etre was to awaken and galvanise communities previously unaware or in denial). This questionnaire has been run now for over 8 years and respondents run into millions; in one month alone (October 1987) 450 000 students in PRIDE’s home state of Georgia completed the survey.

Co-author and coordinator of the computer analysis of these questionnaires is Ronald D. Adams, another professor (of education), this time at Western Kentucky University. His location may explain why one of PRIDE’s most detailed evaluations – a 5-year longitudinal study – is based in Bowling Green, Western Kentucky (1989). Graphs of usage of various substances and various school grades almost all show sustained reduction in the 5-year period. A specimen graph is given as Figure 1. As is usual with most statistics there is more than one way of viewing the results. For example, use of cannabis by twelfth graders may have dropped from 45 per cent to 30 per cent (= success?) but it is also true that even after 5 years of this programme 30 per cent are still using (= failure?) – depends where you stand! Similar results are described in a more recent PRIDE newsletter (Summer, 1990) concerning 30 schools in California and Oregon. A 5 year study of 4000 students showed reduction in cannabis and tobacco use, but no reduction in drinking (Ellickson and Bell, 1990).

A BRITISH INTERVENTION/PREVENTION STRATEGY

The author’s practical experience with a west London drug agency is similar to that with many agencies in the work done with users, their families and friends: non-judgemental and not insisting on abstinence as a condition of attending, greater emphasis placed on the user appraising his or her own life and making informed choices, having considered actions and consequences. Other similarities exist in much of the education, training and HIV/AIDS work in schools and community. Harm reduction guidance/assistance for known users and also those perceived to he at risk is and always has been included, in work over more than 8 years.

Meanwhile self-funded study tours by the author to the USA (several) and Hong Kong (once) augmented desk study of prevention programmes operating in many countries. Among several good contenders the Illinois Teen Institute’s I 5-year experience of weeklong experiential training camps looked particularly promising, together with the PRIDE youth programme and Youth to Youth (Columbus, Ohio). The author’s wife and professional colleague created this international research and developed a prevention programme appropriate to the British culture, with the aim of empowering youth to stay drug, abuse free and maybe help others to achieve the same. In 1988 the first home-grown version was launched. In 1989 we saw a repeat with guest delegates from Sweden, Switzerland, Portugal and America; camps of 1990 and 1991 have been held with a sprinkling of international youth. The programme was named TEENEX, meaning ‘teen experiential’ learning.

Attendees at the camp are predominantly non-users but with a small proportion of casual users and other youngsters at risk in some way or other, the intention being to facilitate a positive peer environment to the benefit of all. In addition to the annual camp there are evening meetings and, when funds permit, residential weekends.

Besides TEENEX, another innovative project introduced has been TRIBES, a cooperative learning process 5. applicable to primary and secondary schools and used for many years in several American states, with multiple benefits. Other initiatives have included Kangaroo Creek Gang, a video-based training programme currently in use in every primary school in Australia, and utilisation of the Life Education Bus (also Australian based) for which funding comes from TVAM and the Dire Straits rock band.

The striking aspect in comparing contributions by hundreds of international delegates at American conferences with those of the 400 or so delegates in Hong Kong (very few of whom were American) was the unity of commitment to prevention and the broad similarity of initiatives. Another commonality was the universal absence of British delegates! Prevention workers would say that this shows that Britain is behind most countries; doubtless hardened xenophobes would say it 7. shows Britain is ahead, and it’s everyone else who is out of step.

Xenophobia, and in particular Americophobia, is a frequent facet of criticism of prevention, sometimes matching the hysteria it seeks to condemn (011are, 1988). The American political and media rhetoric does of course set itself up for pillory but it is no more representative of the main body of serious drugs work than is the case in this country. Likewise some American drugs workers come across with almost missionary zeal, but to discount the message because of some of the messengers is either a mistake or a deliberate misconstruction.

DOING THE HOMEWORK BETTER

If prevention is to sway the sceptics and justify a firm future then several specific actions are indicated:

1. More money now into longitudinal studies. The British Government’s new Central Drugs Prevention Unit could usefully involve itself in this.
 
2. Better collation of existing research world wide, published as The Case for Prevention, in plain words.

3. Critical assessment of which schemes work, which don’t.

4. Collation of ancillary research justifying prevention: work by those such as Dr Robert Gilkeson on the harm caused by even moderate use of cannabis; Dr Harith Swadi’s (1988) work on peer influence and family factors; Stoker and Swadi’s (1990) on the same topic; Botvin’s (1983) research on smoking prevention work and the use of lifeskills training.

5. Recognition that harm reduction has a place, but put it in its place, and in proportion to prevention. Educators, youth workers etc. need to retain the ‘I personally don’t recommend you using because’ message alongside harm reduction; staying silent on prevention would be taken by even more youth as a tacit message that it’s okay to do drugs so long as you use the least risky method.

6. Drop the rhetoric about ‘War on Drugs’ which backfires all too often. Apart from the inflammatory effect, if one talks of war people expect a victory in a finite period, and that isn’t going to happen. What, we have with drugs is more like the contest between the Dutch and the sea. The sea continually seeks to ~ erode the land, whilst the Dutch continually prevent erosion and sometimes even achieve substantial reclamation, but they will never be able to let up.

Much more concentrated prevention work: it must he recognised that a little here and there is at best useless. To succeed, prevention has to be substantial and sustained Prevention is riot alone in needing evaluation evidence to support its case. Any measurement of changing, behaviours around harm reduction is fraught with all the same difficulties. The struggle to change behaviour is just as tough. Review of British syringe exchange schemes by Goldsmiths showed that despite all the efforts over a third of clients using the exchanges were still sharing (Stimson et at., 1988). Behaviour among those not patronising the exchanges is unlikely to he more careful. Such statistics are of course of no comfort to anyone, but they strengthen the resolve of prevention workers to continue to strive to reduce the number of people reaching such straits.

A note of caution here: the majority of critiques of drug education programmes have themselves been criticised as being inadequately rigorous (Goodstadt 1980). Scrutinise everything, including the scrutineers! Prevention workers may not realise it but they owe harm reductionists and other sceptics a debt of gratitude. In forcing a more rigorous assessment of prevention programmes (what works and what doesn’t) a much more potent bran(] of prevention should be developed.

Above all there is a need to be clear that prevention is being chosen not merely to salve some moral conscience but because it is a rational, proven and effective process.

This article is based on a paper presented to the PRIDE International Conference at Atlanta 1988, Georgia. Peter Stokes at the time of writing was a project worker with a west London drug/alcohol agency. He is now the director of the National Drug Prevention Alliance; PO Box 594, Slough, SL1 1AA.

REFERENCES

Adams, R. D. (1989). From the computer: Bowling Green yields marijuana findings in five-year case study of PRIDE community plan. PRIDE Quarterly, Summer.

Botvin, G. J. (1983). Prevention of adolescent substance abuse through the development of personal and social competence. In: Glynn, T, J., Leukefeld, C. G. and Ludford, J. P. (Eds). Preventing Adolescent Drug Abuse: Intervention Strategies, pp. 115-140. Department of Health and Human Services, Maryland, USA.

Dorn, N. (1987). Minimisation of harm: a U-curve theory. Druglink, March/April.

Edwards, G. (1984). Addiction: a challenge to society. New Society, 25th October.

Ellickson and Bell (1990). Prevention programmes effective in school setting. PRIDE Quarterly, Summer.
 
Goodstadt, M. S. (1980). Drug education – a turn-on or a turn-off? Journal of Drug Education, 10.

Nilson-Giebel, M. (1980). Peer groups help prevent dependence among youth in Federal Republic of Germany. International Journal of Health Education, 23,20-24.

O’Hare, P. A. (1988). Drug Education: the American way. Mersey Drugs Journal, May/June.

O’Hare, P.A, Clements, 1. and Cohen, J. (1988). Drug Education: A Basis for Reform. International Conference on Drug Policy Reform, Maryland, USA.

Parry, A. (1988). Unpublished presentation to NW Thames Regional Health Authority Drug Workers Seminar, 15th September.

Parsons, C. et al. ( 1988). Food for thought. (Evaluation Unit, Christchurch College, Canterbury). Monitor (TACADE) No. 78, Autumn.

Stimson, G. Donoghoe, M., Alldrit, L. and Dolan, K. (1988). Syringe exchange 2 – the clients. Druglink, July/August, 8-9.

Stoker, A. and Swadi, H. (1990). Perceived family relationships in drug-using adolescents. Drug and Alcohol Dependence, 25, 293-297.

Swadi, H. and Zeitlin, H. (1988). Peer influence and adolescent substance abuse: a promising side? Journal of Addiction, 15 3-15 7.

 

 

 

 

Source: Mersey Drug Journal 1987
Filed under: Prevention (Papers) :
Yes, Peter Stoker, National Drug Prevention Alliance versus
No, Danny Kushlick, Drug law reform campaigner
Saturday October 2, 1999
The Guardian

Dear Peter,

Tony Blair’s call for mandatory drug testing for people arrested for criminal offences Is Me more than cynical rhetoric aimed at pandering to the law and order lobby. This is policy formation on the hoot there has been no consultation with practitioners or government departmental specialists to assess the effectiveness or repercussions of pursuing this initiative.

Of course there is a clear link between illegal drug use and acquisitive crime. But the under lying reason for this is the high price of illegal drugs on the unregulated market. Lets not forget that there is little if any property crme associated with tobacco addiction. Why? Purely because the price is low.

Suddenly the talk is of a ‘War on drugs”. Why no ‘War on alcohol”, by far the most important precursor to violent offending? Or a war on tobacco, by far the biggest killer?

It seems as if Tony Blairris marking his political territory like a tom cat. Apart from causing a stink, this will do nothing to address the underlying reasons for drug misuse that he claims others have ducked for so long.

What problematic illegal drug users need and want is access to effective treatment options before their offending even begins. This latest initiative flies in the face of more progressive measures that this government has been instrumental in developing up to now.
Yours sincerely, Danny Kushlick Director, Transform: The Campaign for an Effective Drug Policy

Dear Danny,

Conference rhetoric or no, drug misuse and related crime needs to move up the agenda. Mention of mandatory testing is, of course, akin to waving a red rag at a bull, but it can have a positive side: it may give more heroin and cocaine users a helpful shove into intervention or treatment But it follows, of course, that these services must be in place now.

Even If it were true and it isn’t that all drug crime is acquisitive, relaxing drug laws would not necessarily bring drugs within economic reach. Many legalisers foresee heavy taxation and, of course, changes in the law don’t increase the personal income of users. Many would still end up funding their lifestyles with crime.

You ask where the “war” on tobacco and alcohol has been. I ask: where have you been if you haven’t noticed the massive health promotion campaigns? And Labour are hardly monopolising the drug platform, as you imply: senior Tory and Lib Dem politicians alike have set out their stalls over the fast month. All party support for the national strategy continues.

That strategy calls for more treatment resources, as you do. Me, too but if you really want to reduce offending, prevention is the only way forward. Sadly, that notion gets abused as much as drugs do. Yours sincerely,
Peter Stoker Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance

Dear Peter,

I’m pleased to hear that you support the call for more treatment services. In my area, Avon, dependent users have to wait a year for a detox bed or a rehab place which means that those people who want help are effectively being denied it.

There are more than 250,000 dependent illegal drug users in the UK right now, and they are responsible for

Between a third and a half of all property crime. There are 12m dependent tobacco users and they’re responsible for none of it.

Our organisation Is not calling for a relaxation of the drug laws. Quite the opposite: the illegal drug market is the most “relaxed” and lucrative on the planet. It constitutes 8% of international trade and is subject to no control or regulation whatsoever. Transform would like to see this trade brought back into a regulated framework where it can be controlled through prescription and licensing.

There’s little we can do to “prevent” the activities of the millions of people already using and misusing drugs in the UK. However, we can make sure that those who do use drugs cause as few problems as possible for those who do not. We could begin by making free treatment available immediately for anyone with a legal or illegal drug problem and reallocating resources from the criminal justice budget towards social initiatives. Or we could just “shove”dependenttusers into non existent programmes. Yours sincerely, Danny

Dear Danny,

Yes, waiting lists for treatment are too long but they’d be an awful lot longer if we were to swallow your notion. “Regulating” supply means legalising or decrminalising the stuff, no matter how you play with words. This would mean a significant relaxation of the law, which would boost the use of dangerous drugs. The experience of every country which has tried this including Holland has been negative enough to provoke massive back pedalling.

Sweden had a major problem, and, at first, it tried to “regulate” it. They relaxed the laws, gave out harm reduction advice and the like only to find a major escalation of use and attendant problems. Then they switched to firmer laws, much better prevention resources, a range of social initiatives and mandatory intervention and treatment. The prevalence of drug misuse in Sweden is now a fraction of ours.

I don’t subscribe to the view that punishment should be the sole response to any crime, but we do need a system which intercepts and improves the situation. Your system merely appeases by accommodating the user at the expense of everyone else.
Yours sincerely, Peter

Dear Peter,

The illegal drugs market is worth a billion dollars a day and is currently controlled and regulated by organised crime. Yes, Peter, Transform campaigns ultimately for legalisation as the best way to regulate and control the drugs market. The average age of heroin users in the Netherlands is 39 and rising. In the UK its 26 and failing. Enough said?

The Blair Straw initiative to drug test people arrested for criminal offences flies in the face of the governments own studies, one of which showed that £1 spent on treatment saves £3 in criminal justice costs. One can only wonder how refusing bail fits in with this evidence. Liberty, the civil liberties group, has also suggested that the idea may breach the European Convention on Human Rights.

Let us hope that Mr Blair’s speech was intended as Daily Mail fodder only. God forbid that he should actually attempt to put it into practice. In the US they don’t do rhetoric; acting “tough on drugs” there has helped raise the prison population to nearly 2 million. One in 35 adults in the land of the free are either in prison, on probation or on parole.

Transform’s millennium prediction is that this kind of mandatory drug testing will mean more prisoners, less treatment,’ more social exclusion, less freedom and little reduction in crime. How about a drug policy that’s tough on organised crime, not tough on socially deprived individuals?
Yours sincerely, Danny

Dear Danny,

It seems, after all, that the kind of treatment you are proposing for illegal drug misusers is to treat them with impunity. If they steal to buy drugs this is, you say, because they are socially deprived. Ergo, one crime is the justification for another. And your proposal for beating crime is to legalise it.

I’ll join you in tackling social injustice, and in pressing for more and better drug services, but all our research

and observation, inter nationally, shows your stance on drug laws to be profoundly mistaken. We don’t want to regulate the misuse of drugs, we want to minimise it whether the drug is illegal or not. Findings to date argue for a sensitive and flexible mix of justice systems, appropriate interventions (because not every user is an addict) and community wide prevention.

The rights and responsibilities of drug misusers should be balanced against those of non users, who rarely get a mention but are often the consequential victims.

Whether these latest ideas of mandatory testing and the withholding of bail will prove a bridge too far will become clear with time. But they do not invalidate the general strategic approach, which anyone genuinely interested in improving the situation for all including the drug misusers should support.
Yours, Peter

Source: Society Guardian.co.uk Guardian Newspapers Limited , Saturday October 2, 1999

 

 

Filed under: Legal Sector :
Scientific Research and Peer-Approved Trials Essential

SUMMARY:
Cannabis as grown would not meet the EU Rules’ for medical acceptability; UK is a signatory to these. It has already been rejected by several authorities, including the BMA. In particular, smoking as a means of delivery has been universally rejected. Extracts are under trial, but experience with the extract so far approved has been mixed; most doctors only use it as a last resort. Interest in cannabis comes in part from the genuinely ill, expectations having been raised by ‘recreational use’ lobbyists. Political or treatment expediencies must not compromise medical standards for safety and efficacy.

E.U. Rules [1] set out various criteria for the acceptance of a drug for medical use, these include:
1. All active ingredients have to be identified and their chemistry determined. They have to be tested for purity with limits set for all impurities including pesticides, microbes & fungi and their products. These tests have to be validated and reproduced if necessary in an official laboratory.
The cannabis plant contains some 400 chemicals, a multiplicity of ingredients that vary with habitat – impossible to standardise and often contaminated with microbes, fungi or pesticides.[2]
2. Animal testing will include information on fertility, embryo toxicity, immuno-toxicity, mutagenic and carcinogenic potential. Risks to humans, especially pregnant women and lactating mothers, will be evaluated.
Cannabis has been shown to reduce sperm production.[3] Babies born to cannabis-using mothers are smaller, have learning and behavioural problems and are 10 times more likely to develop one form of leukaemia.[4] The immune system is impaired.[5] Smoking herbal cannabis results in the inhalation of three times as much tar as from a tobacco cigarette.[6]
3. Adequate safety and efficacy trials must be carried out. They must state the method of administration and report on the results from different groups, i.e. healthy volunteers, patients, special groups of the elderly, people with liver and kidney problems and pregnant women. Adverse drug reactions (ADR) have to be stated and include any effects on driving or operating machinery.
Presumably it is envisaged that cannabis would be smoked. No medicine prescribed today is smoked. Concentration, motor.coordination and memory are all badly affected.[7] Changes in the brain have been observed[8] and U.S.A. clinics are now coping with more cases of psychosis caused by cannabis than by any other drug. It is essential to note that the content of THC (Tetrahydrocannabinol – the psychoactive ingredient in cannabis) is on average ten times higher than it was in the 1960s.[9] The fat.soluble THC lingers in the body for weeks [10] and the ability to drive safely is impaired for at least 24 hours after smoking cannabis. [11] Although ten times as many people use alcohol, cannabis is implicated in a similar number of road accidents. [12]
4. The drug must be accepted by qualified experts. Their detailed reports need to take account of all the relevant scientific literature and the potential of the drug to cause dependence.
There are numerous accounts of both psychological and physical dependencies in cannabis use. [13] Some 77000 people are admitted annually to hospitals in U.S.A for cannabis dependence, 8000 of them as emergencies. [14] To date there are over 12000 scientific publications relating to cannabis. [15]
THC has already undergone all the medical tests. It is available on prescription in tablet form for the relief of nausea from chemotherapy and appetite stimulation in AIDS patients. However Marinol (USA) and Nabilone (UK), synthetic forms of THC and identical in action to it, are not the first drugs of choice among oncologists in Washington D.C. ranking only 9th in the treatment of mild nausea and 6th for more severe nausea. [16] The warning on nabilone reads:
“THC encourages both physical and psychological dependence and is highly abusable. It causes mood changes, loss of memory, psychoses, impairment of co-ordination and perception, and complicates pregnancy”.
Other Cannabinoids: Cannabis contains around 60 cannabinoids that are unique to the plant. Some of these could be similarly extracted, purified and tested for safety and efficacy. In the report ‘Therapeutic Uses Of Cannabis’ (BMA, 1997) the British Medical Association said, “It is considered here that cannabis is unsuitable for medical use. Such use should be confined to known dosages of pure or synthetic cannabinoids given singly or sometimes in combination”

WHAT THE EXPERTS HAVE SAID
Dr. Eric Voth MD, FACP (Chairman of the International Drug Strategy Institute) said in a letter to the editor of the New England Journal of Medicine (Jan 1997),

“Long term effects aside, contaminants, purity, standardisation of dose etc are all reasons to not use an impure herb as a medicine. Whether terminal or not, should we support smoking Foxglove plant to obtain Digoxin for heart failure, or Yew tree bark to obtain Taxol for breast cancer? If so, then supporters of smoked marijuana better be ready to support smoking tobacco for weight control and anxiety. We must have compassion for the sick and suffering and we must offer them reliable and quality medicine, not crude substances that threaten their well being”
Glaucoma: The pressure in the eye caused by this condition can be reduced by smoking cannabis but Professor Keith Green, Director of Ophthalmic Research at the Medical College of Georgia said some 6 ‘joints’ a day would be required, rendering the patient effectively ‘stoned’ and incapable of useful activities.
Multiple Sclerosis: Dr. Donald Silberg, Chief of Neurology, Pennsylvania school of Medicine said, “I have not found any legitimate or scientific works which show that marijuana is medically effective in treating Multiple Sclerosis or spasticity. The use of marijuana especially for long-term treatment would be worse than the illness itself”

DOES THE PUBLIC REALLY WANT THIS?

Nov 1996: Proposition 200 permitted physicians in Arizona to prescribe pure marijuana with no limitation on the age of the patient or disorder involved.

Jan 1997: A public opinion poll revealed that 85% of registered voters believed that proposition 200 should be changed and 60% wanted it repealed, 70% said it gave children the impression that drugs are OK for recreational use. [17]

HOW DID THE CAMPAIGN GET STARTED?

In 1979: Keith Stroup, an American pot-using lawyer, and the then head of NORML (National Organisation for Reform of Marijuana Laws) said, “We will use the medical marijuana argument as a red herring to give pot a good name.” [18]

Early 1990s Richie Cowan, Stroup’s successor at NORML, echoed him when he said, “Medical marijuana is our strongest suit. It is our point of leverage which will move us toward the legalisation of marijuana for personal use.” [19]

A LAST WORD FROM DR. ERIC VOTH

“We cannot by-pass the usual safety and efficacy process of the FDA (Food and Drugs Administration) because of the hue and cry of a self-preserving drug culture which seeks to add medicinal applications of marijuana, mixed messages of legalisation of illegal drugs, harm reduction and tolerance of drug use.” [20]

REFERENCES

1. The Rules Governing Medicinal Products in the European Union, Vols 2A & 2B. Europe Publications, Luxembourg, 1998.
2. Jenike MA. Drug Abuse. In Rubenstein E, Federman DD (eds) Scientific American Medicine, Inc. 1993. Therapeutic Uses of Cannabis, BMA, 1997.
3. Issidorides MR. Observations in chronic hashish users. In Nahas GG & Paton WDM (Eds). Marijuana: Biological Effects &c. 1979. Stephanis CN & Issidorides MR. Cellular effects of chronic cannabis use in man. In Nahas GG & Paton WDM (Eds), Marijuana: Chemistry, Biochemistry and Cellular Effects. 1976. Nahas GG and Paton WDM (Eds). Marijuana: Biological Effects, Analysis, Metabolism, Cellular Responses, Reproduction and Brain. Pergamon, NY, 1979.
4. Hingson R, Alpert JJ, Day N et al. Effects of maternal drinking and marijuana use on foetal growth and development. Paediatrics. 1982. Quas QH, Mariano E, Milman DH et al. Abnormalities in offspring associated with prenatal marijuana exposure. Dev. Pharm. Thera. 1985. Day NL, Richardson GA, Goldschmidt L et al. Effect of prenatal marijuana exposure on the cognitive development of offspring at age three. Neurotox. Teratol. 1994. Fried PA & Watkinson B. 36 and 48 month neurobehavioral follow up of children prenatally exposed to marijuana, cigarettes and alcohol. Developmental & Behavioral Pediatrics,1990. Robinson LL, Buchley JD, Daigle AE et al. Maternal drug use and risk of childhood non-lymphoblastic leukaemia among offspring: An epidemiological investigation implicating marijuana. Cancer. 1989. Ward NI et al. factors in human foetal development. Jour. Nutrit. Med. 1990.
5. Cabral GA. Marijuana decreases macrophage anti-viral and anti-tumour activities. Advances in Biosciences,
80. 1991. Cabral GA & Vasquez R. Delta-9-tetrahydrocannabinol suppresses macrophage extrinsic anti-herpes virus activity. Proc. Exper. Biol. Med. 1992. Cabral GA et al. Proc. Soc. Exper. Med. Biol. 1986. Gross G, Roussaki A, Ikenberg H & Drees N. Genital warts do not respond to systemic recombinant interferon alfa-2 treatment during cannabis consumption. Dermatologia. 1991. Leuchtenberger C. Effects of marijuana smoke on cellular biochemistry, utilising in vitro test systems. Adverse health and behavioural consequences of cannabis use. Addiction Research Foundation Press. Toronto, Canada. 1982. Morahan et al. Effects of cannabinoids on host resistance to Listeria monocytogenes and Herpes simplex virus. Infect. Immunol. 23. 1979. Munson & Fehr. Immunological effects of cannabis. Adverse health and behavioural consequences of cannabis use. Addiction Research Foundation Press. Toronto, Canada. 1982. Polen MR et al. Health care use by frequent marijuana smokers who do not use tobacco. Western Jour. Med. 158. 1993. Specter S, Lancz G, Djev J et al. Advances in Exper. Med. Biol. 1991. Zimmerman AM & Raj AY. Influences of cannabinoids on somatic cells in vivo. Pharmacology 21. 1980.
6. Therapeutic Uses of Cannabis, BMA, 1997. Broom JW et al. Respiratory effects of non-tobacco cigarettes. BMJ, 1987. Caplan GA, Brigham BA. Marijuana smoking and carcinoma of the tongue. Cancer. 1990. Donald PJ. Marijuana and upper respiratory tract malignancy in young patients. Adv. Exp. Med. Biol. 1991. Ferguson RP, Hasson J & Walker S. Metastasic lung cancer in a young marijuana smoker. JAMA. 1989. Marijuana and Health. National Academy of Sciences, Institute of Medicine Report. Washington DC. 1982. Marijuana Rescheduling Petition by NORML Denied by DEA. Federal Register Vol. 54, No 249. 29 Dec 1989. Polen MR et al. Health care use by frequent marijuana smokers who do not use tobacco. Western Jour. Med. 158. 1993. Schwartz RH. American Journ. Dis. Child. 143(6); p 644. 1989. Tashkin DP et al. Respiratory symptoms and lung function in habitual smokers of marijuana alone, smokers of marijuana and tobacco, smokers of tobacco alone and non-smokers. American Review of Respiratory Diseases. 1987. Tashkin DP et al. Longitudinal changes in respiratory systems and lung function in non-smokers, tobacco smokers and heavy habitual smokers of marijuana with or without tobacco. An International Research Report. Proceedings of the Melbourne Symposium on Cannabis, September 1987 (see also Amer. Review of Respiratory Diseases, 1987). Taylor FM. Marijuana as a potential respiratory tract carcinogen: A retrospective analysis of a community hospital population. Southern Med. Jour. 1988. Tennant FS, Guerry RL & Henderson RL. Histopathological & clinical abnormalities of the respiratory system in chronic hashish smokers. Subst. Alcohol Actions Misuse. 1980 Wengen DF. Marijuana and malignant tumours of the upper aerodigestive tract in young patients: On the risk assessment of marijuana. Laryngorhinotologie. 1993.
7. Polen MR et al. Health care use by frequent marijuana smokers who do not use tobacco. Western Jour. Med.158. 1993. Schwartz RH. Persistent impairment of short-term memory associated with heavy marijuana use.Committees of Correspondence – Drug Prevention Newsletter. June 1990. Solowij N, Michie PT & Fox AM Differential impairments of selective attention due to frequency and duration of Cannabis use. Biol. Psychiatry1995. Solowij N. Do cognitive impairments recover following cessation of Cannabis use? Life Sciences Vol. 56. 1995. Varma VK, Malhotra AK, Dang R, et al. Cannabis and cognitive functions: a prospective study. Drug Alcohol Depend. 1988.
8. Devane WA et al. Isolation and structure of a brain constituent that binds to the cannabmoid receptor. Science.1992. Lex BW, Griffin ML, et al. Alcohol, marijuana and mood status in young women. International Journal of the Addictions. 1989. Mathew RJ. Middle cerebral artery velocity during upright posture after marijuana smoking. Acta Psych. Scand. 1992. Nahas GG. Historical outlook of the psychopathology of Cannabis. In Cannabis: Physiopathology, Epidemiology, Detection. CRC Press, 1993. Nahas G & Latour C. The human toxicity of marijuana. The Medical Journal of Australia. 1992.
9. Information supplied by the US Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA).
10. Therapeutic Uses of Cannabis, BMA, 1997. See also ref. 6.
11. Leirer VO & Yesavage JA. Marijuana carry-over effects on aircraft pilot performance. Aviation Space & Environmental Medicine. 1991.
12. Soderstrom CA, Tniffillis AL et al. Marijuana and alcohol use among 1023 trauma patients: A prospective study. Arch. Surg. Vol.123, June. 1988.
13. Information supplied on the use of MARINOL by Roxane Laboratories Inc., 1989 revision. Aceto MD et al. Cannabinoid-precipitated withdrawal by a selective antagonist SR141716A. European Journal of Pharmacology. 1995. Adams IB and Martin BR. Cannabis: Pharmacology and Toxicology in Animals and Humans. Journal of Addiction. Vol. 91. 1996. Anthony JC and Helger JE.Syndromes of drug abuse and dependence. In Roberts and Regine (Eds) Psychiatric Disorders in America. New York Free Press — Macmillan. 1991. Compton DR, Dewey WL & Martin BR. Cannabis dependence and tolerance production. Advances in Alcohol & Substance Abuse. 1990. Compton DR et al. Cannabinoid structure-activity relationships: correlation of receptor binding and in vivo activities. Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics. 1993 De Fonseca FR, Camera MRA et al. Activation of corticotropin-releasing factor in the limbic system during cannabinoid withdrawal. Science. 1997. Devane WA et al. Determination and characterisation of a cannabinoid receptor in rat brain. Molecular Pharmacology. 1988 Devane WA et al. Isolation and structure of a brain constituent that binds to the cannabinoid receptor. Science. 1992. Gold MS. Marijuana. Plenum Medical Book Company, New York. 1989. Howlett AC et al. The cannabinoid receptor: biochemical, anatomical and behavioural charactenisation. Trends in Neuroscience. 1990. Jones. Cannabis tolerance and dependence. In Fehr KO and Kalant H (Eds) Adverse Health and Behavioural Consequences of Cannabis Use. Addiction Research Foundation, Toronto. 1982. Kaplan HB, Martin SS et al. Escalation of marijuana use: Application of a general theory of deviant behaviour. Jour. Health & Social Behaviour. 1986. Kaufman E et al. Committee on Drug Abuse of the Council on Psychiatric Services. Position Statement on psychoactive substance use and dependence: update on marijuana and cocaine. American Journal of Psychiatry. 1987. Miller NS and Gold MS. The diagnosis of marijuana (cannabis) dependence. Jour. Subst. Abuse Treatment. 1989. Miller NS, Gold MS & Pottash AC. A 12-step treatment approach for marijuana (cannabis) dependence. Jour. Substance Abuse Treatment. 1989. National Drug & Alcohol Research Centre of Australia Report. August 1997. Poulton et al. New Zealand Medical Journal. Vol.110. 1997. Schuster CR. Alaskans for Drug-free Youth Newsletter. Winter, 1993/94. Schwartz RH. Marijuana: an overview. Pediatric Clinics of North America. 1987. Tanda G, Pontieri FE & Di Chiara G. Cannabinoid and heroin activation of mesolimbic dopamine transmission by a common m1 opioid receptor mechanism. Science. 1997. Tson et al. Physical withdrawal in rats tolerant to delta-9-THC precipitated by a cannabinoid receptor antagonist. European Journal of Pharmacology. 1995.
14. Hart RH. Bitter Grass. Mentor Press, Kansas, USA2.
15. Mississippi University Library.
16. Bonner R. Marijuana Rescheduling Petitions 57. Federal Register 1992, 10499-10508.
17. Public Opinion Poll January 27-31, 1997 taken by Dr Bruce Merrill, Prof. of Mass Communications & Director Medical Research Center, Walter Cronkite School, Arizona State University.
18. K. Stroup (Director of NORML) in an address to audience at Emory University, 1979.
19. Video of Drug Culture Conference celebrating 50th Anniversary of the discovery of LSD, April
1993. Sponsored by NORML and others, San Francisco.
20. Voth EA, MD, International Drug Strategy Institute Position Paper. Medical Applications of Marijuana, 1995.

 

Filed under: Law (Papers) :

By Erika Miles Edwards


South Boston is a close-knit community of 3 square miles and 30,000 people. It’s the kind of place where everyone knows everyone else, and gossip, good or bad, spreads like wildfire.South Boston also is a community with a significant heroin problem. In the past three years alone, 125 young people from South Boston aged 17-24 have died from using heroin. An estimated five to ten times as many have overdosed — some several times — but lived. The community is on the front lines of an epidemic of heroin use among young adults in the greater Boston area, where the drug is $4 a bag and so potent that it can be snorted instead of injected. Heroin overdoses are one of the leading causes of death among young adults in the region.

People in communities that lose children to tragic circumstances tend to bond together, and South Boston is no exception. In response to the crisis, a group of 10 mothers with children addicted to heroin formed the South Boston Family Resource Center and started a 24-hour hotline for families who need help. The group finds treatment for those who want it, even driving people to their first appointment. For many young adults, they are a lifeline.

Strange Remedy

Sometimes crises bear solutions that, under any other circumstance, would seem strange. In the case of the mothers of the South Boston Family Resource Center, that solution came in the form of the Dorchester Drug Court, founded by Judge Robert Ziemian, presiding justice of the South Boston District Court, with help from the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation.

The drug court is a collaborative process designed to help addicted individuals facing criminal charges get through treatment, a process that can take 15 months or more. Participants start out in detox, and then go to residential treatment for a minimum of six months. When they’re ready, they move to outpatient treatment, then relapse prevention, before being left unsupervised. Then, they are on their own, their criminal charges erased.

Drug-court participants are motivated through the system with sanctions, drug testing, encouragement, and support. Most adult drug-court clients are severely addicted, with long histories in the criminal-justice and social-service systems.

“If you think someone should be in jail, that’s who we want in drug court, because we know drug court keeps people in treatment,” said Ziemian. “Most people have setbacks, but from our experience, we know when those are going to occur. We’re watching them, and we’re encouraging them to succeed.”

After Ziemian started his drug court in 1995, word spread quickly of this place where people with criminal records were getting treatment and leaving clean and sober. He soon was approached by a mother in South Boston, asking him what he could do to help stem the tide of heroin overdoses.

“We normally work with hardened addicts,” said Ziemian. “They’re older, and have had a longer history with substance abuse. It’s easier to convince them that they need treatment. But we had to do something to help these kids. We needed to stop the overdosing before another death occurred.”

Mothers of children at risk of overdoses received letters from the probation.office, inviting them to discuss solutions. The result: The women decided to apply for restraining orders against their heroin-addicted kids. Since a child breaking a restraining order is subject to criminal charges, the parents reasoned, these young adults would get connected to the criminal-justice system and be supervised in the South Boston Drug Court, receiving life-saving treatment in the process.

Not surprisingly, word of the solution spread like wildfire throughout South Boston. Even with a shortage of resources, the court has produced dramatic results. “One of the things we’ve learned about drug court is that you can usually coerce someone into treatment with the threat of jail or brief incarceration,” Ziemian said. “We and the parents have a chance to get through to them.” Notably, not a single person under active supervision of the drug court has died of a drug overdose.

Building on History

For years, America has fought an expensive war against drugs, using tactics ranging from extensive eradication efforts to lengthy periods of incarceration. In 1989, a judge in Miami dared to try something different, offering people with criminal cases treatment instead of incarceration and, in doing so, created the nation’s first drug court.

Around the same time, Ziemian returned to Massachusetts from Operation Desert Storm. Assigned to the Dorchester District Court in South Boston, he processed cases involving guns and drugs, and gained a reputation for sentencing criminal defendants to lengthy periods of incarceration.

Ziemian’s first impressions of drug courts were less than positive. “I went to a workshop about it at a bar association meeting, and I thought the guy was out of his mind,” he recalled. But Ziemian was urged by the Boston Coalition Against Drugs and Violence and by Join Together to look into the concept. A turning point was when Ziemian went to Miami to see the first drug court in action.

“For those familiar with court proceedings, drug courts are very different,” said Ziemian. “You really have to go, watch what happens, talk about it afterwards. But once you’ve seen it in action, it all makes sense.”

Today, Ziemian is the driving force behind the development of more than 30 drug courts in Massachusetts, Connecticut, Maine, New Hampshire, and Rhode Island. His Dorchester drug court is a model recognized by the National Association of Drug Court Professionals.

Each drug court develops differently, but in Massachusetts and throughout New England, many follow Ziemian’s model — with his assistance. The process starts with the support of a district’s presiding judge, who brings the other justices on board. Ziemian then meets with the justices and the clerks, probation officers, lawyers, treatment providers, and public-health officials who need to work together to make the drug court succeed.

Over objections heard from every drug court he has ever established, Ziemian sets the first drug-court date for as soon after the initial meeting as possible; the only way to learn is to do, he believes. Cases stay in their courts of origin, which forces teams in those regions to work together to come up with solutions. Every probation officer, for example, has to learn how to work with serious drug offenders and treat substance use disorders holistically, coach people through treatment, even find them treatment slots.

Strong Results, But a Struggle for Funding

But do drug courts work? Research shows that addiction treatment significantly reduces drug use, crime, and additional medical problems. Drug courts specifically reduce recidivism, or re-entry into the criminal-justice system, which saves states significant amounts of money. Nationally, incarceration costs at least $20,000 annually per person, whereas drug court costs about $4,000. Additionally, one study found that the Lackawanna Drug Court in upstate New York State saved over $2.1 million annually in public assistance, foster care, substance-free births, and child support.

Despite widespread support within the criminal-justice system, however, Ziemian and his drug-court colleagues struggle for financial stability. The Massachusetts state legislature has never provided line-item funding for drug courts, so the state’s drug courts run on skeleton crews of committed lawyers, justices, and probation officers. Ziemian has received federal grant funding to hire a coordinator that he shares with other regional courts, but worries about what he will do when that support runs out.

“Drug courts have a lot of moving pieces — many more than regular courts,” said Ziemian. “People are with us for much longer than people with other types of sentences. We build relationships with them. They count on us. We don’t want to give up on it because of lack of resources.”

“We want to do everything we can to help these kids,” added Ziemian. “We need to institutionalize this system. We need data to show that it works. We need an alumni network that could mentor the kids in the system. We can’t do that without help.”

Despite such funding worries, Judge Ziemian hopes that all judicial districts in New England will soon have drug courts. “The only thing I don’t have to do is convince people that their communities have problems with drugs. Drugs are everywhere,” he says. “With drug courts, we can do something about it.”

 

 

Source: JTO online Nov 2004.

Filed under: USA :
By David G. Evans, Esq.
Executive Director Drug Free Schools Coalition., N.J. USA, July 2005
The U.S. Supreme Court was correct to hold that smoked marijuana is not “medicine.” The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has never approved smoked marijuana as a medicine, and only the FDA has the power to do this. Smoking marijuana is a poor way to deliver a drug. There is no way to titrate the “dose” of smoked marijuana because there is no standardized potency and no way to determine how much is actually being inhaled. In addition, the harmful chemicals and carcinogens that are by products of smoking marijuana create new health problems.

Questions of medicine are for the FDA to answer – not special interest groups, not individuals, not public opinion. Our medical system relies on proven scientific research. Smoked marijuana as medicine has been rejected by the American Medical Association, the National Multiple Sclerosis Society, the American Glaucoma Society, the American Academy of Opthalmology and the American Cancer Society.1 Recently, the federal Institute of Medicine also conducted research on this issue and they see “little future in smoked marijuana as a medicine.” 2

The major reason the national medical organizations and the FDA reject crude smoked marijuana is that numerous safe and effective FDA approved medicines are available for all the conditions that smoked marijuana allegedly helps. Marijuana legalization advocates would have you incorrectly believe that smoking marijuana is the only alternative for cancer sufferers who are going untreated for the nausea associated with chemotherapy, and for all those who suffer from glaucoma, multiple sclerosis, and other ailments. However, numerous effective medications are currently available for these illnesses. 3

Before the passage of the Pure Food and Drug Act in 1907, our nation was exposed to a host of patent medicine and “folk remedies.” The major drug in most of these “cures” was alcohol. This is why people reported that they “felt better” as they do with marijuana. Needless to say, these claimed benefits were erratic and not reproducible. Marijuana is intoxicating, so it’s not surprising that sincere people report relief of their symptoms when they smoke it. They may be feeling better – but they are not actually getting better and they may be getting worse due to the effects of marijuana.

Americans have the world’s safest and most effective system of medical practice built on a process of scientific research, testing and oversight. Our investment in medical science is at risk if we do not defend the proven process by which medicines are brought to the market. All drugs must undergo rigorous clinical trials before a drug can be released for public use. Smoked marijuana has not met that test. We should not approve any drug that has not proven to be safe and effective.

Scientific literature shows that use of marijuana is a major risk factor in the development of addiction and drug use among our school children. The efforts to confuse the public about marijuana have contributed to the drop in school children’s perception of marijuana’s harm which results in marijuana and other drug use among school children. Of the nearly 182,000 kids in treatment today, 48% were admitted for abuse or addiction to marijuana while only 19.3% for alcohol and 2.9% for cocaine, 2.4% for methamphetamine and 2.3% for heroin. It is no coincidence that those states with medical marijuana initiatives have among the highest levels of drug use and drug addiction. 4

References:

1. Bonner, R., Marijuana Rescheduling Petitions, 57 Federal Register 10499-10508; Alliance for Cannabis Therapeutics v. DEA and NORML v. DEA, 15 F.3d 1131 (D.C. Cir 1994)

2. John A. Benson, Jr., Co-Principal Investigator, in releasing Marijuana and Medicine: Assessing the Science Base, Institute of Medicine, National Academy of Sciences, 1999.

3. Eric Voth, M.D., FACP, “Medicinal Applications of Marijuana”, Institute on Global Drug Policy of the Drug-Free America Foundation, St. Petersburg, FL. WWW.DFAF.ORG; 2004 Physicians’ Desk Reference, page 3241

4. Clayton, R.R., and Leukefeld, C.G., The prevention of drug use among youth; implications of “legalization”. Journal of Primary Prevention. 1992:12:289-302.; “Non-medical Marijuana: Rite of Passage or Russian Roulette?” July 1999 obtained at website WWW.CASACOLUMBIA.ORG/PUBLICATIONS

 

 

Filed under: Legal Sector :

Feature Commentary Doug Marlowe J.D., Ph.D.

More research has been published on the effects of drug courts than on virtually all other interventions for drug-abusing offenders combined. How, then, can the field continue to be in serious dispute about whether drug courts “work”? How is it possible for some reputable scholars to conclude that the success of drug courts has been definitively established (e.g., Meyer & Ritter, 2002), whereas others insist that drug courts are little more than a sham perpetuated by irrational believers (e.g., Anderson, 2001; Hoffman, 2002).

The answer is at least three-fold. First, the more extensive the literature on an intervention, the greater the likelihood that it will contain conflicting findings that can lead researchers to different conclusions. To preserve unanimity, one should conduct a single study, declare victory, and then spread the word — which happens all too frequently in the substance-abuse and criminal-justice fields. Like the old adage, “no good deed goes unpunished,” if a field takes seriously its responsibility to carefully study its operations and impacts, it will almost certainly turn up some damning evidence.

Second, the more studies that are conducted on an intervention, the greater is the probability that some of the studies will have been poorly implemented, the data poorly analyzed, or the implications overstated. This leaves proponents open to the charge that they are relying on “junk science.” Even if some well-designed studies do support the utility of the intervention, those studies may become unfairly tainted in the minds of critics, by association with poorer studies that reached the same conclusion or were mentioned in the same review papers.

Third, there are different standards of proof for establishing the efficacy of an intervention as opposed to its effectiveness. Efficacy refers to whether the intervention can be successful when it is properly implemented under controlled conditions, whereas effectiveness refers to whether the intervention typically is successful in actual clinical practice (e.g., Howard et al., 1996). Efficacy is a necessary, but not sufficient, condition for effectiveness, and is ideally established through randomized, controlled, experimental studies (e.g., Campbell & Stanley, 1966).

These three factors shed light on the most recent iteration of the drug court controversy being discussed on Join Together Online. In an August 2004 commentary, Kevin Whiteacre took to task the National Drug Court Institute (NDCI) and the White House Office of National Drug Control Policy for their “National Report Card” on drug courts in the U.S. (Huddleston et al., 2004). Mr. Whiteacre pointed out, correctly, that (1) the majority of drug-court program evaluations have used either no comparison group, or a biased comparison group such as offenders who refused or failed the drug-court program; (2) the majority of evaluations reported analyses only for program graduates (i.e., the most successful cases) as opposed to the original “intent-to-treat” cohort; and (3) the GAO has issued reports faulting the data-collection methods used in the drug-court grantee self-report surveys administered by the former Drug Courts Program Office (DCPO).

These are valid points that have been echoed by other drug-court researchers, including my colleagues and myself at the Treatment Research Institute (Belenko, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002; Marlowe, DeMatteo, & Festinger, 2003). Unfortunately, Mr. Whiteacre went beyond these appropriate criticisms to conclude that the “jury’s still out” on the impact of drug courts. On this latter point, I believe he is mistaken.

It is true that many drug-court program evaluations are of such poor quality that the results cannot be interpreted from a scientific perspective. However, there are at least three randomized, controlled, experimental studies published in peer-reviewed journals reporting superior results for drug courts over traditional probationary conditions. These studies were conducted in the Maricopa County (Ariz.) Drug Court (Turner et al., 1999), the Baltimore City Drug Treatment Court (Gottfredson & Exum, 2002; Gottfredson et al., 2003), and the Las Cruces (N.M.) DWI Court (Breckenridge et al., 2000). Among other positive findings, these studies revealed significant reductions in post-program criminal recidivism for drug-court participants lasting up to two and three years post-admission. A fourth experimental study of the Summit County (Ohio) Juvenile Drug Court also provided evidence for the superiority of drug court over standard adjudication; however, the small sample sizes in that study rendered the findings preliminary.

There have also been several “parametric” studies that are beginning to isolate the effects of the various “key components” (NADCP, 1997) of drug courts. For instance, using a randomized, controlled design, Adele Harrell, John Roman, and their colleagues at The Urban Institute have demonstrated that imposing graduated sanctions for positive urine drug-screens improved outcomes over standard pre-trial drug-court supervision (Harrell, Cavanagh, & Roman, 1998). Further, in a series of experimental studies, our research group demonstrated that frequent judicial status hearings improved outcomes for high-risk drug offenders who had more severe drug-use histories or a comorbid diagnosis of antisocial personality disorder (Festinger et al., 2002; Marlowe, Festinger, & Lee, 2003, 2004; Marlowe, Festinger, Lee, et al., 2003). These findings were replicated in three different jurisdictions, located in both urban and rural communities and serving both misdemeanor and felony drug offenders.

The latter studies are particularly relevant for establishing the efficacy of drug courts. It is very difficult to conduct the type of randomized studies with no-treatment control conditions that are necessary to scientifically prove the efficacy of an intervention. An alternative approach, however, to assessing the efficacy of drug court is to evaluate the effects of manipulating its core ingredients. Demonstrating that judicial status hearings have a significant bearing on drug-court outcomes establishes that drug courts have a unique mechanism of action. This provides scientific support for the utility of drug courts, and perhaps the only practicably obtainable evidence that the GAO and other stakeholders would be willing to accept.

Taken together, the results of these experimental studies prove the efficacy of drug courts beyond peradventure. The Food and Drug Administration (1998) requires only two experimental clinical trials to establish the efficacy of a new medication. It makes little sense to hold drug courts to a higher standard of scientific proof than we hold, say, cancer medicines. The fact that some program evaluation studies have been poorly implemented does nothing to detract from the scientific integrity of these well-designed studies. It may, however, raise questions about the effectiveness, nationally, of drug courts in day-to-day practice. Dozens of well-designed program evaluations have demonstrated the effectiveness of particular drug-court programs; however, the vast majority of drug courts in this country are not collecting the data elements necessary to document their services or outcomes.

The responsibility now falls to the drug-court field to establish performance benchmarks and best practices for drug-court programs, and to develop accreditation procedures that can be used to document whether a particular program is in compliance with professionally accepted standards of practice. Failing to do so would be a potential waste of money and a breach of consumers’ trust. It would not, however, detract from the scientific evidence favoring the efficacy of drug courts. In short, the jury may still be out on how the universe of drug-court programs in this country is operating in practice, but the verdict is long overdue on the efficacy of drug courts.

Editor’s Note: Doug Marlowe is the director of law and ethics research at the Treatment Research Institute at the University of Pennsylvania.

References

Anderson, J. F. (2001). What to do about “much ado” about drug courts? International Journal of Drug Policy, 12, 469-475.

Belenko, S. (1998). Research on drug courts: A critical review. National Drug Court Institute Review, 1, 1-42.

Belenko, S. (1999). Research on drug courts: A critical review: 1999 update. National Drug Court Institute Review, 2(2), 1-58.

Belenko, S. (2001). Research on drug courts: A critical review: 2001 update. New York: National Center on Addiction and Substance Abuse at Columbia University.

Belenko, S. (2002). Drug courts. In C. G. Leukefeld, F. Tims, & D. Farabee (Eds.), Treatment of drug offenders: Policies and issues (pp. 301-318). New York: Springer.

Breckenridge, J. F., Winfree, L. T., Maupin, J. R., & Clason, D. L. (2000). Drunk drivers, DWI “drug court” treatment, and recidivism: Who fails? Justice Research & Policy, 2, 87-105.

Campbell, D. T., & Stanley, J. C. (1966). Experimental and quasi-experimental designs for research. Chicago: Rand McNally.

Festinger, D. S., Marlowe, D. B., Lee, P. A., Kirby, K. C., Bovasso, G., & McLellan, A. T. (2002). Status hearings in drug court: When more is less and less is more. Drug and Alcohol Dependence, 68, 151-157.

Food and Drug Administration. (1998, May). Guidance for industry: Providing clinical evidence of effectiveness for human drug and biological products. Rockville, MD: Center for Drug Evaluation and Research, U.S. Dept. of Health & Human Services.

Gottfredson, D. C., & Exum, M. L. (2002). The Baltimore City Drug Court: One-year results from a randomized study. Journal of Research on Crime and Delinquency, 39, 337-356.

Gottfredson, D. C., Najaka, S. S., Kearley, B. (2003). Effectiveness of drug treatment courts: Evidence from a randomized trial. Criminology & Public Policy, 2, 171-196.

Harrell, A., Cavanagh, S., & Roman, J. (1998). Final report: Findings from the evaluation of the D.C. Superior Court Drug Intervention Program. Washington, DC: The Urban Institute.

Hoffman, M. B. (2002). The rehabilitative ideal and the drug court reality. Federal Sentencing Reporter, 14, 172-178

Howard, K. I., Moras, K., Brill, P. L., Martinovich, Z., & Lutz, W. (1996). Evaluation of psychotherapy: Efficacy, effectiveness, and patient progress. American Psychologist, 51, 1059-1064.

Huddleston, C. W., Freeman-Wilson, K., & Boone, D. L. (2004). Painting the picture: A national report card on drug courts and other problem-solving court programs in the United States. Alexandria, VA: National Drug Court Institute, and Bureau of Justice Assistance.

Marlowe, D. B., DeMatteo, D. S., & Festinger, D. S. (2003). A sober assessment of drug courts. Federal Sentencing Reporter, 16, 153-157.

Marlowe, D. B., Festinger, D. S., & Lee, P. A. (2004). The judge is a key component of drug court. Drug Court Review, 4,1-34.

Marlowe, D. B., Festinger, D. S., & Lee, P. A. (2003). The role of judicial status hearings in drug court. Offender Substance Abuse Report, 3, 33-46.

Marlowe, D. B., Festinger, D. S., Lee, P. A., Schepise, M. M., Hazzard, J. E. R., Merrill, J. C., Mulvaney, F. D., & McLellan, A. T. (2003). Are judicial status hearings a key component of drug court? During-treatment data from a randomized trial. Criminal Justice & Behavior, 30, 141-162.

Meyer, W. G., & Ritter, A. W. (2002). Drug courts work. Federal Sentencing Reporter, 14, 179-185.

National Association of Drug Court Professionals. (1997). Defining drug courts: The key components. Washington, DC: Office of Justice Programs, U.S. Dept. of Justice.

Turner, S., Greenwood, P., Fain, T., & Deschenes, E. (1999). Perceptions of drug court: How offenders view ease of program completion, strengths and weaknesses, and the impact on their lives. National Drug Court Institute Review, 2, 61-85.

 

Source: Doug Marlowe Director of Law and Ethics Research at the Treatment
Research Institute at the University of Pennsylvania
Filed under: Legal Sector :

By Mike Howell-staff writer

Viewers who tuned in to the national news on Jan. 24 witnessed disturbing images of thieves beating two elderly men in a Downtown Eastside alley.

One man was knocked senseless by a forearm smash to the head, leaving him to fall hard to the ground. The other man was stumbling and attempting to stop blood from spurting over his face and clothes.

The thieves quickly picked through their victims’ pockets, looking for cash and valuables. Unfortunately, there was no audio to the amateur footage captured by the person who filmed the violence.

But Vancouver police Const. Al Arsenault has no doubt the victims were told they would be beaten again or killed, if they reported the attacks.

Arsenault should know, since he sat in those alleys over two nights and was robbed by some of the same thieves.

Employing a technique not commonly used by police, Arsenault volunteered to be a decoy, a piece of human bait. The 52-year-old fit martial arts expert changed his appearance and acted like an injured old man with a mental illness.

It took less than 45 minutes to be robbed on both nights. Thieves used knives, razor blades and scissors to cut Arsenault’s bag from around his neck. He pretended to be asleep, while his cover team of officers kept watch.

“One guy was so close to me, I could smell the crack [cocaine] on his breath. I was thinking, ‘What if the guy decides to slit my throat?’ My heart was pumping pretty fast.”

Arsenault survived unscathed, and chalked up the project as a “calculated risk.” The job though doesn’t exactly have a waiting list of officers willing to take that risk.

Undercover work-whether it be posing as a decoy or infiltrating an organized crime group-is dangerous, stressful and can lead to strained relationships with partners and families.

In the case of Vancouver RCMP Cpl. Derek Flanagan, it led to his death in Thailand in 1989. The 35-year-old father of three children fell from the box of a pickup truck during a struggle with a heroin dealer.

Yet, undercover work continues to be done by police all over the world, including by a veteran RCMP officer who agreed to share anecdotes for this story as long as his name and current project aren’t revealed.

RCMP Insp. Bill Majcher, who spent 13 years undercover, can only now talk about some of his secretive projects, including his last one that ended in Florida in 2002.

After more than two years posing as a frontman for a Colombian drug cartel, Majcher and his cover team snared the “Lex Luthor” of Canadian crime, Martin Chambers, in a money laundering probe.

Despite the risks, Majcher and his police colleagues say undercover work is necessary to catch bad guys who otherwise couldn’t be caught.

“A lot of [criminals] know how the law works, and they know how they can protect themselves by using the law. In many cases, it seems we have all the rules and no money, and they have all the money and no rules.”

When Arsenault took to the alleys in January, it fulfilled a desire he had as a rookie more than 20 years ago.

At the time, he heard about fellow officers lying on benches in the Downtown Eastside, pretending to be drunk and flashing money to lure thieves.

“If memory serves, there were some hairy situations, but I knew it was something I wanted to try some day. It would be a test for me to see how good I would be at something like that.”

Project Oldtimer, as it was called, was hatched by Arsenault and partner Sgt. Toby Hinton. Using a decoy, they believed, was the only way to catch the thieves.

Arsenault volunteered knowing a team of officers would be hiding in nearby businesses and watching him from a distance. His cover team would also be talking to him through a receiver in his ear.

A make-up artist spent two hours transforming Arsenault into an old man. Once he dressed in bulky clothing-his protective vest underneath-and put on a helmet, he became that old man (pictured on the front page of this newspaper).

The helmet concealed a camera, which filmed the half dozen criminals who robbed Arsenault. The helmet helped complete the look of a senior on a motorized scooter.

During the project, Arsenault ditched the scooter, but kept the helmet on. “The helmet was more for in case they decided to pipe me over the head. I’m willing to take a shot, but losing some teeth is one thing, sipping cream of beef soup for the rest of my life is another.”

When he was robbed, he was lying in alcoves in the south alley of Hastings, between Abbott and Main streets. Five men and one woman, all in their 20s, were charged with robbery.

“Not everybody wants to do this work,” he says. “But if anybody should do it, it should be me because I’ve got the most experience on the street. I know what the street feels like and sounds like and looks like-and I’m a pretty good actor.”

Arsenault is a long-time Downtown Eastside cop. His connection to the community’s residents allowed him and Hinton to film Through a Blue Lens, a documentary that chronicles the lives of drug addicts.

Arsenault also has black belts in karate, judo and in san shou dao, a Chinese martial art. But he is quick to point out that self-defence is only required if an undercover operation goes awry.

How the officer acts and what he says are key factors in gaining the trust of bad guys, he says, recalling a robbery case in June 1991 where he was placed in a cell with a suspect. Arsenault’s job was to befriend the suspect in an attempt to find out the identity of two other robbers who held up Nick’s Spaghetti House on Commercial Drive.

At the time, Arsenault had shoulder-length hair, was scruffy-looking and not as well-known on the street as he is today. It was one of his first undercover gigs.

“He was a man who was small in stature, but big in talk. So I just oohed and aahed at his stories of crime. I pretended to be all impressed by his actions on the street. Eventually, he told me who the other people were and they went to jail.”

In another cell mate case in February 1992, he befriended a man suspected of killing six Chilean flamingos in Stanley Park. Jason Laberge, also known as the “Flamingo Killer,” was sentenced to eight months in jail and fined $9,000.

“He told me everything in detail, he really blabbed his guts out.”

Arsenault is proud of his undercover work, but doesn’t put himself in the same league as officers who spend months and years on projects. He’s never been trained to do that.

“I’m a lightweight when it comes to the undercover operators thing because I didn’t do a lot of it. Some of these other guys make it their career. I never chose to do that.”

For 13 years, Bill Majcher chose that life.

It began in the same alleys Arsenault has worked for years.

As a 26-year-old RCMP constable, Majcher spent four months in 1990 posing as a drug addict to buy heroin from dealers in the Downtown Eastside.

With a thin build, a full beard and long hair, he looked the part. At the time, the RCMP and Vancouver police had an amalgamated drug squad, allowing constables like Majcher to get a first-hand feel of drug work in the city.

“I really got my eyes opened to the realities and the dangers of policing in the Downtown Eastside. I look back and I think a lot of the foundation for my undercover career was developed working with the Vancouver police.”

Dubbed Project Norway, Majcher worked long hours buying heroin from dozens of dealers. His act seemed to work, although one dealer believed Majcher might be a police informant and sucker punched him as he walked out of the Columbia Hotel.

His cover team was about to move in, but Majcher shoved the dealer and shouted at him until they both carried on down the street.

“I just bought heroin in the Columbia, and I walk out into a fist. It could have easily been a bat or a knife. When you’re dealing with that culture, the dealers are fairly low end, but the work is high-risk because the people who live in that environment live by the sword and die by the sword.”

Majcher’s other life at the time was in Richmond, where he had just been elected as a school trustee. A community-minded man, who coached hockey and baseball, he became a politician on the encouragement of a parent.

During Project Norway, he would attend meetings in a beard and long hair, then go to the Downtown Eastside to buy heroin. The job of a politician and undercover officer quickly became incompatible, leading to his resignation from the school board in 1991.

“A lot of people put a lot of effort and time into making these projects go, and I didn’t want to be the Achilles heel that exposed myself or the project,” he says, noting school board meetings were televised on community cable.

The success of Project Norway, which led to the arrests of 120 people, was the beginning of a bright future for Majcher. His skills would see him work undercover in more drug cases, homicide investigations and dangerous organized crime probes.

His work has taken him across the country, into the United States, the Caribbean and Southeast Asia. His longest case lasted almost three years and involved a Colombian drug cartel.

He wouldn’t elaborate, but says the experience gave him the background and confidence to pose as a frontman for a Colombian drug cartel in the ensuing money laundering probe that landed former Vancouver lawyer Martin Chambers in jail.

Majcher’s success hasn’t come without sacrifice. Like Arsenault, the 42-year-old has never been married, but was in serious relationships for most of his undercover career. Those relationships are over.

“You could be gone for months, and then you come home for a weekend and you know you’ve been living under a lot of stress and pressure, so you’re maybe not the best partner when you do get home.”

Majcher likens the job of an undercover officer to a working police dog.

“The dog is happiest when it’s working, it’s happiest when it’s following a scent. When I’d be gone for two or three months and then be home for the weekend, I was like that working dog. I wanted to get back on the scent.”

He adds, “the true unsung heroes of this lifestyle really are the family members because you leave them behind many times.”

In the Chambers case, Majcher worked in Miami off and on for more than two years. To relieve tension, he would take long walks and read to keep his body and mind sharp.

The RCMP has a set of “checks and balances,” including psychological testing to scrutinize undercover officers’ behaviour. Despite the roles he played, Majcher says he never lost sight of who he was or his job.

“At all times, I knew I was a police officer. At all times, I knew this person wasn’t my friend, but a criminal.”

That thought was certainly on Majcher’s mind when he was grilled by Chambers and his associates in a hotel room. The meeting wasn’t planned, leaving Majcher without his cover team.

“My initial thought was, ‘If things go bad, how do I get out of here?’ Then I just fell back on my training, my experience. I’ve always found once I start talking, and get into a rhythm, I can deal with it.”

In another close call, an FBI agent posing as the captain of a yacht told Majcher that “you Canadian guys don’t know how to drink.” Chambers and his associates thought Majcher was American.

“All of a sudden they’re looking at me, demanding an explanation. And here we are with $200,000 cash and a money counter on the table, and then I’ve got to start quickly talking about what he meant by that.”

Majcher talked himself out of that situation, too. He told them his father was in the military, that Majcher was born in Canada, but grew up in America.

His stories paid off.

Chambers, whom police say agreed to launder up to $26 million US per year, was sentenced in December 2003 to 15 years and eight months in jail.

It was the last undercover operation for Majcher, who is now the RCMP’s inspector in charge of the Integrated Market Enforcement Team. From his 22nd floor office at Homer and Georgia, Majcher has a view of the same streets where his undercover career began.

“I miss it, but sometimes you have to give up what you love doing to take advantage of new opportunities.”

Jack Burns-not his real name-is still heavily engaged in undercover work for the RCMP.

A Mountie for more than 25 years, he’s spent a good portion of his career tricking bad guys in Canada, the United States, Southeast Asia and China. It’s a role he thrives on, having infiltrated drug smuggling syndicates and motorcycle gangs.

As with Arsenault and Majcher, he finds the work gripping. Each encounter with a bad guy is a true test of an officer’s intelligence.

“My first instinct is to think like a bad guy,” says Burns in an email dispatch from his current post. “I am truthful, respectful with targets. Gaining trust is the first and foremost thing.”

He cites one case in Manitoba where he bought marijuana from a big-time dealer at his house. The dealer was trying to fix his son’s mountain bike, but didn’t have a clue what to do. Burns took the tools out of his hands and fixed the bike.

“I can remember him shrugging his shoulders, not saying much, but he did say thanks.”

On the day of the arrest, the dealer was shocked when he learned Burns’ true identity. The evidence Burns collected during the operation put the dealer in prison for three years.

“In court, I kind of felt bad because he had his son and wife and the rest of the clan there.”

Even so, Burns says he’s never been worried about his safety.

“I’ve had problems sleeping at times, but it is from excitement. Most bad guys don’t like you, but they respect you for what you did. They usually take it in stride.”

Burns’ undercover career began in Portage La Prairie, Man. in 1981. For four months, he worked as a pizza delivery driver and bought drugs while delivering pizza to dealers.

His work led to 64 charges, with bigger players in Winnipeg and in the northern United States all identified in the probe.

That success led Burns to larger investigations, including befriending a motorcycle gang.

He lived through several close calls during the probe, including an incident where a fight broke out in a bar between bikers’ girlfriends. Burns’ table was knocked over, sending his jacket-equipped with a monitoring device-out of his reach.

“I knew my cover team was listening and I didn’t want them coming through the door and getting the wrong impression, so my mind was racing on how quickly I could notify them. I then moved back from the table as the two women were all over the table, and kicked my jacket to a safe place. When I picked it up, I said something to the effect about the women fighting to give the cover team a signal I was OK.”

In another incident, a bar maid close to the bikers took a liking to Burns. She approached him one day and said she had a dream that he was a cop.

“My cover team took precautions and I laughed it off. Although squirming inside, it turned out she really did have a dream and was not trying to find something out.”

When at home in the Lower Mainland, Burns lies low and says his neighbours know not to ask about his projects until he tells them he’s finished.

Divorced with a 27-year-old daughter, Burns prefers the single life-a common trait, it seems, among the officers interviewed for this story.

Still, his mother worries about him.

“But she gets over it, she knows I like the challenge and the excitement. I really don’t give too many details to people unless I really trust them not to say anything until the job is done. Therefore, the few people that know, not many can be affected.”

Fiona Flanagan knew a lot about what her late husband Derek Flanagan did as an undercover RCMP officer.

He never kept it a secret, often phoning from various locations and checking on his family.

“If you watch some of the police shows on TV, you would think that nobody knows what their husband does and they don’t know what they’re doing. I knew everything.”

She also knew that marrying a police officer who did undercover work would mean to expect the unexpected and to “go with the flow.” Working as a civilian with the RCMP also helped.

“You have be a certain type of person. If you were really into schedules and you didn’t like people to change things, then you’re probably not going to like being married to somebody who does undercover work.”

The night before Flanagan died in Thailand, Fiona was working as a radio operator with the Richmond RCMP. She had just finished a 12-hour shift when he called.

“‘You’re telling me that you’ve just had a nice beer, and I’ve got two screaming kids here, so I don’t really want to hear about it.’ That was sort of my last conversation with him.”

Flanagan was an undercover officer in Operation Deception. He was in Chiang Mai, Thailand setting up a deal to buy five kilograms of heroin when he died Feb. 20, 1989.

Sitting in the back of the heroin dealers’ pickup truck, he tested the drug and signaled to his cover team that it was genuine. But before officers reached the truck, the driver took off, leaving Flanagan to struggle with one of the dealers.

The six-foot-three, 220-pound Flanagan was either pushed or fell from the truck, hit his head on the ground and broke his neck. He was on life support for most of the night until Fiona instructed doctors to take him off.

“I thought if he was going to die on the job, he would go down in a blaze of glory-that it would be something more dramatic in a sense. Overall, it was dramatic, but everybody said he was the biggest, strongest guy we knew. There’s no way he could fall off a truck like that and be dead.”

At the time, his son Geordie was 18 months old, and his other son Chris was four years old. He also had an 10-year-old daughter, Patti, from a previous marriage.

Fiona recalls breaking the news to Chris.

“The RCMP had a psychiatrist [at the apartment], and asked how I talked to my kids. I said I just kind of say it, so he said then just say it. So, I took Chris upstairs and I said ‘Your dad is dead and he’s not coming back.’ It was pretty simple, actually. He cried and then asked if there was any food, and I said, ‘Oh, there’s all kinds of food.'”

Chris is now 20, and wrote his RCMP entrance exam last Saturday. If he gets accepted, and chooses to pursue an undercover career, his mother is all for it.

“How can you tell somebody not to do what they want to do?”

Her brother and nephew are members of the Vancouver police department, and she continues to work as a civilian with the RCMP’s major crime section.

She’s been around policing since leaving high school. She loves the camaraderie, the adrenaline and people the profession attracts.

Her life though isn’t the same without the man who enjoyed hiking the Lions, listening to Lou Reed and playing hockey with his kids.

“My husband was doing what he loved to do. He wanted to make things better for people-stop the flow of drugs, put away criminals, that kind of thing. But he absolutely expected to come home at the end of his shift, too.”

 

 

Source: Vancouver Courier.Com March 28th 2005

Back To Drug Politics | Home

Filed under: Law (Papers) :
By Patrick Zickler

NIDA NOTES Staff Writer

NIDA, joined by the National Cancer Institute (NCI) and the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism (NIAAA), sponsored a symposium on drug discovery. development, and delivery as part of the 2003 Annual Meeting of the Society for Research on Nicotine and Tobacco. More than 300 researchers, treatment providers, and policymakers attended the 1-day meeting on February 9 in New Orleans. The symposium featured discussions of current efforts to discover new targets for potential medications, the development of medications based on existing knowledge of nicotine’s effects in the brain and factors that might speed the delivery of new treatments to smokers who want to quit.

During the discovery section of the program, speakers discussed recent findings in nicotine receptor biology and the role of neurotransmitters such as gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA) and glutamate, in nicotine’s effects on the brain. The presentations on medication development provided a background on the drug development process; emerging medications, such as antidepressants and nicotine vaccines; and an overview of medications now in development. The delivery portion of the symposium focused on strategies to create widespread medication access and use by individual smokers and within the health care system.

Discovery. Dr. William Corriigall director of NIDA’s Nicotine and Tobacco Addiction Program and symposium moderator, described the neurobiological targets of current research: genes and gene products that play a role in the structure and response of nicotinic receptors and in brain signalling pathways that involve the neurotransmitters dopamine, GABA, serotonin, and glutamate. Dr. Caryn Lerman. of the University of Pennsylvania in Philadelphia further explored the genetic factor in nicotine research, describing studies on the effect of genetic variations on the activity of enzymes that metabolize nicotine (see ‘Genetic Variation May Increase Nicotine Craving and Smoking Relapse p. 1.)

Dr. Marina Picciotto, of Yale University in New Haven, Connecticut. discussed research that has expanded our understanding of the role of nicotine receptors—the sites at which nicotine attaches to brain cells. This portion of the program also featured discussions of the possibility that neurotransmitters other than dopamine might represent new avenues for pharmacotherapy. For example, Dr. Julie Staley. also of Yale University, described current investigations into the treatment possibilities represented by medications known to act on the serotonin system. The GABA neurotransmitter system, which normally acts to limit dopamine’s effect in the brain’s pleasure centre, might also help in smoking cessation treatment, according to Dr. George McGehee of the University of Chicago. He discussed the mechanism by which nicotine simultaneously stimulates dopamine release and depresses the effect of GABA.

Development. Dr. Frank Vocci, director of NIDA Division of Treatment Research and Development, described the steps involved in the development of new medications and their approval by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA)—a process that may require a decade of research and testing, at a cost as high as $500 million per medication. Accelerating the process at any stage, from basic research to human clinical trials, will speed the availability of new treatments. Dr. John Hughes, of the University of Vermont in Burlington, suggested that psychiatric medications already approved for treating neurochemical imbalances in the brain might hold clues for developing medications to treat the neurochemical effects of smoking.

Dr. Charles Grudzinskas, of Georgetown University Medical Centre in Washington, D.C., summarized potential medications now in FDA phase I, II, or III trials. These medications include additional nicotine replacement therapies and nicotine vaccines. Dr. Paul Pentel of the Hennepin County Medical Centre in Minneapolis Minnesota, described progress in the development of one type of nicotine vaccine—antibodies that bind to nicotine in the blood, preventing it from crossing the blood brain barrier and reaching the areas of the brain that underlie addiction. Vaccines may be particularly effective as relapse-prevention medications for smokers who are trying to remain abstinent.

Delivery. Dr. Scott Leischow, chief of NCI’s Tobacco Control Research Branch, discussed barriers to delivery and utilization of current tobacco cessation treatments. These include the high relapse rate associated with current treatments and the cost and ‘hassle’ factor that deter patients from using nicotine replacement therapy. which they contrast to the simplicity of nicotine delivery by cigarettes To address barriers to use, Dr. Saul Shiffman of the University of Pittsburgh discussed strategies that might increase utilization of existing treatments, including regulatory changes that make cigarettes more expensive and increased advertising and education to encourage more smokers to try to quit.

Providers and insurers also need to address barriers within their control, noted several speakers. Dr. Richard Hurt, of the Mayo Clinic’s Nicotine Dependence Centre in Minneapolis. Minnesota, discussed the limitations of current clinical treatment. He noted that relatively few medications are available, clinicians are not familiar with them, and patients are reluctant to begin treatment because of embarrassment, inadequate relief from withdrawal, and the difficulty of complying with instructions for use of gum. inhalers, or nasal sprays. Dr. Susan Curry of the University of Illinois at Chicago suggested steps that insurers and health care organizations could take to improve the delivery, utilization, and effectiveness of treatment. For example, she said, health care .systems should adopt a chronic disease model to treat smoking, and insurers should include the cost of medications in coverage that provides comprehensive pharmacological and behavioural treatment.

In concluding remarks, Dr. Corrigall noted that the enthusiastic response to the day-long discussion illustrates broad support for steps that will increase and accelerate available treatment options for smokers. “Clinicians and patients need better treatment options. and this symposium represents a significant first step in a collaboration that can help speed the process of getting new and more effective medications to smokers who want to quit.”

 


By Patrick Zickler
NIDA NOTES Staff Writer

Smokers who want to quit can get help with a variety of treatments, including counselling, nicotine replacement therapy (patches, gum, lozenges, or inhalers and medications. Some smokers use these treatments and succeed; for many. however, the discomfort of withdrawal and craving for nicotine lead to relapse. Recent NIDA funded research suggests that our genes may partly explain this variable success.

The research evaluated the effect of an enzyme, designated CYP2B6, on craving and relapse. This enzyme breaks down nicotine in the brain. Some peoples’ genes produce a more active form of the enzyme. while others have a less active form. Dr. Caryn Lerman at the NIDA- and NCI supported Transdisciplinary Tobacco Use Research Centre (TTURC) at the University of Pennsylvania, found that among smokers enrolled in a smoking cessation program, those with the genetic variant that decreases activity of CYP2B6 reported greater craving than did those with the more active form of the enzyme. Moreover, those with the less active enzyme were 1.5 times more likely to resume smoking during treatment.

The same enzyme helps break down bupropion, an antidepressant medication that acts on the brain’s dopamine system—where nicotine exerts much of its addictive influence—and helps some smokers quit. Dr. Lerman, along with colleagues at Georgetown University in Washington, DC., the State University of New York at Buffalo, and Brown University in Providence, Rhode Island, also investigated the relationship of CYP2B6 activity with bupropion treatment. They found that bupropion nearly tripled the success rate for women with the less active enzyme.

These findings provide initial evidence that smokers who have decreased CYP2B6 activity experience greater craving for nicotine than those with the more active form of this enzyme,” Dr. Lerman says. “Perhaps of greater interest is the preliminary evidence that, among women, bupropion may overcome the effect this genetic predisposition has on relapse.”

Genes, Treatment, and Abstinence

Most people—about 70 percent of the U.S. population—inherit two copies of the ‘C’ variant of the gene that influences CYP2B6 activity. The rest of the population inherits from one or both parents the less common form of the gene—the “T’ variant associated with decreased CYP2B6 activity. Among the 426 participants (232 men, 194 women) in the TTURC study, 128 (29.6 percent) had one or two copies of the T form of the gene. All participants received counselling to quit smoking; 229 received bupropion (300 mg/day) and 197 received placebo throughout the 10-week study. The participants provided weekly reports on craving and smoking rates. Abstinence (7 consecutive days without smoking) was verified with blood tests. At the end of treatment, participants who received counselling and bupropion had higher abstinence rates than those who received counselling and placebo. With one exception. participants with the less active enzyme had lower abstinence rates than those with the more active enzyme. Women with the less active enzyme who received bupropion showed the largest treatment effect, with 54 percent achieving abstinence, up from a 19-percent rate among women in the placebo group, notes Dr. Lerman.

This study suggests that properly selected treatment matched to a patient’s characteristics can improve a smoker’s chance of quitting

Theories To Explain Outcomes

The higher abstinence rate with bupropion for women with the lower activity enzyme may he due, in part, to reduced susceptibility to low moods that accompany nicotine withdrawal; overall. women reported more negative feelings than did men when asked to rate their mood during withdrawal. “This rate may reflect better management of the negative moods and craving that abstinence can create. But more study is needed to clarify the mechanisms by which bupropion influences smokers’ success in quitting”, Dr. Lerman says.
Researchers theorize that the association between the less active enzyme and increased craving could be the result of nicotine’s remaining longer in the brains of smokers with the less active enzyme. When nicotine lingers in the brains of these smokers, it may change their brain cells more profoundly than those of smokers with the more active enzyme. If so, the changes might produce more severe addiction marked by more intense craving during abstinence and increased risk of relapse.

“This study offers additional evidence of the important role genes play in smoking and treatment,” says Dr. Joni Rutter of NIDAs Division of Neuroscience and Behavioural Research, ‘While illustrating the increased craving and vulnerability to relapse that may be associated with inherited traits, it also suggests that properly selected treatment matched to a patient’s characteristics in this case, Bupropion for some women can improve a smoker’s chance of quitting.’

Source:Lerman, C., et al. Pharmacogenetic investigation of smoking cessation treatment, Pharmacogenetics
12(8):627-634, 2002.

Our vulnerable school children have been prey to drug traffickers for too long. Because drug and alcohol use by students interferes with the fundamental purpose of public schools and students have a diminished expectation of privacy, public schools have a “special need” to implement random drug testing of students in order to deter substance use and to help the schools achieve their fundamental purposes of education and protecting young people.The school years are a critical passage in a young person’s life. The physical and psychological effects of drug and alcohol use can cause lifelong and profound losses. The Court has recognized a school’s duty to maintain an adequate learning environment, a component of which is that students are restrained from using drugs. Schools must be allowed to use all reasonable means to combat drug and alcohol use if education is to be successful. Substance use decreases a child’s chances of graduation and academic success.

Drug use can interfere with memory, sensation, and perception. Drugs distort experience and can cause a loss of self-control that can lead users to harm themselves or others. They interfere with the brain’s ability to take in and analyze information. Drug use erodes self-discipline and motivation which is essential for learning. The Court has noted that maturing nervous systems are more critically impaired by intoxicants than mature ones are, and childhood losses in learning are lifelong and profound. Children grow chemically dependent more quickly than adults, and their record of recovery is depressingly poor. (Several of the Amici are parents who had lost children to drugs).
A strong correlation between drug use and juvenile delinquency is documented in a study sponsored by the United States Department of Justice’s Office of Juvenile Justice and Delinquency Prevention. The study found that the more involvement a youth had with drugs, the more likely that youth was involved in delinquency. Substance use creates danger in classrooms and increases the risk of accidents when students drive to and from school.
Students who avoid drug use during their high school years are not likely to subsequently use drugs; but if they later do, they more easily can stop using them. Drug testing can help students stay away from drugs. It gives students a reason to say “no” when their peers ask them to use drugs.

Drug testing is an extremely effective deterrent as was demonstrated by the Hunterdon Central Regional High School in Flemington, New Jersey, by surveys taken before and after implementing random drug testing for all student athletes. Approximately half of the student body participated in athletics. In the two years between surveys when there had been no changes in the school anti-drug program except the introduction of random testing, drug use went down in 20 of 28 categories. In the highest risk drug use category of “Multi-Drug Users” the rates went down as follows: 57% for 9th grade, 100% for 10th grade, 14% for 11th grade, and 52% for the 12th grade. Drug testing in other contexts has also enjoyed remarkable success, e.g., drug use in the U.S. Navy dropped from 47% in 1981 to 4% in 1984 after implementation of a drug prevention program including random testing.

Schoolchildren routinely submit to mandatory physical examinations, vaccinations against disease, vision and hearing tests, dental and dermatological tests, and scoliosis screening. These are preventative measures that do not require a showing that these diseases are rampant in the school.
Our nation uses random drug testing to provide for safe transportation and our national security by testing our military personnel, customs agents and railway workers. Our interest in student safety, health, and educational quality should not be derailed by student drug use and is equally compelling. We must be willing to defend our children with the same tools we use to defend our transportation system and our nation. Our children deserve no less.
For more information about school drug-testing, see web site of Drug-Free Kids: America’s Challenge – www.ourdrugfreekids.com

 


By Peter Stoker, Director, NDPA
Random drug testing in schools – aggravation, aggravation, aggravation?
……………………………………………………………………………………………..
When the Prime Minister told the News of the World last Sunday that he supported the principle of random drug tests on school pupils, he probably did not expect the furore that followed. After all, he was saying no more than George Bush had said in his ‘State of the Union’ speech to Congress a month before, and with apparently a much more muted response. Why the difference?

One reason may be that it is easier to kick a man when he’s down, and if the polls are anything to go by, Mr Blair is nearer the floor than George at present. Even despite the WMD farrago and much excitement from the Democratic hustings, Mr Bush continues to float at around a 50% approval rating.

Another defensible explanation is the greater stranglehold that liberal – or frequently libertarian – thinking in Britain has on life in the professions which take a particular interest in drug abuse; social services, counselling and treatment agencies, prevention agencies, police, the media, and – not least – the teachers (and their unions). And that other vitally important group who are not graced with the title of ‘professional’ – the parents.

Yet another, but simpler reason is that the USA schools have been involved in a testing programme for several years now. Not all the results are good, but enough of them are, to allow Mr Bush to celebrate their impact. 400, 000 fewer kids use drugs now, he said, and drug testing can take the credit for that. He has seen the future, and it works, he asserted. The truth is not that simple, or problem-free, but he was not unreasonable in taking encouragement from what successes there were.

In the punch-up which followed Mr Blair’s announcement the police generally kept their collective head down, probably relieved that here was one aspect on which they could avoid the flak. But everyone else got into the fight … each quoting the selection of figures that suited them … the old parliamentary jibe, that some people use statistics as a drunk uses a lamp post; more for support than enlightenment, comes to mind.

Some teachers dismissed the scheme as unworkable, and a waste of academic teaching time. This fear of being tested would also damage trust between pupil and teacher, it was said – but some of those saying it went on to say that they would automatically exclude any pupil found in possession. So, fear of testing, bad; fear of exclusion, not bad. Hmm.

NDPA Director Peter Stoker tried to pick some peace from the conflict by suggesting that the way forward was to examine the successes – and failures – of the American experience, and elsewhere, such as Australia. Stoker’s colleague in the Institute for Global Drug Policy, Dr Ivan van Damme, who works out of Belgium, is currently making an international study of the practice. Another NDPA colleague, Stuart McNeillie, runs Restorative Justice Consultants, specialising in what to do with young people you have found to be errant in some way – quite often including drugs. The indications are that linking Restorative Justice to random testing, as well as nurturing a far better system of drug prevention than most British schools currently bother with, could produce a benefit far greater than the sum of its parts.

There can be pro-active and positive slants to drug testing. In the Houston area of Texas, and with the support of the student bodies, pupils joined a scheme whereby they could volunteer to sign up for a ‘drug-free identity card’. To qualify for the card one had to be willing to undergo a random test at any time. Holders of the card were given substantial discount at major stores and leisure facilities in the region which supported the scheme. The usual safeguards as to proof of identity were applied. Discuss !

Reviewing the various arguments put forward in the past few days, Peter Stoker offers the following guide through
the Random Drug Testing jungle ……

– a good practice if properly administered. A useful addition to the wider array of initiatives. Not a cure-all on its own.

– has disincentive value, like visible speed cameras.

– allows pupils to resist peer pressure to use … “I would, but we have testing in our school”.

– must be part of a wider policy of prevention and intervention – and , we would say, Restorative Justice.

– must not be merely a punitive practice, or an excuse to sack pupils the school would like to be rid of.

– response to discovery of use must be graded to severity of discovery. Not all need ‘treatment’ as Blair implies; a talk may be enough, with involvement of counselling, or just a good talking-to, being other options.

– police should not need to be involved, unless there is discovery of aggravating circumstances … the person is dealing; involved in crime etc.

– ample evidence of success in USA, over 1000 schools using it. Times editorial today (23 February) reported indifferent outcomes – on average – from a Michigan study, but it is likely that outcomes were better in some schools, worse in others, depending on general calibre of prevention in each.

– one US school encountered a hostile parent body, so they suspended the scheme, only to find that use soared; on reintroducing the scheme use was greatly reduced, and parents became strong supporters of it.

– one teaching union, said it would damage trust. Our response is that ‘trust’ based on turning a blind eye is trust not worth having, and the young are attuned to smelling out this kind of hypocrisy. Trust is something you have to earn; not to be cheaply given.

– “Invasion of personal liberty” ? No; read John Stuart Mill ‘On Liberty’ – personal actions which affect the liberty of others are not acceptable.

– “Because cannabis stays in your body longer, youth will switch to cocaine or heroin, simply to beat the test”. This is scare-mongering; no evidence of this in the US experience.

– “It won’t work” – see above.

 

*************************

When I addressed an audience of fifth-graders at Beachland Elementary school in February, I was heartened by the response I received. One child wrote, “I learned that drugs are very, very harmful. I know that I’ll never do drugs.” Another penned, “I will make a promise that I will not take drugs. I learned a lot from you.”

But that isn’t the only valuable lesson these students will learn in their educational careers. One of the most important lessons they will inevitably learn involves the adage, “consider the source.”

Readers of Paul Armentano’s April 3 column, “Pull the plug on mandatory student drug testing,” should surely consider the source, since Armentano’s employer, the National Organization for the Reform of Marijuana Laws, is a group dedicated to making drugs more available in our communities.

As a physician and public health official, by contrast, I have a duty to protect our communities from drugs. That is why I see student drug testing for what it is: a valuable tool that, when used in the context of broad drug prevention strategy, can deter drug use effectively and create drug-free environments in our schools.

Having visited with students and officials from private and public schools in Indian River County, it is apparent that drug use is a significant issue affecting lives and the learning environment. Indeed, it is a national issue. That is why many states, including Florida, are looking into the possibility of student drug testing for the purpose of deterring drug use and referring troubled teens to help.

The plague of addiction is a paediatric-onset disease that needs a public health response. In much the same way that school tuberculosis tests identify children who are sick and can spread a dangerous disease to other students, student drug testing helps identify kids who have a problem with drugs and prevents the spread of the disease of addiction.

Mr. Armentano opens his charge sheet against student drug testing by pointing to a widely publicized University of Michigan study showing little effect from student drug testing. That survey, however, was conducted in schools with different drug testing techniques ( i.e., drug testing for cause ) than those being proposed now ( i.e., random drug testing ).

Not only did the study cover a period ( 1998-2001 ) before the kind of testing allowed by the Supreme Court in 2002, but also the lead researcher himself declared, “One could imagine situations where drug testing could be effective testing kids and doing it frequently. We’re not in a position to say that wouldn’t work.

” Drug testing has proven remarkably effective at reducing drug use in American schools and businesses. As a deterrent, few methods work better or deliver clearer results. Drug testing of airline pilots and school bus drivers, for example, has made our skies and roadways much safer for travel. Schools are also safer with drug testing.

According to a study published in the Journal of Adolescent Health, a school in Oregon that randomly drug tested student athletes had a rate of drug use that was one-quarter that of a comparable school with no drug testing policy. After two years of a drug testing program, Hunterdon Central Regional High School in New Jersey saw significant reductions in 20 of 28 drug use categories, including a drop in cocaine usage rates of seniors from 13 percent to 4 percent.

Additionally, the United States military saw drug use rates drop from 27 percent in 1981 to 3 percent today, thanks to the introduction of a random drug-testing program. Random drug testing of students in extracurricular activities is effective because it demonstrates that the community has set a serious standard for its youth. In addition to creating a culture of disapproval toward drugs in the communities where it is employed, student drug testing achieves three public health goals:

* It deters children from initiating drug use.

* It identifies children who have just started using drugs so that parents and counselors can intervene early.

* It helps identify children who have a dependency on drugs so that they can be referred to effective drug treatment. These are outcomes we cannot afford to pass up. I hope that officials in Vero Beach want to provide their children every available resource possible to resist the temptation of using drugs. As one student wrote to me, “I learned that you should say no to drugs even if your friends do drugs.”

Experience shows us, however, that the decision to say no can often be a difficult one for a child to make. We owe it to our children to help them make that decision by implementing proven tools like drug testing in our schools.

Source: Author Andrea Barthwell published in Press Journal (Vero Beach, FL) Sat, 17 Apr 2004
Filed under: Education Sector :
YES: It reverses the spread of addiction
By ANDREA BARTHWELL

Atlanta Journal-Constitution
Published on: 03/25/2004

Today in Atlanta, concerned parents will meet with regional school officials, drug prevention specialists and student assistance professionals to discuss the promise of a powerful new tool to fight drug use among America’s youth.

Building on the 11 percent decline in teen drug use America has witnessed in the past two years, random student drug testing — locally controlled, nonpunitive and designed to get help for those in trouble — can help consolidate and further our progress.

Addiction is a paediatric-onset disease that needs a public health response. In much the same way that school tuberculosis tests identify children who are sick and can spread a dangerous disease, student drug testing helps identify kids who have a problem with drugs and prevents the spread of the disease of addiction.

Each child prevented from using drugs means there is one fewer child able to pass the disease of addiction to his or her peers, and we know that if we can prevent children from using drugs in their teen years, they are much less likely to go on and use drugs later in life.

In the past decade, the nation’s acceptance of student drug testing has increased, hastened by the U.S. Supreme Court’s 2002 ruling that drug testing students in extracurricular activities is constitutionally protected.

President Bush highlighted this policy as an effective prevention and intervention instrument during his State of the Union speech in January, and backed up his position with a call for increased federal funds for schools that would like to start these programs. This momentum in favour of student drug testing is based on the demonstrated effectiveness of random testing programs to deter use, and a more educated public understanding that student drug test results can only be used confidentially to help students, not to punish them.

Random drug testing of students in extracurricular activities is effective because it demonstrates that a community has set a serious standard for its youth. In addition to creating a culture of disapproval toward drugs, student drug testing also achieves three public health goals:

• It deters children from initiating drug use;

• It identifies children who have just started using drugs so that parents and counsellors can intervene early;

• It helps identify children who have a dependency on drugs so that they can be referred to effective drug treatment.

According to a study in the Journal of Adolescent Health, a school in Oregon that randomly drug tested student athletes had a rate of drug use that was one-quarter that of a comparable school with no drug testing policy.

After two years of a drug testing program, Hunterdon Central Regional High School in New Jersey saw significant reductions in 20 of 28 drug use categories, including a drop in cocaine use by seniors from 13 percent to 4 percent. The U.S. military saw drug use rates drop from 27 percent in 1981 to 3 percent today, thanks to the introduction of random drug testing.

Fortune 500 companies, small businesses, and regulated transportation industries have extensive experience in using this public health diagnostic tool. Every American who steps on an airplane or sends a child out to the school bus rests easier knowing that pilots and bus drivers are drug tested. Drug testing saves lives and we can no longer withhold the proven benefits of drug testing from the members of society that are most vulnerable to drugs’ destructive influence.

 

Filed under: Education Sector :

By Evelyn Yang,M.A.Part of the nature of community-based health initiatives, such as community anti-drug coalitions, is the importance of community participation. It is standard practice to create community collaborative groups that direct planning, implementation and evaluation of community-based prevention efforts. However, research has not yet demonstrated that collaboration and interventions targeting community participation can effectively move the needle on behavioral/health outcomes. Why has this been the case?

• Researchers and community members do not agree in their “goals and priorities.”

• Difficulty in reaching agreement on program objectives.

• Confusion around stakeholders’ roles and responsibilities.

• Externally driven time constraints may not allow communities enough time to gather a group of stakeholders together that can collaboratively drive a process resulting in population level change.

• Lack of sufficient funding, technical assistance and resources to sustain community initiatives.

• Community consensus-based models may not address the power differences and conflicts that exist in the community.

• Researchers may be using inappropriate methods/tools to adequately evaluate the complex interconnectedness of the various programs,policies and practices implemented by a coalition.

While community-based health initiatives have become popular vehicles to support health promotion and disease prevention, evaluations of many of these efforts have shown only a limited impact in changing behaviors at the population level. Outcomes have not lived up to the promise of these comprehensive, community-change oriented models. However, while other health prevention initiatives show little to no effects, HIV prevention initiatives have demonstrated greater success. What are the lessons to be learned from the HIV prevention field?

Lessons from HIV Prevention Initiatives

• Emphasis on Modifying Social Norms – Programs, practices and policies target modifying the social norms around risky behaviors, focusing on increasing the social desirability of avoiding risky behavior.

• Use of Formative Research – Research was conducted to specifically tailor interventions to a targeted population.

• Use of Trusted Community Peer Volunteers – Community member volunteers help ensure that interventions/programs are provided in ways that are appropriate to the context of the environment and the people they are reaching.

• Understanding the Nature of Risk and Communities – Since HIV is easily communicable through relatively few engagements in risky behavior, successful interventions target changing just a few risky behaviors. Also, the target population is easily identified and relatively homogeneous, which helps in program adaptation. This is very different from coalitions that engage in multi-level/multi-strategic efforts targeted at the general community.

Implications for Community Anti-Drug Coalitions

From the current body of research on coalition effectiveness and from the lessons learned from the HIV prevention field, there are new directions for community anti-drug coalitions to move towards as they work on addressing their local substance abuse issues:

• Need to better understand how to best evaluate community-based health initiatives, including the scale and time frame needed to have a detectable impact on health outcomes.

• Need to be concrete and think through what are realistic and valid outcomes. If a coalition’s focus is on changing individual behavior, then expecting population level change may be unrealistic.

• Need for new evaluation tools and methods to fully understand the rich, synergistic coalition process.

• Need to focus on community-level change, including policies and norms, and energizing community members and organizations.

• Critical to use programs, policies and practices that specifically target high-risk behaviors and also have strategies focused on the population as a whole. Use a mix of universal, selected and indicated approaches.

• Community readiness and capacity issues must be addressed – need a thorough understanding of the community before programs, policies and practices can be tailored and implemented.

For more information, please read: Merzel, C. & D’Affitti, J. (2003). Reconsidering Community-based Health Promotion: Promise, Performance, and Potential. American Journal of Public Health, 93, 557-574.

Evelyn Yang is the Manager of Evaluation and Research for CADCA’s National Coalition Institute. You may contact her at eyang@cadca.org.

Visby, Sweden – May 3rd to 6th, 2001

‘The History of Harm Reduction’
Paper by Peter Stoker: Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance (UK).

1. Introduction

With a title like ‘the history of …’ you might reasonably expect a historian to be standing here, but I’m not one. Nevertheless I can apply my experience to analysing this situation, and much of that experience, until I moved into the drugs field 15 years ago, was as a construction engineer. Part of my training then was to explore when things collapse, and find out why. Our society has not yet totally collapsed, but it is showing signs of severe stress. Cracks are appearing, and we need to shore the whole structure up quickly, if we are not to be crushed. What is causing this? Basically, our foundations are being undermined.

In this paper I will try to give you my ‘structural analysis’ of the Harm Reduction movement, and some indications for avoiding future collapse.

When Torgny Peterson first asked me to deliver this paper, I misheard him. I thought he asked me to write not about the History, but about the Mystery of Harm Reduction. It seemed a sensible request, but in checking my dictionary I found that a more appropriate word than “Mystery” would be “Mysticism” – which the dictionary defines as:

‘A belief characterised by self-delusion or dreamy confusion of thought, especially when based on mysterious agencies’.

How true that is! And some of the agencies are more mysterious than others.

2. Historical Perspective

Harm Reduction has always been around. In the Garden of Eden, when Eve ignored the advice to “Just Say No to Snakes” and then peer-pressured Adam into biting that apple, it dawned on them that they were naked and they cried out “What shall we do?”. Well, Walmarts hadn’t been invented at that time, so the best they could come up with by way of Harm Reduction was a fig-leaf.

And ever since then, we have been using the “fig-leaf” approach to society’s drug problems.

John Stuart Mill, considered by many to be the father of Liberty, was born in London in 1806. A prodigiously intelligent man, the culmination of his career came in the celebrated essays he published between 1859 and 1865; in particular his classic work “On Liberty”1. Many of those who wish to legalise or liberalise drugs employ philosophic arguments, quoting from this treatise to justify their position. But in doing so they are making a fundamental strategic error. Their favourite quote is:

‘Over himself, and over his own mind and body, the individual is sovereign’

However this is but one sentence in thousands which speak quite the opposite, which emphasise that the individual has an obligation to society, and that the rights of society outweigh those of the individual. On my copy of Mills classic text ‘On Liberty’, the dust jacket gives a more apposite quote:

‘the only purpose for which power can be rightfully exercised over any member of a civilised community, against his will, is to prevent harm to others…’

And therein lies the key phrase. Harm to others. For the driving force in the thinking of a drug aficionado is that the individual is sovereign, and the only harm that is significant is harm to that individual – harm to others can be dismissed as the deluded invention of prohibitionists. Mill rejects this, taking direct issue with those who abuse substances and making it clear that, because of the harm caused to others by this individual action, such abuse should be repressed by law. This was particularly far-sighted, given that he wrote it in l859, when drug availability was low and its abuse was virtually non-existent in enlightened democratic nations.

In the context of morality, law and punishment, Mill says ‘Whenever , in short there is definite damage, or definite risk of damage, either to an individual or to the public, the case is taken out of the province of Liberty and placed in that of morality or law’. Punishment is seen to be right ….’for such actions as are prejudicial to the interests of others …the individual is accountable [to society] and may be subjected either to social or legal punishment if society is of the opinion that the one or the other is requisite for its protection.’

False reliance on Mill is not the only example of drug liberalisers wishing to live in another time. One of the studies frequently cited as ‘evidence’ of the innocuous nature of cannabis is the 1896 Indian Hemp Commission report. A premier libertarian in my country, Dr. Colin Brewer, who is a senior member of the International Anti-Prohibition League, frequently eulogises Victorian times as an example of how we might have ‘drug peace’ instead of ‘drug war’.

Those who are more familiar with Mill’s work can take a more objective view. Gertrude Himmelfarb, editor of ‘On Liberty’ makes the point that ‘Mill’s principle of liberty is less applicable than before, given that our social reality today is infinitely more complicated.’ For those of us who are familiar with the drug culture, Himmelfarb might be accused of missing the point. The main purpose of ingesting drugs is precisely to depart from ‘our social reality today’. It follows that anything which facilitates or excuses this departure, including ‘cherry picking’ useful phrases from 150 year-old documents, is fair game.

3. America in the Seventies and later

Although the Office of Substance Abuse Prevention now rejects the term ‘responsible use’, back in the Seventies many people were more gullible. A rash of deaths from huffing (solvent sniffing abuse) produced a proposal to give guidance on less risky methods of sniffing. This followed on recommendations drafted in the early 1970s for education on ‘responsible use’ of alcohol, including recommendations for drinking and driving (as distinct from ‘not drinking and driving’). David Duncan (et al), writing in 1994 in the Journal of Drug Education2, identified this as the start of a paradigm shift; and he remarked that such shifts can often be huge but equally are often incremental, and so creep up on society unawares. Given that Duncan and colleagues were offering an unabashed argument in favour of harm reduction, he would presumably have wished for society to stay unawares – at least of the moves by his school of thought.

Society may have been unawares but some people certainly were not. One of those who read ‘Harm Reduction – a New Paradigm for Drug Education’ was Dr. Robert DuPont, a drug specialist who had earlier publicly recanted his support for permissive approaches to drugs – especially cannabis. DuPont sent a stiff letter to the editor of the Journal, saying that Duncan’s article was a regurgitation of the failed ‘ responsible use initiative of 20 years ago’ , and commenting that whilst there might be a place for harm reduction in tertiary prevention, to mitigate the effects on hard core users, harm reduction was a disastrous idea in primary prevention in schools., in that it would undercut the important goal of non-use. Typical of the ‘pearls of wisdom’ in the article was the proposition that ‘Harm reduction is consistent with the human experience …’ and ‘Prevention often increases harm’. Particularly fascinating were the ‘findings’ that moderate users of drugs were healthier psychologically and enjoyed higher life satisfaction than either abusers or non-users. You may also be intrigued to learn that marijuana users enjoy better social skills, a broader range of interests and more concern for the feelings of others than non-users. DuPont reacted emphatically. He was in a strong position to make criticism, since up to that point he had been a member of the Journal’s board of directors – but not any more; he resigned so that his name could ‘no longer be associated with this dangerous message’.

Others have – perhaps wishfully – perceived a paradigm shift in drug policy. In a retrospective paper entitled ‘A Kinder War’ the high priest of drug liberalisation, Arnold Trebach3 spoke of a change being in the air. There was, he perceived, greater understanding of ‘…[the] enduring reality of drug use, the absurdity of even attempting to create a drug-free society, and the need to treat drug users and abusers as basically decent human beings’. In l980 an organisation called the Drug Abuse Council spent $10 million , most of it from the Ford Foundation, to produce a 300 page report entitled ‘Facts About Drugs’. It included such gems as the statement that users are no threat to society, only abusers are; it supported the idea of giving heroin to heroin addicts and – not surprisingly – it proposed, as a Harm Reduction expedient, the decriminalisation of cannabis. It suggested that there should be a distinction between what it called ‘recreational use’ and ‘misuse that harms society’. It went on to say that ‘by adhering to an unrealistic goal of total abstinence from the use of illicit drugs, opportunities to encourage responsible drug using behaviour are missed’. The Drug Abuse Council comforted itself in the supposed validity of its recommendations by predicting that ‘…heavy use would prevail for the next few years….’. In fact from the year of their report’s publication and for the succeeding 11 years, America brought about an astonishing public health success which yielded an overall reduction in the use of all substances by all ages of 60%, removing 13 million drug-users from the slate. In this as in everything else the Drug Abuse Council had got it wrong.

Unfortunately, expression of Harm Reduction philosophy was not confined to the private sector. In 1996 at Emory College in Atlanta, Georgia, the first South Eastern Harm Reduction Conference4 was – appallingly – co-hosted by America’s prestigious Centre for Disease Control. Some of the very well known libertarian groups with which CDC rubbed shoulders included the Drug Policy Foundation, the Lindesmith Foundation and Eric Sterling’s Criminal Justice Policy Foundation. A specimen statement from this bizarre grouping was ‘In allowing users access to the tools needed to become healthier, we recognise the competency of their efforts to protect themselves, their loved ones, and their communities’. The notion that one way of becoming healthier might be to stop or indeed never start being drug users would presumably have been lost on this gathering.

At about the same time a much more negative assessment of Harm Reduction came from body called the Family Research Council. In the council’s magazine ‘Insight’ writer Rob Maginnis5 produced an exemplary analysis of Harm Reduction; he noted the support from William F Buckley and the ACLU (American Civil Liberties Union) which he cited as ‘a leading promoter of Harm Reduction’. ( I have been advised by one of my gurus – the marvellous Otto Moulton – to constantly watch out for the ACLU; they have always been a major player in drug liberalisation, yet they are rarely seen or mentioned in this context. A possible explanation for this protected position may be the high percentage of ACLU members or supporters amongst the media). Maginnis gives an early example of Harm Reduction in Holland in the l970s, when they were handing out needles in an attempt to limit the spread of hepatitis – this was before the AIDS epidemic had become apparent.

ACLU are quoted as asserting that ‘Harm Reduction assumes drug-users civil rights and individual autonomy should be respected, it treats drug users as important participants in the process of gaining and maintaining control over their drug use, and makes no moral judgement based solely upon an individuals’ use of drugs’.

American drug policy experts, Sue Rusche and Stephanie Haynes, whose assistance with this paper I gratefully acknowledge, both define the Seventies as a period in which responsible use was the lubricant that allowed a whole generation to slide down the slope into drug abuse. Rusche cites use prevalence figures which are stark and inescapable. In 1962, less than two per cent of the American population had had any encounter with any illegal drug. But by 1979, 34 per cent of adolescents, 65 per cent of high-school seniors and 70 per cent of young adults had tried drugs. It was responsible use policies which fuelled this escalation. Between 1973 and 1978, 11 American states decriminalised marijuana. Some 30,000 ‘head shops’ sprang up to supply a curious population with drug paraphernalia. At the same time schools drug education materials taught children how to ‘use drugs responsibly’.

At first, parents were unwitting collaborators in this unfortunate process, in that they were blind to what was going on. But when their eyes were opened, they reacted strongly and assertively. Parent groups, such as Sue Rusche’s National Families in Action, PRIDE – the Parents Resource Institute for Drug Education, and the National Federation of Parents for Drug-Free Youth sprang up all over America, until at one time there were more than 8000 such groups. The parent movement hammered the professionals who had swallowed the Harm Reduction notion, and the parents were extremely successful in producing a paradigm shift of their own, back to prevention. The parent movement defined ‘Drugs’ as any and all illegal drugs, plus any legal drugs (such as alcohol and tobacco) used illegally – for example by those who were under age. Simple strategy goals were defined:

– Prevent use before it starts.
– Persuade users to stop.
– Help those who can’t stop to find treatment so that they can.

Parent campaigns closed the Head shops and put a stop to any decriminalisation. Several states have more recently succumbed to expensive PR campaigns and have swallowed the notion of using raw cannabis as ‘snake oil’ medicine, which just goes to show that you can fool the people some of the time, if your advertising budget is big enough. But in terms of non-medical use, no state has decriminalised marijuana since 1978, and several have actually re-criminalised it. Under the sterling work of the Parent movement in the Seventies and later, the “responsible use” message went into the garbage can, to be replaced by the “no use” message.

Would that it were that straight forward today! How was it that the American parent and family movement, consisting almost entirely of volunteers, managed to intercept and prevent this collapse? I plan to give you an explanation later.

4. Britain in the Eighties and early Nineties

When my wife and I first became workers in the drugs field, for the first seven or eight years we worked in “Street agencies” – face-to-face with addicts, alcoholics, and others at various points along the continuum of substance abuse. We also worked to assist the families and significant others around the user, and we worked as specialist advisers to the teachers in more than 100 schools. We were blissfully ignorant of the storm clouds gathering in the Liverpool area, and we pursued our duties on exactly the same strategic basis as the American parent movement had eventually developed, that is:

Stop it starting. If it’s started, stop it.
If it’s still not stopped then help it to stop. Full stop!
The first signs of trouble came when we, in concert with other Drug Education Advisers across England and Wales started attending National drug education conferences. We might have expected a few radical statements in an arena populated by teachers, but we were unprepared for the virulence of what we heard. It quickly became apparent to us (but sadly not to enough of our contemporaries) that the Drug Education Advisers were being hijacked by a small but well-organised bunch of libertarians. The radicals all sounded like the Beatles, with their nasal Merseyside accents. Liverpool was COOL, so you listened to anyone who came from there – whether they were carrying a guitar or not.
One of these exponents of Scouse charisma was former teacher and Sociology/Criminology graduate Pat O’Hare, now better known as the Director of the International Harm Reduction Association. O’Hare and colleagues were well enough resourced to be able to run a glossy magazine – “the Mersey Drugs Journal” which in due course became the even more glossy “International Journal of Drug Policy” (IJDP). The list of contributing editors to in the IJDP read like a “Who’s Who” of drug libertarianism.

Liverpool in the eighties was a swirling pool of powerful undercurrents. Anger at its social and economic situation compared to the affluent south-east had flared up into serious riots in the Toxteth area of the city, in 1981. Although these eventually subsided, a sharp antagonism remained. Dislike for the Establishment as a species translated into identification with subculture – including drugs. Whether jealous comparison of economies was at the root of the next factor or not, the fact is that there was also antipathy towards all things American amongst the so-called ‘caring professions’ – not reflected in the general population – and out of this came a striving for new directions. The up-swelling of libertarian philosophies at this same time seemed to fuse naturally into the process. One specific outcome was a vigorous seeding of the idea of Harm Reduction; a seeding which took root not just in Liverpool but also – through energetic propagation – across the rest of Britain and internationally.

Whilst other British cities with a high incidence of drug use were obvious places for the Harm Reduction gospel to be spread, it was by no means limited to these centres. Obviously the onset of AIDS, at the start of the Eighties, was a catalyst in the development of Harm Reduction; as a drug agency worker at that time I can vividly remember that we were all deeply concerned at this new major health hazard, and we were invited to regard AIDS as a greater threat to society than drug abuse, a notion which helped to undermine the significance of drug abuse as something to be arrested or prevented. With hindsight it is clear that though AIDS is a terrible disease it is also preventable – as is drug use, and that of the two, widespread drug use is in fact a much bigger threat to society at large. Prevent drug use and you are well on the way to preventing AIDS.

Liverpool was one of the areas where AIDS was a particular threat, largely due to the already high prevalence of drug abuse. But what is not widely known is that this drug use, and in particular heroin use, did not generally involve injecting; ‘chasing the dragon’ (‘smoking’) was the preferred method. It was then that the Liverpool Harm Reduction activists entered the arena. . What happened next was related to me by the mother of two heroin addicts, who later became one of our leading Parent campaigners. In the words of one of the Harm Reduction crusaders, International Journal editor Peter McDermott6:

‘As a member of the Liverpool cabal who hijacked the term Harm Reduction and used it aggressively to advocate change during the late 1980s, I am able to say what we meant when we used the term. Its real value lay in its ability to signify a break with the style and substance of existing policies and practice. Harm Reduction implied a break with the old unworkable dogmas – the philosophy that placed a premium on seeking to achieve abstinence…’

McDermot goes on to talk about the importance of the ‘availability of a legal supply of clean drugs and good supplies of sterile injecting equipment’. Note that he incorporates legalisation and needles as part of the Harm Reduction package; note too that he talks about ‘supply’ – not ‘exchange’ of injecting equipment.

What McDermott and his colleagues meant by good supplies was more than just a rejection of the idea of needle exchange, a process which was supposed to be associated with dialogue between the drug worker and the user, with the aim of encouraging transition to a healthier lifestyle. McDermott & Co. had much more in mind than handing out a pack of needles without dialogue. The reality was, as the Liverpool mother told me, giving out needles by the bag full, and even giving out needles to known drug dealers, whom the police had agreed they would overlook if they found them carrying bagfuls of injecting equipment, to be given out with the drugs they sold. The net effect of this policy was that over a period, Liverpool moved from being an area with a low incidence of injecting drug users to one of a high incidence of injecting.

What the ‘Liverpool cabal’ had as their driving force may be judged from McDermott’s editorial of the time, that said:

‘…we must continue to guard Harm Reduction’s original radical kernel, without which it loses almost all of its political power.’

This movement, piously promoted in the name of treating drug users with respect, was in fact an exercise in radical politics. At least one of the ‘cabal’ was known to be a Stalinist.

The political angle was generally masked by rhetoric around the prevention of disease (and in particular AIDS) and the dignity of the user, but their preaching across Britain was both energetic and rapid. The message was promoted to drug workers, teachers, health workers and – not least – to police forces. In 1988 I sat in on a presentation to a regional health authority given by Alan Parry, another leading light in the Liverpool cabal. Parry outlined their policy: money would be moved from Abstinence and Detoxification into Harm Reduction. Prevention was dismissed as ineffective and they would therefore block any drug education scheme unless it could be proved to be innovative and with evaluation built in. When a questioner from the floor asked Parry what evaluation they were doing on their Harm Reduction work, he answered that there was very little funding available and so they would not be evaluating what they were doing – but they did feel it was ‘working well’.

[In this context, it is enlightening to hear the comment made a decade later to one of our member groups by Anna Bradley, at that time Director of Britain’s Institute for the Study of Drug Dependence. Pushed back from her opening gambit, which was to allege a lack of evidence for Prevention, Bradley was forced to concede that ‘… there is no research base for harm reduction’. She has now left ISDD.]

At the time that I took on additional work as an education advisor, assisting our local schools with their drug education work – if any – the whole of England and Wales, a population of some 50 million people, had its drug education coordinated by just over 100 people like myself. Most of these were teachers who had moved sideways into becoming Drug Education Coordinators. They had little or no knowledge of drugs and they were therefore eagerly looking for guidance from those they considered to be more experienced. One hundred is a very small number for a group of determined radicals to penetrate and persuade, and I saw this taking place at drug education conferences and training sessions at the time, without realising how wide-reaching and profound it was to become.

The British Harm Reduction movement did not content itself with staying in Britain – it soon established links elsewhere. We knew that those involved were using electronic means of communication globally long before e-mails were common. One of the ‘travelling salesmen’ was Julian Cohen, co-author of the ambiguously-titled ‘Taking Drugs Seriously’. Cohen7 argues for the ‘plusses of drug taking’; a typical item in Julian’s carpetbag is:

‘The primary prevention approach ignores the fun, the pleasure, the benefits of drug use … drug use is purposeful, drug use is fun for young people and drug use brings benefits to them.’

The European Movement for the Normalisation of Drug Policy (EMNDP) had its first meeting in Swindon, England in 1989. The Merseyside campaigners soon found themselves off to America [1988] where they were feted by libertarians, ‘in the street and on the Hill’. Amongst those on this promotional trip was Pat O’Hare, now Director of the International Harm Reduction Association. O’Hare and colleagues presented a paper8 with the innocuous title of ‘Drug Education, a Basis for Reform’ to a Maryland conference, convened by a relatively new organisation called the Drug Policy Foundation, about which we now know a little more! Thanks to Otto Moulton I have a tape of what was actually said by O’Hare and his companion Ian Clements at that conference; it bears little relationship to the written paper. O’Hare told his largely American audience that ‘England has absolutely nothing to learn from America’ and added that ‘…this 12-step rubbish is absolute cr*p’. One member of the audience made so bold as to ask O’Hare ‘What are the 12-steps ?’ . ‘I don’t know’ he responded. (but he did know they were ‘cr*p’). He then invited his audience to consider the notion that:

‘If kid’s can’t have fun with drugs when they’re kids when can they have fun with them?’

O’Hare was demonstrating that when it comes to radicalism, we Brits can show the former colonies a thing or two.

One milestone on the Harm Reduction road was the establishment of European Cities on Drug Policy (ECDP). Their first International Conference, held in 1990, in the German city of Frankfurt, produced the so-called Frankfurt Resolution, calling for heroin distribution to addicts, decriminalisation of cannabis and the provision of shooting galleries. It initiated a recruiting drive, and one of its first disciples was Scotland, much to the disgust of our Scottish prevention colleagues. According to Glasgow’s Families For Change organiser Maxie Richards “…harm reduction has become a vested interest of the Social Service industry, and with only one purpose: keeping social peace at the cost of dispensing drugs”.

5. Taking stock. Where are we now?

We’re in big trouble, that’s where we are. Through a combination of strong adversaries and weak friends we can see the Harm Reduction Movement approaching critical mass in several countries. In England we have many, perhaps most schools adopting a Harm Reduction approach to their education, and the libertarian elite are well entrenched in the Education ministry’s corridors. A self-appointed and exclusive pressure group of educationists and related disciplines, the Drug Education Forum, seems curiously able to protagonise – with impunity – a philosophy which effectively neuters prevention in our schools. We do our best to alert and galvanise those in control, and we have had several meetings with Keith Hellawell, whom you heard earlier. But even a senior advisor like Keith, with all the experience of being a Chief Constable to stiffen him, is likely to find that changing the direction of our government officials is like boxing with cotton wool. It is small comfort – in fact no comfort at all – for colleagues in Australia to tell me that the situation is even worse there, and has been for at least a decade, with Harm Reduction education being the mandatory norm, and cannabis decriminalisation a fact of life in some areas.

I don’t think I need to take time in this gathering by telling you about Switzerland, since I am reasonably sure that you are familiar with that disaster area. An avalanche of Harm Reduction. When looking for the reasons why Switzerland has gone downhill, one explanation may lie in the fact that the director of the so-called ‘Swiss Experiment’ also happened to be the President of the Swiss branch of the International Anti-prohibition League!

Similarly, I believe you will know a good deal about the Netherlands. Their particular brand of Harm Reduction was visible for many years before drugs became the issue, and cannabis cafes opened. As a young man in the late Fifties, I can remember walking in astonishment along Canal Street in Amsterdam, looking at brightly lit and decorated shop-windows in which the ‘Item for Sale’ was not a washing machine; it was a human being.

6. How did we get into this mess?

In reflecting on the development of Harm Reduction, one stark contrast emerges. How was it that there are two virtually identical philosophies; one from only 20 years ago, operating under the title of ‘Responsible Use’ – was quickly identified as ‘The Emperor’s New Clothes’ and kicked out, and yet here we are now, faced with Harm Reduction deeply embedded, with its tentacles reaching everywhere – even into government ? What caused the difference ?

If I asked all of you here today to come up with one word as an explanation, that word would probably be ‘Soros’. In one sense you would be right; the money that George has injected into the libertarian movement, compared to that which we can marshal, is like us attacking their artillery with our cavalry. We British tried that once, it was heroic but futile.

I would like to offer you the deeper explanation of why Harm Reduction flourished where Responsible Use failed, in the push for liberalisation.

It was in the 1960s both in the UK and in the USA that a sea change in educational approaches really took hold; morals-based education gave way to individual rights. Apparently disparate subjects such as reading, mathematics, history, geography and religious education fell victim to the excesses of an overheated individual rights approach in which some pupils could even decide whether to participate in classes or not. It goes without saying that lifestyles subjects such as sex education, drugs education and personal/social education would be swept along at the front of this wave.

One book you might care to read, if you want to get into this in more depth, called ‘The Great Disruption’ – is by Francis Fukuyama9. Fukuyma concludes that there has been a major paradigm shift. Who created that shift ?

I believe the answer lies in a process known as Values Clarification, also associated with Outcome-Based Education. This originated in Wisconsin, USA in the 1970’s under the leadership of a man whom we regard as one of the fathers of psychotherapy – Carl Rogers, together with Professor Sidney Simon and psychologist William Coulson. Rogers started with a very laudable concept i.e. that pupils should be facilitated to discover, and thus reach consensus on values which are beneficial to society. Sadly, within a short time the concept was diverted into one in which pupils were facilitated to discover values which were beneficial to them as individuals. External constraints were to be viewed as obstacles to the individual’s ‘Self-Actualisation’ – as Abraham Maslow, another contemporary of Rogers termed it. Thus, the notion was advanced that ‘… children should be left to create their own autonomous world, and that adults would be anti-democratic if they tried to pass their values to their children’. This was echoed by co-author Sidney Simon in the statement ‘..the school must not be allowed to continue fostering the immorality of morality. An entirely different set of values must be nourished’.

Similar approaches were observed in Gestalt-based education practices in Switzerland. A typical guiding assertion was that ‘Morals are regarded as obstacles which hinder the development of ‘my authentic self’ and the teacher has no right to impose his sense of values about what is right or wrong’. In Australia, classroom techniques resembling group therapy were deployed to produce changes in children’s attitudes and behaviour and challenge their previously held values.

Carl Rogers eventually expressed his own concern about the monster he had created, referring to it as ‘this damned thing’ and wondering ‘did I start something that is in some fundamental way mistaken, and will lead us off into paths that we will regret?’. But by then the wave had swept things beyond his reach. Britain now has a Journal of Values Education which invites school classes to discuss such questions as ‘Are drugs really bad for you?’, ‘What are the benefits and risks of drug taking?’ and ‘If adults drink alcohol why should I not take Ecstasy ?’

I believe that study10 of the Values Clarification process and related movements helps explain how we have reached where we are today. This is why Harm reduction has taken root, when Responsible Use died off quickly after a first flourish of growth, having fallen on stony ground.

But we cannot blame Rogers for everything that has happened in the last 20 to 30 years, anymore than we can blame George Soros. One is an idealist and the other an opportunist, but they both sowed seeds in grounds which we ourselves have made fertile.

External factors across and within society have, by their confluence, brought about enormous changes. Emancipation of the young, their greater disposable income, disempowerment of traditional authority – including parents and teachers, a more materialistic society and a ‘me first’ outlook, dismantling of ‘community’, the highlighting of ‘personal rights’ at the same time as the downplaying of ‘responsibilities’, effects of structural unemployment and the need for a more mobile workforce – this last factor adding to the breakdown of the nuclear family. The ‘contribution’ of the professions in being part of the problem rather than part of the solution is a major influence, as Professor Norman Dennis11 makes clear. I could say more, but you get the picture …

And the results of this we can now see in our undisciplined classrooms; in a police force which is perceived as sometimes more ready to arrest victims than criminals in order to reduce the harm to the latter; in drug workers campaigning to free colleagues who have apparently allowed drug dealing to be pursued on their premises, and in Education Authorities that will not allow school nurses to issue Aspirin or Paracetamol for fear of a negative reaction, but are receptive to the idea of issuing ‘morning after pills’ to young girls without their parents’ knowledge.

Harm Reduction is no more than an extension of this much deeper and wider paradigm shift. Addressing only Harm Reduction in seeking to strengthen our society against structural collapse is an over-simplification that could prove fatal.

7. What should be our rational response?

This paper is about the history rather than the solution, but I don’t feel I can leave you without at least trying to offer some provocation. Here are a few possibilities:

Option 1 – find another George

Option 2 – react less, act more. Define the ‘Harm’

Option 3 – identify and study the processes that brought us to today, and from this
develop promising corrective strategies

Option 4 – carry on doing what you are doing, but better

Option 5 – save the world, and in doing so

Option 6 – take heart from good news such as this12 .

REFERENCES

1. Mill. J.S. ‘On Liberty’ (1985 Penguin Classics)

2. Duncan et al ‘Harm Reduction’ – an emerging new paradigm for Drug Education (1994 Journal of Drug Education)

3. Trebach A. ‘A Kinder War’ (1993 Scientific American)

4. Drug Policy Foundation/Center for Disease Control ‘Southeastern Harm Reduction Conference (1996 Conference Advisory)

5. Maginnis R. ‘Harm Reduction’ – an Alternative to the Drug War ?’ (1996 Family Research Council)

6. McDermott P. ‘Editorial’ (1992 International Journal on Drug Policy)

7. Cohen J. Clements I. Kay L. ‘Taking Drugs Seriously’
(1991 Healthwise)

8. O’Hare P, Cohen J, Clements I. ‘Drug Education – a Basis for Reform’ (1988 Drug Policy Foundation Conference)

9. Fukuyama F. ‘The Great Disruption’ (1999 The Free Press)

10. Stoker P. ‘Moralising….Demoralising: The Fight over Personal and Social Education’ (2000 pre-publication edition)

11. Dennis Prof. N. ‘Social Irresponsibility – How the Social Affairs Intelligentsia have Undermined Morality’ (1997 The Christian Institute)

12. Sullivan Dr. L ‘Drug Policy – a Tale of Two Countries’ (1999 News Weekly)

 

HARM REDUCTION AND THE ABUSE OF LIBERTY

by Peter Stoker – Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance
Update of paper originally written for ECOD conference 1994, from conversation between Peter Stoker and David Partington, then Director of Yeldall Christian Centres.

Harm Reduction, Decriminalisation, Legalisation, Cannabis the Peaceful Cure all these contentious issues are deeply interlinked. One must therefore consider them in combination

Thousands of years before Christ, advice was already being given as to moderation in drinking alcohol. One might say this was one of the earliest examples of Harm Reduction. It stemmed from the philosophy that if someone is irrevocably set on ingesting a substance they had best do it with the least risk.. But the only sure way to avoid risk was, and still is, not to partake. For example, “Eve, leave that apple alone or you’ll be sorry”. Abstinence can in some ways be regarded as the ultimate Harm Reduction, not just for alcohol and other drugs but also in other health-risk areas such as sexual behaviour. The Harm Reduction guidance for tobacco is, in fact, “Just Say No”. This raises an instructive point of comparison between Harm Reduction for alcohol and for tobacco. Both have been around for thousands of years. Neither has been prohibited for most of this time. Both have very slick and highly-financed PR and sales promotion. And yet in recent years there has been a crusade against tobacco, i.e. abstinence is best, compared with moderation as the rule for alcohol. A cynic might say the difference is in the manufacturer’s PR. But this is not borne out by observation. What has tipped the balance against tobacco has been acceptance by society of what they see as the hard facts, of which the death toll (100,000 per year) is only one. Even though alcohol is no slouch in this context, accounting for any where up to 50,000 deaths per year and is the Number One drug of abuse by youth, (cannabis comes second), there are no signs of people Just Saying No to a tipple. Alcoholism still continues to occur, in priests and paupers, but drink is here to stay, it seems. Why?

Perhaps the answer lies in the Harm Reduction aspect of alcohol. In contrast with most if not all other drugs you can take just a little alcohol as a beverage, i.e. for thirst, or taste, or social/religious rituals. Or you can use it as a drug, by taking higher volumes, and risk the consequences – health, social, legal, and of course spiritual. We say to ourselves that controlled beverage drinking is what we do. Uncontrolled excess is what other people do. But because we can handle it, it should remain legal and those others need to learn their Harm Reduction lessons better. This is a more tenable position with legal drugs, including pharmaceuticals, than with street drugs, precisely because more is known. (Though the professionals still let us in for unexpected Harm with these from time to time; witness Thalidomide, Valium, Ativan, and so on.) Strengths, or to put it another way, toxicities, are marked on the bottle or packet, and there may even be a sober little message from the government. Research into the negative effects of alcohol or tobacco has been produced over long years by many august bodies. Not a little of this research is funded by tobacco or alcohol manufacturers, which makes for a fair degree of scepticism in the reader.

STREET INCREDIBILITY
Street drugs are another matter entirely. There are no Quality Controllers in the back-street labs, or in the fields of the Golden Crescent, the Golden Triangle, the hinterlands of Medellin and Cali. What you buy is a lottery; that powder might be worthless talc or something that boosts you so high that you never wake up; not in this world, anyway. The more severe consequences are more likely to happen to the inexperienced or to the recently relapsed, therefore Harm Reduction advice must take account of where the user is in what some euphemistically entitle “their drug-using career”. (For ‘Harm Reduction’ read ‘Career Guidance’ !) That amazing new dance drug you’ve just paid £15 for could be a caffeine tablet dyed blue. Your £5 ‘trip’ could have nothing more hallucinogenic than the picture of the Pink Panther on the top. Even the grass you buy could be freshly mown. Things change rapidly too. The Mexican grass which Haight-Ashbury hippies smoked to get high often rated little stronger than 0.5% THC (Tetra-hydra-cannabinol, the bio-active molecule that stones you). Today you can buy ‘Skunk’ and other genetically modified varieties of “Nederweed” which can go as high as 25-30% THC. And who is around to advise you on this? The man who is selling it, that’s who.

That astonishing growth in strength is equivalent to being advised to take one aspirin a day “for a healthier heart”, and the day after being told to take 50 aspirins a day for the same reason. Would you do it? With aspirin? Well, young people do it every day with street drugs. And that certainly includes the spuriously-entitled “soft” drugs. Harm reduction with street drugs and related behaviour needs to happen, because harm is happening. We may, some of us anyway, still be working to encourage people to choose a lifestyle free of drug abuse but meanwhile we must strive to minimise the harm that is happening now, albeit to a minority. Today’s minority will become tomorrow’s majority if we get this wrong. But we need to recognise that in offering Harm Reduction advice (which itself may not be welcomed by the user) we are addressing the use of dynamically variable substances by dynamically variable people in dynamically variable social settings. Responsible behaviour may be no more than accidental in people doing irresponsible things, like abusing drugs. Harm Reduction can help, but if you are delivering it you need to approach the process with a certain humility as to the outcome you are likely to achieve.

ABUSE WITHIN ABUSE
Empowerment can come from Harm Reduction. Empowerment for the individual user to feel more in control of their life, less fearful of the damage they may be causing themselves or others. Perhaps, in this more stable setting, they can become better able to look at the longer term and make some positive decisions.

That is the good side of Harm Reduction. The side that says, in all moral conscience, one cannot withhold damage-limiting information from people just because their current behaviour is outside your norms. Deliver a message for life free of drug abuse by all means, but also give them what they need to stay as healthy as they can; to stay alive, in extreme cases. Where a darker side of Harm Reduction occurs is when it is hijacked by unscrupulous groups for their own purposes. The seemingly solid rock of logic which, when you pick it up, crumbles to dust in your hand, but not before revealing some nasty things underneath. This should hardly be surprising; many a good idea in history has been perverted to serve aims radically different to those which gave birth to the idea in the first place. In this case the hijackers are an alliance of drug-legalisers, libertarians and radical educationists. (Other forces including politics, commerce and organised crime are also in play). Their broad strategy is something like this:

Spread the (false) idea that you can’t prevent drug abuse. Spread the thought that it is morally wrong and “value-laden” to try to do so.
Argue for the removal of values in teaching. (In fact a “value vacuum” philosophy is an extremely value-laden concept, leaving children prey to “someone else’s” values sooner or later).
Allege that ‘everyone’ is doing it, or ‘millions’ are. (Truth is 8 out of 10 youth either never try or else give up after two or less tries. As for ‘millions’ – even if 5 million in Britain are, which is very doubtful, this means 51 million are not).
Spread the (tendentious) idea that as all youth might use drugs (but teaching them not to is “wrong”) what is needed is Harm Reduction teaching for all children in schools, with no guidance as to use or no use. (The inference the young people will draw is self evident).
Tell parents to “switch off”, it’s just youth rites of passage, you were young once, you smoke, so lay off preaching, the kids are alright, etc .etc.
Spread the (false) idea that cannabis is harmless. (Therefore needing no Harm Reduction limits).
POTTY IDEAS
This last one, the “Harmless Cannabis” myth, is strategically very important to the legalisers. They see it as the crucial first domino which could topple the drug array. And if it doesn’t, well at least it’ll be nice to get stoned legally at last. This is why they fight so hard to keep you believing there is ‘no Harm’, ‘no problem’. A library of over 12,000 worldwide accredited research papers (held at Mississippi University), testifying to its harmfulness, is studiously ignored. Hard evidence shows brain cells damaged or even killed; heart, lungs and endocrine impaired, immune system broken down, faster lung cancer than tobacco, paranoid psychoses, schizophrenia precipitated, addiction in physical as well as psychological terms, etc., etc. The list goes on, but is steadfastly shunned by the pot lobby, whose rallying cry seems to be, “Don’t confuse me with the facts!”. Blind faith and epidemic denial are the rule. Obviously no one has told these lobbyists that the toxicity of substances is not decided by debate.
An especially significant point concerns the areas of Health (and therefore of Harm) other than the physical, i.e. intellectual, emotional, spiritual, environmental and social. These areas are totally blanked out by the drug apologists – mainly because they have no answer; this is harm they cannot reduce. Speculative and extravagant claims as to pot’s medicinal value are made, all of them discredited years ago but still exhumed regularly and reverently. In fact, the medicinal value of cannabis is limited, more than overshadowed by the negative side-effects, and other drugs do the jobs better.

Within the last few years the BMA, the Lords Science & Technology Committee, and the prestigious Institute of Medicine in the USA have all come down against the use of raw (unprocessed) cannabis as medicine, and certainly not when smoked. Every relevant medical institution in the USA has tested and rejected it as medicine for any ailment, from glaucoma to MS, from cancer to HIV/AIDS. Faced with the 8-parameter approval schedule the Food and Drug Administration apply to every drug, cannabis could not even pass one. The French Government have also concluded that cannabis can no longer be defined as a ‘soft’ drug; in fact they believe it should be termed ‘hard’. The media persists in promoting ‘debates’ in which the prevention worker is faced with the user(s) in wheelchairs; the former is then harangued by the interviewer for ‘denying’ this useful medicine to the sick.

Medical use is a hostage to legalisation. Don’t take my word for it; as long ago as 1980 Keith Stroup, the then director of NORML, the oldest pro-pot campaign in the world, was publicly quoted as saying “We will use the medical marijuana issue as a red herring to give pot a good name”. And they did. Even so, were medical use of extracts to be proved valid in future (and it’s nowhere in sight yet) this would only be a basis for medical prescription, and certainly not a basis for relaxing laws on use for non-medical purposes. So, there is much to be rejected in the pleadings of legalisers. And yet we, the public, see through the tobacco propaganda, so what is different about cannabis? What is different is where the media stand. And they mainly stand, apart from some exemplary exceptions, shoulder-to-shoulder with the cannabis lobby, refusing to let evidence impede their ‘journalistic privilege’. This compulsion to romanticise pot can only partly be explained by the search for newsworthy copy. Quite what the whole truth is, it would be fascinating to find out.

The combined thrust of the above-listed radical ploys is to gradually shift public attitudes, to convince us that drug abuse is no more than the equivalent of a little scrumping “when you were a lad”, youth should be empowered without “adult-imposed” value systems, their drug taking (now or in the future) should be facilitated with teachings of D-I-Y Harm Reduction. And of course they would be at less risk of “legal harm” (i.e. arrest and penalty) if the stuff were legalised… …decriminalisation is quite definitely only the first step.

MY LIBERTY, RIGHT OR WRONG
Legalisation (and its half sister, Decriminalisation) is not a very bright idea, owing more to pipe dreams than reality, as you might expect. Everywhere it has been tried things have got worse and drug use has increased. Sweden, China, Spain, Italy; there are just a few of the many examples of countries who painfully discovered what are the real costs of relaxing drug laws. The ‘Mecca’ for the drugs pilgrims is of course Amsterdam.

Protagonists allege that drug use there has not been increased by decriminalisation, but this is based on a survey known to be flawed, and other surveys which give more breakdown show youth use – the critical parameter – increasing by between two and four times. The evidence on the streets is that pot-purveying ‘coffee’ shops have soared from less than 200 before law change to more than 8000 now. Are we really supposed to believe that all these retail outlets are flourishing on the trade that 200 once made do with? Incidentally Holland is also the most crime-prone country in Europe, hardly a coincidence. But perhaps the most irrefutable evidence (which is why the legalisers try to studiously ignore it) comes from Alaska, a modern state with a population of millions. Decriminalisation of cannabis was introduced, with the support of the police, nearly 20 years ago, after hearing all the arguments now being peddled over here, such as: general use won’t go up; problem use won’t go up; use of other drugs won’t go up, and crime will of course come down. Reviewed in the early 90s, this policy was found to have produced enormous increases in general use, and in problem use, and in use of all other drugs, and – shockingly for many – crime went up. Faced with this incontrovertible proof, the police and other authorities enacted a repeal, returning drug possession to the illegal status it deserves as a negative influence on society.

——————————————————————————–

At least in part Harm Reduction is a response to a feeling of being overwhelmed by drugs, a feeling which the media do much to foster. There is no need to surrender, nor even to encourage self fulfilling prophecies. Several countries have marked reduced usage levels – the US by 60% in the 1980–92 period; Sweden, from critical levels down to a few percent in recent years; Eastern Belgium, by 20-30% compared to neighbouring provinces… the list goes on. What characterises these achievements is that they have all been pro-active, actively facilitating prevention whilst at the same time providing intervention and treatment. Harm Reduction is seen as just one aspect of intervention i.e. it has a place, but it should be kept in its place.

These and other countries have painfully learnt an important lesson; that the pursuit of Liberty is valid but the pursuit of Licence is not – and that Liberty which harms or jeopardises other is not worthy of the name. A sense of proportion about all aspects of drug services is needed. When addressing this vexed subject it may be helpful to remember a few simple guidelines, based on some essential truths:

Most people do not want a drug-addled society.
Legalisation is Fool’s Gold; don’t you be the fool.
Drug Prevention works well if you do it well, and empowers young people more than drug use ever will.
“Liberation” is not achieved by ingesting toxic substances.
Be alive to the distinction between “Liberty” and “Licence”.
It is healthier in every respect to rely not on substances but on strengthening one’s own resources. In this context, the search for one’s own spirituality can never be other than impeded in a consciousness which has been artificially distorted.
Harm Reduction is appropriate for those that use and not for those who don’t; (you’ll make your own sensible judgements about those on the fringe).
And, as ever, the most effective and balanced answer is a sensitive mix of Prevention (even for users), Harm Reduction for users, and the other safety nets of Treatment and Rehabilitation beneath these initial strategies.
Let us, on this basis, therefore all strive to promote Health more than just reduce Harm, remembering that in all the great religions, and in secular bodies such as the World Health Organisation, Health is defined not just as physical competency, but also intellectual, social health, emotional, and environmental, and, especially in the light of this conference, spiritual health.

 

Norwegian intravenous drug abuse has increased dramatically. At the beginning of the 1990s, there were between 4 000 and 5 000 intravenous drug abusers, in the year 2001 the number was estimated to be between 10 000 and 14 000. Notwithstanding close to 40 years of contacts with injecting drug abusers, I have never understood the details of the injecting per se. I have been in drug dens, seen injecting drug abusers, but never observed the injections being performed. Only when I visited Norway, I had the opportunity of closely studying the various phases constituting the injecting of heroin.

In the public debate and in research it has been overlooked that many drug abusers, when preparing the drugs, thrust their syringes into the same solution, that the solution is filtered through cotton swabs or cigarette filters, that addicts often have ulcerated skin chaps, that the intravenous abuse of drugs most often is a collective activity performed in a contagious environment.

At the “Plata” in Oslo, an open square close to the Railway Station, I could follow the drugs trade and the injecting during two weekends. At Christmas time 2003 and in March 2004, I took approximately 300 photographs. The pictures show e.g. how the drug addicts manage “patients difficult to inject”, i.e. themselves. The injection technique is occasionally highly sophisticated, which is seen in the pictures. Puncturing the vena jugulars interna seemed to be ordinary business.

In Norway a distribution of syringes and needles through the “needle bus” started already in 1988. Today, the distribution is performed at special clinics all over the country. Approximately 2 million syringes are distributed only in Oslo. Norway has – just as Sweden – the goal of a “drug-free society”, but the actual development is in the opposite direction. In February 2005 the first injection room was opened.

The main drug in Oslo is the brown heroin, which – depending on quality – requires citric acid to be prepared. Rohypnol is appreciated as a supplement.

The Rohypnol tablets had a blue protective cover. In order to dissolve the active substance, the drug abusers sucked off the coloured cover, thus the turquoise colour of their teeth.

The drug trade went on day and night, however mostly during daytime. During the night it moved further up into the adjacent street Tollbugata, where syringes and needles and can be picked up anonymously in a kiosk-like operation, commonly called “the street kitchen”, open from 11 AM to 11 PM. In spite of hundreds of drug addicts moving around the area, the atmosphere was peaceful.

Most of them were fairly “drowsy” from opiates and tranquil, except when they experience a withdrawal or a difficult business transaction. The age of those present, I estimated to vary between 18 and 50 years, and most of them had progressed far into their drug careers. During the weekend, the clientele became younger, when youngsters from other parts of the country took the train to Oslo in order to buy illegal drugs.

Staff at the needle exchange station experienced a conflict upon turning away people under the age of 18, which is the age limit for receiving free needles. I think that when a youngster lingers in a clearly unsuitable environment such as the “Plata”, he or she is to be helped out of it. Young girls, and also young men, are sought after in drug abusing coteries. When they have become dependent upon a drug dealer, they turn into a real treasure chest. The girl and the boy are sent out to make money as prostitutes or to act as middlemen in drug selling or fencing. It is easier for a young, healthy person to hide his or her criminal intentions than it is for an addict scarred by drug abuse.

When it was time for injecting, a camp was set up at the Plata. Some addicts retreated into a parking garage or sat down under lorries down by the harbour a few hundred meters away. Most of the people of whom I took photos were injecting together with one or more partners, with whom the heroin was prepared and shared. The syringe and the needle were clean when they were taken out of the package. That was, however, not the case with the spoon or the cup, where the heroin was mixed; neither were the water, the citric acid, nor the Rohypnol, which was added to the heroin.

Practice makes perfect: when necessary one drug abuser helped another to locate veins hard to find. They would inject into the head, the neck, into arms and legs, everywhere blood could be drawn from a vein. When the veins would no longer serve, the injections were taken intramuscularly.

What conclusion?

Intravenous drug abusers after a while develop skin wounds and injection scars, and they are not particularly prim and proper. If they were to protect themselves against blood borne infections, the same way as we do in the medical services, they would need not only clean syringes and needles, but also clean mixing bowls, sodium chloride and protective gloves. Of course they would then neither dip the needles into the same solution, nor have unprotected sex.

The risk of infections spreading through paraphernalia was recently addressed in a study of injecting drug addicts. Even though the syringes and needles were handed out and collected by specially trained staff and most of the addicts never shared syringes, the frequency of hepatitis C increased in the group. The scientists’ conclusion was that the needle exchange program did not curb the hepatitis infection. Instead they called for “a culturally, sensitive behavioural intervention” in order to protect addicts from the infection (Sarkar K et al., The Lancet, vol. 361, 2003).

Their conclusions are well in agreement with my observations in Oslo.

The needle exchange programme is evidently not effective in stopping the spread of either HIV not hepatitis. If anything, the needle exchange programme is likely to be treacherous in creating a false sense of security.

There are probably only two effective methods of protecting the spread of infection. The most effective method is that the individual drug abuser becomes drug-free. The best effort by society in the short run is to support regular testing and counselling among active drug abusers.

Source: SFAI Tidningen, the Official Journal of the Swedish Association for Anaesthesia and Intensive Care, vol. 11, no. 2, May 2005. Tr. J.H.

“ Effective Alternatives to Harm Reduction”

by Peter Stoker, C.Eng., Director, National Drug Prevention Alliance

ABSTRACT:

An orchestrated effort to radically change drug policy from prevention to acquiescence operates under an alias of ‘Harm Reduction’. This paper explains how this so-called harm reduction differs from the traditional ‘real’ harm reduction, and evaluates the various techniques advanced by harm reductionists which – in effect – facilitate drug use. A comparison is drawn with prevention in its modern form, and recommendations are given for a more positive orientation to drug strategy Conclusions are offered.

1. WHAT IS THE BACKGROUND?

1.1 What is ‘real’ harm reduction? What is pseudo ‘harm reduction’?

Terms like Risk Reduction, Damage Limitation, Risk Minimisation, and so on have been around for decades, but it is only in the last 25 years that their meaning has been cynically subverted.

Traditionally, it has always been the practice of drug workers, when working with drug users, to find out in detail, the answers to ‘The Five Ws’ – (What? Which? Where? When? and With whom?) … what substances being used; by which method, in what quantity, how often, and in what circumstances (such as used on own or used in groups, and in what type of place). All these questions are in addition to the simple but crucial Sixth Question ‘Why are you using’ ? – but from the answers to the Five Questions the drug worker will consider what might be done to reduce the risk of damage in the period before the user actually commits to giving up his or her use. The overall goal is cessation of use, and this transitory intervention to reduce risk has always been seen as part of the process of stabilising, of ‘straightening out’ the drug user in preparation for a healthier life style.

This is what you might call ‘Real harm reduction’ – but since that term – ‘ Harm Reduction’ has been so deeply discredited in recent years, it would be better to use some entirely different name for the traditional process.

Let’s turn now to the term ‘Harm Reduction’ as it is generally used today. This is what I term ‘so-called harm reduction’.

The present process which masquerades under the name Harm Reduction was born sometime in the 1980s, in the north-west of England. As a small number of radical activists in the Liverpool and Manchester area were considering how they could undermine the legal system around drugs and legitimise their use. Exactly why they would want to do this we will probably never know, but we do know that some of them were drug-users themselves, and we also know that some were political activists, for example Stalinists. Tomas Hallberg will be giving you much more detail on this, in his paper “100 Years of Harm Reduction” – and I can also refer you to a paper I presented in Visby, Gotland, at the 2001 Hassela World Drug Conference – the paper is entitled “The History of Harm Reduction” and you can access it for our website.

1.2 Why were ‘real’ and ‘so-called’ harm reduction invented?

It should be self-evident, but just to spell it out, ‘real’ harm reduction was invented simply to reduce harm; ‘so-called’ or ‘pseudo’ harm reduction was invented to advance libertarianist radical agendas.

When you look at the quality of so-called harm Reduction, it is pretty pathetic anyway. It trots out a few limp recommendations which anyone who has come near a drug would know anyway. This exposes the dishonesty of the process; it has been dressed up to look like a ‘medical assistance’ programme, when its real purpose is to (a) send the public to sleep and (b) to suggest that drug use can be ‘managed’ safely.

You don’t have to take my word for this – listen to what the architects of Harm Reduction actually said. These are the words of Peter McDermott, one of the original Liverpool radicals:

“As a member of the Liverpool cabal who hijacked the term Harm Reduction and used it aggressively to advocate change during the late l980’s, I am able to say what we meant when we used the term. Its real value lay in its ability to signify a break with the style and substance of existing policies and practice. Harm Reduction implied a break with the old unworkable dogmas – the philosophy that placed a premium on seeking to achieve abstinence”


and McDermott went on to say

“…we must continue to guard harm reduction’s original radical kernel, without which it loses almost all of its political power”.

The tactics deployed by those activists, and adopted by many more since, were carefully thought out. They sought to soothe public alarm about drug misuse, they tried to make drug use seem as a normal as possible, indeed they even tried to persuade people that there were benefits to drug use which everyone should recognise – and of course they argued that one of the greatest harms of drug use flowed from its illegality, therefore – they claimed – great benefit to society would result from drug legalisation. ‘Harm’ would be a thing of the past.

In studying the changes in drug use across America, and applauding the enormous achievement of reduction of use between 1980 and 1992, the question must be asked ‘What happened after 1992? Why did things go wrong?’ There are a number of contributory factors; for example, both the government and the parents took their eye off the ball, believing that the problem was solved for all time. Probably some of the material produced in the 80s was starting to look a little tired, and quite possibly the campaigners against drugs who had started their battles in the late 70s were starting to look a little tired too!

But there was one factor that separated the 90s from the 70s. Money. Lots of it. When the original pro-cannabis campaigners in the 70s started their efforts, they had to rely on a relatively small bankroll from a man already known for his interest in libertarianism – Hugh Hefner, the inventor of ‘Playboy’. Hefner donated around $10 million , but over a lengthy period. One other man in the 1990s made that figure look ridiculous. The banker for legalisation in the 90s was George Soros, the man who has made $billions from currency speculation, and now applies his fortune to trying to run the world his way. The most notable example of this came last year, when he pledged some $10 million to ‘America Coming Together’ – an organisation dedicated to preventing George Bush from getting back into the White House. He has also invested large sums in the promotion of euthanasia – but shows no signs of wishing to try it for himself.

But it is in the field of drug law reform that George really gets his cheque book out. In an interview with the Press Association, published in ‘Time’ magazine in 1997, Soros said the had ‘spent more than $90 million in recent years to weaken drug laws’. Byron Wein, a friend of Soros, told Time ‘You must understand. He thinks he’s been anointed by God to solve insoluble problems’. Soros’ method of ‘solving’ problems was to instruct drug campaigners to ‘… target a few winnable issues, such as medical marijuana …’. Campaigns funded by Soros have included paying students a bonus for every name they added to petitions for referenda … not very different from ‘buying votes’.

Soros has continued to be the Godfather of the legalisation movement. A few other rich libertarians have put their money into the pot (in both senses of the word) – but nobody comes close to George when it comes to money for old dope …

1.3 But what ‘harm’ are they talking about?

It is when we start to examine the actual Harms that the so-called harm Reductionists say should be reduced that the real truths start to emerge. The ‘Harm Reductionists’ are preoccupied with actual or perceived harms to the user; they are totally user-focused. Their aim is not prevention of use, but facilitation of use. And when it comes to considerations of harm, their focus is extremely narrow; of the seven possible elements of total health they are only concerned with one or two who at most – that is, with physical harm – and with one very particular aspect of social harm.

Their gospel is that if you limit physical harm, and if you remove the social harm to users which comes from being on the wrong side of the law, then you have done all you need to do to create an acceptable situation for society.

1.4 What ‘harms’ are they are ignoring?

There are many harms which are being ignored, and I would suggest that these can be considered under three headings:

– Harm to the users themselves

– Harm to other people, and

– Harm (to users or others) during ‘pre-addiction’ stages


As I have already said, legalisers and libertarians narrowly focus on physical harm and what they might term “Harm from illegality”. You may well have heard them say that drug users are “otherwise law-abiding” – meaning that apart from this one ‘different’ behaviour, they are a good citizens. Would we be prepared to accept the argument that paedophiles, or burglars, or murderers are “otherwise law-abiding” – and that apart from this one ‘minor lapse’, they are good citizens?

Let’s examine the three areas of neglect in measuring total harm:

Harm to the users themselves

For centuries now there has been a definition of what health comprises. You will find broadly similar definitions in most of the ancient religions, but you’ll also find a very similar definition from bodies such as the World Health Organisation. Health is deemed to include not just physical aspects, but also mental aspects, intellectual, social, emotional, spiritual and environmental aspects. You may be healthy in some of these but not in others – and I have found from my work with clients that you can subjectively assess the health of a drug-using client against each of these parameters.

Sadly, far too many people take the narrow view, which is the view closest to the medical profession’s mainstream interest in physical health and in mental health – the latter defined in terms of how stable your brain is, rather than how much you can do with the brain cells you have. Nevertheless, it is undeniably the case that harm to a user can accrue in each of the health elements, and even if we don’t yet have the tools to quantify these harms in the intellectual, social, emotional, spiritual and environmental areas, it is obvious that they are additive to the physical and mental harms. The important conclusion to be kept at the forefront of any discussions of harm reduction is that there is more harm than is being talked about so far.

Harm to others

I remember, about 20 years ago, when I first entered this field of work, listening to the mother of a chronic drug user. Her family had suffered years of runaways, stealing from home, violence upon her, the father and the other kids … so, when she found that he had run away once more and was sleeping in the fields, she went to church, knelt down, and prayed that it would snow. This is how much harm other people suffer, so much that they would even accept losing a son as preferable to another year of misery for everyone else.

Of course the harm that is described in this family is by no means the whole of the story. Drug-users like to think of themselves as committing a ‘victimless crime’; in fact the consequences of their crime ripple across society. When they get ill, doctors and nurses and paramedics and ambulance drivers get involved. When they disrupt school classes or run away from school, then teachers and educational welfare officers and the school administrations get involved. And when they commit crimes police or probation officers become involved.  The crimes may  either in order to get money to buy drugs or – as is frequently overlooked –  because their moral structure has been unravelled by their drug use and replaced with a ‘self-centred, rapid-gratification compulsion’; this is an effect both in their social interactions and in their bio-chemistry. The outcome is a fertile soil in which crime can grow.

The user may be in employment, and British statistics suggest that more than half of all drug users do have a job. Their drug use can impact their workmates, their managers, and the profit line of the whole company. Churches and other religious centres may be involved in seeking to support the family, or even the users themselves. And when their crimes against society come to the attention of the authorities then there are costs incurred by police, lawyers, judges, probation officers, prison facilities and so on.  Consider also traffic accidents, time taken in A&E Departments, family problems up to and including divorce and child abuse can often  be related to a drug user in the family.

So if anybody tries to tell you that their drug use of does not affect anyone else, show them this list – and tell them they are living in a dream world – even if at that moment they are not stoned.

Harm (to users and others) in pre-addiction stages

It seems to be almost a convention in journalistic circles, or in the so-called intellectual discourse about drugs, to refer to all drug users as “drug addicts”. In fact the addicts are a minority percentage of the total drug users, and initiatives that are developed for addicts are often inappropriate for the pre-addiction stages. But the main danger of talking about addiction as the problem which needs to be addressed is the implicit assumption that any drug use prior to this stage is insignificant. This is a gross error. Significant harm can accrue to drug users, to the people around them, and to society, from the first day of their use. The stoned young man who crashes his car – killing other people and maybe himself – can do so on first time he uses. The girl who becomes a victim to date rape, or succumbs to sexual advances because she has drunk too much, can suffer this fate the first time she drinks. It may take you years to develop lung cancer from tobacco – or head and neck cancers from cannabis, but not all drug consequences are so slow to arrive!

2. WHAT TECHNIQUES DO THEY PROPOSE – AND WHAT’S WRONG WITH THESE TECHNIQUES ?

2.1. Needles and works. Probably the best-known technique is so-called ‘needle exchanges’. One of the earliest applications of this was in the same part of England where the psycho-political, pseudo Harm Reduction was born, that is to say the Liverpool – Manchester area. The same people who invented pseudo Harm Reduction also persuaded the police not to take action against possessors of drugs and – even more extraordinary – not to take action against drug dealers, provided these drug dealers handed out needles and syringes at the same time as selling their drugs. Dealers were of course not interested in dialoguing with their clients and encouraging them to stop buying their stuff – they wanted to sell the drugs, give them a bag of syringes and needles, and move on to the next client. This policy certainly had an effect, but not the one that its architects had suggested. The effect was to turn Liverpool, which had been an area where heroin was mostly smoked and injecting was a rarity, into an area with an extremely high level of injecting use. The reason was simple economics – if you inject heroin you can use less to get the same hit, compared to smoking it (‘chasing the dragon’).

Needle exchanges can now be seen in many countries and one thing that unites all them – they are based more on faith than on science.

2.2 Issuing condoms – in the context of harm reduction associated with drug use was rapidly introduced in European countries in the late 1980s, when HIV and Aids was just beginning to be an issue. But more frequent issue of condoms had been a practice for some time before this, as part of a general liberalisation of sexual behaviour, especially amongst the young.

2.3. Methadone is only the latest in a long line of attempts to find a non-addictive substitute for Opiates. It started with a morphine which was developed as a supposedly non-addictive alternative to a opium; quite soon it was realised that morphine was just as addictive, so the chemists went back to their laboratories. Their next product was heroin, which was supposed to be a non-addictive alternative to morphine; again it was soon found to addictive. And so we come to today’s brave new world in which Methadone was first promoted to the medical profession on the basis that it would the non-addictive alternative to heroin – what a crass error that has turned out to be. Not only is Methadone, if anything, more addictive than heroin, it is very tough drug to withdraw from – and, because it is so powerful, it has caused many deaths – indeed, a few years ago in Scotland, there were more deaths in one year from Methadone than their were from heroin.

2.4. Heroin on demand Somewhere, in a back room, one day, someone came up with the mind-numbing idea that heroin addicts would lead to more stable lives if they were given free heroin. What do you suppose would be the reaction if you proposed today that alcoholics would lead more stable lives if they were given free alcohol? The stupidity of both ideas is equal. The most obvious example of this notion was in Switzerland, where the introduction of heroin distribution was disguised by calling it ‘an experiment’. It was nothing of the sort – any more than bringing the Trojan horse into Troy was an experiment in the study of carpentry. Why would the Swiss believe what they were being told about this ‘experiment’? – Perhaps the answer lies in the fact that the man in charge of it was also the president of the Swiss branch of the IAL – the International Anti-prohibition League, a radical group dedicated to the legalisation of drugs.

2.5. Just a little for me, thanks. Harm Reductionists suggest that encouraging moderation in consumption is a sound approach. But to them, suggesting abstaining from drug use is heresy, therefore they are talking less about moderating use and more about maintaining use. Unfortunately for this theory, all the mechanisms of tolerance and addiction are working against it.

2.6. Short breaks from use come in the same category as moderation; they are just trying to apply a sticking plaster to a festering wound. They falsely reassure and validate drug-using behaviour. Whilst moderation of use and short breaks from use can be stepping stones to abstinence, they simply do not work as long as the user intends to return to their use.

2.7. Quality Control. In England a few years ago a new notion came out; that was the idea of having a mobile laboratory outside a rave club, where drug users could have their pills tested for purity – lack of dangerous adulterants – and strength. Even if these mobile laboratories were capable of meaningful test results, the simple fact is that if you buy three of four pills there is no guarantee that what is in the one you have tested is in the other three. And there is another overriding criterion anyway; the first major media coverage in the UK of a young person’s death from ecstasy concerned Leah Betts – she took one ecstasy tablet, at her 18th birthday party, collapsed and died. I can tell you with absolute certainty, having spoken to the professor of medicine who analysed the substance in her body that it was pure ecstasy – there were no adulterants. I can also tell you, because Leah’s parents are friends of mine, that this was not the first time she had used ecstasy – she had tried it a few times before, with no ill effects – and yet this time her body reacted violently, just as it would from a bullet in Russian Roulette.

2.8. Crack Kits. Despite the considerable concern expressed – even by the most dedicated legalisers – some people seem to think that you can even smoke crack ‘safely’. A typical attempt occurred in Connecticut, USA in 1997. A kit included antiseptic swabs, alcohol preparation swabs, antibiotic ointment, some vitamin C tablets, some condoms (of course) and some elastic bands and a rubber mouthpiece for your crack pipe. Amongst the wonderful recommendations in this pack were the following examples:

– “If you smoke indoors, make sure it is ventilated. Poorly aired rooms can be risky for tuberculosis (TB). Cover your mouth when coughing.”

“If you have problems breathing, OR ARE COUGHING UP DARK STUFF, slow down or stop smoking for a while. See a doctor if it continues.”


2.9. Dump the law. And finally we come to the Harm Reductionists’ trump card, law relaxation. What does this have to do with Harm Reduction? Simply that liberalisers see the greatest harm to drug users coming from the illegality of their chosen substances. The harm is that they get arrested, or they get in other trouble with the police; they may have to pay fines, or even go to prison …. all of this is grossly unfair, they would say, when all you are engaging in is a little harmless pastime. It follows that Harm Reductionists end up as pressure groups for legalisation … (or maybe they started that way; you choose).

3. DO THEIR APPROACHES WORK?

3.1 Harm reduction – research and observation

For a complete analysis of the failures of the so-called harm reduction , you can do no better than read the paper submitted by Eric Voth MD, President of the International Drug Strategy Institute, at the conference held in the European Parliament on March 1st and 2nd this year. Eric has used his medical expertise and experience in clinically analysing the various processes attempted by the harm reductionists; the results they have published – and the results they would rather forget.

The claim is made that needle exchange programmes reduce the transfer of HIV and Hepatitis C. Three studies – in Montreal (1997), Seattle (l999) and Vancouver (ongoing) show that the reverse is the case. In another, comparative assessment of thirteen studies focusing on needle exchange programmes and HIV spread, seven of the thirteen reported no significant effect and two actually found higher HIV spread in the needle exchange group. One study found other factors – such as HIV testing and counselling for example – may be more effective in reducing HIV incidence. The studies often have serious shortcomings: there are inadequate outcome tallies – few actually measure NIV incidence, and most often the studies rely on self-reporting of change of behaviour. Often systematic control for co-variates is lacking, and there are poor definitions of degrees of use or non-use. ~Eric Voth concludes that the collected evidence for needle exchanges and their effects on HIV spread is at best inconclusive . They also do not seem to reduce the spread of either drug addiction or injecting use. Voth finishes by suggesting that the early great hopes that many people had for needle exchanges as a ‘silver bullet’ to fight HIV may have impeded the introduction of other potentially more effective strategies.

The term ‘needle exchange’ is optimistic, to say the least. The average needle requirement for a heroin user is around 3,000 needles per year – and three times this for injecting cocaine users. Of 131 needle exchange programmes identified by the Center for Disease Control, l07 programmes reported that almost 40% of needles were not returned; the total handed out by these l07 programmes was almost 20 million needles which means that 8 million needles were discarded somewhere else.

Needle sharing was supposed to be reduced by generous distribution of needles; the fallacy of this was exposed in several studies, including Chicago (1995) which showed almost 40% of clients continued to share needles. Interestingly this figure was identical to the level of sharing amongst users who did not access the needle exchange; this shows that there was no educational benefit from participation in needle exchanges.

In Seattle it was found that the highest incidence of infection occurred amongst current clients of the needle exchange – the goal of elimination or even reduction of risky behaviour had self-evidently not been achieved. Baltimore was one of the first American cities to introduce needle exchanges; within a few years it was found that Baltimore had one of the most severe drug problems in the nation, with 10% of the population addicted. The percentage of opiate use amongst male and female arrestees was found to be higher than even Washington DC, Philadelphia or New York.

Looking at other countries, Puerto Rico needle exchanges were studied in 1998. They found no significant change in injection habits; only 40% of needles were returned and there was no evaluation process in place. In India a study in 2003 showed that prevalence of HIV before needle exchanges was 1% and after was 2%. In the same period (1996-2002) Hepatitis B rose from 8% to 18% and Hepatitis C rose from 17% to 66%.

Harm reduction has been the ‘Trojan Horse’ carrying liberal policies into other countries as well as those mentioned above. Decriminalisation of cannabis in Holland prefaced an increase in use of 142% between 1990 and 1995. For those who suggest that it is prohibition which encourages organised crime to grow, the fact is that organised crime groups in Holland rose from three in 1988 to ninety three in l993, prompting the Minister of Justice to announce that Holland had become ‘the crime capital of Europe’. Holland has also become the leading exporter of Ecstasy – much to the disgust of the Dutch population, 73% of which feel that their drug laws are too lax. England would claim that it has not decriminalised cannabis, it has merely de-penalised it – but this is just playing with words. The evidence on the street, as reported by such authorities as the Police Federation, shows a drastic increase in use and also shows many young people falsely believing that cannabis in England is now legal and that they can ignore the police. Injecting rooms in Australia fare no better; in a shooting gallery in the Kings Cross area of Sydney, there were 36 times greater overdoses than in the rest of the district.

A telling comparison of harm reduction versus prevention was produced by Dr. Lucy Sullivan and published in 1999 in the ‘News Weekly’ magazine. She compared the preventive approach of Sweden with the harm reduction approach of Australia. She found that lifetime use in Sweden was only 9% compared to 52% in Australia, and that use in the previous year was only 2% in Sweden compared to 33% in Australia. Under 20 year-old dependent users were five times more frequent in Australia and drug related deaths were twice as frequent. Most tellingly given the promotion of needle exchanges, the number of Aids cases per million population in Australia was twice that of Sweden.

3.2 Harm Reduction on the street – ‘Outreach’

The principle of outreach work is an honourable one, and has been practised for many decades. Since people beset by social exclusion may not come to agencies and seek help, then the agencies may choose to go out and find these people in their own habitat. Where this principle becomes unworkable is in the subversion of the goals of the outreach workers. Traditionally they have worked to bring their clients to a point of reasoned judgement when they will elect to discontinue their harmful behaviours, including drug misuse. In 1987 at a PRIDE conference in America I heard a Norwegian drug worker describe how the outreach workers they had recruited, who started with the goal of abstinence, over a period became activists campaigning for legalisation of drugs. One possibility is that some of that group of drug workers may themselves have been drug users and – and therefore they saw legalisation as something that would validate their own use and therefore protect their employment. But there is another mechanism in play. This has to do with a drug worker striving to gain the trust of the client, trying to get inside their thinking and understand them better, but only being able to do this after the client has accepted them. Unfortunately, too many outreach workers – or youth workers – make the mistake of ‘buying’ acceptance from a client in exchange for accepting all of that client’s behaviour without question. They have forgotten that their attitude should be “I love you – but I don’t love your behaviour”. Having thus over identified with the client, it becomes a simple step of self justification for these workers to campaign for law relaxation, to underpin their own subverted position.

3.3 The workplace

Drug misuse in the workplace costs industry dear; an estimate of the cost to British industry is in excess of £3 billion per year. This affects everybody in and around the workplace – the managers, employers, and any shareholders. But despite this harm to everyone, there is often a practice of misguided loyalty. I well remember one of my female clients who was an alcoholic; when the supervisor was seen to be heading for the area where she was working, her colleagues would hide her in a broom cupboard until the supervisor had gone away. It was not until the supervisor confronted this woman and gave her the simple option of counselling or dismissal that she at last faced her condition honestly, and set herself on road to recovery.

I also recall an astonishing statement by a trade union representative for London’s underground railways, reported in the national press. This ‘Brain of Britain’ announced that since underground train drivers were within their rights to consume drugs over the weekend, they should be given Mondays off to ‘straighten out’ before taking their control in the train on Tuesdays. For a long time after that, I worried every time I got into an underground train. I also recalled one crash on the underground in London, some years ago, which killed two people and injured many others, and the driver later tested positive for cannabis.

Some of the harms from drug misuse can be much less dramatic, but can add up to a major cost. Here’s a simple example you can apply to your own country: Just for example, given that there are nearly 60 million people in Britain, if we ignore the old and the young, we are probably left with a workforce of around 30 million people. Taking an average of the highest and lowest wages in Britain, a conservative figure for payment would be around £10 per hour. If we assume that on average every worker loses just one hour in a year from the some consequence of drug use, including alcohol of course … consequences as small as arriving to work late the following day, or even just a late return from lunch – whatever the cause, that lost hour adds up to a cost to the nation of £300 million.

3.4 Education – formal and informal

It is in the Education sector that Harm Reduction can be at its most insidious. We are dealing here with young, impressionable minds – and lest you should think that impressionable minds only come inside the heads of 15 year-olds or younger, bear in mind that current research now shows that maturation of the occurs last in the pre-frontal lobe – the area which processes analysis, decision-making, imagination and planning – and also bear in mind that this maturation is now thought to be not complete until a person is in their early twenties.

Traditional ‘Harm Reduction’, as I have already described it, is conducted with known users on a one to-one basis in order to mitigate their drug-using behaviour whilst seeking to end it. Such a process is impossible in a classroom that has a wide variety of pupils in it, with of wide variety of experiences. The fact is that most of them have either never used at all or will have given up after one or two tentative attempts. In other words, the great majority have not bought into the drug culture. Perhaps the main reason why so many do not use is the culture of society around them – a culture of disapproval by parents, teachers, other authorities – and, most importantly, by their friends; a culture of Health Promotion; a culture of Responsible Behaviour – having regard for others. If one now introduces into the classroom a suggestion that drug use is inevitable, that any one may get involved in it, and that the school will therefore give out instruction in preferable methods of use (these will be described as ‘less risky methods’ but will be rapidly misconstrued by young people as meaning ‘safe methods’) then what thought pattern will they develop in their minds? I suggest to you that it is likely to include the following:

– drug use is inevitable

– the school must be accepting it because there are telling me how to do it

– it can’t be that dangerous otherwise they would forbid it

– they’re saying that everybody’s doing it, so I don’t want to be left out


and the result? More schoolchildren use drugs. And how is that interpreted? It is interpreted as an argument for more harm reduction. In other presentations by Ann Stoker we will explore just how far reaching this psycho-political initiative has become, and also the look at some of the people behind it.

4. THE ALTERNATIVES

4.1 Selective use of real harm reduction

There is a place for advising on the reduction of harm, but it is certainly not in the socio-political arena, as a ‘Trojan Horse’ for legalisation. And it does not belong in the classroom – or in any other places where you are communicating with a wide variety of people, many of them non-users, and some of them on the edge of deciding whether or not to use.

The correct place for reduction of harm is as part of the response to known use, and it is conducted on a one-to-one basis, and always with the goal of abstinence made explicit to them. The user needs to know that it is your wish that they give up using, even if they are not willing to stop right now. (You may also decide that some individuals, who are currently denying that they are using, should be advised as if they are users). Don’t protest that there are too many users out there for you to work with on a one-to-one basis; the fact is that if your advice is valid and presented in a non-patriarchal. non-patronising way, the word will get round on the street to others anyway.

The other important aspect of harm reduction is that you must stay abreast of the research and observation, across the international scene. There are many question marks over practices such as needle exchange, and in time it may become clear that some practices should be modified – or even abandoned altogether. Equally, some new practices will be developed, which can improve the situation. So the lesson is to keep aware, monitor your procedures, and continuously test them against the international body of knowledge.

4.2 Outreach work with an abstinence goal

Outreach is an honourable pursuit, with a strong moral base – but it can be diverted (as it was in Norway). Your outreach workers need to have strong and constantly renewed links with your main office base, and their goals and practices need to be regularly tested and renewed. Remember that they are in a vulnerable position – by the nature of their job, they are presenting themselves to their clients as ‘something different from the official structure, someone you can trust and to whom you can relate’. And of course they have to deliver on a promise of confidentiality – what they hear from an individual has to stay between that outreach worker and his/her client. (This does not mean that general information about what drugs are on the street, drug prices, trends in use and practice, etc cannot be extracted anonymously; such an information analysis will assist and inform the whole agency, including the cadre of outreach workers themselves). Outreach workers need to be given flexibility in order to achieve their job specification, to develop a trusting relationship with the client – but this cannot extend to them re-writing your drug strategy!

4.3 Assertive treatment and rehabilitation

It used to be said – and I confess that I was one of those who absorbed this idea as ‘gospel’ – that a treatment process will not succeed unless the client has committed to it of their own free will. There is a joke amongst psychotherapists, which asks ‘How many psychotherapists does it take to change a light bulb?’ The answer is ‘Only one, but the light bulb has to really want to change’.

Experience has now shown that this is not the case. In Sweden there has been many years of ‘mandatory’ treatment, and comparative research studies have shown that the mandatory schemes have outcomes as good as the voluntary ones. The conclusion is that there is a place for both – and some people will respond better to a process of they have personally volunteered for it, whilst others need a little push.

The use of ‘a little push’ does not have to be confined to treatment centres; I have sometimes received new clients who have been sent to me by their employers, with the condition that they either commit to counselling about their drug problem – or they are dismissed from their job. Of course you can imagine that often such people arrived in my office in a very bad temper, not wanting to be there, and very sceptical of the value of counselling. But I can say that over a quite short period, when they realised that I would not report back to their employer anything they said to me, and that my mission was simply to help them, then they relaxed and started to address their problem, with good results.

4. 4 What is prevention?

The word ‘prevention’ is to come extent problematic, because it means different things to different people. If you look in the Oxford English Dictionary you will find the word PREVENT is defined as ‘to obstruct or to hinder’. this modern usage of the word is unhelpful in drugs prevention because if you’re going to or obstruct or hinder something, this must mean that the activity has already started. In the case of drug abuse we cannot wait until the activity has already started, we need to do something sooner. This means we have to go back to the original, Latin root meaning of the word prevention; it comes from the Latin verb praevenire – meaning to come before the, to act before the event. This shows that if you wish to prevent, you must work pre-event.

Here is another elegant definition of what ‘prevention’ means, written by CSAP – The Center for Substance Abuse Prevention (USA) in 1993. It said:

‘Prevention is the sum of our actions to ensure healthy, safe and productive lives for all our children and families’.


Another very powerful definition comes from the one of the original American gurus of drug prevention, Bill Lofquist, from Associates for Youth Development, Tucson, Arizona. Bill says:

‘ If we can get beyond the notion that prevention is only “stopping something from happening”, to a more positive approach, that creates conditions which promote the well being of people, we can begin to view human services quite differently. This, in turn, can transform and enrich our approaches to helping people and building communities that are relatively free of the symptoms we have designed the services around.’


So that is what prevention means. But isn’t that a very wide definition? The answer is, it is as wide as society itself. And it means much, much more than just giving out information – which are too many people consider is all you need to do.

It is because of this confusion between the just information-based-giving and prevention, that many people think that education is the whole of prevention. It is not. Education is an important part of prevention, but the nature of every-day education in our schools and colleges today, and the pressures on teaching staff, are such that formal education does not properly address prevention – even if it wanted to.

A simple acronym of which will help you to remember what comprehensive prevention means, is ‘KAB’. This stands for Knowledge plus Attitudes plus Behaviour. All these three need to be addressed if you are going to significantly influence behaviour. I will get into this in more detail later in this section.

One of the attacks on Drug Prevention by our opponents is that you cannot prevent everyone from using drugs, and therefore you should not try to prevent use of drugs. This is a false premise; if you look at other areas of life of, there are many examples where we seek to prevent undesirable behaviour; for example, obesity, unwanted sexual behaviour, crime, and – closer to our professional subject area – smoking. In none of these cases do we say that we expect to succeed with 100 per cent of the people, and in fact the success rate is much lower than this, nevertheless we can see that society benefits generally, from the effect on those people with whom we are successful, and so we continue making the prevention effort. Drug prevention should be no different to this, and the only reason that it is not applied as extensively as it should be, is the cynical and unjustified attacks by libertarians who – quite correctly – see it as an obstacle to their goals.

4.2 Does it work?

Yes, it certainly does. But as I said above, it does not work for everybody – and it is also true to say that what works for one person will not work for another. Let’s look at some proof of the Effectiveness have prevention:

One of the world’s leading researchers in drug prevention is Nancy Tobler; she published a major paper summarising her work so far. She identified more than 240 prevention programmes which were proved successful. 240 – and yet our opponents say there is no evidence that Prevention Works! from these 240 programmes she selected 140 which could be categorised into groups with similar characteristics in their techniques, and from this tree conducted a meta-analysis; this allowed her to produce recommendations for the characteristics of successful programmes.

Another senior researcher is Bonnie Benard; when I first encountered her she was working with Project Snowball in Illinois, a very successful programme, and one which Ann Stoker has visited and studied. Bonnie works these days at NIDA – the National Institute on Drug Abuse in Washington DC, but the list of ‘Characteristics of Effective Prevention’ which she reproduced in her Illinois days is still today, for me, one of the best short summaries of what produces good prevention.

Here is another specific example of what prevention can achieve. Every two years in America, a survey is taken across thousands of households, and is also correlated with surveys at schools. Amongst the subjects it addresses, drug abuse features highly, and a chart can be plotted to show what has been happening since the 1950s.

On this chart one can see that drug abuse started to escalate in the 1960s, under the noses of a largely apathetic Parent and Schools body, until by 1980 total of 24 per million people were drug users – and that included high-school pupils who were getting stoned before they went to college, if they went at all.

A few years before this appalling peak figure was reached, parents started to wake up to what was happening and they found that the academics and the drug workers were suggesting that the best approach was something they called “Responsible Use” – that is what today we would term ‘So-called Harm Reduction’. Parents, who set up more than 8,000 representative group, pressured the academics into taking a more responsible attitude towards use, and pushed them into developing effective prevention programmes. The effect of this was dramatic; from the peak 1980 level of 24 million over the next 12 years use dropped by 60 per cent, down to 13 million. For this was a tremendous public health campaign success by any standards, and yet throughout this period the pro drug factions, strongly supported by the sympathetic media, were announcing the that the “the war on drugs is failing” – and of course they are still telling the same lie today.

There are many other examples of successful prevention – some large and some small. You will hear soon about the Teenex programme which Ann Stoker wrote, and which has operated without a break over the last 17 years in Britain, as well as being established in Germany, Holland, Portugal, and Bulgaria.

As further proof of what a preventive approach can achieve, I can also tell you that during the eight-years that Ann Stoker was the director of a drugs agency in a London Borough, analysis showed the levels of drug use in that borough to be 20% below the national average.

4.3 What does prevention involve? the detailed techniques.

A core consideration, which I mentioned before, is the acronym ‘KAB’ – by this I mean that for prevention to be effective it must address not only the delivery of knowledge, and the shaping of attitudes, but also explicitly engage with behaviour – by encouraging good behaviour, more so than discouraging bad behaviour.

Prevention techniques need to vary according to the setting in which they are delivered, the culture of the people to whom you are delivering – and obviously the age group. Another factor will be to what extent there are any users in the grouper, and what their level of use is.

Prevention used to be traditionally defined in terms of primary, secondary and tertiary prevention. Primary meant prevention of use, Secondary meant prevention of harm from use and tertiary meant prevention of relapse back into use, that is, after treatment. These terms seem to have fallen out of favour in the profession and now a new set of terms replace them:

Universal prevention means prevention delivered to the general population, to promote overall health, and – in this context – to prevent the onset of drug use.

Selective prevention means prevention delivered to those thought to be at risk of using.

Indicated prevention means prevention for users in the early stages of use.

The goal of all these types of prevention is abstinence, and to that extent the new terms are less equivocal than the old. If we consider the these types of prevention as filters, each of which tries to prevent anyone falling through to the next level below, then a hypothetical arrangement might show the Universal Prevention filter addressing 100% of the population. The Selective Prevention filter addresses much fewer people – perhaps only 20% of the population, whilst the Indicated Prevention filter addresses even less – perhaps under 5% of the population. As these smaller percentages are reached, other services start to come into play; these would include Intervention – either in an agency or by Outreach (and – where appropriate – the application of Real Harm Reduction techniques). As the user becomes more deeply involved in drug use – regular user, or chronic user, or even an addict (and the percentage of this would be very small, perhaps one or two percent) then Treatment, Rehabilitation and After-care for relapse prevention would all need to come into play.

Now lets look at some specific prevention techniques, addressing these by different sectors of the community:

Government – their prevention work should mainly consist of a specifying and resourcing the achievement of those goals through top level management and evaluation leading to upgrading the system. They also initiate major public health promotion campaigns, including advertising campaigns. They ought to fund only those agencies who are complying with the National Strategy – sadly, in England this is not the case.

Health service – the problem with the British health service is that it is not a health service, it is a sickness service. it is dominated by physical and mental health considerations, and it does very little about the other elements of Health I have described earlier. Health Promotion needs to take a much more significant role. When it comes to resource in the promotion of emotional social spiritual health and the like, much more advantage could be taken of the voluntary sector, provided this was given the sound background resourcing from government.

Home Affairs – this is a key department, dealing with policing, justice system, and the laws which are in force at any given time. At present it is obsessed with crime figures and how to reduce them – sometimes by expedients such as reducing penalties Or not imposing imprisonment. This obsession with statistics needs to be replaced by a health- promoting approach. This should include rational laws which the public can understand and support; rational sentencing which has, as its focus, the encouragement of people back into law-abiding and constructive citizens; and a judiciary which is more in touch with real life. In Britain the Home Office has funded significant drug prevention projects in the past, but some of these have been penetrated and diverted by libertarian interests. A case in point is the ‘Blueprint’ project, which had the massive sum of £7 million allocated to developing and testing a so-called prevention project in schools. When such a project is put under the management of a person who is known to advocate Harm Reduction as their preferred strategy, one has to wonder exactly what the government is playing at.

Schools – in primary or junior schools there is great scope for universal prevention, and there are some excellent examples of this in – amongst others – America, Britain and Australia. These courses do not get into the gritty detail of what drugs look like, or what they do to people who use them – this needs to be left for the older age groups. Prevention that you deliver in primary schools consists of teaching young people how their bodies work; what happens when they put different substances into their bodies; how to respect themselves and other people . It also addresses subjects like anger, how do you deal with anger towards another pupil or to an older person. Core messages are “you are a special and unique person. You have been given the wonderful gift which is life. You are not alone, you are part of a large community. You need to take care of yourself, take care of where you live, and take care of each other”.

Three good examples of this approach are DARE ( Drug Abuse Resistance Education), Life Education Centres, and the Kangaroo Creek Gang. The first one comes from America, the second from Eastern Australia and the third one from Western Australia. As with all successful prevention programmes, attempts have been made by the opposition to jeopardise them – this is too long a story to include here.

Secondary schools – again, there are many good example of effective prevention in secondary schools. NIDA (The National Institute on Drug Abuse) in America has produced a very valuable booklet which summarises these within the American experience.A series of attainment targets for each age through secondary schools has been developed in America, and in Britain we in the NDPA have reworked this ( with the permission of the US Department of Education) to suit the British educational curriculum. NDPA is also continuously developing model drug prevention policy for schools. As well as lessons in the classroom, extra-mural programmes can be very useful. One of these, Teenex, you will hear about as part of this presentation.

Another relatively new technique which is being applied in America, Australia and some British schools is random drug testing. Attempts in the past to introduce drug-testing have not been very successful, because they depended on teachers identifying pupils that they wanted to have tested – and sometimes this system was open to abuse, or at the very least was suspected of being so. The new system uses a computer-based randomised selection of pupils (and the more enlightened schools will extend it to the teaching staff as well). The tests are administered by a school nurse or by external specialist staff who visit the school for this purpose. Another change from the past is that instead of automatically expelling someone who is found to have drugs in their system, the more usual response these days is to refer them for Counselling , and either suspend them for a short period or make a contract with them which says that they will be permitted to continue in school on the understanding that they may be tested again for drugs at any time. NDPA is the British representative for an international specialist committee on drug testing, and we can provide detailed information and research/observation reports about drug testing.

The medical profession – doctors and nurses are no better informed during their training than teachers; most of them will acknowledge that they received little or no information about street drugs or other drugs of abuse. And most of them, sadly, take the attitude that they do not want drug abusers in their surgeries. Furthermore, very few of them are seriously committed to health promotion or drug prevention – their focus is to wait until somebody becomes sick – and then treat them. So, the medical profession is actually unhealthy, and the symptoms are clear. ‘ The treatment’ is to improve and widen the training that all doctors receive in respect of abuse of drugs – whether this relates to illegal street drugs, to legal drugs such as alcohol and tobacco, or to pharmaceuticals such as tranquillisers and anti-depressants and substances like Ritalin. Not only is the profession unhealthy, but too many of the professionals are also unhealthy – there is a high percentage of alcohol and drug abuse in the medical profession, and this needs to be tackled more assertively. Another related profession is the pharmacists; they often come into direct contact with drug users, and they are in a very good position to help not only drug users, but ordinary members of the community who may be at risk from the unwitting abuse of pharmaceuticals.

The workplace – this is one of the best settings in which to promote prevention with older adolescents and adults. Some companies run comprehensive health promotion programme, some categorised as “employee assistance programmes”. one reason why the work place is a good setting is that the workforce is accustomed to taking instruction and training from the company; drug prevention can be incorporated into other existing subjects, such as health and safety, productivity, supervision, and company profitability. Where companies are too small to run their own comprehensive schemes, there are good examples of resource sharing between companies.

The media – some realism is needed here. Whether one is talking about television, or radio, or newspapers or magazines , the media does not exist to be a propaganda arm for drug prevention, or even to be an information service to the community; the purpose is to make the largest possible profit for the people who own the media – they achieve this by selling advertising, and they need to attract as many people as possible, so that the advertisers will place their products with them. We, the public, are the consumers of media products and we indicate by what we purchase those media subjects which interest at, so one might observe that we get the media we deserve. Of course it is also true that there are people in the media who are promoting their own agendas, and this complicates the situation, nevertheless the reality is that the media will only cover a limited amount of positive material about prevention of problems. Problems are much more likely to sell that newspaper or that TV programme. Having said all this, there is scope for the media to become more informed about the positive options, and to weave these into their existing coverage.

Leisure and entertainment – some of the comments about the media apply equally here but there is still significant scope for the leisure and entertainment industry to promote healthy behaviour without damaging their profit line. One example is the style of non-alcoholic drinks which if anything have bigger profit margins than alcohol. Another example is the management of dance clubs; instead of providing drug testing kits at the door, they can operate a strict ‘no drugs policy’ and they can promote this policy inside the club – the message is “come in, you can have a great time, and you don’t need drugs to do it”.

Sports – traditionally, the sporting sector has been treated very patriarchally by its administrators; they seem to treat sportsmen and women like naughty children who need to be watched closely and punished if they transgress. There is very little sign of any positive preventive education within this sector – this is the great potential for improvement. Additionally, there is a group of excellent programmes which have come out of Texas, which utilise a sporting environment to achieve personal development, conflict resolution, citizenship and other personal growth areas – in this is a much more constructive way of using sport than merely suggesting that it can be an alternative to drug use.

The voluntary sector – there is an enormous amount that can be done using the voluntary services. One of the first steps is to get better links between the groups which have some shared interest; an example of this in Britain is the link that now exist between our ‘Coalition on Cannabis’ and ‘Rethink’, the mental health charity – they have joined together to press the government for better responses to “dual diagnosis” – the situation in which a person is involved with drugs and also has mental health problems.

Drug workers – the main shortcoming in at least my own country – and from my observation I would say in other countries too – is that too much of the total is concentrated on sorting out the problem and not enough to prevent them in the first place. The situation is made worse by too many drug workers having lost sight of the basic goal, which is to produce a healthy society; they have become trapped by the rhetoric of Harm Reductionists and legalisers, falsely believing that in doing so they are giving their drug using clients a good service. The truth is they are giving them a very bad service – indeed, a disservice by allowing them to remain involved with drugs.

Further Education, Universities and Colleges – these establishments have particular problems with drug abuse, and this may be because this is the first time for many young people that they have moved away from home, away from the eyes of their parents. There is a culture of excess in many of these establishments – conspicuous consumption of alcohol and reckless involvement with drugs is seen as necessary to gain acceptance by one’s peer group. Another factor which worsens the situation seems to be the academics, who often demonstrate indulgence when they should be demonstrating leadership.

Teacher training – teachers we have spoken to say that almost no drug training has been given to trainee teachers , and to make things worse there is a large contingent of libertarian trainers in these Teaching colleges. Clearly, these establishment need to be ‘cleaned out and straightened up’.

Young people – research demonstrates that young people are one of the most effective prevention resources for other young people. The value of ‘peer education and peer prevention’ is well demonstrated in the literature and in practice. The Teenex programme is only one of many examples of this.

Parents – together with young people, parents are one of the strongest agents for prevention. (This may be why liberal groups have eroded the position of parents, along with other authority figures, to move the axis of power from ‘parent-child’ to ‘advisory agency-child’. Again, there is a good deal of literature to describe this area.

Faith groups – there is an important place for these groups, and what they say can be influential even with people who are not members of a given faith group, or any group at all.

Clear leadership on moral issues and values needs to be provided, in terms which are meaningful in today’s society. Faith leaders in some cases seem to be too relaxed about negative behaviours and seem to think that they will gather more support for their cause if they justify transgressions rather than pointing out what is wrong. No one is suggesting that ‘fire and brimstone’ sermons are called for, but what is needed is clear spiritual leadership and guidance. In this context, a relatively new technology is developing under the name of “Bio-ethics”. The Institute of Bio-Ethics in Sydney, Australia, is a good example of a resource which can be accessed.

4.4 Is it cost-effective?

There are a number of ways in which the cost-effectiveness of prevention can be measured, but it is fair to say that much more evaluation is needed. Prevention suffers from being the ‘Cinderella service’ in the drugs field. reward. The relatively short supply of evaluation stems from the smallness of most prevention budgets – and the short-sightedness of funders. They demand $1 of prevention activity for every $1 they give, so they do not allocate any money for evaluation. Hopefully the currently renewed interest in prevention will allow this to be rectified.

Of course the libertarians claim that there is ‘no evidence that prevention works’. This is not true, but one could more easily argue that that there is no evidence that Harm Reduction works. The extracts that I gave earlier, from Dr. Eric Voth’s analyses, emphasise this point.

5. CONCLUSIONS

5.1 Create and sustain a Positive, Preventive Culture throughout your society

5.2 Build a prevention-oriented strategy involving the whole community

5.3 Apply early intervention, by agencies cross-referral and by outreach

5.4 Limit the use of ‘real’ Harm Reduction to part of the Treatment process (and use another name for it!)

5.5 Deliver assertive treatment services with an abstinence goal, some of them linked to the Justice system, and

5.6 Balance the rights of the individual with the rights of society.

****************************
Filed under: Harm Reduction including HIV (Papers) :


A summary of recent scientific findings on the real and adverse impacts of marijuana.

For Further information please contact

Michael Robinson
Executive Director
Drug Free Australia
PO Box H135
Hurlstone Park NSW 2193
Phone 02 9591 8850
Email : info@drugfreeaustralia.org.au

The following summary is a collation of material from a wide source of medical reviews and scientific journals with emphasis on reputable scientific studies rather than editorial commentaries. The following has been collated into the following points for a concise guide

The over-riding principle on which to decide what is in the patient’s best interests must be medical science over rumour or anecdotal opinion.

OVERVIEW

While supporters of marijuana use put forward anecdotal stories and psuedo-science of rumours, myths and snake-oil hype,

… the seriously ill, trusting in the care of medical professionals demand the highest standards of medicine be adhered to, not diverted from.

… Medicine must be based on science.

… As a proposed medical substance, marijuana should be subject to the same level of scientific scrutiny as any other new medicine being suggested for use, when it is it fails the test.

In short, modern medicine is based on fact, not fiction!

15 Reasons to reject marijuana use for the seriously ill include

1) Unacceptable Side Effect Profile.

At the symptom level the toxicity of the oral formulation is almost prohibitive with most cannabis naive patients reporting unacceptable side effects including psychological dysphoria “bad trips.”

This study contains the very interesting observations as follows:

“Although there is an aura that marijuana is a “safe” drug, the untoward psychological (eg. panic, anxiety, depression, psychosis) and medical complications (eg. bronchitis, malignancies, sexual dysfunction) associated with its use are well documented.”

Source: Levin FR “Pharmacotherapy for Marijuana Dependence: A Double blind, placebo
controlled pilot study of divalproex sodium.” Am J Addiction 13: 21-23 (2004)

one journal addressed the clinical consequences of marijuana use. The introductory paper stated

… “that in addition to marijuana abuse/dependence, marijuana use is associated in some studies with impairment of cognitive function in the young and old, fetal and developmental consequences, cardiovascular effects…, respiratory/pulmonary complications… impaired immune function…and risk of developing head, neck, and/or lung cancer. ….” The summary stated further that “…research presented at this workshop suggests that marijuana use is not without health hazards and, within the limits of the available data, is associated with significant adverse consequences affecting almost every physiological system.”

Source: Journal of Clinical Pharmacology 2002;42:7S-10S

….a letter from NIDA’s Marijuana Research Center dated January of 2001 stated that

it had more than 15,000 research papers in its marijuana bibliography. However, it must be noted that because of the many negative consequences associated with marijuana smoking there is a reluctance to do clinical trials on humans. Further, because it remains an illicit drug there is also reticence to spend limited research dollars to determine the interaction of an illicit drug with prescription pharmaceuticals. Nevertheless, research on compounds found in marijuana is ongoing and has lead to the development of a number of prescription drugs with several others currently being accessed. However, smoking marijuana as a medicinal remedy is an unnecessary danger to patients …

Source: Reference: J Clin Pharmacol 2002;42:7S-10S, Khalsa et al
Risk of Heart Attacks increase 4 fold within 1 hour of smoking cannabis

Harvard School of Public Health and Boston’s Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center that smoking “Marijuana Raises Heart Risks.” The study on which this was based was also published in July of 2001.

Source:Mittleman et al, Triggering Myocardial Infarction by Marijuana, Circulation, (103), 2001.

Now, a report in Forensic Science International, by researchers Bachs & Mørland, of the National Institute of Forensic Toxicology in Oslo, Norway, report on six cases of “cardiovascular death in young adults” …….., the authors reference several other cases of cardiovascular incidents related to cannabis use. The studies reported in this article indicate that using marijuana can increase the risk of stroke and bleeding in the brain, which can result in death.

Source: Thomas Geller, MD; Laura Loftis, MD; David S. Brink, MD; Pediatrics, March 2004
Link to Mental Illness including depression and psychotic episodes tripled by cannabis use

There are now more and more research studies that link mental illness to cannabis use. The following studies are all useful sources

Sources: American Journal of Psychiatry, March 2004
Van Us J, Dutch Study, American Journal of Epidemiology, 2002.
“Cannabis Abuse as a Risk Factor for Depressive Symptoms”
Am J. Psychiatry, 158:12, December 2001. Bovasso

Cancers, Lung Infections and Lung Damage.
“The constituents of cannabis and tobacco smoke include a similar range of pro-inflammatory and carcinogenic substances.”
“The way marijuana is inhaled as opposed to the way tobacco is inhaled means that smoking a ‘joint’ of cannabis results in exposure to significantly greater amounts of combusted material than with a tobacco cigarette.” Regarding the use of waterpipes (bongs) to ameliorate smoking hazards, the paper states: “There appears to be no significant reduction in risk with this modified inhalation technique. There is also a link between psychiatric illness and cannabis use, indicating that this particular subgroup may be at particular risk of respiratory disease with prolonged exposure to both tobacco and cannabis smoke.”

Reference: Internal Medicine Journal 2003;33:310-313, Taylor and Hall.

Smoking marijuana just once or twice a day for a number of years could lead to serious lung disease.

Source: Reported in Join Together March 2000 from Thorax, Journal of British Thoracic Society.
Smoking marijuana can cause cancer

“many people may think marijuana is harmless, but it is not”, Zhang said in a statement. “The carcinogens in marijuana are much stronger than those in tobacco. the big message here is the marijuana, like tobacco, can cause cancer.” Zhang studied 173 patients diagnosed with head and neck cancer, and compared them to 176 cancer free control patients. Those who said they habitually smoked marijuana were more likely to be in the group with head and neck cancers. And the more they smoked , the bigger the risk.

Source: Dr Zhag , Jonsson cancer center University of California,
Reported in journal of cancer Epidemiology Biomarker and prevention Dec 1999.

Researchers report in the July 2000 issue of the “Journal of Immunology” that tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), the major psychoactive component of marijuana, can promote tumor growth by impairing the body’s anti-tumor immunity system.
Source: Roun et al. Biological Psychology Laboratory at Maclean Hospital Limited in haemorrhage Notes Vol. 15, No. 1

Aggravation of pain and muscle spasticity (the opposite of treatment for those suffering AIDS, M.S., Asthma)

Marijuana will not stop Multiple Sclerosis Pain

In findings that contradict earlier research, a team of scientists reports that marijuana does not improve the often painful symptoms of multiple sclerosis (MS). .A previous study in mice indicated that marijuana might help to relieve these painful spasms. However, the amount of the drug used in mice would not be tolerated in humans, the researchers explain. While their study included just 16 patients, it is the largest randomized, controlled clinical trial to investigate the use of marijuana to treat MS.

“Compared to placebo, neither THC nor plant-extract treatment reduced spasticity,” Dr. Joep Killestein from the VU Medical Center in Amsterdam, the Netherlands, told Reuters Health.

Source: Neurology 2002;58:1404-1407.

Smoking can double risk of MS

Smokers are 181 times more likely to develop multiple sclerosis than non smokers according to Dr Trond Riise.

Professor Riise said: “This is the first time that smoking has been established as a risk factor.., hopefully these results will help us learn more about what causes Ms by looking at how smoking affects the onset of the disease.

Source: Dr Trond Riise,University of Bergen Norway reported by ASH Oct 2003

“… since anandamide acts on nerves in the trachea and lungs and is quickly eliminated from the body, an inhaler could potentially control the cough without any side effects. Piomelli says don’t smoke marijuana for asthma, because it could trigger lung constriction and make the problem worse.
Source: Piomelli et al. University of California. Published in Nature . Nov 2000.
2) Inadequate Empirical Evidence

The level of the evidence for its use for the various indications seems to be based at best on preliminary or pilot data. All too often support for marijuana is on anecdotal comment and not scientifically valid data but commonly little more than opinion or anecdotal material.

3) Lack of Comparative Data

This is particularly obvious in the case of the indication for vomiting where there are no comparative trials with the standard serotonin-3 antagonists such as drugs of the ondansetron family. In the case of pain relief, the effects of cannabis appear to be about the same as a moderate dose of codeine, with the notable addition of generally unacceptable side effects.

4) Complexity of the Endocannabinoid System

There are at least two major cannabis receptors and probably three. Their pharmacology is not completely worked out. It is well known that a high concentration of receptors exists on both neurones in the hypothalamus and all of the immune cells of the body. One of the key target groups for whom “medical marijuana” is frequently recommended is AIDS patients. Hence the generally immunosuppressive effects of the cannabinoids should be of major concern in such patients whose immunocompromise is known to be finally lethal.

A third element of this system if the enteric nervous system, which has as many neurones as the brain and spinal cord namely 100 million. Cannabis receptors have been defined in this nervous system, and disorders of bowel function are well known in cannabis addicted patients. This should also worry us – that there is another 100 million neurones whose cannabinoid sensitivies and pharmacology is largely unexplored.

It is also of interest that one of the family of several endocannabinoid molecules 2-acylglycerol, has been noted to change cellular specificity and apparent phenotype of cultured cells from adipocyte to fibroblast. Such radical changes of cellular phenotype imply that usual safety studies will be difficult to guarantee if cellular perturbations of such major degree are involved.

5) Immunosuppression

This immunosuppression is a huge issue in its own right. It is matter of enormous clinical and theoretical interest and implications, and has begun to be explored in great detail in the laboratories of north America. Indeed a senior professional organization has now been formed in the USA to examine this in its own right as it relates to both cannabis and other illicit agents. It is called the Society for Neuroimmune Pharmacology. The effects of this are in fact counter productive indicating that the whole plant marijuana product should never be administered to anyone, let alone someone who is already sick or immune compromised.

Study Finds Marijuana Ingredient Promotes Tumour Growth, Impairs Anti-Tumour Defences

Researchers report in the July 2000 issue of the “Journal of Immunology” that tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), the major psychoactive component of marijuana, can promote tumour growth by impairing the body’s anti-tumour immunity system. While previous research has shown that THC can lower resistance to both bacterial and viral infections, this is the first time that its possible tumour-promoting activity has been reported.

The authors also suggest that smoking marijuana may be more of a cancer risk than smoking tobacco. The tar portion of marijuana smoke, compared to that of tobacco, contains higher concentrations of carcinogenic hydrocarbons, including benzapyrene, a key factor in promoting human lung cancer. And marijuana smoke deposits four times as much tar in the respiratory tract as does a comparable amount of tobacco, thus increasing exposure to carcinogens.

Source: Roun et al. Biological Psychology Laboratory at Maclean Hospital Limited in haemorrhage Notes Vol. 15, No. 1

Cannabis increases tumour growth via several mechanisms including:

1) tars contain many chemicals which are directly tumour stimulating (anthracene’s, nitrosamines, hydrocarbon: higher tar content than
cigarettes);

2) immunosuppressive, reduces immune surveillance and anti-tumour activities of lymphocytes and natural killer cells;

3) altered cytokine production such that permissive cytokines are produced rather than immunostimulatory ones;

4) altered prostaglandin production.

Furthermore these effects occur both by receptor (CB1 and CB2) mediated and receptor independent mechanisms.

All of which means that you CANNOT in good conscience give THC to either AIDS patients or cancer patients, or recommend cannabis for human use.

Source:The PubMed studies

6)
Availability of non-psychoactive congeners

(i.e. there are currently better alternatives and scientific research continues to develop better medicines)

Both cannabidiol and dexanabinol (HU-210) share many of the supposedly beneficial effects of THC but are not psychoactive. As this area is better studied it is likely that many such agents are likely to be made available. With the unacceptably high level of side effects noted in these patients, it would appear to be thoroughly premature to precipitately launch into the making of THC available at this time. A multitude of studies have demonstrated currently available medicines are superior to cannabis.

Source:NeuroReport, Vol. 13, No. 5, 16 April 2002.
Source: Eija Kalso, Associate professor. Pain Clinic, Helsinki University Hospital, Finland BMJ.3212-3.. July 7th 2001

7) Unacceptability of the smoked form of delivery

The toxicity of the smoked form to the aerodigestive tracts, including its association with chronic bronchitis and emphysema and asthma has been agreed upon by major colleges of thoracic medicine worldwide including the Australian and New Zealand Thoracic Society and the British Lung Foundation. Cancer of the mouth, throat, tongue, larynx pharynx have also been noted. Interestingly a high rate of bladder cancer has been noted in some series as cannabinoids are excreted by the urinary route.

Smoking can double risk of MS

Smokers are 181 times more likely to develop multiple sclerosis than non smokers according to Dr Trond Riise.

Source:Dr Trond Riise,University of Bergen Norway reported by ASH Oct 2003
Passive inhalation of cannabis smoke
The blood samples from the passive subjects taken up to 3 hrs. after the start of exposure to cannabis smoke showed a complete absence of cannabinoids. In contrast, their urine samples taken from passive sample up to 6 hrs. after exposure showed significant concentrations of cannabinoid metabolites (less than or equal to 6.8 ng ml-1). These data, taken with the results of other workers, show passive inhalation of cannabis smoke to be possible.

Souce:Law B, Mason PA, Moffat AC, King LJ, Marks V. PMID: 6149279 [PubMed – indexed for MEDLINE]
Cannabis Poisoning
A paediatrician Dr John Goldsmith has come out publicly with a survey he has done in North Island Hospital in NZ. emergency units where babies under the age of 2.5 years are admitted for cannabis poisoning .

Source: Dr John Goldsmith North Island Hospital ,New Zealand, 2002

8) Unacceptability of the oral form of Delivery
As it is not easily possible to titrate the oral dose exactly a very high rate of unpleasant and dysphoric side effects has been noted. This would appear also to be a sub-optimal route of delivery.

9) The Complexity of bringing drugs to market

The complexity and cost of bringing drugs to market has been noted many times, and is said to cost up to the billions of dollars. Furthermore this is understood never to have been done in Australia. Hence it is only prudent for Australian regulatory authorities including Governments to await formal pharmaceutical trials in nations and entities which have recognized pharmaceutical industries such as Europe and North America. It is prudent not to attempt to bypass this process for litigant as well as compassionate reasons. To inflict upon sick people, the adverse effects of marijuana could be interpreted by the public and the courts as a negligent act of the government who have an over riding responsibility to protect the public from claims that cannot and have not been sustained in evidence.

10) Aging and Stem Cells

With all the recent debate in relation to embryonic stem cells, the central, pivotal and essential role of stem cells which occur in the adult organism appears to have been radically overlooked. Obviously patients addicted to many drugs look prematurely and severely aged. Experimental studies have established for many years that all the illicit drugs of abuse cause single cell programmed death. This appears to occur in an additive and indeed multiplicative manner. One of the worst offenders is THC. It is also established that all the illicit drugs cause an inhibition of stem cell growth. This is well described in the brain and hypothalamus, but also affects other tissues. The combined effects of increased rate of cell death, and reduced rate of cell renewal may potentially be very serious and urgently require further study. This should concern many Governments given the increasing burden of aging on health budgets in many nations. The very real prospect of accelerated aging – especially of vulnerable patients such as those suffering from AIDS should precipitate a major community outcry against all but the most scrupulous clinical use of the appropriately researched cannabinoids.

11) Basic Neuropharmacophysiology

THC actually acts to inhibit synaptic transmission. Receptors exist on the PRE-synaptic side of the synapse and appear to act to turn off neurotransmission. This is known to scientists as “retrograde neurotransmission.” This is of course entirely consistent with the clinical syndrome we see of so-called “dope-heads.” This of course is the major reason it is used – the “downer” or sedative effect.

But the basis of its neuropharmacology should give us great pause indeed, for we appear to be shutting down the brain functions. It should also be added that there is a very close relationship between the opiate and cannabinoid receptor at the molecular level on the cell membrane. Both are 7-transmembrane loop-helix-loop GTP coupled plasma membrane receptors, coupled to inhibitory effects on adenyl cyclase and DNA transcription in the cell nucleus via similar intracellular transduction cascades.

Both are associated with immunosuppression, programmed cell death, and stem cell inhibition. Both occur in similar parts of the brain particularly in the hypothalamus and limbic circuits; both appear to share significant cross-talk at the plasma membrane level. In other words the so-called “gateway hypothesis” which was demonstrated and proven in the Christchurch New Zealand cohort, and was thought to be based on social and values based activities, almost certainly extends also to the molecular and cell membrane level.

12) Sundry Toxicities

Toxic effects on the following systems are accepted even by major cannabis advocates such as Wayne Hall.:

‘In fact the serious adverse effects of Cannabis have been known for some time now. Including adolescent developmental problems, permanent cognitive impairment as well as involvement in and the development of psychosis’.

Source:Hall W, Solowij N, “Long-term Cannabis use and Mental Health” 1997 British Journal of Psychiatry, August,1997 171:107-8

‘Caused disturbance to neural connectivity. However, it seems Cannabis can precipitate or exacerbate a schizophrenic tendency in a characteristic manner’.
Source:Hall W, Solowij N, “Long-term Cannabis use and Mental Health” 1997 British Journal of Psychiatry, August, 171:107-8
Hall A, Degenhardt, “Cannabis and Psychosis” Australian National Drug and Alcohol Research Centre, Presented
at The Inaugural International Cannabis and Psychosis Conf. 1999, Melbourne 16-17 February 1999

Chronic Symptoms of Cannabis Psychosis
‘Patients are left with the well-recognised and permanent symptoms of memory loss, apathy, loss of motivation and, paranoid ideation. ….. there is accumulating evidence of the psychological consequences of using Cannabis’.

Source: Hall W, Solowji N, Lemon J, The health and psychological consequences Monograph Series no 25.
Canberra:Australia Government Publishing Service, 1994 of Cannabis use. Nat. Drug Strategy
a) Driving

More than one in five drivers who died on NZ roads 1995-1997 had been smoking cannabis in the-hours before they crashed. The study found 82 of a sample of 386 drivers had cannabis in their bloodstreams and 54 per cent of the cannabis smokers were over the legal alcohol limit.

Source: Institute of Environmental Science and Research (ESR) in New Zealand. Jan 2000.

Marijuana use can render the user unfit to drive for more than 24 hours and adversely affect cognitive impairment for up to 28 days
Source: Bolla, K.I., et al. Dose-related neurocognitive effects of marijuana use. Neurology 59(9):1337-1343, 2002.

b) Gene toxicity
Genetic anomalies tied with marijuana—activated brain chemicals appear linked to schizophrenia, Japanese researchers report.
This result provides genetic evidence that marijuana use can result in schizophrenia or a significantly increased risk of schizophrenia.
The researchers described their findings in the scientific journal Molecular Psychiatry.

Source:Hiroshi Ujike,Okayama university Japan- Reported in UPI Science News, New York 2002

c) Hormonal and reproductive toxicities
d) Likely effect on cancer

e) Amotivational syndrome

f) Depression

Frequent Marijuana Use Associated With Depression and Anxiety in Teen Girls

Teens, especially girls, who use marijuana frequently are more likely to suffer from depression and anxiety, say Australian researchers.
Teens who used marijuana weekly or more often had twice the risk of experiencing depression and anxiety. The risk of depression and anxiety was greatest among females who used marijuana daily – they had five times the risk of being depressed or anxious than their non-using peers.

Source: George C. Patton; Carolyn Coffey; John B. Carlin; Louisa Degenhardt; Michael Lynskey; Wayne Hall;
British Medical Journal, November 23, 2002
g) Psychosis
its effect to exacerbate supposedly underlying tendencies is agreed upon: several recent papers, including some from Netherlands, also document the occurrence of this severe disorder in patients without pre-existing personal or family history. In this connection it is worth noting that in the laboratory psychosis can be predictably produced in 100% of animals by the combined use of amphetamines and cannabis.

Marijuana and Schizophrenia

In one of the earliest studies that associates marijuana use with schizophrenia, 45,570 Swedish conscripts were asked to report their frequency of cannabis use. Over the 15 year follow up period, conscripts who had used cannabis more than 50 times before conscription had a six times higher risk for development of schizophrenia than non-users. Those who used cannabis 11 to 50 times had a three-fold increase in risk.

Source: Quoted in Taylor H: Analysis of the Medical Use of Marijuana and its Societal Implications.
Journal of the American Pharmaceutical Association 1998; 38: 220-7
h) Cardiovascular

Vasoconstriction occurs in many tissue beds, along with a faster heart rate. This has been associated with heart attack in some recent series, and organ infarction. It is of particular concern in the long term to think that such changes are likely occurring in the brain, along with accelerated cell death. The studies reported in this article indicate that using marijuana can increase the risk of stroke and bleeding in the brain, which can result in death.

Source: Thomas Geller, MD; Laura Loftis, MD; David S. Brink, MD; Pediatrics, March 2004
13) Comments on specific indications:

a) Where it is recommended to be used with prochlorperazine for vomiting. It is likely inferior to ondansetron etc. Side effect profile unacceptable. Seldom used clinically even where it is available to be prescribed.

b) Pain relief. Equal to codeine, plus the nasty side effects. codeine and other alternatives preferred.

c) Appetite stimulation. Minimal effect in published studies. However may be associated with other functions later on. Seems to be associated with morbid obesity developing in a number of heavy users in later decades. (This would appear to include several well-known cannabis advocates). Given that we known that obesity itself is a terrible health disadvantage, this alone should give us great cause. Overweight is also associated with at least 12 cancers, and according to a New England Med J article in 2003, the overall elevated cancer risk in the overweight is 156% of normal, with up to 450% for some tumours such as liver.

The authors reported that “participants reported ‘negative’ subjective effects… [irritable, miserable, bad drug effects, negative mood states] during days after smoking marijuana, but not after oral THC.” They noted that previous studies had found that both dronabinol and smoked marijuana increased “total daily calorie intake and produced abstinence symptoms upon discontinuation of their use.” [NOTE: caloric intake does not remedy wasting syndrome]
The doses of dronabinol and smoked marijuana used in the study were based on the researchers’ previous studies in which they found 20 mg of dronabinol had similar effects to marijuana cigarettes with a potency of 3.1% THC.

In conclusion, the authors note “This finding may have important clinical implications because it suggests that oral delta-9 THC is as effective as smoked marijuana…”

d) M.S. Likely to be acting as an immunosuppressant which should worry us enormously especially in AIDS patients.

e) Epilepsy. Some studies demonstrate also pro-epileptic effects. However there are lots of anticonvulsant drugs on the market currently which have a lesser side effect profile than THC.

f) Glaucoma. It is said that the intra-ocular pressure is lowered after systemic administration only at doses which depress the heart action. Very good drugs already exist for this disorder. A topically applied eye drop may have a role. Whether THC or one of the non-psychoactive cannabinoids would be most suitable remains to be determined.

Reference: Hart et al, Psychopharmacology (2002) 164:407-415

MARIJUANA SMOKING VS. CANNABINOIDS FOR GLAUCOMA THERAPY: A REVIEW

Abstract

This review encompasses the clinical effects, including toxicological data, of marijuana and many constituent compounds on the eye and the remainder of the body.

A perspective is given on the use of marijuana and the cannabinoids in the treatment of glaucoma. The conclusion is reached that although it is undisputed that smoking of marijuana plant material causes an intraocular pressure fall in 60 to 65% of users, continued use at a rate needed to control glaucomatous intraocular pressure leads to substantial systemic pathological changes. Development of drugs based upon the cannabinoid molecule or its agonists, for use as topical or oral antiglaucoma medications, seems to be worthy of further pursuit. Among the latter chemicals are some that have no known adverse psychoactive side effects.

Source: Keith Green, Ph.D., D.Sc., Department of Ophthalmology, Department of Physiology & Endocrinology,
Medical College of Georgia, Augusta, Georgia
14) Addictive and Habit Forming Potential
The addictive capacity of cannabis is now accepted and has been established in the scientific literature at least since the publication of the DSM IV of the American Psychiatric Association in 1994; and has been verified many times in papers since that time. The fact that this is now accepted throws into question its clinical use, for the drug itself is associated with uncontrolled use. Combined with its gateway action in terms of introducing the user to other drugs, this should be a point of major concern for all regulatory authorities, simply because addiction implies that it is not able to be regulated in the normal manner of other therapeutic agents.

15) The T.G.A.

If marijuana is in fact effective, economical and ultimately appropriately suitable to be prescribed to patients then it should pass the demands of Australia’s medical regulatory bodies …. including The Therapeutic Administration. Botanical or crude plant marijuana has not.

Refer to Cannabis with care? Booklet for further details on this concern as well as others

Copies available from Drug Free Australia. PO Box H135 Hurlstone Park NSW 2193
Or email info@drugfreeaustralia.org.au

Here is just one of the many examples of Australian and International professional bodies who oppose marijuana use.

AMERICAN ACADEMY PEDIATRICS STATEMENT

American Academy of Pediatrics Vol. 113 No. 6 June 2004 p.1825 – 1826

Recommendations

1. The American Academy of Pediatrics opposes the legalization of marijuana.

2. The American Academy of Pediatrics supports rigorous scientific research regarding the use of cannabanoids for the relief of symptoms not currently ameliorated by existing legal drug formulations.

CONCLUSION.

In short true compassion for our ill patients necessitates and indeed morally obliges appropriate and disciplined medical care for them.

The normal physiological action of cannabinoids in terms of the inhibition of brain function by retrograde neurotransmission is of major concern to all those concerned with preserving and promoting the neurological and normal brain function of adolescents and young adults, and thus maximizing the neurological potential and intellectual property of the on-coming generation.

If cannabinoids are shown to have a place in evidence based medical therapeutics in the future then, given the well established high side effect profile of these agents, and their horrific long term cumulative toxicities, it is appropriate that patients only be exposed after careful and replicated disciplined and independently controlled clinical trials with appropriate dose forms, or appropriate agents, most likely not THC itself.

It is also appropriate that comparative studies with established and accepted safe agents also be performed.

Issues of genotoxicity, weight gain, immunosuppression, impaired concentration while driving, gateway action at both the molecular and social level, premature aging including suppression of stem cell activity and renewal, and depression of brain function and neurogenesis and psychological toxicity appear to be particularly germane and of very real clinical concern, and the subject of on-going research at this time.

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

By Ann Stoker, B.A., NDPA.

CANNABIS – INFORMATION

Cannabis information for parliamentary briefings, leaflets and general articles needs to be clearly stated and simple – but with scientific references to source materials. The general public, and young people in particular, have been, and are being, given misinformation, insufficient information or totally incorrect information in many of the leaflets issued by other agencies. Most of these leaflets repeat messages from large organisations such as DrugsScope, (an organisation which was formed from the merging of two other groups ISDD and SCODA) or Connexions. ISDD had been disseminating out of date information for years yet an offer of help with updating the ISDD information on cannabis by a biology teacher specialising in the subject was refused.

HARMFULNESS OF CANNABIS

Given the known harmfulness of cannabis it would be unethical to try to replicate some of the small scale studies which showed significant harm from the use of the substance, The claim that millions worldwide use cannabis is no reason to ignore the harm which the small studies identify, and there are other quite large scale studies showing different elements of possible harm. In the USA there were 77,000 admissions to hospital emergency rooms in 1998 due to the use of cannabis. In the last year or two more and more psychiatrists and doctors have been publicising the fact that thousands of people are suffering from mental illness due to their use of cannabis. In the National Health Service in Britain there is a ‘yellow card scheme’ where GPs who come across even a few examples of contra-indications to prescribed drugs send in the card to flag up ‘caution’. These cautions are taken very seriously since the widespread prescribing of certain drugs could result in another situation Like thalidomide if not identified early on. This scheme could be adopted to note any physical or mental illness which doctors believe is due to their patient’s use of cannabis. We should take notice of any studies showing harm in so many areas from the use of cannabis. The fact that thousands may use and have no apparent adverse effects is of no consequence – many pharmaceutical drugs are withdrawn from general use when they harm a few – even though they may help many others. Professor Gabriel Nahas writes very eloquently on this very point:

The protagonists of the free availability of cannabis who are convinced that this drug does not constitute a serious health hazard will claim that those who wish to ban cannabis must produce convincing reasons before we restrict the individual’s right to choose (Schofield. 1971) – This view is a transposition of a legal concept regarding man’s innocence until proven guilty into the field of medicine, where a different viewpoint prevails in respect to drug usage. indeed, physicians have to take a guarded view of all drugs. which are considered guilty until proven innocent. The state which has the mandate to protect the health of the people, must hold a view similar to that of the physician.
Professor G. Nahas ‘Marijuana – Deceptive Weed’ 1975 Published by Raven Press

It is clear therefore that saying ‘millions use cannabis’ or ‘ I use and it never did me any harm’ is the same as saying that millions drink alcohol and they are not all alcoholics. True. But many are – and the younger they are when they begin to use alcohol the more likely they are to become problem drinkers. Cannabis is no different and more and more research is being published which shows that early onset use of cannabis and other illegal drugs leads to more problematic and chaotic drug use in later life.

MILLIONS USE CANNABIS WORLDWIDE

The often quoted figures that millions’ use cannabis world-wide or’ 2 -6 million have used cannabis in the UK – are themselves very misleading. Several years go the figure of 2 million users in the UK was bandied about – now one reads ‘Up to 6 million users’. Firstly, where is the hard evidence? The activity is illegal and therefore difficult to portray accurately. Were they users in their youth and are they now non-users ? Have these users tried the drug once, twice or many times ? Did they use daily, weekly, monthly, three times a year or once every five years? Did they smoke ditchweed, grass, ganja, resin, sinsemilla, skunk or chaw? These questions are important because the very real harms from the use of cannabis will vary from person to person and are dependent upon the age of onset of use, the length of time used, the frequency of use, the type and purity of the drug used, the strength of the drug used. Thus it is not possible to compare a 50 year old intelligent male who has occasionally smoked an 0.5% THC joint at parties – from the age of 18 – perhaps a total of 100 low potency joints in his life, to an unemployed and alienated young man of 18 who started smoking 0.5% THC joints at 13 years of age and was a daily smoker of skunk (15 – 27% THC) by 15 – which could be well over 700 joints in 2 years. The risks to their health, their education, their employment prospects, their family and social life and their relationships with the opposite sex will be very different.

IS CANNABIS ADDICTIVE?

There is plenty of research that shows cannabis to be an addictive substance. The following authors have all written affirmatively on the subject of addiction.

One of the single most important reasons why there has been an upsurge in the use of illegal drugs by Western youth is the mistaken belief that marijuana is a ‘soft’ drug. not physically addictive, and mood-altering rather than mind altering. Studies of the characteristics of drugs and patterns of their use and the observations of patients, doctors, teachers and ex-drug users have made it clear how misleading these assumptions have been.
Elaine Walters Marijuana – An Australian Crisis’ 1993

Cannabis is readily available on the streets. Were it to be legalised the addiction rate would inevitably he greater. The following quotation concerned narcotics but the point is made that greater availability of drugs leads to greater addiction.
‘The addiction rate to narcotics among the medical profession is estimated to be 30-50 times greater than that of the general population. These statistics suggest that easy availability and the inherent addictive properties of narcotics are important factors…….
Nils Bejerot, ‘Addiction. An Artificially Induced Drive’ published by Charles Thomas. USA

Like all addictive substances, cannabis is not easy to give up. Some believe that it is more difficult to stop all use of cannabis than it is to stop the use of most other drugs.
A marked and rapid tolerance to most of the physiological and neuropsvchological effects of THC occurs. Withdrawal symptoms occur after cessation of heavy daily cannabis administration. As is the case for other drug dependencies, there is no pharmacological cure for cannabis dependency. Therefore, as for treatment of other dependencies, that of cannabis should employ methods that aim at abstinence from the drug so as to foster a drug-free life. Long-term cannabis smokers are difficult to treat because of their denial of the progressive and subtle negative effects of their dependency.
Gabriel G. Nahas, MD. Ph.D. D.Sc. ‘A Manual on Drug Dependence’ 1992
published by Essential Medical Information Systems. Durant. USA
In a study including people who used both cocaine and marijuana, many stated that giving up the use of marijuana was in some ways more difficult than giving up cocaine.
Strategies for breaking marijuana dependence. Zweben & O 1992 (2):165-71
Published in Journal Psychoactive Drugs
Clinically there is no doubt that psychological dependence on marijuana can and does occur. It is the drug of choice of many of the adolescents in our clinic. … Symptoms of psychological dependence parallel those seen in classic adult-onset alcoholism, and, in fact, such a model seems to serve very well for marijuana dependence. Symptoms such as increasing use to the point of tolerance, solitary use, surreptitious use, symptomatic use, blackouts, personality change when intoxicated, inability to control the amount used, preoccupation with use, inappropriate use, and use despite adverse consequences are seen regularly in our adolescent patients… irritability, anorexia, insomnia, and intensive drug seeking behaviour upon cessation of marijuana use (with) relief of these by return to marijuana use.
…a major clinical issue (is that) many children are referred to paediatricians, child psychiatrists and other health care workers for problematic behaviours and the child is not recognised as an extensive marijuana user.., because health care personnel often do not inquire about such drug use, or if they do inquire the child will minimize the extent of use.. there is extensive enabling behaviour , of both an active and passive nature, among school officials, parents and some professionals who deal with children. There appears to be a need for research and education regarding this behaviour if we are to increase our effectiveness in identifying those individuals whose drug use is problematic and in intervening as early as possible.

Marijuana and Youth – Clinical Observations on Motivation and Learning. pages 98-99 Robert Niven M.D.
Published by the National Institute on Drug Abuse. 1982
The prevalence and severity of psychiatric problems and addiction associated with cannabis, has resulted in ‘marijuana-related-dysfunctioning’ being one of the most frequent admission diagnoses in drug treatment facilities.
TheCannabis Connection by Elaine Walters Australia. 1989
Surveys indicate that the percentages of excessive consumers of illegal dependence producing drugs are related to the respective addictive properties of the drugs. Experts have concluded that marijuana addiction frequency, though not as high as cocaine or heroin, is far higher than alcohol. Still when someone has become dependent on marijuana the addiction is as severe and difficult to treat.
Ibid
In 1968 the official classification of psychiatric disorders did away with the term addiction, replacing it with dependence… The result of a sudden termination in use of the drug of addiction, the withdrawal reaction, is well known in the cases of heroin and alcohol. That it occurs with the marijuana discontinuation, to a different degree, is not generallv appreciated.
Bitter Grass – The Cruel Truth About Marijuana by Roy Hanu Hart M.D. Published by Psychoneurologia Press
in Cooperation with the American Academy of Psychiatry &Neurology (AAPN). Kansas.

The pharmacological classification of dependence-producing drugs is as follows:

Toxicity to brain cells (neuropsychological toxicity) with impairment of mental functions and changed perception of reality (‘spaced out’)
A primary pleasure reward from chemical effects on the Limbic Area of the brain, (‘the pleasure centre’).
Craving, compulsion and repetitive self-administration.
Tolerance with daily use; a progressively greater dose needed to get a high.
Mental and/or physical damage from acute or chronic use.

There is also a summary of dependence in decreasing order of severity:

Opiates.
Major psychostimulants – cocaine, amphetamines.
Psychodepressants – Alcohol if greater than 30 mls. per day.
barbiturates. benzodiazepines.
Cannabis (is a psychodepressant but also a stimulant and a hallucinogenic – depending on type used, eg grass, resin or chaw). Hallucinogens – LSD, PCP, Magic mushrooms etc.
Volatile solvents (e.g. aerosols, glue, acetone etc.)
Minor psychostimulants (caffeine etc.)

Source: Marijuana. Elaine Walters Assoc.Printers. AustraliaISBN 0 646 15066 9

Using the above definitions, and just a few extracts from scientific and medical writings, it is clear that cannabis is both physically and psychologically addictive – as any worker in a drug rehabilitation centre could confirm. Relativists say it’s not a problem because it’s only psychologically addictive – in fact psychological addiction is a bigger problem than physical. It is immaterial as to whether cannabis is physically or psychologically addictive (some would say both); there is research to show that cannabis is one of the most difficult drugs to give up and relapse following de-tox. is very common. That is addiction.

LINKS WITH LEGALISERS

Provided the assertions can be backed up by references to source materials, it is essential that cannabis details are truthful – even if they are considered by some to be ‘hard-hitting’. It has been suggested that NDPA should ‘play down’ the harmfulness of cannabis, and not to become involved in the ‘debates’ over legalisation issues. This would be a very short-sighted strategy – the legalisers hide behind pseudo-scientific groups and big money organisations (Drug Policy Alliance, Lindesmith Institute etc.) and will themselves be citing ‘technical’ papers written by their own members (Nadelmann, Zimmer, John Morgan etc. etc.) – who clearly have an axe to grind. Without pointing up the connections between the legalisation movement and some of the misinformation being published (and posted on the Internet), young people may well accept at face value the ‘facts’ they are given by such people.

It needs to be made clear that when reading any research about drugs in general and cannabis in particular, the credentials and affiliations of the authors should be checked carefully. Even ‘evaluations’ can be biased. Scientists or academics who are members of legalisation bodies do produce ‘research’ which puts an attractive and acquiescent spin on drug use. Many of these have publicly admitted that they themselves use illegal drugs. Scientists and medics who publicise studies which show the opposite may belong to anti-legalisation groups – and some have joined these groups because they have first hand experience in their professional capacities of the problems caused by drug use. In between these two dichotomous groups are a large body of professionals with no affiliations to anti or pro-legalisation groups, and who, year after year. add to the body of knowledge about drugs, especially cannabis. The University of Mississippi has over 15,000 research papers about cannabis ‘and none of them give it a clean bill of health.

The following are some quotations from the proceedings of the Second International Symposium ‘Cannabis. Physiopathology, Epidemiology, Detection’, organized by the National Academy of Medicine in Paris in April 1992. This congress consisted of 53 renowned scientists from all over the world who presented papers on cannabis.

‘At a time when strong voices are advocating the relegalisation of illicit drugs, and public health is threatened by the progression of illicit drug consumption, the City of Paris is proud to support outstanding scientific studies which should help to promote prevention programmes for your youth. ….(scientists) are now seeking methods to curtail the use and trivialisation of substances which pollute the internal milieu of man’s brain and physical health and especially that of future generations. Such is our hope and our goal’.
Jacques Chirac. Mayor of Paris. Former Prime Minister of France.
‘And today, all the clinical symptomatology of cannabis intoxication described so accurately by Moreau, (in 1845), and which has been confirmed by many other psychopharmacologists, is being reinvestigated and correlated with biochemical and neurophysiological markers of the brain. Such studies will be discussed in this colloquium which should be another landmark in our understanding of the human brain.’
Henri Baruk. Prof. Honoraire de La Faculte de Medecin

The general conclusions of this international conference were as follows:

1. The toxicity of cannabis is today well established, experimentally and clinically. This drug adversely effects the central nervous system, the lung, immunity and reproductive function.
2. Epidemiological studies have reported that the use of ‘hard drugs’ rarely occurs among subjects who have never consumed cannabis.

3. Consequently, the participants to this colloquium rebut the distinction made between soft and hard drugs.

4. The trivialisation (decriminalization) of cannabis use, where it has occurred, has resulted in a considerable increase of its consumption and of its subsequent damaging effects.

5. It is important to foster a campaign of information and prevention bearing both on the legal aspects and the health consequences of cannabis consumption.

Professor Henri Balon. President. French National Academy of Medicine. April 1992.

The continued increase in the use of illegal drugs, by young people in particular, is a cause for great concern. As Elaine Walters (Australia) wrote so cogently in 1993:
Experience shows that one cannot be in favour of legalisation, and hope to discourage drug use by youth. In the USA during the period in which eleven states decriminalised marijuana half of high school seniors were using, or had experimented with marijuana and 11% became intoxicated daily. ….Drug legalisation will result in more people experimenting with drugs, more experimenters becoming regular users and more regular users becoming addicts.
‘Marijuana – An Australian Crisis’ Elaine Walters 1993.

Many young people receive out of date information from leaflets widely distributed by schools, health promotion units, youth clubs, young peoples’ counselling services etc. They read in newspapers, or watch on television, pseudo debates about ‘de-criminalisation of cannabis’, they are told that they should make their own ‘informed choices’ about use or non-use and that they should ensure that they use ‘responsibly’.

‘The dramatic increase in illegal drug use among adolescents and young adults indicates that drug education programmes in schools need to be reviewed …relevant, accurate and up-to-date information is an important part of the whole approach. No choices should be given to young people about illegal drugs, and their use cannot be regarded as a civil right or privilege. ‘Just Say No’ is a clear and concise message. ….Young people should be taught how to evaluate advertisements, and how to recognise promotion of drug use in music videos, records and other commercialised forms of entertainment. Drug use and under-age drinking among adolescents should not be regarded as ‘normal’. Neither should it be regarded as a psychological problem. It is a behavioural problem which requires correction, intervention and common sense from parents, teachers and members of the community.
Ibid.

We must give the public, and especially young people, information about cannabis which is clear, up-to-date and unequivocal. NDPA acknowledges this need and will continue to provide such information.

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :


By Mary Brett, Head of Health Education, Dr.Challoners Grammar School, Amersham. Bucks.

Paper presented at the Maxie Richards Foundation Conference Glasgow Oct 2003.
Cannabis or marijuana, is our commonest illegal drug, currently used in Britain by around 3.2 million people. Most of them are totally unaware of its damaging effects, especially on the brain.

There are now in excess of 15,000 scientific papers on cannabis. None of the ones I have read say it is a safe drug, and I am assured it is the same for the rest.

We need to know how this damage is caused, and will start with the cells of the brain. Messages pass along the nerve fibres as minute electrical impulses and cross the gap, the synapse, between nerve cells in the form of chemicals called neurotransmitters. These are the brain’s natural drugs and there are dozens of them Each neurotransmitter molecule has a particular shape that fits into its own receptor site on the next cell, as a key fits into a lock.

The mind-altering drugs that people take operate at these synapses. They either mimic the neurotransmitter by shape, increase the rate at which they are released block them or prevent them from being re-absorbed. They take control point out to my pupils that no person can do that, no parent, no teacher or friend. But drugs can.

The psychoactive ingredient in cannabis is a substance called tetrahydrocannabinol, THC for short. It mimics a neurotransmitter called anandamide, from the Sanskrit word, ananda, which means bliss, Receptor sites for anadamide, and therefore THC, exist in many regions of the brain and in other organs of the body. So the actions of cannabis are many and varied.

In the brain, CBI receptors are in the cerebral cortex. In the sensory areas, sound and colour perception are distorted. Muscle coordination and psychomotor skills like driving are impaired in the motor areas, judgement, reasoning and logical thought are also affected. They are also present in the hippocampus where memory and the appreciation of time and space are situated, There are other areas with receptors, but the lack of them in the brain stem which controls automatic functions like respiration, is thought to explain the absence of overdosing. In the rest of the body the receptors are called CB2 receptors.

But it is in .the limbic region of the brain, a circular area in the centre, which suffers the greatest impact from cannabis. This is the seat of the emotions, and its activity determines our moods, whether we are happy or sad anxious or peaceful. Anxiety, depression, panic attacks and even paranoia can be triggered if it is disturbed. It also houses the ‘pleasure ‘or ‘reward’ system. Many drugs affect this area to give a high e.g. cocaine, ecstasy, amphetamines, alcohol and nicotine. Cannabis is no exception. The reason people give for taking cannabis is to get a high or a feeling of euphoria. All these drugs release the neurotransmitter, dopamine. However, THC acts on the CB1 receptors more strongly and for a longer time than anandamide so the effects are enhanced, THC has to be entirely eliminated from the body whereas anandamide is quickly recycled.

One experience of a high leads to another and another. Tolerance develops, receptors need more stimulation and more are produced. Dependence occurs, both psychological and physical. Withdrawal symptoms have been seen, shaking, insomnia, irritability, anxiety and aggression. Not so dramatic as the ‘cold turkey’ of heroin withdrawal since the fat-soluble cannabis remains so long in the body.
Fifty per cent of the THC from a joint will still be there five to six days later and ten per cent after a month, traces can be detected in the hair and urine for weeks after that. Compare this with water-soluble alcohol which disappears at the rate of one unit an hour, the amount in half a pint of beer a glass of wine etc.

In September, 2002, out of the six million drug addicts in the United States, sixty per cent were dependent on cannabis, and more youngsters were being treated there for marijuana dependence than for alcohol. An Australian researcher, Professor Wayne Hall, estimates that of those who ever try cannabis, ten per cent will become addicted, roughly the same as for alcohol.

There is no foolproof cure for any type of addiction.

The effects on the brain are not limited to addiction. People don’t always get the desired euphoria they are seeking. The most common adverse effect is anxiety or even panic. Symptoms can range from restlessness to loss of control to paranoia and fears of impending death. Although these are usually short-lived, occasionally they persist for several weeks.

An American paper in 2001 using nearly 2,000 participants, reported a four-fold increased risk of major depression. The same risk factor emerged in an Australian study of daily teenage female users. A paper in the British Journal of Psychiatry May 2002, found the increased risk for depression was 26 times in teenagers who use cannabis, alcohol and tobacco.

Acute psychosis can occur. A ten-year experiment with decriminalization in Alaska was terminated in 1991 by a public referendum after over 2,.000 people had to be hospitalized and treated in the previous two years for cannabis psychosis. The four to six week treatments were carried out at the taxpayers expense, fuelling anger and resentment. I personally know of six people in some way connected with my school, who have young relatives or friends who have become psychotic due to cannabis use.

A friend of mine lost a son to drugs 2 years ago. He had started using cannabis at the age of fifteen at his public school. And as so often happens progressed through all the other drugs and spent the last few years of his life in care homes and psychiatric institutions. He died of a particularly pure dose of heroin at the age of 45. Shortly before he died, he told his mother he could handle any drug now except cannabis. It made him paranoid and terrified him.

Swedish studies which followed the progress of over 50,000 conscripts, aged eighteen to twenty-five, over fifteen years, discovered that the risk of developing schizophrenia was increased by a factor of six for those who had used cannabis more than fifty times. This was when the concentration of THC was much lower than it is today. In the sixties, the average THC content was 0.5%, now at 5%, it is ten times stronger. Skunk and nederweed, selectively bred varieties from Holland can have THC contents of anything from 9% to 27%. This is a very different drug from the one that fuelled the ‘hippy’ generation.

Other studies have confirmed these findings of mental illness, and one from New Zealand by Dr Louise Arsenault of the Institute of Psychiatry in London in 2002, found a correlation with cannabis and violence. Young males were five times more likely to be violent than non-users, the increased risk for alcohol was three. So much for the cry of the pro-legalisers that youngsters are better off stoned and peaceful than drunk and violent. Whether cannabis actually causes schizophrenia is still to be discovered, but it certainly triggers and exacerbates the condition in vulnerable people. It is interesting to note that increased dopamine activity is implicated in schizophrenia, and other dopamine releasing drugs like amphetamines and cocaine can cause a schizophrenic psychosis. Could this give us a clue as to how cannabis operates?

In a Swedish investigation into suicides, users of alcohol, amphetamines and heroin were compared with marijuana users. More cases occurred in cannabis users than in any other group and the methods used were more violent, No other group jumped from high buildings or murdered others before taking their own lives. There have been several tragic tales in the press in the last year or so, of young people committing suicide after taking cannabis. Maybe people don’t die of an overdose, a common cry of the pro-legalisers but in 1999, in the United States, out of 664 marijuana related deaths, in 187 of them the only drug involved was marijuana.

There is increasing suggestive evidence, both from animal experiments and scans of the human brain, that some cells may die. Brain cells are never replaced. Permanent brain damage is a distinct possibility. It would be slow, subtle, insidious but cumulative.

High densities of CB1 receptors in the cortex and hippocampus cause concentration and the learning and memory processes to be badly impaired. The persistence of THC in the membranes for a long time, compounds the problems. As a schoolteacher, this is the area that causes me most concern.

Even on one or two joints a month, a cannabis personality develops. Users become inflexible, can’t plan their day properly, their problem-solving skills deteriorate, they can’t take criticism and they feel misunderstood. School grades take a nosedive and they often miss out on their chosen university places. At the same time they are lonely and miserable, Trying to talk sense to them becomes a futile exercise. Few children, using cannabis even occasionally, will achieve their full potential.

A few years ago, a former pupil came to see me. He was in his last year of a degree in pharmacology and wanted to do his dissertation on cannabis. Having been a user of cannabis while at school, he had only just managed to scrape into university with C and D grades Most of his friends didn’t make it. “What stopped you”, I asked. He looked surprised. “You did”, he said, “I could quote every word you ever said about cannabis, and all of it came true.”. He also managed to stop some of his friends. He got a first for his dissertation, spent a year with a friend of mine, a toxicologist as a technician, did an MSc in neurology, and is now researching brain diseases towards a PhD.

Because CB1 receptors are in the motor area of the cortex, psychomotor performance and muscle control are affected. People should not drive. Airline pilots, on flight simulators could not land their planes properly even up to and beyond twenty-four hours after a joint and had no idea that anything was amiss. If you have a joint today, you should not be driving tomorrow. Cannabis has been implicated in more vehicle accidents in some American surveys than alcohol, although ten times as many people drink. One ‘spliff’ is thought by some experts to have the same effect as the amount of alcohol needed to just exceed the drink-drive limit.

THC, by dissolving in the fatty cell membranes, expands them, it is a partial anaesthetic, and so interferes with their structures and alters other receptor sites. The transmission of other neurotransmitters is therefore disrupted. It is a multi-faceted drug.

CB2 receptors are found in the cells of our immune system and THC disrupts the copying of DNA into new cells being made in the body. Fewer white blood cells are produced and some are abnormal. As a result, people are more likely to fall ill, their sickness will be prolonged and more severe. AIDS patients, with an already weakened immune system would be well advised to steer clear of this drug.

The heart also contains CB2 receptors. The heart rate is increased and blood pressure rises. A report from an Athens hospital in 2000, found three young men, heavy cannabis users, average age twenty-five, with heart attacks that could not be explained away except by their use of cannabis. A report in 2002 found that middle-aged people were 5 times more likely to have a heart attack in the hour following the smoking of a joint.

Cannabis smoke contains more of some of the carcinogens found in tobacco smoke and deposits three to four times as much tar in the airways. Even 20 years ago, lung biopsies of young French and American soldiers were finding pre cancerous cells, not usually found till middle age in tobacco users. As well as lung cancers, rare head and neck cancers are now being seen in young cannabis users, not found in tobacco smokers till the average age of sixty-four.

Doctors in Sweden are advised to suspect cannabis use when young people present with bronchitis, the link is so common.

Cannabis smoke burns at a higher temperature, the smoke is inhaled deeper and held longer in the lungs. One joint in cancer terms is thought to be the equivalent of five cigarettes. The British Lung Foundation was planning recently to start warning young pot-smokers of these dangers by text messages. Collapsed lungs, lungs shot through with holes and young people needing transplants are all part of the sorry saga.

Sperm have very high concentrations of CB2 receptors, and the female uterus is rich in anandamides, so it is hardly surprising that cannabis can have significant effects on the reproductive process. THC also interferes with the production of the sex hormones.

Human sperm have consistently been seen to be lower in numbers, and with decreased mobility. Surveys on young male pot-smoking patients, twenty years ago in Kingston Hospital, Jamaica, found 20% complaining of impotence and 35% with a sperm count so low, it would render them sterile. And that was when the strength of cannabis was a tenth of what it is today.

A very recent report from Buffalo in The States, showed sperm of cannabis users were less likely to be able to fertilise eggs. The sperm were swimming too fast too soon and burning themselves out long before they could reach the eggs. It also confirmed the significantly reduced numbers of sperm and seminal fluid in cannabis smokers.

In the late seventies and early eighties, a rash of papers found various abnormalities and even stillbirths in the offspring of mice and rats exposed to cannabis. Some of this older research has been criticized for various reasons but in 1994, the eminent cannabis researcher, Australian Professor Wayne Hall said, ‘It would be unwise to exclude cannabis as a cause of malformations until larger studies incorporating better controls have been carried out’.

One thing that is consistent in the research of today and twenty years ago, is the reduction in weight and length of the baby, the equivalent of smoking ten to fifteen cigarettes a day. Low birth weight relates in later life to diabetes, heart disease and high blood pressure. These babies also had mild symptoms of withdrawal. Three studies in the nineties linked cannabis use to a ten-fold increase in cases of one form of leukaemia, and increases in two other forms of childhood cancer.

In December, 2002, one in every eight babies born in The Princess Royal Maternity Hospital in Glasgow, had been exposed to cannabis before birth. Seventy-five per cent of babies exposed to drugs in the womb have medical problems later in life compared to twenty-seven per cent who are not exposed.

Just as I was preparing this talk about a month ago, I met a woman whose daughter had become schizophrenic from cannabis use. She then became pregnant and had a baby at the age of seventeen. She begged her mother to take in the little boy as she could not look after him herself. Grandparents have very few rights so they had to fight through the courts which took most of their savings. The baby suffered from epilepsy for some time after it was born, her daughter will be on medication for life.

The progress of babies born to cannabis-using mothers is being followed in a long-running investigation in Ottawa by Peter Fried and others:

The parents reported above average problems with behaviour, decreased attention and more impulsiveness. Fried has also warned of the delayed maturing of the visual system.

Deficiences in neurological behaviour are not really apparent till the age of four. This is when children start using their ‘executive functions’ (the ability to plan things and solve problems). By the age of 12 these problems were still apparent. Fried also warns that today’s stronger varieties will almost certainly make things worse.

Other researchers have come up with supporting evidence. In two studies of three year-olds, one found the results of intelligence tests to be below normal, the other, investigating sleep patterns, found more problems, more arousals and low sleep efficiency.

I would like now, to address a few of the controversies surrounding cannabis.

The first is the medical argument.

In 1979, a pot-using American lawyer, Keith Stroup, said, “We will use the medical marijuana argument as a red herring to give pot a good name”. In the early nineties, Richie Cowan his successor at NORML, the National Organization for the Reform of the Marijuana Laws, echoed this by saying, “Medical marijuana is our strongest suit. It is our point of leverage which will move us toward the legalisation of marijuana for personal use. This campaign is still ongoing.

There may well be some ingredients in the cannabis plant that may prove beneficial in medicine. But that is the point — the ingredients. Medicines, by law, have to be pure single chemicals so that their actions are predictable and controllable. Heroin and cocaine fall into this category. THC is already available as Nabilone in Britain and Marinol in the USA. The pro-legalisers don’t tell you this — they want their joints. These prescription drugs however are unpopular with doctors because of their side effects. Currently the BMA is testing some of the other cannabinoids, there are around sixty of them in the plant, and no one should have a problem with this. It is estimated that people suffering from glaucoma would need six joints a day to maintain reduced pressure in the eyeball. Hardly useful members of the community. It’s like saying to someone, “take up smoking to get your weight down”. Nicotine suppresses the appetite. Any GP giving this advice would be severely censured.

In November 1996, Proposition 200 permitted physicians in Arizona to prescribe marijuana with no limitation on the age of the patient or the disorder involved. Two months later, in January, 1997, a poll revealed that 85% of the voters believed it should be changed, 60% wanted it repealed and 70% said it gave kids the impression that it was OK to smoke pot. In 1998, 109 distinguished scientists from all over the world, held a conference in New York on medical marijuana. In 1999 their conclusions, published in Marijuana and Medicine, stated, ‘Marijuana or THC do not qualify as safe or effective medications which aim at restoring or maintaining physiological functions of cells, organs and organisms .They have no place in a modern pharmacopoeia from which cannabis was eliminated in the first part of the century’.

A more recent ‘ploy’ of the pro-legalisers is the promotion of hemp. Hemp is cannabis. They claim its needed for everything from ropes to cloth and newsprint. In reality it’s twice the price of the finest linen, paper from trees is much cheaper and ropes rot, and are not so strong as the synthetic ones we use today. Why? — It is a very simple chemical process to extract the 0.25% THC from hemp, purify and concentrate it to a very powerful 40% which they call CHAW.

There is a strong movement for the legalization of cannabis. So who are these people?

Most are users, or their children are. Some, like Richard Branston, would make a lot of money selling it, Others are libertarians. “We can do what we like with our bodies, it’s no one else’s business”. That’s fine as long as it doesn’t affect or interfere with anyone else. But, stoned drivers can and do kill others. Addicts get treatment at taxpayers’ expense. Stoned workers are inefficient and unproductive, and yes, passive smoking does occur. And where’s the liberty in making yourself a slave to a toxic drug for life?

Another controversy is the gateway theory. “Does cannabis lead onto other drugs’ ? Well it can! Lots of surveys in America by Denise Kandel point to this being the case. Level of usage is closely correlated. She found that, of those using mar between 10 and 100 times in their lifetime, 51% went on to harder drugs. From 100 to 1,000, it rose to 79%, and over 1,000 times it was 90%. Studies more recently from Australia and New Zealand, always controlled for confounding factors, have found that weekly users are sixty times more likely to progress, and the trend is confirmed by research on twins.Of course not everyone will go down this route, but almost one hundred per cent of heroin users started on cannabis.

People often compare the cannabis situation today with prohibition in the 30’s. The comparison is false. An attempt was made then to make a drug that was legal, illegal A drug that was used by most of the population, could be used without damage to health and had been around for centuries.

Cannabis is currently illegal, and even when it was legal, was only used by a minority of individuals. Use over the centuries has always been patchy. Regular use of cannabis today is around 8 to 9%, not the 30 to 40% of people who have tried it. How many children try smoking? — 90%? We’re stuck with tobacco and alcohol, If introduced now, they would almost certainly be controlled drugs. We are desperately campaigning to stop people from smoking and abusing alcohol, do we really need another easily obtainable legal drug to add to the misery caused by the other two? Pulling the genie back in the bottle is not an easy task.

In fact, from a health point of view, prohibition was a spectacular success. Alcohol consumption declined, deaths from cirrhosis of the liver fell by one third, cases of alcohol-induced psychosis plummeted. Child neglect, juvenile delinquency and alcohol-related divorces all dropped by 50%.

Now I want to tell you, at least in my view, why we are in such a mess with drugs.

Parents must naturally assume that drug education in schools strongly discourages children from starting to use drugs. They could not be more wrong.

The vast majority of drug educators teach harm reduction and have done so for the past fifteen years or so, Harm reduction has its legitimate place when dealing with known users to try to limit the damage with the aim of getting them to stop. They can be encouraged to ‘chase the dragon’ inhale the fumes from heroin rather than inject it, and so avoid all the blood-borne diseases like AIDS and hepatitis. It has no place in the classroom where around 90% of pupils have no intention of following that way of life.

One of the favourite phrases of harm reductionists is “informed choice There should be no choice — drugs are illegal. Surely teachers of all people should be seen to be upholding the law. And anyway, they are currently not being informed properly, especially about cannabis, to make a choice, more on this later.

Harm reductionists don’t tackle” drugs, they accommodate them. Adults are opting out and abrogating their responsibilities. The first duty of parents, and indeed all adults, is the protection of vulnerable youngsters from anything that puts them in danger. We don’t let our offspring cross a busy road till they are old enough, or run towards a fire and burn themselves, why abandon them to drugs? Nor do we let them choose to break the law in other ways, e.g. speeding or petty pilfering.

It’s not surprising in this climate of acceptance, that drug use is rising, Preventing children from starting to use drugs is, after all not the aim of harm reduction, Children need rules and regulations. The only way they feel safe and secure is when they have boundaries to kick against. They often use their parents as an excuse when they want to opt out. “Dad would kill me”, is a phrase frequently overheard. They have no time for teachers who can’t control a class or try to be trendy. Often the boys who come back to see me after they have left are the ones I have had to discipline most severely.

I never say, “Don’t do drugs” or “just say no”. I simply point out, in biological terms, what can happen to their brains and bodies. I add to that all the social, family, emotional, educational and employment consequences of that way of life and they begin to appreciate its futility of it. Nor am I above a bit of emotional blackmail. I remind the boys that when they were pregnant, their mothers would have been fanatical about what they put into their bodies in case it harmed their unborn child. How devastating must it be for parents to have to sit back and watch their offspring ruining their brains and bodies with toxic chemicals.

Prevention does work. The most spectacular success of a prevention programme was seen in the United States between 1979 and 1991. This was the famous “Just say no” campaign. Don’t let anyone tell you it didn’t work. Parents got fed up with the trendy excuses for drug taking and collaborated with teachers, the police, social and youth workers, customs and excise and the children themselves, to foster the idea that drug-taking is not normal and was indeed harmful, and it worked ! The number of drug users fell from 23 to 14 million, a reduction of 60%, use of cannabis and cocaine halved, daily cannabis taking fell by 75%.

In surveys at the time, the most common reason for abstaining from, or quitting cannabis use was 70% with concerns over physical and psychological damage. Parental disapproval played a large part with a surprising 60%, as did the law, 40%. In 1991, they thought they had licked the problem and took their eyes off the ball. Inevitably usage once again rose, but now, under a new preventionist drug tsar, John Walters, once again it is on the decline.

The Swedes have always had excellent prevention programmes in place, and their whole culture is anti-drug. Sweden has a very low level of drug use.

Harm reduction literature consistently trivializes cannabis. Schools are bombarded with harm reduction literature, some of it is unbelievable and quite shocking. Here are some examples of the Manchester-based charity, Lifeline’s approach. Their leaflet on cannabis shows how a joint is rolled, The last line reads, “A lot of people who are now both parents and grandparents smoked cannabis during the sixties and seventies The first piece of advice they give to kids when their parents find out they are using drugs is ‘Don’t get caught in the first place”. Other street-wise pamphlets are full of graphic pictures of sex and four-letter words.

When I gave evidence to the Home Affairs Select Committee on cannabis, I showed them some of this stuff. They were, to give them their due, collectively shocked, and initiated an inquiry into their funding, which incidentally comes from central government and health authorities. The Sunday Telegraph at that time, took up the story. The latest catalogue had “self-funded” beside many of the pamphlets, so it would appear that something has been done, it would have been nice to have been told.

Drug scope, currently advising the government on all aspects of drugs, distribute a cannabis leaflet with two young men in a field of marijuana, on the policeman’s helmet of one it says, ‘Have fun, take care. They consistently deny that cannabis is physically addictive in spite of abundant scientific evidence to the contrary, and fail to mention some of its effects, while playing down the significance of others. They demand conclusive proof of the long-term effects. We don’t have conclusive proof that cigarettes cause lung cancer, but because of animal experiments and statistical correlations we accept the fact. Why is it different with cannabis? They don’t want anyone arrested for the possession of small quantities of drugs — any drugs! Needless to say, they are enthusiastically endorsing David Blunkett’s ill-advised proposal to down grade cannabis. On Radio 4 on the 27th May this year, Roger Howard, then Head of DrugScope, called for the reclassification of ecstasy and LSD as well as cannabis.

For a government that banned beef-on-the-bone with its infinitesimal risk of causing CJD, it is incomprehensible that they are contemplating a move that will inevitably result in more people using a substance proved to be harmful ‘We must err on the side of caution’, said a government spokesman at the time, Indeed we must, Have we learned nothing from the lawsuits brought by tobacco users?

Since David Blunkett’s ill-advised announcement to down grade cannabis, taking of the drug by 14 to 15 year olds has shot up 50%, from 19 to 29%.

Connexions, an organization now charged by the government to give advice to schools on such matters as careers, counselling and drugs, recently sent drug leaflets to my school, They were written in trendy ‘street-cred’ language by ‘The Clued-up Posse’ a group of kids from Kirkcaldy, Fife. The one on cannabis contained virtually no information on the dangers of pot, but masses on risk reduction. My sixth form thought it was patronizing, useless and positively encouraging of drug use. They also pointed out that it mimicked a Rizla packet. What sort of message does that send out? I made a fuss and The Sunday Telegraph, The Daily Mail and even The Sun took up the story. The leaflet has now been withdrawn.
Talking of messages, this is a worksheet from a book specially written for PHSE in schools. No comment!

Then we have all the blatant promotion of cannabis with logos on T-shirts, jackets and bags and on the front of magazines like Ministry. We have pop-stars and even MPs openly boasting about using cannabis, and songs that glorify drugs. Pro-legalisation articles vastly outnumber those against in the national press, and information about where to get cannabis seeds and paraphernalia is freely available in magazines and on the web. Propaganda like this makes my job a never-ending uphill struggle.

Drugs are illegal because they are dangerous, not dangerous because they are illegal.

The war on drugs has not failed. It has yet to be fought. And it must start with children. Remove the demand and you remove the problem.

I want to finish with two quotes.

Dr Robert Dupont, founder of the National Institute for Drug Abuse in The United States said, ‘I have been apologizing to the American people for the last ten years for promoting the decriminalization of cannabis, I made a mistake. Marijuana combines the worst effects of alcohol and tobacco and has other ill-effects that neither of these two have”.

He also said, ‘In all of history, no young people have ever taken marijuana regularly on a mass scale. Therefore our youngsters are in effect making themselves guinea pigs in a tragic experiment. Thus far our research clearly suggests we will see horrendous results’.

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :
By George Biernson
BS, MS Massachusetts Institute of Technology; January, 2000
In considering the claim that marijuana is useful in treating AIDS patients, a fundamental issue arises. Why have the severe effects of marijuana in weakening the immune system not been recognized in efforts to combat AIDS? As reported in Science News the rate at which a person infected by the AIDS virus progresses from the HIV-positive state to the condition defined as AIDS varies greatly among different individuals, and many HIV-positive individuals may never develop AIDS. Clearly the health of the immune system is an important factor in this process.

Why has there not been a study to investigate the effect that marijuana may have on the rate at which the immune system degrades in patients who are HIV positive?

Brain Damage Produced by Cocaine

This document has concentrated on the harmful effects of marijuana, because this drug is the fundamental cause of the drug epidemic. Nevertheless, it is prudent to review evidence that cocaine also does serious damage to the human brain, so that youngsters will have all the more reason to reject cocaine.

As reported in 1990, brain scans were employed at Brigham and Women’s Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts to measure blood flow in the brains of cocaine users. Radioactive iodine was injected into the blood, and a three-dimensional projection of the emission from the iodine in the brain was obtained from single photon-emission computed tomography (SPECT). The SPECT display was sensitive to the rate of blood flow in different regions of the brain.

The results were displayed in a dramatic video tape, prepared by English and Holman . The brain scans for all of the regular cocaine users, even those who took cocaine lightly, showed voids in the brain where blood flow was very low. The brain scan of one subject, who used cocaine heavily, had so many voids his brain image looked like Swiss cheese. Yet, this heavy cocaine user was still a functioning individual, who held a full-time job, and so might superficially seem to be using cocaine safely.

This study proved that cocaine cannot be used in moderation. Even in light cocaine users, cocaine drastically reduces blood flow in significant regions of the brain, and so must seriously harm the brain. A copy of this video tape ought to be shown in all drug education programs.
Up to a few years ago, both cocaine and marijuana were widely claimed to be ‘safe, non-addictive drugs’ by many so-called drug abuse ‘experts’. Medical evidence proves that it is physically impossible for anyone to use either marijuana or cocaine in moderation because regular use of either drug, even in modest amounts, produces serious brain damage.

Conclusions

Mark Twain once said: “It ain’t what you don know that hurts you. It’s what you do know that ain’t so.” This is an ideal motto to characterize our failure to stop the drug epidemic.

In the late 1960’so many so-called “experts” on drug abuse expounded the Marijuana Myth, claiming that marijuana is a soft drug, very much less dangerous than heroin, and no more harmful than alcohol.

The Marijuana myth is based on a gross misinterpretation of the effects of marijuana which fails to recognize that THC the psychoactive ingredient in marijuana, is strongly fat soluble, and so is extremely slow acting. Although THC is highly potent, it appears to be mild because it acts so slowly.

The facts show that all arguments supporting the Marijuana myth are fallacious. Scientific medical evidence proves that marijuana is a very dangerous drug, at least as harmful as heroin.

Marijuana itself causes serious damage to the brain and to other elements of the body. Besides, it is a deceptive trap that often lures an unsuspecting casual user into escalating drug abuse, which typically includes other illegal psychoactive drugs and heavy alcohol drinking.

The Marijuana myth was broadly accepted by the public, and this led to extensive marijuana use, particularly by the young. Drug education programs were set up to combat the resultant drug epidemic. However, most of these programs have endorsed the Marijuana Myth, and fail because they are faced with an impossible task. ‘They try to teach kids to keep away from drugs, while supporting the claim that marijuana is no more harmful than alcohol.

Drug educators often teach that “All psychoactive drugs, including alcohol, are equally bad”. But the kids know that many people use alcohol without harm, and this often includes the drug educator himself. Since marijuana and alcohol are equally bad’, the kids frequently conclude that marijuana is no worse than alcohol, and like alcohol can be taken safely if used in moderation.

Regardless of how strongly one preaches “Say No to drugs!”, some kids will experiment with pot if they believe it is relatively harmless. They make the classic statement ‘Since my parents (or other adults that I know) are able to drink alcohol without harm, I should be able to smoke a little pot safely’.

The fat-soluble THC gradually builds up in the bodies of the kids experimenting with pot, and drags them into a trap. More and more kids are drawn, into this maelstrom, as the pot smokers induce others to try their harmless drug, often to provide money to support their steadily escalating desire for pot and other drugs.

Eventually, the damage that marijuana is doing to the pot smokers becomes apparent to their associates and so the other kids learn from direct experience to leave marijuana alone. It is my belief that direct experience is what is saving most young people from drug abuse, not drug education. Unfortunately, this direct experience requires that the lives of the pot smokers be sacrificed in order to educate the rest.

The Marijuana myth is widely believed today for many reasons. Regular pot smokers form a strong body of foot soldiers who are quick to support their favourite drug. Behind them is the disguised propaganda, spread by the very sophisticated and rich leaders illegal drug dealing. These efforts of confusion are magnified by a great many others, who, out of ignorance, are very reluctant to think that their concept of marijuana can be so fallacious.

Many people have experimented lightly with marijuana and luckily escaped without serious harm. They do not want to admit that they played around with a very dangerous drug. How can the harmless ‘grass’ they toyed with be as damaging as is charged? Obviously, they feel, anyone who says that marijuana is highly dangerous must be exaggerating.

A fallacious claim often made to support the Marijuana Myth is that many responsible people have been able to smoke marijuana for long periods without apparent harm. The answer to this claim is that it is very difficult to determine in a specific case how much marijuana a person has smoked, and how much harm it has caused. Remember that the primary damage that marijuana does to the brain occurs in the deep limbic region which controls the emotions. Consequently, a person can appear to be intellectually competent, yet be severely damaged emotionally by his use of marijuana.

A few years ago, Abbie Hoffman wrote a book extolling the virtues of marijuana and telling the readers how to deceive a drug test. Superficially it might appear that marijuana had not harmed him. However, a little later he committed suicide.

The potency of available pot has increased enormously since the 1960 from 1% THC (or less) to as high as 25% today. Hence, the destruction from marijuana is now progressing at a much faster rate. School children today are being seriously harmed by marijuana, even at early grades. It is essential that we discard the gross misconceptions of this drug and give an honest picture a drug education classes.

When our young people are taught the scientific truths about marijuana very few will touch it and our drug epidemic will end.

 

 

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

By John-Manuel Andriote 

In Parts of Washington’s Gay Community, Crystal Methamphetamine Is Starting to Take a Toll — and Creating a Demand for Treatment

Chad Upham had been the kind of kid any parent would be proud of — an Eagle Scout, a good child who didn’t cause problems in his fundamentalist Christian family. He didn’t touch a beer until he was 21.

Jump forward to an early Monday morning this past July. Upham, now 27, had been up all night after another weekend of drugs and sexual hookups with strangers he met online.

But instead of pushing his limits for indulgence again, he made a different choice. Around 3 a.m., Upham sent an e-mail to his friends and family with some unexpected news.

“Over the past four months,” he wrote, “I have become a regular user of crystal methamphetamine.” He added, “I acknowledge, without shame, a concern for my mental, physical and emotional health.”

While meth abuse is well-established in the U.S. heartland and increasing in New York and Los Angeles, it has had a low profile in the Washington area, where crack cocaine and marijuana are still the targets of most anti-drug programs run by law enforcement and public health agencies.

But meth use is increasing in portions of the gay community, according to local health officials, area addiction and mental health practitioners, and specialists in gay health issues. The District’s Whitman-Walker Clinic, which provides HIV/AIDS and other health services to a largely gay clientele, reports that 75 percent of its new drug treatment clients list crystal meth as their primary drug of abuse. Five Crystal Meth Anonymous groups meet near Dupont Circle, a neighborhood with many gay residents. Two and a half years ago there were none. Suburban treatment centers report an increase in meth-related referrals, including some in teenagers. The D.C. government has just awarded its first grant for an anti-meth public education campaign, which will target the gay community.

The Post reported in July that police in Southern Maryland had found a small methamphetamine lab in the bathroom of a La Plata townhouse — along with a cache of weapons, including grenades and seven rifles, some with bayonets. But that close-in lab is an exception. Federal drug authorities said in a 2002 report that the few meth labs in this region are located in the rural Shenandoah Valley.

Methamphetamine is a homemade, highly impure version of amphetamine, a stimulant that was widely abused in the 1950s through the 1970s. Its main ingredient is distilled from the pseudoepinephrine found in many over-the-counter cold and allergy medications.

Commonly known as crystal, crystal meth and Tina, meth is a potent, highly addictive drug that some experts say can cause long-term neurological and cardiovascular damage. The drug supercharges the central nervous system, causing the brain to churn out dopamine. This neurotransmitter affects brain processes that control movement, emotional response and the ability to feel pleasure and pain.

“Someone said [meth] is like smoking a cigarette, having an orgasm and eating chocolate all at the same time,” said Amy Bullock-Smith, clinical program manager for the Whitman-Walker Clinic’s addiction services, “and all that lasting about 12 hours.”

Meth induces euphoria almost immediately after the odorless, bitter-tasting powder is smoked, the most common way meth is used. It takes a few minutes to feel the same rush from snorting, swallowing, injecting or, less commonly, dissolving it in water and taking it as an enema. This is followed by six to eight hours, and sometimes as much as 24 hours, of increased energy, suppressed appetite and other stimulating effects.

Meth labs can be set up in homes, motels, apartments, trailers, houseboats, cars — anywhere that heat and basic lab tools can be used to cook down cold and allergy medications to extract their active ingredients. Other chemicals used to make meth — according to news reports and numerous Web sites that offer “recipes” — include iodine crystals, red phosphorous from the strike pad on matchbooks, muriatic acid, acetone, methanol and drain cleaner.

A Local View

Aside from its growing use in gay clubs, meth has made little impact in local jurisdictions, officials say.

In its most recent drug threat assessment report, published in 2002, the Department of Justice’s National Drug Intelligence Center described meth abuse as “limited” in Maryland, “a low but increasing threat to Virginia,” particularly southwestern Virginia, and “not yet a serious problem in the District.”

The department said that most meth available in this area was produced in southwestern states or Mexico. It was distributed to users by teenagers and young adults, mostly at nightclubs and raves, large dance parties usually held in warehouses or open fields.

Over the past five years there has been a surge in the number of gay men in the Washington area seeking treatment for meth abuse. Kevin Shipman, manager for special populations in the District’s Addiction Prevention and Recovery Administration, notes that the number of meth referrals to the Whitman-Walker Clinic’s outpatient drug programs is five times higher this year than in 2000.

Local substance abuse treatment programs for adolescents report seeing small but growing numbers of youthful meth abusers.

At the Inova Kellar Center, senior case manager Mary Ellen Ruff said this mental health center in Fairfax is seeing a lot of adolescents who have experimented with meth, though she does not have specific figures. She blames the drug’s accessibility, pointing out that teens “don’t have to go downtown to get it, but can buy it from their neighbors.” She said some teens who abuse attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) drugs — kids without the disorder who get the drugs illegally and use them as stimulants — move up to crystal meth.

Whitman-Walker’s Bullock-Smith said the men turning to her clinic for help with meth addiction are typical of Washington’s professional caste — Type A personalities in fast-paced jobs that require a lot of mental energy. “It’s not necessarily the folks who want to party all the time,” she said.

She points out that people with untreated ADHD seem especially attracted to meth because, much like legally prescribed stimulants such as Ritalin (methylphenidate), the drug paradoxically calms and focuses them. Researchers have suggested that, like crystal meth, methylphenidate amplifies the brain’s release of dopamine, thereby improving attention and focus in individuals who have weak dopamine signals.

Because the drug’s effects can include a supercharged libido, extended periods of high energy and sleeplessness and a much-reduced ability to make sound judgments, unprotected and promiscuous sex is a high risk. Recent studies from San Francisco and Chicago confirm that gay meth abusers are at significantly heightened risk for becoming infected with HIV and other sexually transmitted infections.

A 2003 study in the American Journal of Drug and Alcohol Abuse found that meth users are likely to experience increased respiration and blood pressure, irregular heartbeat and insomnia.

A report in Psychological Medicine in 2003 said that long-term users may experience paranoia, hallucinations, tremors, mood disturbances, repetitive motor activities, homicidal or suicidal thoughts and irreversible damage to small blood vessels that increase the risk of stroke. Children of meth users frequently are at risk for neglect and abuse, the authors found.

Researchers reported in the American Journal of Psychiatry in 2001 that prolonged exposure to even low doses of meth can damage up to 50 percent of the brain’s dopamine-producing cells.

Those who overdose on meth experience hyperthermia and convulsions that, if not treated, can result in death.

“While some people enjoy the short-term benefits,” said Bullock-Smith, “it’s the long-term effects, like the psychosis, that bring them to me.”

Breaking Tina’s Spell

The National Institute on Drug Abuse says the only treatment known to be effective for methamphetamine addiction is cognitive behavioral therapy to modify thinking and behaviors and to increase skills in coping with stressors. The agency says that meth recovery groups, such as Crystal Meth Anonymous, appear to help sustain drug-free recovery, though relapse rates are high.

As for the brain damage meth causes, researchers Gene-Jack Wang and colleagues at the Brookhaven National Laboratory in Upton, N.Y., have offered evidence that some areas of the brain begin to heal after abstaining for as little as two months. Other damage is longer-lasting.

George Kolodner, a board-certified addiction psychiatrist and medical director of the Kolmac Clinic in Silver Spring, said his clinic saw an increase in crystal meth users beginning about two years ago, but the trend has not accelerated since then. He said meth users are the most difficult patients to treat because there is no medication to prevent craving or treat the protracted post-use symptoms, such as dysphoria, or depressed mood.

“With other substances,” said Kolodner, “we can help people get off and keep off by decreasing their cravings. With meth and cocaine, we don’t have that.”

Randy Pumphrey, executive director of the Washington Psychiatric Institute’s Lambda Center, which provides substance abuse services to gay people, said that in the past four years meth has increased from being “something we saw every once in a while” to the third most commonly abused substance, after alcohol and crack, among new clients.

If someone is dependent, said Pumphrey, “they are going to need a period apart from their environment — and also need hospitalization” to deal with the paranoia, severe depression or even homicidal feelings that can accompany the detox process.

After this acute phase, Pumphrey said, patients usually participate in a daytime treatment program for several weeks before joining an extended support program such as Whitman-Walker’s six-month evening program for recovering addicts.

Kolodner said the relative newness of meth-specific support groups is a challenge to treatment because few have been in recovery long enough to serve as mentors.

Bullock-Smith explains that Whitman-Walker’s three-phase ddiction recovery program requires a substantial commitment. To graduate, clients must attend one to three meetings a week at the clinic, participate in an outside 12-step group, have a sponsor, undergo breathalyzer and urinalysis tests to verify that they are not using, see a therapist, have a psychiatric evaluation and complete “lots of homework.”

Let’s Talk About It

A committee including the police department and other District agencies, substance abuse professionals, youth organizations, nightclub owners and recovering addicts began to meet this summer to plan a response to what they view as a growing meth crisis.

Like community-level anti-meth efforts in other cities, the D.C. Crystal Meth Working Group is planning a campaign aimed at educating the nonusing public, preventing meth abuse among gay men and offering treatment referrals to current users. The District health department has provided a $42,000 grant for the group to work with Whitman-Walker on the campaign.

This is a good start, said group member Bruce Weiss, executive director of the Sexual Minority Youth Assistance League, which serves gay, lesbian, bisexual and transgendered youth. The group will seek $1 million from the D.C. government and try to ensure that fighting meth is included in the five-year plan of the task force advising the mayor on anti-drug priorities.

Community activist Christopher Dyer, who chairs the group’s social marketing campaign subcommittee, said the campaign’s slogans, “Let’s Talk About Crystal Meth” and “Crystal Meth Sucks,” will be launched in nightclubs with posters, pins and T-shirts.

Another group member, Ed Bailey, co-owner of Nation, a Southeast Washington dance club, said major club owners across the country support anti-meth campaigns like this one. The drug has cut into their business because people typically do not drink alcohol when they are using meth, he said. Over time they also become increasingly isolated and don’t go to clubs.

Since deciding to live meth-free after one too many sleepless, drug-driven weekends, Chad Upham said he depends mainly on Crystal Meth Anonymous groups and constructive activities with family and friends to support his recovery. Although he saw a doctor for a standard checkup, he — unlike some of his recovering friends — isn’t taking any medications to treat anxiety or depression.

Upham is discovering that Tina continues to tempt.

“I am thinking desirously about the people, places and things that were associated with my using,” he said. Running into a person he knew from those “hot days and nights” revives thoughts of “all that fun.”

But he pulls himself back to his new reality — denying the drug, listening to his family, co-workers and new friends in the support groups he attends several nights a week.

They have “embraced me in my weakness,” said Upham, “continually saying that I am brave, courageous and strong for taking the steps to get and stay healthy and live independent of drugs for satisfaction.”

Source: The Washington Post Tuesday, November 8, 2005

John-Manuel Andriote, author of “Victory Deferred: How AIDS Changed Gay Life in America,” is a Washington journalist. To comment on this article, send e-mail tohealth@washpost.com.

 © 2005 The Washington Post Company

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

© HNN INTERNATIONAL CENTRE. SWEDEN Oct.2002

Did you know that….

• The Drug Abuse Warning Network (DAWN), a system for monitoring the health impact of drugs, estimated that, in 2001, marijuana was a contributing factor in more than 110,000 emergency department visits in the United States, with about 15 per cent of the patients between the ages of 12 and 17, and almost two-thirds male.

• In 1999, the US National Institute of Justice’s Arrestee Drug Abuse Monitoring Program (ADAM), which collects data from 34 sites on the number of adult arrestees testing positive for various drugs, found that, on average, 39 per cent of adult male arrestees and 26 per cent of adult female arrestees tested positive for marijuana.

• ADAM collected data on juvenile arrestees in nine sites and found that marijuana was the most commonly used drug among these youths. On average, 53 per cent of juvenile male and 38 per cent of juvenile female arrestees tested positive for marijuana.

• Through its effects on the brain and body, marijuana intoxication can cause accidents. Studies show that approximately 6 to 11 per cent of fatal accident victims test positive for THC. In many of these cases, alcohol is detected as well.

• In a study conducted by the US National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, a moderate dose of marijuana alone was shown to impair driving performance; however, the effects of even a low dose of marijuana combined with alcohol were markedly greater than for either drug alone. Driving indices measured included reaction time, visual search frequency (driver checking side streets), and the ability to perceive and/or respond to changes n the relative velocity of other vehicles.

• Marijuana use has been shown to increase users’ difficulty in trying to quit smoking tobacco. This was recently reported in a study comparing smoking cessation in adults who smoked both marijuana and tobacco with those who smoked only tobacco. The relationship between marijuana use and continued smoking was particularly strong in those who smoked marijuana daily at the time of the initial interview, 13 years prior to the follow up interview.

• A study of 450 individuals found that people who smoke marijuana frequently but do not smoke tobacco have more health problems and miss more days of work than non-smokers do. Many of the extra sick days used by the marijuana smokers in the study were for respiratory illnesses.

• A study comparing 173 cancer patients and 176 healthy individuals produced strong evidence that smoking marijuana increases the likelihood of developing cancer of the head or neck, and that the more marijuana smoked, the greater the increase. A statistical analysis of the data suggested that marijuana smoking doubled or tripled the risk of these cancers.

• Marijuana has the potential to promote cancer of the lungs and other parts of the respiratory tract because it contains irritants and carcinogens. IN fact, marijuana smoke contains 50 per cent to 70 per cent more carcinogenic hydrocarbons than does tobacco smoke. It also produces high levels of an enzyme that converts certain hydrocarbons into their carcinogenic form, levels that may accelerate the changes that ultimately produce malignant cells.

• Some adverse health effects caused by marijuana may occur because THC impairs the immune system’s ability to fight off infectious diseases and cancer. IN laboratory experiments that exposed animal and human cells to THC or other marijuana ingredients the normal disease-preventing reactions of many of the key types of of immune cells were inhibited. IN other studies, mice exposed to THC or related substances were more likely than unexposed mice to develop bacterial infections and tumours.

• One study has indicated that a person’s risk of heart attack during the first hour after smoking marijuana is four times his or her usual risk. The researchers suggest that a heart attack might occur, in part, because marijuana raises blood pressure and heart rate and reduces the oxygen-carrying capacity of blood.

• Students who smoke marijuana get lower grades and are less likely to graduate from high school, compared with their non-smoking peers. In one study, researchers compared marijuana smoking and non-smoking 12th-graders’ scores on standardized tests of verbal and mathematical skills. Although all of the students had scored equally well in 4th grade, the smokers’ scores were significantly lower in 12th grade than the non-smokers scores were.

• Several studies have associated workers’ marijuana smoking with increased absences, tardiness, accidents, workers’ compensation claims, and job turnover. A study among municipal workers found that employees who smoked marijuana on or off the job reported more ‘withdrawal behaviors’ – such as leaving work without permission, day-dreaming, spending work time on personal matters, and shirking tasks – that adversely affect productivity and morale.

• Because marijuana compromises the ability to learn and remember information, the more a person uses marijuana the more her or she is likely to fall behind in accumulating intellectual, job, or social skills. Moreover, research has shown that marijuana’s adverse impact on memory and learning can last for days or weeks after the acute effects of the drug wear off. For example, a study of 129 college students found that among heavy users of marijuana, those who smoked the drug at least 27 of the preceding 30 days, critical skills related to attention, memory, and learning were significantly impaired, even after they had not used the drug for at least 24 hours. The heavy marijuana users in the study had more trouble sustaining and shifting their attention and in registering, organising, and using information than did the study participants who had used marijuana no more than 3 of the 30 previous days. As a result, someone who smokes marijuana once daily may be functioning at a reduced intellectual level all of the time.

• More recently, the same researchers showed that a group of long-term heavy marijuana users’ ability to recall words from a list was impaired 1 week following cessation of marijuana use, but returned to normal by 4 weeks. An implication of this finding is that even after long-term heavy marijuana use, if an individual quits marijuana use, some cognitive abilities may be recovered.

• Another study produced additional evidence that marijuana’s effects on the brain can cause cumulative deterioration of critical life skills in the long run. Researchers gave students a battery of tests measuring problem-solving and emotional skills in 8th grade and again in 12th grade. The results showed that the students who were already drinking alcohol plus smoking marijuana in 8th grade started off slightly behind their peers but that the distance separating these two groups grew significantly by their senior year in high school. The analysis linked marijuana use, independently of alcohol use, to reduced capacity for self-reinforcement, a group of psychological skills that enable individuals to maintain confidence and persevere in the pursuit of goals.

• Research has shown that babies born to women who used marijuana during their pregnancies display altered responses to visual stimuli, increased tremulousness, and a high-pitched cry, which may indicate problems with neurological development. During infancy and preschool years, marijuana-exposed children have been observed to have more behavioural problems and to perform tasks of visual perception, language comprehension, sustained attention, and memory more poorly than non-exposed children do. In school, these children are more likely to exhibit deficits in decision-making skills, memory and the ability to remain attentive.

• Long-term marijuana use can lead to addiction for some people; that is, they use the drug compulsively even though it often interferes with family, school, work, and recreational activities.

• According to the 2001 US National Household Survey on Drug Abuse, an estimated 5.6 million Americans age 12 or older reported problems with illicit drug use in the past year. Of these, 3.6 million met diagnostic criteria for dependence on an illicit drug. More than 2 million met diagnostic criteria for dependence on marijuana/hashish. IN 1999, more than 220,000 people entering drug abuse treatment programs reported that marijuana was their primary drug of abuse.

• Along with craving, withdrawal symptoms can make it hard for long-term marijuana smokers to stop using the drug. People trying to quit report irritability, difficulty sleeping, and anxiety. They also display increased aggression on psychological tests, peaking approximately 1 week after they last used the drug.

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :


BYLINE: DR. KEVIN COSTELLO
Published on August 9,  2004- The Press Democrat PAGE: B9


Marijuana … what harm can a little dope do? The short answer is: Plenty.
First, is marijuana addictive? You bet it is. About one in eight people exposed to marijuana will become dependent on it. This makes it a little more addictive than alcohol. How do I define addiction? There’s a fancy medical definition or a more simple one: If you use marijuana every day you are probably addicted to it, especially if you have been doing this for a few months or more.So, let’s say you smoke marijuana every day. Isn’t that your business? Maybe yes, but most likely, no. When you are addicted to a substance your relationships in life are with that substance — not with other people.

In addiction medicine we have found that it is often best to ask the family members of the dependent individual how they feel. Frequently, there is a deep resentment and embitterment about the lack of support or the lack of emotional contact and empathy. A patient of mine was once asked by his wife to stop smoking marijuana for a few weeks, because her father was dying and she needed his support.

He managed to stop for a while, only to return to the addiction after his father-in-law died. It is remarkable how strong the dependency on marijuana can be.

Let’s say you don’t care about anyone else or that all your friends smoke or your significant other is tired of you and just as happy to have you stoned all the time.

What’s wrong with that?

There was an article in the Journal of the American Medical Association a few years ago, that looked at patients who used marijuana at least daily. The authors found that even 19 hours after stopping marijuana, these chronic users were not able to think as well (or memorize, or calculate, or analyze or perform other mental functions). In other words, if you smoke marijuana daily, you are always affected or “stoned” to a certain degree. You will not be able to realize your full intellectual capacity. This is especially important to high school and college students whose futures are determined by how well they do during that critically important eight-year window of academic opportunity.

Marijuana can also affect people in mid-career. A former patient of mine who was a Honda mechanic told me that he would read the shop manuals that came out every year seven or eight times. Despite the repetitive reviews, he was still not able to master the material. After stopping marijuana — which he had been using since high school — he found he only needed to read the manuals once.

One further caveat: some people seem to function very well on marijuana. They hold responsible positions and continue to perform relatively well. These folks are probably very bright and are able to accommodate the decrease in mental capacity. They may not, however, be the people you want performing brain surgery or negotiating an important contract.

Let’s say you really don’t care about any of the things that I’ve mentioned above. All you want is to smoke a little dope. A recent article, also in the Journal of the American Medical Association, showed that people who were using cocaine and methamphetamine (nasty stuff — there is a lot of evidence suggesting that these stimulants cause permanent brain injury) frequently followed a pattern of smoking cigarettes at a young age, then drinking alcohol, smoking marijuana and finally, progressing to harder drugs. The authors concluded that marijuana was not only a “gateway drug,” but seemed to actually precipitate the progression to the stimulants (cocaine and methamphetamine) and even to heroin, in certain individuals. So, you still don’t care. Well, I’ve saved the worst for last. The following is a partial list of the complications associated with the chronic use of marijuana: toxic psychosis (in susceptible individuals), increased heart rate and pain, decreased lung function, impaired fetal growth and development, decreased immune function (important for fighting infections and cancers), weight gain, bronchitis, and more.

Finally, a brief word about “medical marijuana.” The medical marijuana initiative passed by California voters, basically provides for the legalization of marijuana. This is because the initiative states that in addition to several serious illnesses, marijuana may be prescribed for “any other illness for which marijuana provides relief.” There was also no restriction on the age of the patient. Many physicians have no problem with the administration of marijuana to a patient with a terminal illness — but did the people of California really intend (as one United States Supreme Court justice put it) that marijuana be used for “anyone with a stomach ache” or for any reason at all?

I, for one, am not willing to sacrifice the one in eight individuals who are now at increased risk for developing an addiction to this drug due to its significantly increased availability.

I know that this article will raise deeply felt issues with some people. It is not my intention to offend anyone. I have attempted to provide factual information that can be reviewed, and hopefully, help you formulate an opinion about the use of marijuana. If you think that you have an addiction to marijuana, or you have further questions about it, the folks at Marijuana Anonymous can be an excellent source of information and assistance. You could also consult with a specialist in chemical dependency or one of the many local chemical dependency programs.

Dr. Kevin Costello is the chief of the medical division of Chemical Dependency Services for Kaiser in Santa Rosa.

 

Filed under: Effects of Drugs,Social Affairs :

By Jim McDonough Malcolm


TALLAHASSEE – Big excitement has hit the drug legalization world. A recent RAND Drug Policy Research Center study reported that marijuana may look, act, and smell like a gateway drug to abuse of harder drugs, but that possibly it is not a gateway drug after all.

The marijuana normalizers – as in, “let’s make marijuana use normal, or acceptable” – loved it; so did some of the press. Both were quick to misportray the study, so much so that the author of the study himself was dismayed.

Andrew Morral of RAND believes he did everything he could to explain he did not disprove the gateway theory but, as he told me, “The story about it misrepresented both our findings and my comments about the relevance of our findings to US drug policy. RAND and I have taken pains to emphasize that we do not believe we have disproved the gateway theory.”

The study did say that a high incidence of progression from marijuana to heroin and cocaine use is apparent; that the younger you are when you start using marijuana, the more likely you are to end up using cocaine and heroin; that the more often you use marijuana, the more likely you will use cocaine and heroin.

In short, the study shows the correlation between marijuana and other drug abuse to be high.

Indeed, the study accepts previous studies that have demonstrated the probability that heroin and cocaine use increases 85 times for marijuana users when compared with those who are not marijuana users; that early teen use of marijuana is even more highly correlated with other drug use than late teen marijuana use; and that the more puffs of marijuana you take, the more likely you move on to injections and snorting of even more dangerous drugs.

But here’s where the misunderstanding begins. The study says that maybe these terrible things happen because the people who use all these nasty drugs do it because they have a propensity for drug use, and marijuana is the first illegal drug to present itself to the young.

Dr. Morral calls that the “common factor” theory.

In other words, all drug users like all drugs; marijuana just comes along first. He suggests that this theory might be more accurate than the gateway theory.

But is a gateway not a gateway because it happens to present itself in front of where you want to go?

Perhaps this study’s findings appear trivial. They aren’t. If marijuana is merely the door through which those inclined to use drugs pass because it is convenient, all the more reason to keep that door locked.

I’m convinced that’s the best way to view Morrall’s findings, because the pro-marijuana lobby and much of what the press missed in this study, as well as other careful studies, were findings that suggest:

 


Over the years, I have talked with hundreds of addicts and treatment counselors. They say that marijuana was virtually always the beginning of a long, ugly journey; that marijuana is the most insidious of the illegal drugs because of the seductive, but often wrong, rationale that you can quit any time you want; that easy access to marijuana is a major part of the problem; and that their lives would have been far better if marijuana had been out of the picture.

As we do more studies, we might turn to these people for insight.

So what of the utility of the “common factor” theory over the “gateway” theory? A weed by any other name still smells the same.

* Jim McDonough is director of the Florida Office of Drug Control. He previously served as director of strategic planning at the Office of National Drug Control Policy.

Source: Christian Science Monitor December 16, 2002

 

Filed under: Effects of Drugs,Social Affairs :

By Malcolm Ritter, Associated Press

NEW YORK — Can Prozac help you kick cocaine? Can Ritalin? How about a blood pressure pill or medicine for muscle spasms?

If you’re an alcoholic, could you get help staying sober by taking an anti-nausea drug used by cancer patients?

Scientists are exploring those questions right now. In fact, in the field of addiction medicine, one of the hottest sources of new drugs is … old drugs.

Despite years of research, there is no drug approved in the United States for treating cocaine dependence. To find such a treatment, the National Institute on Drug Abuse is sponsoring human studies of 21 medicines already on the market for something else. That’s about two-thirds of all the potential cocaine drugs being tested in people, says Frank Vocci, director of NIDA’s pharmacotherapy division.

Over at the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism, nearly all the potential alcoholism drugs tested in people under institute sponsorship over the past 10 years were previously approved for some other use, says Raye Litten, co-leader of the institute’s medications development team.

While the strategy is hardly new, “it’s been going on maybe just a bit below the radar screen” for most of the public, Vocci said.

It can certainly work. In 1997, for example, the government approved a stop-smoking pill called Zyban, which was in fact the older antidepressant Wellbutrin.

To be sure, experts haven’t given up on developing new drugs. Most NIAAA-funded drug studies for alcoholism that are in early-stage testing — not yet tried on people — are brand-new drugs, Litten said.

But the notion of examining current drugs for addiction-breaking potential holds several advantages. It’s a lot cheaper to get federal approval for a new use of an old drug than to bring a completely new medicine to market. And experience with an existing drug gives an idea of its safety and dose range for possible anti-addiction effects, Vocci said.

He and others caution that people who happen to have medications on hand that show promise in such studies shouldn’t give them to friends and family with addiction problems. That must be left to professionals. Experts also say that even effective anti-addiction medicines usually can’t work by themselves, but must be used along with nondrug therapy.

The most straightforward approach to testing an existing drug is to follow its approved purpose, but in a different way. For example, some scientists are studying how to prolong the effects of naltrexone, now usually given as a daily pill for treating dependence on alcohol or opiates like heroin and morphine.

Dr. David Gastfriend of Massachusetts General Hospital and Harvard Medical School and other researchers recently reported that specially formulated naltrexone helped alcoholic men cut down on their drinking for a month when they received the drug as a shot in the buttocks.

Why is a monthly visit to a doctor better than just taking a pill every day?

“The pill requires a daily awareness that this is a dangerous disease and a rational decision to take the pill,” Gastfriend said. “The problem with this illness is that on any given day, a person can feel, No, it would be better if I could drink. So you take the pill the first day and you have to make 29 more decisions” the rest of the month.

“But if you received an injection the first day, those 29 decisions have already been made,” said Gastfriend, a paid consultant to Alkermes Inc., which is developing the formulation he studied, called Vivitrex.

More striking than just reformulating a drug is finding a new and apparently unrelated use for it. Here, scientists are guided by emerging knowledge about how addiction hijacks the brain.

Addicts apparently suffer from a combination of unusually strong desire for a drug and a weak inhibition against using it, Vocci said.

“These people essentially have a revved-up engine and thin brake pads,” he said.

In the brain, scientists have found that cocaine produces euphoria by stimulating nerve circuits that communicate with a substance called dopamine. So they’ve looked for medications that can affect the activity of this dopamine system.

One is a decades-old old drug called Baclofen (pronounced BAK-loe-fen), used to treat spasms, cramps and muscle tightness in people with multiple sclerosis or spinal problems. Steven Shoptaw, a researcher at the University of California, Los Angeles, recently published a preliminary, federally funded study that suggested it can cut cocaine use in addicts. A much larger study is now under way to confirm that, but for now the drug looks promising, Shoptaw said.

Other drugs that work in a similar way and that are being tested in cocaine addicts include the anti-seizure medications tiagabine, topiramate and a drug sold overseas as Vigabatrin.

Cocaine withdrawal symptoms might be eased by boosting the brain’s depleted dopamine levels. So scientists are studying dopamine-boosting drugs like Ritalin, used for attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, and amantadine, used for flu and Parkinson’s disease.

But addiction is complicated enough to involve many brain circuits, which in turn provide many targets for anti-addiction drugs. Inderal, a blood-pressure medicine, may reduce cocaine craving during early abstinence by interfering with the actions of another brain substance, norepinephrine. The antidepressants Prozac and Effexor, which boost levels of yet another brain chemical called serotonin, are also under study in cocaine dependence.

Then there’s Ondansetron (pronounced on-DAN-se-tron), which is normally used to prevent nausea and vomiting after cancer chemotherapy or surgery. Scientists are studying it for both cocaine and alcohol abuse, again for its action in the serotonin circuitry.

It might seem logical that a single drug could help in multiple kinds of addiction, but even that situation can come with a twist. Consider Antabuse, the anti-alcohol drug that works by making users sick if they drink alcohol. Scientists recently found, unexpectedly, that Antabuse also helps cocaine-dependent people cut back on cocaine, though not by making them sick.

Just how it does that isn’t clear, says researcher Dr. Thomas Kosten of Yale University. Antabuse hampers the normal breakdown of cocaine by the body, and boosts dopamine levels while reducing norepinephrine levels, he said. The net effect may be to reduce both withdrawal symptoms and desire to seek cocaine, he said.

Shoptaw thinks that, within the next five years, some drug will win approval for treating cocaine dependence. Baclofen, Topiramate and Antabuse lead his list of candidates. Each may find a use in a different phase of cocaine dependence, such as getting off the drug or staying off, he said.

And addiction specialists are eagerly looking beyond today’s medicine cabinet toward a drug that isn’t approved for anything in the United States yet. Rimonabant blazed into the headlines in March when researchers reported evidence that it might help people battle both cigarette smoking and obesity.

But why stop there?

Rimonabant blocks the brain’s docking sites for its own marijuana-like substances, part of the “cannabinoid” system that might play a role in addictions beyond food and nicotine, says Dr. Herbert Kleber of Columbia University.

Once the drug is approved for either smoking or obesity, he expects researchers will jump in and test it for things like heroin and cocaine.

And the strategy of squeezing new uses of out existing drugs may score another success. Inside here are some medicines being studied for their potential to stop drug addiction. They are already on the market for these uses:

Prozac and Effexor; prescribed for depression.

Amantadine; flu and Parkinson’s disease.

Baclofen; spasms, cramps and muscle tightness in people with multiple sclerosis or spinal problems.

Ritalin; attention deficit hyperactivity disorder.

Ondansetron; prevention of nausea and vomiting after cancer chemotherapy or surgery.

Tiagabine, Topiramate and a drug sold overseas as Vigabatrin; seizures.

Source:http://www.dailynews.com/Stories/0,1413,200~20954~2380825,00.html

Filed under: Effects of Drugs,Social Affairs :

By Susan Greenfield

Oxford, England — Across Europe and America, the legalization of cannabis for personal use generates intense debate.

Britain has, to all intents and purposes, practically decriminalized marijuana usage.

As a neuroscientist, I am concerned. One common justification for legalization or decriminalization of cannabis centres around the idea that it does not involve a victim. At least four reports in major medical journals — Ramstrom (1998), Moskowitz (1985), Chesher (1995) and Ashton (2001) — show the contrary.

Costs to the community include accidents at work or at home, educational under-attainment, impaired work performance and health-budget costs.

Another argument is over that cannabis is nonaddictive. Of course, defining addiction is hard. But if one regards it as an inability to give up, then there is strong evidence that cannabis incites dependence. Recent scientific papers report many users in the United States, United Kingdom and New Zealand now seek treatment for dependence. Other papers show that 10 percent of users want to stop or cut down but have difficulty doing so. A paper in 1998 reported that 10 to 15 percent of users become dependent on pot.

It was shown recently that withdrawal symptoms were experienced after only three days of light use. Heavy users confront a worse situation. Dr. Bryan Wells, a rehabilitation expert, says that for the first time he’s beginning to see in heavy cannabis users the withdrawal symptoms produced by hard drugs.

Another argument is the beneficial effect of marijuana on pain. So far, that evidence is anecdotal; it is hard to exclude placebo effects. The results from clinical trials are awaited.

But distinctions should be drawn between recreational drugs and medicines, as they are for opiates. If cannabis is a painkiller, then it must have a huge impact on the physical brain.

Indeed, widespread reports exist of the impact of cannabis on the brain, in particular areas concerned with memory (hippocampus), emotion (mesolimbic system) and movement (basal ganglia). Cannabis affects a variety of chemical systems and it works via its own receptor — its own molecular target.

The fact that there is a naturally occurring analogue of cannabis in the body, as there is for morphine, provides a basic reason to differentiate it from alcohol.

For an agent that affects a variety of transmitter systems, it is as though it were a transmitter itself. This is not surprising, for cannabis has a clear effect on psychology. Not only does it produce euphoria, but the effects, often overlooked, may also include anxiety, panic and paranoia. Disorders in psychological performance, attention impairments and memory deficits are well known.

More disturbing — and less frequently acknowledged — is the fact that these effects can be long-term.

In one recent study, the attention spans of ex-users were compared to those of current users, short-term and long-term. The abstainers, who had been users for at least nine years, had quit from three months to six years before the study. Of the current users, one group had at least 10 years of dependence; the other, about three years. Everyone in the study had used cannabis from 10 to 19 days per month.

Although the quitters did better than users, all had attention impairments in comparison with nonusers in a control group. The impairment was related to the duration of use. Most disturbing was the fact that no improvement in performance occurred with increasing abstinence.

It was no surprise, then, that because these long-term effects seem to be irreversible, there is an effect on brain pathology. Because much of this data comes from work with isolated systems, and therefore on all brains, an obvious criticism is that you can’t extrapolate from such data. Yet, the evidence suggests that the long-term effects must have a physical basis. Is there a safe dose of cannabis, with no effect on the brain? Even a dose comparable to one joint, and analogous levels of the active THC ingredient to that in plasma, can kill 50 percent of neurons in the hippocampus (an area related to memory) within six days. People are unaware that the THC in cannabis remains in the body for more than five days. For someone using cannabis routinely, the dose carried in the body is higher than they imagine. It is easy to underestimate the dose because of the wide range in the strength of cannabis. Individual variations in body fat and, worryingly, variations in one’s disposition to psychosis, mean that you cannot predict how much cannabis will affect any person at any time.

Cannabis could well be having a serious effect on the mind, which I define as the personalization of brain circuits that reflect an individual’s experiences. A transmitterlike substance, with such powerful effects, must affect those circuits. So blowing your mind might be exactly what marijuana users are doing.

Source: San Francisco Chronicle (CA): Pubdate: Sun, 6 Jan 2002

Note: Susan A. Greenfield, the Fullerian Professor of Physiology at Oxford University, is director of the Royal Institution of Great Britain. This article was written for Project Syndicate, based in Prague.

Filed under: Effects of Drugs,Social Affairs :

By Mary Brett

There are several problems associated with the investigation of possible links between cannabis use and any carcinogenic effects it may have on human cells.

There are now some 140,000 or so scientific research papers on tobacco, while those on cannabis still amount only to about a tenth of that number. It is a relatively young science and, like tobacco, its side effects are usually not apparent for decades.

Cannabis smoking has only been widespread in Western society since the early 1970s and there would presumably be a 20 to 30 year latency period between the initiation of smoking and the development of cancer as is the case with tobacco.

Cannabis smokers often mix tobacco with their cannabis so they run all the well-documented risks of developing cancer associated with tobacco smoke. Relatively few of them smoke cannabis alone so any consequences and therefore causes are almost impossible to separate out. Marijuana smokers are more likely to under report their smoking, if they report it at all.

Large samples are required for case-control studies to take place. It is very difficult to get reliable information about an illegal substance from a large number of people. Questions about cannabis smoking are rarely asked of lung cancer patients.

On the other hand the similarities between tobacco and cannabis are many, the main difference being the presence of nicotine in tobacco and the 60 or so cannabinoids in cannabis (Hoffman et al 1975, Tashkin et al 1997, BMA 1997). So similar side effects may be expected.


Although the number of cannabis “cigarettes” consumed in a day would generally be much fewer than the daily total of tobacco cigarettes, the technique is different. Cannabis smoke is usually inhaled more deeply, held in the lungs for longer and smoked right down to the butt to get full money value. Cannabis cigarettes generally lack filters. (Wu et al 1988). More tar is inhaled from the cannabis butt than from its tip (Tashkin et al 1999).

Cannabis smoke contains 4 to 5 times as much tar as tobacco smoke so the amount of tar deposited in the lungs daily in a cannabis smoker is comparable to that of a tobacco smoker with a 20 a day habit (Benson et al, 1995).

Also the tar from cannabis contains 50% more of some of the carcinogens found in tobacco, notably benzpyrene, a potent carcinogen and a key factor in the promotion of lung cancer (Hoffman et al 1997, Tashkin et al 1997, Novotny et al 1976, Leuchtenberger et al 1983).

For lung cells to become cancerous, a particular combination of cell-growth regulating genes (oncogenes) must become activated or undergo mutation (suppressor genes of tumours).

Marijuana smoke has been reported to produce chromosome aberrations in bacteria as demonstrated by the Ames test (Busch et al 1979 and Wehner et al 1980).

Biopsies of bronchial mucosa have yielded interesting results. Abnormal proliferation of cells (goblet and reserve), transformation of normal ciliated cells to squamous metaplasia (skin-like cells), accumulation of inflammatory cells and abnormal cell nuclei have all been observed (Gong et al 1987, Fliegel et al 1997, Barsky et al 1998). A much higher proportion of these abnormalities was seen in marijuana smokers compared to non-smokers, the number was similar to that of tobacco smokers. Smokers of both tobacco and marijuana exhibited the highest number of all, suggesting the two have an additive effect. Precursors of the development of lung cancer in tobacco smokers include squamous metaplasia and abnormal nuclei (Auerbachet al 1961). Confirmation of these observations also came in 1980 from FS Tennant when he examined US servicemen who were heavy hashish smokers. The mutagenic properties of cannabis smoke were previously recorded in papers in the seventies (Magus and Harris 1971 and Hoffman et al 1975). Human lung explants, exposed to marijuana smoke resulted in DNA and chromosomal alterations (Van Hoozen et al 1997).

Oncogenes and tumour suppressive genes, when mutated, produce proteins which cause cells to multiply rapidly and uncontrollably, resulting in tumours. Two of these proteins were found to be markedly increased in cannabis smokers compared to tobacco or non-smokers, the effects of tobacco and cannabis being additive (Roth et al 1998). The mutagenic effects of marijuana smoke have also been observed by Chiesara and Rizzi 1983, Gilmore et al 1971, Herha and Obe 1974 and Stenchever et al 1974.

Benzpyrene can cause alteration of a gene, P53, one of the commonest tumour suppressor genes if acted on by a chemical particle, CYP1A1. THC has been shown to increase production of this particle so making possible the development of respiratory cancer. P53 is thought to play a part in 75% of lung cancers and it is expressed in 11% of cannabis and tobacco smokers (Dinissenko et al 1996, Marques-Magallanes et al 1997).

The immune system has a role to play in the development of cancer. Alveolar macrophages protect the lungs from infection, they also kill tumour cells. Marijuana and tobacco smokers produce two or three times as many of these cells as non-smokers. The effects of smoking both being additive (Barbers et al 1987). The macrophages in both tobacco and marijuana smokers were larger and had more inclusions, probably due to the ingestion of smoke particles (Beals et al 1989). A more recent paper by Baldwin et al in 1997 found significant impairment of the macrophage cells of both tobacco and marijuana smokers. These cells have been shown to have cannabis receptors (Bouaboula et al 1993). Anti-tumour immunity depends on antigen-presenting dendritic cells being able to stimulate the proliferation of T lymphocytes that identify and destroy tumour cells. In in-vitro studies in which dendritic cells and T lymphocytes were incubated with or without THC, the THC suppressed the T cell proliferation in a dose-dependent manner (Roth et al 1997). Two earlier papers on this subject were written in 1975, Peterson et al and Nahas et al. DNA alterations have been seen in the lymphocytes of pregnant marijuana smokers and their newborns. This study is particularly important as tobacco smokers were excluded (Ammenheuser et al 1998). Cannabis smoking also depressed pro-inflammatory cytokine production. Cytokines regulate macrophage function so this may account for the impairment of their ability to kill tumour cells (Baldwin et al 1997).


Experiments on animals have yielded confirmatory evidence for many of the previous observations. In 1979 Rosenkranz and Fleischman found changes in the bronchial epithelia of rats after they had inhaled marijuana smoke for several months. These changes were consistent with precancerous alterations in cells. In the same year Fried and Charlebois administered cannabis smoke to rats during pregnancy and discovered impaired development in the F2 generation, so not only was damage caused to the first but also the second generation. In 1997 Zhu and others treated mice for 2 weeks with THC prior to the implantation of Lewis lung cancer cells. Larger faster-growing tumours resulted suggesting that the THC impairs the development of anti-tumour immunity in vivo. Dubinett et al in 2000 also found that mice injected with THC had reduced capability to fight the growth of tumours.

Painting tar from marijuana smoke on the skins of mice produced lesions correlated with malignancies (Cottrell 1973).

There are a significant number of reports of human cancers which may be linked to the smoking of marijuana. FM Taylor in 1988 examined adults with upper respiratory tract cancer over a period of 4 years. Of 6 men and 4 women, average age 33.5 years, nine had carcinomas of the lungs tongue or larynx, five were heavy cannabis smokers, two smoked it regularly, one had possibly used other drugs and two were non cannabis smokers. It was complicated by the fact that six were heavy alcohol users and six were smokers of tobacco. He concluded that regular marijuana use was a potent factor especially in the presence of other risk factors. He conceded that alcohol and tobacco may have played a part, but pointed out that the peak incidence for cancers due to tobacco or alcohol is in the seventh decade of life. All of these victims were much younger.

In 1989 Caplan and Brigham reported two cases of tongue cancer. One was a man of 37 the other a man of 52. Both were heavy cannabis users, neither smoked tobacco or drank alcohol. Endicott and Skipper in 1991 conducted a 2-centre USA retrospective study. Twenty-six patients of age 41 or less were diagnosed with throat or head tumours. The normal average age for tumours of this type is 57. All 26 were current or former marijuana smokers.

PJ Donald in 1993 examined patients with cancer of the head and throat over a 20-year period. He found 22 patients of age 40 or under on diagnosis, with squamous cell cancer. Their average age was 26. Nineteen of them were cannabis smokers, 16 being heavy users. In 13 the tumour was in the tongue or elsewhere in the oral cavity. Only half of them smoked tobacco.

110 private patients with lung cancer were studied. Nineteen (17%) of them were under 45. Thirteen of these had smoked marijuana of whom 12 reported current tobacco use. No tobacco-only smoking patients under 45 were noted (Sridhar et al 1994).

An epidemiological study to examine a possible association between cancer and marijuana was published in 1997 by Sidney and colleagues. 65,000 health plan members aged between 15 and 49 in 1979 to 1985 were followed for the development of new cancers till 1993. 182 tobacco-related cancers were detected, of which 97 were in the lungs. The study revealed no risk factors for cancers for lifetime or current use of marijuana.

The major limitation in this exercise is that those who were heavy or long-term users of cannabis were not followed up for long enough to detect cancers. Another criticism is that there may not have been sufficient of these long-term or heavy users to make the study effective. It must be remembered that most marijuana users quit before the level of exposure is sufficient to initiate the development of cancer and cannabis smoking has only been widespread in the USA since the 70s.


Zhang et al in 1999 studied 173 patients with carcinoma of the head and neck and compared them with 176 cancer-free controls. Age, sex, race, education, alcohol consumption and exposure to cigarette smoke either actively or passively, were all controlled for. Marijuana smoking increased the risk of squamous cell carcinoma of the head or neck, and a further increased risk was suggested with rising doses. Among people who smoked once a day the risk factor was 2.1 times compared with non-smokers, with those using it more than once a day the risk factor rose to 4.9. With patients who smoked cannabis and tobacco the risk was 36 times that for non-smokers.

The most prominent name and authority on cannabis and diseases of the respiratory system is that of Dr Donald Tashkin. He has researched the topic since the early seventies.

In 1993 he listed the factors suggesting that cannabis smoking may be associated with an increased risk of respiratory tract cancers.

1. Cannabis smoke has 50% more of certain carcinogens than tobacco smoke, especially the highly carcinogenic benz-pyrene.

2. Four times as much tar is produced by a cannabis cigarette than a tobacco one.

3. Experiments on animals have shown that cannabis smoke or tar from it is carcinogenic.

4. Heavy cannabis consumers have significantly higher numbers of cellular changes consistent with the preliminary stages of cancer.

5. There have been several reports of young cannabis-using people exhibiting the development of cancer. Tumours have appeared 10 to 30 years earlier than those who smoked tobacco alone.

In a review paper in 2002 he added that examination of the mucous membranes in long-term smokers suggests that THC weakens the immune defences against tumour cells.

In November 2002 the British Lung Foundation produced a paper “A Smoking Gun? The Impact of Cannabis Smoking on Respiratory Health”. One of their recommendations was: “ The British Lung Foundation recommends a public health education campaign aimed at young people to ensure that they are fully aware of the increased risk of pulmonary infections and respiratory cancers associated with cannabis smoking”.

In September 2003 The Thoracic Society of Australia and New Zealand produced a position paper in The Internal Medicine Journal on the respiratory health effects of cannabis (Taylor and Hall). They also called for a campaign. “Public Health Education should dispel the myth that cannabis smoking is relatively safe by highlighting that the adverse respiratory effects of smoking cannabis are similar to those of smoking tobacco…that the respiratory hazards of smoking cannabis are significant…almost all studies indicate that the effects of cannabis and tobacco smoking are additive and independent”.

In June 2005 Roth and Tashkin of UCLA, the two leading authors of many papers linking cannabis and cancer for over 10 years, described an epidemiological study at the meeting of the International Cannabinoid Research Society in Tampa, Florida. This paper has yet to appear on the ICRS website. Tashkin reported that they had failed to substantiate the link. Needless to say the press immediately issued banner headlines like “Marijuana is safer than tobacco”. However it has emerged that the study lacked statistical power. Tashkin and Roth explained that they had very few patients smoking more than 6 joints a day, a very mild level of consumption. Had they had more moderate and heavy smokers, their outcomes would almost certainly have been different. The study was originally designed to have 3 controls for each cancer case, in reality the ratio was around 0.7. Statistics are powerful but not powerful enough to account for gross flaws in sampling errors and study design.

In 1981 the WHO report on cannabis use said, “It is instructive to make comparisons with the study of effects of other drugs, such as tobacco or alcohol. With these drugs, “risk factors” have been freely identified, although full causality has not yet been established. Nevertheless such risk factors deserve and receive serious attention with respect to the latter drugs. It is puzzling that the same reasoning is often not applied to cannabis”… “To provide rigid proof of causality in such investigations is logically and theoretically impossible, and to demand it is unreasonable”.

Mary Brett, biologist and former head of health education, Dr Challoner’s Grammar School (boys) Chesham Road, Amersham, Bucks. HP6 5HA, UK 17th July 2005 References are available for this paper – please send a s.a.e. to NDPA

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

by Jane Wheatley

Our correspondent hears testimony to the link between cannabis and psychosis

Judy Mylne woke with a start and glanced at her bedside clock; it was 3am. She went to the window and looked out over the quiet street of terraced houses: in the middle of the road her son James was Rollerblading, up and down, up and down, between the rows of parked cars. He must have woken her as he went out, she thought, leaning her forehead against the cool glass, watching him, feeling sick and afraid.

At first when James had started behaving oddly, being difficult, she’d put it down to normal teenage moodiness, probably exacerbated by his parents’ divorce when he was 16.  He’d always been very good at art, won prizes; you had to make allowances for artistic souls didn’t you? But now, two years later, it was a lot more worrying. He would rant at his mother obsessively about such things as the power of purple; friends avoided him, tutors on his art foundation course said they couldn’t teach him. “He’s a mess,” they told Judy.

One evening he dropped his Walkman on the floor, stamped on it and screamed: “I’m going to kill myself and take you with me.” He head-butted the wall, put his fist through a door and, with blood pouring from head and hand, ran out on to the street. The next day Judy took him to their GP, who referred him to a psychiatrist, to whom James admitted that he had been smoking cannabis regularly. By now he was hearing voices and thought people were following him. One night Judy came home from dinner to find James packing a few random objects into a bag inside a nest of twisted coat hangers. He said he was going to walk to Nepal in the morning.

“I thought: ‘My God, he’s really, really ill’,” Judy recalls. She closed the door quietly, fetched two sleeping pills, dissolved them in a glass of Coca-Cola and took it to him. Then she packed a bag and went to a friend’s house. In the morning she rang her GP, the psychiatrist, her older stepsons and her ex-husband. “I’m not going back to the house,” she told them, “you must go and get James and take him somewhere safe.”

James’s father, a barrister, was in court and asked leave to speak to the judge in his chambers. There he explained that his son had been taking drugs and was possibly psychotic. The judge looked at him: “My son has the same problem,” he said. “Go, and take as long as you need.” 

There but for fortune, it seems, go any of us with teenage children.

Though most people use cannabis without any obvious harm, most of us know of someone — our own child or a friend’s, a friend of a friend’s — who has got into trouble smoking weed, often skunk, which has higher levels of THC, the compound that gets you stoned.

The most extreme cases, such as James, develop a psychosis (schizophrenia or bipolar disorder) from which they may or may not recover. And it is no respecter of class, education or background. Dr Zerrin Atakan, a psychiatrist, sees severe cases at her clinic at London’s Maudsley Hospital: “Sadly many of these young people had been bright, sensitive, happy children,” she says. “Parents often feel dreadfully guilty for allowing them to smoke weed, because in their day, it was relatively harmless.”

Dr Atakan’s patients have usually been smoking from a young age, while the brain is still developing: “We know now that this is a significant risk factor in the development of psychosis. In an ideal world, no one would smoke before the age of 18.”

So, does cannabis cause psychosis? Almost certainly not by itself.

Cannabis-related psychosis is a relatively new feature in the landscape of mental illness and there is little reliable data on it. One study found that people who use cannabis before the age of 15 are at least four times more likely to develop schizophrenia, but all of them probably had a predisposition for psychosis in the first place — sometimes, though not always, indicated by a family history of mental health problems.

A new Australian review of current evidence found that 42 per cent of patients with psychosis had used cannabis. Yet, despite much greater use of skunk during the Nineties, there has been no significant increase in the incidence of psychosis in the past 30 years. Why not? David Kavanagh, of the University of Queensland, is one of the authors of the review:  

 “While cannabis may not cause psychosis, there is no doubt that it will trigger psychosis much earlier in vulnerable young people. This is very important because the period of late adolescence is critical for the completion of education and the development of social, emotional and sexual competence and a psychotic episode during this period is extremely disrupting.

“We also know that cannabis use tends to worsen subsequent symptoms and triggers further episodes.” British researchers believe that, because cannabis use by children is a recent phenomenon, the effects have yet to show in the figures and that there will be an increase in schizophrenia in this current decade. In one study of 2,500 young people, the effect of cannabis use was much stronger in those with a predisposition for psychosis (23.8 per cent) than in those without (5.6 per cent). But even when there is no known family history of mental illness, some children may be genetically more vulnerable than their peers, or have a personality that does not handle cannabis very well, and the Government has ordered a review of the evidence for this. There are genetic tests, but they are expensive and unlikely to be ordered until the damage is done. So how do you tell?

“Well, it’s not written on the forehead,” says Dr Atakan, wryly. Marjorie Wallace, founder of the mental health charity SANE, agrees that you cannot know who is vulnerable: “It’s like watching children playing Russian roulette; one of them is going to be a victim.”

Wallace has worked with schizophrenic young people for 20 years: is there a classic type? “Well, yes,” she concedes, “usually male, often more inward-looking, artistic and sensitive. Often very promising but then he starts to drop out of college, loses friends and slides quietly into isolation. After one psychotic breakdown, there is treatment and partial recovery but then he’ll go back to cannabis, substituting it for his medication.” The key, says Dr Atakan, is early intervention: “There is a prodromal phase of psychotic illness that parents can look out for: a teenager might be a bit more withdrawn, excitable, suspicious, touchy, anxious; he might develop an extreme interest or obsession with one thing, ignoring everything else and avoiding social contact. untreated psychosis — is critical, yet people are baffled and don’t know how to ask for help.”   Like many parents, Judy Mylne did not relate her son’s behaviour to drugs. “I think I was in denial,” she says now. By the time the family rescue squad was called in, he was in full-blown psychosis. He spent a month in the secure Nightingale Clinic, where he was put on a heavy dose of the antipsychotic drug Risperdal and underwent group therapy. He came home and, under the watchful eye of his mother, gradually reduced his dosage. He came off medication entirely in the summer of 2004. This year he completed his art degree, embarked on an MA and is successfully selling his art work.
 
James was lucky: he had a mother who stuck by him and, when the crisis
hit, there was money to pay for instant professional help. After the medical insurance ran out, there was high-quality psychiatric support at his local Hammersmith Hospital. But services across the rest of the country are patchy, to say the least. How can parents and teenagers get the help that they need?   Eddie Greenwood is the clinical services director of the mental health charity Rethink; he says that, because governments have been so slow to recognise the causal link between cannabis and psychosis, there is a dearth of provision for young sufferers: “Primary care diagnostic services are often poor. A GP may refer a young person to a community mental health team, but they are unlikely to have a case worker experienced in dual diagnosis — that is, a combination of psychosis and substance abuse.”
The Government is now urging NHS trusts to develop early intervention teams for young people with first-onset psychosis. “But the demand wildly outstrips supply,” says Greenwood, “and the problem is going to get worse before it gets better. ”

“This is the time to seek help. What we call D.U.P. — duration of

Last Christmas, says Judy, she asked him if he would come and help her to get the tree. “He asked me if I’d had a tree when he was in the clinic and who was at home for Christmas Day. I told him, just me and his sister. ‘Oh, Mum,’ he said, ‘I’m so sorry!’” Judy felt like punching the air. “I thought: ‘Yes! Insight, empathy, at last.’ And humour has returned, too. For four years, I hadn’t heard him laugh.”

At the moment, a young person presenting with psychotic symptoms is likely to be sent by his GP for assessment and then referred to a psychiatrist who may prescribe antipsychotic drugs and send him home. For families in rural and under-resourced areas, this could be disastrous. “If you leave these people with arm’s-length treatment, they will just deteriorate,” cautions Greenwood. “The key is active engagement: getting an intervention programme organised around the young person’s needs.”

Dr Atakan agrees: “Where these specialist services exist, they are resourced to supply psychological support as well as medical. Treatment is a contentious issue; it is not ethical to prescribe antipsychotics to young people who may not be psychotic. It’s a complex area.” And cannabis may be a useful scapegoat for families not wanting to face the stigma of mental illness. David Kavanagh: “When a young person develops a psychotic disorder, family members naturally search for reasons. The young person may be blamed for bringing it on himself by smoking. Not only may this not be true, but such hostile criticsm increases the likelihood of further episodes.” Last month, after pressure from police and some drugs charities, the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs considered reclassifying cannabis as a Class B drug. But they are expected to recommend no change on the grounds that there is not enough new evidence to link it with mental illness. The council was also asked to consider giving a higher classification for skunk — “a more potent form of cannabis” — but this is thought to be unworkable. Dr Atakan would rather see cannabis legalised: “The present system is so bad; at least if it were legalised, some control mechanisms could be applied. At the moment it is in the hands of the dealers and it is in their interest to sell strong skunk. It needs to be regulated, like cigarettes, but most importantly there should be a thorough education campaign starting in primary school.”

Marjorie Wallace is dubious. “Until we know more about these new forms of cannabis, with their high THC levels and their effect on the young brain, we should not be giving out the message that this is a soft drug.”

                                                   *     *     *     *     *

“Sometimes I felt that people were talking about what I was thinking about”.  From the age of 14, I was smoking cannabis at weekends; by 18, I was smoking almost every night and doing some chemicals and pills at the weekends (LSD, ketamine, MDMA and cocaine). But, in comparison to others, I wasn’t doing many Class A drugs; I believe it was the consistent and accelerated use of cannabis that led to my diagnosis of drug-induced psychosis in 2000.   Out of about 25 drug users I knew then, three people, including myself, were creative, sensitive individuals — and not as bright as everyone else. I believe we were particularly vulnerable to the effects of cannabis. One of them, my best friend, jumped off a multistorey car park two years ago. The main difference between him and me was that I stopped taking drugs in 2001 and he didn’t. The thing about having something wrong with your mental state is that you can never escape it. When you can’t help yourself, you get angry, frustrated and sad about yourself. I would fleetingly remember my old self, when everything was fine and I was having so much fun — until it hurt too much. I wanted to be that person again. I believed that people were talking about me in public — and what was worse, what they were saying seemed to feed into the tangled web of delusional beliefs that  I had about my life. Sometimes I felt that people were talking about what I was thinking about. As a result, I thought I was some special character in a world that everyone knew of.

Paranoia is fundamentally egotistic and every conspiracy theory serves in some way to aggrandise the believer. My research into Buddhism has shone light on this and given me hope and help. I have recently been told by a doctor that my case is a great success. Certainly I feel one hundred times better than I did four years ago.

JAMES MYLNE

A search on Cannabis Psychosis produced 444 references. Here are the first 10.

 
1:  Ferdinand RF, van der Ende J, Bongers I, Selten JP, Huizink A, Verhulst FC. Related Articles, Links  Cannabis-psychosis pathway independent of other types of psychopathology. Schizophr Res. 2005 Nov 15;79(2-3):289-95. Epub 2005 Aug 25. PMID: 16125368 [PubMed – in process]

2:  Verdoux H, Tournier M, Cougnard A. Related Articles, Links  Impact of substance use on the onset and course of early psychosis. Schizophr Res. 2005 Nov 1;79(1):69-75. Epub 2005 Jan 11. PMID: 16198239 [PubMed – in process]

3:  Broome MR, Woolley JB, Tabraham P, Johns LC, Bramon E, Murray GK, Pariante C, McGuire PK, Murray RM. Related Articles, Links  What causes the onset of psychosis? Schizophr Res. 2005 Nov 1;79(1):23-34. PMID: 16198238 [PubMed – in process]

4:  Green B, Young R, Kavanagh D. Related Articles, Links  Cannabis use and misuse prevalence among people with psychosis. Br J Psychiatry. 2005 Oct;187:306-13.PMID: 16199787 [PubMed – in process]

5:  Viveros MP, Llorente R, Moreno E, Marco EM. Related Articles, Links  Behavioural and neuroendocrine effects of cannabinoids in critical developmental periods.Behav Pharmacol. 2005 Sep;16(5-6):353-62.  PMID: 16148439 [PubMed – in process]

6:  Long LE, Malone DT, Taylor DA. Related Articles, Links  Cannabidiol Reverses MK-801-Induced Disruption of Prepulse Inhibition in Mice.Neuropsychopharmacology. 2005 Jul 27; [Epub ahead of print] PMID: 16052245 [PubMed – as supplied by publisher]

7:  Clough AR, d’Abbs P, Cairney S, Gray D, Maruff P, Parker R, O’Reilly B. Related Articles, Links  Adverse mental health effects of cannabis use in two indigenous communities in Arnhem Land, Northern Territory, Australia: exploratory study.Aust N Z J Psychiatry. 2005 Jul;39(7):612-20.
PMID: 15996143 [PubMed – in process]

8:  Henquet C, Murray R, Linszen D, van Os J. Related Articles, Links  The environment and schizophrenia: the role of cannabis use.  Schizophr Bull. 2005 Jul;31(3):608-12. Epub 2005 Jun 23. PMID: 15976013 [PubMed – in process]

9:  Maki P, Veijola J, Jones PB, Murray GK, Koponen H, Tienari P, Miettunen J, Tanskanen P, Wahlberg KE, Koskinen J, Lauronen E, Isohanni M.

Related Articles,

 Predictors of schizophrenia–a review.

Br Med Bull. 2005 Jun 9;73:1-15. Print 2005.

PMID: 15947217 [PubMed – in process]

10:  van Os J, Henquet C, Stefanis N. Related Articles, Links  Cannabis-related psychosis and the gene-environment interaction: comments on Ferdinand et Al. 2005.  Addiction. 2005 Jun;100(6):874-5. No abstract available. PMID: 15918820 [PubMed – indexed for MEDLINE]

 Links

Where to get help:

         www.ukcia.org

          www.rethink.org
       
        www.knowcannabis.org.uk  
www.turning-point.co.uk

       

 

The Maudsley Hospital provides a programme for people wishing to cut down their cannabis intake.

Further reading: Marijuana and Madness, edited by David Castle and Robin Murray. Cambridge University Press.

 Source:  The Times November 14, 2005

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

By Joel Becker, Associate Editor

As methamphetamine makes a larger impact in western Wisconsin, more and more people are making an effort to find out just how bad the drug really is.

As a part of an Elk Mound inservice for school staff, Tim Schultz of the Division of Narcotics Enforcement gave a presentation to those 60 staff members and another 160 or so community members.

Schultz’ presentation wasn’t something that was humorous or entertaining. Rather it was more apropos for a Halloween spook show.

In fact, portions of the presentation, that included videos and photos, were simply gruesome.

Schultz told the audience that he gives the same presentation to high school students and some find it too graphic.

Early in the presentation on meth, Schultz showed a video with pictures of a 4-year-old girl who had been slowly bloodied, scarred and burned before being scalded to death in a bathtub by her parents who were meth users and cookers.

And the most disturbing portion of the presentation were pictures of people who couldn’t escape their homes when their meth labs exploded.

Schultz touched on marijuana as a gateway drug, but focused on meth because “that is the biggest problem we have right now.”

Schultz has been a presenter for 17 years and said the Polk and Barron county areas are the worst places for methamphetamine in the state of Wisconsin.

He said 90 percent of crime in those counties can be attributed to meth use as users search for ways to acquire the money they need to keep up their habit.

He noted that meth is different from any other drug out there because every other drug is natural. Meth is totally manmade and is the most potent drug there is.

When smoked or injected, he cited a report that said that 90 out of 100 users will become addicts by the second time they use.

“There’s no such thing as a recreational meth user,” Schultz said.

He said people start to use meth (crystal, crank, speed, lith-fluff, ice, glass shards) for a couple of reasons. Schultz said people use it because meth causes dramatic weight loss. It gives users incredible energy and keeps them awake for days or weeks at a time.

It also gives the user a euphoria beyond anything else because it forces the brain to release all of its dopamine, the body’s feel-good drug (except that with all of the dopamine in use, the feeling is 40,000 times stronger than any release the body gives naturally). The brain usually recycles the dopamine, but meth keeps the dopamine in the system for a long high (four to 16 hours) and eventually destroys it.

So no high is as good as the first, but the addict will continually try to recreate that feeling, destroying all dopamine in the body, which meth then simulates. The person can have no feeling of pleasure on their own after continued abuse and rely on meth to feel good.

But, as Schultz said in the nearly two-hour presentation, addicts basically turn into paranoid schizophrenics. He said the “meth monsters” make addicts unable to grasp reality.

Schultz told stories of how addicts believe law enforcement officers were always watching them and out to get them. They even believed they could see them peeking in their windows or watching them with night-vision goggles from a roof across the street.

Another user said he thought he was driving 60 miles an hour in his car and saw a relative running along side, so he opened his door to let him in.

Addicts also get “crank bugs,” which cause them to scratch and pick at their skin.

The cuts and scabs are just one indication of a meth user. They also usually have bad teeth and gums, bad breath, body odor, sunken in eyes, gaunt faces and a haggard appearance.

Since methamphetamine is relatively new in Wisconsin (there’s more in Polk and Barron counties than in Madison and Milwaukee combined) Schultz said the recently-enacted law that puts pseudophedrine (a key meth ingredient) behind the counter will have little affect. Thirty-seven states have similar laws.

When the law was enacted in Iowa, meth-related arrests dropped 70 percent. But Schultz says 90 percent of the meth in Wisconsin comes from Mexicans, much of which comes from Mexico.

Though every meth addict is a victim, children are the innocent victims.

“Meth users care more about the drug than their children,” Schultz said.

Children are constantly exposed to the chemicals necessary to making meth and are often harmed by the toxins or die in meth lab fires.

“Living in a home with a meth lab is like living in a toxic waste dump,” he said.

Schultz said those trying to recover often reoffend. He said the only way for users to break the meth habit is by participating in a long-term program.

 

For more information, contact Schultz at (715) 839-3830 or by e-mail at Schultz.Tim@gmail.com

 Source: www.dunnconnect.con Nov. 2005

Filed under: Effects of Drugs,Social Affairs :

 

There is growing policy and practice interest in the effect of parental substance misuse – both drugs and alcohol – on children. Despite this, young people are often neglected in both policy discussion and service provision. This qualitative study was undertaken in Scotland and explored the lives of 38 young people between the ages of 15 and 27 years whose parents have or had a drug and/or alcohol problem. It found:

 


Background

In the UK there are estimated to be between 250,000 and 350,000 dependent children living with parental drug misuse, and 920,000 living with parental alcohol misuse. Parental substance misuse can cause considerable harm. Children are at risk from emotional and physical neglect as they grow up. They also risk developing emotional and social problems later in life. Both outcomes are of growing concern to policy and practice. Older children, especially those aged 16 and over, are often neglected in policy discussion and in service provision. More needs to be known about their lives so that effective policy and service support can be developed.

The study involved interviews with 38 young people between the ages of 15 and 27 years old (most were between 16 and 21) who had been affected by parental substance misuse. The late teens and early twenties is a period of transition to adulthood, and interviews explored past experiences and present situations, before asking interviewees to consider the future.

While most of the young people came from socio-economically disadvantaged backgrounds, six had middle-class backgrounds. Some of the young people appeared to be managing well for themselves, and within this group several were in higher education. Others had relatively chaotic or precarious lives. Twelve had serious drug problems; most of this group were receiving treatment.

 


About the project

The study was based at the Centre for Research in Families and Relationships at the University of Edinburgh. Data was collected using in-depth qualitative interviews conducted by Sarah Wilson. Interviewees were recruited from a wide range of drug, youth work and homelessness services, and through leafleting and ‘snowballing’.

How to get further information

The full report, Parental drug and alcohol misuse: Resilience and transition among young people by Angus Bancroft, Sarah Wilson, Sarah Cunningham- Burley, Kathryn Backett-Milburn and Hugh Masters, is published by the Joseph Rowntree Foundation as part of the Drug and Alcohol series (ISBN 1 85935 248 0, price £13.95)..

 

Filed under: Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth,Parents :

Researchers have shown that cannabis is not the harmless high the flower-power devotees supposed.

AN ENTIRE generation once turned a blind eye to cannabis use, believing that although the drug was illegal it was also harmless. The depth of this misconception is hitting home as evidence mounts that marijuana can – and does – lead to significant mental health problems.As reported last week in The Australian, the nation’s crumbling mental health services have exposed a disturbing link between cannabis use and a host of behavioural and psychological problems. These range from criminality to psychiatric conditions such as depression and psychosis, a group of disorders including schizophrenia that feature loss of contact with the real world. Think hallucinations, delusions, paranoia and strange shifting moods.

One expert, Paul Dillon – information manager of the National Drug and Alcohol Research Centre at the University of New South Wales – went so far as damning cannabis use as a “time-bomb” threatening today’s generation of young users.

Dillon is not alone in pointing a finger at cannabis. Epidemiologist Wayne Hall – a professor of public health policy at the University of Queensland – says there is “consistent evidence” that regular cannabis users double their risk of psychosis from roughly one in 100, to one in 50.

New and solid support for an increased risk comes from the Christchurch Health and Development study. New Zealanders David Fergusson and his colleagues at the Christchurch School of Medicine are conducting a long-term, or “longitudinal”, study of 1265 New Zealand children. As part of their research, they gathered data on the frequency of cannabis use and psychotic symptoms from 1055 of the participants at ages 18, 21 and 25.

In an interim report published this year in the journal Addiction, the researchers concluded: “The results of the present study add to a growing body of evidence suggesting that regular cannabis use may increase risks of psychosis.” They ruled out the possibility that other unknown factors caused the worrying association they found.

Significantly, Fergusson’s group also excluded the idea – supported by some researchers – that people who develop psychotic symptoms turn to cannabis to relieve their distress, what experts call self-medicating.

“The direction of causality is from cannabis use to psychotic symptoms,” they wrote.

Perhaps more troubling are other recent findings which suggest that young users are at particular risk of eventually suffering psychosis and other mental health problems, claims Hall, co-author of a comprehensive review of the health and psychological effects of cannabis use – conducted for the National Drug Strategy in 2000 – as well as the 2004 update of the review published in the journal Drug and Alcohol Review.

And users, states Hall, are starting earlier and earlier: “Over the last 30 years in Australia the age of starting has dropped. Now the age of initiation is 15 or 16. There’s been a big drop in precocity in a range of behaviours, including alcohol and tobacco use.”

Part of the difficulty facing adolescent users is that today’s cannabis is more potent than yesterday’s marijuana. That’s so, according to Dillon, because people are smoking stronger parts of the plant and doing so in a riskier manner – such as by bong, or waterpipe.

More critically, though, research shows clearly that young brains are at greater risk than mature ones. Although they’ve attained 90 per cent of their adult size, adolescent brains are still growing. They’re “plastic”, subject to extensive internal change, explains Murat Yucel, neuropsychologist at the Melbourne Neuropsychology Centre at the University of Melbourne. “A lot of wiring and rewiring is occurring,” he says. “The brain is being continuously modelled and is maturing right through to the early 20s, especially in the way it is connected.” Yucel adds that areas of the brain integral to regulating emotion and managing memory, along with thinking, are among those still being shaped during adolescence.

According to preliminary findings from brain imaging work that Yucel conducted with colleagues at the Orygen Research Centre – a Melbourne University-based mental health service for people aged 15 to 25 – early cannabis and, to a lesser extent, alcohol use disrupts “wiring” in parts of the brain vital to those key functions. The frontal cortex, hippocampus and amygdala are particularly affected.

It’s far from clear just how dope smoking may impair the formation of healthy wiring. It may be the abundance of receptors – sites on brain cells that respond to connection-busting stimulation by the most active chemical in cannabis, tetrahydrocannabinol, or THC – in the frontal cortex, hippocampus and amygdala.

Alternatively, it may be that problems emerge because the protective sheaths that surround brain cells like surgical gloves are not laid down until the early 20s. “When you introduce cannabis in moderate to high levels (in adolescence) the connections (between brain cells) can be damaged,” Yucel suggests.

But along with Hall and other experts, Yucel argues for a multiplicity of causes, yet to be fully understood. After all, not all young cannabis users are at equal risk of smoking their way to poor brain wiring or psychotic illness. Other variables, from stress to genes, must be cranking up the harm imposed by heavy and early drug use. Right now, that’s precisely what experts worldwide are trying to sort out.

For instance, Yucel and co-workers at Orygen have begun a series of longitudinal studies involving roughly 400 Melbourne students now about 14 years old. They’ve gathered details on the youngsters’ personality, family life and circumstances, and brain biochemistry, with genetic information to come soon.

“As they start using substances and developing various disorders – if they do – we’ll know what kind of (factors) are there and how the onset of mental illness and substance abuse interacted,” explains Yucel.

Meanwhile, scientific attention is focused on a gene called COMT. That’s so because six years ago international collaborators – led by psychiatrist Kieren Murphy, of Ireland’s Dublin Molecular Medicine Centre – discovered that a variation of the gene was associated with psychosis. Tantalisingly, the gene is involved with a brain chemical called dopamine which, in turn, influences how a maturing brain is wired.

Bingo: psychotic symptoms, gene, young brain.

Psychiatrist Avshalom Caspi, of the Institute of Psychiatry at King’s College, London, teamed with David Fergusson and researchers at New Zealand’s University of Otago in Dunedin to unravel the clues. Specifically, they wanted to know if COMT is implicated in the development of psychosis among cannabis smokers.

Again, New Zealanders were central to the quest. This time the 803 young people studied were part of a group of 1037 children whose parents had enlisted them as three-year-olds in the Dunedin Multidisciplinary Health and Development Study, back in the early 1970s. And again, the scientific sleuths collected a suite of physical, genetic and social data, and have followed up the children over the years.

Their verdict on COMT: guilty as charged.

When they looked at the well-being of the participants at age 26, Caspi’s group found that if the young people had begun smoking cannabis in early adolescence, and had the suspect version of COMT, they were 10 times more likely to have experienced psychotic illnesses than people who never smoked. That was even if they had the troublesome version of the gene.

Clearly, cannabis use played a role in the onset of mental disorder, at least for the Dunedin smokers. But as Caspi’s group noted in Biological Psychiatry in April (2005;57:1117-27), “the vast majority of young people who use cannabis do not develop psychosis”. They argue that the whole story remains untold.

Part of the story undoubtedly includes less dramatic elements, ones that are getting lost in the high-profile discussion of genes, psychosis and their ilk. “The serious risk that’s underplayed is the risk of dependence, of getting stuck and finding it hard to quit,” says Hall.

“We have people coming for treatment in their early 30s who’ve been smoking for 12 to 15 years who haven’t seen it as a problem – until they try to stop. It’s pretty much like alcohol in that regard,” he claims Hall.

Complex? Yes. Troubling? Indeed. As psychiatrist Ian Hickie argues in Weekend Health today (see above), it’s time to rethink social attitudes and policy surrounding cannabis use. So what to do? Hall replies: “Certainly the clearest implication (of recent findings) is we should be telling people about risk. No question at all.”

But there’s been so much “disinformation” about and “hypocrisy” regarding cannabis use over the years that young people, in particular, are turned off by shock-horror health warnings and heavy-handed tactics, says Hall. “Getting tough and increasing penalties is likely to be counter-productive.”

Getting it right, putting it in perspective and acknowledging the inconsistency of prevailing attitudes towards all drugs – from cannabis to coffee – may be a useful starting point.

As Ian Hickie suggests, more than one generation should reconsider the realities of reefer madness.

 

Source: Leigh Dayton, Science writer The Australian November 05, 2005
Filed under: Australia,Cannabis/Marijuana,Drug use-various effects,Health :

 

Margret Drewe, Jürgen Drewe, Anita Riecher-Rössler
Psychiatric Outpatient Department and Clinic for Pharmacology und Toxicology,University Hospital Basel, Switzerland

Legalisation of cannabis use in Switzerland has recently been debated by the Swiss Parliament. Although legalisation has not yet been decided upon, it is still the subject of impassioned public discussion. If cannabis use is legalised, an increase in consumption is to be expected. One of the manifold negative consequences for mental health will probably be an increase in the prevalence of psychoses – not only acute, toxic psychosis but also chronic psychoses. Schizophrenic psychoses are expected to be triggered at an earlier age and to be negatively influenced in their course. This eventuality could have deleterious consequences not only for many currently healthy individuals predisposed to psychosis, but also for the disability pension.

 

In Switzerland cannabis is a widely used drug due to its psychotropic effects. It enjoys an almost legally accepted status. The National Health Inquiry (Schweizerische Gesundheitsbefragung 2002) showed that the recreational use of cannabinoids increased significantly during the period 1992–2002. In 2002, 225,000 persons in the 15–64 age group consumed cannabinoids, corresponding to 4.7% of the Swiss population. The proportion of consumers increased in the under-40 age group from 12.2% in 1992 to 21.7% in 2002. In 2002 between 36% and 24.4% of men and women respectively of the 15–24 age group reported that they had consumed cannabis at least once [1]. It may be speculated that the prevalence of cannabis consumption would increase further if consumption were legalised in Switzerland, as the Swiss Parliament has debated. Hence the implications for mental health are of importance. Besides its disturbing effects on psychomotor performance and driving ability [2], development of psychological and physical dependence on cannabis and other drugs [3–5], impairment of cognitive function (memory, attention) [6], changes in personality such as loss of motivation, as described by the term “amotivational syndrome” [7], as well as development of depression and psychosis [5], are reported in the literature. With respect to psychosis, a distinction must be drawn between dose-dependent toxic, so-called drug-induced psychoses and schizophrenic psychoses. The existence of the usually reversible toxic psychoses has been well described [5, 8], but there is still controversy as to whether acute or chronic cannabis consumption can lead to the development of chronic, especially schizophrenic psychoses. In the Mannheim ABC Schizophrenia Study the last author of this paper demonstrated that first-admitted patients with schizophrenia showed a twofold higher prevalence of drug abuse (predominantly cannabis) compared with healthy controls [9, 10]. Experience in our Basel FEPSY – (Früherkennung von Psychosen – Early Detection of Psychosis) project show a similar disproportionate use of cannabis: approximately 75% of our newly diagnosed patients with schizophrenia reported regular use of cannabis (at least several times per month). We shall therefore discuss the evidence in the literature for a causal relationship between the use of cannabis and the development of (chronic) schizophrenic psychoses. We are aware that the kind of relationship between cannabis consumption and development of schizophrenic psychoses is highly controversial [11]: one view is that cannabis use is secondary to psychiatric disorders, or caused by other, concomitantly consumed drugs, or is even due to confounding factors (both cannabis use and psychosis are caused by one or more as yet unknown factors).

A different view is that of a causal or modulating effect (in vulnerable patients) of cannabis use for the development of psychoses. And an integrative view, supported by our own earlier data [9], postulates that both kinds of interaction are possible. In what follows, our criteria for deciding between these views are similar to other authors’ [11, 12]:

Summary

Introduction – Cannabis and risk of psychosis

1) Is there biological evidence of an interaction between the cannabis and the dopaminergic system in cerebral tissue?

2) Is there a statistical association between cannabis use and psychosis and, more specifically,

3) Is there a temporal relationship between antecedent cannabis use and later onset of psychotic symptoms, and, finally

4) Is there a dose-response relationship for cannabis use and development of schizophrenic psychoses?

The importance of dopamine balance in specific brain areas for the development of psychoses has been sufficiently demonstrated, being the basis of the dopamine-antagonistic therapy with neuroleptic drugs. Cannabis may affect this balance by its active psychotropic components, such as tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) and its metabolite 11-OH-THC. It increases dopaminergic activity in relevant areas of the mesolimbic system, possibly by blockade of GABAergic neuronal activity [4, 13]. Cannabis exerts these effects by binding to specific receptors (mainly the CB1-receptor), which interact with local dopamine D2-receptors [14]. Both receptor genes show a significant homology in regulatory parts [15]. Interactions between the two receptors were reported for the striatum of rats and monkeys [16]. The most extensive expression of CB1-receptors is found be important for the development of schizophrenia, namely the mesolimbic and mesocortical dopaminergic system [4]. Further, it has been proposed that genetic mutations of the CB1-receptor gene are accompanied by an increased risk of developing cannabis abuse in schizophrenic patients [17]. The finding of increased blood concentrations of anandamide, an endogenous CB1-receptor agonist, in a group of schizophrenic patients [18] corroborates these findings.

Neurobiological background

Can cannabis consumption lead to short-lasting, “toxic” psychoses?

In the literature there are many case reports on acute psychiatric symptoms after the consumption of sometimes high doses of cannabis, showing the clinical picture of short, reversible toxic psychosis with organic features such as confusion or disorientation. In India, 200 patients were hospitalised after consumption of exceptionally high doses of cannabis because of severe psychiatric symptoms (confusion, emotional lability, disorientation, depersonalisation, paranoid symptoms) [19]. The symptoms lasted for some days, but longer in patients with a history of psychiatric disorders.

Can cannabis consumption also lead to non-toxic psychoses/psychotic symptoms?

In a large-scale enquiry in 1000 persons in New Zealand aged between 18 and 35, 38% reported cannabis consumption. 22% of these subjects reported anxiety and panic attacks and 15% psychotic symptoms following cannabis use. Women reported panic attacks significantly more often than men [20]. In Germany, 36,000 US soldiers were questioned about cannabis consumption. 5120 admitted consuming cannabis at least 3 times weekly. Psychiatric symptoms such as panic attacks or toxic psychoses following consumption of a single high dose of cannabis were reported by 720 soldiers [21]. Van Os and co-workers investigated the effect of cannabis in 4045 healthy subjects and 59 psychotic patients [22]. In a 3-year follow-up investigation the consumers showed a 2.8-fold higher risk (95% CI: 1.2–6.5) of developing psychotic symptoms than non-consuming controls. In the group of patients with pre-existing psychotic symptoms, the risk was 24.2-fold (95% CI: 5.4–107.5) It emerged that the severity of In this study more than 50% of psychotic episodes could be related to consumption of cannabis. The authors concluded that cannabis consumption increases the risk of developing psychotic symptoms in healthy subjects and worsens the prognosis in psychotic patients. The impact of cannabis consumption on the risk of developing psychoses has also been investigated in other studies. Thus, in the National Survey of Mental Health and Well-Being (NSMHWB) [23], a representative poll (N = 10641) showed that cannabis abuse was accompanied by a significant 2.8-fold (95% CI: 1.4–5.9) increased risk of developing psychosis. However, these studies did not further investigate the type of psychosis.

Clinical studies

Can cannabis consumption cause a schizotypal personality?

Cannabis consumption is associated with a schizophrenia-like personality. Several authors show that young consumers and previous consumers have higher scores on schizotypy, and psychoticism scales even when they do not show other psychiatric symptoms. They also show deficits in attentional inhibition and decreased reaction time compared to never-users [24, 25]. The causal relationship of this association is, however, not yet clear: do these personality traits predispose to cannabis abuse or does cannabis abuse induce these changes of personality?

Can cannabis consumption also trigger or even cause schizophrenic psychoses?

A historical cohort study in more than 50,000 Swedish conscripts over an observation period of some 27 years investigated the importance of cannabis consumption for the development of schizophrenia and psychoses [26]: young men who reported previous cannabis consumption on more than 50 occasions at the outset of the observation period showed a 6.7-fold (95% CI: 4.5–10.0) increased risk of later hospitalisation for schizophrenia and other psychoses. The latter author also reported very interesting results in the ABC study (Age, Beginning and Course of Schizophrenia): this study investigated 276 first-time hospitalised schizophrenic patients (232 with first episode) [27, 28]. Twice the number of patients reported a lifetime history of substance abuse than healthy controls – 14.2% versus 7% [9, 29]. Of these patients 88% consumed cannabis, in approx. 60% of whom cannabis consumption preceded even the first still very unspecific symptoms of schizophrenia [29], on average by about 4.5 years [9]. In 35% of cases the first unspecific symptoms were reported to have occurred in the same month as the start of drug consumption. Cannabis-consuming patients were significantly younger than non-consuming patients. The authors therefore concluded that cannabis consumption may have precipitated (triggered) the onset of schizophrenia in predisposed (vulnerable) patients and aggravated the symptoms [29, 30]. However, there may also be a subgroup of patients who have started to use cannabis to attenuate the first [9, 31, 32]. (pre-)psychotic symptoms as a form of self-therapy.

In a recent reanalysis of five large (N = 1011 to 50,053 patients) studies [22, 26, 33–35] Smit et al. pointed out that in these studies there was a clear temporal relationship of antecedent cannabis use before first psychiatric symptoms were observed[11]. Effects of other concomitantly used drugs were excluded and the effects of other confounders were taken into account in four of these studies. In two of them [22, 26] a dose-dependent increase in psychosis risk was observed. As the authors pointed out, this does not imply that psychotic patients “do not use cannabis as a form of ‘self-medication’, but these results do imply that cannabis use increases the risk of later schizophrenia even when self-medication can be ruled out as an explanation” [11]. Verdoux et al. [36] found that young undergraduate students with high vulnerability to development of psychosis reported more unusual perceptions and feelings of thought influence after cannabis consumption than subjects with low vulnerability. Interestingly, they could not find evidence of increased use of cannabis following the occurrence of psychotic experiences. This contradicts the self-medication model in the psychotic stage but not necessarily in the still unspecific prodromal stage. Young age appears to increase the risk of developing psychotic symptoms following cannabis use. In a prospective longitudinal study Arseneault et al. [34] investigated whether adolescent cannabis use is a risk factor for adult schizophreniform disorders. The study was performed in 1037 adolescents from New Zealand and showed that cannabis consumption at age 15 years significantly increased the risk of developing schizophrenia(4.5-fold, 95% CI: 1.1–18.2) up to age 26. However, cannabis consumption at age 18 increased the risk only 1.7-fold (95% CI: 0.7–4.2). These results were corroborated by a birth cohort in 1265 children [35] studied to age 21. The authors showed that subjects fulfilling DSM-IV criteria for cannabis dependence had elevated rates of psychotic symptoms as compared to individuals without cannabis dependence – at age 18 the increase was 3.7-fold (95% CI: 2.8–5.0) and at age 21 2.3- fold (95% CI: 1.7–3.2). This significant increase was still present when data were adjusted for pre-existing symptoms or other background factors. Despite this close association of cannabis use with schizophrenia, the causal relationship between cannabis consumption and schizophrenic psychosis is still controversial. On the one hand, many studies show an increased risk of developing schizophrenia in patients consuming cannabis; on the other hand, in a simulation Degenhardt [37] showed that a causal relationship would have led to a significant increase in the incidence of schizophreniain Australia, which has, however, not been observed [8]. A possible explanation for the lack of evidence of an increase in schizophrenia rates in epidemiological studies may be a reporting bias: in clinical studies, which usually find this association, exposed patients have been systematically studied for psychiatric disturbances in one or more follow-up investigations. This has led to detection of mild psychotic symptoms, which outside clinical studies may not have been detected (underreporting). Also, the proportion of cannabis-induced schizophrenia may be small and, therefore, an increase inschizophrenia rate attributed to cannabis use may not be easily detectable. On the other hand, Boydell et al. [38] recently reported a continuous and statistically significant increase in the incidence of schizophrenia from the London area for the period 1965–1997. Interestingly, this increase was most marked in people under 35 years of age and was not gender-specific. Furthermore, it is conceivable that cannabis is not causal in a narrow sense, but merely triggers the outbreak of schizophrenic psychoses in individuals with a specific (genetic) vulnerability for this disease. Cannabis use would then simply result in earlier manifestation of schizophrenia in these vulnerable patients rather than an increased incidence. Evidence for this has just been published [39]. This alone would also be relevant, since it has important implications for the mental and educational development of these patients. If the onset of first symptoms is earlier, have not usually completed their professional education and have not developed a sufficient social network. Earlier onset due to a “cannabis trigger” may therefore be associated with a worse prognosis of schizophrenia, especially regarding its psychosocial course.

Can cannabis consumption worsen the progression of schizophrenia?

The productive symptoms of psychosis are amplified by concomitant consumption of cannabis. Compliance with antipsychotic treatment and utilisation of rehabilitation programmes are impaired [29]. Schizophrenia patients with cannabis use suffer from more frequent and earlier relapse episodes [40, 41]. Because of the dopaminergic effects of cannabis it can be speculated that cannabis-consuming patients suffering from schizophrenia may need higher doses of antipsychotic (anti-dopaminergic) medication. Psychotic patients with cannabis consumption are usually younger, predominantly male and show more criminal behaviour [42]. On the basis of our criteria, the following conclusions can be drawn:

– Cannabis consumption modulates dopamine concentrations in certain brain areas, and can thus induce or modulate the development of psychotic symptoms and psychosis.

– Cannabis in high doses may induce acute, reversible (toxic) psychoses.

– Cannabis may also induce the manifestation of schizophrenic psychoses in vulnerable patients (“dopaminergic stress”) or at least trigger an earlier onset in this population.

– Young age is an additional risk factor for the development of psychoses.

– Concomitant cannabis consumption may affect the progression of schizophrenic psychoses and worsen the prognosis.

– Cannabis consumption is associated with a schizotypical personality, the causal relationship of which is not yet clear.

– Cannabis consumption can also lead to other psychiatric disorders, including depression and may result in a severe loss of energy and cognitive disturbances.

Conclusions

To obtain more definite answers to the questions of causality, dose-effect relationship, the severity and time course of these effects, the importance of other confounding factors, and, finally, the size of the impending burden for the individual and the society, we urgently need additional prospective longitudinal studies. Nevertheless, at this stage of research we can and should, depending on our view, already sound a note of warning, especially as the potency of the substances used and the prevalence of abuse and dependence are apparently growing [43]. Increased cannabis consumption in our society could have deleterious consequences for many so far healthy individuals, not only because of the negative influences on education and work performance due to impairment of cognitive function and loss of energy, but also due to the “psychotogenic” properties of cannabis. Healthy individuals with a currently “hidden” predisposition to psychosis could develop full blown psychosis. In individuals vulnerable to schizophrenia the outbreak of this disorder could be triggered at an earlier age and negatively influenced in its course. This would not only have severe psychosocial consequences for the individual and his family. As schizophrenia is already one of the most expensive diseases, this could also have negative consequences for the national economy – inter alia due to the high level of disability pensions at a very young age. What conclusions can be drawn? Politicians, health professionals and teachers should more intensively pinpoint the potential health risks of cannabis use, in particular for young adolescents. Information campaigns should be launched in the media. Although complete prohibition of cannabis may be neither enforceable nor successful in our society, legalisation of cannabis could – on the other hand – send the wrong message concerning the potential harm done by its use. It goes without saying that people who are already dependent need our help and should not be criminalised; but methods of controlled use for dependent persons have also been found for other substances and drugs. Our main focus should in any case be on the prevention of new cases of cannabis dependence.

Correspondence:

Prof. Anita Riecher-Rössler, MD Psychiatric Outpatient Department University Hospital / Universitätsspital Basel Petersgraben 4 CH-4031 Basel E-Mail: ariecher@uhbs.ch

References:

1 BFS. BFS, Schweizerische Gesundheitsbefragung 2002. Erste Ergebnisse. Neuchâtel, 2003.

2 Ashton CH. Pharmacology and effects of cannabis: a brief review. Br J Psychiatry 2001;178:101–6.

3 Lynskey MT, Heath AC, Bucholz KK, et al. Escalation of drug use in early-onset cannabis users vs co-twin controls. JAMA 2003;289:427–33.

4 Ameri A. The effects of cannabinoids on the brain. Prog Neurobiol 1999;58:315–48.

5 Johns A. Psychiatric effects of cannabis. Br J Psychiatry 2001; 178:116–22.

6 Solowij N, Stephens RS, Roffman RA, et al. Cognitive functioning of long-term heavy cannabis users seeking treatment. JAMA 2002;287:1123–31.

7 Lynskey M, Hall W. The effects of adolescent cannabis use on educational attainment: a review. Addiction 2000;95:1621–30.

8 Degenhardt L, Hall W. Cannabis and psychosis. Curr Psychiatry Rep 2002;4:191–6.

9 Hambrecht M, Häfner H, Riecher-Rössler A. «Weiche» Drogen: Eine Ursache von Schizophrenie? Münch Med Wschr 1996;138:430–1.

10 Hambrecht M, Häfner H. Cannabis, vulnerability, and the onset of schizophrenia: an epidemiological perspective. Aust N Z J Psychiatry 2000;34:468–75.

11 Smit F, Bolier L, Cuijpers P. Cannabis use and the risk of later schizophrenia: a review. Addiction 2004;99:425–30.

12 Arseneault L, Cannon M, Witton J, Murray RM. Causal association between cannabis and psychosis: examination of the evidence. Br J Psychiatry 2004;184:110–7.

13 Voruganti LN, Slomka P, Zabel P, Mattar A, Awad AG. Cannabis induced dopamine release: an in-vivo SPECT study. Psychiatry Res 2001;107:173–7.

14 Giuffrida A, Desarnaud F, Piomelli D. Endogenous cannabinoid signaling and psychomotor disorders. Prostaglandins Other Lipid Mediat 2000;61:63–70.

15 Fritzsche M. Are cannabinoid receptor knockout mice animal models for schizophrenia? Med Hypotheses 2001;56:638–43.

16 Meschler JP, Howlett AC. Signal transduction interactions between CB1 cannabinoid and dopamine receptors in the rat and monkey striatum. Neuropharmacology 2001;40:918–26.

17 Leroy S, Griffon N, Bourdel MC, Olie JP, Poirier MF, Krebs MO. Schizophrenia and the cannabinoid receptor type 1 (CB1): association study using a single-base polymorphism in coding exon 1. Am J Med Genet 2001;105:749–52.

18 Leweke FM, Giuffrida A, Wurster U, Emrich HM, Piomelli D. Elevated endogenous cannabinoids in schizophrenia. Neuroreport 1999;10:1665–9.

19 Chopra GS, Smith JW. Psychotic reactions following cannabis use in East Indians. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1974;30:24–7.

20 Thomas H. A community survey of adverse effects of cannabis use. Drug Alcohol Depend 1996;42:201–7.

21 Tennant FS Jr, Groesbeck CJ. Psychiatric effects of hashish. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1972;27:133–6.

22 van Os J, Bak M, Hanssen M, Bijl RV, de Graaf R, Verdoux H. Cannabis use and psychosis: a longitudinal population-based study. Am J Epidemiol 2002;156:319–27.

23 Degenhardt L, Hall W, Lynskey M. Alcohol, cannabis and tobacco use among Australians: a comparison of their associations with other drug use and use disorders, affective and anxiety disorders, and psychosis. Addiction 2001;96:1603–14.

24 Williams JH, Wellman NA, Rawlins JN. Cannabis use correlates with schizotypy in healthy people. Addiction 1996;91: 869–77.

25 Skosnik PD, Spatz-Glenn L, Park S. Cannabis use is associated with schizotypy and attentional disinhibition. Schizophr Res 2001;48:83–92.

26 Zammit S, Allebeck P, Andreasson S, Lundberg I, Lewis G. Self reported cannabis use as a risk factor for schizophrenia in Swedish conscripts of 1969: historical cohort study. BMJ 2002;325:1199.

27 Häfner H, Riecher A, Maurer K, et al. Geschlechtsunterschiede bei schizophrenen Erkrankungen. Fortschr Neurol Psychiatr 1991;59:343–60.

28 Häfner H, Maurer K, Löffler W, an der Heiden W, Munk Jørgensen P, Hambrecht M, Riecher-Rössler A. The ABC Schizophrenia Study: a preliminary overview of the results. Soc Psychiatry Psychiatr Epidemiol 1998;33:380–6.

29 Bühler B, Hambrecht M, Löffler W, an der Heiden W, Häfner H. Precipitation and determination of the onset and course of schizophrenia by substance abuse – a retrospective and prospective study of 232 population-based first illness episodes. Schizophr Res 2002;54:243–51.

30 Hall W, Degenhardt L. Cannabis use and psychosis: a review of clinical and epidemiological evidence. Aust N Z J Psychiatry 2000;34:26–34.

31 Dixon L, Haas G, Weiden P, Sweeney J, Frances A. Acute effects of drug abuse in schizophrenic patients: clinical observations and patients’ self-reports. Schizophr Bull 1990;16:69–79.

32 Dixon L, Haas G, Weiden PJ, Sweeney J, Frances AJ. Drug abuse in schizophrenic patients: clinical correlates and reasons for use. Am J Psychiatry 1991;148:224–30.

33 Weiser M, Knobler HY, Noy S, Kaplan Z. Clinical characteristics of adolescents later hospitalized for schizophrenia. Am J Med Genet 2002;114 :949–55.

34 Arseneault L, Cannon M, Poulton R, Murray R, Caspi A, Moffitt TE. Cannabis use in adolescence and risk for adult psychosis: longitudinal prospective study. BMJ 2002;325:1212–3.

35 Fergusson DM, Horwood LJ, Swain-Campbell NR. Cannabis dependence and psychotic symptoms in young people. Psychol Med 2003;33:15–21.

36 Verdoux H, Gindre C, Sorbara F, Tournier M, Swendsen JD. Effects of cannabis and psychosis vulnerability in daily life: an experience sampling test study. Psychol Med 2003;33:23–32.

37 Degenhardt L, Hall W, Lynskey M. Testing hypotheses about the relationship between cannabis use and psychosis. Drug Alcohol Depend 2003;71:37–48.

38 Boydell J, Van Os J, Lambri M, et al. Incidence of schizophrenia in south-east London between 1965 and 1997. Br J Psychiatry 2003;182:45–9.

39 Veen N, Selten J-P, van der Tweel I, Feller W, Hoek H, Kahn R. Cannabis use and age at onset of schizophrenia. Am J Psychiat 2004;161:501–6.

40 Linszen DH, Dingemans PM, Lenior ME. Cannabis abuse and the course of recent-onset schizophrenic disorders. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1994;51:273–9.

41 Martinez-Arevalo MJ, Calcedo-Ordonez A, Varo-Prieto JR. Cannabis consumption as a prognostic factor in schizophrenia. Br J Psychiatry 1994;164:679–81.

42 Cantwell R. Substance use and schizophrenia: effects on symptoms, social functioning and service use. Br J Psychiatry 2003; 182:324–9.

43 Compton WM, Grant BF, Colliver JD, Glantz MD, Stinson FS. Prevalence of marijuana use disorders in the United States. JAMA 2004;291:2114–21. Source: SWISS MED WKLY 2004;134:659–663 •

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :
By Timothy Wilens, M.D.

The overlap between attention-deficit/ hyperactivity disorder and alcohol or drug abuse or dependence (referred to here as substance use disorders [SUDs]) in adolescents has been an area of increasing clinical, research and public health interest. Appearing in early childhood, ADHD affects from 6% to 9% of children and adolescents worldwide (Anderson et al., 1987) and up to 5% of adults (Kessler, in press). Longitudinal data suggest that childhood ADHD persists into adolescence in 75% of cases and into adulthood in approximately one-half of cases (for review, see Weiss, 1992). Substance use disorders usually appear in adolescence or early adulthood and affect between 10% to 30% of U.S. adults and a less defined, but sizable, number of juveniles (Kessler, 2004). The study of comorbidity between SUDs and ADHD is relevant to both research and clinical practice in developmental pediatrics, psychology and psychiatry with implications for diagnosis, prognosis, treatment and health care delivery.

Overlap Between ADHD and SUD

Structured psychiatric diagnostic interviews assessing ADHD and other disorders in substance-abusing groups have indicated that from one-third to one-half of adolescents with SUDs have ADHD (DeMilio, 1989; Milin et al., 1991). For example, aggregate data from government-funded studies of mainly cannabis-abusing youth indicate that ADHD is the second most common comorbidity with from 40% to 50% of both girls and boys manifesting full criteria for ADHD. Data largely ascertained from adult groups with SUDs also show an earlier onset and more severe course of SUD associated with ADHD (Carroll and Rounsaville, 1993; Levin and Evans, 2001).

ADHD as a Risk Factor or Precursor for SUD

The association of ADHD and SUDs is particularly compelling from a developmental perspective as ADHD appears to manifest itself earlier than the SUD; therefore, the SUD is an unlikely risk factor for ADHD. Thus, it is important to evaluate to what extent ADHD is a precursor of SUDs. Prospective studies of children with ADHD have provided evidence that the group with conduct or bipolar disorders co-occurring with ADHD have the poorest outcome with respect to developing SUDs and major morbidity (Biederman et al., 1997; Mannuzza et al., 1993). As part of an ongoing prospective study of ADHD, it was found that differences in the risk for SUDs in adolescents with ADHD (mean age=15) compared to controls without ADHD were accounted for by comorbid conduct or bipolar disorders (Biederman et al., 1997). However, it also has been shown that the age of risk for SUD onset in adolescents without comorbid ADHD is approximately 17 years in girls and 19 years in boys (Biederman et al., in press-a; Milberger et al., 1997b). These findings were confirmed by Katusic and associates (2005) and Molina and Pelham (2003), who have shown elevated risk of SUDs in adolescents with ADHD.

ADHD treatment and SUD. Clarification of the critical influence of ADHD treatment in youth on later SUDs remains hampered by methodological issues. Since prospective studies in youth with ADHD are naturalistic, and hence not randomized for treatment, attempts to disentangle positive or deleterious effects of treatment from the severity of the underlying condition(s) are hampered by serious confounds. Whereas concerns of the abuse liability and potential kindling of specific types of abuse (e.g., cocaine) secondary to early stimulant exposure in children with ADHD have been raised (Drug Enforcement Administration, 1995; Vitiello, 2001), the preponderance of clinical data do not appear to support such a contention.

To reconcile findings in this important area, my group completed a meta-analysis of the literature (Faraone and Wilens, 2003; Wilens et al., 2003). We included studies examining the later risk of SUDs in children exposed to stimulant pharmacotherapy, identifying two studies into adolescence and five studies into adulthood. We found that stimulant pharmacotherapy did not increase the risk for later SUDs. In fact, we found that stimulant pharmacotherapy protected against later SUDs (odds ratio of 1.9) and that the effect was stronger in adolescents relative to adults (Wilens et al., 2003). It is notable that the magnitude of risk reduction (e.g., 50% reduction in risk) indicated that the ultimate risk of SUDs in treated individuals with ADHD may approximate the level of risk in individuals without ADHD (general population).

SUD Pathways Associated With ADHD

An increasing body of literature shows an intriguing association between ADHD and cigarette smoking. It has been previously reported that ADHD is a significant predictor for early initiation of cigarette smoking (before age 15) and that conduct and mood disorders comorbid with ADHD put youth at particularly high risk for early-onset smoking (Milberger et al., 1997a) data also suggest that one-half of smokers with ADHD go on to later SUDs (Biederman et al., in press-b). This is not surprising given that not only does smoking lead to peer group pressures and availability of illicit substances, but that nicotine exposure may make the brain more susceptible to later behavioral disorders and SUDs (Trauth et al., 2000). Furthermore, nicotinic-modulating agents are increasingly being evaluated for the treatment of ADHD (Wilens et al., in press-b). Of interest, prospective data funded by the National Institute on Drug Abuse suggest that stimulant treatment of ADHD reduces not only the time to onset but also the incidence of cigarette smoking (Monuteaux, 2004).

The precise mechanism(s) mediating the expression of SUDs in ADHD remains to be seen. The self-medication hypothesis is compelling in ADHD considering that the disorder is chronic and often associated with demoralization and failure, factors frequently associated with SUDs in adolescents. Moreover, it has been found that among substance-abusing adolescents with and without ADHD, adolescents with ADHD reported using substances more frequently to attenuate their mood and to help them sleep. No evidence of differences in types of substances has emerged between substance-abusing teen-agers with or without ADHD (Biederman et al., 1997). In addition, the potential importance of self-medication needs to be tempered against more systematic data showing the strongest association between ADHD and SUDs is comorbidity and familial contributions, such as exposure to parental SUDs during vulnerable developmental phases.

Diagnosis and Treatment Guidelines

Evaluation and treatment of comorbid ADHD and SUDs should be part of a plan in which consideration is given to all aspects of the teen-ager’s life. Any intervention in this group should follow a careful evaluation of the adolescent including psychiatric, addiction, social, cognitive, educational and family evaluations. A thorough history of substance use should be obtained that includes past and current usage and treatments. Although no specific guidelines exist for evaluating the patient with an active SUD, in my experience at least one month of abstinence is useful in accurately and reliably assessing for ADHD symptoms. Semi-structured psychiatric interviews or validated rating scales of ADHD are invaluable aids for the systematic diagnostic assessments of this group.

The treatment needs of individuals with SUDs and ADHD need to be considered simultaneously; however, the SUD needs to be addressed initially (Riggs, 1998). If the SUD is active, immediate attention needs to be paid to stabilization of the addiction(s). Depending on the severity and duration of the SUD, adolescents may require inpatient treatment. Self-help groups offer a helpful treatment modality for many with SUDs. In tandem with addiction treatment, adolescents with co-occurring SUDs and ADHD require intervention(s) for the ADHD as well as other co-occurring psychiatric disorders.

Medication serves an important role in reducing the symptoms of ADHD and other concurrent psychiatric disorders. Effective agents for adolescents with ADHD include the stimulants, noradrenergic agents and catecholaminergic antidepressants (Wilens et al., 2002). Findings from a meta-analysis of 10 studies of open and controlled trials suggest that medications used in adolescents and adults with ADHD plus SUDs have only a meager effect on the ADHD, but have little effect on substance use or cravings (Riggs et al., 2004; Schubiner et al., 2002; Wilens et al., 2005). Of interest, no evidence exists that treating ADHD pharmacologically through an active SUD exacerbates the SUD. This is consistent with the work of Grabowski et al. (2004), who used stimulants to block cocaine and amphetamine abuse. Also consistent with these findings, earlier work by Volkow et al. (1998) demonstrated significant differences between binding at the dopamine transporter between methylphenidate and cocaine, suggesting a much smaller abuse risk for methylphenidate in contrast to cocaine.

In ADHD adults with SUDs, the nonstimulant agents (atomoxetine [Strattera]), antidepressants (bupropion [Wellbutrin]), and extended-release or longer-acting stimulants with lower abuse liability and diversion potential are preferable (Riggs, 1998). While of particular interest because of the drug’s broad spectrum of activity in ADHD and lack of abuse liability (Heil et al., 2002), results from ongoing trials of atomoxetine in SUDs are not yet available. In individuals with SUDs and ADHD, frequent monitoring of pharmacotherapy should be undertaken–including evaluation of compliance with treatment, use of questionnaires (Gignac et al., 2005), random toxicology screens as indicated, and coordination of care with addiction counselors and other caregivers.

Issues of diversion. Surprisingly, limited information is available on the inappropriate use of stimulants in terms of the magnitude of the problem and the characteristics of misuse in individuals for whom they are prescribed. Musser et al. (1998) surveyed 161 children with ADHD responding to methylphenidate in order to assess diversion. The authors reported that 16% of children had been approached to sell or give away their prescribed medication; however, the actual rates of diversion were not reported. Marsh et al. (2000), using a retrospective review of the medical charts of 240 adolescents with ADHD, reported that 12% had misused their methylphenidate, although the characteristics of those youth were not reported. Poulin (2001) surveyed 13,549 students in grades 7 through 12 and found that 8.5% had used nonprescribed stimulants in the year prior to the survey. Of those students who were receiving prescribed stimulants, 14.7% had given their medications and 7.3% had sold their medication to other students. Similar to other studies, those to whom the stimulants were diverted misused the stimulants in context with other substances of abuse.

Similarly, we recently found that 11% of adolescents and young adults with ADHD diverted (sold) and 22% had misused their stimulants (e.g., escalated dose, used with other substances, became euphoric) (Wilens et al., in press-a). We also found that ADHD individuals with conduct disorder or SUDs accounted for the misuse and diversion and that there appeared to be more misuse and diversion of immediate-release compared to extended-release stimulants (Wilens et al., in press-a).

Summary

There is a strong literature supporting a relationship between ADHD and SUDs. Both family/genetic and self-medication influences may be operational in the development and continuation of SUDs in ADHD. Adolescents with ADHD and SUDs require multimodal interventions incorporating addiction and mental health treatment. Pharmacotherapy in individuals with ADHD and SUDs needs to take into consideration timing, misuse and diversion liability, potential drug interactions, and compliance concerns.

While the existing literature has provided important information on the relationship of ADHD and SUDs, it also points to a number of areas in need of further study. The mechanism by which untreated ADHD leads to SUDs, as well as the risk reduction of ADHD treatment on cigarette smoking and SUDs, needs to be better understood. Given the prevalence and major morbidity and impairment caused by SUDs and ADHD, prevention and treatment strategies for these adolescents need to be further developed and evaluated.

Acknowledgements

This research was supported by National Institutes of Health grants R01 DA14419 and K24 DA016264 to Dr. Wilens.

Dr. Wilens is director of Substance Abuse Services at Massachusetts General Hospital’s Pediatric Psychopharmacology Clinic and associate professor of psychiatry at Harvard Medical School.

References

Anderson JC, Williams S, McGee R, Silva PA (1987), DSM-III disorders in preadolescent children. Prevalence in a large sample from the general population. Arch Gen Psychiatry 44(1):69-76.

Biederman J, Monuteaux M, Mick E et al. (in press-a), Young adult outcome of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder: a controlled 10 year prospective follow-up study. Psychol Med.

Biederman J, Monuteaux M, Mick E et al. (in press-b), Is cigarette smoking a gateway drug to subsequent alcohol and illicit drug use disorders? A controlled study of youths with and without ADHD. Biol Psychiatry.

Biederman J, Wilens T, Mick E et al. (1997), Is ADHD a risk for psychoactive substance use disorder? Findings from a four-year prospective follow-up study. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 36(1):21-29.

Carroll KM, Rounsaville BJ (1993), History and significance of childhood attention deficit disorder in treatment-seeking cocaine abusers. Compr Psychiatry 34(2):75-82.

DeMilio L (1989), Psychiatric syndromes in adolescent substance abusers. Am J Psychiatry 146(9):1212-1214.

Drug Enforcement Administration (1995), Methylphenidate Review Document. Washington, D.C.: Office of Diversion Control, Drug and Chemical Evaluation Section.

Faraone SV, Wilens T (2003), Does stimulant treatment lead to substance use disorders? J Clin Psychiatry 64(suppl 11):9-13.

Gignac M, Wilens TE, Biederman J et al. (2005), Assessing cannabis use in adolescents and young adults: what do urine screen and parental report tell you? J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacol 15(5):742-750.

Grabowski J, Shearer J, Merrill J, Negus SS (2004), Agonist-like, replacement pharmacotherapy for stimulant abuse and dependence. Addict Behav 29(7):1439-1464.

Heil SH, Holmes HW, Bickel WK et al. (2002), Comparison of the subjective, physiological, and psychomotor effects of atomoxetine and methylphenidate in light drug users. Drug Alcohol Depend 67(2):149-156.

Katusic SK, Barbaresi WJ, Colligan RC et al. (2005), Psychostimulant treatment and risk for substance abuse among young adults with a history of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder: a population based, birth cohort study. J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacol 15(5):764-776.

Kessler R (in press), A recent replication of the National Comorbidity Study estimating the prevalence of adult ADHD among persons 18-44 in the US. Psychol Med.

Kessler RC (2004), The epidemiology of dual diagnosis. Biol Psychiatry 56(10):730-737.

Levin FR, Evans SM (2001), Diagnostic and treatment issues in comorbid substance abuse and adult attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Psychiatric Annals 31(5):303-312.

Mannuzza S, Klein RG, Bessler A et al. (1993), Adult outcome of hyperactive boys. Educational achievement, occupational rank, and psychiatric status. Arch Gen Psychiatry 50(7):565-576.

Marsh LD, Kay JD, Payne TP (2000), Methylphenidate misuse in substance abusing adolescents. Journal of Child and Adolescent Substance Abuse 9(3):1-14.

Milberger S, Biederman J, Faraone SV et al. (1997a), ADHD is associated with early initiation of cigarette smoking in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 36(1):37-44.

Milberger S, Biederman J, Faraone SV et al. (1997b), Associations between ADHD and psychoactive substance use disorders. Findings from a longitudinal study of high-risk siblings of ADHD children. Am J Addict 6(4):318-329.

Milin R, Halikas JA, Meller JE, Morse C (1991), Psychopathology among substance abusing juvenile offenders. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 30(4):569-574.

Molina BS, Pelham WE (2003), Childhood predictors of adolescent substance use in a longitudinal study of children with ADHD. J Abnorm Psychol 112(3):497-507.

Monuteaux MC (2004), A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled clinical trial of bupropion for the prevention of smoking in youth with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Presented at the National Cancer Institute’s Tobacco Investigators’ Meeting: Synthesizing Research for the Public’s Health. San Diego; June 2-4.

Musser CJ, Ahmann PA, Theye FW et al. (1998), Stimulant use and potential for abuse in Wisconsin as reported by school administrators and longitudinally followed children. J Dev Behav Pediatr 19(3):187-192.

Poulin C (2001), Medical and nonmedical stimulant use among adolescents: from sanctioned to unsanctioned use. CMAJ 165(8):1039-1044 [see comment].

Riggs PD (1998), Clinical approach to treatment of ADHD in adolescents with substance use disorders and conduct disorder. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 37(3):331-332.

Riggs PD, Hall SK, Mikulich-Gilbertson SK et al. (2004), A randomized controlled trial of pemoline for attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in substance-abusing adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 43(4):420-429.

Schubiner H, Saules KK, Arfken CL et al. (2002), Double-blind placebo-controlled trial of methylphenidate in the treatment of adult ADHD patients with comorbid cocaine dependence. Exp Clin Psychopharmacol 10(3):286-294.

Trauth JA, Seidler FJ, Slotkin TA (2000), Persistent and delayed behavioral changes after nicotine treatment in adolescent rats. Brain Res 880(1-2):167-172.

Vitiello B (2001), Long-term effects of stimulant medications on the brain: possible relevance to the treatment of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacol 11(1):25-34.

Volkow ND, Wang GJ, Fowler JS et al. (1998), Dopamine transporter occupancies in the human brain induced by therapeutic doses of oral methylphenidate. Am J Psychiatry 155(10):1325-1331.

Weiss G (1992), Child and Adolescent Psychiatric Clinics of North America: Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company.

Wilens TE, Biederman J, Spencer TJ (2002), Attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder across the lifespan. Annu Rev Med 53:113-131.

Wilens TE, Faraone SV, Biederman J, Gunawardene S (2003), Does stimulant therapy of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder beget later substance abuse? A meta-analytic review of the literature. Pediatrics 111(1):179-185.

Wilens TE, Gignac M, Swezey A et al. (in press-a), Characteristics of adolescents and young adults with ADHD who divert or misuse their prescribed medications. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry.

Wilens TE, Monuteaux MC, Snyder LE, Moore H (2005), The clinical dilemma of using medications in substance abusing adolescents and adults with ADHD: what does the literature tell us? J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacol 15(5):787-798.

Wilens TE, Verlinden MH, Adler LA et al. (in press-b), ABT-089, a neuronal nicotinic receptor modulator, for the treatment of ADHD in adults: results of a pilot study. Biol Psychiatry.

Source: Psychiatric Times January 2006 Vol. XXV Issue 1
Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

By Janet C. Greenblatt

Introduction

The National Household Survey on Drug Abuse (NHSDA), sponsored by the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA), Department of Health and Human Services, has shown that since 1992, the rate of past month marijuana use among youth has more than doubled, going from 3.4 % in 1992 to 7.1 % in 1996. Similar trends are evident among both boys and girls; among whites, blacks and Hispanics; and in metropolitan and non metropolitan areas (SAMHSA 1997a). Other studies have also shown a doubling of marijuana use between 1992 and 1995 among 8th graders, and significant increases among 10th and 12th graders (NIDA 1997). At the same time, the rate of 12 to 17 year olds perceiving great risk in using marijuana has decreased. In the 1992 NHSDA, 39% of youths reported that smoking marijuana once a month is of great risk to people compared with 33% in 1996. Similarly, in 1992, 64% of youths reported smoking marijuana once or twice a week was of great risk to people compared with 57% in 1996 (SAMHSA 1997b).

The National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA) has reported that marijuana can be harmful both from immediate effects and damage to health over time. Specifically, studies have shown that marijuana can hinder the users’ short term memory and ability to handle difficult tasks (Schwartz et al. 1989). Students may find it difficult to study and learn. While many of the long-term effects of marijuana use are not yet known, studies have shown that daily marijuana smokers who did not use tobacco had more sick days and doctor visits for respiratory problems than a similar group who did not smoke either substance. A person who smokes marijuana regularly may have many of the same respiratory problems that tobacco smokers have (Tashkin et al. 1987). Other studies have shown that the regular use of marijuana may play a role in cancer and problems of the respiratory, immune and reproductive systems. Heavy marijuana use can affect hormones in both males and females. Both animal and human studies have shown that marijuana impairs the ability of T-cells in the lungs’ immune defense system to fight off some infections. Because of the drug’s effects on perceptions and reaction time, users could be involved in automobile accidents (NIDA 1995). According to the 1996 NHSDA, nearly one million 16-18 year olds (11%) reported driving at least once within two hours of using an illicit drug in the past year (most often marijuana) (SAMHSA 1998).

Although it is not yet known how the use of marijuana relates to mental illness, some scientists maintain that regular marijuana use can lead to chronic anxiety, personality disturbances, and depression (NIDA 1995). Some frequent long-term marijuana users show signs of lack of motivation and tend to perform poorly in school (Pope 1996). A recent study demonstrated similarities between marijuana’s effect on the brain and those produced by such addictive drugs as cocaine, heroin, alcohol, and nicotine (Volkow 1996).

There is substantial interest in the co-occurrence in the general population of illicit drug use with other kinds of behavioral patterns, mental syndromes, and psychiatric disorders (Bourden et al. 1992, Kandel et al. 1997, Kessler et al. 1996, SAMHSA 1996). A number of descriptive studies have demonstrated that people who use drugs are more likely to have mental disorders, physical health problems, and family problems (NIDA 1991). In addition, a recent study (Crowley 1998) was conducted with 165 boys and 64 girls between the ages of 13 and 19 who had been referred by social service or criminal justice agencies to a university-based treatment program for delinquent substance-involved adolescents. Based on interviews, medical examinations, social history, and psychological evaluations, the study showed that marijuana use by teenagers who have prior serious antisocial problems can quickly lead to dependence on the drug. Most of the youths reported that their behavioral problems predated, and were not initially caused by, their drug use.

The 1994, 1995, and 1996 NHSDA incorporated the widely used Youth Self-Report (YSR) Checklist which ranks adolescents on a variety of clinically validated scales of behavioral and emotional problem behaviors (Achenbach 1991). In this paper, the relationship between marijuana use among those age 12-17 and various problem measures, as reported on the YSR, is shown. This paper concentrates primarily on the reported frequency of marijuana use and its relationship with self-reported behaviors.

Methods

The NHSDA, currently conducted by SAMHSA, has provided estimates of the prevalence, consequences, and patterns of drug use and abuse in the United States periodically since 1971. It is the primary source of statistical information on the use of illegal drugs by the United States population age 12 and older. The survey collects data by administering questionnaires to a representative sample of persons living in the U.S. (SAMHSA, 1998).

The respondent universe includes residents of non institutional group quarters such as shelters, rooming houses, dormitories and residents of civilian housing on military bases. Persons excluded from the universe include the homeless not found in shelters, residents of institutional quarters, such as jails and hospitals, and active military personnel. The survey employs a multistage area probability sample design that includes over-sampling of young people, African-Americans, and Hispanics. In 1993, 1994, and 1995, cigarette smokers age 18-34 were also over-sampled.

The household interview takes about an hour to complete, and includes a combination of interviewer-administered and self-administered questions. With this procedure, the answers to sensitive questions (such as those on illicit drug use) are recorded on separate answer sheets by the respondent and are not seen by the interviewer. After the answer sheets are completed, they are placed by the respondent in an envelope, which is sealed and mailed with no name or address information included.

A concern of NHSDA data users is that the data are based on self-reports of drug use, and their value depends on respondents’ truthfulness and memory. Although many studies have generally established the validity of self-report data and the NHSDA procedures were designed to encourage honesty and recall, some underreporting may have taken place (Harrell 1986). The methodology used in the NHSDA has been shown to produce more valid results than other self-report methods such as interviews by telephone (Turner et al. 1992). However, comparisons of NHSDA data with data from surveys conducted in classrooms suggest that underreporting of drug use by youths in their homes may be substantial (Gfroerer 1997).

For this study, data from the 1994, 1995, and 1996 NHSDA datasets were combined, dividing the analytic weights by 3 to produce average annual yearly estimates for the combined dataset. Questionnaires and data collection and estimation methodologies were essentially the same in those three years. The household screening completion rate for the 1994-6 surveys was 94%. This study is restricted to those age 12-17. In 1994, 83% of sample persons age 12-17 completed the interview resulting in a sample size of 4,698. The 1995 NHSDA achieved a response rate of 85% for the 4,595 respondents age 12-17; the 1996 response rate was 82 % for a sample size of 4,538. Three-fourths of the interviews (in the combined dataset) among those age 12-17 were completed in complete privacy or with minor distractions.

In 1994, SAMHSA began collecting mental health data on the NHSDA. A youth mental health module for the age group 12-17 was adopted from work by Thomas M. Achenbach and colleagues (1991a) to obtain youths’ reports of their competencies and problems in a standardized format. The module was designed to measure depression, anxiety, social withdrawal, somatic complains, social problems, thought problems, attention problems, delinquent behavior, and aggressive behavior during the past 6 months. Psycho-social problem behaviors in the past 6 months were measured using a module composed of 118 items from the Youth Self-Report (YSR) which has been used extensively in studies of adolescents. Scores that sum up responses to the YSR have been shown to distinguish adolescents typically seen in clinical settings for counselling or psychotherapy from those seldom referred for treatment, in other words, to identify individuals who are likely to have clinically significant levels of functional, cognitive, or emotional problems. For this study, the responses to each of the 118 items were analyzed separately.

Results

Characteristics of Past Year Marijuana Users Age 12-17

Youths were asked how often in the past 12 months they used marijuana (Table 1). The majority of 12, 13, and 14 year olds (64%, 59%, and 52%, respectively) who used marijuana used less often than monthly (1-11 days in the past year) compared with 47% of 15 year olds and 39% of 16-17 year olds. More than 27% of users age 16 to 17 used marijuana 1 to 7 days a week in the past year compared with 12% of 12 year old users and 21-24% of 13-15 year old users.

The teenagers using monthly or more often were more likely to be older (age 16 to 17). The monthly or more often users were also more likely to be male than those who used less frequently. Those who used monthly or more often were more likely than less frequent users to live in the West and to have moved 2 or more times in the past year. The weekly users were 1.7 times more likely than nonusers to be living in other than a 2-parent family (55% and 33% respectively). As the frequency of use increased, the % of 12-17 year olds living in a 2-parent family decreased.

Self-reported Problem Behaviors Associated With Marijuana Use

In completing the YSR, youths were asked to read the list of 118 statements and indicate if the statement was not true, somewhat or sometimes true, or very or often true for them. Although causal conclusions about the relationship between substance use and problems cannot be drawn from the NHSDA data alone, these data provide a useful complement to other studies. While the reported behaviors are not necessarily caused by the use of marijuana or, conversely, the cause of marijuana use, there appears to be a strong positive correlation between the reporting of certain behaviors and reported frequency of marijuana use. The more frequent the use, the more likely the 12-17 year olds were to report problem behaviors.

Withdrawal:

There were 7 measures that comprised the withdrawal category .+ There was a strong correlation between the reporting of withdrawal items and the frequency of reported marijuana use. Those who used marijuana on 1-7 days a week in the past year were nearly twice as likely as non-users to report they refuse to talk (25% vs. 16%), they don’t have much energy (47% vs. 25%), and they are unhappy, sad or depressed (40% vs. 23%). Those who used marijuana at least monthly in the past year reported being more likely than nonusers to say they were secretive or kept things to themselves.

Somatic Complaints:

Those age 12 to 17 who used marijuana in the past year were more likely than nonusers to report feeling dizzy, overtired, and nauseous or sick. There appeared to be little correlation between frequency of marijuana use and certain reported somatic complaints with the more frequent users being as likely as less frequent users to report symptoms such as having headaches, rashes or other skin problems.

Anxiety/Depression:

Those who used marijuana at least once a month in the past year were nearly 3 times as likely as nonusers to say they think about killing themselves (24% vs. 8%). Those who used marijuana in the past year were more likely than nonusers to report that they deliberately try to hurt or kill themselves, feel lonely and that no one loves them, that other people are out to get them, and they are worthless and inferior. For some items, as the frequency of use increased, the % of adolescents reporting these feelings also increased. For example, weekly users were more likely than less frequent users to feel “others are out to get me”, “I am worthless or inferior” or “I am unhappy or sad”.

Social Problems:

Those who used marijuana in the past year were more likely than nonusers to report that they do not get along with other kids and weekly users were nearly twice as likely as nonusers to report this (33% vs 19%) . The weekly users were less likely than nonusers to report they act too young for their age (27% vs. 36%), they prefer younger kids as friends (15% vs. 22%), and they get teased a lot (17% vs. 25%). However, weekly users were more likely than nonusers to say they are not liked by other kids (25% vs. 18%).

Thought Problems:

Past year marijuana users age 12 to 17 were more likely than nonusers to report four thought problems: “I can not get my mind off certain thoughts”, “I repeat certain actions over and over”, “I do things other people think are strange”, and “I have thoughts people would think are strange”. In addition, monthly or more often users were more likely than nonusers to say they see and hear things that other people think are not there.

Attention Problems:

Those who used marijuana in the past year were more likely than nonusers to report they have trouble concentrating (72% vs. 51%), they feel confused or in a fog (41% vs. 24%), they daydream a lot (68% vs. 52%), they act without stopping to think (63% vs. 44%), and their school work is poor (59% vs. 30%) . As before, the % of those reporting attention problems generally increased with frequency of use.

Delinquent Behavior:

Differences of the greatest magnitude between users and nonusers were found in measures of delinquent behavior . Those who used marijuana weekly were 9 times as likely as nonusers to say they use alcohol or drugs for nonmedical purposes (76% vs. 8%), 6 times as likely to say they had run away from home (24% vs. 4%), nearly 6 times as likely to say they had cut classes or skipped school (60% vs. 11%), 5 times as likely to say they stole from places other than home (34% vs. 6%), and 3 times as likely to say they steal at home (17% vs. 5%). Moreover, a higher proportion of past year marijuana users reported these behaviors than did nonusers. Past year users were also more likely than nonusers to report they do not feel guilty after doing something they shouldn’t, they hang around with kids who get into trouble, and they lie and cheat. As noted elsewhere, the proportion saying these statements were somewhat, very or often true about them generally increased with frequency of marijuana use. For example, weekly marijuana users were about twice as likely as those who used fewer than 12 times in the past year to say they had run away from home or they had cut classes or skipped school in the past 6 months.

Aggressive Behavior:

Past year marijuana users were more likely than nonusers to report all aggressive behaviors . For many items, the percentage reporting the behavior increased as frequency of use increased. Weekly users were nearly 4 times as likely as nonusers to report they physically attack people (26% vs. 7%), and 3 times as likely to report they destroy things that belong to others (22% vs. 7%), they threaten to hurt people (38% vs. 13%), and they get in many fights (37% vs. 14%). The weekly users were also twice as likely as nonusers to report they disobey at school (59% vs. 24%) and they destroy their own things (22% vs. 10%). On average, past year marijuana users, regardless of frequency of use, were twice as likely as nonusers to report they destroy things that belong to others, they disobey at school, they get in many fights, and they threaten to hurt people.

Criminal Behavior:

In addition to the YSR module, the NHSDA included questions about some past-year activities that may have been illegal. In each comparison adolescents age 12 to 17 who used marijuana in the past year were 3 or more times more likely than nonusers to report past-year involvement in these activities. Past year marijuana users were more likely than nonusers to report that in the past year, they were on probation, and they had 1) taken something from a store without paying, 2) purposely damaged property that wasn’t theirs, 3) driven under the influence of alcohol or drugs, 4) hurt someone enough to need a bandage, and 5) sold illegal drugs. As before, in most cases, the %age reporting these behavioral problems increased with the frequency of marijuana use. In particular, weekly users of marijuana were more than 5 times as likely as those who used only 1 to 11 times in the past year to have driven under the influence of drugs (29% vs. 4%) or to have sold illegal drugs in the past year (29% vs. 6%). Weekly users were also 2-3 times more likely than those who used less often than monthly to be on probation (20% vs. 7%), to have driven under the influence of alcohol (20% vs. 9%), or to have purposely damaged property that was not theirs (35% vs. 18%).

Conclusion

This report shows that among those age 12-17, past year marijuana users were more likely than nonusers to report problem behaviors in the past 6 months. Further, for the majority of items measured, the more frequent the use, the more likely the youths were to report problem behaviors.

The more frequent users were more likely to be the older youths (6 out of 10 were age 16-17), white, male, to live in a metropolitan area and the West. They were more likely than less frequent users to have moved in the past year and are less likely to live in a 2-parent family. Frequent marijuana users were more likely than less frequent users to report delinquent behaviors such as running away from home, stealing, and cutting classes or skipping school. They were also more likely than less frequent users to report aggressive behaviors such as destroying things that belong to others and physically attacking people. Monthly or more often users were more likely than less frequent users to have driven under the influence of alcohol or drugs or sold illegal drugs in the past year. From a psychological view, youths who used marijuana in the past year reported many behaviors symptomatic of anxiety and depression. Users were 2 to 4 times more likely than nonusers to report they think about killing themselves or that they deliberately try to hurt or kill themselves. They were more likely than nonusers to say they were unhappy, sad or depressed and that they feel “no one loves me”. The users were more likely than nonusers to report that “others are out to get me” and “I am suspicious”.

Regardless of whether the problem behaviors preceded marijuana use or marijuana use preceded the behaviors (which we are not able to ascertain from the NHSDA), it is apparent from these data that the marijuana users are exhibiting many signs of anxiety and depression and exhibiting delinquent and aggressive behaviors far in excess of the nonusers. Further, there appears to be a high correlation between the presence of many of these reported behaviors and the frequency of marijuana use.

These findings strengthen the argument that marijuana is not a benign substance. Not only can it be associated with many destructive and aggressive behaviors, it can also be associated with severe symptoms of anxiety and depression. Longitudinal studies are needed to determine if the symptoms and behaviors preceded the marijuana use or vice versa. Whether this can be determined or not, this report shows the importance of preventing the use of marijuana in youths and the need for treatment for marijuana use in conjunction with treatment for co-morbid mental disorders.

References

1)Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (1997a). Drug Abuse Series: H-3. Preliminary Estimates from the 1996 National Household Survey on Drug Abuse. Office of Applied Studies, July 1997.

2)National Institute on Drug Abuse (1997). Press Release for the Monitoring the Future Study, The University of Michigan Institute for Social Research, December 1997.

3)Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (1997b). 1996 National Household Survey on Drug Abuse: Preliminary Tables (Unpublished). Office of Applied Studies, June 1997.

4)Schwartz, R.H., Gruenewald, P.J., Klitzner, M., and Fedio, P. (1989) Short-term memory impairment in cannabis-dependent adolescents. American J. of Diseases of the Child 1989; 143:1214-1219.

5)Tashkin, D.P., Coulson, A.H., Clark, V.A., et al. Respiratory system and lung function in habitual, heavy smokers of marijuana alone, smokers of marijuana and tobacco, smokers of tobacco alone, and nonsmokers. Am Rev Respir Dis 1987; 135:209-216.

6)National Institute on Drug Abuse (1995) Marijuana: Facts Parents Should know. Booklet NCADI #PHD712, GPO#017-024-01570-0.

7)Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (1998). Drug Abuse Series: H-5. National Household Survey on Drug Abuse Main Findings 1996, Office of Applied Studies, May 1998.

8)Pope, HG Jr, Yurgelun-Todd,D. The residual cognitive effects of heavy marijuana use in college students. JAMA 1996 Feb 21; 275(7): 521-7.

9)Volkow, N.D., Ding, Y.-S., Fowler, J.S., & Wang, G.-J. 1996. Cocaine Addiction: Hypothesis Derived from Imaging Studies with PET. J. Addictive Diseases, 1996.

10)Bourden, H., Rae, D., Narrow, W., Manderscheid, R., and Regier, D., National Prevalence and Treatment of Mental and Addictive Disorders, Mental Health, United States, Center for Mental Health Services, DHHS Pub. No. (SMA)92-1942 (1992).

11)Kandel, D.B., Johnson, J.G., Bird, H.R., Canino, G., Goodman, S.H., Lahey, B.B., Regier, D.A., and Schwab-Stone, M. Psychiatric Disorders Associated with Substance Use Among Children and Adolescents: Findings from the Methods for the Epidemiology of Child and Adolescent Mental Disorders (MECA) Study. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology 1997, 25(2), pp. 121-132.

12)Kessler, R.C., Nelson, C.B., McGongle, K.A., Edlund, M.J., Frank, R.G., and Leaf, P.J., The Epidemiology of Co-occurring Addictive and Mental Disorders in the National ComorbiditySurvey: Implications for Prevention and Service Utilization. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry 66:17-31 (1996).

13)Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (1996). Advance Report 15. Mental Health Estimates from the 1994 National Household Survey on Drug Abuse. Office of Applied Studies, July 1996.

14)Crowley, T (1998). Troubled Teens Risk Rapid Dependence on Marijuana. Drug and Alcohol Dependence 50:1.

15)Achenbach, T.M., (1991) Manual for the youth Self-Report and 1991 profile. Burlington, VT: University of Vermont Department of Psychiatry.

16)Harrell, A.V., Kapsak, K.A., Cisin, I.H., and Wirtz, P.W. (1986). The Validity of Self-Reported Drug Use Data: The Accuracy of Responses on Confidential Self-Administered Answer Sheets. Prepared for the National Institute on Drug Abuse, Contract Number 271-85-8305.

17)Turner, C.F., Lessler, J.T., and Gfroerer, J.C. (1992). Survey Measurement of Drug Use: Methodological Studies. National Institute on Drug Abuse. DHHS Pub No. (ADM) 92-1929..

18)Gfroerer, J.C. (1997). Prevalence of youth substance use: the impact of methodological differences between two national surveys. Drug and Alcohol Dependence 47 (1997) 19-30.

Table 1:Percentage Distribution of Past Year Frequency of Marijuana Use Among Past Year Users by Age, 1994-96

Frequency of Use

Age in Years

 

12

13

14

15

16

17

1-7 Days Week

12.2%

23.6%

20.4%

21.3%

27.2%

28.6%

1-4 Days Month

24.0

16.9

27.2

32.1

34.1

32.8

1-11 Days in Past Year

63.7

59.4

52.4

46.7

38.7

38.6

Total

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

Source:Office of Applied Studies, SAMHSA, National Household Survey on Drug Abuse 

Filed under: Effects of Drugs :

 By Patrick Zickler, NIDA NOTES Staff Writer

Many genetic, biological, and environmental factors can influence whether and when an individual initiates drug abuse or develops drug dependence or addiction. One tool that helps scientists isolate and evaluate the effect of different factors is research on twins, who share many inherited biological traits and environmental influences. In a study of more than 300 pairs of same-sex twins, NIDA-supported investigators found that smoking marijuana before age 17 is linked to a greater likelihood of proceeding to serious problems with marijuana or other drugs.

“This finding underlines the significance of early drug initiation,” says Dr. Wilson Compton, director of NIDA’s Division of Epidemiology, Services and Prevention Research. “Identical twins had the same inherited biological characteristics, and fraternal twins shared half their genes. All the twins had common family influences and social environments. Even though they had so much in common, something influenced one twin to take drugs earlier than the other, and that difference had a profound impact on later experience with drugs.”

The same-sex twin pairs grew up in the same households and attended the same schools. In each pair, one twin smoked marijuana before his or her 17th birthday and the other did not. “When we interviewed the twins as adults, the early users were more than twice as likely to have taken other illicit drugs. They also were from two to five times more likely to move on to abuse or dependence on alcohol, marijuana, stimulants, opioids, or sedatives,” says Dr. Michael Lynskey, who conducted the study with colleagues at the Washington University School of Medicine in St. Louis, Missouri; the Queensland Institute of Medical Research in Brisbane, Australia; and the University of Missouri in Columbia.

The researchers asked both members of 2,765 twin pairs included in the Australian Twin Register if they had ever smoked marijuana and, if so, how old they were when they smoked it for the first time. The researchers identified 311 pairs of same-sex twins (average age 30) in which one twin first smoked marijuana before age 17 and the other twin had either never smoked the drug (77 pairs) or did so for the first time at age 17 or older (234 pairs). Of the 311 twin pairs, 136 (74 female, 62 male) were identical and 175 (84 female, 91 male) were fraternal. The interviews were conducted by phone in Australia and the data analyzed by scientists at Washington University and the University of Missouri.

The investigators defined “use” as drug taking on one or more occasions for a nonmedical reason. The researchers defined “abuse” and “dependence” according to criteria adapted from the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fourth Edition (DSM-IV). Abuse was understood to involve taking the drug in physically hazardous situations or circumstances that interfered with major obligations. According to the DSM-IV criteria, twins described as drug- or alcohol-dependent had two or more of the following symptoms: needing increasingly larger amounts to achieve drug effect, using for longer periods or more frequently than intended, and continuing to use despite associated emotional problems or recurrent desire to cut down use.

Overall, the researchers found, twins who smoked marijuana before age 17 were more than twice as likely as their sibling to use opioids, three times as likely to use sedatives, three times as likely to use cocaine or other stimulants, and nearly four times as likely to use hallucinogens. Those who smoked marijuana before age 17 also were from 1.6 to 6 times as likely to have reported abuse or dependence on alcohol or an illicit drug. Nonetheless, Dr. Lynskey points out, the majority (52 percent) of twins who smoked marijuana before age 17 did not go on to develop abuse or dependence. The increased odds of using other drugs or for developing abuse or dependence were not greater for identical than for fraternal twins, nor for males or females.

“While these study findings indicate that early marijuana use is associated with increased risk of progression to other illicit drug use and possibly to drug abuse or dependence, it is not possible to draw strong causal conclusions solely on the basis of these associations,” Dr. Lynskey cautions. Additional research in other cultures, using a range of research designs, will be needed to determine the causes of the association, he says.

“Given that early initiation of marijuana smoking appears to be associated with increased risks,” says Dr. Lynskey, “there is a need for greater physician awareness of those risks. Focused interventions also are needed to prevent escalation to use of other drugs among young people identified as being at risk.”

Source Lynskey, M.T., et al. Escalation of drug use in early-onset cannabis users vs. co-twin controls. Journal of the American Medical Association 289(4):427-433, 2003. [Full Text] Source: Research Findings Vol. 18, No. 4 (November 2003)

Filed under: Brain and Behaviour,Cannabis/Marijuana :

By LINDA CARROLL

Thirty years ago, scientists linked prenatal alcohol exposure with a perplexing pattern of birth defects including neurological problems, low birth weight, mental retardation and a set of facial malformations.

Up to that time, many doctors had assumed that alcohol was so harmless that it was sometimes administered intravenously to women who were thought to be at risk of losing their pregnancies.

But in recent decades, scientists have discovered that alcohol can be remarkably toxic — more than any other abused drug — to developing fetuses. New research with imaging techniques is helping experts uncover which parts of the developing brain are damaged by alcohol exposure.

By pinpointing the damaged areas, they are beginning to understand the origins of the problem behaviors and learning disabilities linked to alcohol.

Scientists are also homing in on a protein important to the developing brain that is affected by alcohol. It is possible, they say, that a medication can be created to protect the brains of developing fetuses, even if pregnant women cannot quit drinking.

It is not surprising that it has taken researchers so long to tease out the link between alcohol exposure and birth defects. For one thing, the effects of alcohol exposure seem to vary widely.

Some fetuses seem to escape unscathed, even when their mothers drink heavily, while others are severely damaged. No one knows why.

”It’s not like thalidomide, where anyone who took it had an affected child,” said Dr. Sandra W. Jacobson, a professor at Wayne State School of Medicine in Detroit, referring to the morning-sickness drug linked to birth defects in the late 1950’s and early 1960’s. ”There’s a range with alcohol. You might get the full-blown syndrome in 4 out of 100 heavy drinkers.”

There are also many babies who are affected, but not severely enough for the syndrome to be diagnosed. Some with fetal alcohol effects may appear relatively normal but have behavioral problems and learning deficits like those with the syndrome.

Further complicating matters is the question of how much alcohol it takes to cause harm. In the past few years, successive studies have shown an effect at increasingly lower levels. One study, published last year, found a small but significant effect on average in children born to women who consumed just a drink and a half a week.

”We were surprised by this,” said the lead author, Dr. Nancy Day, a professor of psychiatry at the Western Psychiatric Institute and Clinic in Pittsburgh. The women in the study were recruited from a prenatal clinic between May 1983 and July 1985.

”The children were in the normal range of growth,” Dr. Day said, ”but if you compare them to children whose mothers didn’t drink at all, they weighed less, were shorter and had smaller head circumferences.”

The effect of low levels of alcohol appears to be subtle, said Dr. James R. West, head of the department of anatomy and neurobiology at the Texas A&M medical school.

”Perhaps instead of having an I.Q. of 120, you might end up with 115,” he said. ”You might seem perfectly normal, but not have the motor skills to make the high school football team.”

Another factor making it difficult to tease out the impact of alcohol is its widespread effects on the developing brain and body.

”Alcohol is a dirty drug,” Dr. West added. ”It affects a number of different neurotransmitters, and all cells can take it up.” Compare this with cocaine, Dr. West said, which is taken up by only one neurotransmitter.

It is also difficult to identify the effects of alcohol because a woman’s drinking habits seem to make a big difference. Experts say it matters when a pregnant woman drinks, how often she drinks and what her pattern of drinking is: whether she drinks small amounts daily or periodically binges.

Drinking in the first trimester can lead to facial malformations, while in the second it can interrupt nerve formation in the brain, Dr. West said. During the third, it can kill existing neurons and interfere with nervous system development, he added.

Researchers have also determined that babies are more likely to be affected if mothers drink in a binge pattern, like five drinks one day rather than a single drink daily, Dr. Jacobson of Wayne State said.

Because alcohol affects so many sites in the brain, researchers have come to believe that alcohol is far worse for the developing fetus than any other abused drug.

Dr. Jacobson’s study included cocaine users who also used varying quantities of alcohol. ”We found more serious cognitive impairment in relation to alcohol than cocaine or other drugs, including marijuana and smoking,” Dr. Jacobson said.

The damage done to fetuses often has been wrongly connected to cocaine, many experts say.

”The consensus, I think, at this point is that most of the adverse effects that had been reported due to cocaine and crack use were from alcohol use,” said Dr. Kenneth R. Warren, the director of the office of scientific affairs at the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism. ”It is the leading cause of birth defects due to an ingested environmental substance in this country.”

In 1973, researchers coined the phrase fetal alcohol syndrome to describe babies born with a certain pattern of neurologic and physiologic defects related to alcohol exposure in utero.

Early on, it was clear that exposed children were wired differently from normal ones and that they exhibited an array of disabilities.

Dr. Ann P. Streissguth, the director of the fetal alcohol and drug unit at the University of Washington and a professor at the medical school there, ticked off a list: ”These included attention problems, hyperactivity, learning problems — particularly in arithmetic — language problems, memory problems, fine and gross motor problems, poor impulse control, poor judgment, intellectual deficits and difficulty integrating past experience to plan and organize future behavior.”

Researchers wondered whether specific areas of the brain were being consistently harmed by alcohol exposure in utero. Poor judgment, for example, might point to damage to the frontal lobes. The lobes, as the control center of the brain, are involved in planning, organizing and inhibiting inappropriate responses, the researchers say.

Thirty years ago, the only way researchers could learn about the effects of alcohol on the brain was to study children who died shortly after birth.

”We knew from brain autopsies that in severe cases the brains were terribly disorganized,” said Dr. Edward P. Riley, the director of the Center for Behavioral Teratology at San Diego State University. Now, researchers use imaging techniques like M.R.I.’s to look at the damage caused by alcohol. Several recent studies using magnetic resonance imaging have shown damage to the corpus callosum, a band of nerve fibers that connects the left and right sides of the brain.

A report published in 2002 compared the brain scans of adults and children who had severe or mild alcohol-related disabilities with the scans of healthy counterparts. The researchers found that the corpus callosa were abnormally shaped in 80 percent of those who had been exposed to alcohol in utero.

Another study found that the corpus callosum was smaller and shifted forward in children and young adults with the syndrome. Using a technique known as diffusion tensor imaging to look closer at the corpus callosum, researchers at Emory University have seen abnormalities in the myelin, the substance that insulates nerve cells.

When the myelin is damaged, signals do not carry as crisply through the cells, said Dr. Claire D. Coles, director of the Fetal Alcohol Center at the Marcus Institute and a professor of psychiatry and behavioral sciences at Emory.

Another study published in 2002 found that frontal lobe structures were smaller in teenagers and young adults who had been exposed to alcohol prenatally.

By pinpointing which sections of the brain are most likely to be damaged by alcohol, scientists may find a way to block its effects.

Researchers recently recognized that some of alcohol’s effects were similar to those experienced by children born with defects in genes that control L1 adhesion cells. Fetal cells that are destined to grow into the brain and nervous system bind to one another with the help of adhesion molecules like L1, said Dr. Michael E. Charness, an associate professor of neurology at Harvard.

In laboratory experiments, Dr. Charness and his colleagues showed that alcohol could interfere with L1’s stickiness, thus hampering crucial cell-to-cell attachments. In an article published in The Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences in July, they showed that a protein, NAP, could block alcohol’s effect on L1. When NAP was given to mice exposed to alcohol, the protein appeared to stave off neurological effects.

”The idea of giving drugs to pregnant women is controversial,” Dr. Charness said. ”Drugs may have their own risks.”

But, he said, there are areas of the world where fetal alcohol syndrome is a huge problem. In parts of South Africa, the incidence of the syndrome in first graders is around 4.5 percent, he said. ”The rate of drinking is high,” Dr. Charness added. ”And the women won’t stop drinking despite interventions. It might be reasonable to give them a drug that can prevent the more serious effects of alcohol.”

Source: New York Times Nov. 2003

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

Previous studies have demonstrated that the brains of alcoholics are smaller, lighter and “shrunken” when compared to nonalcoholic brains.

Symposium speakers at the October 2004 Congress for the International Society for Biomedical Research on Alcoholism in Mannheim, Germany reviewed what is known about the causes, consequences and clinical implications of alcohol-related brain shrinkage. Proceedings are published in the June issue of Alcoholism: Clinical & Experimental Research.

“The outer layer of brain, also called the cerebral cortex or gray matter, controls most complex mental activities,” explained Clive Harper, symposium organizer and professor of neuropathology at the University of Sydney and Royal Prince Alfred Hospital. “The cortex is filled with nerve cells, also called neurons, that connect by single long fibres to different cortical regions and other neurons deep inside the brain and spinal cord. These nerve fibres make up white matter, which comprises the ‘hard wiring’ of the brain. Most of the fibres are insulated by a material called ‘myelin’ that is similar to the plastic coating around electrical wires. Nerve cells also have shorter and more numerous fibres or processes called dendrites with many fine branching processes – similar to the root system of a tree – that allow them to ‘talk’ with neighbouring neurons, often as many as five to 10,000 at a time.”

Alcohol appears to be particularly damaging to the “white matter” or “hard wiring” of the brain, and can also cause shrinkage or retraction of neuronal dendrites; however, the damage appears to be at least partially reversible with abstinence.

“The aim of this symposium was to bring together scientists from different disciplines to compare results from human and animal studies of the effects of alcohol on the brain,” said Harper. “Our objective was to better understand the mechanisms underlying alcohol’s damage, with the ultimate goal of identifying how to prevent and/or reverse these effects.”

Key presentation highlights were:

A number of toxic, metabolic, and nutritional factors interact in a complex way to cause brain damage in those individuals who abuse or are dependent on alcohol.

“The exact ways in which alcohol damages the brain are uncertain,” said Harper. “It might be that alcohol, or a metabolic byproduct of alcohol such as acetaldehyde, are toxic. Research on malnutrition, a common consequence of poor dietary habits in some alcoholics, indicates that thiamine deficiency can contribute to impaired cognition. Cirrhosis of the liver, also common in alcoholics, is known to cause clinical and structural changes in the brain. In addition, head injury and sleep apnoea are more common in alcoholics and can contribute to brain damage. All of these factors – particularly the alcohol, thiamine deficiency and cirrhosis – are linked and probably contribute in a complex way to cause brain damage.”

Both permanent and transient changes may occur in the alcoholic brain.

“The most important permanent structural change is nerve cell loss,” said Harper. “Some nerve cells cannot be replaced, those in the frontal cortex, cerebellum and several regions deep in the brain.”

However, he added, some changes can be transient, such as the shrinkage of dendrites, those fibers that allow neurons to “talk” with neighbouring neurons. “In experimental animals,” he said, “these have been shown to grow and spread again after periods of abstinence – weeks to months – and have been accompanied by improved brain function. Structural and functional changes seen in cirrhosis of the liver are also potentially reversible if treated. Furthermore, thiamine deficiency can be treated easily with oral or injected thiamine. Patients with acute deficiency respond very quickly but some permanent damage can occur if patients are not treated and particularly if they suffer repeated episodes of the deficiency.”

Combining in vivo brain imaging and animal research allows for an unprecedented examination of underlying mechanisms of damage. “Alcohol dependence follows a longitudinal course,” explained Harper, “from initiation to development of dependence, maintenance, withdrawal, and more often than not, a return to drinking. Throughout this course, the brain undergoes significant biochemical and structural modifications, some for the better and some for the worse, depending on when an individual is studied. Because human alcoholics cannot be forced to drink or not, researchers have no control over when in their course an alcoholic can be studied in the laboratory. By contrast, animal models of alcohol dependence can be exquisitely controlled, in terms of alcohol-exposure amounts, time in development of exposure, withdrawal, nutrition, and the like. When we combine the two approaches, we then have a means of translating knowledge about the change in the condition of the brain from the clinic to the laboratory and back to the clinic.”

Both gene and protein changes can occur in the brains of alcoholics.

“Even after death, tissues can reveal the secrets of diseases,” said Harper. “For this research, brain tissues were obtained, with ethical consent, from autopsies on alcoholic subjects. Scientists used modern molecular techniques to study the control mechanisms (genes) and building blocks (proteins) of the main component of white matter – the myelin. They found that the expression of genes that control the manufacture of structural proteins of the myelin was reduced in the alcoholic cases. In addition, the content of these proteins in the white matter was reduced. These changes likely alter the structure and function of the myelin sheath and ultimately the conduction of nerve impulses.”

It is important for people who abuse alcohol to realize that some of the damage can be reversed.

“Neuropsychological studies have shown that some brain functions improve with abstinence,” said Harper. “Although working memory, postural stability, and visuospatial ability may continue to show impairment for weeks to months with sobriety, with prolonged sobriety these brain functions can show improvement.”

Some alcoholics can achieve long-term abstinence in spite of persistent deficits in decision-making.

“There is accumulating evidence that the generalized inherited vulnerability to alcoholism and other addictions involves abnormalities of the brain systems that process rewards and punishments,” said George Fein, president of and senior scientist at Neurobehavioral Research, Inc., and one of the symposium co-presenters. “People with an inherited vulnerability to addiction, including alcoholism, are much more affected by immediate than delayed rewards. A hallmark of addictive substances is that they provide an immediate reward in the intoxicating experience. When actively drinking, an individual’s inhibition processes become impaired and can further contribute to poor decisions and excessive drinking. With prolonged bouts of drinking, dependence may ensue along with neural systems damage, commonly affecting frontal lobe based systems and their functions, which include decision making, inhibition, problem solving, and judgment. This is part of the dynamic course of alcoholism that likely contributes to its maintenance. In the symposium, [we presented] data showing that alcoholics can surmount these impairments in decision making and evaluation of rewards and punishments to achieve multi-year sobriety.”

Harper praised the symposium’s multi-disciplinary approach to examining alcohol-induced brain damage, calling it critical to solving the puzzle. “The pathologist and neuroradiologist can identify the region of the brain to study, and the molecular biologist can take samples from these regions and look at the genes controlling structure and function and even identify individual proteins that might play a role in cognitive deficits as well as recovery and repair of the brain. Together we can develop strategies for public education and new approaches to therapy in people who use and abuse alcohol. People who abuse alcohol,” he added, “should be informed that some of the brain damage could be reversed.”

Source: news.medical.net June 2005

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

Policy Position Paper #4 Alcohol and Drug Problems Association of North America

Alcohol and other drug dependence is a primary, chronic, progressive and potentially fatal disease. Its effects are systemic, predictable and unique. Without intervention and treatment, the disease runs an inexorable course marked by progressive crippling of mental, physical, and spiritual functioning with a devastating impact on all sectors of life- social, family, financial, vocational, educational, moral/spiritual, and legal.

Drug Addiction is a complex illness. It is characterized by compulsive, at times uncontrollable, drug craving, seeking, and use that persist even in the face of extremely negative consequences. For many people, drug addiction becomes chronic, with relapse possible even after long periods of abstinence.(1)

Alcohol and drug addiction is successfully treatable, and in the domain of public health, subject to prevention measures. Alcohol and drug dependence is not a mental illness or a behavioral health problem. It is a primary disease entity distinct from mental disorders. It should not be trivialized as a behavioral problem arising from personality disorders.

A substantial body of longitudinal studies on the psychological conditions of alcohol and drug dependent people have found that prior to developing alcohol and drug problems the subjects were no more likely to have mental disorders then the general population. (2)

Addictive use of alcohol and other drugs can cause temporary psychological and emotional problems. These problems are the result not the cause of the alcohol and other drug dependence. Mood swings, depression, and other psychological conditions are presented by alcohol and drug dependent people in the throes of their disease, and may become acute in the early withdrawal phase.

These conditions tend to be transitory in nature and are alleviated by a comprehensive abstinence-based regimen of recovery. The scientific literature fails to demonstrate the existence of an “alcoholic” or “addictive” personality in place prior to the onset of alcohol and other drug dependence. (3) A recently reported longitudinal study of 276 individuals entering substance abuse treatment found that, “Subjects recovering from an alcohol use disorder were 16.7 times more likely to recover from their mood/anxiety disorder than subjects who did not recover from their alcohol use disorder. Those recovering from an opioid use disorder were 4.3 times more likely to recover from a mood disorder than subjects who did not recover from an opioid use disorder.” (4) People with pre-existing mental conditions can become alcohol and drug dependent. In these cases, alcohol and other drugs can seriously exacerbate the mental disorders, and conversely, the mental problems can accelerate the progression of the alcohol and drug dependency and impede recovery. This “dually diagnosed” population, those with co-occurring mental disorders and alcohol/drug dependency, is receiving increased attention, and efforts are under way to establish systems offering appropriate treatment for both conditions. (5) Programs for the dually diagnosed require staff trained in both disciplines. Moreover, alcohol and drug dependency in this context is not treated as a symptom of a mental disorder or a secondary psychiatric diagnosis. (6)

The etiology of alcohol and other drug dependence is complex and not yet fully understood. Research increasingly points to biochemical abnormalities in the brain, and other physiological factors, strongly influenced by genetics. (7) Although many mental disorders may have similar origins, alcohol and drug dependency progresses on an independent course to its chronic stages characterized by increasingly destructive use of alcohol and other drugs, which in turn can cause new imbalances in brain chemistry. Unlike mental disorders and most other diseases, the progression stops and remission is achieved by the act of abstention-withdrawing from addicting intoxicating agents. It is the commitment to abstinence that is the unique measure of treatment for alcohol and drug dependence.

Alcohol and other drug dependency is cloaked in a stubborn and perverse stigma that in its worst form rejects even the concept that it is a disease. Rather, it is sometimes portrayed as “willful misconduct,” or the result of defective morals, flawed personalities or weak wills. (8) The stigma attached to illegal drug addiction adds the sinister dimensions of criminality and the entailing social opprobrium. Some aspects of the stigma have been perpetuated by theories and practices that attack the disease concept and maintain that alcoholics can be taught to moderate their drinking. Use of alcohol and other drugs by alcoholics and addicts is portrayed as a matter of personal choice, ignoring the powerful dynamics of addiction. The stigma has the effect of blaming the victims for their disease, and as such works as a barrier to treatment and an impediment to recovery. Additionally, the stigma induced shame interferes with the dependent person and their families ability to engage and succeed in treatment.

The view that alcohol and other drug dependence is a symptom of mental or behavioral disorders contributes to the stigma by promoting the perception that it is not a disease or public health problem in its own right.

Treatment regimens unique to addictions have been developed and refined over the past 50 years. Most models incorporate detoxification, treatment for medical consequences of use, comprehensive assessment, motivational counseling, education about the nature of the disease, family treatment, and group treatment, the core therapeutic vehicle for the recovering addict, Overcoming denial, surrender and readiness to change are treatment goals. Abstinence from alcohol and other addictive drugs is the sine quo non of post treatment success, with after-care focusing on relapse prevention and participation in 12-step and other self-help programs. Recovering alcoholics and addicts participate in the treatment process. As counselors, they are certified on the state and national levels through credentialing mechanisms developed over the past 25 years. The addictions field also pioneered the use of intervention techniques to speed entry into treatment.

The addiction model of treatment differs significantly from the traditional psychiatric model from the defining of the condition to the treatment goal itself. The table  below highlights these differences.

The failure of professionals to recognize the distinctive nature of alcohol and other drug dependence has been a continuing concern of the Alcohol and Drug Problems Association. It leads to the misdiagnosis of patients and treatment in a mental health setting that is not only inappropriate but also potentially harmful. Psychotherapeutic methods that fail to underscore abstinence can delay recovery and potentially result in death.

Professionals in the addictions field believe in the need for clinical separation of their clients from traditional mental health models through the establishment of categorical programs focusing on alcoholism and drug dependence. Before the launching of the Federal alcoholism and drug abuse programs in the early 1970’s, the success of these efforts was limited. Hobbled by sparse public funding and limited third-party reimbursement, a relatively small number of programs offered treatment and rehabilitation to alcoholics and drug dependent people. In the absence of alternatives, alcoholics and drug addicts were admitted to psychiatric wards in state and veterans hospitals for the mentally ill.

The inception of the Federal alcoholism and drug abuse effort, with enactment of legislation by former Sen. Harold Hughes (D-IA), transformed the field with the rich infusion of grant funds for research and for the treatment of alcoholism and drug dependence through categorical programs. The establishment of the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism and the National Institute on Drug Abuse inaugurated a period of rapid proliferation of publicly funded programs and, with expanding insurance coverage for chemical dependency treatment, a vigorous private sector. A new body of treatment professionals arose, trained in the specifics of alcoholism and other drug abuse and dependence. For the first time in history, treatment became accessible to millions of alcoholics and drug addicts.

The Alcohol and Drug Problems Association believes that at present there is a new urgency for the need to safeguard the separate identity of treatment for alcohol and other drug dependence. Short-sighted economics inflicted by managed care practices have decimated the private treatment sector; many residential programs have had to close their doors; while others have been consolidated with mental health units. And purchasers of chemical dependency treatment services for the public sector, including Medicaid, and state, county and local agencies, are increasingly moving to the managed health environment, (ADPA Position Paper # 1). As result of shifting political priorities, publicly supported treatment systems in many states are under funded and unable to fill the treatment vacuum left by retrenchments in the private sector.

Most ominously, behind the drive to cut back on treatment for alcohol and drug dependence, is the unfounded proposition that treatment is ineffective, and if any is provided, it should be in the least costly setting. Yet study after study concludes there are positive results from treatment. (9)

 

Issue Traditional Psychiatric Model Addiction Model
Definition of addiction Symptoms of underlying psychiatric disorder Primary disorder in its own right
Treatment approach Treatment underlying disorder Treatment addiction directly
Referral once addiction discovered To medical model program To primary non-medical model including self-help groups
Attitude toward alcohol use and other drugs Individualized, permissive Absolutely against use, confrontive, total abstinence
Party primarily responsible for treatment The professional The patient
Role of trust Important from early stages Usually not attainable for months or longer
Admission criteria Usually open Usually selective
Role of psychoactive medication Necessary for some underlying disorders; can be transitional substitute for alcohol Limited to detoxification and deterrence (eg., disulfiram); further use may reinforce substance abuse
Role of family in treatment Variable Usually routine
Role of self-help groups Variable, viewed as Superficial Usually encouraged or required
Third-party involvement (eg., legal, employer) Viewed as intrusive Often arranged to aid treatment
Surveillance for compliance Shunned, violates trust Monitoring of disulfiarm, Breathalyzer checks for drinking, urinalysis checks for other drugs, often arranged
Coercion (eg., legal) Last resort, interpreted as sign of failure Frequently seen as useful
Treatment goals ° Cure (acute disorder), maintenance (Chronic disorder) Rehabilitation, implying long- term work to maintain gains long-term work to maintain gains

 

Another development with threatening implications for the integrity of alcohol and drug dependency treatment has been a debasement of the diagnostic terminology. The term, “disease” has given way to the “disorder” of psychiatric coinage, and drug dependence is being placed under the crowded tent of “behavioral health.”

Behaviorists try to teach “responsible drinking,” with the unmistakable connotation that addictive drinking is “irresponsible.” “Harm reduction” is used as a guise for programs that give up on the need for abstinence. The shifting lexicon serves to blur the very substantial differences between alcohol and other drug dependence, and mental/behavioral problems.

ADPA’s paramount concern is the welfare of the suffering alcoholics and addicts in need of appropriate treatment by trained professionals and in chemical dependency programs geared specifically to address their primary diagnosis. Only these models, with proven track records, can offer hope of recovery and a life free from the consequences of alcoholism and drug dependence.

ADPA believes that public policy advocacy must be redoubled to preserve the integrity of treatment for alcohol and other drug dependence.

Of immediate concern is slippage at the state and local government levels where alcohol and drug dependency is at increasing risk of losing its bureaucratic visibility. When units with responsibility for alcohol and drug treatment programs are subsumed in low echelons under mental health, social services, or other departments, the focal point for advocacy is weakened or lost. The constituency of professionals and volunteers who serve as advocates for the alcohol and drug dependent are in danger of fragmentation.

Agencies charged specifically with programs for alcohol and drug dependency should have their discrete offices for training, communications, budgets, and other public policy functions. Alcohol and drug specialists need to be in a position to influence funding, programmatic, and personnel standards. Because of the pervasive nature of alcohol and other drug dependence, the agency, wherever it is located, must be able to impact policy across a wide range of health and human needs in the domain of departments staffed by personnel not trained to identify the problem. At the local level, where the bureaucratic structure tends to mirror that of the state, there is a critical need to retain control of clinical supervision, case decisions, and treatment protocols.

The Alcohol and Drug Problems Association believes that alcohol and drug dependence is a public health problem of major proportions costing society tens of billions of dollars in economic production, law enforcement, social services, health care and other areas. It exacts a terrible toll in terms of shattered lives of suffering alcoholics and addicts and their families. As such, when government at any level addresses alcohol and drug dependence, responsibility should be assigned to an agency of the highest visibility and independence where aggressive efforts can be mounted commensurate with the enormous dimensions of the problem. This was the inspired purpose of the Hughes Act programs 25-30 years ago, providing access to recovery for millions of alcoholics and addicts. A rededication to the spirit that moved those times may be needed to reestablish the powerful prevention and treatment impact from such organizational arrangements.

FOOTNOTE

1. National Institute on Drug Abuse “Principles of Drug Addiction Treatment, A Research Based C71lide,” NIH pub, No. 99-4181), October 1999.

2, Mark Schuckit. “Educating Yourself About Alcohol and Drugs! A People’s Primer” New York, 1995, “The conclusion from all these studies is basically the same. There is no evidence that people who later develop severe alcohol and drug problems are not more likely than others in the general population to have had severe depression, severe anxiety conditions, or psychotic conditions prior to the development of their alcohol and drug disorder.”

3. T George Verheal, Director of the Study of Adult Development, Harvard Medical School. and author of the 1983 milestone book, “The Natural History of Alcoholism,” is quoted in the March-April, 1999, issue of Harvard Magazine. “The addictive personality probably doesn’t exist…addictions tend to distort personalities. You can’t predict this. Alcoholics look like everyone else until they become alcoholics, much as cigarette smokers do,”

4. Rael Verheal, “Journal of Studies Alcohol,” January 2000, pp 101-1 10.

5. Paper from the “National Dialogue on Co-occurring Mental health and Substance Abuse Disorders,” June 16-17, 1998, Washington, DC, sponsored by the National Association of State Mental Health Program Directors and the National Association of State Alcohol and Drug Abuse Directors, and supported by the Center for Substance Abuse Treatment and the Mental Health Services Administration, Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration. The Executive Summary states the following: “Estimates suggest that up to 10 million people in this country have a combination of at least one co-occurring mental health and substance-related disorder in any given year. There is no single locus of responsibility for people with co-occurring disorders. The mental health and substance abuse treatment systems operate independently of one another, as separate cultures, each with its own treatment philosophies, administrative structures and funding mechanisms. This lack of coordination means that neither consumers nor providers move easily among service settings.”

6. “The Counselor,” The National Association of Alcoholism and Drug Abuse Counselors, January- February 2000. Connecticut on Jan.1 adopted two levels of credentialing alcohol/drug counselors restated to treatment of co-occurring mental disorders a-ad alcohol and drug dependence.

7. “Beyond the Influence – Understanding and Defeating Alcoholism,” by Katherine Ketcham and William F. Asbury with Mel Schulstad and Arthur P. Ciararnicoli, Ed-Ph-D., Bantam Books 2000, summarizes this research and offers the following definition of alcoholism: “Alcoholism is a progressive neurological disease strongly influenced by genetic vulnerability. Inherited or acquired abnormalities in brain chemistry create an altered response to alcohol which in turn causes a wide array of physical, psychological, and behavioral problems. Although environmental and social factors will influence the progression and expression of the disease, they are not in any sense causes of addictive drinking. Alcoholism is caused by biochemical/neuropsychological abnormalities that are passed down from one generation to the next or, in some cases, acquired through heavy or prolonged drinking.”

8. In April 1998, the Supreme Court, in a case brought by two veterans seeking disability benefits for alcoholism from the Department of Veterans Affairs, ruled that alcoholism was the result of “willful misconduct.” The decision cited a “substantial body” of literature contesting the concept that alcoholism is a disease “much less a disease for which the victim bears no responsibility.” The DVA recognizes alcoholism as a disability only when there is a primary psychiatric diagnosis.

9. National Institute on Drug Abuse “Principles of Drug Addiction Treatment, A Research Based Guide,” NIH Pub. No. 99-4 1 80, October 1999.

Filed under: Effects of Drugs (Papers) :

Marijuana use leads to difficulty in concentrating and thinking. It also decreases the user ability to memorize things. (1—4). In addition, user’s of marijuana have an increased tendency to ‘remember’ things that did not happen. (5,6) Most marijuana users do not realize that these effects of marijuana on mental ability persist for up to 6 hours after the last use of the drug. The user may not feel high, but his reaction times are slower and memory skills are decreased. These changes can decrease ability in sports, other physical activities, and in studies.

Marijuana may be more detrimental to memory function than is alcohol or cocaine. (7) This effect may be due to the presence of cannabinoid receptor sites (activation of these receptors interrupts normal brain motor and cognitive function) in the areas of the brain which control memory.
(8,9)

The results of a 1992 study of 48 adult male subjects who smoked marijuana then completed standardized, paper—and—pencil tests of educational development and ability, learning, associative processes, abstraction, and psychomotor performance indicate that all capabilities were impaired except abstraction and vocabulary. (10,11)

Referenses:
1. Andreasson S, Allebeck et al. Cannabis and schizophrenia; A longitudinal study of Swedish conscripts. Lancet 1987 Dec 26; :2483—6.
2. Schwartz RH. Heavy marijuana use and recent memory impairment. Psychiatric Annals 2992 Feb;21(2) :80—2.
3. Abood ME, Martin BR. Neurobiology of marijuana abuse. Trends In Pharmacological Sciences 1992 May; 13(5) :201—6.
4. Nahas G, Latour C. The human toxicity of marijuana. Medical Journal Of Australia 1992 Apr 6;156(7) :495-7
5. Pfefferbaum A, Darley CF, Tinklenberg JR, Roth NT, Kopell BS. Marijuana and memory intrusions. J Nerv Ment Dis
1977;l65(6) :381—6.
6. Block RI, Wittenborn JR. Marijuana effects on associative processes. Psychopharmacol 1985;85:426—30.
7. Brown J, Kranzler HR. Delboca FK. Self—reports by alcohol and drug abuse inpatients — factors affecting reliability and validity. British Journal Of Addiction 1992 Jul;87(7) :10]3—24.
8. Matsuda LA, Bonner TI, Lolait SJ. Localization of cannabinoid receptor messenger RNA in rat brain. Journal of Comparative Neurology 1993 Jan 22;327(4) :535—50.
9. Heyser CJ, Hampson RE, Deadwyler SA. Effects of delta—9—tetrahydrocannabinol on delayed match to sample performance in rats — alterations in short—term memory associated with changes in task specific firing of hippocampal cells. Journal Of Pharmacology And Experimental Therapeutics 1993 Jan;264 (1) 294-307.
10. Block RI, Farinpour 1k, Braverman K. Acute effects of marijuana on cognition — relationships to chronic effects and smoking techniques. Pharmacology Biochemistry And Behavior 2992 Nov;43(3) :907—17.
11. Azorlosa JL, Heishman SJ, Stitzer ML, Mahaffey JM. Marijuana smoking — effect of varying delta—9—tetrahydrocannabinol content and number of puffs. Journal Of Pharmacology.

Source:www.cesar.umd.edu/metnet, Nov 1998

Filed under: Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth,Education :

COMMENTS by Mary Brett

Tackling Drugs To Build a Better Britain, 1998, had prevention as its priority, as did the previous, Tackling Drugs Together. So, in fact does the latest, Updated Drug Strategy, 2002. In David Blunkett’s foreward to this 2002 version, he lists prevention, education, harm minimization, treatment and effective policing as our most powerful tools. He ends with, “Future generations should never have to face the dangers and harm that drugs present to too many of our young people, their families and their communities today.”
The 2002 strategy talks about a stronger focus on education, prevention, enforcement and treatment to prevent and tackle problematic drug use, and aims to persuade all potential users, but particularly the young, not to use drugs. This, it says can be done by maintaining prohibition, which deters use, and by providing education and support.

I expected to find the word prevention or similar in 2.1, “Aim of drug education”.
I didn’t! I know that parents assume that drug education in schools is doing everything it can to strongly encourage their children to resist the use of all illegal drugs. Sadly many will find this is not the case. Why is this not the first aim of drug education? Nowhere in this section does it even hint that to resist drug use might be a good idea. Tobacco and alcohol ought to be mentioned at this point. The use of tobacco should be strongly discouraged, and information given about the sensible use and safe limits of alcohol.

Unfortunately, for the past fifteen years or so, the philosophy of harm reduction has been hi-jacked by most drug educators. Their view is, “kids will take drugs anyway, they must be told how to take them safely, and we must give them informed choices.” Apart from the fact that currently they do not receive true, accurate and reliable information about some of the drugs, especially cannabis (more on this later), there should be no choice – drugs are illegal. Do we let them choose to break the law by speeding or petty pilfering?

By no means do all kids use drugs. Maybe 30% to 40% do try them, but most give up after a puff or two. The vast majority, well over 80%, will never become regular or even occasional users. And as for safety, there is no guaranteed safe way to take any drug, including those on prescription.

Harm minimization, or the more usual term, harm reduction, has its proper place in dealing with known users, who already have drug problems, providing effective treatment and rehabilitation to break the cycle of dependence, while minimizing the harm that drugs can cause. Heroin users can be encouraged to “chase the dragon” (inhale the smoke), rather than inject, thus avoiding the blood-borne diseases.

I thought I might find the phrase “informed choice” somewhere, and I did, but I was more than surprised to find it in the section, 2.20, on Ofsted inspections for primary schools!
I would challenge anyone to convince me that children of seven to eleven have the necessary maturity and experience of life to be able to make an “informed choice”. Some of my sixth form boys lack this skill at seventeen! Recent research indicates that the brain does not fully develop till the mid-twenties, a lot later than previously thought.
At least in this section it does say, “helping them to develop and practice personal skills e.g. resistance skills”.

This government relies heavily, almost totally, on the charity Drugscope for its advice and information, and so, apparently does the DfES. It is an amalgamation of two previous charities, SCODA (Standing Conference on Drug Abuse), and ISDD (Institute for the Study of Drug Dependence). Literature from SCODA is quoted, The Right Choice, The Right Approaches and The Right Responses. On the covers we see a small logo with the words, “Good practice in drug education and prevention”, but inside we read, “ SCODA seeks to reduce the harmful effects of drug use through informed debate”. SCODA long ago abandoned any pretence at advocating primary prevention, they sometimes use the phrase “secondary prevention”, and say it is when children have already started to use. Anything after primary prevention, (stopping them from starting in the first place), is intervention and harm reduction. Even the DfEE Drug Prevention and Schools Circular, 4/95, also quoted, refers to “secondary prevention”. Pre-event, I would have thought, is quite clear in its meaning. Likewise the DfEE’s Protecting Young People, 1998, although emphasizing the aim of trying to encourage children to resist drug use, points drug educators in the direction of SCODA for resources.

 On page five of The Right Responses, 1999, it says, “Research indicates that drug education and prevention strategies are not able to prevent experimental use. There is growing evidence, however, of effective strategies which can reduce the misuse of drugs and the associated problems for young people, their families and their communities.” This is quite simply not true. The huge prevention campaign in the USA from 1979 to 1991 saw a 60% drop in drug use. Cannabis and cocaine use fell by fifty per cent. Twenty three million drug addicts fell to fourteen million. They then unfortunately, thinking the problem had been solved, took their eyes off the ball, and usage soared. A similar campaign is currently taking place there under the new drug tsar, John Walters, and once again drug use is falling. The Swedes have had excellent prevention programmes in place for many years, their level of drug use is around 2% to 3%. I have yet to find a harm reduction programme that matches these results.

I attended a session of the Home Affairs Select Committee (HASC) in March 2003, when Bob Ainsworth, the government spokesman on drugs was giving evidence. He talked constantly about harm reduction, and when questioned what he was doing about preventing young people from starting in the first place, he became hesitant and evasive. He said the government was doing lots of things, and when pressed, assured the MP, the Lib-Dem, Bob Russell, that the HASC was not going down the legalization route. Do politicians ever give straight answers to questions?

Children actually need rules and regulations, the only way they feel safe and secure is if they have boundaries to kick against. They have very little time for teachers who cannot control their classes. They often use their parents as an excuse when they want to get out of an activity with which they don’t feel comfortable. “Dad/Mum would kill me” is a phrase I often overhear. Ex-pupils who come back to see me are often the ones I have had to discipline most severely.
In The Right Choice, 1998, shock tactics are dismissed as lacking credibility and even glamourising drug use. Strangely enough it is claimed that “Just say no” falls into this category. In an English essay, set by one of my colleagues to year ten pupils, about what would put them off taking drugs, the commonest request was for accurate information on the harm they cause, but a surprising number said that shocking stories had a part to play. I never actually say, “Just say no” to my pupils, but I find that, if I give them the accurate, unexaggerated scientific facts about drugs and how they affect the body, add to that the adverse social, educational, emotional and family consequences of that way of life, spend some time discussing the various arguments surrounding drugs, and point out the employment potential of a drug user, most of them are deterred. I know, I get lots of feed-back. “Anyone would be mad to take drugs after that talk this morning”, was one of the comments overheard after my annual address to year twelve boys, reminding them of the dangers of cannabis. Earlier in their school career they have had sessions on self-esteem, peer-group pressure and other life skills, as well as being told of the dangers.

A few years ago, a former pupil came to see me. Having been a cannabis user, he had just managed to scrape into university with C and D grades. He was in his final year of a degree in pharmacology and wanted my help to write his dissertation on cannabis. I asked him what had stopped him. He looked surprised. “You did”, he said. “I could quote every word you ever said about cannabis, and all of it came true”. He also managed to stop some of his friends.

He got a first for his dissertation, spent a year as a technician with a friend of mine, a toxicologist, did an MSc in neurology, and is now researching brain diseases towards a PhD thesis.

“Harm minimization, on the other hand”, The Right Choice says, “reflects the reality that many young people use both legal and illegal substances ………… Those who advocate this approach acknowledge the importance of young drug users being aware of the risks associated with drug use, and aim to equip them with the knowledge and understanding that seeks to minimize them.” I reiterate, the vast majority of children do not use drugs.

Alcohol, of course is a different case entirely, section 2.5.1. Because it is a legal and widely used drug which can be consumed quite safely in moderation, harm reduction is perfectly acceptable. I would, however emphasise the need for a warning of the danger of overdose and death. Many children are surprised when told it can kill.

I have never understood why it is acceptable to be very tough and even authoritarian about tobacco and not about illegal drugs, section 2.5.2. “Discussions should make it clear that smoking is a minority habit”. So is regular drug taking. It is even more of a minority habit than smoking! “Opportunities to develop refusal skills are important”. They are even more important with illegal drugs but the guidance seems afraid to spell this out. “The question of smoking cessation should be addressed”. Of course it should!

Why does the emphasis shift when legal drugs are being discussed? I tell my pupils that they would be crazy to start smoking, but then I say the same thing about drugs. When you think about it, tobacco doesn’t cause the mental illnesses that cannabis does, nor does it stop you from concentrating and learning in class.

The word “prohibit” is used in this section in relation to members of staff. Prohibition is a dirty word with the pro-legalisation advocates. Just for the record, prohibition in the USA did work, at least in terms of health and economics. Cases of cirrhosis of the liver fell by one third, alcohol-related divorce, child neglect and juvenile delinquency in Massachusettes all dropped by fifty per cent. The overall murder rate surprisingly declined, and the incidence of psychosis caused by alcohol plummeted.

The problems arose because the use and purchase of alcohol were never outlawed, it was only the manufacture and supply. A huge loophole was its prescription for “medicinal purposes”. Also, at that time, an attempt was made to ban a legal substance that had been in use by most of the population for hundreds of years and which could be consumed without harm. Unlike cannabis: still only used regularly by a tiny minority, shunned by most people, and with no safe limits.

One of the most consistent characteristics of harm reduction advocates is the trivialization of the effects of cannabis. Drugscope has constantly stated that cannabis is not physically addictive. This is not true, and a quick look at the abundant research on this topic would show otherwise. Most drug education advice currently is at great pains to point out that “accurate and balanced facts” must be given, I wish they were! And they should not aim to “shock or horrify”. But drugs can and do do shocking and horrible things to people.

I personally know six people with young relatives who have developed cannabis psychosis and will probably never be truly well again. Psychiatrists will confirm that more and more hospital beds are now being occupied by young people suffering from psychosis or schizophrenia because of their cannabis use. Youngsters using tobacco, cannabis and alcohol have a twenty-six fold increase in their risk of suffering from depression. And Professor Robin Murray told a meeting of The Royal College of Psychiatrists in June 2003 that eighty per cent of the patients he assesses with their first psychotic episode have been using cannabis. He said, “The more cannabis that’s consumed, the more psychiatrists we are going to need”. A recent survey in New Zealand found that young male cannabis users were five times more likely to be violent than non-users. The risk for alcohol was only three times.

Cannabis smoke deposits three to four times as much tar in our airways than cigarette smoke, and causes rare head and neck cancers in young people, not seen in tobacco users till they reach the age of sixty and over. The British Lung Foundation has recently given a warning to young people. Lungs shot through with holes, and people of thirty waiting for transplants are all part of the sorry saga. The risk of a heart attack in middle aged users rises five-fold in the hour following the smoking of a joint.

Babies born to cannabis-using mothers are smaller and suffer from behaviour and learning problems as they grow up. Sperm counts are reduced, and cases of sterility and impotence have been reported. The immune system does not escape either, it is also badly impaired. THC interferes with the copying of DNA into new cells made in the body.

Vehicle accidents, as many as those caused by alcohol in some studies, have been documented in America, although nine to ten times as many people drink. Since the fat-soluble THC (tetrahydrocannabinol), the substance that gives the “high”, stays in the body for weeks, 50% is still there after a week, and 10% a month later, a person smoking a joint today should not be driving for at least twenty-four hours afterwards. This “clogging up” of the cell membranes by THC may even cause some brain cells to die. Brain cells are not replaced. Permanent brain damage is too high a price to pay.

Concentration, learning and memory are all adversely affected, causing pupils’ grades to fall. Often they miss out on university places. Even on one joint a month, a cannabis personality develops. Children become inflexible, fixed in their opinions and answers, can’t listen to reason, can’t plan their day or work out problems. Few children using cannabis even occasionally will achieve their full potential.

And cannabis can act as a gateway drug. Numerous studies in the USA, New Zealand, and the latest, using twins from Australia, confirm the trend. Of course not all of them will progress to more dangerous drugs, but almost 100% of heroin users started on cannabis.

The cannabis of today is at least ten times stronger than it was in the sixties, and skunk and nederweed, varieties specially bred in Holland, have THC contents of anything from 9% to 27%, up from the 0.5% of forty years ago. Today’s cannabis is a totally different drug.

Is all of this not shocking? The Drugscope website contains very few of these facts. There is no mention of effects on the heart, the immune system, reproductive system, long-term storage or increased strength of THC. Conclusive proof is demanded. We still have no conclusive proof that cigarettes cause lung cancer, but because of animal experiments and statistical evidence, we accept the link. Why is it different with cannabis? One of the booklets about cannabis, distributed by Drugscope, shows a picture of two young chaps in a field of cannabis plants, one of them is wearing a cap with the logo, “Have fun, take care”. What sort of message does that send to our impressionable offspring?

Unless Drugscope and other similar charities get their acts together and up-date their information to give our youngsters what they deserve, advanced warning of the true hazards of this insidious drug, then our children are being betrayed. No wonder there is a disclaimer about information on their website. How can our children “ make sensible informed choices” when they are not properly informed? They should be encouraged to access scientific papers and books to get the real picture.

This guidance is full of statements like, “accurate information”, section 2.1, “real dangers”, section 2.2, and “credible information which does not exaggerate but clearly explains the dangers of drugs ….”  If only this were true!
Drugscope does not want people in possession of small quantities of drugs to be arrested – any drugs! They enthusiastically endorsed David Blunkett’s proposal to down-grade cannabis from class B to C. An absolute disaster waiting to happen! The number of young boys using cannabis has jumped 50% from 19% to 29% since his ill-advised announcement. In May 2003, on radio four, Roger Howard, chief executive of Drugscope, advocated the re-classification of LSD and Ecstasy as well as cannabis.

In the Department of Health’s “The Dangerousness of drugs”, the information on cannabis is much better than that of Drugscope, if only teachers have time to access it. However it falls short in some respects e.g. the fact that THC stays so long in the body is not spelled out and no mention is made of the increased strength today. In the driving section, no warning is given of the long-lasting impairment of skills, and the dependence potential is played down. The possibility of people becoming violent is omitted, and in spite of the many studies on children born to cannabis-using mothers, the results are questioned, even those that have consistently found the weight of these babies to be reduced.

Turning to the reclassification proposal, section 2.5.3, the assertion that cannabis is less harmful than drugs like amphetamines is debatable. Amphetamines, unlike cannabis, disappear from the body within forty-eight hours, so don’t have the long-term effects on concentration, learning, memory and therefore academic performance. Nor do they cause cancers since smoking isn’t involved. The immune system is not impaired. Both drugs are associated with heart attacks, confusion, depression, aggression, psychosis and paranoia, but I have never read that amphetamines can trigger schizophrenia. Nor have I seen evidence of them adversely affecting the foetus.

Children want lessons from people who know what they are talking about, section 2.2, I could not agree more. But many teachers in charge of drug education are not biologists. A good number are RE staff. When they receive drugs literature in school, they must naturally assume it is reliable and trustworthy. Teachers are busy people and will use worksheets if they are provided. One of the worst I have seen is entitled “Absolutely Spliffing”.  Messages again! Another has a table to be filled in, signed by S.P.Liff!

The various games, debates and activities suggested in the guidance, section 2.9.3, are useless without the true facts being known. I have never been a great advocate of playing games to get over the point about drugs. One book, giving guidance on drug education, suggests using syringes, foil, matches, cigarette papers and drink bottles. This leaves me feeling distinctly uneasy. Debates are excellent vehicles for an exchange of views, but when the sources of information recommended to them are heavily biased, then the whole exercise is badly flawed.

Connexions, the organization now responsible for distributing information to schools on various subjects, including drugs, is obviously mentioned. I recently had cause to complain strongly about some of the drug leaflets they sent out. They were written by the “Clued-Up Posse”, a group of kids from Fife. Not surprisingly they had very little information in them, were written in “trendy” language and had masses of advice on harm reduction. My sixth form thought they were useless, patronizing, and positively encouraged drug use. They pointed out to me that the cannabis one was a replica of a Rizla packet. Again, what message does that send out? In my view this is totally irresponsible and one MP has tabled a written question for me. I await the reply.

The Department of Health is not above blame either. In a recent poster sent to school offering a list of resources, the charity Lifeline was given. When I gave oral evidence to the HASC on cannabis in January 2002, I showed them some of Lifeline’s publications. “How a joint is rolled”, a set of diagrams in their cannabis leaflet, “Don’t get caught in the first place”, advice to children on how to survive their parents finding out they are using drugs, and a hint not to use an old LP record to place their cocaine on as it gets wasted in the grooves, are just some of the “gems” of advice from this charity. Their “street-wise” literature is full of sexually explicit cartoons and four-letter words.

To give them their due, the committee was collectively shocked, they have launched an investigation, particularly into the funding, which comes mostly from local health authorities and central government. The reply to my MPs question as to whether they would withdraw the poster was that they had no plans to withdraw it and would have no reason to do so.

QCA literature is also recommended. I recently wrote a criticism of their 2003 guidelines on tobacco, drug and alcohol education. My comments were very similar to these ones.

National Helplines, section 2.23, do not always help! I have lost count of the number of  parents who have contacted me because the advice is, “Don’t worry, it’s only cannabis” These desperate people know full well what is happening to their children and they are frantically looking for information about the drug that fits in with their experiences. Most recently, a despairing mother rang me. She had been trying to get someone to listen for six years, and I was the first person who had actually related to her problems.

On November 28th, 2002, 14 of us gave papers on cannabis in The Moses Room in The House of Lords. The Conference, entitled Cannabis – A Cause for Concern? was chaired by Lord David Alton. Seven other people gave testimonies, among them a young girl, a non-user. She said, “—-you adults have to say that you care, that you feel strongly about what we do – don’t leave it as a choice. If you don’t want us to do drugs then say so – and say why. You don’t ask us to choose whether to steal, or to attack people, so why leave us to choose about drugs”?  It was like a breath of fresh air.

Prevention has always been better than cure and always will be. We have massive prevention campaigns for drink-driving, breast cancer, heart disease and so on. Why on earth can we not see that preventing drug use must be our greatest priority.

Mary Brett, Biology teacher and Head of Health Education,
Dr. Challoner’s Grammar School, Amersham, Bucks. HP6 5HA.           4th July 2003
Filed under: Education Sector (Papers) :

Nagged once more by her computer, leading journalist Melanie Phillips checked her email.  The inbox was full again; an unprecedented influx, and all caused by one Sunday Times column that week (Phillips, January 2000).  The theme was ‘Britain is quietly turning into a drug culture’.

Feedback in the following Sunday’s letters page was numerically balanced, two for and two against.  In contrast Melanie’s inbox had at first been flooded with supportive mail from professional and lay sources alike, but as the week ran on the antagonism quotient rose, with one peculiar characteristic – an uncanny similarity in the phrasing in many letters ………Phillips took a broad view of the scene – unavoidable if one is to have any chance of reaching a balanced measure of this convoluted subject.  Parents, police, politicians, pushers, promoters of law relaxation – all these and more were addressed.  But of all the sectors to come under the author’s microscope, the one which provoked the most anguished outcry in the subsequent Letters page was, as might have been expected, education.

Phillips voiced the concerns of many professional observers of the drug education when she addressed the

‘…false claim that there is such a thing as responsible and safe drug-taking.  This belief has taken firm hold in Britain and is behind the shift that has taken place from prevention to ‘‘harm reduction’’. Clearly, there’s a place for harm reduction in treating individual addicts; but the idea that drug-taking can be made safe is utterly wrong.  There’s no such thing as a harm-free drug.  Yet drug ‘education’ is all about telling the young how to take drugs ‘safely’. Such classroom materials normalise and encourage drug use, while providing minimal information on harm …’

In response, one letter (Towe, 2000) spoke of how drug education ‘… far from telling them ‘how to take drugs safely’ … focuses on encouraging them to make responsible choices’  The letter went on to deny having ‘… given up the struggle and (thus) … being content to ‘normalise’ drug use among young people …’; an assertion which the writer found ‘… deeply demoralising to the many conscientious teachers and youth workers who deal with this issue on a daily basis.  (emphases added).

This exchange goes to the heart of the conflict around drug education, and thence the wider subject of drug prevention, not just in Britain but in several countries.  There is, in truth, a war about the ‘war on drugs’ – how should it be conducted and with what goals.  In this context the letter reacting to Melanie Phillips article is more revealing than perhaps the writer intended.

The Drug Education Forum, of which the letter writer is the current Chair, started out with a mission statement mirroring the National Drug Strategy, in seeking to develop young people’s skills and attitudes so that they ‘… can make informed decisions to resist drug misuse …’ (emphasis added).  But by some two years later – in mid 1997 – the mission statement was modified, by deleting the last four words (as emphasised above).

To the casual observer, or even the less than awake worker in the field, this might seem an innocuous change.  Far from it; this change meant that drug education should now serve any decision – to avoid drugs, or to use them.  Indeed, as the Forum has subsequently said, they would expect education to support ‘… the values inherent in informed choices …’ including ‘…the choice to use drugs …’ by giving ‘… information about ways they can do this as safely as possible …’ (emphases added).  Two years before this change in the Forum’s stance The Times (1995) ran an Editorial Comment which accurately anticipated this kind of move:

‘… One difficulty (in schools) has been that the message has been compromised by relativism and moral confusion: teachers, reflecting the wider debate, have linked drugs with alcohol, and suggested that both are a matter of personal choice.  Many of the drugs advisors resist the idea that they should label any activity as morally wrong even if it involves breaking the law.’

So, who speaks the truth?  Is education firmly set on preventing drug use, or is it in the thrall of libertarian ideologues?  One might first have to identify what truth is. One suggestion; cynical, perhaps, but in itself having the ring of truth, is that

‘Truth may be defined as that which is ultimately satisfying to believe’.

Both parties would, by this measure, claim to be guardians of  ‘the truth’;  that they alone hold the moral high ground.  Hence the current internecine conflict in at least the advisory levels of the education field.  Meanwhile down at the coal-face, Towe’s assertion that teachers and youth workers all ‘deal with this issue on a daily basis’ is a world away from the experience of this writer.  Many do not ‘deal’, nor even wish to deal with this ‘hot potato’ at all.  Youth workers may well encounter it more often, but their circle of youth contacts is small in comparison with the total school population, and there is anecdotal evidence to suggest that youth club patrons have a disproportionately higher prevalence of drug misuse amongst their numbers.

There is no doubt this is a complex and emotive subject; the conflict around drug education in part reflects this, but in part drug education’s philosophical sectarianism adds to the very problem it was conceived to address (Stoker, 1999).  It is a key negative factor in the performance of prevention in Britain (and some other countries).  It is possible to observe certain patterns in this which hint at the reasons for the conflict.  Some are ‘self – based’, such as turf protection, fears for job security, and innate hostility to ‘outsiders’; the current situation with the DARE (UK) programme – which utilises purpose-trained police officers in primary schools – illustrates this point. (Stoker, A: 1999)  Life Education Centres (Kaplin, 1997), which uses ‘Educators’ generates somewhat less hostility in this respect, insofar as Educators are perceived as being ‘of the teaching tribe’, though there can still be concern at the arrival on site of skilled outsiders, and this can sometimes foster criticism.  But a driving force which arguably exceeds all these other motivations is educational philosophy, capable of producing conflict of a deep and damaging nature.  The struggle between educational philosophies and their interrelation with societal cultures cannot be fully explored in a brief paper such as this; it would certainly consume several doctoral theses on its own.  But one can attempt a summary…

Looking at a wider stage than the immediate confines of drug misusing behaviour, external factors relevant to moral development (or decline) have played a major part in affecting what happens within as well as outside the school gates.   There has, in general terms, been an emancipation and empowerment of the young, plus a great increase in their disposable income, at the same time as a disempowerment of teachers and other authority figures.   Parents have likewise seen their powers eroded and, when it comes to subjects such as sex and drugs, they perceive themselves to be inhibited or – in extremis – disqualified from comment or control by ignorance of the details, the jargon and their (arguable) lack of credible experience in today’s scene.   At the same time factors such as the emergence of the ‘Me Society’ (not wholly Thatcher’s fault!), and the ‘If It Feels Good, Do It’ or ‘Do Your Own Thing’ mantras, combine with what social psychologists call ‘Rising Expectations in Post-Industrial Society’ and the cult of ‘Personal Rights’ – including the ‘Right to Be Happy’.   Factors such as the above may also, in some respects, be applied to adults, and may be viewed as contributing to the breakdown of the nuclear family:  the rise of materialism; fight for employment survival, and preoccupation with the adult’s problems while being too busy to recognise danger signs in their offspring.  Also evident is a search for rapid, as distinct from delayed gratification.   Religion as a moderating influence has subsided (the usual consequence when the foundations of something are undermined).

Some initiatives in social education such as ‘Self-Esteem Building’ started from morally defensible motives, but strayed later.  One could even defend the more sensible examples of Political Correctness under this heading, and the core value of Harm Reduction as traditionally practised (ie. engaging with people known to be using drugs, to mitigate the effects of their use whilst working towards abstinence) is likewise worthy of support.  Unfortunately the outcome from this mixture is not always what was expected.  As one American sociologist ruefully remarked to this writer:

‘When you’re up to your rear end in alligators it’s kinda hard to remember you started out by wanting to drain the swamp’.

In the context of youth and drugs the outcome may be characterised and described in one of two ways:

either (1):   Young people want quick pleasure;  they want their ‘rising expectations fulfilled now, so that their ‘right to be happy’ is exercised.  Drug misuse seems to be both celebrated by  media and youth icons as well as effectively condoned by harm reduction information and only limply constrained moral guidance (nowhere near as important as one’s self-esteem).  Drugs are also more available, cheaper in real terms  and a lower proportion of one’s disposable income.   Thus drug misuse appears to become a viable option.  Society says ‘It’s your choice, as long as its an informed choice’.   Teachers are awash with curriculum and management demands, and parents have retired to the margins;  hence the ‘informing’ of choice is effectively left to a small number of education advisers, youth workers and the like.  If they are disciples of a Values Clarification approach (see below) or if they see accepting youth behaviour, rather than setting any boundaries, as the price for credibility and acceptance by youth, then the stage is set for a disaster.

or (2):       We’re up to our rear end in alligators.
 

How did we get here?

It was in the 1960’s, both in the UK and the USA, that a sea change in educational approaches fully took hold; morals-based education gave way to individual rights. (Naylor, 1999).  Whilst there is undoubtedly merit in, say, relinquishing authoritarianism in favour of a valid degree of democracy in the classroom, several commentators are now remarking on what became a sustained torrent, sweeping away the foundations of practice rather than stopping with the removal of some redundant or otherwise lesser-valued superstructures.  (Education Issues, 1999).  So it was that apparently disparate subjects such as reading, mathematics, history, geography, and religious education fell victim to the excesses of an overheated individual–rights approach in which some pupils could even decide whether to participate in classes or not.  In the case of the last of these (religious education) there was an even more profound retreat from tradition. It was almost axiomatic that ‘lifestyle’ subjects such as sex education, drugs education, and umbrella subjects like PSE/PSHE – Personal, Social, Health Education – would be at the forefront of the flow.

Francis Fukuyama is one who has taken the measure of this; in his book ‘The Great Disruption’ he advances several possible reasons for the changes in educational process.  (Fukuyama, 1999).  Whilst his hypotheses are open to debate, especially since they curiously omit any reference to a moral dimension, the changes in social behaviour in the last three decades are a matter of sobering fact.  Educational analyst, former Schools Council (now QCA) member and head teacher Fred Naylor has correlated US government statistical publications (Naylor, 1999) to produce a salutary summary, showing juvenile crime up 300%, rampant use of illegal drugs, abortions up 800%, illegitimacy up 450%, and STD’s up by more than 200% . Accepted indicators of family life showed it to be moribund.
 

Added Value?

A further major player, not widely recognised is the UK but certainly influential on pedagogy here is the approach known as Values Clarification, identified by some commentators as part of the ‘Outcome-Based Education’ (OBE) school of thought. (Citizen’s Commission on Human Rights, 1999).  This originated in Wisconsin, USA in the 1970s and eminent co – authors of the approach included the psychotherapy guru Carl Rogers, Professor Sidney Simon and psychologist William Coulson.  Like many approaches which go awry, Values Clarification started from a laudable concept i.e. that pupils should be facilitated to discover , and thus reach consensus on ‘values which are beneficial to society’.  But within a short time the concept was diverted (some would say subverted) to one in which pupils crystallised values which were beneficial to them as individuals; (Markwood, 1999) external constraints from society, authorities, parents etc, were to be viewed as obstacles to the individuals’ ‘self-actualisation’ – as Abraham Maslow, another contemporary of Rogers, terms it. (Maslow, 1954)

Naylor comments on this in his 1998 consultation document to Britain’s Social Exclusion Unit. (Naylor, 1998)  His paper is targeted on teen pregnancy but makes strong reference to drug misuse as part of the ‘joined-up problem’ which ‘joined-up government’ needs to address.  Naylor quotes Yankelovich et al. who have demonstrated major correlation between ‘smoking habits, cannabis use, sexually precocious behaviour and the relationship between younger women and their parents’. (Yankelovich, 1997)  Dryfoos (1993) is also cited in endorsing these links between what he called ‘the new morbidities of youth … ‘resulting from drugs, sex, violence, depression and stress’ .

The diverted/subverted Values Clarification approach remains a powerful influence in its own right; not just on young people’s behaviour but also on teachers, and thus their approach – in class, and pastorally.  Looking back over the past three decades there seems little doubt as to the influence of this and related philosophies on the agendae espoused by teacher training colleges and other formative entities in the field.

It would seem that the notion of individual freedom had somehow become entwined with the grossly inaccurate view of drug misuse as a personal matter, affecting no one else.  The colossal falsity of this view is indelibly impressed upon this author, after more than 15 years of working with drug misusers, their families and societal/justice/health systems.  This individualistic ‘personal choice’ model was certainly given voice in the Values Clarification model, which espoused

‘…The revolutionary notion that children should be left to create their own autonomous world, and adults are being anti-democratic in trying to pass their values to their children’. (Naylor, 1999).

One of the original architects of Values Clarification was the influential American psychologist William Coulson, a close associate of Carl Rogers and co-practitioner of Roger’s ‘non-directive therapy’, in which people with problems are not furnished with (external) answers but instead are assisted to discover the answer within themselves.  This has become a cornerstone of UK counselling, and for problem–solving it does at least have the rationale that a solution arrived at by the client may have more chance of ‘sticking’ than one externally delivered.  But this has to do with ‘problem people’.

Another definition for Rogers’ approach is ‘client–centered’; the similarity between this term and ‘pupil – centred’ is no accident.  It identifies the pragmatic transfer of problem-solving therapy into general education.  For Coulson this at first seemed (Coulson, 1994) a sensible progression; in his own words “We had the idea that if it was good for neurotics, it would be good for normals”.  But as time passed and Values Clarification transmogrified towards its present form, he became more and more disturbed by what he saw.  An early warning sign came when Rogers and Coulson tried floating the programme with what they deemed as ‘ordinary’ people in Rogers’ home/university state of Wisconsin.  Coulson observed that ‘the normal people of Wisconsin proved their normality by opting out, on being told what the concept was… ‘so’ said Coulson ‘we went to California.’  That did it.

Some years later, as the (Rogerian) Values Clarification practice spread to Australia, an Education Conference (Bowen, 1990) in Victoria heard an analysis of what the speaker, Jim Bowen, described as ‘…the causes of the crisis in Australian education’  Bowen, a barrister and president of the Australian Family Association in his state, quoted Professor Sidney Simon, Values Clarification co-author as saying:

“The school must not be allowed to continue fostering the immorality of morality.  An entirely different set of values must be nourished”.

Bowen goes on to describe how Values Clarification had been seen in action, in the schools in Victoria State:

‘Application of values clarification techniques in the classroom requires children to choose a value, affirm it publicly, and be prepared to defend it under pressure from the teacher and classmates.  Children are subjected to searching questions about personal and family beliefs, attitudes and behaviour…In a context resembling group therapy, powerful psychological tools, such as sensitivity training are employed to produce changes in children’s attitudes and behaviour.  In role playing games, children are subjected to mental stress through emotional involvement.  Doubts concerning previously held values and loyalties are implanted while children are psychologically vulnerable, leaving them open to implantation of other values.’

In (Gestalt – based) educational practices in Switzerland, similar approaches were encountered. (Citizens Commission on Human Rights, 1999)  Amongst other expressed objectives was the ‘need’ to understand that:

‘Morals are regarded as obstacles which hinder the development of ‘my authentic self’ and the teacher has no right to impose his sense of values about what is right or wrong’.

Regrets, I have a few

Some years into the Values Clarification era there were increasing signs of disquiet, even amongst the prime movers.  William Coulson became one of the fiercest critics, and another eminent professional, Abraham Maslow, joined in disparaging the process. Maslow warned early of some of the risks he saw in Values Clarification. (Coulson, 1994)  According to Coulson, “Maslow …believed in evil, and we didn’t.”  (Astonishing, considering Coulson’s background as a practising Catholic, graduated from Notre Dame), ‘Maslow said there was danger in our thinking and acting as if there were no paranoids or psychopaths or SOBs in the world to mess things up… We created a miniature utopian society, the Encounter Group.  As long as Rogers and those who feared Rogers’ judgement were present it was okay …. He kept people in line; he was a moral force’.

But the self-destruct ‘outcome’ of the approach was beginning to worry even Rogers.  In  a 1976 tape interview (Coulson, 1994) with Coulson, Rogers referred to it as “this damned thing…” and expressed concern that he didn’t “… have any idea what’s going to happen next … did I start something that is in some fundamental way mistaken, and will lead us off into paths that we will regret?”

Coulson tried to construct a rationale for  this by referring back to his own religious antecedents, and looking for some related sense of  religiosity in his colleagues and himself..  But  Rogers  claimed to be ‘too religious to have a religion ….. I don’t follow a creed, I make my own.’ Says Coulson: ‘Rogerians have no tribe except for everybody; and everybody is too large to give any sense of definition, of limit”.

This is not to say that religious faith is the whole of the solution (at any rate, not as perceived by this author).  But for many people (including this author) their religiosity guides them with a moral structure and, on a more general level, non–sectarian authorities such as the World Health Organisation still explicitly identify spiritual health as one key element of total health.

‘Development’ of ‘modern values’ continues today; the 1999 pre-launch release of a new British publication, the Journal of Values Education, predicts that a ‘values education’ approach would have young people discuss such questions as:

‘Are drugs really bad for you ?’ and
‘If adults drink alcohol why shouldn’t I take ecstasy ?’

These may be legitimate secondary school senior form debating topics, but caution coupled with a keen eye for ‘heffalump traps’ is a prudent necessity; pupil age and teacher competency are vital, if this kind of exploration is not to go badly off-track.
 

Reasons to be cheerful

A major marker on values was put down by the Government in May 1999 when, in response to strong criticisms they withdrew a draft Guidance on PSHE (Personal, Social and Health Education) which made no mention of marriage, let alone advocating marriage as a socially constructive condition.  In the resulting rethink Minister Paul Boateng voiced the policy of his senior Minister David Blunkett when he went on public record (Boateng, 1999) as saying:

‘We can’t, and we’re not going to, have a value-free curriculum’

The remark was welcomed by other parties and by (some) education specialists.  Opposition MP David Willetts expressed the hope that there would now be abandonment of ‘the claim that you can teach about these things without any moral framework’.  The working group responsible for this aberrant PSHE Guidance, under the chairmanship of Estelle Morris (Education) and Tessa Jowell (Health), were not the first to ‘overlook’ marriage as a recommended option.  Some three years earlier the then education Secretary,  Gillian Shepherd,  found  it  necessary  to  amend a draft ‘statement of values’ which had initially said nothing about marriage.  Calls for a stronger statement of family values’ led to the finalised statement committing to ‘support marriage as the traditional form of family unit’.

It should not be assumed that such statements of family values axiomatically exclude other lifestyles; what is being seen here is reaffirmation of societal core values which are resurfacing after a period of calculated erosion, largely inspired by the proponents of alternative lifestyles (and often, understandably, arising from these alternatives having had historical situations of social prejudice and disadvantage).  The pendulum is likely to swing back and forth in this respect for the foreseeable future, the possibility of a stasis acceptable to all being remote with such a volatile subject.  It ought, however, to be possible to gradually (or, dare one say, ‘progressively’) dampen the amplitude of variation about the mean, given sufficient will and wisdom.
 

Hope rather than dope?

In this ‘PC’ age we seem to constantly – at least figuratively – tie our shoelaces together before entering the race for the hearts and minds of our young.   To ‘moralise’ is now deemed to mean being superior;  you can be a ‘patron’ (protector, advocate) as long as you don’t ‘patronise’;  having ‘values’ is code for saying you are old-fashioned …. Victorian, even;  ‘family’ is passé, and there are no children, only young adults.  When it comes to drugs, the period of misusing them is a ‘career’, and their use is typified as ‘social’ or ‘recreational’.   If nothing else, a return to some sort of balance will require a complete overhaul of the semantics surrounding this issue.

The implications of all this for schools, and – not least – teaching staff, are stark.  But the situation is far from irreversible;  it became worse by small degrees, and resolution is likely to proceed at no faster pace – not least because the present incumbents, the so-called ‘progressives’’ will neither change philosophy nor move over without significant input of energy and solid argument by others.  What is more likely is that things will get worse before they get better; meanwhile, at the ‘chalk-face’, hard-pressed teaching staff will continue to strive for the best for their pupils.

Vying for scarce funds escalates healthy competition into unhealthy conflict, thus we find education workers denigrating each other.  It does seem that it is in the arena of educational philosophy that  the bloodiest battles are fought.  In this arena the middle ground is only entered when heavily armoured, and any concession from the other side is seen as a weak point begging for a fatal thrust.  Peacemaking is not always easy; say too little and you are arrogant – say too much and you are patronising.  Perhaps it would help, when helping to bring organisations closer, to remember that:

‘The reason we often don’t communicate is that we build
towers instead of bridges’.

Constructive criticism of this state of affairs should strive to avoid not only ‘educationist Luddism’ but also the far reaches of moral absolutism and repression – however, a clear moral stand cannot be ducked.  One could start by conceding that many involved in the so-called ‘progressive’ movement went there for the best of reasons.  It is also fair to say that some educational changes in this context replaced poor or negative practices.  For example, few of us would wish to return to an autocratic or authoritarian classroom constrained to unremitting didactic presentation.  (This author certainly would not).  But there is a sensible middle ground, in which the learning environment really is focused on useful learning whilst at the same time it encourages exploration and consensus, achieved by an appropriate mix of the didactic with the interactive.  And, moreover, a clear definition of where society places its boundaries, and why, i.e. the values on which these boundaries are based.  It is a matter of some surprise (or should be) that drug education ‘progressives’ should advocate the total absence of values – the spuriously–named ‘value–free learning environment’ – when considering drug misuse.  These same individuals see no problem in defining theft or violence (or even driving on the correct side of the road) as boundaries not to be transgressed, in order to uphold society’s values (and health).  The argument is therefore not about the need for boundaries per se, but rather about where they should be placed.  History may yet tell us why the ‘progressive’ educationists believe that drug misuse is a special case for which values and boundaries i.e. morals, are not relevant.

Whilst the worst excesses of ‘OBE’ and Values Clarification are to be avoided, there can be merit in an age-appropriate discussion of why society has values and boundaries; why they are set where they are, and therefore why they should be followed.  This could be related to simple school ‘rules’, as an example having some immediacy for pupils.
 

A Constructive Plan

Learning from international research and practice in drug prevention and related issues, sufficient lessons can be learnt to sketch the framework of a more effective approach. A school’s drug policy should not be confined to intervening when problems arise;  it should define goals with clear values and boundaries, and say how it will achieve these goals (i.e. prevention) – only then should it turn to responding to individual aberrations, responses which focus less on punishment and more on return to acceptable behaviour.   Learning how to make ‘Informed Choices’ can be facilitated but should not extend to those behaviours for which ‘choice’ is inappropriate e.g. lawbreaking, including drug misuse.   The schools’s ethos should encompass responsibility to Society, not just to Self; the pursuit of Liberty but not of Licence; exercise of Rights but with the accompanying Responsibilities, and an unequivocal understanding of the consequences of breaching the school’s behaviour code … this way, the pupil is not so much being ‘punished’ as receiving the consequence they have ‘earnt’.

This brief paper has attempted to indicate explicitly how and why the present unhealthy and counter-productive situation around drug prevention and education has arisen. It is to be hoped that papers like this will encourage some new flexibility into the dialogue. There are no illusions as to this process being quick; nor will it be without pain, especially that ensuing from grasping that fearsome nettle known as ‘Morals’.
 
 

References:

Bowen, J. 1990 ‘Why classrooms have become a battleground’.  Australian News Weekly.  3 March 1990.

Boateng, P. (1999) ‘Blunkett climbdown on morality lessons’.  Daily Mail. (London) 15 May 1999.

Citizens Commission on Human Rights (1999).  Psychiatry’s and Psychology’s Eradication of Right and Wrong. Contact Lord/Lady McNair Box 28008, London, SE27 0WD.

Coulson, W.  (1994).  ‘We overcame their traditions, we overcame their faith’.  The Latin Mass.  1331 Red Cedar Circle, Ft. Collins, CO 80524.  Jan-Feb 1994, pp. 14 – 22.

Dryfoos, J.G. (1993) Preventing Substance Abuse: Rethinking Strategies.  American Journal of Public Health.  83; 793 – 795.

Education Issues Meetings (1999 and ongoing).  Proceedings at House of Lords.  Unpublished.  Contact The Baroness Cox for details.

Fukuyama, F.  (1999) The Great Disruption.  The Free Press. USA.

Markwood, A. (1999) Values Clarification development and diversion.  Markwood (unpublished). E-mail to this author 12 May 99.

Maslow, A. (1954).  Heirarchy of Needs, in Motivation and Personality Harper and Row, New York.  1954

Naylor, F. (1998).  Teenage Parenthood – submission to Social Exclusion Unit. Unpublished.
2, Kingsdown House, Kingsdown, Corsham, Wilts  SN13 8AX.

Naylor, F. (1999) Developments in Moral Education: paper presented to ‘Mut Zur Ethik’ conference, Feldkirch, Austria, 1999.  Naylor. 2, Kingsdown House, Kingsdown, Corsham, Wilts, SN13 8AX.

Phillips, M.(2000) ‘Britain is quietly turning into a drug culture’  Sunday Times,  9th Jan. 2000

Stoker, A (1999). D.A.R.E – An Overview of Research (also includes ‘What can be learnt from the Roehampton Review?’)  NDPA, P.O. Box 594, Slough, SL1 1AA.

Stoker, P. (1998). A Rational Approach to Drug Prevention in the Primary School: Practice Review and Policy Developments.  Early Child Development and Care.  1998. Vol. 139, pp. 73-97.

Stoker, P. (1999) Drugs and Professional Subculture. NDPA.  P.O. Box 594, Slough, SL1 1AA.

Towe, N. (2000) Drug Education Forum,  Letter to Editor of Sunday Times, 16th Jan 2000
The Times (of London)  ‘Say No Again’.  Times.  Editorial 15 May 1995.

Yankelovich et al. (1997) Cigarette Smoking among Teenagers and Young Women.  Dept of Health and Welfare.  Publication No. 16, National Institute of Health.  77; 1203.

Filed under: Education Sector (Papers) :


By Alberto Carosa
Rome
 From time to time in the not too distant past we could hear about initiatives within and without the UN for the Holy See to be increasingly marginalized or even expelled from the Organisation and its proceedings. Much more rarely do we hear about the contrary, namely the UN seeking co-operation with and help from the Holy See. This is precisely what happened when the head of the UN Office for Drug Control and Crime Prevention, Italian-born Antonio Maria Costa, was recently received in the Vatican by John Paul II and the secretary of State, Angelo Cardinal Sodano (cf. Corrispondenza romana, May 15, 2004).
“I showed the Pope our work”, Costa reportedly said after the talk, “which is also about terrorism prevention, since it has by now been proven that all the organisations of that type resort to drug trafficking as a financial resource”. The UNODC also showed Sodano a graph indicating the various “specialising” activities of the different terrorist groups. “Only to refer to the best-known”, he said, “Al Qaeda trades in heroin, like other groups active in Sri Lanka, Myanmar, Turkey and Uzbekistan; the Colombian FARC is peddling cocaine, while marijuana is being pushed by Hezbollah, Nepalese Maoists and the Abu Sayyaf militiamen in the Philippines”.But there is also the problem of Aids, Costa continued, which should be also addressed because it is partly a result of drug addiction and is on the rise, especially in Eastern Europe and in the Baltic states.  John Paul II exhibited a keen interest, Costa noted, and from his questions one could realise that he was well aware of the problem, particularly in Colombia and in the former Iron Curtain countries.Costa also pointed out that corruption is among the worst crimes and it is caused by drug trafficking, which annually slashes lawful trade by over $ 1 billion, thus turning into a real enemy of development. Another drug-related, appalling scourge is human trafficking, a modern form of slavery whereby million people every year are deprived of their freedom, enduring the worst forms of exploitation. In the face of such phenomena, legal measures, though important, are not enough, Costa stated. “The opposition from civil society should instead be enhanced”.

In Costa’s opinion, prevention measures are of paramount importance. “We need for evil in drugs to be grasped, and for this to be perceived in schools, which I don’t see particularly committed in this regard, in working places, in amenities, such as discos, and worship places, such as oratories”, he said. “Anti-social patterns of behaviour undermine the fabric of all of society, and may be effectively tackled by society as a whole”. From this perspective, and with the aim to keep our youth away from drugs, crime and terrorism, “a possible co-operation between the UNODC and social-oriented Catholic organizations around the world has been thrashed out, especially to strengthen family and community capacities in handling anti-social patterns of behaviour”, concluded Costa in his briefing.

But how can civil society best be involved and mobilised for it to promote its opposition against the drug scourge? An interesting clue in this regard came from a conversation with Mrs Betty Sembler, a veteran anti-drug activist, the president of Drug Free America Foundation (DFAF) and the wife of Melvin Sembler, the US Ambassador to Italy. She supports an aggressive campaign through a series of ads for print and electronic media. This campaign, Mrs Sembler made clear, was the child of another NGO, The Partnership for a Drug Free America, and it is an excellent example of fruitful interaction between public institutions and private-run organisations. These ads were launched first in the United States as a joint initiative with the government, which paid for them through grants to the Office of National Drug Control Policy, and were even televised during the Superbowl. The ads are not only increasingly fine-tuned and effective, but also created with multicultural approach, making them easily transferable from one country to another.

One of these ads particularly struck Mrs Sembler.

“I’ve seen a most effective ad, perhaps the most effective ad I have ever seen, and which I would very much like to see it used in Italy as well”, Mrs Sembler continued. “It was a full newspaper page, which read: ‘How to write an obituary for your son’. This sentence says it all. The text is very short and calls on parents to look after their children, to keep them away from dope, to check on who their school mates and friends are, to identify the wrong information targeting them, and discover those who are promoting drug use among them. ‘Unless you want to write this obituary’ – it’s the shocking conclusion”. Just the idea of having to write an obituary for a son “strikes to the heart of a mother”, says Mrs. Sembler. “I have no direct knowledge of what’s going on in an Italian family, but a mother is always a mother, whether she is Italian or Eskimo”.



Source: Drug Free America August 2004
/span>

Filed under: Social Affairs :
As more shops open in California to dispense medical marijuana, local officials are concerned that the stores could attract crime and blight.  While state law allows for the dispensing of medical marijuana to certain patients, it fails to provide clear guidelines on how local officials should regulate distribution. Marijuana shops have opened in Colfax, Roseville, Citrus Heights, Elk Grove, and Auburn, among other communities.

The Rocklin City Council recently voted to prohibit a medical-marijuana dispensary in the area, an action that medical marijuana experts said is unprecedented in California. City-council members voted for the 45-day emergency ban after Roseville Police Chief Mark Siemens told officials that the stores caused problems in his city. Since the medical marijuana shops have opened in Roseville, Siemens said, street dealers have begun loitering outside, thieves attack patients leaving the store, and illegal sales or marijuana occurs nearby.

But medical-marijuana supporters said the Rocklin council’s decision was based on incomplete information. They said shop operators are committed to ensuring that patients are safe. The advocates cited the Colfax store as an example, saying it follows strict admission procedures and has cameras and a security guard monitoring the store and parking lot.

“There have been no problems, no reports of crime,” said Placer County Undersheriff Steve D’Arcy of the Colfax store. “It’s been very quiet.”Even Roseville Police Capt. Dave Braafladt acknowledged that while the store has resulted in some calls, there was “nothing of major significance.”But many city officials are uncomfortable with medical-marijuana stores in their community, especially with the conflict between state and federal law. Under federal law, marijuana is illegal, even for medical purposes.

 

Source: Sacramento Bee reported July 5. 2004

 

Filed under: Social Affairs :


By Maria Lokshin , Associated Press

AMSTERDAM—There’s a whiff of crisis in the air at the Dutch Health Ministry: It has a mountain of marijuana on its hands that it just can’t sell.

The Netherlands rolled out a program last year that allows people with medical needs to buy prescription marijuana at any pharmacy, and get part of the money back from medical insurance.

But in a country where any adult can walk into a “coffee shop” and smoke a joint for much less than the government price, many say the experiment at regulating medical marijuana has been a bust.

“I think it’s a shame that they can’t deliver a cannabis product a little bit cheaper than the coffee shops,” said David Watson, head of Hortapharm, an Amsterdam-based company licensed for research and development of cannabis for pharmaceutical use.

“Why is it that a legal commodity is more expensive than an illegal commodity?”

Cas de Bruijn, 43, sliced off four fingers and part of his thumb in an industrial accident 27 years ago, and to this day feels a “phantom pain” in those missing fingers that eases when he smokes pot.

For him, the problem with the government’s medical marijuana program isn’t just cost but the fact it doesn’t provide him with the kind of weed he needs – a variety high in cannabidiol, or CBD, a muscle relaxant.

“What is now in the pharmacy is very low in CBD,” de Bruijn said. “I didn’t like it at all.”

Whatever the cause, even the government acknowledges its program may be foundering.

“We are not meeting our targets,” said Bas Kuik, spokesman for the Office of Medicinal Cannabis, an arm of the Dutch Ministry of Health. Of the 200 kilograms in anticipated sales, only 80 kilograms were sold since the project was launched last year, he said.

The program allows pharmacies to sell standardized marijuana from authorized growers that have undergone quality control. It is aimed at chronic or terminal diseases such as multiple sclerosis, HIV/AIDS, neuralgia, cancer and Tourette’s syndrome.

It is illegal to privately grow and sell marijuana in the Netherlands. But in the 1970s authorities decided not to prosecute the sale of small amounts, bringing the soft-drug industry above ground where it could more easily be controlled. There is no similar tolerance for dealers in hard drugs, like cocaine or heroin.

Hundreds of marijuana bars, thinly disguised as “coffee shops” to maintain the fiction of legality, sprang up in the cities and large towns. Though patronized mostly by recreational smokers and tourists, people in pain who find relief from cannabis are also customers.

Erik Bosman, manager of the Dampkring coffee shop, says many of his regulars are medical patients, and he even used to offer discounts for people with doctors’ prescriptions.

The Dampkring, just off one of Amsterdam’s busiest shopping streets, has a comfortable amber glow that filters through a thin haze of pungent smoke.

Even at midday, dozens of mostly young people sit at the long dark wood bar sipping soft drinks or beer as they roll their cigarettes or smoke pre-packaged joints. The coffee shop was the set for a scene shot earlier this year of Ocean’s Twelve, and pictures of George Clooney and Brad Pitt with the staff hang on the wall.

The menu, with 23 types of marijuana and 18 varieties of hashish, carries a “fair smoke” reassurance that the cannabis is organically grown.

But many coffee shops are dingy, unappealing hangouts that hardly inspire a feeling of pharmaceutical confidence, and some seriously ill people will pay more for guaranteed quality, especially if it’s covered by their insurance.

The government sells two varieties ranging from 8 and Ç9.50 (US$9.80-$11.70) a gram. Coffee shops sell marijuana as low as 4 (US$4.90) a gram, with only the highest quality weed ringing up prices comparable to the government’s.

One of two legal marijuana growers for the government program is James Burton, a US expatriate in Rotterdam, who immigrated after spending a year in prison in the United States for growing marijuana to fight glaucoma.

The high cost of the Dutch government’s program may have less to do with pot than with packaging. The government says about 60 percent of the cost is related to providing and distributing the marijuana to pharmacies, and the rest is for development, packing and tax.

Watson said coffee-shop marijuana is always a gamble because there is a small but real chance customers could be smoking pesticides, fungicides, insecticides, mould or fungi—all of which can be detrimental for someone with a weakened immune system.

Burton founded the Stichting Institute of Medical Marijuana, and for more than a decade he sold marijuana directly to as many as 1,500 patients. He estimates about 10,000 people in the Netherlands use marijuana for medical reasons.

In 2001 he signed an exclusive contract with the government to provide the cannabis for its program. But the five-year agreement was terminated prematurely after he went on Dutch television talking about the program that he believes is “doomed to fail.”

The government accused him of breaking a confidentiality clause.

“I finally had to come out publicly,” he told The Associated Press. “The program’s not working. They have less than 1,000 patients.” Burton charged that the government “is not dedicated to making sure the program works.”

“Nobody’s promoting it. It’s not a proactive campaign,” he said.

Politics may be to blame, Burton believes, since a conservative coalition has replaced the more liberal government that created the medicinal marijuana program. “The whole country is leaning to the right,” he said. “I think a year from now this program’s gone.”

Kuik, the government official, confirmed the program is up for review early next year.

For de Bruijn, coffee shops and pharmacies are not options. His insurance company will not reimburse him for coffee shop marijuana, and has placed a $560 annual cap on payments—far less than he would spend in a pharmacy.

Instead, de Bruijn buys his marijuana from an organization similar to Burton’s, where it is cheap enough to be covered by his insurance.

But he’s far from satisfied.

“I feel I’m forced to buy there, and I really think they stink,” he said. “It’s not good medical marijuana.”


Source: www.manilatimes.net October 14 2004

Filed under: Social Affairs :

By Nick Papps,Herald Sun
December 15. 2003

A TAXPAYER-funded magazine is telling people how to inject drugs, use rock heroin and how to beat a drug test. The magazine, Whack, is produced by drug user group VIVAIDS and even includes a section on finding the best location to inject and tips on how to inject pills.

The organisation. which receives up to $580,000 a year from government, also has a website telling users how to avoid police questions. with links to pro-drug organisations. sex sites and pornographic video outlets. The revelations coincide with the release of statistics showing that Victorian health officials gave away 5.58 million needles in the past 12 months – up 827.000 on the previous year.

Critics claim the needles are being used for heroin start-up kits and health officials have admitted that they are concerned about the rise in needle numbers.

A Herald Sun investigation has also revealed:

Yesterday opposition leader Robert Doyle slammed VIVAAIDS and said its funding should be halted over the magazine.

“The articles in the magazine encourage efficient drug use.” Mr Doyle said.

“The message should be about the dangers of drugs.

“The Government has taken its eyes off the drug issue. This is also shown through the huge numbers of needles being handed out – it’s open slather needle distribution.”

The Department of Human Services figures show that VIVAIDS received $193,000 from the State Government and almost $390,000 in funding from the Federal Government last year.

The magazine includes:

The contents page begins with the quote: “I hate to advocate drugs, alcohol, violence or insanity, but they’ve always worked for me”.

The VIVAIDS website has extensive advice on using drugs and guides to each drug, including advice on “how to have a good time” on some drugs. A section on the law includes advice on avoiding police questions. The magazine is distributed in needle exchanges and is written for drug users.

Yesterday Health Minister Tony Abbott said the Federal Government would not knowingly support any organisation that promoted drug use.
“There’s no such thing as a safe way to use illegal drugs,’ Mr Abbott said.

A State Government spokeswoman said that although it funded VIVAIDS. none of the money went towards the magazine. VIVAIDS could not be contacted yesterday for comment. Health workers said that up to 400 needles were being given to drug users a day.

A nurse at a regional hospital said one user demanded he be given 400 needles – “and we must give it to him.”Another man takes 100 needles at a time”. “The person that collects them takes them to a dealer and they’re used as heroin start-up kits.”

But the Department of Human Services’ director of drug policy and services. Paul McDonald said health officials should hand out as many needles as they could. Mr McDonald said there was no requirement For users to hand in needles despite the drug programs being called needle exchanges.
“You can never hand out too many, from a public health perspective,” he said. “The more you are able to make clean syringes available, the more you are going to prevent HIV and Hep C.” Mr McDonald said it was the department’s policy to supply users with the number of needles they requested.

Youth worker Les Twentyman said rising supplies of heroin in Victoria had led dealers to entice former drug users back. “They hang around the jails when they get released. They visit the user at home, Mr Twentyman said.

Filed under: Social Affairs :

A positive experience from  Florida, USA. The following article shows how a proactive prevention approach can make a  significant difference in a community.

From drug capital to good example
BY ROBERT McCABE

In the past eight years, Miami-Dade youth have reduced drug use by 50 percent. But there is more to the story. The Florida Youth Substance Abuse Survey found Miami-Dade to have the lowest rate of youth marijuana use of any Florida county, and the Federal Risk Behaviour Survey reported that Miami youth had the lowest rate of marijuana use of 14 large metropolitan areas.
In addition, the Miami Coalition School Survey showed that alcohol and cocaine use were down by a third, and the use of cigarettes, marijuana, LSD, rohhypnol, heroin, MDMA and amphetamines fell by more than half. Although drug use remains a major problem, our youth and the community have reason to be proud of this significant achievement.

We are a better place to live, work and raise families. What caused this amazing change?

In the 1980s, Miami was seen as the drug capital of the world. Cocaine cowboys roamed our streets as crime, corruption and addiction caused by cocaine and inflamed by crack put us at risk. Drug-related deaths, medical emergencies and demand for drug treatment rose dramatically. We had become the drug badlands. Our community rose up in response to this dire circumstance, and in 1988, with the leadership of Alvah Chapman and Tad Foote, the business community organized and funded the Miami Coalition for a Safe and Drug Free Community, which helped unleash a blitzkrieg of anti-drug activity. Miami’s was the nation’s first broadly based community anti-drug coalition and has become the model for more than 900 that exist today. Key to success has been the breadth of involvement New organizations and new methods of prevention sprang up and others intensified their anti-drug efforts. These include Abriendo Puertas (Opening Doors) Switchboard of Miami, Informed Families, D-FY-IT, Catholic Charities, Agape, Camillus House, Betterway, Miami-Dade County Programs, Community Crusade Against Drugs, Here’s Help, Spectrum Programs, The Village and Concept House. Thousands of people continue to participate in these efforts that have been sustained and grown. Under coalition leadership, the courts, corrections and all the law-enforcement groups came together for the first time to coordinate activities. One result was federal designation as a High Intensity Drug Trafficking Area bringing additional resources that reduced drug trafficking through Miami. The county increased crack-house demolition from 54 in 1988 to 376 in 1989. It also passed a law that created “safe no-drug zones” 1,000 feet around schools, and a parent-led effort ensured that the law was enforced. Another first was the creation of a very successful drug court. its success spawned over 100 drug courts in other American communities.

Other accomplishments include the establishment of a countywide Juvenile Assessment Centre to coordinate services. The Miami-Dade School Board placed drug counsellors in the schools and retained them through budget-cutting years. The Faith Committee promoted anti- drug messages. The Greater Miami Chamber of Commerce and the coalition organized a drug-free workplace programme, which now includes 60 percent of the workplace. The media stepped to the plate and in the critical early years, The Miami Herald and community newspapers contributed a full page a week to the coalitions efforts. In the 11 years that data have been kept, the Miami electronic media led the nation nine times in providing public service time for anti-drug messages. More than half of the surveyed youth indicate that they see these messages every month.

Today the coalition has been transformed from a reactive to a proactive organization. Driven by multiple data sources, strategies are developed to address identified needs. The strategies involve many groups that draw on the communities’ drug-related resources. With the broad-based participation and these strategies in place, Miami is well positioned to continue the fight against drug use. We are proud of our community’s accomplishments. The transformation of our city from a dangerous drug-infested area to a model of national leadership in drug prevention is a stunning achievement and testimony to what can be done when we all work together.

Source: Author Robert McCabe Chair the Miami Coalition for a Safe and Drug Free Community.
Filed under: Social Affairs :

By Den Taylor
Daily Mail, 13 January  2004

So this is what happens when the police take the law on cannabis less seriously. In the London borough of Lambeth the experiment of a softly-softly approach to the drug led to an explosion In its use. From the end of this month the Lambeth approach will be effectively introduced across the country as cannabis is downgraded to a ‘Class C’ substance. There is a real danger that cannabis use across the country will soar as teenagers assume they are safe from arrest and that it is acceptable to use the drug From whatever angle this is looked at, It Is a totally wrongheaded reform.

Cannabis Explosion

FEARS over the legal downgrading or cannabis increased last night as figures showed an
explosion in its use. Police in the London borough which pioneered a softly-softly approach to the drug have reported a three fold increase In the number of those caught with It. Anti-drug campaigners said last night that the trend suggested demand for cannabis will rocket when it is formally reclassified as a Class C substance later this month. The statistics are taken from crime figures  Lambeth  widely seen as a template for the government’s drug law reform. In July 2001, Commander Brian Paddick ordered his officers not to arrest and charge those caught with a small amount of cannabis, Instead they were let off with confiscation and a warning. Critics said the year long experiment made Lambeth, and the Britain area in particular, a magnet For so-called drug tourists and increased consumption among children. Supporters claimed that it freed officers to
concentrate on tackling harder substances such as heroin and crack cocaine. Figures show that in the year leading up to the experiment there were 805 incidents involving cannabis in Lambeth.  By 2001/2002 they bad risen to 1,127. Last year, despite the decision  to scrap the experiment, the figure had risen to 2,330. From January 29, the Brixton approach. will effectively become a nationwide policy and officers
will be able to arrest users only in aggravating circumstances’ – if they are under 18 or smoking persistently in a public place or near a school’
The official downgrading means the drug will be  considered no more dangerous than prescription painkillers, steroids or tranquillisers. Doctors fear the change will lead young people to believe the drug is harmless.

Last night, senior police sources said that even though a more aggressive approach to drug use in Lambeth has been employed over the past l8 months, demand for cannabis has continued to rise. Lambeth has also continued to attract drug users from outside the borough. That factor may end when the law is changed. Those opposed to liberalisation believe that what has happened in Brixton is likely to be repeated in many parts or the country. The fear is that demand will go through the roof. Anti-drugs campaigner Mary Brett, a grammar school teacher, said: These figures prove that since the Home Secretary David Blunkett mode his announcement that the law was going to be changed, usage of the drug and demand has gone tip, In some ways it was inevitable. People. particularly children, pick up messages and the message is that it’s OK to take cannabis.’ Alter January 20, those caught in possession for personal use can expect the police to confiscate the drug and issue a routine warning. The maximum sentence for possession will fall from five years to two, although punishments for dealers will increase. However, last night there were Fears that the changes will lead to more confusion.

John DunFord, of the Secondary Heads Association, said: There is considerable confusion on the pert o as to the effect that tills will have, particularly on school discipline. Our advice is to continue to treat cannabis as before. The penalties we advise are a suspension  possession Or exclusion for anyone who is supplying it. About 2 million Britons use cannabis regularly and a third of all l5-year olds have tried the drug according to official figures. Figures  yesterday showed that the price of the drug has dropped by 20 per cent t £66 for an ounce of resin and there is increasing evidence that road accidents re being caused by drivers high on the drug. Last night Chief Superintvn’ dent Richard Quinn, Lambeth’s current commander admitted  there had been a perception that users would not be prosecuted for carrying drug and that it had been ‘legalised’. The bottom line is that the dealers are more overt he said. Mr Quinn, said that as tile new law was rolled out across the country flourishing new markets for the drug would develop unless local officers took a firm  decision to keep a lid on it.

‘Epidemic’ of mental illness warning

SINCE the decision to downgrade cannabis revealed there have been persistent claims that it is linked to serious mental illness. Last November, a court heard how Christopher Francis, a paranoid schizophrenic with a history of smoking the drug, killed his grandmother and aunt with a house brick and kitchen knife. The Judge, Mrs. Justice Heather Hallet, said: “It would  not be the first time, that the use of apparently harmless drugs such as cannabis has led to a tearful explosion of violence.”

Earlier this month a leading expert warned that cannabis is the biggest single cause of mental illness in the UK. Consultant psychiatrist Professor Robin Murray said that up to 80 per cent of new patients at many units hey, a history of smoking the drug. He added that the vast majority  of psychotic patients those who lose contact with reality have used cannabis. He has also led a study which showed that cannabis users are seven times more at risk of developing mental illness than the population in general. One of the main problems, he believes, is that the cannabis is now far stronger than what was available in the 1960s and 1970s. It contains up to ten times as mush of the ingredient tetrahydrocannabinol which includes the ‘high’. The fear is that its wide spread use among youngsters could result in an epidemic of schizophrenia. he warned: the more cannabis that is consumed the more psychiatrists we need. the drug has also been linked to cancer and lung disease.

Filed under: Social Affairs :

By Laura Clark
Daily mail  August 2003

FORMER drug addicts are being offered a shortcut to a university degree on the basis of the ‘valuable life experience’ they have gained. They will be allowed to skip extensive periods of formal study if they can prove their ordeal and recovery was relevant to their course.
The astonishing deal is being offered as part of a new higher education scheme titled the Accreditiation of Prior Experiential Learning, which allows universities to waive up to two thirds of courses if students can show their previous experience overlaps with material covered in lessons.
This has been interpreted by Glasgow Caledonian University to offer recovering drug addicts the chance to offset formal study in the preliminary stages of a social science degree.

Another university advises students they may be able to count holiday work as a lifeguard towards a degree In sports science.
Critics lambasted the scheme yesterday as further evidence of dumbing down in higher education.
Shadow education minister Graham Brady said: Life experiences are important for everyone. But however significant those experiences, they can be no substitute for serious academic study.

‘It is particularly worrying if drug addicts are being given an advantage over those who have studied and worked bard.’
Other examples also raised eye-brows. Angila Polytechnic University advises students on its website: The experience of being a holiday life guard has no relevance to a degree In electronics, but would probably have some relevance to a degree in sports science.’
The Quality Assurance Agency, the higher education watchdog, has become so concerned It plans to launch new guidelines to stop dubious uses of the APEL scheme. Wide variations in how universities apply the rules emerged at a recent meeting hosted by the QAA. It revealed that in a few cases, up to two thirds of an award is eligible for APEL’. This means that some students would be able to complete a three-year degree course in a year. Students must pay a charge If they wish their pre-university experiences to be assessed under APEL. This can be anything from a few pounds to £100. But in some cases the assessment involves little more than an informal meeting with an academic.

Explaining the plans at Glasgow Caledonian, Paula Cleary a research fellow at the university. said: The kind of experiences they (the addicts) had had were relevant — they had had to gather information to learn about how to cope and they had to undergo the process of counselling, for example.

Mary Brett, a grammar school teacher in Amersham, Buckinghamshire, said she was thunderstruck’ by the idea and warned it could encourage children to experiment with drugs. ‘It certainly isn’t a deterrent if they know the experience can help their future.’

Filed under: Social Affairs :


This month’s 30th Anniversary edition of High Times Magazine has some interesting information that you may or may not already know. In articles by Richard Stratton, Rex Weiner and Ed Dwyer, there is reporting of marijuana use by Norman Mailer and Hugh Downs–something I’ve always suspected, but never have seen in print.

Source : email from prevention worker in the USA to NDPA  Nov. 2004

In his editorial in the same edition, Richard Stratton presents an interesting history of High Times if you are interested.

In the September issue, an article called “NORML 2004: A Conference of Heroes” states many of the goals of the pro-drug movement. Steve Bloom, as he accepted an award, said, “It’s my great pleasure to know and work with all of you as we move closer to our ultimate goal, marijuana legalization.”


The movement’s agenda is laid out in an article “Ten suggestions for the Pot Movement.” They include: support for medical marijuana, buy hemp products, resist drug testing, support pot smokers and reach out to the mainstream, among others. These articles help connect all the “dots” together.

Filed under: Social Affairs :

 

The Metro reports that children as young as 13 are being given nicotine patches at a school in an attempt to help them smoking.

In a project, pupils take breath tests before morning lessons to check the levels of nicotine in their bodies.

If they have smoked before they get to school they are given a nicotine replacement patch by a school nurse.

The controversial idea was brought in at Greencroft High School, before the summer break. Seven girls, aged 13 and 14 sought help because they smoked between ten and 20 cigarettes a day.

The breakthrough came when they took part in the dangers of addiction course and were asked about their smoking habits. In addition to patches they were given a hotline number to call if they felt unable to resist the urge to light up.

Four girls managed to stick to the regime and remained tobacco free for two months.

Now 30 of their school mates want to join the programme when they return for the autumn term in September.

The Department of Health said it welcomed any effort to discourage under 16s from smoking.

According to most recent figures, six percent of British 13 year olds smoke regularly and 22 percent of 15 year olds. However, ASH believes many children start as young as nine.

Spokeswoman Amanda Sandford said: “If they start as young as nine or ten, then by thirteen they could be showing all the signs of addiction an adult smoker would. For those children, it is quite reasonable to be given help with nicotine patches. As long as it is done in a controlled way with a teacher or a nurse keeping an eye on them, I don’t see any problem.”

 

Source: Metro, Daily Mail, Daily Express, 13 August 2004


Filed under: Social Affairs :


MANY psychiatric units have become little more than ‘cannabis wards’ because of the huge numbers turned psychotic by the drug, a mental health expert claimed yesterday.

Marjorie Wallace, chief executive of the charity Sane, said the situation had become so serious that the entire mental health system was being ‘distorted’.

Patients with non drug-related mental illnesses were being turned away from some wards because the threat of violence from psychotic cannabis users had made them unsafe, she added.

‘Doctors are saying to non cannabis-users, such as young girls with anorexia and middle-aged women, “I can’t admit you if you are not taking cannabis, because it’s not safe”,’ Miss Wallace said.

‘It means people who may be even more seriously ill and even more of a suicide risk are being neglected.

Cannabis has changed the whole way in which the mental health system operates. The popular view of cannabis is that it is a harmless drug. It is not.’ Miss Wallace’s comments came a day after research in Sweden suggested cannabis can permanently damage the development of teenagers’ brains, with users in the age group up to ten times more likely to suffer long-term mental illness.

One of the most outspoken critics of the Government’s decision to downgrade cannabis from a class B to a class C drug in January last year, Miss Wallace has spent 18 years trying to draw attention to the link between the drug and mental illness.

‘In all the years I have campaigned in the mental health field, I think I have only come across two examples of young people developing psychosis in which cannabis was not a factor,’ she said.

‘In London, 80 per cent of people assessed with a first episode of psychosis are on cannabis. The explosion in cannabis-induced psychosis is already happening.’

Source: Daily Mail; London (UK)21st June 2005
Filed under: Social Affairs :


Conference in Moses Room, House of Lords, 28th November 2002-11-28 CONSENSUS OF CONFERENCE

● In the light of the most recent international evidence regarding the adverse effects of cannabis, we urge the Prime Minister and the Home Secretary to reconsider their determination to reclassify Cannabis from a Schedule B to Schedule C drug.

● We are concerned that reclassification sends the message ‘it is ok to take cannabis’ or ‘cannabis is harmless’ or ‘taking cannabis is legal now’, especially to young people. We therefore strongly oppose reclassification.

● Instead, we urge the Prime Minister and the Home Office not to play down the many adverse and sometimes irreversible health effects of cannabis but to send out the clear message that cannabis is both harmful and, for that reason, illegal.

● We urge the Prime Minister – in the light of recent evidence – to reassess the adverse physical, emotional, mental and spiritual impact cannabis abuse has on individuals, but also to assess the adverse effects of cannabis on society including families with a special reference to ethnic minorities, the education system, the National Health Service, the Police, the criminal justice system.

● We are concerned that drug prevention is not given the emphasis it deserves, that ‘mixed messages’ are sent out and in particular we are very concerned at public funding of organisations whose ‘drug education material’ appears to promote rather than prevent drug abuse.

● We urge the Prime Minister to allocate more resources on prevention of cannabis abuse. Prevention is better than cure. We believe that these resources will be well spent. Our society and especially our young people deserve to be protected from cannabis abuse.

Source: Conference in Moses Room, House of Lords,
 28th November 2002-11-28 CONSENSUS OF CONFERENCE
Filed under: Social Affairs :


Under pressure from local politicians as well as international anti-drug agencies, the marijuana-fuelled coffee house drug culture in the Netherlands may be on the wane.

Some Dutch observers believe that the coffee shops could disappear within the next five years, and numbers have already declined from 1,500 to about 750. The current Dutch government and city mayors have taken a more conservative approach to drug use, and the nation is under pressure from other European Union members to curb drug tourism.

The government reportedly has told the UN’s International Narcotics Control Board (INCB) that it will also take steps to curb street dealing, marijuana cultivation, and the coffee shops, the latter of which are cited for discrediting the country’s antidrug policies.

“There has been a crucial and significant change in the Dutch cannabis policy,” said INCB head Hamid Ghodse. “They now say for the first time that cannabis is not harmless and that coffee shops are not blameless.”

In the province of Limburg, foreigners have been banned from buying drugs in coffee shops. A ban on potent strains of marijuana also is being considered.

“The changes have been brought about by the influence of the Yankees [the United States], Brussels and the EU,” said Dutch government drug-policy advisor August de Loor. “The Dutch approach is usually very pragmatic. But in the past four years things have started to change and there is a more conservative approach. The control of coffee shops has become much more strict. The police are checking up on them more and there is much more strict interpretation of the rules. More and more mayors are banning coffee shops from their cities. I think in four or five years’ time there will be no more coffee shops left in Holland.”

Source: Independent March 5. 2005
Filed under: Social Affairs :

Children in heroin-plagued Ballymena have been “scratched” by discarded hypodermic needles – prompting police to issue an alert as fears mounted about the potential spread of deadly diseases like Aids.

The PSNI in the Antrim town – which per-head-of-population has one of Northern Ireland’s worst drug problems – called on parents to advise their children not to touch such needles.

Police say they have been made aware of incidents in which children have picked up and been scratched by hypodermic needles.

Said a spokesman: “We are asking parents to impress on their children the importance of never touching discarded needles.

“Our advice to anyone finding needles is do not touch them, you never know what they might contain.

“Instead, tell police straight away and we will arrange to have the needles picked up and disposed of.”

Police can be contacted in Ballymena on 2565 3355.

Several years ago in Ballymena a number of official ‘needle exchanges’ were set up to allow heroin addicts to safely dispose of needles.

It was hoped the scheme would help prevent needles being dumped on the streets over fears that Aids and Hepatitis could be spread to people being pricked by contaminated needles.

Former Ballymena mayor Alderman Joe McKernan (Ulster Unionist) said he was shocked to hear that children had their skin scratched by needles.

“If a child’s skin is pierced by a needle in these circumstances it must be a nightmare for parents,” he said.

“As the police say, who knows what these things could contain, it’s like Russian roulette.

“You would have to fear the worst until proven otherwise and it could be a long, worrying wait if tests are sought.”

Source: Belfast Telegraph November 9, 2004

 

Filed under: Social Affairs :


Terrence P. Farley, 11.04.05, 10:27 AM ET


It is hard to believe that in this day and age someone as intelligent as Alan Mozes could write an article about a study of one single synthetic cannabinoid compound and relate that study to “medical marijuana.”

First of all, this compound is but one of many cannabinoids that most medical researchers and even law enforcement officials feel should be tested for their efficacy as potential drugs. This has nothing to do with the current laws that permit the smoking of whole marijuana in states that passed so-called medical marijuana laws.

In this study, this synthetically produced compound was injected into the subject rats. Drugs are used either through pills or tablets, injections or even inhalers, not smoked.

Mozes did note that even the head researcher noted, “This treatment is not the same as smoking marijuana. Whether smoking marijuana can produce the same effect, we just don’t know.”

What we do know is:

–The U.S. Public Health Service terminated its smoked marijuana research project when it found there was no scientific evidence that the drug was assisting patients, and it issued a warning that smoking marijuana as a form of medical therapy may actually be harmful to some patients.

–Since 2000, the California Center for Medical Cannabis Research has gained approval for 14 trials using smoked marijuana in human beings and three trials in laboratory and animal models. It has concluded that not one of these researchers has found scientific proof that smoked marijuana is medicine.

–The 1999 Institute of Medicine report on “medical marijuana” indicated there was medical potential for some of the cannabinoid compounds found in the marijuana plant and stated that clinical trials of these compounds should be done with the goal of developing rapid-onset, reliable and safe delivery systems. The report stated that in no way did the institute wish to suggest that patients should, under any circumstances, medicate themselves with marijuana. The study concluded there is no future in smoked marijuana as medicine.

–That the America Medical Association, the American Glaucoma Society, the American Academy of Ophthalmology, the American Cancer Society and the International Federation of Multiple Sclerosis Societies have all taken stands against smoked marijuana as medicine.

Stop adding to the confusion between smoked marijuana and individual cannabinoid compounds found in the marijuana plant. Keep in mind that we don’t eat moldy bread to get penicillin, we don’t chew foxglove flowers to get digitalis, we don’t eat poppy seeds to get morphine and we don’t suck venom from snakes to get anti-venom. The marijuana plant is not medicine.

Terrence P. Farley is first assistant prosecutor, Ocean County, New Jersey, and director of the Ocean County Narcotic Strike Force. His comments are in response to Marijuana Compound


Filed under: Social Affairs :
Doctors Warn of the Hazards of So-called Medical Marijuana Former Federal Official Calls Legislation a 21st Century Trojan Horse


Washington, DC (5/4/05) – Members of the medical community and a respected former official of the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration responded with deep concern to legislation introduced in Congress today, intended to legalize a dangerous and harmful drug. Calling the debate on legalizing crude, so-called medical marijuana a 21st century Trojan horse designed to ultimately lead to the legalization of a hazardous drug, members of the medical community and a respected former official of the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration challenged Congress and everyday Americans to reject this dangerous ploy.

“Beyond the issue of smoke being an inherently unhealthy drug delivery system, smoked marijuana contains an unquantified mix of thousands of poorly understood chemicals that cannot pass muster as a modern medicine. Doctors need to be able to prescribe precise amounts of specific chemicals to treat specific illnesses for a substance to be considered a modern medicine,” according to Dr. Robert DuPont, President of the Institute for Behavior and Health and a practicing psychiatrist and Clinical Professor of Psychiatry at Georgetown University Medical School.

“The drug approval system in the US today is based on careful, scientific demonstration of safety and efficacy. Approving “medicines” by legislation or ballot initiatives is a dangerous rejection of the lifesaving drug approval system that is relied upon not only in the United States but throughout the world,” DuPont added. “So-called medical marijuana can never pass medical muster for one reason, it is not safe. Legalizing it as a drug will set the clock of modern medicine back to a time when, as a young country, Americans were exposed to a host of often benign and sometimes deadly medical “cure-alls” sold from the back of a horse-drawn cart,” according to Dr. Eric Voth, an Internal Medicine and Addiction Medicine Specialist and an internationally recognized expert on various aspects of drug abuse, pain management, and appropriate prescribing practices.

“As physicians, we sympathize with the well-intentioned patients who believe using crude, so-called medical marijuana is in their best interest. Let there be no mistake, for every symptom of every illness, there is a better medicine, a better therapy than crude, so-called medical marijuana,” Voth continued. “Crude marijuana should not be considered under any circumstance because it is unsafe for use, even under medical supervision,” Voth added.

“Since when is burning leaves good medicine? In the United States, the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has been deciding what is safe and efficacious for over 50 years,” according to Peter Bensinger, former administrator of the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration. “The FDA, World Health Organization, United Nations Commission on Narcotic Drugs and a host of other health organizations including the American Cancer Society oppose crude smoked marijuana as a medicine. And rightly so,” he continued.

“The push for legalized crude so-called medical marijuana is part of a strategy by a group called the Marijuana Policy Project, whose goal is to legalize marijuana,” Bensinger said. “Make no mistake, the issue of so-called medical marijuana is a Trojan horse for legalizing the drug itself and for making it available without regard to medical science,” he added.

Marijuana is harmful and illegal, not only in the United States but in 138 different countries. “The dangers of embracing crude so-called medical marijuana are most serious in terms of health, public policy, medicine, treaty obligations and the message it sends to our children and young adults, who fortunately in the past few years have used less marijuana than before,” Bensinger continued. “The risks of marijuana are being increasingly recognized by young people as well as by the scientific community. Let’s not fall into the trap that crude so-called medical marijuana represents,” he concluded.

Facts about Marijuana:

• Of the 7.1 million Americans suffering from illegal drug dependence or abuse, 60% are dependent on or are abusing marijuana. (National Survey on Drug Use and Health 2003)

• More young people are now in treatment for marijuana dependency than for alcohol or for all other illegal drugs combined. (SAMHSA Treatment Episode Data Set 2000)

• In fact, young people under 26 represent 55% of the overall dependent or abusing population. (National Survey on Drug Use and Health 2003)

• Of all teenagers in drug treatment, about 62% had a primary marijuana diagnosis in 2000. (SAMHSA Treatment Episode Data Set 2000)

Source: Press Release cited by Center for Effective Drug Abuse Research & Statistics May 2005. email: biullwall@sbcglobal.net
Filed under: Social Affairs :

Doctors have attacked the government’s National Drug Strategy for failing to tackle drinking and smoking in early life. ‘[The strategy] was set up with crime-reduction on mind – and for that reason it’s designed to tackle illegal drug use only,’ Dr Vasco Fernandes, consultant physician in alcohol and drug addiction, told public health doctors at a British Medical Association conference. Delegates voted for the government to set up accessible addiction services for young people and to focus on smoking prevention. Most drug addicts did not progress straight to heroin or crack cocaine, but began with the ‘gateway drugs’, smoking and drinking – problems which the government was leaving to other agencies, according to Dr Fernandes. ‘If we are serious about preventing addiction to both legal and illegal drugs, we must have better services to tackle these problems among young people, and they must be co-ordinated into the national drug strategy,’ he said. To do otherwise was to spend time ‘locking the door after the horse has well and truly bolted’. The conference called for a review of 24-hour drinking, including public debate. Dr Noel Olsen, chair of the Education and Research Council, acknowledged that health-related problems from alcohol abuse outweighed those from illegal drugs, for the population as a whole.

Source: DrinkandDrugs.net June 2005
Filed under: Social Affairs :

 

Maine: Accidental drug-overdose deaths have reached record levels in Maine, with increases recorded in all parts of the state through 2004. These deaths represent a 20% increase over a record establish in 2001. The state is experiencing more cocaine overdoses, along with a continuing problem with heroin and prescription drugs.

Source: Portland Press Herald, Drug overdoses in Maine hit record levels June 10, 2005


Minnesota: Minneapolis law enforcement officials are seeing greatly increased amounts of marijuana in the city, that it may be a result of not only profitability, but lighter jail sentences (law allows 1½ ounces of marijuana [yields 60-75 ‘joints’] to receive a petty misdemeanor charge and a fine) and social acceptance in Minneapolis. In the three cases involving thousand-pound seizures, two of the dealers admitted bringing in more than 10,000 pounds a year before they were caught. Police are also seeing serious crime up 7.5% over the same period one year ago. It is also noted that the city has a growing demand for marijuana. 90% of the marijuana seen there comes from Mexico.

Source: Star Tribune (Minneapolis), September 4, 2005]


Oregon: The State Medical Examiner reported (March 2005) that drug-related deaths increased 4% during 2004, with the highest number of deaths (94) attributable to heroin, followed by methamphetamine at 78 deaths. Cocaine took 66 lives in 2004, giving this drug category the distinction of recording the greatest increase in number of deaths over 2003 when cocaine deaths were 53.

Source: State Medical Examiner Releases 2004 Drug-Related Deaths Statistics, 03/14/2005


Comment: These three news snippets from different parts of the USA show more drug use, lighter sentences, increased serious crime and increased deaths from drugs. Drug prevention and a less liberal attitude to possession of drugs might reverse these statistics.

Filed under: Social Affairs :

By Grant Smith

TOO MANY Tayside children mistakenly think they are “bullet proof” when it comes to cannabis use, a senior drugs worker said yesterday.

Mike Burns, director of Dundee Drugs and Aids Project, said there was a need for much clearer guidance to be given about the dangers of cannabis, something which had been proved by research again and again.

Another senior figure in youth work, Peer Education Project co-ordinator Fiona Bryson, said that confusion over the legal status of cannabis may have led young people to believe it is ok for them to use it.

The project, based at The Corner drop-in centre in Dundee, works with older children to teach them how to give information on drugs and alcohol to Year 7 pupils.

Ms Bryson said she was concerned that the reclassification of cannabis from a Class B drug to the lower status of Class C had left many young people with the impression that possession for personal use was allowed.

The pair were speaking in the wake of the release of figures from Tayside Police which showed the number of 11 to 16-year-olds in the region charged with drugs offences has more than doubled between 2002 and last year.

In 2002 there were 79 people in that age group charged with possession or supply. Almost all of the offences involved cannabis, although there were a handful of cases involving amphetamine, ecstasy or heroin.

By last year the total number of cases had risen to 175, with all but 10 of those relating to cannabis. There were five each for amphetamine and heroin. That included two under-17s caught supplying heroin.

Tayside Police said peer pressure may be influencing children to try drugs.

Ms Bryson explained that she came into contact with a lot of under-16s and there were clear signs of confusion about the legal status of cannabis and differences in the law between England and Scotland.

“The reclassification of cannabis from Class B to Class C has meant a lot of young people got the message that it’s ok to possess it for their own use, but in Scotland it’s not ok.”

She was worried that this was also affecting young people’s attitudes towards the safety of cannabis use, with the known health risks being downplayed.

There was now evidence that cannabis use could worsen mental health problems. Starting at an early age could result in problems arising earlier than they would have done. Smoking cannabis also entailed using tobacco and that was addictive and had health risks of its own.

Ms Bryson noted that the Government was now reconsidering its position on cannabis classification. While that raised a concern about the situation being confused once more, there was a potentially positive outcome if ministers came out with a clear message that cannabis was more harmful than had been thought.

Ms Bryson added, “At the Peer Education Project we don’t condone drug use at all, but we will support young people in getting the information they need to make their own choices. There is support out there for people who feel they have made the wrong choice for them.”

Mr Burns agreed that cannabis was a significant problem, although he would have expected to see more arrests relating to heroin as there was evidence its increased availability in the area was resulting in more young people taking it.

He said the downgrading of cannabis was a major factor in its increased use, explaining, “Young people are interpreting that to mean that cannabis is not a problem. There is a failure to grasp that it’s still an illegal substance.

“We try to talk to them about the long-term mental health consequences of cannabis misuse but young people believe that they are bullet proof.

“They think we are scare-mongering and their attitude is ‘it won’t happen to me’.

“They think the information we are putting out is a conspiracy by older people to tell them that cannabis is harmful.

“They take it to chill out and they think there are no consequences at all. We are saying that’s not the case.”

National body DrugScope warned in a recent report, “Novice users who do not know what to expect may find the experience of using cannabis particularly distressing, especially if strong variants are involved.”

Source: The Courier. UK. July 2005
Filed under: Social Affairs :

 Two editorials from The Trentonian newspaper adding weight to the case against needle exchange programmes……..

You often hear those who are opposed to supplying addicts with clean needles at public expense say the loony idea is just a first step. The long-term goal of advocates, they declare, is the full legalization of drugs.

We doubt that such a broad generalization can be validly asserted regarding advocates who are championing pending legislation to set up a needle-exchange program in New Jersey. Some advocates probably do favor decriminalization to some, extent or another. Others (few in number, we suspect) may favor sweeping legalization. In any event, time devoted to guessing at people’s motives is seldom time constructively spent. Although we’re adamantly opposed to a needle welfare dole for addicts, we’re willing to take advocates at their word when they say they’re motivated by the belief that supplying New Jersey addicts with sterile needles will help curtail the spread of HIV.

Having said that, however, we would point out a reality there’s no ducking about New Jersey’s needle-hand- out initiative:  To a significant extent, it is a de facto legalization itself.   A state government-supervised program would hand out needles to addicts with the express understanding that those needles were to be used to inject a “controlled dangerous substance” banned by law. So the needle handout would become to some extent – the extent depending on the level of program participation – a de facto legalization of one of the most addictive, potentially lethal, crime-breeding street drugs in circulation.

And to a (hopefully) limited degree, a needle-exchange program entails de jure legalization of heroin on the streets. If the government is going to dole out needles to addicts with the express understanding addicts will use those needles to mainline heroin, the government can hardly then descend on these addicts and collar them for shooting up when the addicts did so with the government’s own assistance.

Therefore, pending legislation not only legalizes the possession of hypodermic needles without a prescription but adds the stipulation: “This provision shall extend to a syringe or hypodermic needle that contains a residual amount of a controlled dangerous substance or controlled substance analog;” How much is a “residual amount”?  Not much, presumably. But the legislation doesn’t say. Whatever quantity of heroin a “residual amount” might ultimately be construed to be by New Jersey’s activist judiciary, the possession of that quantity would be fully legalized. 

Is it entirely inconceivable that there might be a risk of legal liability when the state government involves itself in the drug underworld to this extent – to the extent of distributing hypodermic needles to addicts, legalizing the possession of hypodermic needles without a prescription and stipulating that syringes may legally contain a residual quantity of heroin? 

Let us set aside for the time being the equally if not more serious issue of moral liability – the issue of the state’s playing the role of an official enabler of drug addiction. What is the state’s legal liability when an addict fatally overdoses, as addicts not uncommonly do, using one of those state-supplied needles?  What is the state’s legal liability when one of those addicts, enabled to pursue his addiction with the help of state-supplied needles, resorts to crime to subsidize his craving for heroin, as addicts commonly do?  What is the state’s legal liability if a child near a needle-exchange site pricks himself or herself with a state-distributed, later-discarded, contaminated needle?

Are advocates able to say with certainty, or anything reasonably approaching it, that there is no risk of legal liability involved?  Are advocates able to offer such reassurance in a state notorious for its shark-like plaintiffs bar and a judiciary that’s a notorious patsy for expansive liability claims?

Needle-handout advocates insist here would be “rehabilitation outreach” efforts to accompany needle exchanges. But what if it turns out there aren’t. Or what if those efforts are insufficient according to the legal analysis of a resourceful attorney for an addict plaintiff?

Is an addict needle dole worth these risks when the premise of advocates  – that needle handouts discourage needle sharing by addicts  –  remains a topic much in scientific dispute?

 Source: editorial, the trentonian, sunday, december 14, 2003

 

ADDICT NEEDLE DOLES: STILL A TERRIBLE IDEA

 
Oh no, not again.
….    Yes again.

Like the telemarketers who keep calling at dinner time, the snake oil peddlers are again pitching their panacea for heroin addiction and HIV.

Their miracle cure is simple, as miracle cures tend to be. Simply have the state establish a welfare needle dole for addicts. The state would become a pusher of sorts but would supply only the syringes, not the dope.(Not at first anyway.)

The rationale is that if taxpayer-funded sterile needles are distributed to addicts, the addicts will cease sharing contaminated needles and spreading HIV. Heroin addicts are leading victims of the virus in New Jersey.

A movement is stirring in the state legislature again, as it does from time to time, with Gov. Jim McGreevey’s encouragement, to set up a needle exchange program, an NEP.  Needle-exchange sites tend to degenerate into fetid pockets of crimes. So it is perhaps understandable that the governor and needle-dole advocates like Assemblyman Reed Gusciora are evasive about where they would locate the program. It’s a safe bet, however, that it wouldn’t be located anywhere near their nice neighborhoods in Princeton.

Advocates of addict needle doles take the snooty position that any who have doubts about the idea may be dismissed as moralizing, right-wing, fundamentalist cranks who are more comfortable with superstition than science. There’s a facile trendiness to the NEP crusade. The advocates assert that “studies” have proven conclusively the efficacy of needle handouts, as if the issue is scientifically settled beyond dispute. It is not. Yes there are such studies, many of which, on closer examination, prove to be the products of advocacy, not dispassionate science. These studies generally are based on a key methodological flaw. They rely on self-reporting results from addicts, a notoriously unreliable group. The studies of existing NEP’s elsewhere tend to take the addict’s word for it when the addicts show up at the needle dole for a new batch of syringes and aver that they never shared the old batch with fellow addicts.

NEP advocates note that needle doles have the support of, for example, the American Medical Association. That venerable professional and lobbying organization has no special expertise in the subject area, however. There are, though, other reputable sources with expertise in the area who have raised questions about the miracle-cure claims of NEP activists.
A 1995 National Research Council Institutes of Medicine study reported that 39 percent of addicts in needle-exchange programs actually continue to share needles. A1997 report in the American Journal of Epidemiology suggested that addicts in such programs may be even more inclined than other addicts to share needles. The New England Journal of Medicine reported in 1994 that addicts have a high incidence of HIV infection not just because of needles but also because of their tendency to engage in risky behavior, such as prostitution. A University of Pennsylvania study of 415 addicts similarly concluded that more addicts die from overdoses, violent crime and various health problems than from AIDS.

A recent op-ed by an NEP activist arrogantly asserted that those who dare question the NEP orthodoxy would have “politics trump science.”  But it’s the needle-dole activists who would have politics trump science – and common sense as well.

It is a patently ludicrous notion that needle-using addicts – whose lives, by that very fact, have taken a turn toward irresponsibility and recklessness – can be depended on to show fastidious discipline in not sharing their doled-out needles with other addicts. Addicts are not, by a large, in a frame of mind to make rational judgements. Especially not when they are in the zonked-out stage known as “nodding.”

Those who work with addicts will tell you that some of the most serious obstacles to rehabilitation are the addict’s family and friends. By well-meaning acts of compassion, family and friends unwittingly enable addicts to avoid taking the difficult steps toward dealing with their addiction. “Enablers”, these family and friends are called. 

Make no mistake about it, what needle exchange activists are proposing is that the State of New Jersey become the biggest enabler of them all. 

Source:  EDITORIAL, THE TRENTONIAN, MONDAY DECEMBER 2, 2003

 

Filed under: Social Affairs :

The MPP, one of the pro-legalization groups funded by George Soros, apparently has decided that most of those in Montana who claim they need to smoke pot for various medical ailments cannot afford to pay the $200 one-time state fee to register with the state, and is offering to pay it for them. This is certainly one way to expedite their legalization strategy in Montana, and no doubt will be effective in getting people to try marijuana who otherwise would not have. This was brought to our attention by Steven Steiner, Director of DAMMADD (www.dammadd.com ) Below is a link to the article from the Billings Gazette as well as an excerpt from the article.

http://www.billingsgazette.com/index.php?id=1&display=rednews/2005/01/19/build/state/50-group-help.inc

Billings Gazette, Billings, Montana January 19, 2005

Filed under: Social Affairs :

 

Author: Jon Ferry

Dr. Volkow Says Cannabis Should Not Be Legalized

Marijuana is an addictive drug that can blunt people’s memory, damage their lungs and even cause them to become psychotic. And it should not be legalized.

It’s an uncompromising American assessment. And, coming from anyone but Dr.Nora Volkow, you might suspect he or she had been smoking something, especially here in the pot capital of socialist Canada.

But there are good reasons why British Columbians, especially teens vulnerable to the marijuana industry’s siren call, should listen.

For one thing, Volkow hails from a half-Jewish, half-Spanish family which has endured great suffering. She is the great-granddaughter of Russian revolutionary Leon Trotsky. And she grew up in the Mexican house where he was assassinated with an ice axe.

But, despite the turmoil this caused her and her three sisters, Volkow managed to become one of North America’s top drug-abuse researchers.

Last year, she was appointed director of the U.S. National Institute on Drug Abuse, which funds most of the world’s research into the health aspects of drug use and addiction.

Volkow herself has done imaging studies on the brains of long-term marijuana users. And she has witnessed first-hand the frightening paranoia the drug can cause.

“I’ve seen them become psychotic,” she told me yesterday during a working visit to Vancouver.

Volkow is equally insistent marijuana harms a person’s ability to drive an auto, despite what diehard Vancouver pot activists claim. “Of course, you can be marijuana-impaired,” she stressed.

It also impairs one’s thinking. “Over all, studies have shown that you cannot learn as well, that you can’t memorize as well,” she said.

Now, marijuana often gets billed as a happy drug. But, Volkow points to a Harvard study indicating heavy pot smokers lead unhappy lives.

“Ultimately, you are really disrupting the chances that you will succeed in your life,” she said. Also, smoking pot increases the likelihood of a wide range of lung diseases. And so on.

No, don’t count Volkow among those eggheads who think marijuana should be legalized: “It will end up increasing the number of people that get exposed to marijuana on a regular basis. And that will increase the probability of these individuals becoming addicted.”

As for heroin addicts, she says, it’s much better to give them treatment rather than simply a “safe” place in which to shoot up.

Volkow insists she’s not a political person. After all, her own family’s experience with politics has been far from pleasant. Her father, an engineer, wound up with Trotsky in Mexico in 1938 because “no one else in her family was alive.”

Myself, I don’t think people can help being at least a little political.

Volkow’s visit, for example, was co-sponsored by the U.S. Consulate General in Vancouver, which can hardly be considered politically neutral — at least on drug issues.

Nevertheless, I don’t believe we in B.C. should let the prevailing whiffs of anti-Americanism cloud our judgement in the great pot debate.

Whatever our political stripe, we should heed strongly the warnings of the great-granddaughter of one of socialism’s great grandfathers.

Source: +http://www.canada.com/vancouver/theprovince/
Filed under: Social Affairs :

 

The following item was received in March 2005 from a drug prevention group in the USA.

The Drug Policy Alliance was formerly known as the Drug Policy Foundation. Chances are high that if your state legislature has a bill to promote “Smoking Marijuana Cigarettes as Medicine,” it was sponsored by the Drug Policy Alliance/Foundation.

Under the name, Drug Policy Foundation, the group actually developed a “Safe Crack Smoking Pipe” which was distributed with the following cautionary tips:

“Avoid cut lips”

“Have safer sex”

“Be careful with your stem or pipe”

“Don’t get cut lips! Cuts caused by sharp or hot pipes can expose pipers and others to infections diseases, especially when you have oral sex without a condom, dental dam, or a latex barrier.” (Insight Magazine, 12/97)

The legalizers call this “Harm Reduction.” Parents call it “Harm Promotion.

Legalizers regularly say they “don’t want children to use drugs; however, recently both the Drug Policy Alliance and the Marijuana Policy Project have participated in funding/distributing a new book called “It’s Just A Plant” A Children’s Book on Marijuana” that trivializes and even makes marijuana seem like normal behaviour. For more information on this book, go to Drug Policy Alliance (http://www.drugpolicy.org/ ) and type in “It’s Just A Plant.” The child who is the main character in the book appears to be between the ages of 5 – 9. At one point, she exclaims: “Wow! I’m going to plant some marijuana at home!”

Marsha Rosenbaum, a longtime legalizers wrote the “afterward” for the book and currency trader, George Soros, is listed with those who “inspired” the book!

Source:Drugwatch International E-mail.  March 2005
Filed under: Social Affairs :

will inevitably  impact on the mental health of the binge users, especially children and teenagers and those who were vulnerable to mental health problems anyway.

Politicians can’t be trusted on the cannabis issue. The debate about cannabis is back in the public domain after Charles Clarke. the home secretary, decided that the government is not going to lose face by reversing David Blunkett’s monumental boob by reclassifying cannabis from class B to C. The political solution is going to be a public health education campaign that will be a complete waste of money.  Where is the evidence that such health campaigns do anything but let politicians off the hook by pretending that they are doing something useful about a health issue?

It is clear that politicians, and especially successive government ministers, cannot be trusted with the cannabis issue. They only listen to the so-called experts such as the police, the Advisory Committee on Drug Misuse and a few tame medics who are in the pay of the government. They do not take heed of drugs workers, youth workers, mental health organisations, parents, cannabis users or the young people who are to be the target of the health campaign.

Also missing from the debate are the following key factors that are behind the problems that cannabis will, in the long-term, cause our society. Young people will not take any heed of government campaigns on cannabis because they have already been badly misled by Blunkett and others into believing that this is a relatively harmless drug, hence its downgrading. This just confirms the belief of young people and many adults that cannabis is a natural substance with little danger attached to it. Blunkett promised a cannabis education campaign and it never happened; if it had, the only message the government could send out is that this is an illegal drug with a lower risk than class A or B drugs. But, then, we all knew that already. My second concern is that the quality (THC content) of cannabis varies enormously but is generally very low compared with 10 years ago, with the exceptions of skunk and home grown varieties. The result is that to get the hallucinogenic effects users desire, they need to use vast (binge-level) quantities on what is often a daily basis These high consumption levels of cannabis, with the associated high intake of tobacco, are massively increasing the health problems that users can expect over 10-15 years of regular cannabis use.

We are also now led to believe that the human brain is not fully wired-up until about 21 years of age; so heavy use of a drug such as cannabis from childhood, or the teenage period into adulthood,

The committee on drug misuse that advises the government on such matters is loaded with academics, medics and others who are deciding on the categories of drugs from a mainly pharmacological perspective. They do not seem to allow for the social factors such as how large numbers of people might use the drugs they are considering. The last issue in this whole debacle is that Scottish law is not English law so the police in Scotland who do not have the power to caution a person found with cannabis (an illegal substance) are duty-bound to report offenders to the procurator-fiscal for action. They cannot take the softly, softly English police approach of confiscating the drug, cautioning the offender and letting them go unless they have been caught before or are near schools, etc.

Max Cruickshank, Health Issues 13 Lana Ridge, Hamilton.

Source: The Herald, Glasgow; 25 Jan 2006
Filed under: Social Affairs :

Illegal imports of a UK-made drug have been credited with a steep rise in the number of drug abusers in Georgia.

Crushed on pavements, tossed by the road or in the entrance halls of apartment blocks, the used syringes tell a story of rising addiction. The needles seen across Tbilisi, the capital of former Soviet Georgia, are discarded by addicts to Subutex, a treatment for opiate abuse that has ironically become the country’s most popular new drug.

Manufactured in the UK, Subutex pills are available on doctor’s prescription in more than 30 countries worldwide – including most of western Europe – as a supervised treatment for heroin withdrawal.

Subutex contains buprenorphine, a synthetic opiate like methadone that prompts a mild euphoria and has been credited with a 79% decrease in overdose deaths from opioids in France in the last decade.

But instead of being used to curb withdrawal, thousands of pills are being snapped up by “doctor shoppers” in countries where it is legal who then sell them on to the black market.

The pills are illegal in Georgia but first started appearing on the streets about four years ago. They are smuggled into the country by used-car dealers who sell them on at home at a huge mark-up. Drug addicts then dissolve and inject the Subutex, often in dangerous cocktails with tranquillisers and antihistamines.

And, despite claims that President Mikhail Saakashvili brought a fresh wind of democracy to Georgia when he took power in the “rose revolution” three years ago, funding to battle drug abuse has since been slashed to an all-time low.

Georgia’s annual budget for fighting drug abuse has been cut from 500,000 lari (about £150,000) in 1998 to 50,000 lari in 2006.

The International Narcotics Control Board estimates there has been an 80% increase in the number of drug abusers in Georgia since 2003, a spurt it attributes to the growing availability of illegally imported Subutex.

“It’s a wave of addiction comparable to a tsunami,” says Jana Javakhishvili, a project manager at the UN-backed South Caucasus Anti-Drug programme in Tbilisi.

Last year, 39% of patients treated in Georgian detox centres were treated for Subutex abuse, up from 29% the previous year. The influx of the drug is thought to have caused an overall rise in addiction, pushing the total number of drug users beyond 250,000 in a population of just 5 million.

“Subutex is an injected drug so any abuse is closely linked to blood-borne diseases,” says Javakhishvili. “People are sharing needles. If this increase in abuse goes on, it could cause a big increase in the HIV infection rate – which thus far has been mercifully low in Georgia.”

Officials in Tbilisi admit they are woefully ill equipped to deal with the problem.

“We’re fighting a big business,” says Tamaz Zakalashvili, of the interior ministry’s Unit for Combat of Drug Addiction and Narcobusiness. “Subutex is the most profitable drug. You can buy seven tablets for $20 [about £11] in France and then sell each one here for $120. That’s a hell of a mark-up.”

For now, the flow appears nigh impossible to stem. Georgian police and customs officials have seized 10,000 Subutex tablets since the beginning of last year, even catching a diplomat who was bringing in supplies in a diplomatic bag. However, a much larger quantity gets into the country because the small packets of drugs are odourless and Georgia lacks the necessary detectors to scan vehicles.

For addicts, the drug is cheaper and more accessible than heroin. Dealers are numerous and each tablet can be shared into five or six doses. Irakli, 35, a recovering addict at Tbilisi’s only methadone clinic, says he spent about $900 per month on his Subutex habit. “The effect is not as strong as heroin but psychologically it’s a real addiction. A lot of people say it’s much harder to give up Subutex.”

Reckitt Benckiser, the manufacturer of Subutex, told Guardian Unlimited it was “deeply concerned about any reports of misuse or diversion” but insisted the drug was safe and effective under medical supervision.

Khatuna Todadze, who runs the methadone clinic and is scientific director of the Georgian Research Institute on Addiction, blames the government for a lack of action over the drug crisis. “Nobody is working seriously to solve this problem,” she says.

There are just five state detox clinics in the country: four in Tbilisi and one in the city of Batumi. Under new legislation introduced in 2003, every addict has the right to be treated at least once for free in a state clinic.

However, in practice, funds are insufficient to cover the cost and all patients pay the $400-$700 for treatment themselves.

“Basically, there is no state response to drug addiction,” says Javakhishvili of SCAD. “NGOs are filling the gap but their efforts are piecemeal. We can’t go on like this.”

Source: by Tom Parfitt Guardian Unlimited Friday August 4, 2006

Filed under: Social Affairs :

The government’s softly-softly approach to cannabis will leave young people facing a mental-health time-bomb, a senior Scottish Labour MP warned last night. Bill Tynan, normally a loyal back-bencher, turned on Ministers who have failed to heed his cautions that downgrading cannabis from Class B to Class C will produce a generation of drug abusers. He said their decision meant that cannabis was now ranked by teenagers alongside cigarettes and alcohol – and many believed it was no longer illegal. Mr Tynan said: “Without doubt reclassification has sent mixed messages about the dangers of cannabis, and despite information to the contrary, many young people believe that cannabis is now legal, just like cigarettes and alcohol. “But research has shown cannabis smoke to be more dangerous than tobacco smoke. There is also large and growing evidence that cannabis is a major contributory factor in the onset of mental-health problems ranging from depression to schizophrenia.” 

Mr Tynan went on: “I believe that the reclassification of cannabis was a dangerous mistake, and that history will confirm that view.” Mr Tynan was elected MP for Hamilton South in 1999, shortly after Strathclyde’s 100th drug death for the year was reported in his constituency. He told The Scotsman yesterday: “The girl who died was the same age as my daughter; it affected me enormously. So I was outraged when the government gave MPs just 90 minutes to debate reclassification of cannabis, it wasn’t nearly enough time to explore all the issues. I am not going to let this go because I firmly believe Ministers have made a major mistake that will have serious ramifications for the future.”  Mr Tynan, who has voted against the government only three times in his five-year parliamentary career, secured a prestigious debate on cannabis in Westminster Hall this week. He told MPs he had been contacted by many drugs experts from universities, hospitals and the legal profession who were appalled at the decision legally to downgrade cannabis.

 


Professor Griffith Edwards, who established the National Addiction Centre at the Maudsley Hospital, said: “There is enough evidence now to make one seriously worried about the possibility of cannabis producing long-term impairment of brain function.” Mr Tynan said he was calling on the government to reopen the debate and look again at the scientific evidence against downgrading the status of cannabis. He said: “I am not convinced the government will reverse their mistaken decision to reclassify cannabis, but they should look at all the evidence.” Caroline Flint, the Home Office minister, said the new status of cannabis was giving police more scope to tackle hard drugs. She said, however, that the situation was under constant monitoring.
Filed under: Political Sector,Social Affairs :

By Joey Thompson, The Province

If you’re ticked at the fact Vancouver’s supervised injection site has done little to convince addicts to kick the habit you won’t like what I have to say about the city’s so-called drug treatment court.

The program on West Pender Street in downtown Vancouver is almost halfway through a four-year, $3.6-million drive to help junkies get clean so they aren’t compelled to nick grandma’s jewelry or your sound system, and yet home and business break-ins as well as auto-theft rates are as high, if not higher, around here than they’ve ever been.

That could explain why no one from government has been trumpeting the project’s successes despite the offer to addicts of free counselling, out-patient therapy, training and education, courtesy of taxpayers and a parade of well-meaning defence lawyers, prosecutors, probation officers, court liaison workers and addiction counsellors.

So why don’t do-good programs work here?

The recovering addicts who replied to last week’s column know only too well. Barry Joneson, a member of the drug court’s community consultation board, says his life as a Burnaby businessman is a far cry from his earlier world on the dank, greasy concrete behind a dumpster in the Downtown Eastside. It was the will to change, not access to handouts, that turned him around.

And that’s the problem. There’s no incentive for junkies to straighten out. The few who are arrested on our streets rarely see the inside of a cell. As Cordova Street dweller John Parsons put it, “judges don’t lock up here.”

Indeed, why get clean when life is cushy and you have liberal use of free medical and social services as well as drugs?

Addicts here have it too good, these two say, unlike the dire straits many in the U.S. find themselves in. They face serious time there if convicted. With fewer options, U.S. drug users are apt to take an offer of help more seriously.

“But in Canada, down and out means you see a doctor and go on disability [hep C, HIV, bad back, sore toe, etc.] and then get on the methadone maintenance program,” Joneson said. “It’s a junkie’s dream come true; someone pays your way in life and gives you drugs as well.

“It has nothing to do with compassion and everything to do with the birth of an industry that caters to addicts through the various services available to them. There are billions upon billions of dollars to be made and that’s why it is such a powerful pro drug/less consequence lobby.”

But Joneson warns we are enabling addicts to live a life that is arguably worse than death.

” I know. I lived that life for over 20 years,” he told me. “And I’m sure glad there were no government shooting galleries or free heroin when I was using, as I probably would not have hit the bottom that was necessary for me to instil the desire to seek recovery.”

Source: The Vancouver Province (British Columbia) E-mail: jthompson@png.canwest.com September 24, 2004 Friday

Filed under: Drug Specifics,Social Affairs :

By Peter Stoker for HNN News

 
British MPs vote to demote cannabis to a lesser grade of significance.

What do you do when you have put your name to a policy proposal that is seemingly becoming more unpopular by the day? How about inserting it into the Parliamentary calendar at short notice, with limited time, to catch critics off balance? If it could be sandwiched in-between more inflammatory items this should conveniently distract the media – and should it happen that the official Opposition are contemporaneously pre-occupied with their own tragedy, this would indicate an ideal time to slip it through.

But just in case things turn nasty in the House, with risk that the messenger might get shot, it would be prudent to be somewhere else – and let the apprentice take the flak.

Thus it was, yesterday in Parliament. Squeezed between Prime Minister’s Questions (with Tory leader Ian Duncan-Smith possibly within sight of his own execution), a major debate on Northern Ireland, and other business. Opponents given 6 days notice at most – and several got less. And with Caroline Flint deputising for the noticeably absent Home Secretary.

The debate on reclassification of cannabis took place in a House unusually crowded for this kind of issue, which can be explained by its juxtaposition with the other big agenda items. What was not  explained, and caused several MPs in all parties to complain bitterly, was why the debate was limited to 90 minutes, which in effect gave backbenchers only 30 minutes for discussion after the opening speeches were made. As one of them, Peter Wishart, pointed out, the next agenda item, the Mersey Tunnels Bill, hardly competed with cannabis as a subject of national importance, but had been given unlimited time (and in the event took well over three hours).

Labour MP John Mann risked the disapproval of his bosses by saying that the presence of “three-line whips all around the place” was “entirely inappropriate on an issue such as this” – and pronounced himself not persuaded by the choice of arguments utilised by Minister Caroline Flint on behalf of the Government (though he did, in the event, vote in favour of the principle of reclassification).

BLUNT SPEAKING

Shadow Home Secretary Oliver Letwin was equally unimpressed by Ms Flint. Abandoning his usual urbanity, he described the hapless substitute for Mr Blunkett as “all over the place”. It was evident to onlookers that this was not a fight of her own choosing; not only had Mr Blunkett left her to face the howling pack, but her predecessor in the post of ‘Minister with Drugs Portfolio’ – Bob Ainsworth – uttered never a word. Another MP who had been unstinting in championing a liberalising approach through his zealous chairmanship of the Home Affairs Select Committee, but strangely silent today, was Labour MP Chris Mullin.

These were not the only instances of political laryngitis. The backbencher with the House record for number of questions asked, Mr Paul Flynn, an ardent Labour advocate of drug legalisation and consummate interrupter of other speakers, intervened but once, asking of Ms Flint, if she would “give way” (parliamentary parlance for ‘Can I get a word in?). “No” she said, and that was the last we heard of him. For now.

Paul Flynn’s regular Labour team-mate in arguing for drug law liberalisation has been Dr Brian Iddon, a university lecturer from the northwest of England. He too was muted in his contribution, but fulsome in his praise of the work of DrugScope, the NGO which nets over £3 million per year from the government, and repays this by lobbying the government to weaken its drug laws. DrugScope had produced a document about ‘Gateway’ – the syndrome of progression from one drug to another, and which is frequently associated with cannabis – principally because cannabis is the most-used illegal drug. DrugScope concede that there is such a thing as ‘Gateway’ but are dismissive of it having any significant effect on the use of other drugs in the UK scene – which happily coincides with their push for liberalisation of not only cannabis but ecstasy too. Dr Iddon made this praise in response to remarks by Liberal-Democrat drugs spokesman Mark Oaten, who suggested that a perceived increase in ‘home-grown’ cannabis would of itself separate users from the dealers in other drugs. Revealingly, Mr Oaten answered that he too was a beneficiary of DrugScope’s wisdom, having met their representatives only two days before.

Minister Ms Flint persevered with her task. Government strategy, she said, was always to focus on “… educating young people about the dangers of drugs, preventing drug misuse, combating the dealers, and treating addicts …”. Words that frequently, almost compulsively appeared in her contributions included “honesty”, “credibility” and “maturity”. Reclassification was apparently necessary in order to achieve these higher states of consciousness. The short-sightedness, not to mention expediency of this was breathtaking for some participants, but not to the Minister, who accused others of unfairly indulging in more word games than she was … ‘more spinned against than spinning’.

Oliver Letwin was unrepentant, and clinically took the Minister’s arguments apart. The purpose of this whole effort, he asserted, was the “crypto-legalisation of cannabis, in the sense that most young people will be only marginally deterred from taking it. They may be arrested, and they will be warned – and the warning will be that if they are subsequently arrested they will be warned”. The effect of this reclassification would be “… for more rather than fewer young people to be led into hard drugs”.

The Government’s policy was, he said, in “a dreadful muddle”. He went on to ask “Why have the Government introduced this policy?” He had expected the Minister to reject the position that young people would feel they were still breaking the law; in fact she had confirmed that they would still be acting illegally. He had expected her to deny use would increase; instead she had accepted it would. She had also not denied – as he had expected she might – that under the new legislation there would be no relief from dealer penalties for ‘small scale dealing between friends’. This was neither liberalisation nor repression – it was a “muddled middle”. Referring to his normal, well-mannered approach, he said “I do not specialise in saying such things about my political opponents, but in this case I think that the Home Secretary – who has chosen not to attend the debate for reasons that only he can tell – is seeking spurious, short-term popularity … that is not a responsible way to conduct the government of this country … we should consider the fate of our young people.

In the past, Oliver Letwin has expressed his admiration for David Blunkett, in fulfilling his duties despite the disabling effects of his blindness. But today he made no such concessions in attacking what he saw as reprehensible behaviour, compounded by not being present to face the music. He said “I continue to believe that the Home Secretary does not want to make the argument because he does not have an argument. What he is seeking is short-term popularity, and that is a very bad thing”.

Rejecting the notion of full legalisation, whilst acknowledging that one could construct arguments for this (presumably an olive branch to some right wing libertarians on his own benches) Mr Letwin went on to say that another plausible position was to try to “prevent young people from taking cannabis by doing what is done in Sweden – trying to take more effective measures to deter young people from taking it”.

FACTS AND OPINIONS

Tory MP Graham Brady had made a contribution earlier in the week, in anticipation of this very debate, which moved the Speaker to congratulate him for making his points eloquently. There was no such courtesy from Ms Flint. Referring to the well-understood increase in maximum strength of cannabis worldwide (low-grade ‘weed’ in the hippy Haight-Ashbury 60s and 70s was down to 0.5 percent strength, whilst cultivated grades called ‘skunk’ or nederweed’ can range up to 30 percent strength) and knowing of the major increase of cannabis-related psychoses, Mr Brady asked if it was not therefore “… perverse to be down grading its classification in legislation?” Ms Flint would have none of this. The truth, she claimed, was that “… the scientific evidence does not fit his analysis”. In support, she cited the Forensic Science Service, saying they had demonstrated that the THC content “… does not differ significantly from the cannabis used years ago”. (This will come as a surprise to not a few leading scientists, of the calibre of Professor John Henry of Imperial College, one of the UK’s top experts in the field).

Tom Levitt, Labour, referred to the ‘decades’ of debates and the ‘endless’ reports, citing the Runciman Committee (‘Police Foundation’), the Home Affairs Select Committee (HASC) and the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs (ACMD). Another speaker chipped in later with mention of the Rowntree report. Oliver Letwin’s reaction was unequivocal: “I do not think that a thousand committees will ever diminish the fact that when this order – I realise the Government will use their majority to get it through – and the accompanying legislation have gone through the two Houses of Parliament [Debate in the House of Lords is scheduled for 11th November] young people will be enticed to buy more, or more often, a substance from dangerous criminals, and they will then be led into hard drug use. That is not a rational policy and no number of committees will persuade me that it is”.

Lambeth Labour MP and former Minister Kate Hoey took a different tack in relation to the above-mentioned reporting bodies. The ACMD is presented as a colloquium of most eminent people (and was cited at the outset of this debate by Minister Flint as the body which “provides the scientific evidence on which to base our decisions”). Ms Hoey pointed out that it is “… part of the Home Office (i.e. not independent), is not a scientific advisory panel (there are hardly any scientists on it) and many of its members have no scientific qualifications. It has about 32 members, of whom a substantial number – about 13 – are committed to liberalisation of drug policy. It has no members from any organisations that have publicly said that they are not in favour of liberalisation. I therefore treat with a little bit of caution the assumption that everything they say is right”.

DOOMED TO SUCCESS

Speaking of her own constituency, Lambeth, and its unwanted role as a laboratory for drug policy experiments, and which other MPs supporting reclassification had cited as evidence of successful liberalisation, she went on to say “I have heard so much rubbish talked today about the Lambeth experiment that it would take me a very long time to deal with it. I will not refer to that experiment except to say that it was not a success. It was one of those schemes that was ‘doomed to success’ from the beginning because the Home Office had decided that it would be successful whatever the outcome”.

And finally, to her own Minister, by now more doubtable than redoubtable, she had this to say: “Why are we doing this now? What is the point of it? … We should not go ahead with introducing this measure glibly. I genuinely cannot understand why we are going down this line. Reclassification will move us further down the route of considering drug abuse as normal, and I am not prepared to support that today”.

Nottinghamshire Labour MP John Mann has earned a good reputation in the House for taking a studied approach to the drugs issue. His informal public inquiry into the problems of heroin abuse in his Bassetlaw constituency won wide praise and is now required reading. On this occasion he started by demonstrating his learning of matters in Australia, South Africa, New Zealand and America. He used this to suggest that all drugs should be reclassified – too rich a diet for his fellows or the Minister to digest in such a short timescale. He moved on to praise Sweden for its constructive approach to drug abusers, in particular supporting the use of mandatory treatment, whatever the drug.

From this good beginning in the eyes of prevention advocates, things started to go pear-shaped as he enlarged on his plans for cannabis. In the name of ‘credibility’ (once more) he advanced the “need to separate the drugs market in people’s eyes …” and said he felt reclassification was “… a clarification and a strengthening” rather than a weakening of drugs policy. To do otherwise, he argued, was to “… treat young people as fools … we suggest to young people that these drugs are all the same and that they should say no to drugs. Say no to which drugs?”

Say no to reclassification? Despite the whips, 160 MPs did. With all but a few Liberal-Democrats siding the Government, the vote in favour came to 316. Encouraging for preventionists, but coming second doesn’t really help in politics.

REFLECTIONS OF AN OBSERVER

It is difficult to reconcile John Mann’s criticism – that under the present classification system, all drugs are currently asserted to be the same – with the fact that there are three classes of drugs, not one. The notion that downgrading of cannabis, from Class B to Class C, is essential in order to distinguish it from Class A, has long puzzled many – and not just the dyslexic.

Equally puzzling is the Minister’s emphatic statement that full legalisation of cannabis “ … would lead to a massive increase in the use of cannabis and health problems” – when compared with the blandishments about the effects on prevalence accruing from reclassification. Something like a comparison of ‘full pregnancy’ with being ‘just a teeny bit pregnant’.

The proposition that downgrading is necessary to achieve ‘credibility’ is fraught with risk; what will be the next concession demanded by drug users and their apologists? Credibility is a fickle thing. It is in the nature of drug misuse that escalation is the norm. Must we therefore look forward to a sequence of outcries that ‘the current strategy is incredible’?

To paraphrase Mel Brooks, in speaking of this ill-managed ‘war about how to conduct the war on drugs’, all they want is a little peace … a little piece of cocaine, a little piece of speed …
 

© HNN INTERNATIONAL CENTRE

Filed under: Political Sector :

THE DAY may come when Mr Blunkett wishes he had left well alone.” This was our warning to the Home Secretary 15 months ago over his proposed cannabis legislation — and that day has now come. Later this month, as part of the Government’s Criminal Justice Bill, cannabis will be downgraded from a Class B to a Class C drug, nominally on a level with tranquillisers. But last minute changes to toughen up the legislation have created utter confusion. The way Mr Blunkett initially presented the reclassification was that adults found in possession of small amounts of cannabis were going to be warned, and the drugs seized, but they would not normally be arrested. Now it turns out that police have been told to arrest anyone smoking cannabis in public and all teenagers in possession of the drug, whatever the circumstances. This is the first the public has heard of these changes. Head teachers are now understandably concerned that teenagers will smoke cannabis in the belief that they cannot be arrested for doing so, and then find themselves with a criminal record. Lady Runciman chaired the inquiry which concluded that the law on cannabis caused more harm than it prevented, and prompted David Blunkett to reclassify the drug. She has expressed her dismay at this extraordinary U-turn. The key point about making it no longer an arrestable offence to possess small quantities of cannabis, as the Home Secretary himself pointed out, was that it would result in more police and court time being devoted to dealing with drug pushers and hard drugs rather than small-time users of cannabis, nearly 64,000 of whom were convicted of possession last year. That argument has now been turned on its head. Mr Blunkett has plainly been swayed by police chiefs asking him how they can be expected to take a tougher line on cannabis dealers while pursuing a no-arrest policy for possessors. They will have pointed out that the pilot project In Lambeth led to an influx of drug dealers and users (though nationwide decriminalisation would presumably not have this local effect). As it is, Mr Blunkett is left with the worst of outcomes: a Class C drug treated as a Class B offence — and a Class A muddle for teachers, pupils, drugs charities and the police.

Source: Evening Standard. 12 January  2004
Filed under: Political Sector :

THE TIMES JANUARY  13 2004
 

The MPs responsible for drugs legislation will be asked today to consider fresh research into the dangers of cannabis, before the drug is downgraded later this month. Recent studies, which were unavailable to the Commons Home Affairs. Select Committee when they last considered drugs policy 18 months ago, have highlighted a greater link between cannabis use and psychosis. Janet Dean, the Labour MP for Burton and a committee member, promised to raise reports in The Times on the growing concern among psychiatrists about the use of cannabis by young people.

The committee endorsed David Blunkett, the Home Secretary, decision to reclassify cannabis from a class B to a class C drug, which comes into force on January 29. But since then Robin Murray, head of psychiatry at the Institute of Psychiatry, told The Times that inner-city psychiatric services were nearing a crisis point, with up to 80 per cent of all new psychotic cases reporting a history of cannabis use. Professor Murray said that recent studies showed that those who used cannabis in their teens were up to seven times more likely to develop psychosis, delusions or manic depression.

He said: ‘Unfortunately. then were no experts in psychosis on the committees that advised the Government” Ms Dean said she would draw the Times article to the attention of the committee at its meeting today.
 

HIGHS AND LOWS

If cannabis can cause psychosis should the Government rethink its reclassification?

MY SON sat with me on a hospital bench outside the hospital canteen. Suddenly, he looked up and said “Oh, mother, you don’t know how terrible it is to be Hitler”. “You’re not Hitler,” I said. “Your voices are only your own thoughts”. I took his hand. I knew I was doing what the psychiatrists had told me not to do. You are meant neither to contradict their convictions nor to agree with them. But I knew what I did was right. He looked up. “You really believe that?” “I do,” I said. Then he wept. I put my arms around him, the man who had written to my mother saying I should have a gun put to my forehead and the trigger pulled.
He was in better form than he had been. At this moment he was not complaining that the nurses were plotting to kill him For now, he had stopped showing me the loose floor tiles beneath the hand basin in his washing closet where he believed they buried the bodies of past patients they had gassed. The nursing  staff were endlessly kind and long-suffering for, strange to say, most people loved my son. He  was charismatic,  intelligent, a gifted artist. But without medication he was lost. He had told me that cannabis was the most dangerous of the many drugs he had taken, because it was cannabis which had triggered the paranoia, and it was the drug he feared most. He died in a dealers flat in 2000 of heroin and  dihydrocodeine poisoning within three days of being taken off section and a full year clean of all illegal drugs.

What mystifies me is that Professor Robin Murray head or psychiatry at the Institute or Psychiatry, who gives a convincing picture of the dangers of cannabis says: “We’re not saying-the Government shouldn’t reclassify  cannabis.”  Equally. David Winnick one of the MPs on the Select committee which recommended reclassification, says: “We would not change our view”They talk about informed choice. Come off  it! Children as young as ten start rolling joints. Can you give kids with no experience of life an informed choice? Harm reduction is chickening out of taking adult responsibility for our young. Drug prevention is the only valid course. It has worked in Sweden. Here, we don’t even try.

Source: Letter to The Times, January 13, 2004

The superdrug

WHAT your article failed to mention is the crucial distinction between the original strains of the plant found in the and the cultured strains, which I believe are described as skunk. The past 20 years have seen the emergence of super-potent varieties, often grown hydroponically by enthusiasts interested in one thing only stronger cannabis.

How they have succeeded. Varieties now available can contain hundreds of times stronger doses of tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), the active ingredient And God knows what else. The quantity of all manner of other chemical compounds present in the wild strains in doses, may also have been increased dramatically. It is my   contention that heavy use of super-potent skunk is responsible for the increase in cannabis psychosis, which is why we need to make a crucial distinction between the wild herb and the artificially cultivated skunk varieties. I realise that legislating for this is probably unworkable in practice, so. reluctantly. I have to oppose any reclassification of cannabis.

Arthur Battram. Matlock Derbyshire

 Nobody listens

CANNABIS is not safe on, many counts. It is well proven that it affects learning, remembering, thinking and making decisions. Now, mental health problems are in the spotlight. We, and others. said as much to the select committee which recommended reclassification, but  they didn’t want it to know. Mr Blunkett had told them what he wanted, and they and the advisory council were moved to concur. That they dismiss the new evidence of  Professor Murray and  his other eminent colleagues speaks volumes about their zeal, but not their expertise. Meanwhile all other parameters – family and social damage, impact in the workplace, foetal and early childhood damage are all researched, but barely mentioned.
Everyone but the rigid cannabis zealot must surely conclude that cannabis use must be discouraged by all means.

Peter Stoker, National Drug Prevention Alliance, Slough


The freedom of abstinence

WHY is the same question left hanging in the air following the 80 percent increase in the psychoses related to the use of cannabis? When will any government have the courage and willpower to invest in those positive prevention messages (and resources) that communicate to the next generation the truth that health and excellence, through abstinence, are worth making tough choices for?
My 25 years of working with addicts, who all began their tragic descent into addiction through cannabis, confirms to me that abstinence was the beginning of a new life free  of those supposedly harmless, but physically demanding substances which had not only robbed them of their full potential but of their families and society.

David Partington, International Substance Abuse and Addiction Coalition, Reading


Live it  and see

SO. THE Government feels that there is no particular threat from the use of cannabis, despite the ever increasing evidence to the contrary and as a result of reducing its classification are ensuring that this drug becomes even more readily available. I would ask those responsible for this blinked decision to live with the family of a 15-year-old boy who is dependent on cannabis, and then make a judgment based on the facts.

Perhaps David Blunkett would like to experience the abuse and harassment for money, the aggression resulting in broken windows and smashed furniture, the regular trips to the police station following fights. criminal damage, theft and threatening behaviour all due to the craving for cannabis or the money to buy it. Perhaps he would like his son to have no employable skills because of perpetual truanting and exclusions from school. perhaps he would like his family ripped apart by the constant daily battle to protect a child from ruining his life or killing himself or someone else in the process. Perhaps he would like to fight in the tree-lined street. as I did during Christmas week to disarm a son who was intent on stabbing another boy with a carving knife while neighbours watched  from behind the nets of  their large detached houses.
Cannabis wrecks lives. It is the time the Government woke up to that message.

Too much, too soon

SANE was among the first organisation to identify the links between cannabis and mental illness. There is now a large body of evidence showing just how dangerous it can be for those who are vulnerable to psychotic illness.
What is being sold now is far more toxic than before, with ten times the strength if THC which causes hallucinations and paranoia. This is a far cry from the purer  varieties of the drug we grew up with the 1960s. While it may be a harmless chill out for those whose brains have already matured, for young teenagers the drug can not only trigger  lifelong mental illness but can arrest development leaving them with lost hopes and damage lives. There are good arguments for downgrading the classification of cannabis but we fear it is happening before the public has made aware of the dangers. it is a political decision which ignores recent evidence.

Marjorie Wallace,
SANE, www.sane.org.uk

 

Filed under: Political Sector :

By Kenneth Eckersely

Re-Launched in January 2003, the Home office Minister’s “Updated Drug Strategy 2002” leaves nothing to be desired — except for an effective policy of real prevention capable of reducing the escalating  numbers of new users, plus the provision of effective treatment intended to to cure dependent users. In other words what missing is a Drug Strategy intended to break the vicious circle of more and more of our citizen’s using more and more drugs of all classes.

Nearly every measure,- which Home Office Minister Bob Ainsworth very ably presented this week is capable of achieving what the whole country needs and wants, Unfortunately his Department has, produced a magnificent vehicle which will never get us to where we need to go, because the driver that the Departments of Education and Health have permitted to grab the steering  wheel is not dedicated to reaching the same goals as the government.

Vested interests in the psycho-pharmacological field have been dictating the direction of our drugs education and the nature of our drug treatment for decades. Therefore, whilst the increased spending and personnel resources now being, committed by New Labour are essential to success, they are a total waste because their strategy vehicle is being directed along the road of greater profit to the counselling and pharmacological fraternity instead of along the road towards less drug use and less drug users.

Whilst it was reassuring to hear the Minister announce that it would never be the policy of this government to legalise any currently illicit drug the value of that statement was immediately destroyed by his decision to prescribe heroin alongside Methadone for issue at taxpayer expense to the expanding group of dependent drug users.   As a result whilst not legalising these drugs, he is in fact legalising individual addicts to use them.  And because those recipients of governments largesse will no longer be breaking the law, reported crime statistics will appear to fall but user statistics will continue to climb.

Making a drug legally available to an individual does not by one iota change  its effect on that individual.  He or she is still a hard core drug user. The authoritative BIG ISSUE research ‘Drugs at the Sharp End’ showed that 89% of such users are still basically unemployable  and that their main legitimate income is from Unemployment Benefit and/or Housing  and Children’s Allowances. Furthermore, far from reducing drug use and crime, that report revealed that 8O% of those on prescribed methadone continued to use street drugs on  a weekly basis and that 44% of those on prescribed methadone used heroin on a daily basis.

One assumes that the new strategic move to also prescribe heroin is intended to avoid methadone users continuing with the illegal use of Street heroin. But is the Home Office  not aware of the illegal street  trade in prescribed methadone?  Do they really believe that prescribed heroin will not also find its way back to the  street as prescription users seek to enhance their, low income levels by selling “guaranteed pure government issue heroin” just as occurs with taxpayer supplied methadone.

If one concentrates only on opiate supply issues, the only way government can  squeeze out the drug barons  is by making the official prescription  supply more plentiful, less costly and less dangerous than the smuggled supply.

The barons will respond with purer and even cheaper supplies and the overall effect  will be a flooding  of the market place  with more accessible, stronger  and cheaper supplies stimulating even greater usage as the illegal and legal suppliers battle for their market shares.

This is why aiming at the supply alone can never in the long run be an effective policy. The target should of course be demand. Regrettably  this is not reduced by prescription supply. It is cut only by curing existing users of their habit and by preventing new users from entering the marketplace.

Whilst the Updated Strategy will pump more resources into the sort of ‘treatment’ which merely manages  escalating prescribed drug use – the extra resources which will go into our school system will go mainly into drugs education not drug prevention..  This raises the question which lesson you would want your child to learn ?  ‘I know all about drugs now dad’, (education) or would you prefer ‘I don’t use any drugs dad’ (prevention).

The 6 – 11 age group uses less than one fifth of the drugs used by the 12 – 17 age group,  30% of whom use with increasing regularity, and it is these usage and age levels which make a mockery of the new strategy’s  ‘drugs education’ proposals which are replete with ‘harm reduction’, ‘informed choice’, and ‘responsible use’ messages.   Such messages are likely valid when addressing an established user or addict.  i.e. when it is part of ‘we don’t want to run your life for you, but we would like you to have a long one’.  So we apply harm reduction by giving the heroin user a clean needle because we don’t want him catching AIDS,  and we teach him responsible use to make sure he doesn’t overdose.

But it is quite something else  to an 11-to -14 year old who is just beginning to learn about drugs; ‘This is how you use drugs responsibly’ or, ‘You will come  to less harm  when you’re taking drugs if you do’….. or, ‘So you can find what drug might suit you best, here are the various choices and their effects.

Less than 25% of our school children in the 5 to 18 year age range use drugs (mainly cannabis) on a regular basis ‘THIS MEANS THAT 75% DO NOT USE DRUGS, and to guard against their joining the use group, the principal message for that whole range of ages should be a PREVENTION message based on zero tolerance. Every ‘Say NO to Drugs’ campaign run in Britain has demonstrably saved children totally from drug use or has postponed early city to our drug culture.

It is because ‘Just say NO and similar campaigns have worked that such zero-tolerance campaigns have been attacked by pushers and the inevitable libertarian or psychologist who believes that if child wants to put his hand on a hot stove, he should be given the freedom to do so, in order that he may learn from his own experience.

Bob Ainsworth twice expressed real concern because prisoners re-entering society after completing their sentences continue to a disturbing degree to overdose on drugs within the first weeks of their release, However, he (failed utterly to recognise that even though many of these released offenders had been subjected to rehabilitation in prison, THEY  WERE NOT CURED, proving that the psycho-pharmacological treatments they received inside just do not work, and that what Sweden (for example) does should be tried. He was warm in his praise of those who had put together the Updated Strategy, and it was clear that a lot of good administrative and promotional work had been done by dedicated people within the Home Office and elsewhere. However, when it came to the vital technology of drug prevention and cures the Drug Strategy showed no real understanding of just how far his department has been misled by the vested interests who today essentially control drugs ‘education’ and drug treatment through lobbying front organisations like DrugScope, and the sociologists, psychologists and psychiatrists who run our health and education departments.

These are the people who, by prescription, are pushing  psycho-pharmacological drugs such as Ritalin into our classrooms. These are the same people who are  pushing the benzodiazepines into nursing homes, care homes, private homes and prisons and  now they are pushing heroin and methadone into our drug using youth instead of curing them of their addiction problems – as other countries do.

Addiction is a golden goose which already provides huge profits for prescription drug producers and with heroin now set to go on prescription, pharmaceutical fat cats are all set to get even fatter at taxpayer expense. The now proposed ‘legalisation by prescription’ will do two things, firstly, it will increase the supply of opiates into the society and, secondly, it will increasingly place the production and supply of currently illegal drugs into the self proclaimed “ethical”  of the pharmaceutical industry. (How long before we have the prescription supply of cannabis, cocaine, amphetamines and crack?)  Thirdly, the brand of permissive drugs ‘education’ proposed, which fails to prevent and fails to ‘Say NO’, -will ensure that an increasing number of new drug users are created every day. Fourthly, many questioners at the re-launch of the Updated Strategy were clearly having trouble with understanding why the government were not taking more advantage of existing law governing teenage illegal use of both tobacco and alcohol to close off the two main legal  gateways to cannabis use.

Surveys show that cigarette smoking is a principal gateway to youth usage of cannabis, and that (like drinking of alcohol) may be an even more significant gateway. Whilst both of these substances are on sale to adults, they are both just as illegal as cannabis when it comes to their purchase and use by most of our population under l8 years of age. In addition to the obvious physical and mental effects, failing to stop adolescent illegal use of tobacco and alcohol moves our junior and teenage youth onto the wrong side of the law – namely the same outlaw side, as the use of cannabis.

As a result the move to cannabis is seen by our youth as no more significant in law breaking terms than a pint and a fag.

Our children are under greater attack than any other sector of our society, but the “Updated Drug Strategy 2002” does more to provide doubtful ‘support’ and ‘treatment’ after they’ve been hit, than it does to protect them with up front zero tolerance prevention, followed if necessary by cures based on comfortable abstinence for life.

It used to be known as ‘closing the stable door after the horse had gone’. Fortunately, provided the government can get out from under the control of the pharmaceutical lobby, a realistic updating of our Just ‘updated drug strategy 20O2’ might just get the horse back

Filed under: Political Sector :

From the Homepage of Melaniephillips.com
Daily Mail, 8 January 2004

Three weeks from now, the government’s reclassification of cannabis from a class B to a class C drug comes into effect. At that point, it will be officially considered no more dangerous than painkillers, steroids or tranquillisers.Indeed, simply as a result of announcing this change – which also means the police will no longer arrest people for possessing small quantities of marijuana -many young people now believe cannabis really isn’t very dangerous at all.
Yet now comes the starkest warning yet that it is so dangerous it is causing unprecedented numbers of people to go mad. Professor Robin Murray, one of this country’s foremost experts on psychosis, has told The Times that cannabis is now the ‘number one problem’ reducing mental health services in the inner cities to crisis point. Up to 80 per cent of all new patients suffering from psychosis are reporting a history of cannabis use which, the professor says, has brought on their illness.
Four recent studies show that cannabis use – particularly by young people – can increase the likelihood of psychosis by up to 700 per cent. Furthermore, the drug drastically reduces the chances of recovery, since when patients leave hospital they return to their old haunts, resume taking cannabis and relapse.
Maybe in an attempt to be diplomatic, Professor Murray declines to criticise the fact that no psychosis experts were members of either the Home Affairs Select Committee or the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs, both of which played a crucial role in advising the government on re-classifying cannabis. This is because at the time, he says, no-one thought any such experts were needed.
The professor is being far too kind. The omission of such expertise was a disgrace. There has been a welter of evidence, some of it going back more than two decades, suggesting alarming links between cannabis and mental illness. While this did not conclusively prove cannabis was the cause, it certainly indicated strongly that this was so.
In particular, a study of Swedish army conscripts in 1987 reported that those who had used cannabis on more than 50 occasions were six times more likely to develop schizophrenia than those who hadn’t used the drug at all. Another Dutch study of heavy cannabis users revealed a sevenfold likelihood of psychotic symptoms within three years.
In 1998, the National Institute of Public Health in Sweden warned that cannabis was one of the most toxic of all narcotics. ‘Compared with heroin abuse’, it said, ‘cannabis smoking – in addition to the strong grip with which dependence develops – is associated with far more serious risks regarding the development of mental disorders of various kinds.’ It listed these as ‘delirium, cannabis psychosis, schizophrenia, anxiety disorders, depersonalisation syndrome, depression and suicide tendency, antimotivational behaviour and impulsive violence’.
In other words, there was enough evidence even then to ring the loudest of alarm bells over cannabis and mental health. But the government simply ignored it.
Since then, further studies to which Professor Murray referred have reinforced this research and produced yet further alarming evidence of the link with mental illness. In New Zealand, young people who had used cannabis three times or more at age 15 or 18 were more likely to exhibit schizophrenic symptoms by age 26. Still other studies in America and Australia show cannabis users have a fourfold risk of depression.
Last November, these new studies were revealed in the British Medical Journal. The government ignored these, too.
Instead, it ploughed on with its reclassification in the apparent belief not only that cannabis doesn’t do much harm to users, but that it doesn’t harm other people. But this is not true either. The changes it causes in the brain can have profound effects on others, ranging from relationship difficulties to violence.
Jamie Lee Osbourne, jailed for life last month for murdering a stranger at random, changed under the influence of cannabis from a church-going teenager to a savage killer. His barrister told the court that cannabis had diminished his inhibitions and given him ‘delusional fantasies’.
Anne-Marie Pyle bludgeoned her father to death before setting fire to his house, after cannabis gave her psychotic delusions. Phillip Caswell, who strangled his sleeping girlfriend and then stabbed her repeatedly with a kitchen knife, blamed the attack on his prolonged cannabis use. And so on, and appallingly on.
The Government has ignored all this, too. Instead, it has issued dangerously mixed messages about cannabis which can only encourage its use. On ‘Frank’, the Home Office drug information website, it has actually downplayed its dangers. ‘Cannabis psychosis’, it says, ‘is rare but happens when someone’s smoked themselves into oblivion. It can continue for some time but is treatable… Once stoned, users can find hidden depths in daytime television/ the most unlikely song lyrics’.
Despite his own evidence, Professor Murray refuses to condemn the government for downgrading cannabis from class B to class C because it does not cause psychosis in most people who use it. This is surely extraordinarily naïve. This reclassification sends out a totally misleading signal that cannabis is not dangerous. As a result, more young people are going to use it. As a result of that, the toll of mental illness he so chillingly describes is going to get worse.
And while most users may not go mad, its effects are not confined to psychosis but also include dependency, demotivation and loss of memory and the ability to think, not to mention physical effects such as an increased cancer risk or infertility.
Given all this, there is surely a case for reclassifying cannabis upwards to a class A drug. The dangers it poses to both individuals and to society are insupportable. To put it on the same level as painkillers is quite grotesque.
The Government’s reckless drug policy has already caused enormous damage, and this is set to accelerate. Ministers have simply shut their ears to those experts who have tried to warn them about the true dangers of cannabis. Instead, it has listened only to two kinds of people.
The first is the great and the good who wish to ensure they or their children will not end up with criminal records for taking drugs. The second is the legalisation lobby which has taken over the American, British and European drug information industry to such a degree that ministers cannot grasp the extent to which its distorted propaganda has successfully bamboozled the police, MPs, the civil service and much of the rest of the establishment.

The result is a criminal and public health menace which is now spiralling out of control, pulling the government behind it.

The above article was also commented on by the editor of the Daily Mail as below:

Filed under: Political Sector,Social Affairs :

By Peter Stoker for HNN News

For some time now the organisations and individuals advocating preventive drug strategies have been watching in horror as the UK Government appeared to be selling prevention down the river, by downgrading cannabis to a lower category of perceived harmfulness. Currently Class B, its new classification of Class C would rate it lower than speed and codeine. But more than this, it would have given exactly the opposite effect to that sought in the UK strategy, which aimed (and still aims) to reduce use of all drugs of abuse.
But then, little obstacles like a national strategy – or UN Conventions – are of scant importance to the pro-drug lobbies, who are used to getting a good hearing in the UK corridors of power, thanks to their large resources and sympathetic contacts.
As reported elsewhere in HNN News, UK Home Secretary David Blunkett had been subjected to a barrage of pro-cannabis rhetoric over the months before the 2001 General Election which gave him a chance to replace Jack Straw as Home Secretary. The ink on his letter of appointment had scarcely dried before he uttered the fateful words, that he ‘was minded’ to reclassify cannabis; the location he chose was the opening session of the Home Affairs Select Committee (HASC), newly populated in consequence of the general election.  HASC had expressed its intention of reviewing UK’s whole drug strategy, including – of course – what to do about the most-used illegal drug which is cannabis. Mr Blunkett’s remarks inevitably added blinkers to this significant segment of their vision.

Buttressing his position, Mr Blunkett said he would take advice from a specialist committee. That committee was the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs (ACMD). Seasoned observers could scarcely conceal their scepticism at this; the ACMD has very few scientists in its 35-strong line up, but does have a large contingent of people associated with liberalising lobbies. It has consistently leaned towards a more relaxed drug strategy, and had recommended downgrading cannabis as long ago as 1979. It was therefore no surprise when in March 2002 ACMD duly announced itself persuaded by the Home Secretary’s thinking. (Nevertheless, their report made a number of important concessions about the harmfulness of cannabis, and to this extent it is required reading).

HASC were not to be upstaged; in May 2002 they revealed their worst-kept secret; that they too had agreed with the Home Secretary’s notion. It must have seemed to the members of the inaccurately-titled Police Foundation (a small, self-elected liberalising lobby, not associated with any police authority) that the legalisation snowball they started rolling back under the chairmanship of Lady Runciman in 1999 was at last within sight of its destination. Cheering the snowball on would also have been Rosie Boycott, who as the then Editor of the Sunday Independent, in 1994, launched the first major UK media campaign for legalisation of cannabis.

This then is the environment in which prevention associations struggle to make themselves heard – no easy matter when you are short of breath through being denied the oxygen of funding.

In the summer of 2002, in the aftermath of HASC’s final report, prevention lobbies contemplated what to do next. It was clear that several aspects of the harms from cannabis had been lightly dismissed – or not even considered. The so-called ‘Lambeth experiment’ in which a senior police officer, Commander Brian Paddick, had recently jumped the gun by instructing his officers in the London Borough of Lambeth not to arrest for cannabis possession, overnight making him the darling of all apologists for cannabis. The combined efforts of Home Office, HASC and ACMD generated the image of a large, well-oiled steamroller, being given a helpful shove by liberalising lobbies like DrugScope and the Police Foundation. Flattened, figuratively and literally by this steamroller, the resistance took a while to pick itself up, dust itself off, and start all over again. But start again they did.

Internal seminars led to the first major public meeting, held in the Moses Room at the House of Lords, in November 2002, under the sponsorship of the Noble Lords Alton, Mackenzie, and Hylton; the Bishop of Wakefield, and MPs Alistair Burt and Gerald Howarth. The meeting was open to all MPs and Lords, and they would have struggled to get into a room packed to capacity.

Twenty one speakers included leading professors specialising in the subject, teachers, medical practitioners, police officers, prevention specialists and representatives from Holland and Sweden all presented. Ex users and parents gave testimony on how cannabis has damaged them or others around the users. Social, emotional and spiritual damage, as well as medical damage, came in for highlighting. Young people testified to the poor quality of drug education and the negative influences they experience in a drug-oriented society.

This initiative generated many useful waves; meetings and representations with parliament, the civil service, the media and within the drugs profession followed. From ‘friends in high places’ it was learnt that there was a far from united attitude to the reclassification idea – another encouragement to go that extra mile …

That ‘extra mile’ came in the form of another public meeting, on 21st October, this time in the plush new parliamentary offices of Portcullis House, across the road from Big Ben.

The proceedings were opened by a cross-party group of sponsors, Lady Ann Winterton (Conservative), Kate Hoey (Labour) and Bob Russell (Liberal Democrats) – an important display of non-partisan unity. All three spoke with evident knowledge on the subject, no mere figureheads. Ann Winterton had been a ‘front bench’ spokesperson on drugs, Kate Hoey represents Lambeth, so often a centre for drug policy confrontations – including the infamous Paddick ‘experiment’, and Bob Russell is a member of HASC, and one of the few dissenting with its more extreme liberalising recommendations.

The first speaker was Professor Robin Murray from the Institute of Psychiatry. Leaving no doubt as to his focus, Professor Murray entitled his talk ‘Marijuana and Madness’. Recent research has confirmed suspicions long held in the field, that cannabis can cause psychoses. The correlation of psychosis with cannabis users is at least twice that for non-users. Whilst correlations are not of themselves proof of causality, there are now studies to show causality; in the case of a study of 4,000 people in Holland, heavy users of cannabis were seen to be seven times more likely to suffer psychosis. Similar studies in New Zealand and Sweden supported this finding. Professor Murray ended by considering why this should be so; psychotic symptoms such as schizophrenia are mediated by dopamine, and recent evidence demonstrates that THC increases the release of dopamine within the brain, increasing the level of cerebral dopamine.

Next up was Professor John Henry of Imperial College, London and a professor of Accident and Emergency Medicine at the prestigious St Mary’s Hospital in Paddington, London, which has long specialised in treatment of drug users. With a career in this specialism spanning decades, and including a long period as one of the leaders of the National Poisons Unit, John was able to enunciate from firsthand observation the real damage cannabis causes, from both short term and long term use. He concluded with a comparison between cannabis and tobacco. Quoting the highly-regarded New England Journal of Medicine, he said ‘Prevention and cessation are the two principal strategies in the battle against tobacco. However there is no such battle against cannabis. The lesson should be learnt from tobacco, and we should be prepared to do likewise with cannabis’.

Hamish Turner is a Past President of the Coroner’s Society of England and Wales. The title of his paper – ‘The view from the mortuary slab’ gives a fair indication of his topic. He was unequivocal on the progression or ‘gateway’ syndrome whereby a significant proportion of those who use cannabis move on to other drugs. Jan Berry, Chairman of the Police Federation of England and Wales described the frustrations of police officers at street level in wrestling with the aftermath of the Home Secretary’s flirtation with cannabis liberalism, and the Reverend Chris Andre-Watson, based in Lambeth, was able to give a particularly vivid picture of how this had affected his area – and how Commander Paddick’s autonomous initiative had made things even worse. Chris also made the point that – contrary to stereotypes – it was the black community who were more opposed to cannabis law relaxation then anyone else.

Mary Brett, a qualified biologist and Head of Health Education at one of England’s top secondary schools, spoke on the mess that is drug education in the UK. Too often in the hands of doctrinaire zealots, the education rarely seeks to dissuade pupils from drug use, but instead pre-supposes that they will use and tells them ways to do so – in the forlorn hope that they will be persuaded to do something irresponsible in a responsible manner. Some purveyors of ‘soft porn’ drug education material have been exposed, but they are still operating. Peter Stoker, Director of the National Drug Prevention Alliance, described Britain’s drug education process as ‘…not just neutral, but neutered’. The proponents of drug lifestyles, having emasculated drug education, have moved on to prevention, asserting without evidence that it is ineffective, using a process which he described as ‘a lie told ten times becomes the truth’. (It has subsequently been found that Goebbels said something rather similar). Peter closed by referring to the powerful outcome of the Rome conference last month, convened by the Global Drug Prevention Network, and uniting 84 countries in taking a preventive approach to drug policy.

Three young people from the NDPA’s ‘Teenex’ programme – Darren West, Beth Fairweather and Anthony Hassan – then made emphatic statements. Angry at the assumption that ‘all youth are doing drugs’ they made it clear that the opposite is true, especially when discounting the number that have one or two tries before rejecting the practice. Blaming the government and other authorities for inducing more use by their limp approach, Beth, Darren and Anthony told how Teenex had made them confident enough to not only avoid drugs themselves but also help others to do the same. They found the knowledge and the lifeskills in this low-budget enterprise to promote health instead of leaving the arena to the drug promoters.

Two medical practitioners concluded the proceedings. Dr Ivan van Damme from Belgium described the evaluations of random drug testing in several schools in a number of countries; provided that testing is used as a means of helping rather than an excuse to expel unwanted pupils, it has been found to have tangible benefits. Dr Hans-Christian Raabe summed up the mood of the seminar, saying that the next action would be to engage once more with Mr Blunkett, giving him the large amount of evidence that fully justified him thinking again about reclassification.

Subsequent to the Portcullis seminar, appeals for a meeting with the Home Secretary have been vigorously prosecuted by the Coalition on Cannabis. The stakes were raised a few days ago when it was learnt that there would be a debate this week (Wednesday 29th October) on reclassification, suddenly inserted in between Prime Minister’s Questions and another debate, on the problems of Northern Ireland – if nothing else this juxtapositioning should increase the number attending this particular drugs debate from the usual near-invisible level on such occasions. The Coalition is working on several fronts this week, and if nothing else the disciples of dope will not find an empty goal facing them. “These are exciting times …”

Filed under: Drug Specifics :


The Times of London. Wednesday’s newspaper – January 07, 2004

By Steve Boggan

ONE of Britain’s foremost authorities on psychosis has said that cannabis use is now the leading problem facing the country’s mental health services — just three weeks before the Government downgrades the drug to Class C. Robin Murray, head of psychiatry at the Institute of Psychiatry, told The Times that inner-city psychiatric services were nearing a crisis point, with up to 80 per cent of all new psychotic cases reporting a history of cannabis use.
David Blunkett, the Home Secretary, announced in 2002 that he intended to re-classify the drug after a lengthy examination of drugs policy by the Commons Select Committee on Home Affairs. However, Professor Murray said that new evidence had since come to light proving that people who used cannabis in their teens were up to seven times more likely to develop psychosis, delusional episodes or manic depression.
“Unfortunately, there were no experts in psychosis on the committees that advised the Government,” he said. “That’s not a criticism; at the time, no one thought there should have been. Since then, there have been at least four studies that show the use of cannabis, particularly in young people, can significantly increase the likelihood of the onset of psychosis.
“There is a terrible drain on resources. The drug also drastically reduces recovery — people who improve go out on the street, meet their dealer, use the drug again and relapse.”
It will still be an offence, from January 29, to possess, cultivate or supply cannabis but the maximum sentence for possession will fall from five years to two.
The Home Office said it was aware of the new research but felt it was important to differentiate between cannabis and more serious drugs such as crack, heroin and Ecstasy.

Filed under: Drug Specifics :


Jason Burke, chief reporter

The government’s relaxation of the law on cannabis use was attacked by the United Nations last night.

Koli Kouame, secretary of the International Narcotics Control Board (INCB), the UN agency dedicated to monitoring legal regimes of member states, said the downgrading of cannabis from Class B to C could send the wrong signal and damage the global fight against drug abuse.

‘Whenever a government gives a sign which can be interpreted as indicating that a lower danger is associated with the use of a drug, that can cause problems,’ said Kouame. ‘It is too early to judge the impact [of the downgrading], but often the signal sent is as important as the act itself.’

His comments came days after Jack Straw, the Foreign Secretary, hinted that the reclassification of cannabis, under which users are only given a warning unless there are ‘aggravating factors’, might have to be reconsidered.

Straw broke ranks last week by dropping a heavy hint that there should be a review of the downgrading of the drug. ‘It was done for good reasons, but we may need to review it in the light of experience,’ he said.

His words fuelled speculation that the government is still divided over the much-criticised decision. However, the Home Office denied there were any moves to reverse the change, which went through in January last year. But concern has grown after findings suggested smoking it frequently can cause serious mental health problems.

Cannabis is the third most popular drug after alcohol and tobacco in the UK, where 40 per cent of 15-year-olds are believed to have used it. Possession can lead to two years in jail, with a maximum of 14 years for dealing.

Danny Kushlick, of Transform, a drugs policy campaign group, said that, though flawed, the reclassification recognised that cannabis was less harmful than street cocaine or heroin and that the INCB was living in the past: ‘We are talking about a legal framework that dates back to the 1950s. There is a culture clash with the reality of the 21st century.’

The UK also came in for criticism from INCB president Hamid Ghodse, who warned in the agency’s annual report that the UK had the largest rate of heroin seizures and the third-highest number of addicts in Europe in 2004.

Source: The Observer Sunday March 13, 2005
Filed under: Legal Sector :

Almost a year ago, in September 2003, the French-speaking Swiss Committee Against the Revision of the Narcotics Act distributed 8,000 copies of a booklet entitled Echec au lobby de la drogue (The drug lobby in check) and participated in the drafting of a German booklet entitled Stopp der Drogenlobby (Stop the drug lobby). Today, the lobby for the liberalisation of all drugs has been checkmated.

Highly toxic product

On 14 June, the National Council (Lower House of the Swiss Parliament) by 102 votes to 92 and with 2 abstentions, indeed reduced to smithereens the Dreifuss-Couchepin Bill which aimed not only to depenalise the consumption of and petty trafficking in cannabis, but also to tolerate the production and wholesale trading in this drug, to limit the obligation to prosecute the consumption of all other narcotics, to delete heroin from the list of prohibited substances and to make the prescription of this opiate a recognised therapy and thus refundable by health insurance, to make “survival assistance” a legal practice and thus to impose injection premises for the consumption of illicit narcotics on those cantons which do not want them, along with a considerable reinforcement of the driving role of the Confederation in the drug policy. At the first reading on 25 September 2003, the Lower House had already refused to examine the villainous Bill by 96 votes to 89.

Federal lies

“According to the Government, the revision suggested is compatible with the International Conventions on narcotics”, Christiane Imsand, a Parliamentary correspondent still insisted, in seven French-Swiss daily newspapers on 14 June. Pow! The Liberal National Counsellor, Claude Ruey, in the plenary, provided the proof that Mr. Couchepin had hidden the truth from the Swiss people. He read out a letter addressed to the Federal Council on 16 June 2003 by the Chairman of the custodian institution of the International Conventions: “If the bill were to be adopted in its current form, the situation in Switzerland would be such that the International Narcotics Control Board (INCB) would have no choice but to envisage taking measures against this country as provided for in article 14 of the Single Convention on Narcotic Drugs of 1961, which considers the adoption of retaliatory measures. Just for good measure, the Liberal National Counsellor quotes an interview by the educationalist Pierre Rey accusing Mrs. Dreifuss of also having lied when she stated that cannabis was no more dangerous than alcohol and cigarettes: “Mrs. Dreifuss is quite simply lying, because she knows perfectly well that other experts, just as respectable as hers, say the opposite. She should at least have the objectivity to recognise that she is quoting only one point of view”. That is precisely what occurred in the Health Commission on 1st April last.

When invited to comment on his own defeat in the NZZ am Sonntag, Dr. Thomas Zeltner, Director of the Federal Office of Public Health and holder of a prize from an American foundation seeking the legalisation of all drugs, explained that the wind began to turn last Autumn, when “certain circles started featuring new studies all of which stressed the danger of cannabis, thus causing quite a media stir and starting to make many Members of Parliament feel unsure of themselves”.

Rewarded efforts

The fact of the matter is that, as of last September, the French-speaking Swiss Committee against the revision of the Narcotics Act, in which the Centre Patronal (employers’ organization in Paudex/Lausanne) is deeply involved, stepped up its working sessions, publications, Press conferences, contacts with Members of Parliament and even with Mr. Couchepin, to present facts, facts, and still more facts in relation to the latest scientific and epidemiological developments concerning drugs and cannabis in particular. These efforts, combined with those of its German-speaking wing, helped turn the tide.

The historical decision of the National Council does not create any gap in the law. It opens the way to a more strict application of the laws in effect, to the cantonal and federal plans, and to measures aimed at supplementing them if necessary, in particular with respect to prevention and the care of drug addicts. (JPC)

Source:Jean-Philippe Chenaux, Centre Patronal, Paudex/Lausanne


Filed under: Drug Specifics :

Letter from Congressman Mark Souder to the Director of National Institute of Health. Maryland.USA.

Honorable Elias A. Zerhouni, M.D. Director April 27, 2004

Dear Dr. Zerhouni:

As you know, “harm reduction” is an ideological position that assumes individuals cannot or will not make healthy decisions. Advocates of this position hold that dangerous behaviors, such as drug abuse, should be accepted by society and those who choose such lifestyles – or become trapped in them  –  should be enabled to continue these behaviors in a less harmful manner. Often, however, these lifestyles are the result of addiction, mental illness of other conditions that should and can be treated rather than accepted as normative, healthy behaviors. Sadly, harm reduction largely ignores these realities and programs driven by this ideological position have not been adequately reviewed with unbiased, scientific rigor.

I am concerned that harm reduction programs that sustain continued drug abuse, such as injection rooms and needle distributions, likely weaken drug abusers’ defenses against infection, sustain drug abusers’ long term risk for disease, and minimize the benefits of the available treatments for HIV disease. These dangers seem to have received insufficient attention by some federal health agencies. Yet, peer-reviewed scientific and anecdotal evidence appear to support this assertion.

Needle exchange is the most visible harm reduction program for injection drug users (IDUs). The first needle exchange programs (NEPs) in the United States were established in Tacoma, Portland, San Francisco, and New York City in the late 1980s in an effort to prevent HIV infection among IDUs. By 1997, there were 113 such programs in more than 30 states.

Vancouver, British Columbia, administers the largest NEP in North America, distributing nearly three million needles every year. The city has a publicly sanctioned site specifically designated for addicts to inject under medical supervision absent of law enforcement. The results of this approach have been horrific. When the Vancouver NEP was established in the late 1980s, the estimated HIV prevalence in Vancouver was 1 to 2 percent among the city’s population of 6,000 to 10,000 IDUs. While the expectation was for needle exchange to decrease HIV rates, the opposite has occurred. Both HIV and Hepatitis C have reached “saturation” among the injection drug using population, meaning few if any of those who are not already infected are left to become newly infected, according to the Vancouver Drug Use Epidemiology report published by the city in July 2003. The HIV prevalence among the Vancouver Injection Drug User Study (VIDUS) cohort is 35 percent with “one of the highest incidence rates reported worldwide,” according to the 2003 Vancouver Drug Use Epidemiology report. The VIDUS has an astounding 82 percent prevalence of Hepatitis C.

While both HIV and Hepatitis C rates have increased in Vancouver since the establishment of the NEP, research has directly linked the NEP to this trend. A study published in the journal AIDS in 1997 found that “frequent NEP attendance” was actually one of the “independent predictors of HIV-serostatus” among IDUs. The study found that HIV-positive IDUs were more likely to have attended NEP and to attend NEP on a more regular basis compared with HIV-negative IDUs. Of those IDUs observed who became HIV infected during the course of the study, about 80 percent said they had no difficulty accessing syringes. And with only one lone exception, the NEP was the main source of syringes for all of those who became infected. Needle sharing by IDUs in Vancouver is normative, and quite widespread. VIDUS data published in 1997 found 76 percent of HIV-positive IDUs studied admitted to borrowing used needles as did 67 percent of HIV-negative IDUs. Thirty-nine percent of HIV-positive IDUs lent used needles (Strathdee S.A., et. al. “Needle exchange is not enough: lessons from the Vancouver injecting drug use study.” AIDS. 1997; 8: F56-65).

The failure of harm reduction to control infectious disease is not limited to Vancouver.

Researchers in Montreal studied nearly 1,600 needle-exchange participants for an average of 21.7 months. The study revealed seroconversion probability of 33 percent among needle exchange users and 13 percent among non-users. The case-control study suggested that consistent needle exchange use continued to be associated with HIV seroconversions during follow-up. Despite adjustments for confounders, the researchers noted that HIV risk elevations related to needle exchange remained both substantial and consistent in their cohort of intravenous drug users (Bruneau J., et. al. “High rates of HIV infection among injection drug users in needle exchange programs in Montreal: results of a cohort study.” Am J Epidermal. 1997;146: 904-1002).

A study of needle exchange programs in Seattle found no protective effect of needle/syringe exchange on the transmission of Hepatitis B or Hepatitis C among participants. The highest incidence of infection with both viruses occurred among current users of the exchange (Hagan H, et. al. “Syringe exchange and risk of infection with Hepatitis B and C viruses.” Am J Epidermal. 1999; 149: 203-218).

Needle exchanges focus almost exclusively upon a single mode of transmission among IDUs-sharing of contaminated needles-and largely ignore other important factors such as the individual, the behaviors that cause risk taking, the impact of the substance on the individual and the substance being abused itself. Studies are increasingly finding these factors play significant harm to IDUs that cannot be reduced by merely providing an unlimited supply of clean needles.

A 10-year study published in the Archives of Internal Medicine found that the biggest predictor of HIV infection for both male and female IDUs is high-risk sexual behavior, not sharing needles used to inject drugs. High-risk homosexual activity was the most important factor in HIV transmission for men; high-risk heterosexual activity was most significant for women. Risky drug-use behaviors also were strong predictors of HIV transmission for men but were less significant for women, the study found.

“In the past, we assumed that IDUs who were HIV-positive had been infected with the virus through needle-sharing,” noted Dr. Steffanie Strathdee of the Johns Hopkins University Bloomberg School of Public Health in Baltimore, who conducted the study. “Our analysis indicates that sexual behaviors, which we thought were less important among IDUs, really carry a heavy weight in terms of risks for HIV seroconversion for both men and women.” (Strathdee, S.A., et al. “Sex differences in risk factors for HIV seroconversion among injection drug users.” Archives of Internal Medicine 161:1281-1288, 2001)

Another recent study has found that drug abuse reduces the benefits of AIDS therapy. “There is evidence that HIV-positive injecting drug users benefit less than other risk groups from highly active antiretroviral therapy that has been available since 1996,” according to a study published in the European Journal of Public Health (“Limited effect of highly active antiretroviral therapy among HIV-positive injecting drug users on the population level.” European Journal of Public Health, 2003;13(4):347-349).

Previous research has also demonstrated that “club drugs” can adversely affect AIDS treatment outcomes, both through drug interactions and by affecting adherence to HIV drugs. Methamphetamines and MDMA have a potential interaction with all of the protease inhibitors and delavirdine used to treat HIV infection. Both GHB and marijuana have also demonstrated potential interaction with AIDS medications.

Recently, there has also been some discussion about the possibility that continued drug abuse by those being treated for HIV infection could potentially spawn drug resistant strains of HIV. This could result from the negative impact of illegal drugs on the body’s natural defenses and from insufficient adherence to drug taking regimens by those under the influence of controlled substances.

Now investigators at the McLean Hospital Alcohol and Drug Abuse Research Center in Belmont, Massachusetts, have found that cocaine itself has a direct biological effect that may decrease an abuser’s ability to fight off infections. “This research suggests a link between cocaine use and compromised immune response and could help explain the high incidence of infectious disease among drug abusers,” observes Dr. Steven Grant of NIDA’s Division of Treatment Research and Development (Halpern, J. H., et al. “Diminished interleukin-6 response to proinflammatory challenge in men and women after intravenous cocaine administration.” Journal of Clinical Endocrinology and Metabolism 88(3):1188-1193, 2003).

Research has demonstrated that MDMA is immunosuppressive (Connor, T.J., “Methylenedioxymethamphetamine (MDMA, ‘Ecstasy’): a stressor on the immune system.” Immunology 111(4):357- 367, April 2004) and there is a relationship between meth abuse and immune dysfunction (Qianli, Y., et. al. “Heart disease, methamphetamine and AIDS.” Life Sciences 73(2):129-140, May 2003).

This scientific and anecdotal evidence appears to indicate that harm reduction programs have failed to provide a prevention panacea for drug abusers against the dangers of HIV, hepatitis and other health risks.

Please provide a summary of the available scientific data demonstrating:

(1) The impact of drug abuse on the body’s immune system;

(2) Impaired decision making that increases HIV risk as a result of drug intoxication;

(3) HIV risk by drug users attributable to risky sexual behavior in exchange for drugs and drug money;

(4) Cultural or normative needle sharing behaviors by drug using populations; and

(5) Inferior health outcomes among those being treated for HIV infection.

The finding that continued drug abuse may impair treatment benefits of those infected with HIV while further damaging the immune system raises the alarming possibility that sustained drug abuse may incubate resistant strains of HIV. Have there been or are there any studies, ongoing or planned, examining the possibility that continued drug abuse by those being treated for HIV infection could contribute to the development of drug resistant strains of the virus?

Thank you for your assistance with this request. Please provide a response by September 1, 2004.

Mark E. Souder Chairman, Subcommittee on Criminal Justice, Drug Policy and Human Resources

Comment by NDPA:
(The statistics on problems resulting from needle exchange schemes and injecting rooms in the studies above show that far from preventing problems they actually increase problems. These results are the same from all over the world.   Far from protecting the health of drug users these programmes actually increase the probability that users will contract life threatening illnesses like Hep C.  

Recently
at the annual meeting of the Federation of Drug And Alcohol Professionals (FDAP) in London , NDPA Director Peter Stoker gave an evidence based presentation on the failure of such programmes. Of 22 drug workers in the workshop 21 still voted that injecting rooms should be provided for users.

This is a stunning indictment of workers whose goal is supposed to be (in accordance with UK National policy) to help drug users achieve abstinence.  It would seem that for them dogma  outweighs data.  (Perhaps their position becomes clearer if one considers the result of another debate at the same meeting, which rejected the motion that ‘Drug Workers should themselves be drug free’).

Filed under: Political Sector,USA :

Backed by wealthy philanthropists and embracing popular issues like medical marijuana, the drug-reform movement is stronger than it has been in years. Fox News reported Jan. 27 that groups like the Marijuana Policy Project (MPP) and the Drug Policy Alliance have backers with deep pockets(billionaires Peter Lewis and George Soros, respectively), and both have succeeded despite taking different tacks on the drug issue. MPP has focused mainly on the medical-marijuana issue, while the Drug Policy Alliance tackles a broader range of issues, including supporting drug treatment over incarceration for drug offenders.

Despite their differences, the two groups have worked well together in recent years. “I think it’s a healthy sign in the drug-policy forum that there are different groups coming in with different backgrounds and point of view,” said MPP director Bruce Mirken.

Critics say the groups have focused on medical marijuana because most Americans don’t agree that pot should be legalized for recreational use.

“The fact they’ve been touting medical-marijuana initiatives shows what a failure they have had in the legalization movement,” said Tom Riley, a spokesman for the Office of National Drug Control Policy. “The reason why they are still in business is they have these eccentric billionaires funding them. Or else they would dry up and float away.” One group that hasn’t shared the recent success in the drug-reform arena is the National Organization for the Reform of Marijuana Laws (NORML).

Once the spearhead of the legalization movement, NORML, launched in 1970, has struggled to get funding and recently lost its founder, Keith Stroup, to retirement. “The challenge we face, and I would have to say is the most frustrating failure, is we were never able to take that public support we know we enjoy and turn it into public policy,” said Stroup, 61. “This issue carries with it so much baggage and it would be foolish for us not to recognize that.” Still, NORML will remain a grassroots, consumer-based group representing the interests of marijuana users and legalization sympathizers. “They continue to play an important role in this struggle. NORML remains relevant — and if they are able to raise additional funds they will be even more relevant,” said Drug Policy Alliance head Ethan Nadelmann.

 

Source: FOX NEWS 31st January 2005
Filed under: Social Affairs :

This is the name of the game—create a lot of smoke and hope the authorities light the fire by pressuring Abramoff to plead guilty to something. 

The Washington Post is in its scandal mode, hoping to hype the Jack Abramoff affair into something that will threaten Republican control of the House in the 2006 elections. Then the Democrats could initiate impeachment proceedings against President Bush. While this process unfolds, it would be wise for the public to consider the stories that aren’t being written or published. For example, whatever happened to convicted inside trader and billionaire currency speculator George Soros? He is the proponent of drug legalization who tried to buy the presidency for the Democratic Party in 2004. His other causes include needle exchanges for drug addicts, open borders, assisted suicide, voting rights for felons, abortion and homosexual rights.

Soros makes Abramoff, who spent about $5 million on political influence operations, look like a piker. Soros reportedly spent $400 million in 2004 on his network of foundations and non-profit groups. In reference to his more than $20 million campaign to defeat President Bush in 2004, the National Legal and Policy Center filed a formal Complaint with the Federal Election Commission alleging that Soros had violated the Federal Election Campaign Act by failing to report significant expenditures.

Except for some payments to two columnists, Abramoff tried to influence politicians. Soros has a far more impressive record of influencing the press. Soros has put some of his massive fortune into press groups like Investigative Reporters & Editors (IRE), the Fund for Investigative Journalism, and Center for Investigative Reporting. James V. Grimaldi, a Post reporter covering the Abramoff affair, is on the IRE board. These groups never subject Soros to scrutiny, except to strictly itemize how much money he is giving away. That earns him the title “philanthropist” or “financier,” but never “inside trader.”

In the latest chapter of the Abramoff affair, the Washington Post on December 31 ran a 3,100 word article by R. Jeffrey Smith about Abramoff arranging contributions to a non-profit organization linked to Congressman Tom DeLay. This followed a 4,000–word article on December 29 about Abramoff written by Grimaldi and Susan Schmidt.

One of the main points in the Smith article was that the group received money from a Russian source and DeLay voted for money for the International Monetary Fund, which was bailing out Russia. At the same time, DeLay opposed the IMF forcing Russia to raise taxes as a condition of receiving such assistance. Is there any evidence that DeLay’s votes or positions were somehow influenced by the Russian money to the non-profit group? No such evidence was presented.

But because the names of Abramoff and DeLay were linked in the same article, the impression was created that there was something sinister going on. This is the name of the game—create a lot of smoke and hope the authorities light the fire by pressuring Abramoff to plead guilty to something. Then we can anticipate countless more stories about the Abramoff affair right up to election day.

In order to understand the partisan game the Post is playing, you have to read between the lines of the story. Near the end of the story, Smith quoted one Larry Noble, executive director of the Center for Responsive Politics, “a nonpartisan watchdog group,” as offering an opinion about one aspect of the “scandal.”

All of these so-called “nonpartisan watchdog groups” actually have an agenda. Noble’s group is funded by the usual list of liberal foundations, including the Open Society Institute of billionaire George Soros.

This is one reason why you seldom read anything critical of George Soros. He funds some of the “watchdog groups” that supposedly monitor this “problem” of campaign financing for the public and the press.

But the cover-up gets more serious than that, especially because of his opposition to virtually all measures taken to curtail drug use on a national and global basis. Don’t expect to see, for example, any stories about the reported Soros connection to Evo Morales, the new pro-Castro, pro-cocaine president of Bolivia.

During the heat of the 2004 presidential campaign, House Speaker Dennis Hastert made headlines by accusing Soros of having links to the international campaign to legalize dangerous drugs. He specifically mentioned a Soros link to the Drug Policy Alliance and the Andean Confederation of Coca Leaf Producers. Morales was a key figure in this latter group.

In response to the Morales win in the Bolivian presidential contest, Ethan Nadelmann of the Soros-funded Drug Policy Alliance declared that “Coca deserves the same opportunities to compete legally in international markets as coffee” and “Perhaps the time has come to put the coca back in Coca Cola.”

The left-wing Washington Office on Latin America published a report in 2003 advocating accommodation of the coca producers in Bolivia. “It is crucial,” said the author, “that the U.S. government and international organizations permit the Bolivian government the necessary leverage to make key concessions” to the coca lobby. The funders of the study included the Open Society Institute.

There used to be a time when journalists here and abroad exposed the forces behind dangerous mind-altering drugs. In perhaps the most sensational case, journalist Veronica Guerin exposed the criminal gangs behind drug dealing in Ireland. She was gunned down and murdered in 1996. “I am simply doing my job,” Guerin said. “I am letting the public know how this society operates.”

In the powerful movie version of her life and death, in which actress Cate Blanchett plays the role of Guerin, she says about the drug trade, “Nobody is writing about it. Nobody cares.” She did so and paid the price.

Nobody is writing about it much these days either. It’s easier to write about Abramoff.

As for Soros, if you go to his personal website, the latest posting is an interview he gave National Public Radio last May, in which he claimed that he is only trying to spread democracy in the world—the same thing Bush is doing. He just opposes doing it by military means, he claims.

But the new book, Media Cleansing: Dirty Reporting, documents how the fingerprints of the Soros network were all over the rationale for the U.S./NATO military operation in Kosovo. It was an operation conducted without the approval of the U.S. Congress or even the U.N. that Soros loves so much. The book by veteran journalist Peter Brock thoroughly documents how the Clinton Administration waged an illegal and unconstitutional war on Serbia for the benefit of radical Muslims in league with Osama bin Laden.

On the matter of his conviction for inside trading, which occurred in 2002, he told NPR that he wants everyone to know that he is appealing that judgment and that calling him an inside trader is “unfair.” NPR reported that the label is being used by the “conservative” media against Soros. You can bet it won’t be used by the liberal press, which is in his back pocket. And that pocket is deep.

 Source: By Cliff Kincaid  |  January 2, 2006

Filed under: Political Sector :

As was to be expected, the New Libertine Party (aka the Conservatives) is now no longer supporting the re-reclassification of cannabis back up to a category B drug. The Times reports that the Tories volte-face takes the heat off the Home Secretary:

Pressure on Charles Clarke to change cannabis back to a Class B drug eased significantly yesterday when the Conservatives abandoned their campaign for reclassification. The Home Secretary was also urged by experts to stick with the new Class C status to avoid further confusion. David Cameron, the new Tory leader, made it clear yesterday that he would not put Mr Clarke under any pressure to reclassify the drug. At the general election, the Tories said they would reverse Labours decision on cannabis and change it back to class B.

David Davis, the Shadow Home Secretary, also called for reclassification during the Conservative leadership campaign, but he issued a statement yesterday welcoming Mr Clarkes decision to voice concern over the impact of the drug on mental health and looked forward to further debate. “We welcome the Home Secretary’s recognition that there is new evidence about the dangers of cannabis, particularly with regard to mental health”, Mr Davis said. “We look forward to the publication of the advisory councils report and appropriate action from the Government, in particular to protect young
people”.

My interpretation of this situation is different from that of the Times.

The Tories shift on drugs was written the day David Cameron was elected leader. As I have written before (see October 17 post) Cameron has shown that he has uncritically swallowed all the garbage produced by the legalisation lobby.

In a diary for the Guardian Unlimited website in 2001, he wrote:

“I am an instinctive libertarian who abhors state prohibitions and tends to be sceptical of most government action, whether targeted against drug use or anything else…Hounding hundreds of thousands – indeed millions – of young people with harsh criminal penalties is no longer practicable or desirable.”

It remains to be seen whether the Home Secretary actually has the bottle to go against the received wisdom in the drug culture-addled Home Office (not forgetting the same lunacy within the higher echelons of the police) and restore some belated sanity to the law on cannabis. Of course this would be embarrassing as is any U-turn. But there is also surely an opportunity here for some canny cross-positioning. With the ‘Cameroons’ now pitching for the über-left vote and with millions of socially responsible voters therefore left totally disenfranchised, the obvious ploy for Tony Blair would be to
pitch the message to those abandoned souls that only Labour stands for social responsibility against the anarchic irresponsibility of social libertinism. Cannabis re-reclassification would be an excellent place to start.

Clarke should sack the ACMD and reclassify cannabis  to class A, where this most dangerous drug properly belongs.

Source: By Melanie Phillips. January 06, 2006
Filed under: Drug Specifics :

European Union Group Urges Censorship of Pro-Cannabis Web Sites, Activists Plot Counter-attack

A European Union (EU) working group on drug policy has issued a draft resolution identifying marijuana as European drug problem number one and recommending, among other things, that governments move to censor or criminalize Internet sites that provide information on cannabis cultivation or promote its use. The European Coalition for Just and Effective Drug Policies (http://www.encod.org), an umbrella organization of drug reform groups that seeks to influence EU drug policy, was working this week to formulate a response.

Meeting on July 6, the EU’s Horizontal Drug Group approved the Draft Council Resolution on Cannabis. It will now be presented to the European Council for approval as the EU works toward completing its continental drug strategy. Noting its concern about the rising popularity of cannabis (marijuana), the high potency of some marijuana, possible ill health effects, and the role of organized crime in the cannabis trade, the drug group called for more international law enforcement cooperation against trafficking, “alternative development” for cannabis producing regions, demand reduction at home, no marijuana in prison, and more research.

But it was the drug group draft’s 21st paragraph that was the attention-getter. It encouraged “Member States in accordance with national legislation to consider taking measures against Internet sites providing information on cultivation and promoting the use of cannabis.”

“This is nothing less then a direct attack against many organizations, groups of people, and individuals, who are active on the Internet giving information on cannabis cultivation and use,” said Joep Oomen, ENCOD coordinator. “If member states really adopt these measures, they could even address them to all sites that have a cannabis leaf on it,” he said. “If Western authorities start to limit the freedom of expression of their own citizens — and we are talking about 25-40 million cannabis consumers in the EU — we can be sure that something is really going wrong.”

“It is also a silly measure,” he told DRCNet. “Local and national authorities are well aware that allowing consumers to cultivate cannabis is not leading to massive health problems. On the contrary, if you persecute them, conditions for obtaining cannabis become harder, and all kinds of problems start to arise which had disappeared with depenalization,” he argued. “Cultivation of cannabis for own one’s consumption is depenalized in several EU countries, such as the Netherlands, Belgium and Spain, and in practice in all the EU — no one will get into trouble for cultivating some plants. So allowing them to cultivate but forcing them and others to keep their mouth shut about it is a ridiculous policy.”

ENCOD, which includes more than 75 different European drug reform organizations in its membership, is plotting a response, said Oomen. “After the European Union drug summit in Dublin in May (http://stopthedrugwar.org/chronicle/338/dublin.shtml), we have a foot inside the door for the debate on the new EU drug strategy,” he said. “We were already preparing a proposal to organize a dialogue between civil society and policymakers on the new strategy, and we may use this issue as a good example to explain our main criticism to policymakers, namely that they are completely out of sync with reality. We will offer them our help to design and implement reality-based drug policies.”

Still, said Oomen, there may be less here than meets the eye. “It is a nonbinding resolution and is really meant as a symbolic measure, with which the national and supranational policymakers hope to strengthen the repressive trend in recent European drug policies,” he explained. “It comes just before the start of the discussion on a new EU Drug Strategy, and is meant to push this discussion in a certain direction.”

The resolution was the work of the governments of Sweden, probably Europe’s leading prohibitionist government, and Spain, but the conservative Spanish government of Prime Minister Felipe Aznar has since been replaced by the more reform-friendly Socialists. “It was presented in March by Sweden and Spain in an even more repressive form, but afterwards a lot of member states presented objections, but chose to agree on the final version as they did not want this discussion to be mixed up with the debate on the new EU Drug strategy that starts in September,” Oomen reported.

Support for the resolution is not strong, Oomen said. According to one government official who spoke to Oomen, “everybody, including the governments that presented it, prefers now to forget this resolution, and go on to the discussion on the EU Drug Strategy.” This official advised laying low, saying, “Don’t paint the devil on the wall — then it will appear in person.”

But ENCOD’s membership appears disinclined to simply watch and wait. “Perhaps everyone has forgotten about this already, but the main trend behind this resolution will not go away if we just sit and pray, so we definitely plan actions,” said Oomen. “First we want to see how far they allow us to go with the dialogue process, and if that is unsatisfactory, we have other ways to put pressure on them.”

Read the EU Horizontal Drug Group’s Draft Council Resolution on Cannabis online at: http://register.consilium.eu.int/pdf/en/04/st11/st11267.en04.pdf

Source:forwarded by email from Drug Watch International 2006
Filed under: Drug Specifics,Europe :

BY ROSEMARY BENNETT, DEPUTY POLITICAL EDITOR

The public was misled about the dangers of taking cannabis when the Government unwittingly decided to downgrade the drug less than a year ago, the Home Secretary admits today.

In a damning assessment of the decision taken by his predecessor, David Blunkett, Charles Clarke said he is “very worried” about recent evidence suggesting a strong link between cannabis and mental illness. His remarks, made in an interview with The Times, come just weeks before he must decide whether or not to execute an embarrassing about-turn and restore the drug’s Class B status.

Mr Clarke said there was an alarming lack of knowledge about the health dangers posed by the drug among the general public. He also admitted that many people had been left confused by the law change.

“Whatever happens after this, let me reveal one recommendation of the advisory committee, which they make very, very strongly, which is a renewed commitment to public education about the potential affects of the consumption of cannabis, and the legal status of cannabis. That is well made, and I will accept it.”

Asked specifically if the confusion was a result of Mr Blunkett’s decision to downgrade the drug, he said: “Yes. People do not understand the impact of the consumption of cannabis well enough, and what the legal consequences of consuming cannabis are.”

Over Christmas Mr Clarke read the report from a special advisory group he set up to assess the latest medical evidence, and will discuss its findings with colleagues this week before making a final decision.

Leaks of the report suggest the committee says use of the drug is clearly linked to mental illness, but stops short of recommending reclassification.

Mr Clarke refused to confirm the report’s central thrust, but said he had already accepted a secondary recommendation, that ministers had to clear up the confusion in the public’s mind about the drug. “The thing that worries me most (about the downgrading of cannabis) is confusion among the punters about what the legal status of cannabis is.”

The drug was downgraded in in the hope that it would allow the police to focus on more serious drug abuse. Mr Clarke said it was significant how many advocates of the change had had second thoughts.

“I’m very struck by the advocacy of a number of people who have been proposers of the reclassification of cannabis that they were wrong,” he said.

“I am also very worried about the most recent medical evidence on mental health. This is a very serious issue.”

Asked if the downgrading of the drug had served any useful purpose, Mr Clarke paused before responding: “I think it gives it a steer to the citizen on more serious drug consumption.”

Although an about-turn would be embarrassing, it may cause Labour fewer problems in the long run. Mr Clarke will champion curbs on antisocial behaviour this year, which strategists say is undermined by a soft approach to cannabis.

Source: TimesOnLine Jan.5th 2006
Filed under: Political Sector :

17TH January 2006-01-17

As Parliament, and certain sections of the public wait for Mr.Blair (or his Home Secretary Charles Clarke) to issue a pronouncement on the classification of cannabis, the situation becomes daily almost as blurred as the outlook of a heavy user.

In parliamentary updates covering just a few days in early January there were no less than 14 bulletins.

Conservative MP Nigel Evans updated his Early Day Motion highlighting links between cannabis and psychosis. (speaking on drug use generally, not just cannabis, MP John Mann elicited an answer from the Minister for Employment, Margaret Hodge, giving another facet to the costs borne by society in consequence of disabilities arising from drug abuse. Mrs. Hodge revealed that as at May 2005, there were 48,300 Incapacity Benefit and Severe Disability Allowance claimants whose primary diagnosis was recorded as ‘drug abuse’.

Shadow Home Secretary David Davis welcomed Charles Clarke’s expression of concern about links between cannabis and mental illness, but – significantly – he no longer pressed for cannabis to be re-classified to Class B. (In the past he had several times made this an unequivocal commitment on his part, but with the arrival of David Cameron as the new leader, this commitment was shelved. Cameron had been a member of the Home Affairs Select Committee , in which he was minuted as supporting the downgrading of cannabis, and also of Ecstasy, as well as suggesting that the UN Conventions were due for reappraisal).

Lib-Dem MP Mark Oaten said “the government should base its drug classification on the facts and not tabloid pressure”. (said tabloid pressure has in the past been kind to Mr. Oaten when he has suggested the liberalisation of drug laws).

One unexpected knock-back for prevention workers came when the mental health charity Rethink said that they were “against reinstating cannabis as a Class B drug”. Rethink CEO Cliff Prior said “such a move would unnecessarily waste resources, which could be better invested in education”. Prior called for public education and cessation programmes, however he believed that “the legal status doesn’t seem to make any difference at all to the level of use”. (it is not known how Mr. Prior reached this conclusion, when comparing it with evidence worldwide). Rethink are said to be in discussion with the Dept. of Health in the context of public health education.

Other comments were more predictable. Labour MP Paul Flynn (a long term advocate of liberalisation) said it would be a mistake to re-classify back to Class B. The Release charity said it should remain a class C drug. Drugscope nailed its colours firmly to the fence by saying that the government “would have to have very compelling reasons to reverse the re-classification of cannabis from Class B to Class C if an Advisory Council recommended maintaining the status quo”. At the same time Drugscope CEO Martin Barnes warned that “ cannabis may be more dangerous than many people believe”. He said that he believed that cannabis carried many health risks.

The University of London introduced a sober note in reporting on links between cannabis and mental illness. Professor Colin Drummond said the Home Secretary is right to consider raising the classification of cannabis due to the mental health risks. He felt that the downgrading of cannabis to Class C had led people to wrongly believe that it was ‘safe’. He stressed ‘it would send a better message if cannabis was re-classified and there was more consideration given to public information about the risks of cannabis. The professor also said that, whilst he supported the freedom of people to make personal choices the ‘vulnerable group in the population of adolescents’ could not be expected to make an informed choice without improvement to drugs education.

A former companion of Professor Drummond on the rostrum, arguing for greater concerns about cannabis, was Professor Robin Murray from the Institute of Psychiatry. He argued that even though the government “wrongly introduced downgrading” the impact of greater knowledge amongst the populace had actually yielded s small decrease in the use of the drug. Revealingly, Professor Drummond said “the government had a hole dug for it by the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs. They got a very false account from that Council in 2002 which essentially said that cannabis was relatively safe and there was not a link between cannabis and psychosis.” However, he went on to say that he did not think the exact classification to be that important. For him “the crucial thing is education”.

Prevention-oriented advisory NGO’s such as the National Drug Prevention Alliance have continued to advocate upgrading cannabis to Class B, and this has been endorsed by media commentators who could be classified as ‘conservative with a small c’. A surprising ally in criticising the downgrading was Deputy Asst Commissioner for Met. Police Brian Paddick who, when a Commander of the police division encompassing Lambeth, unilaterally decriminalised cannabis on the eve of the pro-cannabis lobby march through the division. D.A.C Paddick says that he had “always opposed downgrading the drug”. He said he had always believed the move was unnecessary and would cause more damage than good. In an interesting aside he suggested that the Home Office decision may have dissuaded officers from concentrating on tackling crack cocaine and heroin suppliers; this is because “cannabis warnings now count the same as a conviction for rape or murder under figures for the number of offences brought to justice” he said. “Effectively, it means that a cannabis warning on the street is one of the quickest and easiest ways of achieving targets that police forces are under increasing pressure to meet”.

Home Secretary Charles Clarke will be drawing his conclusions against the background of his own statement to the public that “the public were misled about cannabis”. Mr. Clarke has been known in the past to be a supporter of preventive policies. The move to downgrade cannabis by his predecessor, David Blunkett, has clearly left him uncomfortable; in recent days Mr. Blunkett has seen fit to press Mr. Clarke (and Mr. Blair) to keep the classification where he, Mr. Blunkett, put it. It remains to be seen whether this will be seen as advice or provocation.

 

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *


NDPA COMMENT:

IN WRITING THIS WEEKEND (16TH JANUARY) TO BOTH MR. BLAIR AND MR. CLARKE, THE NDPA DID WHAT IT COULD TO STRENGTHEN THE RESOLVE TO UPGRADE CANNABIS WHICH HAS BEEN PERCEIVED IN THE RECENT STATEMENTS BY THESE TWO. IN THE LETTER, NDPA SAYS:

“WE ENCOURAGE YOUR GOVERNMENT TO BE BOLD AND TO RE-CLASSIFY CANNABIS. WE BELIEVE CANNABIS WAS PROPERLY CLASSIFIED WHEN IN CLASS B.”

OUR ANALYSIS OF THE CURRENT UK DRUGS MARKET SUGGESTS TO US THAT THERE IS NO SINGLE ACT THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT COULD TAKE THAT WOULD MAKE THE BRITISH PEOPLE, AND INDEED THE WORLD, MORE AWARE OF THE DANGERS OF CANNABIS THAN BY PUTTING IT BACK WHERE IT WAS, IN CLASS B.

SUCH A DECISION WOULD REVERBERATE THROUGHOUT THE WORLDWIDE MEDIA AND WOULD SECURE WORLDWIDE ATTENTION. SUCH A DECISION WOULD LEAD ANY WORLDWIDE POLICY REVIEW.


Filed under: Drug Specifics :

Health campaigners have accused the Government of creating “dangerous confusion” over the mental health risks of smoking cannabis after it scrapped a multi-million pound publicity campaign.

The Home Office announced in January that the publicity drive would launch in the spring but, six months later, it has been quietly pushed to one side. .

The scheme was recommended by the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs, a Home Office committee made up of scientists, medical experts, drugs charity workers and police. It said that a major campaign was required to let people know about the mental health risks and to combat confusion about the drug brought about by the change in its classification, from class B to class C. .

Days later, Charles Clarke, the home secretary at the time, told the Commons: “The illegal status of the drug is not enough. We need a massive programme of public education to convey the danger of cannabis use.” .

Paul Goggins, then a Home Office minister, subsequently said the campaign would be launched “in the spring” and would cost “many millions of pounds”..

The decision to scrap the campaign has brought an angry response. One member of the advisory panel, who asked not to be named, said: “We decided a campaign about the risks associated with mental health was needed. If charities and members of the public are saying they have not seen any sign of this campaign, then that speaks for itself.” .

Prof Robin Murray, from the Institute of Psychiatry, said: “This has caused a dangerous confusion about cannabis among young people. We are seeing more people with cannabis-related mental health issues.” .

David Davis, the shadow home secretary, said: “This Government’s confused policy has sent out the message that it is okay to take drugs. They have compounded this error by failing to warn people of the very harmful consequences of taking cannabis.” .

Mr Clarke declined to comment on the scrapping of the publicity campaign. .

A Home Office spokesman said that information about drug use was provided on the website talktofrank.com and that the Department for Education and Skills was running a campaign for 11-to-14 year olds giving information about drugs. .

Source: Telegraph.co.uk July 30 2006
Filed under: Drug Specifics :

By William F. Hammond Jr., New York Sun, May 4, 2006

The billionaire political impresario George Soros gambled $27 million on the campaign to defeat President Bush and came up empty-handed. But no one should conclude that he has lost his eye for a winning investment. The smaller wagers that he and his family have placed on New York politics appear to be paying off in spades.

After years of debate, state lawmakers just agreed to reduce the penalties for drug crimes in New York, which have been among the stiffest in the country.

In Albany County, voters just elected a maverick district attorney who is promising to go easier on drug addicts and keep a sharper eye on corruption at the state Capitol.

In the Legislature, leaders of both houses are pledging to change the way they do business after two decades of late budgets and legislative gridlock. And in the state Senate, Democrats are threatening to take control for the first time since 1965.

A common factor in all of these developments is Soros money. With millions of dollars in strategically placed grants and political contributions, the Soros family is quietly reshaping the state.

Nothing illustrates their impact better than the campaign to soften New York’s anti-drug laws. Pushed through by Governor Rockefeller during a wave of heroin abuse in the 1970s, the statutes imposed lengthy prison sentences for possession and sale of narcotics. Someone caught with four ounces of heroin or cocaine faced a minimum sentence of 15 years to life and a maximum term of 25 years to life.

Earlier this month, after years of fruitless debate, Governor Pataki and the Legislature agreed to an overhaul of these penalties that doubled the weight thresholds for the most serious drug-related felonies, took away the possibility of life terms for nonviolent crimes, and gave about 400 current inmates an opportunity for early release.

Of the many activist groups that campaigned for these changes, none played a more pivotal role than the Drug Policy Alliance, a New York City-based group founded and largely financed by Mr. Soros and his Open Society Institute. The alliance and its affiliates spent more than $100,000 lobbying at Albany over the past two years. In June 2003, when the governor and legislative leaders brought hip-hop entrepreneur Russell Simmons into their late-night, closed-door negotiations on the Rockefeller drug laws, a lobbyist for the Drug Policy Alliance, Deborah Small, was at Mr. Simmons’ side.

On another front, Mr. Soros’s Open Society Institute has been a major supporter of the Brennan Center for Justice at New York University’s School of Law, contributing at least $3.6 million over the past four years. This summer, the Brennan Center published a study identifying New York’s state government as the most dysfunctional in the nation – a finding that has been quoted in newspaper stories and editorials ever since, adding considerably to the movement for reform at Albany. Reacting to recommendations in the Brennan report, both the Republican majority leader of the Senate, Joseph Bruno, and the Democratic speaker of the Assembly, Sheldon Silver, have promised to change the procedural rules in their respective houses.

The Soros money has flowed not just to activist groups, but also to political campaigns.

This summer, the political arm of the Drug Policy Alliance – also founded and financed in part by Mr. Soros – indirectly contributed $81,500 to a candidate for district attorney of Albany County, David Soares, who made his opposition to the Rockefeller drug laws a centerpiece of his campaign. When Mr. Soares defeated the incumbent district attorney in a Democratic primary, and went on to win the general election, elected officials statewide took notice.

In legislative elections, meanwhile, Mr. Soros and his children emerged as the most important backers of Democrats running for the state Senate, contributing a total of $377,500 to their campaign accounts. That money helped Senate Democrats add at least three seats to their minority, with a fourth race still too close to call. As a result, the Senate GOP – which has controlled the house every year but one since 1938 – will see the 38-24 advantage it had at the beginning of this year shrink to 35-27 or 34-28 come January. The minority leader of the Senate, David Paterson of Harlem, predicts his party will win enough seats to take over in 2008 or 2010.

Most contributions in legislative races come from interest groups with a state in state affairs, and they generally give most of their money to the officials in the best position to help their causes – which is to say the majority parties in the Senate and Assembly. This is one reason why Democrats, who outnumber Republicans 5-3 among registered voters in New York, have been unable to claim the Senate. By giving so much money to the Senate minority, and largely ignoring the major players, the Soros family represents a singular threat to the status quo.

The deputy minority leader of the Senate, Eric Schneiderman of Manhattan, said that threat helps to explain why the Senate GOP agreed to this month’s compromise on the Rockefeller drug laws.

“These guys are professionals,” Mr. Schneiderman said. “They don’t hold onto a majority in an overwhelmingly Democratic state by being slouches. They took immediate notice of the contributions, and they will do what they can do to try and neutralize the commitment.”

The people campaigning to change the drug laws believe this month’s legislation – which they view as a partial victory – would not have happened if not for the electoral victories by Mr. Soros and the Senate Democrats.

“It was not because people had a change in heart; it’s because people had a change in political climate,” said the public policy director of the Drug Policy Alliance, Michael Blain. “It’s a shift in power. And power is something hardball New York politicians understand. It’s the only thing they understand.”

A spokesman for the Senate Republicans, Mark Hansen, disputed this analysis.

“We have been discussing the Rockefeller drug laws for a number of years,” Mr. Hansen said. “We continued having discussions with the governor and the Assembly throughout the summer and the fall and ultimately reached agreement in December. It was an ongoing process that culminated in the reform law that was enacted this month.”

Whatever the Senate GOP’s motivations, its actions on the drug laws probably weren’t enough to convince the Soroses to put away their checkbooks.

“The Soroses’ support for David Paterson and Eric Schneiderman and the effort to take the Senate for Democrats is a long-term commitment,” a spokesman for the family, Michael Vachon, told The New York Sun last week.

“They understand the dynamics of Albany,” Mr. Schneiderman said. “They are not going to be fooled by mini-reforms into backing away from broader reforms. They’re not in politics to bring about small steps toward reform.”

Source: DPNA website May 2006
Filed under: Political Sector :

WASHINGTON, June 14 /U.S. Newswire/ — Peter Flaherty, president of the National Legal and Policy Center (NLPC), today reacted to the upholding of billionaire George Soros’ conviction of insider stock trading by France’s highest court, meaning Soros has no further appeals.

Flaherty said, “This affirmation of Soros’ criminal conviction adds to the doubts about his credibility and business ethics.”

During October 2004, Soros undertook an anti-Bush media and speaking tour to swing states. In Harrisburg, Pa., on Oct. 19, Flaherty asked Soros how he could come to Pennsylvania, “where corporate scandals have cost people their jobs,” to tell working people how to vote in light of his conviction. Soros denied that he was convicted, and instead attacked NLPC as “Orwellian.” Flaherty followed up by asking why Soros had been fined $2 million, if he had not been convicted. Soros claimed he had not been fined. ( For transcript, go to http://www.nlpc.org/view.asp?action=viewArticle&aid=691 )

Soros apparently misled the media and the audience of 200 people. Numerous news organizations in the U.S. and Europe had reported that Soros was convicted of insider trading in December 2002 and fined $2.2 million. Furthermore, Soros had previously admitted that he was convicted. In a Sept. 12, 2003 interview on the PBS show “Now With Bill Moyers,” Soros told reporter David Brancaccio, “I was found guilty.”

Soros’ contention in Harrisburg that he had not been convicted was apparently based on the fact that the case was under appeal. In France, a suspect is technically considered innocent until appeals are exhausted. Flaherty added, “For Soros, there are no more appeals. There are no more fig leaves to hide behind. His conviction stands.”

Soros apparently failed to report significant expenditures related to his anti-Bush tour, as required. On Jan. 18, 2005, NLPC filed a formal Complaint with the Federal Election Commission (FEC), alleging extensive apparent violations by Soros of the Federal Election Campaign Act. ( http://www.nlpc.org/pdfs/SorosFEC1-18-05.PDF ). The Complaint is pending.

NLPC promotes ethics in public life through research, education and legal action. The group sponsors the Government Integrity Project.

http://www.usnewswire.com/

Source: DPNA website June 26th 2006
Filed under: Political Sector :

Britain’s ‘cannabis pandemic’ has been caused by the Government’s failure to treat it as a serious threat, the UN narcotics chief warned today.

The British Government’s decision to downgrade cannabis to a Class C drug was criticised by executive director of the UN Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), Antonio Maria Costa, who said that countries got the “drug problem they deserved” if they maintained inadequate policies.

In an unusual statement, he suggested cannabis was as harmful as cocaine and heroin – a stance which differs wildly from the British attitude of treating cannabis far less seriously than Class A substances.

Although he did not specifically name and shame the UK, Mr Costa said at the Washington DC launch of the UNODC’s 2006 World Drug Report: “Policy reversals leave young people confused as to just how dangerous cannabis is.

“With cannabis-related health damage increasing, it is fundamentally wrong for countries to make cannabis control dependent on which party is in government.

“The cannabis pandemic, like other challenges to public health, requires consensus, a consistent commitment across the political spectrum and by society at large.”

Mr Costa suggested that cannabis was now “considerably more potent” than a few decades ago and that it was a “mistake” to dismiss it as a soft, relatively harmless drug.

“Today, the harmful characteristics of cannabis are no longer that different from those of other plant-based drugs such as cocaine and heroin,” Mr Costa said.

The report estimated 162million people used cannabis at least once in 2004, the equivalent of four per cent of the 15 to 64-year-old global population.

Mr Costa said: “After so many years of drug control experience, we now know that a coherent, long-term strategy can reduce drug supply, demand and trafficking.

“If this does not happen, it will be because some nations fail to take the drug issue sufficiently seriously and pursue inadequate policies.

“Many countries have the drug problem they deserve.”

Former home secretary David Blunkett downgraded cannabis from Class B to Class C in January 2004, meaning possession of the drug was normally no longer an arrestable offence.

The UNODC’s report showed showed global opium production fell 5% in 2005 while cocaine production was broadly stable.

In Afghanistan, the world’s largest opium producer, the area under opium poppy cultivation fell 21%  to 104,000 hectares in 2005, the first such decline since 2001, it said.

But Mr Costa warned: “Afghanistan’s drug situation remains vulnerable to reversal because of mass poverty, lack of security and the fact that the authorities have inadequate control over its territory.

“This could happen as early as 2006 despite large-scale eradication of opium crops this spring.”

The director repeated former UN warnings about growing cocaine use, particularly in western Europe where demand was reaching “alarming levels”, Mr Costa said.

He went on: “I urge European Union governments not to ignore this peril.

“Too many professional, educated Europeans use cocaine, often denying their addiction, and drug abuse by celebrities is often presented uncritically by the media leaving young people confused and vulnerable.”

His comments come less than two weeks after supermodel Kate Moss escaped prosecution for drug-taking, despite video evidence, because of a legal loophole.

 

Source: Daily Mail(UK), 26th June 2006
Filed under: Social Affairs :
Even though Nevada voters handed them a decisive defeat last year, the drug legalizers are at it again. Masquerading as “Nevadans for Responsible Law Enforcement,” the potheads lost big-time in November 2002, when Nevadans voted against Question 9 – a marijuana legalization measure – by a 61 to 39 percent margin. But now, they’re back again with a costly television spot advocating drug legalization in our state. The ad is sponsored by the Washington, D.C.-based Marijuana Policy Project, which spent $2 million on Question 9 last year. Using a split screen, the ubiquitous new spot shows a group of sad-looking Nevada teenagers on one side wearing T-shirts reading 67 percent (the percentage who have allegedly tried marijuana) and a group of smiling Dutch teenagers on the other wearing 28 percent T-shirts. The message is that we should legalize marijuana in order to keep our teenagers happy and reduce drug use. And if you believe that, I have a nice piece of waterfront property for you in Washoe Valley.

Let’s take a closer look at the MPP statistics. Although a 2001 study by the White House Office on National Drug Control Policy stated that “more than 67% of Nevada high school seniors reported using marijuana at least once in their lifetime,” it added that only 26.6 % of Nevada high school students were regular marijuana users (which is still too high). Assuming that the 28 percent figure for Dutch teenagers is correct, the comparison isn’t so bad for Nevada. Nevada State Medical Association Director Lawrence Matheis recently told Reno’s alternative weekly, the News & Review, that the MPP was “disingenuous” when it chose to portray Question 9 as a medical marijuana measure in an effort to mislead Nevada voters. We weren’t fooled, however, and most of us applauded Washoe County District Attorney Dick Gammick, when he urged the drug legalizers to “pack your baggies and go home. We don’t need this stuff in Nevada.” And we still don’t.

When I wrote a column in opposition to Question 9 last year, its supporters accused me of not understanding that marijuana is a life-saving drug. But if that’s true, why did the Nevada Legislature put the State Agriculture Department in charge of the medical marijuana program instead of the State Pharmacy Board? As Pharmacy Board Executive Secretary Keith McDonald told me at the time, “Obviously, marijuana isn’t medicine. That’s why they (the Legislature) gave it to the Agriculture Department.”

The drug legalizers were even more upset when I listed the fatalities that marijuana-smoking drivers had caused in Nevada. Convicted drugged drivers included the retired California firefighter who crashed head-on into a van on I-80 east of Reno in May 2002, killing five members of a Utah family including four children; a 24-year-old Douglas County man who killed a 46-year-old mother of four in a high-speed, head-on collision in Gardnerville Ranchos in July 2001, and a 22-year-old Las Vegas stripper who ran off the road and killed six teenagers on a highway work detail in March 2000. And to that list of marijuana-related highway fatalities we can now add the case of 39-year-old Jonathan Hyde, of Reno, who was allegedly high on drugs when his truck struck and killed 24-year-old newlywed Kelly Berry, of Virginia Foothills, as she walked with her husband near their home last August. Police allege that Hyde had five times the legal limit of marijuana and nearly twice the limit of methamphetamine in his blood when he was arrested. If convicted, he could face up to 50 years in prison.

I dare the MPP or anyone else to tell the victims of these horrific accidents that marijuana isn’t a dangerous drug. Also, no one has yet supplied conclusive medical evidence that marijuana smoke cures anything. Nevertheless, those who believe they need THC, the main active ingredient in marijuana, for medical reasons can easily obtain a prescription for Marinol, which contains higher doses of THC than the typical “joint.” That’s why I believe the whole medical marijuana campaign was nothing more than an excuse to smoke dope in public. Although Nevadans fell for that scam in the 1990s, we don’t have to compound the error by legalizing marijuana, which is a first step down the slippery slope of broader drug legalization.

So who pays for these expensive pro-drug TV campaigns? The largest single contributor is billionaire financier George Soros, a Hungarian-born socialist who was described by former Health and Human Services Secretary Joseph Califano as “the Daddy Warbucks of drug legalization.” Soros, who hates President Bush and contributes millions of dollars to Howard Dean and other left-wing causes, has identified “capitalism and market values” as the main threats to world peace. Despite considerable evidence to the contrary, he probably thinks that legalizing dangerous drugs would help to achieve a more perfect world. Frankly, I think he’s been smoking something.

“These people (Soros and his MPP allies) use ignorance and an overwhelming amount of money to influence the electorate,” said White House drug czar John Walters during the 2002 election campaign. “(But) you don’t hide behind money and refuse to talk and hire underlings and not stand up and speak for yourself.” Therefore, I cordially invite MPP/Nevada spokesman Bruce Mirken to tell us what their real agenda is. I’m sure his answer would be both revealing and educational. How about it, Bruce? I can hardly wait.

Source: Guy W. Farmer, a semi-retired journalist and former U.S. diplomat, resides in Carson City.

 

Nevada Appeal, December 7, 2003

 

Filed under: Legal Sector :

For sure, as Office of National Drug Control Policy Director John P. Walters recently pointed out in the National Review, “legalization has enticed intelligent commentators for years, no doubt because it offers, on the surface, a simple solution to a complex problem.” But Walters adds that “reasoned debate on the consequences usually dampens enthusiasm, leaving many erstwhile proponents feeling mugged by reality.”

Just for starters, drug use would increase if it were legalized. The bedrock economic law of supply and demand guarantees that narcotics would become cheaper and easier to get once unencumbered by legal risk and promoted by the great American marketing machine.

The effect would be ruinous, even in the case of “soft” drugs like marijuana, which is already responsible for nearly two-thirds of individuals who meet psychiatric criteria for substance-abuse treatment. And marijuana is a widely-acknowledged “gateway” drug; In Holland, where it was legalized in 1976, heroin addiction levels subsequently tripled.

Fortunately, while few would argue that victory is within sight, pessimism over the future of the war on drugs has been vastly overstated. Consider:

* The claim is often made that hundreds of thousands of purportedly harmless, “recreational” marijuana users are behind bars, straining judicial resources and diverting the attention of law enforcement from more serious crimes. But Walters points out that fewer than 1 percent of those imprisoned for drug offenses are low-level marijuana users, and many of them have “pleaded down” to a marijuana charge to avoid other, weightier convictions. “The vast majority of those in prison on drug convictions,” he says, “are true criminals involved in drug trafficking, repeat offenses, or violent crime.”

* Proponents of legalization also argue that because about half of all referrals for substance-abuse treatment come from the criminal justice system, the law is more of a problem than marijuana itself. But the same is true of referrals for alcohol treatment, and no one argues that alcoholism is a fiction created by the courts. Marijuana’s role in emergency-room visits has tripled over the past decade, not because judges are sending patients to the hospital, but because of the well-documented increasing potency of the drug.

* In surveys, eight times as many Americans report regular use of alcohol than of marijuana. The law is a big part of the reason why. Far from a hopeless battle, the war on drugs has made significant progress. According to the Drug Enforcement Administration, overall drug abuse is down by more than a third in the last twenty years. Cocaine use in particular has dropped by an astounding 70 percent.

* Like the battle against cancer and other diseases, this war will and must continue. The alternative is too dreadful to contemplate. As Walters puts it, “Drug legalizers will not be satisfied with a limited distribution of medical marijuana, nor will they stop at legal marijuana for sale in convenience stores … Using the discourse of rights without responsibilities, the effort strives to establish an entitlement to addictive substances. The impact will be devastating.”

If you’ve ever known someone hooked on drugs, you know what he means.
Filed under: Legal Sector :

There is a progression in the minds of men: first the unthinkable becomes thinkable, and then it becomes an orthodoxy whose truth seems so obvious that no one remembers that anyone ever thought differently. This is just what is happening with the idea of legalizing drugs: it has reached the stage when with the idea of legalizing drugs: it has reached the stage when millions of thinking men are agreed that allowing people to take whatever they like is the obvious, indeed only, solution to the social problems that arise from the consumption of drugs.

Man’s desire to take mind-altering substances is as old as society itself—as are attempts to regulate their consumption. If intoxication in one form or another is inevitable, then so is customary or legal restraint upon that intoxication. But no society until our own has had to contend with the ready availability of so many different mind-altering drugs, combined with a citizenry jealous of its right to pursue its own pleasures in its own way.
The arguments in favor of legalizing the use of all narcotic and stimulant drugs are twofold: philosophical and pragmatic. Neither argument is negligible, but both are mistaken, I believe, and both miss the point.

The philosophic argument is that, in a free society, adults should be permitted to do whatever they please, always provided that they are prepared to take the consequences of their own choices and that they cause no direct harm to others. The locus classicus for this point of view is John Stuart Mill’s famous essay On Liberty: “The only purpose for which power can be rightfully exercised over any member of the community, against his will, is to prevent harm to others,” Mill wrote. “His own good, either physical or moral, is not a sufficient warrant.” This radical individualism allows society no part whatever in shaping, determining, or enforcing a moral code: in short, we have nothing in common but our contractual agreement not to interfere with one another as we go about seeking our private pleasures.

In practice, of course, it is exceedingly difficult to make people take all the consequences of their own actions—as they must, if Mill’s great principle is to serve as a philosophical guide to policy. Addiction to, or regular use of, most currently prohibited drugs cannot affect only the person who takes them—and not his spouse, children, neighbors, or employers. No man, except possibly a hermit, is an island; and so it is virtually impossible for Mill’s principle to apply to any human action whatever, let alone shooting up heroin or smoking crack. Such a principle is virtually useless in determining what should or should not be permitted.

Perhaps we ought not be too harsh on Mill’s principle: it’s not clear that anyone has ever thought of a better one. But that is precisely the point. Human affairs cannot be decided by an appeal to an infallible rule, expressible in a few words, whose simple application can decide all cases, including whether drugs should be freely available to the entire adult population. Philosophical fundamentalism is not preferable to the religious variety; and because the desiderata of human life are many, and often in conflict with one another, mere philosophical inconsistency in policy—such as permitting the consumption of alcohol while outlawing cocaine—is not a sufficient argument against that policy. We all value freedom, and we all value order; sometimes we sacrifice freedom for order, and sometimes order for freedom. But once a prohibition has been removed, it is hard to restore, even when the newfound freedom proves to have been ill-conceived and socially disastrous.

Even Mill came to see the limitations of his own principle as a guide for policy and to deny that all pleasures were of equal significance for human existence. It was better, he said, to be Socrates discontented than a fool satisfied. Mill acknowledged that some goals were intrinsically worthier of pursuit than others. This being the case, not all freedoms are equal, and neither are all limitations of freedom: some are serious and some trivial. The freedom we cherish—or should cherish—is not merely that of satisfying our appetites, whatever they happen to be. We are not Dickensian Harold Skimpoles, exclaiming in protest that “Even the butterflies are free!” We are not children who chafe at restrictions because they are restrictions. And we even recognize the apparent paradox that some limitations to our freedoms have the consequence of making us freer overall. The freest man is not the one who slavishly follows his appetites and desires throughout his life—as all too many of my patients have discovered to their cost.

We are prepared to accept limitations to our freedoms for many reasons, not just that of public order. Take an extreme hypothetical case: public exhibitions of necrophilia are quite rightly not permitted, though on Mill’s principle they should be. A corpse has no interests and cannot be harmed, because it is no longer a person; and no member of the public is harmed if he has agreed to attend such an exhibition.
Our resolve to prohibit such exhibitions would not be altered if we discovered that millions of people wished to attend them or even if we discovered that millions already were attending them illicitly. Our objection is not based upon pragmatic considerations or upon a head count: it is based upon the wrongness of the would-be exhibitions themselves. The fact that the prohibition represents a genuine restriction of our freedom is of no account.

It might be argued that the freedom to choose among a variety of intoxicating substances is a much more important freedom and that millions of people have derived innocent fun from taking stimulants and narcotics. But the consumption of drugs has the effect of reducing men’s freedom by circumscribing the range of their interests. It impairs their ability to pursue more important human aims, such as raising a family and fulfilling civic obligations. Very often it impairs their ability to pursue gainful employment and promotes parasitism. Moreover, far from being expanders of consciousness, most drugs severely limit it. One of the most striking characteristics of drug takers is their intense and tedious self-absorption; and their journeys into inner space are generally forays into inner vacuums. Drug taking is a lazy man’s way of pursuing happiness and wisdom, and the shortcut turns out to be the deadest of dead ends. We lose remarkably little by not being permitted to take drugs.

The idea that freedom is merely the ability to act upon one’s whims is surely very thin and hardly begins to capture the complexities of human existence; a man whose appetite is his law strikes us not as liberated but enslaved. And when such a narrowly conceived freedom is made the touchstone of public policy, a dissolution of society is bound to follow. No culture that makes publicly sanctioned self-indulgence its highest good can long survive: a radical egotism is bound to ensue, in which any limitations upon personal behavior are experienced as infringements of basic rights. Distinctions between the important and the trivial, between the freedom to criticize received ideas and the freedom to take LSD, are precisely the standards that keep societies from barbarism.

So the legalization of drugs cannot be supported by philosophical principle. But if the pragmatic argument in favor of legalization were strong enough, it might overwhelm other objections. It is upon this argument that proponents of legalization rest the larger part of their case.
The argument is that the overwhelming majority of the harm done to society by the consumption of currently illicit drugs is caused not by their pharmacological properties but by their prohibition and the resultant criminal activity that prohibition always calls into being. Simple reflection tells us that a supply invariably grows up to meet a demand; and when the demand is widespread, suppression is useless. Indeed, it is harmful, since—by raising the price of the commodity in question—it raises the profits of middlemen, which gives them an even more powerful incentive to stimulate demand further. The vast profits to be made from cocaine and heroin—which, were it not for their illegality, would be cheap and easily affordable even by the poorest in affluent societies—exert a deeply corrupting effect on producers, distributors, consumers, and law enforcers alike. Besides, it is well known that illegality in itself has attractions for youth already inclined to disaffection. Even many of the harmful physical effects of illicit drugs stem from their illegal status: for example, fluctuations in the purity of heroin bought on the street are responsible for many of the deaths by overdose. If the sale and consumption of such drugs were legalized, consumers would know how much they were taking and thus avoid overdoses.

Moreover, since society already permits the use of some mind-altering substances known to be both addictive and harmful, such as alcohol and nicotine, in prohibiting others it appears hypocritical, arbitrary, and dictatorial. Its hypocrisy, as well as its patent failure to enforce its prohibitions successfully, leads inevitably to a decline in respect for the law as a whole. Thus things fall apart, and the center cannot hold.
It stands to reason, therefore, that all these problems would be resolved at a stroke if everyone were permitted to smoke, swallow, or inject anything he chose. The corruption of the police, the luring of children of 11 and 12 into illegal activities, the making of such vast sums of money by drug dealing that legitimate work seems pointless and silly by comparison, and the turf wars that make poor neighborhoods so exceedingly violent and dangerous, would all cease at once were drug taking to be decriminalized and the supply regulated in the same way as alcohol.

But a certain modesty in the face of an inherently unknowable future is surely advisable. That is why prudence is a political virtue: what stands to reason should happen does not necessarily happen in practice. As Goethe said, all theory (even of the monetarist or free-market variety) is gray, but green springs the golden tree of life. If drugs were legalized, I suspect that the golden tree of life might spring some unpleasant surprises.
It is of course true, but only trivially so, that the present illegality of drugs is the cause of the criminality surrounding their distribution. Likewise, it is the illegality of stealing cars that creates car thieves. In fact, the ultimate cause of all criminality is law. As far as I am aware, no one has ever suggested that law should therefore be abandoned. Moreover, the impossibility of winning the “war” against theft, burglary, robbery, and fraud has never been used as an argument that these categories of crime should be abandoned. And so long as the demand for material goods outstrips supply, people will be tempted to commit criminal acts against the owners of property. This is not an argument, in my view, against private property or in favor of the common ownership of all goods. It does suggest, however, that we shall need a police force for a long time to come.

In any case, there are reasons to doubt whether the crime rate would fall quite as dramatically as advocates of legalization have suggested. Amsterdam, where access to drugs is relatively unproblematic, is among the most violent and squalid cities in Europe. The idea behind crime—of getting rich, or at least richer, quickly and without much effort—is unlikely to disappear once drugs are freely available to all who want them. And it may be that officially sanctioned antisocial behavior—the official lifting of taboos—breeds yet more antisocial behavior, as the “broken windows” theory would suggest.

Having met large numbers of drug dealers in prison, I doubt that they would return to respectable life if the principal article of their commerce were to be legalized. Far from evincing a desire to be reincorporated into the world of regular work, they express a deep contempt for it and regard those who accept the bargain of a fair day’s work for a fair day’s pay as cowards and fools. A life of crime has its attractions for many who would otherwise lead a mundane existence. So long as there is the possibility of a lucrative racket or illegal traffic, such people will find it and extend its scope. Therefore, since even legalizers would hesitate to allow children to take drugs, decriminalization might easily result in dealers turning their attentions to younger and younger children, who—in the permissive atmosphere that even now prevails—have already been inducted into the drug subculture in alarmingly high numbers.

Those who do not deal in drugs but commit crimes to fund their consumption of them are, of course, more numerous than large-scale dealers. And it is true that once opiate addicts, for example, enter a treatment program, which often includes maintenance doses of methadone, the rate at which they commit crimes falls markedly. The drug clinic in my hospital claims an 80 percent reduction in criminal convictions among heroin addicts once they have been stabilized on methadone.

This is impressive, but it is not certain that the results should be generalized. First, the patients are self-selected: they have some motivation to change, otherwise they would not have attended the clinic in the first place. Only a minority of addicts attend, and therefore it is not safe to conclude that, if other addicts were to receive methadone, their criminal activity would similarly diminish.

Second, a decline in convictions is not necessarily the same as a decline in criminal acts. If methadone stabilizes an addict’s life, he may become a more efficient, harder-to-catch criminal. Moreover, when the police in our city do catch an addict, they are less likely to prosecute him if he can prove that he is undergoing anything remotely resembling psychiatric treatment. They return him directly to his doctor. Having once had a psychiatric consultation is an all-purpose alibi for a robber or a burglar; the police, who do not want to fill in the 40-plus forms it now takes to charge anyone with anything in England, consider a single contact with a psychiatrist sufficient to deprive anyone of legal responsibility for crime forever.

Third, the rate of criminal activity among those drug addicts who receive methadone from the clinic, though reduced, remains very high. The deputy director of the clinic estimates that the number of criminal acts committed by his average patient (as judged by self-report) was 250 per year before entering treatment and 50 afterward. It may well be that the real difference is considerably less than this, because the patients have an incentive to exaggerate it to secure the continuation of their methadone. But clearly, opiate addicts who receive their drugs legally and free of charge continue to commit large numbers of crimes. In my clinics in prison, I see numerous prisoners who were on methadone when they committed the crime for which they are incarcerated.

Why do addicts given their drug free of charge continue to commit crimes? Some addicts, of course, continue to take drugs other than those prescribed and have to fund their consumption of them. So long as any restriction whatever regulates the consumption of drugs, many addicts will seek them illicitly, regardless of what they receive legally. In addition, the drugs themselves exert a long-term effect on a person’s ability to earn a living and severely limit rather than expand his horizons and mental repertoire. They sap the will or the ability of an addict to make long-term plans. While drugs are the focus of an addict’s life, they are not all he needs to live, and many addicts thus continue to procure the rest of what they need by criminal means.

For the proposed legalization of drugs to have its much vaunted beneficial effect on the rate of criminality, such drugs would have to be both cheap and readily available. The legalizers assume that there is a natural limit to the demand for these drugs, and that if their consumption were legalized, the demand would not increase substantially. Those psychologically unstable persons currently taking drugs would continue to do so, with the necessity to commit crimes removed, while psychologically stabler people (such as you and I and our children) would not be enticed to take drugs by their new legal status and cheapness. But price and availability, I need hardly say, exert a profound effect on consumption: the cheaper alcohol becomes, for example, the more of it is consumed, at least within quite wide limits.

I have personal experience of this effect. I once worked as a doctor on a British government aid project to Africa. We were building a road through remote African bush. The contract stipulated that the construction company could import, free of all taxes, alcoholic drinks from the United Kingdom. These drinks the company then sold to its British workers at cost, in the local currency at the official exchange rate, which was approximately one-sixth the black-market rate. A liter bottle of gin thus cost less than a dollar and could be sold on the open market for almost ten dollars. So it was theoretically possible to remain dead drunk for several years for an initial outlay of less than a dollar.

Of course, the necessity to go to work somewhat limited the workers’ consumption of alcohol. Nevertheless, drunkenness among them far outstripped anything I have ever seen, before or since. I discovered that, when alcohol is effectively free of charge, a fifth of British construction workers will regularly go to bed so drunk that they are incontinent both of urine and feces. I remember one man who very rarely got as far as his bed at night: he fell asleep in the lavatory, where he was usually found the next morning. Half the men shook in the mornings and resorted to the hair of the dog to steady their hands before they drove their bulldozers and other heavy machines (which they frequently wrecked, at enormous expense to the British taxpayer); hangovers were universal. The men were either drunk or hung over for months on end.

Sure, construction workers are notoriously liable to drink heavily, but in these circumstances even formerly moderate drinkers turned alcoholic and eventually suffered from delirium tremens. The heavy drinking occurred not because of the isolation of the African bush: not only did the company provide sports facilities for its workers, but there were many other ways to occupy oneself there. Other groups of workers in the bush whom I visited, who did not have the same rights of importation of alcoholic drink but had to purchase it at normal prices, were not nearly as drunk. And when the company asked its workers what it could do to improve their conditions, they unanimously asked for a further reduction in the price of alcohol, because they could think of nothing else to ask for.

The conclusion was inescapable: that a susceptible population had responded to the low price of alcohol, and the lack of other effective restraints upon its consumption, by drinking destructively large quantities of it. The health of many men suffered as a consequence, as did their capacity for work; and they gained a well-deserved local reputation for reprehensible, violent, antisocial behavior.

It is therefore perfectly possible that the demand for drugs, including opiates, would rise dramatically were their price to fall and their availability to increase. And if it is true that the consumption of these drugs in itself predisposes to criminal behavior (as data from our clinic suggest), it is also possible that the effect on the rate of criminality of this rise in consumption would swamp the decrease that resulted from decriminalization. We would have just as much crime in aggregate as before, but many more addicts.

The intermediate position on drug legalization, such as that espoused by Ethan Nadelmann, director of the Lindesmith Center, a drug policy research institute sponsored by financier George Soros, is emphatically not the answer to drug-related crime. This view holds that it should be easy for addicts to receive opiate drugs from doctors, either free or at cost, and that they should receive them in municipal injecting rooms, such as now exist in Zurich. But just look at Liverpool, where 2,000 people of a population of 600,000 receive official prescriptions for methadone: this once proud and prosperous city is still the world capital of drug-motivated burglary, according to the police and independent researchers.

Of course, many addicts in Liverpool are not yet on methadone, because the clinics are insufficient in number to deal with the demand. If the city expended more money on clinics, perhaps the number of addicts in treatment could be increased five- or tenfold. But would that solve the problem of burglary in Liverpool? No, because the profits to be made from selling illicit opiates would still be large: dealers would therefore make efforts to expand into parts of the population hitherto relatively untouched, in order to protect their profits. The new addicts would still burgle to feed their habits. Yet more clinics dispensing yet more methadone would then be needed. In fact Britain, which has had a relatively liberal approach to the prescribing of opiate drugs to addicts since 1928 (I myself have prescribed heroin to addicts), has seen an explosive increase in addiction to opiates and all the evils associated with it since the 1960s, despite that liberal policy. A few hundred have become more than a hundred thousand.
At the heart of Nadelmann’s position, then, is an evasion. The legal and liberal provision of drugs for people who are already addicted to them will not reduce the economic benefits to dealers of pushing these drugs, at least until the entire susceptible population is addicted and in a treatment program. So long as there are addicts who have to resort to the black market for their drugs, there will be drug-associated crime.

Nadelmann assumes that the number of potential addicts wouldn’t soar under considerably more liberal drug laws. I can’t muster such Panglossian optimism. The problem of reducing the amount of crime committed by individual addicts is emphatically not the same as the problem of reducing the amount of crime committed by addicts as a whole. I can illustrate what I mean by an analogy: it is often claimed that prison does not work because many prisoners are recidivists who, by definition, failed to be deterred from further wrongdoing by their last prison sentence. But does any sensible person believe that the abolition of prisons in their entirety would not reduce the numbers of the law-abiding? The murder rate in New York and the rate of drunken driving in Britain have not been reduced by a sudden upsurge in the love of humanity, but by the effective threat of punishment. An institution such as prison can work for society even if it does not work for an individual.

The situation could be very much worse than I have suggested hitherto, however, if we legalized the consumption of drugs other than opiates. So far, I have considered only opiates, which exert a generally tranquilizing effect. If opiate addicts commit crimes even when they receive their drugs free of charge, it is because they are unable to meet their other needs any other way; but there are, unfortunately, drugs whose consumption directly leads to violence because of their psychopharmacological properties and not merely because of the criminality associated with their distribution. Stimulant drugs such as crack cocaine provoke paranoia, increase aggression, and promote violence. Much of this violence takes place in the home, as the relatives of crack takers will testify. It is something I know from personal acquaintance by working in the emergency room and in the wards of our hospital. Only someone who has not been assaulted by drug takers rendered psychotic by their drug could view with equanimity the prospect of the further spread of the abuse of stimulants.

And no one should underestimate the possibility that the use of stimulant drugs could spread very much wider, and become far more general, than it is now, if restraints on their use were relaxed. The importation of the mildly stimulant khat is legal in Britain, and a large proportion of the community of Somali refugees there devotes its entire life to chewing the leaves that contain the stimulant, miring these refugees in far worse poverty than they would otherwise experience. The reason that the khat habit has not spread to the rest of the population is that it takes an entire day’s chewing of disgustingly bitter leaves to gain the comparatively mild pharmacological effect. The point is, however, that once the use of a stimulant becomes culturally acceptable and normal, it can easily become so general as to exert devastating social effects. And the kinds of stimulants on offer in Western cities—cocaine, crack, amphetamines—are vastly more attractive than khat.

In claiming that prohibition, not the drugs themselves, is the problem, Nadelmann and many others—even policemen—have said that “the war on drugs is lost.” But to demand a yes or no answer to the question “Is the war against drugs being won?” is like demanding a yes or no answer to the question “Have you stopped beating your wife yet?” Never can an unimaginative and fundamentally stupid metaphor have exerted a more baleful effect upon proper thought.

Let us ask whether medicine is winning the war against death. The answer is obviously no, it isn’t winning: the one fundamental rule of human existence remains, unfortunately, one man one death. And this is despite the fact that 14 percent of the gross domestic product of the United States (to say nothing of the efforts of other countries) goes into the fight against death. Was ever a war more expensively lost? Let us then abolish medical schools, hospitals, and departments of public health. If every man has to die, it doesn’t matter very much when he does so.
If the war against drugs is lost, then so are the wars against theft, speeding, incest, fraud, rape, murder, arson, and illegal parking. Few, if any, such wars are winnable. So let us all do anything we choose.

Even the legalizers’ argument that permitting the purchase and use of drugs as freely as Milton Friedman suggests will necessarily result in less governmental and other official interference in our lives doesn’t stand up. To the contrary, if the use of narcotics and stimulants were to become virtually universal, as is by no means impossible, the number of situations in which compulsory checks upon people would have to be carried out, for reasons of public safety, would increase enormously. Pharmacies, banks, schools, hospitals—indeed, all organizations dealing with the public—might feel obliged to check regularly and randomly on the drug consumption of their employees. The general use of such drugs would increase the locus standi of innumerable agencies, public and private, to interfere in our lives; and freedom from interference, far from having increased, would have drastically shrunk.

The present situation is bad, undoubtedly; but few are the situations so bad that they cannot be made worse by a wrong policy decision.
The extreme intellectual elegance of the proposal to legalize the distribution and consumption of drugs, touted as the solution to so many problems at once (AIDS, crime, overcrowding in the prisons, and even the attractiveness of drugs to foolish young people) should give rise to skepticism. Social problems are not usually like that. Analogies with the Prohibition era, often drawn by those who would legalize drugs, are false and inexact: it is one thing to attempt to ban a substance that has been in customary use for centuries by at least nine-tenths of the adult population, and quite another to retain a ban on substances that are still not in customary use, in an attempt to ensure that they never do become customary. Surely we have already slid down enough slippery slopes in the last 30 years without looking for more such slopes to slide down

First published in the Spring 1997 issue of the Manhattan Institute’s City Journal, where Theodore Dalrymple is a contributing editor.
 

Filed under: Legal Sector :

The ‘softly softly’ police approach to cannabis in Lambeth, south London, has effectively been reversed with the issue of tougher new operational guidelines for officers, They will now be encouraged to consider arresting those in possession of cannabis if they are smoking the drug under age, ostentatiously in public, or as part of disorderly behaviour. Over the past year, in a scheme initiated by Cdr Brian Paddick, the former head of Lambeth police, officers have been seizing cannabis and issuing warnings to those in possession, rather than making arrests. … The Paddick experiment ran for a year from July last year. The new rules will apply from Aug 1. … Officers had welcomed the discretion not to have to arrest people for possession of small amounts of the drug. But many were unhappy that they were apparently being discouraged from enforcing the law when cannabis was smoked in a way that upset the community. Lambeth police sources said they welcomed an approach in which officers would be ‘expected’ to enforce the law if cannabis were smoked in anti-social or disorderly circumstances. They added that they had stepped up activity against traffickers of Class A and Class B drugs.

Source:Daily Telegraph, Steele. July 2002
Filed under: Legal Sector :

The pressure on drug laws and enforcement, seen most recently in the UK with the downgrading of Cannabis to Class ‘C’, is not unique – nor is it a popular uprising. A brief overview of the world scene may explain what is happening here – but to say it makes sense of it would be a travesty. PETER STOKER of the National Drug Prevention Alliance (NDPA) reports.
In the early 80s in the UK there was relatively little visible libertarian (‘lib’) action around drugs; radicalism focused more on issues such as children’s rights, and varied sexuality. Then a group of activists, mainly in northwest England but with national – and crucially – international links, conceived a way to advance their cause. By their own admission, they hijacked the term ‘Harm Reduction’ – and the tragic coincidence of AIDS gave an unexpected, if macabre, additional impetus to a model those activists in many other countries would follow.

What’s wrong with Harm Reduction anyway? The answer to that depends on what you mean by the term. Traditionally, in drug agencies, it was and still is intervening with a known user, on a one to-one basis, to reduce the harm they are doing to themselves and others, whilst they are considering giving up. No problem there.

But this is not the ‘lib’s’ gambit. ‘New Harm Reduction’ decrees firstly, don’t try to prevent – (a) because it’s ‘immoral’ and (b) because it’s futile. Secondly, don’t educate against drugs, only educate about them. Thirdly, tell everybody – users or not – less risky ways of using drugs (misconstrued by youth as ‘safe use’). Fourthly, trivialise drugs in the eyes of the law and glamorise them in the media. And lastly, press for law relaxation, starting with the ‘softer’ drugs. And when use goes up as a result of this corrupt approach, blame the increase on ‘the failed war on drugs’ – citing this as justification for more Harm Reduction.

As this movement gathered pace, the links between activists in UK, America and Europe led to the Mersey Drugs Journal becoming the International Journal on Drug Policy, gathering ‘libs’ from all corners of the globe. Next came the International Conferences on the Reduction of Drug-Related Harm, launched in Liverpool and on world tour to this day. A big-money operation, mainly confined to the drugs professions.

In 1994 all this changed in the UK, with the first serious attempt to woo the public at large; ‘Reefer Rosie’ Boycott launched a campaign to legalise cannabis, through the pages of the Independent on Sunday. A year later Channel 4 screened their ‘Pot Night’ eulogy on the herb, and since then there has been a steadily growing, mediasupported campaign – with perhaps one major skirmish per year. This pattern continued until the run-up to the 2001 General Election, when events such as the humiliation of Ann Widdecombe after the Conservative party conference caused the ‘libs’ to smell blood in the water. An unprecedented frenzy of lobbying then took place, in which the debacle in Lambeth about Commander Paddick was but one factor. The media and others made wild claims about what the voters wanted, and in retrospect it would seem that this might have unduly influenced the incoming Home Secretary. Without having time to ‘read himself in’ to his new post, Mr Blunkett announced that he was ‘minded’ to reclassify cannabis. Later suggestions that his Department felt this concession would take the heat out of the drug lobby can now be seen to have been a major miscalculation.

Any review of the world ‘lib’ movement has to begin in America, the birthplace of pot politics. Starting in the Sixties with NORML, (National Organisation for the Reform of Marijuana Laws) bankrolled for its first ten years by Playboy Hugh Hefner, almost all the arguments still being trotted out now were cooked up then. For example “We will use the medical marijuana argument as a red herring to give pot a good name”. In the Seventies they floated something called ‘Responsible Use’ – the forerunner of today’s hijacked version of ‘Harm Reduction’. Use soared.

As 1980 approached, ordinary mums and dads in America went on the warpath, pressing government and professions to relinquish laxity and go for prevention across schools and communities. The results were salutary; over the next 12 years, use of all drugs was cut by a staggering 60%, equivalent to 13 million fewer users. The ‘libs’ retired, re-thought and rehearsed new tactics in places like Europe, as a prelude to reviving hostilities in America. Revival came around 1990, with so-called ‘medical use’ still the main lever.

But this time they had something different. Money. By far the largest tranche of funds came from futures speculator George Soros, name UK stockbrokers will recall. By his own published estimate George has put almost $100 million “into weakening drug laws” – including paying collectors to get signatures on petitions. Sadly for George, many recent referenda went against him. And scepticism has replaced romantic appraisals of ‘needle give-aways’ (not exchanges) in cities such as Seattle and Baltimore, prompted by their achieving nation-high levels of drug abuse, addiction and HIV. ‘Harm Reduction’ can damage your health.

On the positive side, America has many fine prevention pro-grammes, models of good practice. The largest also happens to be the most attacked. DARE (Drug Abuse Resistance Education) reaches some 30 million pupils a year – all delivered by police officers. Doubly repugnant, therefore, to some e.g. “Getting rid of DARE may be very effective activity for drug reform activists …” said New Age Patriot magazine in 1997. Assaults on DARE in the UK assert that teachers are better at drug education than police; given that few teachers are trained in the subject – and subjected to doctrine which challenges rather than upholds the law, this has to be highly dubious … a question of which ‘PC’ you would prefer. And yet DARE continues to grow, its curriculum newly upgraded by independent experts. Seven UK forces use it already; more are interested.

“The school must not be allowed to continue fostering the immorality of morality. An entirely different set of values must be fostered”. Professor Sydney Simon in Values Clarification.
Its own prevention workers describe Canada as ‘going to hell in a handcart’. A huge country; unlimited roof space for hydroponics, and wide expanses ideal for moving cannabis unobserved … now a major export crop to the USA. Harm Reduction has now upstaged drug Prevention. Recent pronouncements by Canada’s Senate Committee make our Select Committee sound to the right of Attila the Hun. But not everyone buys into this approach; a World Summit Conference on Prevention was held in Vancouver earlier this year, where one of the most striking presentations was by a unit called the Odd Squad. Nothing to do with the way they walk, the Odd Squad are Vancouver Police frontline officers who cover the odd days on the roster, particularly in the heavy drug areas of the city. With the permission of the addicts, they have been keeping a video diary; this gripping portrayal has been edited by the National Film Board of Canada and screened on national TV. (See Through a Blue Lens, January 2002 issue of POLICE. Ed.)

When South Australia decriminalised cannabis in the late 80s, the immediate consequence was a substantial increase in youth use compared to other states, ergo, an excuse to make Harm Reduction the main policy. Australian ‘libs’ spent much time studying word power, particularly proud of persuading the media to refer to prevention workers as ‘prohibitionists’ and to themselves themselves as ‘reformers’. The imagery associated with these two words is of course invaluable to a lobby. On the positive side, Australia has given birth to one of the largest prevention programmes in the world – Life Education Centres, now widely used to excellent effect in UK and several other countries.

Switzerland may be known more for its heroin trials, but the associated cultural changes have affected the consumption of all drugs. The heroin trials themselves are the subject of deep suspicion, not least because the trial supervisor was also the president of the Swiss lodge of the International Anti- Prohibition League – ardent legalisation campaigners. Despite WHO and INCB rejecting the trials and recommending that other countries should not use them as a model, they are still sold hard in other countries – and some have fallen for it. Our own Home Affairs Select Committee included.

Both the United Nations and the EC have a disproportionate contingent of ‘libs’, as does the Lisbonbased Monitoring Centre that advises them. The latest initiative, which is extremely worrying, is an attempt to dismantle the UN Conventions on drugs. The Conventions have been the final and often deciding rampart against liberalisation in many countries; were dismantling to happen, this would precipitate worldwide deterioration in drug policy.

The Netherlands has hardly shunned publicity. Less well known is that in a recent public opinion poll more than 70 per cent of its citizens were against their current relaxed drug laws, and the government’s ambivalent stance, cynically nicknamed ‘gedogen’ which means ‘to tolerate officially what is officially prohibited’. Dutch drug expert Frans Koopmans recommends a switch to ‘zero nonchalance’ – and the new prime minister seems to agree, pledging to take a stronger line. Another reason for this might be unfavourable comparisons with another country further north – Sweden. Lifetime prevalence of cannabis in the Netherlands is 29% compared to just 7% in Sweden; 10% use in the last year in the Netherlands – 1% in Sweden. Amongst 15-16 year-olds in the Netherlands, seven times as many had used in the last month as had in Sweden. The age of problem users is flattening off in Sweden but becoming younger in the Netherlands. Sweden also outstrips South Australia to a broadly similar degree. Overall, Sweden is way ahead – and, conceivably, the way ahead.
Elsewhere in Europe, drug policy is a ‘curate’s egg’. Some provinces in Germany have decriminalised cannabis possession, the most radical defining the allowable ‘personal use’ possession amount as 8 kilograms! Belgium and Portugal may have decriminalised but, in stark contrast, Italy’s Premier Berlusconi has announced a drastic U-turn away from libertarian policies and towards the Swedish-style approach.

Many other countries are a long way from hoisting the white flag. Arab countries take a prevention line, as do most other Middle East and Far East nations. The Caribbean is another strong prevention area. NDPA is currently bidding to assist Bulgaria in prevention training, having already trained teams in Poland, Germany and Portugal. Another four East European countries are interested in NDPA’s work.

Prevention has been strong in New Zealand for decades, and possibly the most readable cannabis textbook in the world came from two Kiwis – Trevor Grice and Tom Scott. Entitled Cannabis – The Great Brain Robbery it is packed, not just with facts and figures, but many photos and the product of Tom
Scott’s professional cartoonist talents.

Bringing it back home this past year, under the combined effects of the Home Office and the Lambeth debacle, much of the ground gained (600,000 fewer users than four years ago) has been eroded at a stroke of the Home Secretary’s pen. But the news is not all bad; excellent prevention programmes like NDPA’s Teenex are still producing, 15 years on, with similar pedigrees in Life Education and DARE. Although the Select Committee ignored the Police Federation’s evidence and endorsed the proposal to reclassify cannabis, the Committee ruled against decriminalisation or legalisation, and made other useful suggestions: Prevention-oriented education; an end to the funding of drug education literature which encourages use; abstinence as the goal of all treatment. Even the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs, not short of ‘lib’ sympathisers, conceded that there are now clearly very significant harms to cannabis, and concluded, “… there may be worse news to come”. In November the British Lung Foundation and the British Medical Journal published new research on serious harms from cannabis.

Taken together with the report by the Schools Health Education Unit, showing that there has been a 50% increase in use of cannabis by young men and women in the last year, one might have expected all this to give Mr Blunkett pause for thought. Sadly, when Police Federation officers joined this writer on 4th December, to hear Under- Secretary Bob Ainsworth unveil the 2002 ‘Updated National Drug Strategy’, there was no sign, either of change of face, or loss thereof.

Formerly a Chartered Engineer, Peter Stoker’s 15 years in the drugs field have spanned intervention, treatment, justice, education and prevention – including serving as a DfEE Drug Education Advisor. An author of papers and books, he frequently contributes to the broadcast and print media and is a member of the Global Institute for Drug Policy.

Filed under: Legal Sector :


New figures show the number of under-16s charged with possession or supply has gone up by 13% since 2002.

The statistics from seven Scots police forces, including Strathclyde, show several 13-year-olds have been found dealing heroin, while children as young as 10 have been caught with cannabis.

The rise in cannabis offences has led to calls for its downgrading to be reversed.

In January 2004, David Blunkett, as Home Secretary, reclassified cannabis from Class B to Class C.

The Government said the move would allow police to concentrate on cracking down on hard drugs.

But opponents say the reclassification was like a green light for thousands of people who previously would not have used cannabis, which has been found to trigger mental health problems.

Professor Neil McKeganey, from the Centre of Drug Misuse at Glasgow University, said: “The reclassification was a bad idea. It conveyed a message to young people that the drug wasn’t important enough to be concerned about.

“Now cannabis isn’t even seen as an illegal drug by many young people.” Annabel Goldie, home affairs spokeswoman for the Scottish Tories, said: “The reclassification was absolute madness and and must be reversed. “A simple zero-tolerance approach has to be the starting point if we are ever going to win the war against drugs.”

Stewart Stevenson, the SNP’s deputy justice spokesman, said: “We must be unambiguous in our opposition to this and all other drugs.” He added: “There are no risk-free drugs.”

Across Scotland, the number of youngsters aged 16 and under arrested for possession and intent to supply cannabis rose from 1063 to 1204. In Strathclyde, it rose from 672 to 695. THE downgrading of cannabis was today blamed for a rise in Scots children arrested for drugs offences.

New figures show the number of under-16s charged with possession or supply has gone up by 13% since 2002.

The rise in cannabis offences has led to calls for its downgrading to be reversed.

Source: Newsquest Herald & Times Ltd. August 2005
Filed under: Legal Sector :


A study of New York’s drug courts finds that the prison alternative is successful in reducing recidivism over an extended period of time,

The “New York State Adult Drug Court Evaluation: Policies Participants and Impacts” study found that six drug courts in the state had reduced post-arrest and post-program recidivism for at least a three-year period.

In addition, the study showed that recidivism rates either declined or remained stable for drug-court graduates during the one-year post-program period.

The study further found that the drug courts exceeded the national standard for their one-year retention rate.

The drug courts evaluated in the study are located in the Bronx, Brooklyn, Queens, Suffolk, Syracuse, and Rochester.

Source:  Alcoholism & Drug Abuse Weekly reported Nov. 24. 2004
Filed under: Legal Sector :

LUCY ADAMS, Home Affairs Correspondent January 20 2005
THE use and cultivation of cannabis in Scotland has exploded in the year since the drug’s legal status was downgraded.

Police figures reveal that the number of marijuana plants and amount of resin seized have increased dramatically across the country, even though cannabis was reclassified to allow forces to concentrate on hard drugs such as heroin and cocaine.

In Strathclyde, seizures of home-grown plants have more than doubled in the last year and in Tayside there has been a sixfold increase. Police warned that the cultivation of the drug had increased because of a misconception among members of the public that they would not be prosecuted.

On January 29, 2004, David Blunkett, the former home secretary, reclassified cannabis from a class B to a class C drug.

Academics, including Professor Neil McKeganey, of the Centre of Drug Misuse at Glasgow University, warned against the move because they believed it would lead to an increase in use.

Yesterday, officers said those fears had been realised with an increase in the cultivation and smoking of a drug which has been shown to trigger mental health problems. The price of cannabis resin has also fallen, another indication of its growing availability.

New figures obtained by The Herald show that between April 2003 to 2004 there were 742 plants seized in Strathclyde, compared with 1715 between April 2004 and December 2004. There was also a 14% increase in the amount of cannabis resin and material seized by the force, despite the fact there are still three months left in the statistical year.

In Fife, the amount of cannabis resin seized rose in that period from 36kg to 329kg last year, while plant seizures rose from 280 to 362.

There was also a significant increase in plant seizures in Lothian and Borders.

A report commissioned by the Metropolitan Police Authority last year found that many people wrongly believed the drug had been legalised following its reclassification.

Detective Sergeant Kenny Simpson, the Strathclyde Police drugs co-ordinator, said: “The figures are significantly up and the issue seems to be that a lot more people are growing their own because of their perception that police activity has been relaxed. There is also concern that home-grown cannabis, or skunk, can be three times as strong as resin. There are substantial health risks associated with this.

“Our message is that we will not ignore this. We will take action and will prosecute these people.”

Detective Superintendent Jill Wood, national drugs co-ordinator for the Scottish Drugs Enforcement Agency, said the national figures indicated that cannabis cultivation had increased. “The trends show that all the forces are seeing an increase in the number of cannabis plants being recovered.”This would indicate that this is more than just an increase in police activity. For most forces cannabis would not form part of their main targets. However, we will continue to take action and devote resources to this. The reclassification has not changed our practice.”

Alistair Ramsay, of Scotland Against Drugs, said the growing misconceptions about cannabis had to be corrected. “This is a very worrying development which will mean more cannabis is available in communities around the country.

There is clearly a misunderstanding about its illegality.” The Scottish Executive said: “There is a perception that cannabis is safe and has been decriminalised for personal use. That perception is a myth.

Cannabis is not safe, it brings risks to both physical and mental health.

“Recently there has been new research published which appears to reinforce the risks to mental health. Sustained use of cannabis can create dependence.

“Around 10% of people reporting to drug services say cannabis is their main problem drug. That is why it is important to reinforce the message that reclassification is not the same as decriminalisation or legalisation.

“Possession and supply of cannabis are criminal offences. They remain criminal offences. The maximum penalty for supplying has been increased to 14 years’ imprisonment.”

 

 

Source:_EveningTimes_(http://www.eveningtimes.co.uk/)_SundayHerald_ (http://www.sundayherald.com/) _Newsquest UK_ (http://www.newsquest.co.uk/)
January 2005
Filed under: Legal Sector :

In a detailed analysis of the legal outlook, the Independent reports the tobacco industry will face its biggest legal challenge yet next month, when it will finally appear in the dock to fight a $280bn claim from the US Government for deceiving the public over the health risks of smoking for more than 50 years.It is the largest suit ever launched by the Department of Justice and promises to reveal whether scientific research on nicotine was withheld, destroyed and ignored by a number of companies in a conspiracy designed to keep “profits above the public health”, dating back to 1954.

The secrets of the tobacco industry have already been the subject of an Oscar-nominated Hollywood blockbuster. When Jeffrey Wigand, who was head of research and development at Brown & Williamson, British American Tobacco’s former US subsidiary, described cigarettes as the “delivery device for nicotine” to the US media, the tobacco industry was almost choked by the biggest public health lawsuit to date. His revelations that tobacco companies knew nicotine was addictive and that carcinogenic material was knowingly added to cigarettes were made public by the American investigative journalist Lowell Bergman, whose work inspired the film The Insider, starring Al Pacino and Russell Crowe. Mr Wigand’s testimony helped bring about a $206bn settlement between the tobacco industry and 46 US states for the costs of treating sick smokers.

On 13 September, the sequel to that settlement will open to the public, with a federal trial set to take place in Washington DC that has taken five years to bring to court. A number of major cigarette companies, including BAT, are on trial on “fraud and deceit” charges that were originally designed to fight the mafia. Along with BAT stands Philip Morris, R J Reynolds, Lorillard and Liggett, which represent the best-known brands in cigarettes such as Marlboro, Lucky Strike, Pall Mall and Camel.

 

 

Source: The Independent, 13 August 2004

Filed under: Legal Sector :

Please excuse our French. But speaking to the Netherlands’ ambassadors in The Hague Monday, Dutch Foreign Minister Ben Bot said that his diplomats needed to counter their countrymen’s image as “whore-mongering, coke-snorting child murderers,” citing a rather unflattering characterization of his nation apparently recently voiced on Fox News.

The U.S. TV channel might have been a bit overheated in its choice of words, but even here in Europe the popular stereotype of the Netherlands is that of an ultra-liberal society where soft drugs and prostitution are not seen so much as social problems but as important assets to the country’s tourist industry, and where judges seem to care more about the criminal than the victim. Changing that public perception will not have been made any easier by the latest piece of news coming from the Netherlands.

Dutch daily De Telegraaf reported this week that a court in the southern town of Breda sentenced an armed bank robber to four years in jail, ordering him to return the €6,600 he had had stolen. Nothing unusual about that. But here comes the Dutch twist. The criminal was allowed to deduct the €2,000 he had paid for the gun — as a business expense so to speak.

“That’s the case law here in Holland,” Leendert de Lange from the prosecutor’s office in The Hague told us. Readers will be surprised to learn that the underlying principle is that “crime shouldn’t pay,” as Mr. Lange reassured us. But apparently the Dutch also believe that crime shouldn’t necessarily cost you anything either.

Usually applied to calculate and recover the net profit from drug trafficking and other illegal activities, the relatively novel idea of deducting the purchase costs of a gun has raised quite a few eyebrows in the Netherlands. Still quite shaken by the recent murder of Theo van Gogh and the fear of Islamic terrorism, the country has already started to rethink some of its liberal paradigms. So maybe the media attention this case has gotten will help change Dutch case law before Fox News adds “crime subsidizing” to its description of the Dutch. 
                                                                                 

Source:Wall Street Journal January 2005
Filed under: Legal Sector :
Scotland – an illustration of the debacle of “Harm Reduction”


For more than a decade Scotland has been embracing the “Harm Reduction” ideology or the pro-legalization movement in addressing its drug problems. This misguided belief embraces the notion that it is better to reduce the harm that drug use inflicts on the user than it is to reduce the harm that drug use imposes on society as a whole. Thus, the emphasis is on making it is safe, affordable and convenient for individuals to use illicit psychoactive and addictive substances, with little consideration given to the dangers inherent in prolonged drug use. As illustrated in the following story, Scotland’s enabling and abetting of drug use has grown ever more bizarre. Now it has adopted a harm reduction strategy to give heroin injecting kits to its prisoners. In the U.S. the state of Washington recently abolished tobacco use by prisoners, and instituted smoking cessation programs. Can controlling the use of illicit drugs in a prison be so much more difficult?
 
Heroin kits on demand for Scots prisoners

KATE FOSTER HOME AFFAIRS CORRESPONDENT


SCOTTISH jails will give heroin injection kits to prisoners under a hugely controversial plan to combat the spread of deadly diseases, it emerged last night. Hundreds of inmates will be handed clean syringes and swabs on a ‘no questions asked’ basis as a result of the scheme, which was condemned last night as the ultimate surrender in the war on drugs.
Prison health managers openly admit the drugs problem is so rife they have no alternative but to help inmates take highly addictive Class A drugs safely, even if that means turning a blind eye to rampant law-breaking within jail.

The admission last night prompted widespread anger and disbelief from politicians and health professionals.

The scale of the drugs problem in Scotland’s crumbling prison system is enormous. It is estimated that 80% of convicted criminals entering prison are on drugs, 40% of whom use heroin. One in 10 Scottish prisoners receives methadone.

Dr Andrew Fraser, head of healthcare for the Scottish Prison Service (SPS), fears an epidemic of Hepatitis C, and other dangerous diseases, will sweep through jails and beyond unless urgent safety measures are taken.

Fraser told Scotland on Sunday: “We will look at some of the leading-edge things like needle exchanges. Prisoners are not meant to have drugs, to be buying, selling or sharing them. But we are very worried about Hepatitis C and we know people are catching Hepatitis C in prison.

“We have yet to work out all the practicalities. We are meeting with experts from other countries [this] week to look at how they get around the issue of handing syringes out, and also what to put in the kits.

“But we have got to acknowledge that drugs come into prisons. The clean needles would be given out by health workers, and other prison staff would have to respect that they have a job to do.

“They are not breaking the law by giving prisoners syringes. Just because a prisoner has one of these packages it does not mean they are also in possession of drugs.” The kits might contain all the paraphernalia used in the process of injecting drugs, including a syringe, swabs, filters, foil or even spoons, and a sharps disposal box. The move, which is at the discretion of the SPS and does not need to be approved by ministers, would not require a change in the law. However, it would require a change in prison rules.

Possession of drugs is a criminal offence and there would have to be an agreement in each prison that health workers had a job to do and other jail staff would not interfere.

Fraser said other steps being considered under the £10m [10 million Pound] health plan included prescribing heroin to prisoners as well as increasing the amount of methadone handed out.

Scottish Conservative justice spokeswoman Annabel Goldie reacted with shock to the policy, saying: “The public will find it a ludicrous situation that those sent to jail for committing crimes and taking drugs are helped to take more drugs when they get there.”

Maxie Richards, a drugs expert who runs an abstinence-based rehabilitation programme in Glasgow, said: “Prisons should be drug-free, and that means closed visits if need be. But prison staff are so lackadaisical because drugs keep prisoners quiet.”

She added: “The Scottish Executive’s harm-reduction strategy has been a complete disaster.

“We are living with the mess caused by harm reduction. If it had worked we would not have had this explosion in drug deaths and drug crime. It speaks for itself. It is quite disgraceful that we have allowed it to get to this point.”

Professor Neil McKeganey, of the Centre for Drug Misuse at the University of Glasgow, said last night: “Drugs are in danger of overwhelming our prison system and it is in no way geared up to anticipate that.

“The prison system is in danger of becoming a holding bay for our addict population and that is not what it was originally intended to be.

“I think the needle exchange would be a worry because of the potential the needles could be used as weapons. It would have to be incredibly tightly controlled.” Derek Turner, spokesman for the Scottish Prison Officers Association said he was concerned about the plan.

“These needles could be used as weapons against members of staff and that is a concern, so anything like this would have to be very carefully controlled. We would want to know in advance what precautions were in place.

“However, we recognise that we have to protect public health because if prisoners become infected with hepatitis or HIV that can be taken out of the prison into the wider public.” But Alistair Ramsay, director of Scotland Against Drugs, said prisons had to do something to deal with the problem.

“Obviously no one wants [drugs] to be there and it is really quite amazing to the public that it happens at all. But it is happening, and consequently the authorities have got to find some way of dealing with it.”

SNP justice spokesman Kenny MacAskill said: “We have to live in the real world and address this problem. If we need to use schemes such as this, so be it.” The move would be the first of its kind in the UK.

A spokesman for the Scottish Executive said last night: “It’s not for us to get involved in what is an operational matter for the SPS.”

A BBC Scotland documentary last week illustrated the extent of drug-taking behind bars. Filmed in HMP Edinburgh, it showed CCTV footage of visitors smuggling in drugs.

 

Source:SCOTLAND ON SUNDAY Sun 17 Oct 2004
Filed under: Legal Sector :

Comment by NDPA:

The following article represents a worrying deterioration in policing of drug offenders. When the government were sold the idea of reclassifying cannabis it was said to be so that police time could be focused on class A drugs such as cocaine, ecstasy and heroin. .  Now we are being told that they are softening their focus on cocaine and ecstasy, but without explanation and – very tellingly – (as reported in the article below) without any public discussion It was only a couple of days ago that the Government said it was considering a proposal to roll out nationally a pilot scheme in Nottinghamshire county which used a much higher level of cautioning for possession than formerly – and applying this not just to cannabis but to all drugs.  At a stroke, Nottinghamshire, which had been amongst the worst forces for clear up rates for drug offences, vaulted to being the best in the country.  Intriguingly, their claimed clear up rate for the past year was ‘103%’ !   What a great scam – make possession of drugs legal and have less crime ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  ..  does this mean that there will be less use of drugs ?  We think not.                                                                                                     

 

All in all, Uk drug policy seems to be coming apart at the seams. Prevention of drug use is nowhere to

be seen, for education read harm reduction and if you want to beat crime, legalise it.

 

Cocaine cautions soar after police tread softly-softly

POLICE are adopting a “softly-softly” approach to the recreational use of cocaine as the latest Government figures reveal that offences involving the class A drug hit a record level last year.

An analysis of the figures shows the number of cocaine possession crimes in which offenders were handed only a caution has almost quadrupled.

The surge in the use of cautions has come at the same time as Home Office ministers have been emphasising that the Government’s policy is to clamp down hard on Class A drug misuse.

The Liberal Democrats said that the figures showed that the middle classes were escaping with no more than a “slap on the wrist” for being caught with cocaine, the stimulant of choice. Anti-drugs campaigners said the figures indicated that the police were now less interested in “busting” people for the recreational use of drugs such as cocaine and Ecstasy.

Annual drug offender figures published yesterday indicate a much softer approach being taken to two Class A drugs used recreationally in clubs, discos and at middle-class dinner parties.

Last year, almost four out of ten cocaine possession cases resulted in the offender being given a caution by police and having the drug confiscated compared with just 11% three years ago. A similar number of Ecstasy possession cases resulted in a caution last year compared with 35% in 2001.

The number of cannabis possession cases which ended in a caution remained largely stable at about 50%. The huge increase in cautions was disclosed in Home Office figures showing a 16% increase in cocaine offences in England and Wales last year.

Overall, Class A drug offences, including heroin, cocaine and other hard drugs, hit a peak of 36,350. The number of cocaine offences rose from 6,970 to 8,070. Drug offences overall fell by 21% to 105,570, because of the reclassification of cannabis.

The rise in cautions to deal with possession of cocaine and Ecstasy surprised drug charities. They said that it indicated that police were taking a more relaxed attitude to the recreational use of both drugs. Danny Kushlick, of Transform, a drug charity, said: “It is a high figure but this shows that police recognise the extent of recreational drug use and the resources they have to deal with it.

“This is a policing issue. They could spend all their time just busting people in possession of drugs and tying themselves up in paperwork.

“Most cocaine users are likely to be recreational users and it is really not worth bothering with them as they do not need treatment.”

The rise in the use of cautions has occurred without any public discussion. The Government has emphasised however, that its policy is to concentrate of Class A drugs likely to cause most harm and those which fuel crime. Britain is now top of the European league table for cocaine abuse and is fast approaching levels seen in America, according to the EU drug agency. Nearly 12% of all young adults under the age of 35 in Britain have tried the drug at least once.

But the arrival of cocaine as the “stimulant drug of choice” for many young Europeans is bringing a growing death toll and health problems as it spreads from middle-class dinner tables to council estates.

Mark Oaten, the Liberal Democrat home affairs spokesman, said that the country was moving into a “cocaine culture” which would not be helped by the high use of cautions. He said: “It looks like the police are bowing to political pressure to arrest more cocaine users, but don’t have the resources to take people to court.”

THE DRUG

  • Class A drug, usually sniffed and sometimes injected, raises body temperature and heartbeat
  • Used by Queen Victoria and Sigmund Freud, who wrote enthusiastically about its properties
  • User feels alert, confident and sociable, but also at risk of irritability, anxiety and panic attacks
  • Crack is cocaine baked into a “rock” and usually smoked, producing an intense, short-lived high
  • Cocaine suppresses appetite: regular use can damage nasal passages, make users vulnerable to malnutrition, lead to heart problems, depression and psychosis
  • World sales generate an estimated £60 billion

Source:   Times online  Dec. 2005

Filed under: Legal Sector :

 

By DEAN E. MURPHY Published: June 24, 2005

SAN FRANCISCO, June 23 – Federal authorities said Thursday that they had cracked the biggest case ever involving the use of medical marijuana dispensaries in California as a cover for international drug dealing and money laundering, which they said extended to Canada and countries in Asia.

“This organization had been operating for over four years,” Javier F. Peña, the special agent in charge of the Drug Enforcement Administration in San Francisco, said at a news conference. “It is now dismantled.”

In court documents unsealed here, the federal authorities accused a 33-year-old San Francisco man, Vince Ming Wan, of leading a multi-million-dollar operation in the trafficking of marijuana and Ecstasy that used three medical marijuana clubs in the city as a front.

United States Attorney Kevin V. Ryan said that an arrest warrant had been issued for Mr. Wan on charges of conspiracy to distribute more than 1,000 marijuana plants, but that he remained at large. Twenty other people, all from San Francisco and its suburbs, were charged with a variety of crimes, including conspiracy to grow and traffic in marijuana plants, conspiracy to distribute Ecstasy and conspiracy to engage in money laundering.

Mr. Ryan said the two-year investigation was continuing and could result in more arrests and charges. In addition to Mr. Wan, seven other suspects remained at large on Thursday.

“We’re not talking about ill people who may be using marijuana,” Mr. Ryan said. “We’re talking about a criminal enterprise engaged in the widespread distribution of large amounts – millions of dollars, if you base it on historical evidence – of marijuana and other drugs, and money laundering their proceeds from these activities.”

Agents from the D.E.A., the Internal Revenue Service and other federal agencies executed search warrants on Wednesday at the three medical marijuana clubs. Twenty-three residences, businesses and other growing locations in San Francisco were also searched.

Agents hauled away more than 9,000 marijuana plants. In all, a drug agency official said, the investigation yielded 18,000 marijuana plants over the two years with a wholesale value of $17 million. The official, Special Agent Jose Martinez, said it was the largest drug investigation ever by federal authorities that involved medical marijuana dispensaries. In addition, the court documents said, some of the marijuana was grown in Canada.

Kenneth J. Hines, assistant special agent in charge of the I.R.S. in Oakland, said the authorities were still tracking financial transactions in Asia that Mr. Hines said had been funneled through 40 bank accounts at 12 financial institutions by two of the suspects, Phat Van Vuong, 30, and Richard Wong, 28, both of San Francisco.

Mr. Hines, who declined to name the country or countries that were involved, said the suspects had also bought automobiles, real estate and “other high-end items” with the money in an attempt “to disguise illegal proceeds derived from their activities.”

California has allowed the distribution of medical marijuana since voters approved a statewide ballot measure in 1996, but the state law is in conflict with federal narcotics laws. Mr. Ryan said the timing of the investigation, called Operation Urban Harvest, had nothing to do with a ruling by the United States Supreme Court two weeks ago that upheld the authority of federal officials over marijuana, even in the states where it is permitted for medical purposes.

An affidavit unsealed Thursday said that one of the suspects, Enrique Chan, 26, described in detail how the clubs were used as “a backbone” for illegal sales. The affidavit said Mr. Chan estimated that only half of the people who bought medical marijuana were really sick.

“You’ll get busted, but you remember, you got to beat the prosecution in court,” Mr. Chan told an undercover agent, according to the affidavit. “So if it comes down to a battle in court, what are you gonna do? You’re going to bring patients in court, like really sick patients with cancer, have them sit on the stand for you. And no jury is gonna try, is gonna convict you.”

 

Source: San Francisco Chronicle June 2005
Filed under: Legal Sector :

HON. GERALD B.H. SOLOMON OF NEW YORK in the House of Representatives Thursday, March 2, 1995

Mr. SOLOMON. Mr. Speaker, let me commend to you the following article written by a distinguished doctor and chairman of the International Drug Strategy Institute, Eric A. Voth, M.D. Dr. Voth advocates retaining tough drug laws to guard against rising crime and experimentation. Citing Holland as an example, the legalization of drugs has resulted in greatly increased crime and addiction. The only way to combat the increase of drug use in this country is to stand firm against recent attempt by prodrug groups to mute public awareness. These groups attempt to disguise the dangers of drug abuse and consequently jeopardize future generations.

REPEATING HISTORY’S MISTAKES

The international drug policy debate rages regarding decisions whether to fundamentally change drug policy toward legalization or decriminalization of drug use, or to remain with restrictive policies. If we examine two examples of softening of drug policy, we will find ample reason to continue with restrictive policy.

In the mid to late 1970’s during the Carter administration, drug policy visibly softened. Several states decriminalized marijuana, and in fact Alaska legalized marijuana. Drug policy `specialists’ in their infinite wisdom supported the flawed concept called `responsible use’ of drugs as a way that users could maintain personal use of drugs and avoid the ravages of addiction and physical problems.

Permissive drug policy originated with organizations like the National Organization for the Reform of Marijuana Laws. President Carter’s drug policy advisor Peter Bourne, as well as others like Arnold Trebach, Mathea Falco, Peter Reuter, Mark Kleiman helped to press for the lenient policy.

Interestingly, during that time the use of marijuana and other drugs drastically increased. Use also increased in adolescents despite the fact that drugs never become legal or decriminalized for that age group. The use of marijuana among high school students in Oregon during decriminalization was double that of the national average. National averages of marijuana use among high school seniors increased to 50% of seniors having used in the previous year, and 10.7% used daily.

Ultimately, parents began to object to the rampant use of drugs , especially marijuana, among their children. In the early 1980’s the `parents’ anti-drug movement began. Because of the drastic failure of lenient drug policies, steady pressure was exerted at national and local levels for restrictive drug policies. A huge national wave of high quality research, grassroots prevention organizations, and tightening of drug laws began.

Predictably, the use of drugs among `recreational’ users dropped. High school seniors use of marijuana dropped to 23% of seniors using within the last year and 2% using on a daily basis. The use among hard addicts did not drop. Strangely the cry has been sounded by some that the drug war did not work. That outcry, however, was almost exclusively being sounded by individuals who favored legalization or decriminalization back in the 1970’s. The same individuals who called for soft policy in the earlier era are calling for the new harm reduction policy today. Hidden within such policy is the intent to gain decriminalization of drugs .

Holland has decriminalized drugs and tried harm reduction. Since the softening of drug policy there, shootings have increased 40%, robberies 62%, and car thefts 62%. This experiment which was meant to decrease organized crime has resulted in an increase in organized crime families from 3 in 1988 to 93 today.

The number of registered marijuana addicts has risen 30% and the number of other addicts has risen 22%.

The major difference between today and the 1970’s is that the prolegalization effort is more organized and better funded. The millionaire Richard Dennis from Chicago has given millions to the drug legalization effort. Billionaire George Soros has given $6 million to the Drug Policy Foundation to help seek legalization of drugs . He created the Open Society Fund which in turn funds Mathea Falco’s Drug Strategies organization. Steadily, these groups put a happy and acceptable face on the idea of drug legalization or decriminalization.

Their public relation campaign has softened public attitudes. Moves such as full page ads in national newspapers suggesting alternatives to drug policy are examples. Organized efforts at such ideas as hemp as a fiber alternative, medical marijuana, needle exchanges, therapeutic LSD, and others pervade the media. The Internet is bristling with pro-drug talk groups discussing recent drug experiences and how and where to obtain drugs .

In the face of these facts, the holdovers from the 70’s drug policy makers are still asking for lenient drug laws. A substantial number of today’s addicts started their use under the lenient policies of the 1970’s. We have had our experience with decriminalization, and it is time that we recognize it and put that concept to bed.

The only hope for drug policy is a concerted effort of drug prevention which upholds the notion of no drug use, drug interdiction, and drug treatment. If we soften our hold on an already vexing problem, we will lose the war.

Source: http://www.druglibrary.org/schaffer/GOVPUBS/solom2.htm

Filed under: Legal Sector :

US Supreme court rules against So-called medical marijuana

INCB: US SUPREME COURT DECISION ON CANNABIS UPHOLDS INTERNATIONAL LAW

VIENNA, 8 June (UN Information Service) — The International Narcotics Control Board (INCB) welcomes the decision of the United States Supreme Court, made on 6 June, reaffirming that the cultivation and use of cannabis, even if it is for “medical” use, should be prohibited.

“INCB has for many years pointed out that the evidence that cannabis might be useful as a medicine is insufficient”, said Professor Hamid Ghodse, President, INCB. “Countries should not authorise the use of cannabis as a medicine until conclusive results based on research are available. Sound scientific evidence for its safety, efficacy and usefulness is required to justify its use in medical practice. Any research into cannabis as a medicine should involve the World Health Organization, as the responsible international health agency.”

INCB has expressed concern that organizations advocating the legalization of cannabis, and of narcotic drugs in general, are using the issue of medical cannabis as a “back door” to legalisation. “Cannabis is the most widely abused drug in the United States and in the world,” Professor Ghodse said. “Cannabis is classified under international conventions as a drug with a number of personal and public health problems. It is not a ‘soft’ drug as some people would have you believe. There is new evidence confirming well-known mental health problems, and some countries with a more liberal policy towards cannabis are reviewing their position. Countries need to take a strong stance towards cannabis abuse.”

In its decision, the United States Supreme Court noted that medical cannabis statutes in California were open to abuse, and even cannabis cultivated for personal use as medicine could end up being supplied to the illicit market.

The Vienna-based INCB is an independent body, established by the 1961 Single Convention on Narcotic Drugs to monitor governments’ compliance with the international drug control treaties. The three treaties are the 1961 Single Convention on Narcotic Drugs, the 1971 Convention on Psychotropic Substances and the 1988 United Nations Convention against Illicit Traffic in Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances. Its 13 members are elected by the Economic and Social Council to serve in their individual capacities for a term of five years. For further information, contact: Saul Takahashi Drug Control Officer, INCB Phone: +43 1 26060 5267 Email: saul.takahashi@incb.org

Source: UN Information Service June 2005



Filed under: Legal Sector :

Scots police chiefs force Home Secretary to ditch new drug laws

By Liam McDougall, Home Affairs Editor

THE Home Secretary is set to abandon controversial changes to UK drug laws after warnings by Scottish police chiefs that they would give street dealers a “licence to operate”.

The proposals, unveiled by Charles Clarke in November, aimed for the first time to set a threshold on the quantity of drugs that an individual can claim is for their own use. Over that amount, courts and juries would be invited to assume that there was an intention to deal.

However, in what will be a major embarrassment to Clarke, Scotland’s most senior police officers and drug squad teams are to write to the Home Secretary this month to warn that he risks letting dealers off the hook.

The wealth of opposition by police and drug experts north and south of the Border now looks certain to force a rethink of the plans.

Under proposals drawn up by the Home Office, Clarke’s plans would allow individuals caught with up to 7g of heroin – enough for around 70 “tenner bags” – to claim in court that it was for their own use.

Anyone found in possession of up to 10 “wraps” of heroin would also be able to say the drugs were for personal use. The threshold for cocaine and crack cocaine would also be 7g or 10 wraps, with 10 tablets the limit for ecstasy. The amphetamine threshold would be 14g, and drug users caught with 113g of cannabis resin – enough to roll about 500 light joints – would be able to argue it was their own supply.

The introduction of threshold limits would signal a massive change to the way drug offences are prosecuted in Scotland. Currently, even if an individual is caught with a quantity of drugs that is much less than the amounts outlined by the Home Office, he or she can be prosecuted for intent to supply.

To make the case, police can call on specialist drug squad officers from their Statement of Opinion (Stop) units. They examine the drugs haul and the background of the individual to give expert evidence in court about why they are believed to be a dealer.

It is feared that with the introduction of thresholds, dealers would exploit the system to stay just within the law, while those with small amounts over the limits would be punished as traffickers.

Detective Sergeant Kenny Simpson, a drug squad officer with Strathclyde Police who is co-ordinating the force response, said that he did not believe the levels proposed were realistic.

He said: “With cocaine, that’s quite a low figure and we would be prepared to go slightly higher. But with crack cocaine, if someone is allowed 10 wraps, my concern is that this would be a licence for street dealers to operate. The level for cannabis is a fantastically large amount.”

In the case of heroin, Scotland’s most problematic drug, Simpson said the levels for personal use set down by the Home Office could let suppliers escape the most stringent sentences. He added: “It’s my hope that this will give us a clear opportunity to target them for lower amounts. But it’s also about making sure that the legislation is catching the right people, to stop the dealing, and making sure that users who need help are not wrongly accused of being suppliers.”

Detective Superintendent Jill Wood, of the Scottish Drug Enforcement Agency, which will respond on behalf of Scotland’s eight chief constables, said: “[The thresholds] are creating a difficulty rather than addressing a difficulty.”

The latest controversy over drugs comes after Clarke’s decision to keep cannabis at the lower class C legal status. Campaigners had argued that the drug should be moved back to class B because of mounting concerns about its links to mental illness in users.

Clarke has also launched a complete overhaul of the 30-year-old system of classifying illegal drugs into three levels of danger and criminality.

A Home Office spokesman said: “It’s normal in the consultation process to have different opinions. We will be responding in due course.”

Source: 12 February 2006 http://www.sundayherald.com/53997
Filed under: Legal Sector :

Figures show massive leap in ‘cannabis casualties’

THE number of people detained in hospital for mental and behavioural problems due to cannabis has more than trebled in the Lothians. The new figures come just days after Home Secretary Charles Clarke’s decision not to reclassify the drug from class C to class B.

Statistics set to be released by the Scottish Executive in a parliamentary answer will show that the number of cannabis-related casualties soared from 45 to 136 – the highest rise in Scotland.

In Greater Glasgow during the same period, discharges more than doubled from 74 in 2002-03, to 158 in 2004-05. However, it is unclear whether the rise is due to more people with mental health problems admitting they smoke cannabis, following its reclassification to class C.

The latest Executive figures have been obtained by the Scottish National Party’s health spokeswoman, Shona Robison. She said: “It is obviously concerning that there’s been such a huge jump. There has certainly been evidence of mental health problems linked to cannabis use and these figures add weight to that. “One of the big worries is that there has not been a clear message given out to young people that cannabis is not a cost-free drug and that there are long-term effects on the people who use it.” Mrs Robison said research was needed to establish how much of the rise was a direct result of the drug’s reclassification.

The data also shows that acute hospital discharges for problems related to cocaine also soared by almost 300 per cent in Scotland – up from 56 in 2000-01 to 190 in 2004-05.

Last year, drugs expert Professor Neil McKeganey said that reclassification of cannabis would lead to increased usage. Prof McKeganey, of Glasgow University’s centre for drug misuse, warned that smoking cannabis could lead to lung damage, depression, anxiety and could cause psychotic episodes in people suffering from schizophrenia.

Last week, Mr Clarke said he had decided against reversing the decision two years ago to downgrade cannabis to class C. The Home Secretary said he accepted the drug could trigger serious mental illness but pledged a publicity campaign to warn of the dangers. Mr Clarke said the decision was supported by police and most drug and mental health charities.

Cannabis was reclassified to class C in January 2004 after it was decided that it was not as harmful as other class B drugs such as barbiturates, amphetamine and codeine. Class C means it is ranked alongside anabolic steroids and GHB, a rave drug. The Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs told Mr Clarke that although capable of “real and significant” effects on mental health, cannabis was not as harmful as other class B drugs.

A spokeswoman for the Scottish Executive stressed that cannabis remained illegal and harmful. She said: “It brings a risk to physical and mental health and that’s why we are updating our education campaign on it, and our police forces continue to report people to procurators fiscal over it.”

Source: http://news.scotsman.com/health. Mon 23 Jan 2006
Filed under: Effects of Drugs :

The controversial drugs expert Neil McKeganey says it’s time for radical solutions to the epidemic set to overwhelm this country, reports Gillian Bowditch.

The year is 2020, the time 10.30am. In the centre of Glasgow a man lies slumped in a shop doorway, a needle sticking out of his leg. A couple of yards down the road a prostitute in a drug-induced stupor sways on the pavement. The newsstands in George Square announce Holyrood has passed the controversial “ghettos for junkies bill”. There are syringes in the gutter.

This vision does not spring from the pen of Irvine Welsh. According to Professor Neil McKeganey, Scotland’s leading drugs expert, this will be the daily reality on the streets of our towns and cities if we do not find an effective way of tackling the drugs problem, which is threatening to spiral out of control.

What makes his vision so chilling is that he is one of the few Scots with a handle on the extent of the drugs crisis facing Scotland.

McKeganey, who founded Glasgow University’s Centre for Drug Misuse Research in 1994, has frequently found himself out of step with mainstream thought.

Last year, however, George W Bush’s advisers in the White House called on his expertise. The Scottish executive’s lack of understanding of the drugs situation was revealed six months ago when Jack McConnell, the first minister, was forced to admit he did not know how many drug rehabilitation places there were in Scotland and his ministers admitted they had no idea how many addicts were prescribed methadone.

McKeganey is on such intimate terms with the statistics, he could recite them in his sleep. One in 100 Scots is addicted to heroin. Of the 50,000 Scottish heroin addicts, more than half live in Strathclyde, and the drugs trade in Glasgow is worth more than the combined assets of Rangers and Celtic football clubs. In proportional terms, double the number of children live in drug-addicted families in Scotland than in England.

“For many years there has been a perception that society would always be able to accommodate the drug problem,” he says over coffee in his bunker-like office on Glasgow’s Dumbarton Road. Born in Sussex and brought up in Aberdeen, he measures his words carefully. There is a diffidence in his voice completely at odds with the urgency of his message. He believes we have been fooling ourselves and are sleepwalking to disaster.

Only 2% of the adult population of Scotland is addicted, but their impact is enormous. They are responsible for almost 70% of crime in Glasgow. Five hundred million pounds is spent annually on services for addicts, an average of £10,000 a head. At a time when National Health Service budgets are being cut and patients are going to court to secure access to life-saving cancer drugs, it’s a phenomenal amount of money.

“The scale of the problem is small relative to its impact,” explains McKeganey. “You are talking about only 2% of the population creating an enormous problem. But what if it were 3% or 4%? That is still a tiny number of people, but the problems they would generate could overwhelm our existing systems.

“In 30 years the drugs problem has gone from nonexistent to an epidemic. If that can happen in a generation, what more can happen in the next 10 or 20 years? If we are at the margins of what our society can cope with now, what would our society look like if instead of 50,000 addicts we had 100,000?”

There is, he believes, no reason to assume drug addiction in Scotland has reached a plateau. “Just look at the figures for young people who feel disenfranchised,” says McKeganey. “I think it is eminently feasible that it will creep up to 3% or 4%, and many of the things we take for granted now will have to change.”

McKeganey, always a radical thinker, believes the country must be prepared to contemplate radical solutions. “We might have to create drug-free communities using drug testing or restrict addicts from retail areas between certain hours. It would effectively create ghettos. But if we can’t control the addiction, all we can do is control the movement of people.

“We have to consider how sustainable family life would be in our communities if the level of addiction goes much beyond 2%. Already you can go to parts of Scotland where the drug problem is so prevalent it is shaping communities. This gives you a glimpse of what other communities might look like in the future and it is a shocking prospect. I think every aspect of our drugs policy should be aimed at stopping this.”

All of this begs the question: what are we getting for the billions of pounds that have been sunk into drug treatments in the past decade? Listen to McKeganey and the answer is, not a lot. In Strathclyde alone drug deaths are up 70% in a 4½-month period.

“We’re spending £500m a year on a maximum of 50,000 people,” he says. “Most of them are not even in programmes, so we’re talking about a massive amount of funding being targeted on a tiny number of people.”

McKeganey’s research shows that where addicts are enrolled in programmes that focus on abstinence, they do well. If the principal aim is merely to stabilise their drug use, by prescribing methadone for example, the success rates are “pretty meagre”. Yet Scotland’s response to the drug problem is methadone. One-third of addicts are on it. Last year 411,399 prescriptions were issued. By 2012 the figure is expected to be more than 1m.

The policy is currently under review. McKeganey says it is a legacy of the early 1990s, when politicians, concerned that Scotland faced an HIV epidemic fuelled by intravenous drug users, switched from drug prevention and the treatment of addicts to preventing the spread of HIV.

“People are now beginning to ask how effective these services are in reducing criminality,” he says. “The evidence is that they are not effective. I don’t think our methadone programme is working.

“When addicts look for help they say they want to be free of drugs. What we are offering them is methadone. We are substituting a drug they buy on the street for a drug we prescribe. In what other area of treatment would the medical profession get away with that approach to patient care?”

McKeganey, who turned 50 this year, says he has not used drugs and wonders whether people will think his lack of experience diminishes his arguments.

A father to Rebecca, 17, Gabriel, 12, and Danielle, 7, he is a strong advocate of discussing drugs and their capacity to wreck lives with children from an early age. He would like to see more recovered addicts visiting schools.

His call, in The Sunday Times last February, for addicts to lose custody of their children caused outrage in some quarters. He remains unapologetic. The treatment of these children is, he believes, one of the biggest scars on our society.

“Simply stabilising addicts is not enough,” he says. “You have to get the drugs out of the home or the children out of the home. People don’t like that message.”

There are 60,000 Scottish children living in drug-addicted families, according to his research, and their experience of childhood is unrecognisable to most of us.

“Their lives are literally being sacrificed to their parents’ drug addiction,” he says. “These children don’t come second to the drugs; they come sixth or seventh, if they register at all. Are we really saying we have no better way of looking after these children than their experience within a negligent, chaotic, addict household?

“There seems to be an unfathomable acceptance of just how bad our childcare provision is. That is intolerable. The only thing worse than having a childcare system that doesn’t protect children is knowing you have a childcare system that doesn’t protect children and not doing anything about it.”

McKeganey believes that at the heart of any debate about drugs policy must be an acknowledgment of the moral dimension of drug use, whether it is Kate Moss snorting cocaine at a party, middle-class professionals smoking the occasional spliff or hardened crack addicts shooting up in squalid dens.

None of these activities is morally neutral, he argues.

“People talk about illegal drug use as if it is a morally free domain,” he says. “You get the feeling it is unacceptable to raise the question about morality. In the past 15 years we’ve said drug use is neither good nor bad but addiction is a problem. Therefore, if you have middle-class individuals whose drug use does not appear to generate addiction, it is not seen as a problem.”

Our moral agnosticism is perhaps best seen in regard to policy on cannabis.

Downgraded to a class C drug in 2004 by the then home secretary, David Blunkett, it has been subjected to more U-turns than a motorcycle stunt team. Last week it was announced that those caught with more than 5g could in future be jailed for up to 14 years.

“I think cannabis is one of our most dangerous drugs,” says McKeganey.

“That’s not because the medical harm is so acute – although it clearly is for some users – but because it has achieved what no other illegal drug has.

It has divested itself of its association with illegality. It has become so commonplace and that has opened up a portal of willingness to consume mind-altering substances way beyond the drug itself.

“Ecstasy is going the same way. It is associated with lifestyle rather than pharmacology. But if you want to tackle the drugs problem, you have to tackle it at source and that source isn’t heroin but cannabis. If the 40% of teenagers now using cannabis increases, that is not something we can ignore.

It could be of enormous significance.”

He is wary of the clamour of voices, from Lord McCluskey to Ben Elton, calling for heroin to be decriminalised. Last week the former justice minister, Richard Simpson, called for heroin to be made available to addicts on the NHS. “Giving heroin to drug addicts is not a treatment unless it is decreased gradually with a view to their abstinence. Anything else is state-sponsored drug addiction,” he says.

He also remains unconvinced it would halt the drug barons. It could lead them instead to seek out new markets, and be the ultimate quick fix with disastrous consequences. So what should we be doing about drugs in Scotland?

McKeganey believes policy should focus on three areas: prevention, treatments that lead to abstinence, and the vigorous pursuit of criminals deriving income from the drugs trade. “Without success on all three fronts this problem is going to escalate,” he says.

We are dangerously close to reaching a point where we will be unable to distinguish between the legal economy and the drugs economy, he believes.

“Colombia is a country shaped by its drug trade. People say that could never happen here and they might be right, but where are the impediments?”

As I rise to leave, McKeganey’s grim prognosis ringing in my ears, he says apologetically: “I don’t want to be a prophet of doom.” But the nature of the problem means he is doomed to prophesise.

Whether he is fated to be a latter-day Cassandra remains to be seen.

The Sunday Times – Scotland, June 11, 2006

Source: www.dpna.org June 2006
Filed under: Effects of Drugs :

Up to one million dirty needles were dumped by heroin addicts in Scotland last year, sparking calls for a national review of strategies to curb the spread of hepatitis C.

New figures expose the alarming gap between the number of clean needles issued to heroin addicts and potentially infected drug-injecting equipment that is being handed back and safely destroyed.

Statistics released by the Scottish Executive show that more than 2.9 million clean needles were issued to drug users at around 200 clinics nationwide in 2004-5 – but only 1.9 million were returned.

The Executive advises drug workers to give addicts new needles in exchange for dirty ones to prevent them from sharing and spreading hepatitis C, while preventing dirty needles from being discarded in streets and parks.

In Greater Glasgow, 539,896 needles were issued and 327,381 returned, while in Lothian, more than 279,000 were give out but only 82,262 returned. Grampian gave out the second highest number of needles – 520,096 – and 357,991 were handed back.

The Scottish Executive insisted many dirty needles dumped in specially provided safe bins were not counted.

But Professor Neil McKeganey, director of the Centre for Drug Misuse, said thousands of needles were being thrown away and called for a clampdown on clinics which are too ready to give out clean needles.

“Giving ever more needles to drug users does not seem to me to be sensible and we’ve seen a massive increase in needles issued in the last ten years.

“There is growing concern that needle exchanges are adding to the level of discarded needles,” he said.

“These figures necessitate a review of procedures in place in needle exchange clinics. It may be that a proportion of those not returned are safely disposed of in other ways but it would be foolish to think that is the case for all of them.

“We’re not talking about hundreds but hundreds of thousands of needles – that is a worrying situation,” Prof McKeganey said. “In many communities there is an increasing problem with discarded needles and syringes, creating a danger to people, particularly children, of catching hepatitis C. We mustn’t contribute further to that.”

Concern over addicts spreading disease by sharing needles meant that, in 2002, restrictions on the number of clean needles that could be given to them were lifted, with users allowed to receive up to 120 at a time, leading to a near-doubling of the number of needles issued.

But Prof McKeganey said the proportion of drug addicts sharing needles was constant, at about a third, and said “throwing more clean needles” at users was a misguided policy.

There are an estimated 51,000 heroin addicts in Scotland and 30,000 people with the highly infectious hepatitis C, a number which is growing every year.

Dr Richard Simpson, Scotland’s former drugs minister, said the figures raised questions about needle exchange policies across the country.

Dr Simpson added: “The public need to ask questions as to what is happening and services need to demonstrate that they have procedures in place to prevent needles from ending up dumped on our streets.”

Jim Shanley, manager of the harm reduction team at NHS Lothian, said: “Everyone who attends a needle exchange outlet is offered a needle and syringe in accordance with the Lord Advocate’s guidelines.

“At every intervention they will also be offered a robust, kitemarked sin bin to encourage safe needle disposal.”

A spokeswoman for the Scottish Executive said: “Needle exchanges are an essential part of strategies aimed at preventing spread of blood-borne viruses.

“Public safety is always of paramount importance. That’s why guidance makes clear that there should be a requirement to return used equipment for safe disposal at exchanges before fresh equipment is issued.

“Drug workers do, however, need the flexibility to use their professional judgment when dealing with people with chaotic lifestyles,” the spokeswoman said.

Our heroin legacy
HEROIN use in Scotland soared in the 1980s as opiates flooded the country from the “golden cresent” countries of Iran, Pakistan and Turkey.

This type of heroin was originally produced for smoking rather than injecting and its rise followed an increase in the number of Iranian refugees to the UK after the fall of the Shah in 1979. In subsequent years Afghanistan became the main supplier of heroin to Scotland.

Last year, the Scottish Drug Enforcement Agency warned that a 4,000-tonne opium crop in Afghanistan could result in more heroin becoming available in Scotland.

A recent study showed that the numbers of those using heroin had fallen, but the total number of users still remains at 50,000.

Addicts typically buy “tenner” bags which contain about 100mg of heroin. Some 225 people died from heroin overdoses in 2004, compared with 196 in 2000.

Source: www.news.Scotsman.com 10th June 2006

Filed under: Effects of Drugs :

M. Daniel said children as young as 10 / 11 years are showing signs of abuse problems from cannabis use.

Cannnabis use among young adults has more than doubled since the easing up of drugs policies.

Drug related arrests in Holland are up over 40% in a 3 year period.

Holland has the largest market for manufacturing synthetic drugs.

In areas of Holland where youth misuse is greatest, rates of juvenile crime have skyrocketed. Rates of burglary is three times more than that in Switzerland or the USA.

In local towns referenda over 70% of Dutch people favour returning to a more restrictive drug policy.

Source:Taken from a report to Wisconsen State Dept of justice : July 1999
by William Walluks. (from Larry Collins Article)
Filed under: Europe :

Making it easier for vulnerable people to use damaging addictive drugs is not often a campaign plank for politicians; nor does it turn up as a pronounced goal for health officials.

Yet that’s precisely the effect of the Winnipeg Regional Health Authority scheme to give out free “safer-use crack kits” to crack cocaine users.

This is the taxpayer as enabler.

Opinions vary greatly about the idea of needle exchanges and “shooting galleries” for heroin users; these too enable addicts. They are defended by some on the grounds that a re-used injection needle is a superhighway for HIV and other dangerous viruses.

The Winnipeg medical officer of health, Dr. Margaret Fast, claims the same virtue for her crack kits – glass pipe, screens, alcohol swabs, matches, even a pipe cleaner – saying shared pipes, like shared needles, can spread disease. “If you’re sharing pipes or if you’re having oral sex with someone, that could lead to transmission of these agents.”

Maybe. But crack can also lead to death by overdose, suicide, accident, or confrontation with police.

And what a slippery slope! Should government also provide the drugs, so that addicts don’t have to meet dangerous and rapacious dealers?

Helping people to ruin their lives “safely” is not a suitable object of government policy.

Source: The Gazette (Montreal) September 7, 2004 Tuesday SECTION: EDITORIAL / OP-ED; Pg. A18
Filed under: Education Sector,Social Affairs :

BY REV. HARRY LEHOTSKY

The recent furore about government-funded crack pipes says much more about the reduction of care than the reduction of harm.

My beef isn’t with the notion of curbing HIV and Hep C. I’ve seen the impact of both and don’t want to lose any more people to debilitating diseases.

But cheap pipes and chapped lips are just one of many ways people engaged in a deadly addiction contract deadly diseases. Many will still get, and many already have, the diseases.

What makes me increasingly suspicious is the very selective manner in which many addiction activists show their care for addicts.

They verbally and strenuously defend the distribution of government crack pipes. But they are strangely silent when government, via the Winnipeg Regional Health Authority, cuts treatment programs for addicts. Addicts need help. They’re dying for it. But when they decide to get help, they are told about long waiting lines for treatment.

It’s ironic that an addict wanting to come into treatment might be told to wait two to four weeks but might immediately get a free government crack kit from an outreach worker encouraging him to get treatment.

How can anyone who professes care for addicts sit by silently while already inadequate services to addicts are cut? Where’s the indignation then? Where’s the public outcry?

True advocates for addicts would never accept the political doublespeak which asserts that closing treatment beds and laying off treatment workers does nothing to diminish care for addicts.

Can it be that these agencies and activists have been well trained not to bite the hand that feeds them? They all get their funding from government. Many live in fear of the WRHA, which has more of an interest in serving the health of its political masters than the masses.

No agency or activist seems willing to speak out against the hypocrisy of the funder to whom they owe their very existence. As a result, many dedicated professionals have stopped advocating for the addicts and have been reduced to facilitating a slightly less harmful addiction.

Addicts need treatment. But while they cut already inadequate treatment programs, the WRHA wants a medal for “reducing harm” with government-approved crack pipes! The WHRA’s approach to addiction is a mockery to any sense of intelligence or compassion.

This is one of the reasons I’m getting more and more concerned about the WRHA. A bureaucratic behemoth, it has been devouring an increasing number of mandates and agencies as a means of justifying the existence of obscenely salaried office staff. No one agency can deliver all that they purport to do for people. Especially not as a monopoly!

Harm reduction in this context is more a distraction than a service. The “crack kits” are a convenient red herring to distract us from decreasing options for treatment.

But those complicit in this conspiracy of distraction and silence are the helpers silenced by fear of their funder. The danger is that preservation of their own employment supercedes their care for addicts. The resounding silence of those who “care” for addicts is not adequately compensated for by funding distribution of government crack pipes.

Government is twisting the truism that “an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure.” Harm reduction is good but it doesn’t replace treatment. Yet that’s exactly what they’re doing. It’s like handing out Band-Aids to folks who need stitches and antibiotics. Harm reduction should not be used to distract the public from noticing the lack of treatment.

What disturbs me most is that I believe these people know better. Part of appeasing their guilty consciences is to narrow the definition of harm reduction and say that it applies primarily to preventing the diseases contracted and transmitted at the point of drug consumption. These harm reduction advocates are strangely silent about the countless incidents of harm before the sale, during the deal, while under the influence and while desperate for another dose.

Harm reduction without the possibility of harm elimination through treatment is no comfort for families of addicts lost to the drug or victims of addicts desperate to lie, cheat or steal their way to their next rock.

By the time addicts approach me about quitting, they’ve likely tempted death for a while. It’s not unusual for them to have lost their kids, been disowned by their families, perpetrated and suffered a wide variety of crimes, considered or attempted suicide and lost almost all hope of change.

So, when someone finally comes for help, it’s sickening to hear them being told to wait for weeks or months to get into a treatment program. They come looking for harm elimination through treatment, and it’s disgusting to think that all the WRHA is prepared to offer is a harm reduction “crack kit” while they’re waiting.

I’m not opposed to the prevention of HIV and Hep C. My beef is not necessarily about what’s being offered. It’s the sickening silence about what’s being withheld.

Source:Winnipeg Sun (Manitoba, Canada) September 5, 2004 Sunday Final Edition SECTION: COMMENT; Pg. C5
Filed under: Education Sector,Social Affairs :

BY TOM BRODBECK

I finally got around to reading a so-called study on why giving out crack pipes to crack addicts is a good thing to do.

Proponents of free crack pipe kits have been telling me for days — since we found out last month that government was providing users with tools to feed their addiction — that they have studies on the benefits of taking this approach. I kept asking for the studies because I wanted to read them for myself.

Too often when groups and organizations say they have “studies” to back up what they’re pushing, the studies are either bogus or they don’t exist.

So I read one that was sent to me that was supposed to provide me with the empirical evidence that I was looking for.

And, as suspected, the study I was given — printed in the Harm Reduction Journal — is bogus.

It’s called “Does harm reduction programming make a difference in the lives of highly marginalized, at risk drug users?”

And while it has a lot of flowery academic language about “outcomes” and “feelings,” there is no data on whether the program lowered incidences of Hep C or HIV or whether it led towards successful treatment, which is supposed to be the benefit of this approach.

The study is flawed in a number of ways, including a high drop-out rate of drug addicts who participated in the evaluation. One phase of the study began with a sample of 261 drug users in the New York City area and fell to 96 participants by the end of it.

As a result, any data coming out of that phase is skewed and almost completely useless.

The study doesn’t tell me if crack pipes or pamphlets were given out. It doesn’t tell me how many received clean needles, if they kept them, used them, shared them, whatever. It doesn’t really tell me anything other than what some users perceive their condition to be based on 10 indicators.

I want to see a study where they can show me how free crack pipes and how-to pamphlets reduce the incidents of disease. This study doesn’t show that. Not even close. In fact, the authors themselves admit that “almost no research has tried to establish appropriate measures of harm reduction and evaluate its worth.”

And “little empirical research has been made available to judge its merits.” So what we have is a lot of “we think this” and “we believe that.”

And that doesn’t tell me anything.

Also, what no one seems to have studied is what impact this has on users in terms of encouraging drug use. I want to see empirical evidence that it helps users, including preventing the spread of disease.

But then I want to weigh that against how this tacit approval of doing drugs “in a safe manner” (as if there’s a safe way to smoke crack) encourages people to keep doing drugs or even start experimenting.

Proponents of this method tell you that they’re not encouraging people to do drugs, they’re just giving them survival skills.

But when I ask them, “how do you know you’re not encouraging some of them?” they say they don’t know.

So then how do you know that you’re not doing more harm than good?

They don’t know.

This is what happens when social workers hijack the political process. You get experimental public policy that is so out of whack with reality that it becomes a laughing stock.

Governments accept the untested policies because they want to be “forward thinking,” whatever that means. And the public gets really bad policy.

To date, I haven’t heard from a single user, reformed or otherwise, who thinks giving out free crack kits and how-to pamphlets is a good idea.

I’ve heard from many of them. And not one said this type of approach is beneficial.

The people who claim it’s beneficial are the ones in the health-care field who like to think they’re doing cutting-edge work. This is “progressive,” they say. Right.

I say show me the evidence. Show me the money. Show me how giving out crack pipes helps addicts.

Because so far, I still haven’t seen a shred of evidence to back up that claim.

I doubt I ever will.

Source:Winnipeg Sun (Manitoba, Canada) September 5, 2004
Filed under: Education Sector :

BY TOM BRODBECK, CITY COLUMNIST

Remember the free crack pipe kits government is giving out to drug addicts?

Now they’re handing out detailed instructions — with diagrams — on how to shoot up, including where to stick the needle, how to prepare your drugs and neat tips on how to strain dope from one syringe to another.

It’s a pamphlet called Prevent and Protect Yourself & Others: Safer Injection Drug Use, and it’s handed out to addicts at clinics and other establishments.

“Choosing a Vein,” reads one header, where they give advice on how best to inject drugs into your system. “Rotate sites,” it says. “Try to use new sites, too much of one vein will cause it to collapse.” You may want to test your shots first before you take a full dose of dope if you’re “using a new dealer,” it continues. “Find a comfortable position, use tourniquet to tie off vein … insert needle into the vein at 45 degree angle. Bevel up. Untie tourniquet. Inject slowly.”

And my favourite:

“Give your veins a holiday once in a while!” it says. “Smoke, snort or eat your drugs instead.”

Wow. I am a wild party. How about: “Give your veins a holiday, don’t use drugs for a while.”

TOO MUCH SENSE

I guess that makes too much sense. I thought the crack kits were bad. This pamphlet takes the cake.

Nowhere in the brochure does it give tips or advice on how to quit drugs.

Instead, it gives you the ins and outs of drug use and it reads more like a Suzy Creamcheese homemaker magazine than medical advice on how to avoid contracting a disease.

“Split up drugs when dry,” it says. “Use your own spoon, filter and water.” “Don’t shoot up alone,” it says. What, bring a friend?

Don’t inject the needle into your head or wrists, it says. That’s good advice. But other parts of your body are OK, it says.

“If surface veins in the arms are good, use them but rotate sites regularly,” it recommends. “The veins on the back of the hand and the top of the foot are fragile, so inject slowly. It will hurt.”

I don’t get this much detail from my dentist on how to brush and floss properly. This is all part of some new-age approach to dealing with drug addicts called “harm reduction.”

It’s the same philosophy behind the crackpot idea of handing out free crack pipes to crack heads. We’re supposed to coddle the addicts and “bring them into the fold.”

When they’re “ready” for treatment — after we’ve given them five years supply of crack pipes, needles and how-to manuals — we then ask them if they would like treatment. Aren’t they dead by then?

What’s interesting is that every recovering addict who has called me over the past few days — in response to my columns on the subject last week — is against this approach. Most of them are enraged that government is doing this and they say all it does is encourage drug use and make it more difficult to quit.

Every time I ask proponents of this harm-reduction approach for scientific evidence to back up their claims that it helps reduce the spread of disease and does not encourage drug use, I never get any.

That’s because it doesn’t exist.

Source:Winnipeg Sun (Manitoba, Canada) September 1, 2004 Sunday Final Edition SECTION: COMMENT; Pg. C3
Filed under: Education Sector :

Regarding cannabis cafes, I work as a charge nurse at a local psychiatric hospital and I and my colleagues have noticed a considerable increase in the number of people presenting with conditions caused by, or aggravated by cannabis use.

This increase coincides with the time that Worthing has been home to cannabis cafes.

I would be interested to see what the figures would be from an official audit of admissions to Meadowfield during the last 12 months compared to a previous period.

I feel that this cost to society in terms of expensive acute in patient resources, and personal cost to peoples Iives, is largely un remarked upon by pro cannabis campaigners.

Personally, I notice that many supporters present at court cases related to the cafes are not Worthing residents but are people with a vested interest. My impression is that there are not many local residents keen to see cannabis cafes thriving in Worthing. For these and many other reasons I fully support police efforts to close the cafes and thank police for the work done so far.

Source:Letter to the editor of a Worthing News paper by Tony Stubbs

St Michael’s Road, Worthing

Filed under: Social Affairs :

‘Project Revitalization’ in Vallejo, California, has developed a comprehensive strategy to address alcohol and other drug related crime in the city’s worst areas. The project relies on a strong community partnership comprised of Vallejo Fighting Back Partnership, Vallejo Code Enforcement, Vallejo Chamber of Commerce, Vallejo Police Department, Vallejo Neighborhood Housing, California Employment Department, the Private Industry Council, and neighborhood associations.
By integrating neighborhood revitalization, alcohol policy, neighborhood safety, job training, and coordination of human services into a comprehensive effort, the project aims to reduce code violations and police calls for service and to improve safety and the quality of life of residents in deteriorating crime-ridden neighborhoods.

Project Revitalization is based on the following four complementary premises:

• The physical makeup of a community has an important influence on its vulnerability to crime. Physical signs of disorder and illegal activities in a neighborhood such as abandoned cars, problematic liquor stores, drug dealing, and deteriorating housing invite crime and disorder if left unchanged.
• Neighborhoods where residents have some level of commitment and shared interest in improving their environment can influence the level of crime.
• Individuals and families must personally gain from the revitalization of an area. When people are drowning in problems such as unemployment, addiction, lack of childcare, and other social service needs, it is unrealistic to expect their engagement in improving their neighborhoods.
• Problems with alcohol can and do contribute to the overall level of area deterioration and require appropriate enforcement and policy interventions.

A Five-Step Process
Revitalization is a five-step process beginning with assessment and ending with ongoing evaluation. While the following steps are presented somewhat in sequence, overlap and intentional repetition is inherent in the process.

Initial problem assessment
The project relies on a block-to-block component, which is designed to accurately determine which areas of the city are the worst hot spots for crime, violence, and physical deterioration. To accomplish this, we rely on the use of the Alcohol/Drug Sensitive Information Planning Systems (ASIPS), coupled with a Geographic Information System (GIS).
ASIPS, a planning tool developed by CLEW Associates in Berkeley, CA, engages the Vallejo Police Department to identify alcohol and drug involvement in every call for service. Officers end their calls to dispatch with a three digit alpha numeric indicator that identifies whether alcohol or drugs – both or neither – was involved in the call for service. For example, the code A11 means “alcohol in a single family detached residence.”
This simple process yields a tremendous amount of information about the nature of the call, as well as the location and setting of the event. Calls for service that are alcohol or other drug-involved are then mapped through the GIS. These maps graphically depict where crimes occur and provide project workers with the locations in the city to move to the next phase of assessment.

Additional assessment
After identifying potential hot spots, project workers visit each of the areas to assess the level of physical deterioration of housing in the surrounding environment, which often acts as a magnet for certain criminal and social problems. In the final assessment stage to select target neighborhoods, project staff speak with residents to see if they are interested in working in a revitalization process.
Staff members contact neighborhood associations – if they exist – to discuss the project. Areas are not selected unless residents invite the  project in and are committed to participating in the process.

Initial intervention
Once areas are selected, the intervention phase begins. It includes the following components:

• Law Enforcement. Often, problem residences where illicit activity occurs are part of neighborhoods that suffer from crime and physical deterioration. These locations have an effect on the willingness of neighbors to interact socially and form the social structures that can be effective in reducing problems. Therefore, it is important for law enforcement, as part of the early stages of the project, to weed out these locations and create a safe environment for residents. Part of this weeding effort involves the police in towing abandoned vehicles. This action alone creates a significant improvement in the quality of the neighborhood and begins to prove that the revitalization effort is serious about improving the quality of life for residents.

• Code Enforcement. Concurrent with the law enforcement effort, code enforcement staff engages in a residence-by-residence appraisal of building code violations.

• Community Organizing. During this stage, community organizers begin to establish relationships with residents in order to better understand each individual’s social service and employment needs.

Full implementation
As the police engage in various law enforcement activities to address crime and violence in project neighborhoods, streets become safer. This transition slowly increases the feeling of safety on the part of residents and work on forming a neighborhood association or block watch can proceed. In addition, the community organizer can deepen personal relationships with residents and begin the social service work in earnest. Residents are organized to create political pressure for stores to clean up their acts.
                      _________________________________________________________________
                          ‘Project Revitalisation’ – Vallejo  –  Project elements:

            Residents                       Code Enforcement
                Industry                              Community
                     Employment                            Housing
                            Police                                         Commerce

     ________________________________________________________________

Code enforcement staff work with homeowners and renters to bring property up to city standards. Together, they form plans about how homes can improve beyond minimum city requirements. Code enforcement is critical in this process for it holds the legal tools to cite owners that refuse to voluntarily cooperate with the revitalization process. During this stage of the intervention, all project agencies and organizations are also organizing a clean-up day during which large numbers of volunteers from all over the city work with residents to paint, haul debris, build fences, do carpentry, and cut and trim landscaping – performing essentially a neighborhood make-over.  Clean-up days include a barbecue to further cement relationships between neighbors, volunteers, and project workers.

Neighborhood stability
The final phase can last from 6 to 9 months.  After the clean-up, the community organizer steps up efforts to work with the residents to form a neighborhood group and to adopt a set of community standards to serve as the basis of how the area should be maintained in the future. The organizer also continues to work with the residents to help them get whatever services they need to improve the quality of their lives.

Project results
How is this process working? To date, work has begun in two areas of Vallejo (Alabama Street and Springs Road) and the results look promising.    The first project area – Alabama Street – was a test to determine if the process was viable. The neighborhood experienced a reduction in police calls for service and improvement in the perception of safety on the part of residents.

The second neighborhood revitalization project in Springs Road was much larger in scope than the first project. Started in November 1997, the Springs Road project is in the final stages of implementation. This ambitious and far-reaching project featured joint efforts of many partners. On its clean-up day, streets were blocked off as teams of volunteers painted, trimmed trees, rebuilt fences, swept and hauled away debris and weeds. More than 225 people signed up to work during the day. Highlights included the live broadcast of music and interviews of residents by Radio KDIA and a barbecue for all participants. In all, 22 dumpsters of trash were hauled away, totaling over 37 tons; 6 old vehicles were towed; and more than 50 residences were worked on. But the day is as much about bringing neighbors and volunteers together as a real community as it was about a clean up.

The role of policy
Alcohol policy and other policy development are critical to the long-term success of this effort. Helpful policies include:

• A conditional use permit for alcohol outlets to regulate new outlets
• An approved ordinance for alcoholic beverage establishments to regulate existing outlets
• A teen party ordinance to reduce non-commercial access of alcohol to minors
• A social nuisance ordinance to hold non-compliant property owners accountable to a standard of property maintenance and  resident conduct
• A rental inspection ordinance.

These policies help neighborhoods proactively address problem properties before they become nuisances and are part of the structural changes required to sustain the positive neighborhood changes that result from the revitalization process.  Based on early results, the revitalization project is about to move into its third and fourth neighborhoods. Ultimately the project will engage between 10 and 15 neighborhoods. Real, sustained improvements in people’s lives are the mark of success for this project. Will residents assume long-term responsibility for their environments? Can this effort reduce crime citywide? And can the project continue with the broad base of support it currently enjoys? In perhaps a year, these and other important questions will be answered.

Source: Michael Sparks – Michael is the director Of Project Revitalization. He can be reached by e-mail at SPARKS@SONJC.NET – Reported in Prevention Pipeline Sep/Oct 1998
Filed under: Social Affairs :

Leonardo DiCaprio smoking pensively on the Titanic deck is classic Marlboro Man. The swells in first class, trading cigarettes are Dunhill. The rough-and-tumble crowd in steerage rolling their own could be taken as a coded reference to the no-frills, non-additive, no-bull Winston, while Kate Winslet blowing smoke in her mother’s face is very much ‘You’ve come a long way, baby’ – Virginia Slims.” In ‘Titanic,’ smoking is sexy, social, sophisticated, genuine and rebellious, and in the end virtually everyone dies – which is the most perfect touch of all.”

Source: Malcolm Gladwell, “The Talk Of the Town, NEW YORKER. 913198 p31.
Filed under: Social Affairs :

In a small pilot study, Topiramate – a medication currently used to treat seizure disorders – has helped cocaine-addicted outpatients stay off the drug continuously for 3 weeks or more. That may not seem like a long time, but previous research has shown that outpatients who avoid relapse for 3 to 4 weeks during treatment with behavioral therapy and medication have a good chance of achieving long-term cessation. In other clinical trials Topiramate has helped prevent relapse to alcohol and opiate addiction; these new results with cocaine add to hopes that it may prove a versatile treatment medication for several drugs of abuse.

Dr. Kyle M. Kampman and colleagues at the University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine and the Veteran Affairs Medical Center in Philadelphia treated 40 crack-cocaine-smoking outpatients, mostly African American males, for 13 weeks at the University of Pennsylvania Treatment Research Center (TRC). All participants met the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4th Edition (DSM-IV) criteria for cocaine dependence. They were typical of the chronic, relapsing abusers who seek treatment at the TRC: They abused cocaine an average of 10 years, preferring crack to the powder form, and demonstrated the average level of drug-related problems. However, participants’ abuse was atypical in one way; they were on the “milder end of the addiction severity spectrum measured by cocaine withdrawal symptom severity and days of abuse and money spent on cocaine,” says Dr. Kampman. On average, participants abused cocaine 6 to 8 days and spent $300 to $500 on the drug in the month before treatment compared with the 10 to 13 days and $400 to $600 reported by most patients at the facility. Because Topiramate exacerbates cocaine withdrawal symptoms, the investigators selected patients who were able to attain at least 3 days of self-reported abstinence immediately before starting the trial and who, based on their level of addiction, were not likely to enter severe withdrawal. Dr. Kampman says that about 40 percent of patients treated at the TRC experience relatively mild withdrawal symptom severity.

After a 1-week baseline period, Dr. Kampman’s team gave Topiramate to 20 study participants, and placebo to the other 20. To avoid potential Topiramate side effects, including sedation and slurred speech, they initiated treatment with 25 mg/d and increased it by 25 mg/d every week to 200 mg/d. They maintained this maximum dose during weeks 8 through 12, then tapered to zero during week 13. The patients also received cognitive behavioral coping skills therapy twice weekly throughout the study. The researchers verified cocaine abstinence two times a week with urine tests.

By the end of the 13th week, almost 60 percent of patients taking Topiramate attained 3 or more weeks of continuous abstinence from cocaine compared with 26 percent of those taking placebo. All 40 patients showed improvement from week 1 to week 13, as reflected by lower Addiction Severity Index (ASI) scores. Patients taking the medication improved more, with average scores in the topiramate group falling by 69 percent, from 0.210 to 0.066, compared with 50 percent, from 0.162 to 0.081, in the placebo group. Dr. Kampman says the improvement in ASI scores reflects fewer days of cocaine abuse and patients’ perceptions of reduced cocaine-related problems. “Patients saw the improvement in their condition, which is an important part of recovery,” he says.

“Based on our findings and other work showing this medication’s effectiveness as a treatment for alcohol and opiate addiction, topiramate appears to have great potential as a relapse prevention medication for people who have achieved initial abstinence from cocaine,” says Dr. Kampman.

Possible Mechanisms

All addictive drugs deliver pleasurable effects by enhancing the neurotransmitter dopamine in the mesocorticolimbic pathway – areas of the brain involved in reward and motivation. Topiramate seems to change the – gamma aminobutyric acid (GABA) and glutamate. Animal studies have suggested to scientists that either activating GABA-producing neurons or blocking glutamate receptors would lessen craving in cocaine-addicted human subjects. “Topiramate does both simultaneously, a unique dual action that appears to underlie its’ promise as a relapse prevention medication,” says Dr. Kampman.

“These are preliminary results, but researchers are very excited about the potential Topiramate has shown as a treatment for a range of problems, including addiction to several drugs and some impulse control disorders,” says Dr. Frank Vocci, director of NIDA’s Division of Pharmacotherapies and Medical Consequences of Drug Abuse. In addition to its initial successes in preventing relapse in patients with alcohol, opiate, and now cocaine addiction, animal studies have suggested it may attenuate nicotine addiction. “Topiramate may prove an effective treatment for patients who are addicted to multiple drugs,” Dr. Vocci adds.

Dr. Kampman plans additional studies to further evaluate Topiramate as a treatment for cocaine addiction. In addition to confirming the present results, obtained with African American male crack smokers, the medication must be tried in other racial groups, women, and powder-cocaine abusers. Dr. Kampman and his colleagues also plan to study Topiramate therapy for patients with coexisting cocaine and alcohol addiction – a group that comprises half of people treated for cocaine abuse.
• Kampman, K.M., et al. A pilot trial of topiramate for the treatment of cocaine dependence. Drug and Alcohol Dependence 75(3):233-240, 2004.

Source: Lori Whitten, NIDA NOTES Staff Writer; Volume 19, Number 6 (May 2005)
Filed under: Cocaine,Treatment and Addiction :

Thousands of middle-aged professionals who experimented with drugs during their student days will be warned in a major government health campaign this autumn that they may be infected with hepatitis C.

It is thought that up to 400,000 British people may be carrying the potentially fatal virus without knowing it, because there is such a long delay between infection and symptoms appearing.

Ministers have decided to go ahead with a national public awareness campaign in September, warning that anyone who has ever injected drugs, particularly sharing a needle, used straws to sniff cocaine or had a blood transfusion before 1991, is at risk and should consider having a blood test. However, they are worried about causing mass panic and want to adopt a ‘softly-softly’ approach by focusing on the treatment available for the disease, rather than its potential consequences.

The co-ordinators are hoping to find a celebrity who has been infected with the virus to spearhead the campaign, but so far those approached have declined publicity, such is the embarrassment associated with the condition. The general public view about hepatitis C is that only hardened drug addicts are at risk, but increasingly doctors are seeing patients who have been infected after just one or two injections.

The virus is passed on through blood-to-blood contact, and those at risk also include people who had a blood transfusion before blood screening was brought in 13 years ago. Sexual transmission, tattooing and piercing are the other possible methods of transmission.

At present only 2,000 people a year are treated for hepatitis C on the NHS, but estimates of the numbers infected in the UK vary from around 0.4 per cent of the population, some 240,000, to 1 per cent, some 600,000.

It is potentially fatal, but effective new antiviral drugs can cure between 50 to 80 per cent of sufferers who have a chronic form of the disease. Of those who carry hepatitis C, about 80 per cent go on to develop a chronic infection in the liver, and about one-fifth of these will develop serious liver disease.

However, many people do not know they are carriers until they have serious symptoms such as severe liver pain. Many of those at risk will be people who experimented with drugs in their youth. Charles Gore, chief executive of the Hepatitis C Trust, said: ‘How do you reach the man on the street, who might have had a blood transfusion 20 years ago, or who might have injected drugs in his youth. and warn him that he could be wandering around with this virus?’

People can have the disease for 20 years or more before they develop symptoms, which means those who experimented at college might not realise the risks.

‘Typically, it might be someone who didn’t know how to inject drugs into the vein and who borrowed a syringe from someone who was more experienced. The virus can then be passed directly into the bloodstream.’

Gore added: ‘Between 1975 and 1985, in particular, there was a huge experimentation with drugs. It was before the Aids crisis, no one was aware of the dangers of blood-borne viruses, and many more were injecting than was commonly supposed.’

Gore, who backs the government’s efforts, says that Britain is far behind other European countries in identifying patients. ‘It is hard to get people to admit that they might be at risk. It involves them owning up to their past.’

The chair of the Department of Health’s advisory group on hepatitis, Professor Howard Thomas, re-iterated the warning that patients don’t have to be drug addicts to be at risk. ‘Many of those infected will be people in influential positions who dabbled with drugs years ago while at college,’ he told the Health Service Journal last week. While admitting there is more to be done in making GPs aware of the disease, he said that they have now taken the first steps in setting up a national system of clinical centres for hepatology, or liver disease.

The first signs of the disease are not easy to spot. They commonly include fatigue and aching joints, which are fairly usual for people in their middle age. Patients also experience differing degrees of pain. Some have a mild form of the virus and are in acute pain, others have serious liver damage before they realise anything is wrong.

Ministers, highly aware of how the HIV campaign in the Eighties scared a generation of people, want to take a more ‘softly-softly’ approach. They started last week by sending out an action plan to all GPs and health professionals.

A spokeswoman for the Department of Health would say little about the campaign, other than to state that an outside consultancy firm had been brought in to work on strategy. ‘We will have a public awareness campaign, but in order not to get people panicked, you have to do it in stages, so the first stage is to make the professionals aware of the potential problems.’

  For more information, call the Hepatitis C Trust’s helpline on 0870 200 1200.

Source: Jo Revill, health editor Sunday July 4, 2004 The Observer
Filed under: Drug use-various effects,Health :

A comprehensive report on smoking and health released by the U.S. Surgeon General finds that smoking causes diseases in nearly every organ of the body.

When the first Surgeon General’s report on smoking was published 40 years ago, it concluded that smoking was a definite cause of cancers of the lung and larynx in men and chronic bronchitis in both men and women. Later reports concluded that smoking caused cancers of the bladder, esophagus, mouth and throat; cardiovascular diseases; and reproductive effects.

The new report, “The Health Consequences of Smoking: A Report of the Surgeon General,” finds that cigarette smoking is also linked to leukemia, cataracts, periodontitis, pneumonia, acute myeloid, abdominal aortic aneurysm, and cancers of the cervix, kidney, pancreas, and stomach.

“We’ve known for decades that smoking is bad for your health, but this report shows that it’s even worse than we knew,” said U.S. Surgeon General Richard Carmona. “The toxins from cigarette smoke go everywhere the blood flows. I’m hoping this new information will help motivate people to quit smoking and convince young people not to start in the first place.”

According to the report, smoking kills an estimated 440,000 Americans each year. Furthermore, the economic toll linked to smoking is $157 billion each year, with $75 billion spent on direct medical costs and $82 billion in lost productivity.

“We need to cut smoking in this country and around the world,” said HHS Secretary Tommy Thompson. “Smoking is the leading preventable cause of death and disease, costing us too many lives, too many dollars, and too many tears. If we are going to be serious about improving health and preventing disease, we must continue to drive down tobacco use. And we must prevent our youth from taking up this dangerous habit.”

Source:“The Health Consequences of Smoking: A Report of the Surgeon General,” May 2004
Filed under: Health,Nicotine :

LONDON (Reuters) – People with serious drug and alcohol abuse problems are linked to about a quarter of all violent crimes but many could be avoided with better treatment, scientists said on Friday.

They found that 16 percent of crimes such as murder, robbery, assault and rape in Sweden between 1988-2000 were committed by people who had been discharged from hospital for alcohol misuse and 10 percent were associated with drug abusers.“It is likely you will find the same sort of figures in Western Europe and North America,” Seena Fazel, of the University of Oxford, said in an interview. Fazel and Martin Grann, of the Karolinska Institute in Stockholm, studied the country’s national crime register and compared it with hospital discharges of people diagnosed with alcohol and drug misuse and psychoses.

 

Few countries, apart from Scandinavian nations, have such detailed population-based registers which are needed to conduct such a study.In addition to alcohol, abuse of amphetamines and opiates such as heroin, and use of multiple drugs were linked to the most violent crimes. “There needs to be more integration between the criminal justice system and mental health services because of this close association between crime and people who leave hospital with drug and alcohol problems,” said Fazel, who reported his findings in the British Medical Journal.

 

“Using resources to treat people with these problems could be cost effective in terms of crime reduction,” he added.

In Britain alone, drug related crimes cost the criminal justice system about 1 billion pounds ($1.8 billion) annually. Fazel suggested that opportunities for treatment should be considered if a person with a history of alcohol or drug abuse has been convicted of committing a violent crime.

“Probation officers and mental health professionals should continue to work more closely,” he added.

Source: © Reuters website. Author Fazel reported in British Medical Journal 2004.
Filed under: Crime/Violence/Prison :

NEW YORK (Reuters Health) – Watching a favorite movie star smoke appears to encourage teen girls to adopt the habit themselves, according to new findings released Tuesday.

Investigators found that girls who said their favorite celebrity was someone who had smoked in at least two recent movies were almost twice as likely to start smoking within the next three years as girls whose favorite stars did not smoke in films.

“Really, smoking in movies is just an effective form of marketing,” study author Dr. John Pierce told Reuters Health .

Pierce, based at the University of California in San Diego, added that it is also common for teens to copy their favorite stars’ clothing, hair and jewelry. Those habits are easy to alter as styles evolve, he said, but once teens become hooked on smoking, “that is something that’s very hard to change.”

Pierce noted that the tobacco industry has argued that it does not pay for actors to smoke on screen, and actors do it simply because it makes them feel more comfortable.

If that is the case, then one could argue that the stars themselves are responsible for encouraging teens to smoke, and should be held accountable for that, Pierce noted.

“If it’s the stars, and they’re liable, then they’d better watch out,” he said.

To investigate whether watching stars smoke on-screen influences teens to do the same, Pierce and his colleagues asked 3104 never-smokers between the ages of 12 and 15 to name their two favorite female stars and two favorite male movie stars.

The researchers reviewed the stars’ movies during the past 3 years, and counted them as smokers if they puffed during at least two films. They then re-interviewed teens three years later, to see how many had started smoking.

When Pierce and his team first contacted teens in 1996, the most popular stars among teen girls were Brad Pitt, Sandra Bullock and Leonardo DiCaprio. Favorite actors for boys were Pamela Anderson, Sandra Bullock and Demi Moore. More than 40 percent of girls and 30 percent of boys had favorite stars who smoked.

Favorite stars who did not smoke on-screen included Jim Carrey, Tom Hanks and Tom Cruise.

Although girls appeared to be influenced by the smoking habits of favorite stars, boys were not, the authors report in the American Journal of Public Health.

They note that research has shown that boys tend to prefer action movies, which tend to include less smoking by stars, while girls prefer more smoke-filled romances and dramas.

Pierce explained that his team also measured each child’s susceptibility to smoking — defined as being unwilling to rule out the option of future smoking. This removed the possibility that only those who were susceptible to smoking would have a favorite star who smoked on-screen, he said.

Dr. Stanton Glantz of the University of California in San Francisco, who was not an author of the paper, noted that research shows that the more teens see people smoke, the more likely they are to pick up the habit. The latest findings suggest that policymakers should strictly limit teens’ exposure to on-screen smoking, he said.

Restricting smoking to R-rated movies would apply “the same rules that Hollywood applies to saying the F-word,” Glantz said.

SOURCE: American Journal of Public Health, July 2004.
Filed under: Nicotine,Prevention and Intervention,Youth :

“Drugs and sex are interrelated,” Dr. Porio stressed as the 2002 Young Adult Fertility and Sexuality Study 3 (YAFS 3) disclosed that the youngsters who indulge in drugs have the ‘gnawing desire’ for sex.

In fact, the YAFS 3 showed that there was a high incidence of drug use among females as it almost tripled from one percent in 1974 to 3.2 percent in 2002. The drug prevalence among females reached 19.7 percent in 2002 from 10.9 percent in 1994.

As these figures increased, Dr. Porio said that paying attention to reproductive health education is an important act that must be done right away asserting, “there’s a need to mainstream practical reproductive health education campaigns and activities.”

She also disclosed that drugs have parallel effects to the increase of crime index nowadays as 65 percent of prison inmates are in jail for drug-related crimes with 70% percent of drug-related cases filed in court.

Source: Dr. Emma Porio, professor, Ateneo de Manila University study presented at the recent national conference on “Children in Drugs: Effective Community-Based Strategies for Prevention and Demand Reduction.’’ Reported on Manila On Line August 2004
Filed under: Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth,Education :

Almost a third (29%) of Welsh girls aged 15 to 16 admit they smoke on a weekly basis, a new study by the National Public Health Service for Wales has revealed. Among boys of the same aged, 20% admitted to smoking regularly. The report examined a range of determinants of health including alcohol, drug use, socio-economic background, exercise and diet.

The South Wales Echo report includes a case study of one 28-year old who started smoking at the age of 14. She comments: “When I was 16 I was going out more and I would smoke about a pack a week. By the time I was 19 I was smoking about five packs a week. Of course I regret it now – my face is a prune! I wish I had never smoked because it’s really hard to stop and I could die of lung cancer.”

South Wales Echo, 3/8/04
Filed under: Nicotine,Youth :

Merseyside’s first non-smoking pub has registered “record breaking-profits.” The Ring O’Bells in West Kirby barred smoking in June 2003.

Since then alcohol sales have risen 60 percent and food takings have doubled. The pub’s kitchen had to be refitted to cater for the demand.

Landlord Alan Jones said: “We lost some custom, which was a concern. But our profits have proved us right.”

Source: Liverpool Echo, 18 August 2004
Filed under: Nicotine,Prevention and Intervention :

A growing number of teenagers and preteens are being treated at emergency rooms or are entering drug treatment as a result of using a highly potent type of marijuana, government officials say.

The Los Angeles Times reported April 26 that although marijuana use by youths has declined overall since the mid-1990s, the latest statistics show an increase in more serious problems related to the drug. According to federal health officials, the number of marijuana-related emergency room visits for children ages 12 to 17 more than tripled since 1994, to 7,535 in 2001, the most recent year for which figures were available.

Most of the hospital visits were for an “unexpected reaction” to the drug, while “overdose” was listed in 10 percent of the cases, “chronic effects” in 6 percent, and “accident or injury” in 4 percent.

“The stereotypes of marijuana smoking are way out of date,” said Michael Dennis, a research psychologist in Bloomington, Ill. “The kids we see are not only smoking stronger stuff at a younger age but their pattern of use might be three to six blunts — the equivalent of three or four joints each — just for themselves, in a day. That’s got nothing to do with what Mom or Dad did in high school. It might as well be a different drug.”

According to federal officials, the marijuana being taken by youngsters today is nearly twice as potent as it was in the 1980s. “There is no question marijuana can be addictive; that argument is over,” said Dr. Nora Volkow, director of the National Institute on Drug Abuse. “The most important thing right now is to understand the vulnerability of young, developing brains to these increased concentrations of cannabis.”

Source: Los Angeles Times 26 April 2004
Filed under: Cannabis/Marijuana,Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth :

Research conducted by the Harvard School of Public Health concludes that reducing marketing around college campuses would reduce binge drinking among college students, Reuters reported Sept. 12.

For the study, researchers went to alcohol-serving establishments near 118 U.S. college campuses to determine if there was a link between drinking habits and marketing promotions or advertising. Visits were made to 830 bars, restaurants, and nightclubs and 1,684 liquor stores and other retailers.

The researchers found that campuses with a high number of places either selling beer in volume packages or featuring frequent price promotions had the highest rates of binge drinking.

“It’s not just the advertising dollars. It’s the five-cent and 25-cent beers, it’s the extra pitcher of beer for a penny, it’s the $5 refillable cup. It’s not simply that these things make people drink, but that they make people drink much more,” said Henry Wechsler, lead researcher and director of Harvard’s college alcohol studies program.

The researchers concluded that binge drinking among college students could be limited by controlling the marketing of beer and other alcoholic beverages near campuses.

“You’re not going to make great headway with college binge drinking unless you address the issue of the alcohol environment that envelopes most colleges,” said Wechsler.

The study’s findings were met with criticism from the American Beverage Institute, a lobbying group that represents chain restaurants. The organization said alcohol problems on college campuses are a result of “abusers.”

“What they’re really looking for is a reduction of drinking among all Americans, including responsible adults,” said American Beverage Institute Executive Director John Doyle.

Source American Journal of Preventive Medicine.Sept. 2004
Filed under: Alcohol,Prevention and Intervention,Youth :

According to a new report, more teens first try marijuana in June and July than any other months of the year. To help parents prevent their teen from using marijuana this summer, the Office of National Drug Control Policy’s (ONDCP) National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign, the YMCA of the USA, and the American Camping Association kicked off this year’s “School’s Out” initiative.

The Media Campaign is offering new action-oriented advice and resources to help parents keep teens drug-free once school is out; a summer drug-free checklist, a summer calendar with suggested activities, and an interactive self-rating tool (Does Your Summer Plan Stand the Heat?). These resources are available on the Campaign’s Web site for parents at www.TheAntiDrug.com/SchoolsOut.

Source:www.TheAntiDrug.com/SchoolsOut.
Filed under: Cannabis/Marijuana,Parents,Prevention and Intervention,Youth :

Australian researchers have found that one in three teenagers who smoke marijuana become psychologically dependent on the drug by their early 20s, the Independent reported April 1.

But the study also found that the dependence is mental, rather than physical. In examining marijuana dependence among 1,601 20- and 21-year-olds, the researchers found that the key factor in becoming dependent was frequency of use.

Source: Coffey, C., Carlin, J., Lynskey, M., Li, N., & Patton, G. (2003) Adolescent precursors of
cannabis dependence: findings from the Victorian Adolescent Health Cohort Study.
 British Journal of Psychiatry, 182: 330-336. April 2003
Filed under: Addiction,Cannabis/Marijuana,Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth :

Wednesday, June 20, 2001 – When I say, “Been there! Done that!” I ain’t talking through my hat. At 3 a.m. Sunday, I read an article about the insanity of Colorado’s new medical marijuana law. (Before continuing, I think I should become anonymous. So forget my byline.)

This is not a confessional, and I want to make it clear that I abhor the use of illegal drugs, especially marijuana. It leads people – especially children and teenagers – to believe it is harmless. It truly is a gateway drug.

I took a “hit” from a joint years ago, when I was in college. As opposed to some, I did inhale. Yucksy! As a cigarette smoker, a habit begun at an earlier age, I found the taste was worse than terrible. Also, it was a “downer.” I liked the “upper” I got from nicotine.

Three days after I received my medical degree from Ohio State University, I said goodbye to Columbus, Ohio, and left for New York City.

I have an old snapshot of me partying on fashionable East 80th Street. I was trying to get a drink while everyone else was high on pot, heroin, or cocaine. You see, in those days, the “law” didn’t care about us black folks using drugs.

I visited a barmaid friend at her apartment. She had a pile of marijuana on the table and was rolling joints to sell. I castigated her for exposing me to arrest if her place was raided, and to the possibility of losing my medical license. Selling drugs was still against the law.

Years later, around 1969, I went to a mansion in Sausalito, Calif., with friends. This time I was with upper-class white folks who were zonked out on marijuana, heroin and the most popular drug of that time, LSD. There was not a drink in the house. Disgusted, I napped in a gorgeous bedroom until we piled into a windowless van to return to San Francisco. Back then, the “law” didn’t care about you, either, if you had money and smoked in the privacy of your home.

Even before I became a psychiatrist, my sub-specialty was the treatment of alcohol and drug addiction. Sometimes I was successful with alcohol addiction. I was mostly unsuccessful with drugs.

While in general practice in Harlem, I attempted to treat a young black teacher, a user of pot and heroin. Naively, I thought his sincerity and my treatment would pull him through. No way! Both of us lost.

A musician friend from Washington, D.C., stopped by my office one day and begged me for Dolophine (methadone), saying he had to have a fix. He left crying, partly from my refusal to do so and partly from cold-turkey withdrawal from heroin. I knew he smoked pot, but I was surprised he was a doper. The next day, he was found in his hotel room, dead from an overdose of something he’d bought on the street. Years later, I was confronted by his son, who quietly but angrily accused me of killing his father.

During my tour of duty in Vietnam, I spent most of my time setting up drug treatment programs for heroin addicts, from the DMZ to the Mekong Delta. The military had ignored the fact that approximately 70 percent of soldiers entering Vietnam were already using marijuana. How easy it was to make the transition to smoking pure heroin, which was readily available in that country, often sold by Vietnamese children for $3 an ampule. By January 1971, we were sending 6,000 troops per month back to the United States for addiction to heroin.

After years of research, I have concluded that you can, in fact, become addicted to marijuana. The friend who had taken me to the mansion in Sausalito all those years ago had denied that pot was addictive, or that it could lead to the use of harder drugs. Recently, when we spoke by phone, she admitted that she had been wrong. Although successful in her profession, she had never been able to give up marijuana.

The use of marijuana for any reason should never be legalized, medically or otherwise. Prohibition of alcohol could not work because it is part of our culture. If we legalize marijuana, it too will become part of our culture.

Clotilde Bowen is a physician, a psychiatrist and a retired U.S. Army colonel.

Source: The Denver Post 06-19-01
Filed under: Effects of Drugs,Social Affairs :

Marijuana is now the most valuable agricultural product in Canada, finishing ahead of wheat, cattle and timber, the Guardian reported Nov. 4.

According to Forbes magazine, marijuana cultivation is generating $7 billion in sales annually in British Columbia alone. Even higher revenues are expected over the coming years.

“Canadian dope, boosted by custom nutrients, high-intensity metal-halide lights, and 20 years of breeding, is five times as potent as what Americans smoked in the 1970s,” according to Forbes.

Forbes said the Canadian marijuana business has become strong because the growers are “not a small coterie of drug lords who could be decimated with a few well-targeted prosecutions, but an army of ordinary folks.”

Furthermore, relaxed marijuana laws in the country have resulted in increased confidence in the industry.

Source: Forbes magazine. June 2003
Filed under: Canada :

White House drug czar John Walters said high-potency marijuana coming from Canada is causing an increase in marijuana-related emergency-room cases in the U.S., “Canada is exporting to us the crack of marijuana and it is a dangerous problem,” Walters said. “We need to have political leadership in Canada that recognizes the problem. Addiction is going to spread in Canada dramatically. It has in many places.”

Walters blamed Canada’s more relaxed attitude towards marijuana and an increase in hydroponically-grown marijuana, which is grown in nutrient-rich solutions rather than soil, for the growing number of ER cases. Walters said such marijuana contains 20 to 30 percent of psychoactive Delta-9-Tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), compared with 1 percent THC of marijuana from the 1960s and 1970s.

“It is extremely dangerous. It is one of the reasons why we believe we have seen a doubling of emergency-room cases involving marijuana in the last several years from 60,000 to 120,000,” Walters said.

Despite U.S. criticism, Canadian Prime Minister Paul Martin said he plans to proceed with his strategy to decriminalize possession of small amounts of marijuana.

Source: Source:Reuters report April 14. 2004
Filed under: Drug Specifics,Effects of Drugs,Legal Sector :

A Health Canada survey finds that more 12- to 19-year-old Canadians smoke marijuana regularly than use tobacco, putting use of the drug at the highest level in 25 years, the Ottawa Citizen reported Oct. 29.

“Research we have conducted on 12- to 19-year-olds shows us that marijuana has gone mainstream and is well integrated into teen lifestyle,” said Linda Dabros, a special adviser to Health Canada’s director general of drug strategy.

According to the survey of 1,250 teens, 34 percent of 12- to 19-year-olds said they had smoked marijuana more than once, while 22 percent of teens said they smoke cigarettes regularly.

“Youth rates are going up and are at levels that we haven’t seen since the late ’70s, when rates reached their peak,” said Richard Garlick, a spokesman for the Canadian Centre for Substance Abuse.

Canada is currently considering a measure that would decriminalize marijuana.

Source:The Ottawa Citizen reported Oct. 29.2004.
Filed under: Cannabis/Marijuana,Youth :

Marijuana’s active ingredient may form the basis for new antiviral drugs that fight cancer-causing herpes viruses.

Professor Peter Medveczky, MD, of the University of South Florida’s medical microbiology and immunology department, and H. Lee Moffitt Cancer Center &Research Institute in Tampa, and colleagues worked on the study.

Their report appears in the Sept. 15 issue of the journal BMC Medicine.

Key IngredientThe researchers focused on marijuana’s active ingredient, delta-9-tetrahydrocannibol (THC).

 

In tissue culture tests, THC blocked the reactivation of various types of herpes viruses. Infection with herpes virus is recurrent and lifelong. The virus lies dormant in nerve tissue in infected people after symptoms have gone away. Later the virus can reactivate itself leading to an increasing number of viruses and causing another symptomatic infection.

In the study, researchers tested THC against various herpes viruses including Kaposi’s sarcoma-associated herpes virus (KSHV) and Epstein-Barr virus.

Kaposi’s sarcoma, prevalent among people with AIDS and a common form of cancer in Africa, stems from KSHV.

Cancers of cells from the immune system such as Burkitt’s lymphoma and Hodgkin’s disease are associated with Epstein-Barr virus, a member of the herpes virus family.

In the presence of THC, cells infected with the viruses couldn’t reactivate.

THC may interfere with a gene called ORF50, which is found in these herpes viruses, say the researchers. This gene helps turn on the virus’s machinery that is involved with reactivating the virus; it also helps start viral replication.

Not a Fix for HerpesThe researchers also tested THC on herpes simplex-1, which causes cold sores. It didn’t work.

 

THC appears to specifically work against herpes viruses that cause these tumors — gamma herpes viruses.

New Drugs Ahead?The findings may lead to the development of new drugs that thwart cancer-causing herpes viruses from reactivating, say the researchers.

 

Any new antiviral drugs based on THC would not have marijuana’s psychoactive effects.

The next step is testing THC’s benefits on lab animals.

No Pot PrescriptionAccording to a news release, Medveczky says that since THC can suppress the immune system, smoking marijuana might do more harm than good to patients infected with these viruses who often have weakened immune systems.

 

“Our findings do not recommend that people take pot to prevent or treat cancers associated with gamma herpes viruses,” says Medveczky in the news release.

SOURCES: WebMD Medical News Reviewed By Brunilda Nazario, MD
on Tuesday, September 14, 2004. Medveczky, P. BMC Medicine, Sept. 15, 2004.
News release, BioMed Central. By Miranda Hitti
Filed under: Marijuana and Medicine :

An Alabama doctor who lost a brother to methamphetamine addiction has formed a support group called “After he died, I started looking into it as a physician, as a scientist”, said Dr. Mary Holley, an obstetrician in Albertville. “What is this drug that destroyed his life in just two years?”

Holley formed the group last year and there now are chapters in Tennessee, Georgia, Oklahoma, Missouri, and Ohio.

The group works with churches to form addiction-support groups. In addition, the MAMa website offers information that explains the dangers of meth.

“People don’t realize what this drug is doing,” Holley said. “One look at the brain scan in my pamphlets will change that attitude.”

Holley, a Christian, said a religious approach to treating drug addiction is more effective than law enforcement. “Law enforcement is helpless. They can’t possibly bust every lab. They can’t keep them in jail long enough for them to heal,” Holley said. “Education is helpless. They lack the resources and the moral authority to change the situation.”

Holley said that when speaking with young people, she found that, “20 percent of meth users are basically healthy kids who made a bad decision. About 75 percent are broken, hurting people, abused and battered as kids.

Source: Associated Press reported Aug. 28. 2004
Filed under: Methamphetamine/GHB/Hallucinogens/Oxycodone,Parents :

The 2003 Teens Partnership Attitude Tracking Study (PATS), released by the Partnership for a Drug-Free America (PDFA), says that more teens are recognizing the risks of marijuana and, as a result, may be less likely to start using the drug, according to a Feb. 25 news release from the Office of National Drug Control Policy.

The survey also found an increase in the number of teens who have seen or heard anti-drug advertisements since the National Youth Anti-Drug Media Campaign began in 1998.

According to the study, 52 percent of teens were exposed to anti-drug ads in 2003, compared with 32 percent in 1998. Furthermore, one in three teens in 2003 said they “learned a lot” about the risks of drugs from the ads, compared with one in five in 1998.

“The PATS survey reinforces earlier reports that showed an 11-percent drop in youth drug use … This research shows many understand the risks associated with marijuana use,” said John Walters, director of the ONDCP. “We hope this growing awareness will keep teens from using marijuana themselves and encourage them to take action when a friend is using.”

The survey also found that more teens are aware of the potential risks of using marijuana, such as getting in trouble with the law, losing their driver’s license, or not getting into a good college.

Source:Partnership for a Drug-Free America Tracking Study 2003
Filed under: Prevention and Intervention,Youth :

More youth entering treatment facilities in 2001 are using marijuana, according to a Jan. 29 news release from the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA).

The Treatment Episode Data Set (TEDS) for 2001 found a 49-percent increase in adolescent admissions to treatment facilities that receive public funding from 1992 to 2001. According to the data, 141,403 children ages 12-17 were admitted to treatment in 2001, compared to 95,000 in 1992.

The TEDS further found that 62 percent of the adolescent admissions in 2001 were linked to marijuana misuse, up from 23 percent in 1992.

“The increase in youth admissions to drug treatment is the continued fallout from the rise in marijuana use by young people in the 1990’s,” said SAMHSA Administrator Charles Curie. “Unfortunately, many of these young people are not getting help until they become entangled in the criminal-justice system.”

TEDS also indicated that marijuana use is beginning at an early age, with 26 percent of the adolescents admitted to treatment first using marijuana by age 12 and 56 percent by age 14.

Source: Treatment Episode Data Set for 2001. SAMHSA. USA
Filed under: Cannabis/Marijuana,Youth :

A new survey reveals that one in five mothers smoke while pregnant. The habit causes low birth-weight babies with dramatically increased chances of mental impairment, disability and sudden death as infants. Baby health charity Tommy’s conducted the poll.

Smoking is also linked to ectopic pregnancy.

Source: The Sun, September 6, 2004
Filed under: Drug use-various effects,Nicotine :

Marijuana-like drug eludes scientists; As Ricky Williams fights social anxiety disorder with marijuana, scientists are working to take advantage of the plant’s anti-anxiety properties while avoiding the drug’s side effects.

MEDICINE

Ricky Williams’ claim that marijuana helps stave off social anxiety may have scientific merit, but developing a drug that could produce similar results will take years, medical experts said Thursday.

In lab animals, higher levels of cannabinoids — the compounds found in marijuana, and which occur naturally in the brain — sometimes decrease anxiety.

Scientists are trying to develop a drug that would replicate this effect in humans. But even under the rosiest circumstances, it will take nearly a decade to bring the drug to market.

In the meantime, scientists recommend against smoking marijuana to relax.

”One of the reasons humans use marijuana is because it reduces anxiety,” said Cecilia Hillard, a professor of pharmacology at the Medical College of Wisconsin, ”On the other hand, the reason most often cited for stopping using marijuana is that it causes anxiety.”

Daniele Piomelli, the scientist who is developing the cannabinoid-based drug, is more blunt.

”Cannabis is not a very good medicine,” he said.

PROMISING TESTS

A compound Piomelli developed at the University of California at Irvine slows the breakdown of the canabinoids that occur naturally in the brain.

Tests in mice and rats suggest this may reduce anxiety without causing the memory loss, appetite increase and decrease in cognitive function associated with smoking marijuana. Human trials of the compound are slated to begin within two years, Piomelli said.

But drugs that work in mice often fail in people, and several experts said they were not aware of any studies that used marijuana to treat anxiety in humans.

Scientists following federal recommendations have studied marijuana to treat multiple sclerosis, advanced HIV and cancer-related pain. The government has approved a marijuana-like drug to treat chemotherapy-induced nausea.

It’s more difficult for psychiatrists to study marijuana.

”It’s kind of hard to do that research, because of the illegal nature of the drug,” said Dianne Chambless, a University of Pennsylvania psychologist who studies social-anxiety disorder. Chambless said therapy for social-anxiety disorder often helps patients relax by understanding that the whole world is not judging their every move – which might not be the case for a star running back like Williams. ”For most people with social anxiety everybody really isn’t watching you or judging you, but for people in his position, people really are,” she said. ”It’s a very tough position to be in.”

Source: The Miami Herald BY JACOB GOLDSTEIN; jgoldstein@herald.com mailto:jgoldstein@herald.com
 July 30, 2004 Friday F1 EDITION SECTION: A; Pg. 6
Filed under: Marijuana and Medicine :

NEW YORK (Reuters Health) – Teens whose parents abuse alcohol or drugs may be prone to having negative or risk-taking personalities, which may help identify teens with a higher risk of substance abuse, researchers report.

The results of a study of more than 500 pairs of twins found that those with a parent dependent on alcohol were more likely than their peers to have a personality marked by irritability, aggression and mistrust. Teens whose parents abused drugs showed a propensity toward risk-taking, impulsive personalities.

Substance abuse disorders are known to run in families, and, similarly, research has shown that personality is strongly influenced by genetics. The new findings, published in the April issue of the American Journal of Psychiatry, suggest that personality traits may be useful in spotting which kids are at risk of substance abuse and in designing better prevention efforts.

For instance, lead study author Dr. Irene J. Elkins told Reuters Health that adolescents who are naturally risk-takers may be more likely to start smoking, but the common prevention message that smoking is bad for your health might not make much of an impression on kids with this type of personality.

Elkins, a researcher at the University of Minnesota in Minneapolis, said she is now studying whether personality can help predict which young people will develop substance abuse problems. If so, personality traits could be used in designing better prevention programs.

For the current study, the researchers used a standard questionnaire to assess personality traits among 17-year-old twins participating in the Minnesota Twin Family Study. The teenagers and their parents were also evaluated for alcohol and drug abuse. Most (97 percent) of the parents were Caucasian.

Elkins and her colleagues found that, on average, teens with a parent who abused alcohol scored higher on measures of “negative emotionality,” a tendency toward psychological distress, nervousness, distrust of others and aggression.

Those whose parents abused drugs scored lower on measures of “constraint,” meaning they were less likely than others to be cautious, “avoid thrills” or stick with traditional values. These patterns were similar for boys and girls.

Elkins noted that while all interventions aimed at keeping kids from drinking or using drugs are well-intentioned, they are not necessarily grounded in basic research. The hope, she explained, is that research on personality can help refine prevention programs to reach the kids who are most at risk.

SOURCE: American Journal of Psychiatry, April 2004. Published Reuters Health.April 27 2004
Filed under: Prevention and Intervention :

Researchers say that two drug advances may help millions of Americans addicted to alcohol control their cravings, The drug Naltrexone, which was available in capsule form for years, is now offered as a once-a-month injection. “People came in saying that they really wanted to try this because they had a hard time remembering to take the drug on their own,” said lead researcher Dr. Henry Kranzler, a psychiatry professor at the University of Connecticut School of Medicine.

Kranzler’s study, involving 315 patients addicted to alcohol, found that the monthly version of the drug increased the total number of days that the participants abstained from consuming alcohol.

The drug Acamprosate, which is in use in Europe and awaiting approval from the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, also has showed success in studies led by Elizabeth Houtsmuller, a professor of behavioral biology at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine.

Houtsmuller’s research examined the physiologic and behavioral changes in 10 heavy drinkers who were given daily Acamprosate. The participants were given opportunities to drink during various points in the study period.

The study found that those who took Acamprosate became more sedate than usual. However, it was not clear whether this sedation would discourage repeat alcohol consumption. “It doesn’t work by altering alcohol absorption or elimination,” said Houtsmuller. “And it doesn’t appear to work by changing alcohol’s subjective effects – the alcohol ‘experience’ that people have.”

Kranzler said the medical advances, combined with psychotherapy and assistance from groups like Alcoholics Anonymous, are helping many alcoholics turn their lives around. “We see people getting better all the time,” he said.

Source: Health Day News reported July 14.2004. published in Alcoholism: Clinical and Experimental Research July 2004
Filed under: Alcohol,Treatment and Addiction :

One of the first studies to use brain scans to examine marijuana’s effects has found that smoking it may be associated with changed brain activation patterns more than a month afterward.

The study may come as a surprise to proponents of marijuana legalization, as it contradicts several previous results showing that there are no significant long-term effects of marijuana use.

Normally human memory formation is associated with a specific pattern in a part of the brain called the hippocampus. The pattern is abnormal in teenagers with a history of marijuana use, Yale University researchers found based on the study.

The marijuana users in the study also performed worse on a simple working-memory tests in which the participants heard a list of words and periodically were asked to repeat a word that was one or two words back on the list. The marijuana users had stopped taking the drug for more than one month before the tests.

Their research, published on June issue of the Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, involved seven teenagers with a history of marijuana use and 14 without such a history. The authors said the results should be taken with caution: because of the small sample size, the research is merely a “pilot study” and further studies are needed to confirm the findings.

The university’s Leslie Jacobsen and colleagues used functional magnetic resonance imaging in the research, a type of brain scan technology that registers blood flow to functioning areas of the brain. The technique is supposed to reveal which parts of the brain are active at any given time.

Source:World Science Staff; August 2004
Filed under: Brain and Behaviour,Cannabis/Marijuana,Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth :

Drug traffickers importing cocaine and ecstasy often control marijuana grow operations across the country, the RCMP says in its annual report on the drug trade in Canada. The report, released Friday, revealed several key findings on drugs last year, including:

– Marijuana grow operations are spreading to epidemic proportions in Ontario.
– The use, trafficking and production of methamphetamines, commonly called speed, is of increasing concern across Canada.
– Cocaine is entering the country more often on sailing and fishing boats, compared with past years when it was smuggled in marine containers.
– Most heroin in the Canadian market is coming from Southwest and Southeast Asia. Police were also finding heroin from Latin America more often.
– Jamaica and Guyana are the main source of cocaine destined for Canada.

Police forces have long considered marijuana grow operations a fast-spreading epidemic. Earlier this year, police across Ontario came together for the Green Tide Summit, aimed at putting a dent in pot grow houses. But linking grow houses to other drug conspiracies seems to be an emerging trend and one that’s hit close to home. In early July, Oxford Community Police revealed a two-week sting in Woodstock led to the city’s largest bust — a $1.6-million marijuana grow house in a restaurant building.

At the time, police said the grow house appeared to have been connected to a larger operation, possibly with processing labs in Toronto for Ontario distribution and export to the U.S. Two Toronto men were charged in that case. In London, police have busted 182 home-grow operations in the last two years. In most cases, the grower didn’t live in the house. For the last five years, police forces in Canada have seized an average of 1.1 million pot plants a year, a 500 per cent increase since 1993.

“Police in all provinces are reporting marijuana cultivation as one of their main drug enforcement problems,” the report said. “This criminal activity has reached levels that could be deemed epidemic in the provinces of British Columbia, Ontario and Quebec.” Clandestine speed labs are also a skyrocketing problem, especially in Perth County where in the last two years police have busted 11 labs. The RCMP report shows similar increases across the country. In 2003, police uncovered 37 speed labs, compared with two in 1998. Organized crime, which is heavily involved in the production and trafficking of methamphetamine, is blamed as one reason for the increase, the report says. Rural areas are a prime spot for the labs because chemicals used to make speed emit strong odours that can easily be detected by neighbours or police.

London police are investigating whether the detached garage of an Egerton Street home was being used as a speed lab. Police were called last Monday to investigate a smell coming the garage. Police are still waiting for Health Canada test results on the chemical they found in a sealed pail, but said they’re fairly sure it was anhydrous ammonia, one of the key ingredients in making speed. London police have found two speed labs in the last eight years.

Source:The London Free Press July 2004
Filed under: Cannabis/Marijuana :

NEW YORK (Reuters Health) – Large doses of marijuana might in rare instances lead to stroke in teenagers, according to a new report.

Although it is unusual for teens to suffer a stroke, and there have been few reports of stroke linked to marijuana use, the cases of three teenage boys suggest the association is real, researchers report.

The boys all had a similar type of stroke in a brain region called the cerebellum shortly after smoking marijuana. Their strokes could not be explained by blood clots that traveled from the heart, blood vessel inflammation or other potential causes. There may be some unique features of bingeing or sporadic use of large amounts of marijuana that might put the adolescent brain at risk, Dr. Thomas Geller of St. Louis University School of Medicine in Missouri told Reuters Health. “This is obviously very rare,” he added. Geller and his colleagues report on the cases in the April issue of the journal Pediatrics.

Past research has shown that marijuana use can lead to excessively low blood pressure, slowed heart rate, dizziness and balance problems. According to Geller and his colleagues, there have been a few reports of marijuana-associated stroke, which have all been in males between the ages of 15 and 34. In these latest cases, all of the boys showed similar symptoms shortly after smoking pot, including severe and worsening headache and problems seeing and walking. One boy had slurred speech and appeared drunk.

Two of the teens died less than 24 hours after being admitted to the hospital. Autopsies confirmed that the boys had strokes caused by disrupted blood flow to the cerebellum, as did biopsy from the third teen, who survived. All of the boys admitted to having recently smoked marijuana, and appeared to use the drug occasionally rather than regularly. The teen who survived suffered his stroke symptoms after heavy marijuana use.

There is research evidence that inexperienced marijuana users have a short-term drop in blood flow to the brain after smoking the drug, the authors note in the report. Geller said his team’s hypothesis is that irregular but high-volume use of marijuana- or a contaminant they were unable to find- might prevent the cerebellum from getting enough blood to meet its needs.

“We think that adolescents- maybe only male ones- who binge on marijuana may put themselves at a risk that they are not aware of,” Geller said.

SOURCE: Pediatrics, April 2004. Reported Reuters Health
Filed under: Cannabis/Marijuana,Drug use-various effects on foetus, babies, children and youth,Health :

New research finds that female executives in the U.K. drink more than men in similar positions, and are more likely to develop alcohol problems than women in lower positions, the BBC reported March 1.

The University College London study said the stress of competing with men for executive positions is contributing to increased drinking among women.

For the study, researchers surveyed 8,000 government employees. The men and women surveyed worked at various levels in 20 agencies in London.

The survey showed that the percentage of men with alcohol problems was the same from clerical to senior-executive levels. Women in lower-level jobs were less likely to have a drinking problem than men in similar positions. But as women advanced to senior-level positions, their drinking surpassed their male counterparts.

“It may be the stress for women of working against a glass ceiling is to blame,” said Jenny Head, a senior lecturer in epidemiology and public health at University College London, who led the research. “It may be that women feel they have to compete on an equal footing and take on male roles and behaviors.”

Head added, “People who find they put in effort and don’t feel they are getting rewards are more at risk of becoming a problem drinker. We have already shown that stressful conditions at work can lead to poorer health for people. This is just another way that stress can impact on health.”

The charity Alcohol Concern said the drinking culture among top executives should be examined. “We have to ask whether women are drinking more because they feel under pressure. But we have to ask what is the drinking culture in this organization at upper levels,” said the charity’s spokeswoman, Anne Jenkins. “Do they feel more stressed, or is it that they are drinking to keep up with their peers?”

Source: Journal Occupational Environmental Medicine March 2004
Filed under: Alcohol :

Back to top of page

Powered by WordPress